FCC ID: CKENKE2632 Solid State S-Band Marine Radar

 

1 2 3 4 5 Procedures for Starting and Exiting Chart Maintenance Using ENC Charts ARCS Charts Using C-MAP Ed.3 Charts Troubleshooting JMR-7200/9200 Series JAN-7201/9201 Marine Radar Equipment ECDIS Additional Manual for Chart Installation Preface This book is the additional manual that describes the usage of the chart of JMR-7200/9200 series Multi Function Display, JAN-7201/9201 ECDIS. To maintain the performance of the equipment, please operate it after having understood this manual thoroughly.

7ZPNA4461A i Pictorial Indication Before Operation Various pictorial indications are included in this manual and are shown on the equipment so that you can operate it safely and correctly and prevent any danger to you and / or to other persons and any damage to your property during operation. Such indications and their meanings are as follows. Please understand them before you read this manual. This indication is shown where incorrect equipment operation due to negligence may cause death or serious injuries. DANGER This indication is shown where any person is supposed to be in WARNING danger of being killed or seriously injured if the equipment is not operated correctly by neglecting this indication. CAUTION This indication is shown where any person is supposed to be injured or any proper damage is supposed to occur if the equipment is not operated correctly by neglecting this indication. The m ark represents CAUTION (including DANGE R and W ARNING). Detailed content of CAUTION (Electric Shock in the example on the left) is shown in the mark. mark represents prohibition. The Detailed content of the prohibited action (Disassembling Prohibited in the example on the left) is shown in the mark. The mark represents instruction. Detailed content of the instruction ("Disconnect the power plug" in the example on the left) is shown in the mark. Examples of Pictorial Indication Disassembling Warning label Electric shock Instruction Instruction Prohibited Prohibited There are warning labels on the equipment. Do not try to remove, break or modify the labels. ii Precautions on Operation Before reading and writing of the file by using the USB memory, confirm that there is not a computer virus in the USB memory. Otherwise they may affect other devices and may cause a malfunction. iii Do not insert the disk in the CD/DVD-ROM drive for long time. Doing so will cause damage to drive. Do not leave the USB memory in the USB port after use. Malfunctions may result. iv AIO ARCS AVCS Base CD Cell permit Chart permit Chart Maintenance C-MAP Ed.3 Data Server ENC eToken Device RPS PRIMAR Glossary

: (Admiralty Information Overlay). AIO is a digital dataset that is designed to be displayed over ENCs in ECDIS to provide additional information to the navigation published by United Kingdom Hydrographic Office (UKHO).

: (Admiralty Raster Chart Service). A raster chart published by United Kingdom Hydrographic Office (UKHO).

: (Admiralty Vector Chart Service). A vector chart published by United Kingdom Hydrographic Office (UKHO).

: Chart CD containing a complete chart data.

: A file containing an encryption key for S-63 chart. Supplied by UKHO

(AVCS), PRIMAR, and Hydrographic and Oceanographic Department of Japan Coast Guard.

: A license file for ARCS.

: Software to manage charts. Imports and updates the charts.

: (C-MAP Edition 3). A digital chart format by Jeppesen.

: Organization providing S-63 chart.

: (Electronic Navigation Chart). Meaning S-57 and S-63.

: USB dongle needed to import C-MAP Ed.3 Chart.

: (Route Planning System). Option equipment of ECDIS.

: A Norwegian company supplying charts. Publisher of encrypted charts, S-63. v RTU S-57 S-63 SA Certificate file UKHO Update CD User permit Import Update

: (Real Time Updating). C-MAP provides a service that can update CM-93/3 chart database via an E-mail.

: IHO Transfer Standard for Digital Hydrographic Data.

: IHO Data Protection Scheme.

: An electronic file certifying the supplier of S-63 chart. Required for import/update of S-63 chart.

: United Kingdom Hydrographic Office.

: Chart CD containing only updated content from Base CD. Can be used with Base CD imported.

: A user-specific code assigned by JRC. Required in using ARCS and S-63 charts.

: A procedure of enabling the chart supplied by Base CD to be displayed on ECDIS.

:A procedure of reflecting the update data supplied by Update CD on the imported chart. Hydrographic and Oceanographic Department

: Hydrographic and Oceanographic Department of Japan Coast Guard. Publisher of ENC. vi Contents Glossary ........................................................................................................................................................... v Overview Flowcharts ...................................................................................................................................... ix Section 1 Procedures for Starting and Exiting Chart Maintenance ..................................................... 1-1 1.1 Starting Chart Maintenance .................................................................................................... 1-1 1.1.1 Starting from Task Menu ..................................................................................................... 1-1 1.1.2 Starting from the RADAR Screen ....................................................................................... 1-2 1.1.3 Procedure for Starting from the ECDIS Screen ................................................................ 1-3 1.2 Exiting Chart Maintenance ...................................................................................................... 1-5 1.3 Chart Maintenance Screen Configuration ............................................................................. 1-6 Section 2 Using ENC Charts .................................................................................................................... 2-1 Importing ENC S-57/S-63 Charts, AVCS Charts and AIO Data ............................................ 2-1 2.1 2.1.1 Importing Cell Permit Files (S-63, AVCS and AIO) ............................................................ 2-2 2.1.1.1 Importing Cell Permit Files from CD/DVD Media (Automatic Import) ............. 2-2 2.1.1.2 Importing Cell Permit Files from USB Memory (Manual Import) ..................... 2-6 2.1.1.3 If a Cell Permit File Cannot Be Found (Resume by Specifying a Path) .......... 2-8 2.1.1.4 Changing a Path to Use for Automatic Import ................................................ 2-10 2.1.2 Importing Charts ................................................................................................................ 2-12 2.1.2.1 Importing Charts from CD/DVD Media (Automatic Import) ............................ 2-12 2.1.2.2 Importing Charts from USB Memory (Manual Import) .................................... 2-21 2.1.2.3 If Chart Data Cannot Be Found (Resume by Specifying a Path) ................... 2-23 2.1.2.4 Changing a Path to Use for Automatic Import ................................................ 2-25 2.1.2.5 Importing Charts by Selecting .......................................................................... 2-27 2.2 Updating Charts ..................................................................................................................... 2-30 2.3 Updating Cell Permit Files ..................................................................................................... 2-31 2.4 Using Check Status ............................................................................................................... 2-32 2.4.1 How to Start Check Status ................................................................................................ 2-32 2.4.2 Configuration of the Check Status Window .................................................................... 2-33 2.4.2.1 Status List Window ............................................................................................ 2-33 2.4.2.2 Log Window ........................................................................................................ 2-34 2.5 Checking Chart Update History ............................................................................................ 2-36 2.5.1 Checking from Chart Maintenance ................................................................................... 2-36 2.5.2 Checking from ECDIS screen ........................................................................................... 2-38 2.6 Checking the Contents of Contracts .................................................................................... 2-40 2.6.1 Checking the Expiry Dates of Cell Permits Having Contract ........................................ 2-41 2.6.2 Checking Licence information .......................................................................................... 2-41 2.6.3 Checking SA Certificate Files ........................................................................................... 2-42 2.6.4 Reimporting SA Certificate Files ...................................................................................... 2-43 2.6.5 Checking Chart Cell Information ...................................................................................... 2-44 2.7 Deleting ENC Charts .............................................................................................................. 2-45 Section 3 ARCS Charts ............................................................................................................................. 3-1 3.1 About ARCS Charts ................................................................................................................. 3-1 Importing ARCS Charts ........................................................................................................... 3-2 3.2 3.2.1 Importing Chart Permit Files ............................................................................................... 3-2 3.2.1.1 Importing Chart Permit Files from CD/DVD Media (Automatic Import) .......... 3-3 3.2.1.2 Importing Chart Permit Files from USB Memory (Manual Import) .................. 3-7 3.2.1.3 If a Chart Permit File Cannot Be Found (Resume by Specifying a Path) ..... 3-10 3.2.1.4 Changing a Path to Use for Automatic Import ................................................ 3-12 3.2.1.5 Manually Entering a Chart Permit ..................................................................... 3-14 3.2.2 Importing Charts ................................................................................................................ 3-16 3.2.2.1 Importing Charts from CD/DVD (Automatic Import) ....................................... 3-16 3.2.2.2 Importing Charts from USB Memory (Manual Import) .................................... 3-23 3.2.2.3 If Chart Data Cannot Be Found (Resume by Specifying a Path) ................... 3-25 3.2.2.4 Changing a Path to Use for Automatic Import ................................................ 3-27 3.2.2.5 Importing Charts by Selecting .......................................................................... 3-29 3.3 Updating Charts ..................................................................................................................... 3-32 3.4 Updating Chart Permits ......................................................................................................... 3-33 3.5 Using Check Status ............................................................................................................... 3-34 3.5.1 How to Start Check Status ................................................................................................ 3-34 3.5.2 Configuration of the Check Status Window .................................................................... 3-35 3.5.2.1 Status List Window ............................................................................................ 3-35 3.5.2.2 Log Window ........................................................................................................ 3-36 3.6 Checking Chart Update History ............................................................................................ 3-38 vii 4.3 4.1 Dynamic Licensing Service 3.6.1 Checking from Chart Maintenance ................................................................................... 3-38 3.6.2 Checking from ECDIS screen ........................................................................................... 3-40 3.7 Checking the Contents of Contracts .................................................................................... 3-41 3.7.1 Displaying Check Status ................................................................................................... 3-41 3.7.2 Checking the Expiry Dates of Chart Permits Having Contract ...................................... 3-42 3.7.3 Checking ARCS User Permit ............................................................................................. 3-42 3.7.3.1 Checking the Check Status ............................................................................... 3-42 3.7.3.2 Checking in the ARCS Path Entry Window ..................................................... 3-43 3.7.4 Checking the Detailed Information of Chart Permits Having Contract ......................... 3-44 3.7.5 Checking Chart Cell Information ...................................................................................... 3-44 3.8 Deleting ARCS Charts ........................................................................................................... 3-45 Section 4 Using C-MAP Ed.3 Charts ....................................................................................................... 4-1

............................................... 4-1 4.1.1 Introduction .......................................................................................................................... 4-1 4.1.2 Activating Dynamic Licensing ............................................................................................ 4-2 4.2 About C-MAP Ed.3 Charts ....................................................................................................... 4-3 4.2.1 C-MAP Ed.3 Checkout (Static Licence) .............................................................................. 4-3 4.2.2 C-MAP Ed.3Checkout (Dynamic Licence) ......................................................................... 4-5 Importing C-MAP Ed.3 ............................................................................................................. 4-7 4.3.1 Importing C-MAP Ed.3 Charts ............................................................................................. 4-7 4.3.2 Importing Licences ............................................................................................................ 4-13 4.3.2.1 In the Case of Static Licence............................................................................. 4-13 4.3.2.2 In the Case of Dynamic Licence ....................................................................... 4-17 4.3.3 Checking Chart Display ..................................................................................................... 4-24 4.4 Updating C-MAP Ed.3 Charts ................................................................................................ 4-27 4.4.1 Updating C-MAP Ed.3 Charts by Using CD (or DVD) ...................................................... 4-27 4.4.2 Updating C-MAP Ed.3Charts with RTU ............................................................................ 4-30 4.5 Reporting the Use of Dynamic License ............................................................................... 4-37 4.5.1 Checking the Next Report Date ........................................................................................ 4-37 4.5.2 Reporting the Use of Dynamic License ........................................................................... 4-38 4.6 Checking the License ............................................................................................................ 4-39 4.6.1 In the Case of Static License ............................................................................................ 4-39 4.6.2 In the Case of Dynamic License ....................................................................................... 4-41 4.7 Checking the Update List ...................................................................................................... 4-43 4.8 Deleting C-MAP Ed.3 Charts and Licence ........................................................................... 4-46 4.9 Checking eToken Devices ..................................................................................................... 4-49 4.9.1 Checking the System ID of Chart Manager ..................................................................... 4-49 4.10 Using Check Status ............................................................................................................... 4-51 4.10.1 How to Start Check Status .............................................................................................. 4-51 4.10.2 Configuration of the Check Status Window .................................................................. 4-52 Section 5 Troubleshooting ....................................................................................................................... 5-1 Reference Document 1: Alert Information of S-57/S63 Chart ................................................................ 5-7 Reference Document 2: Alert Information of ARCS Chart..................................................................... 5-9 Reference Document 3: Method for Cleaning by the lens cleaner for CD/DVD drive ....................... 5-12 Reference Document 4: Method for Selecting Chart ............................................................................ 5-14 Reference Document 5: C-MAP Chart Manager .................................................................................... 5-17 Reference Document 6: Re-Import the ENC chart, ARCS chart .......................................................... 5-23 viii Overview Flowcharts 1. Importing/Updating ENC Cell Permit For more information, please see 2.1.1 Importing Cell Permit Files (S-63, AVCS and AIO) or "2.3 Updating Cell Permit Files". Task menu Select Chart Maintenance Select Import/Update Licence file Select ENC Select method for reading cell permit

[Browse]

Select path

[OK]

[Select Path]

(Display file undetected)

[Home]

(Display error message)

[Automatically]

[Manually]

Select path

[OK]

(Search cell permit file)

(Read cell permit file) File undetected Error occurred

(Complete reading of cell permit file) Completed ix 2. Importing/Updating ENC Chart For more information, please see 2.1.2 Importing Charts or "2.2 Updating Charts". Task menu Select Chart Maintenance Select Import/Update charts Select ENC Select method for reading chart

[Automatically]

[Manually]

[Browse]

Select path

[OK]

Select path

[OK]

(Search file) File undetected

[Select Path]

(Display file undetected) Other than S-63 and AVCS S-63AVCS

(Read SA certificate file) Error occurred

(Display error message)

(Check chart file) Select method for reading chart

[All]

(Read chart

[Select]

Select chart Completed

[Import]

(Complete reading of file) Other than CD CD Check that chart continues to be read

[Yes]

Check that next CD is inserted

[OK]

[No]

[Cancel]

Completed x 3. Importing/Updating ARCS Chart Permit For more information, please see 3.2.1 Importing Chart Permit Files or 3.4 Updating Chart Permits. Task menu Select Chart Maintenance Select Import/Update Licence file Select ARCS

[Enter manually]

[Browse]

Select method for reading chart permit file

[Automatically]

[Manually]

Select path

[OK]

Enter chart permit manually

[Import]

Select path

[OK]

(Search chart permit file) File undetected

(Display file undetected)

[Select Path]

(Read chart permit file) Error occurred

(Display error message)

[Home]

(Complete reading of chart permit file) Completed xi 4. Importing/Updating ARCS Chart For more information, please see 3.2.2 Importing Charts or 3.3 Updating Charts. Task menu Select Chart Maintenance Select Import/Update charts Select ARCS Select method for reading chart

[Automatically]

[Manually]

[Browse]

Select path

[OK]

Select path

[OK]

(Search file) File undetected

[Select Path]

(Display file undetected)

(Check chart file) Select method for reading chart

[All]

(Read chart)

[Select]

Select chart

[Import]

(Complete reading of file) Other than CD CD Check that chart continues to be read

[Yes]

Check that the next CD is inserted

[OK]

[No]

[Cancel]

Completed xii 5. Importing C-MAP Ed.3 Chart For more information, please see 4.3.1 Importing C-MAP Ed.3 Charts. Task menu Insert chart data CD/DVD Select Chart Maintenance Select Import/Update charts Select C-MAP Select [Search automatically in [Databases]

tab of C-MAP Chart Manager Auto Search Import screen Select CD/DVD drive, then select

[Search]

Database detected Select database, then select

[Check signature]

(Check signature)

(Complete signature check)

[OK]

Select database, then select

[Register database]

Select Folder screen Select save destination folder

[OK]

A xiii A

(Copy database)

(Complete copy)

[OK]

Check addition of database in

[Databases] tab of C-MAP Chart Manager Completed 6. Importing C-MAP Ed.3 License (Static License) For more information, please see 4.3.2.1 In the Case of Static Licence. Task Menu Select Chart Maintenance Select Import/Update Licence file Select C-MAP Select database in [Licenses] tab of C-MAP Chart Manager Insert license file (USB memory) Select [Import from file]

Select File screen Select licence file

[Open]

(Complete reading of licence)

[OK]

Check expiry date and scope of License list in [Licenses] tab of C-MAP Chart Manager Completed xiv 7. Updating C-MAP Ed.3 Chart (Using CD/DVD Media) For more information, please see 4.4.1 Updating C-MAP Ed.3 Charts by Using CD (or DVD). Task Menu Select Chart Maintenance Select Import/Update charts Select C-MAP Insert chart data CD/DVD media Select [Update database] in [Databases]

tab of C-MAP Chart Manager

(Update chart data)

(Complete updating of chart data)

[OK]

Completed xv 8. Importing C-MAP Ed.3 License and Reporting for License (Dynamic License) For more information, please see 4.3.2.2 In the Case of Dynamic Licence, 4.4.2 Updating C-MAP Ed.3Charts with RTU or 4.5 Reporting the Use of Dynamic License. Save Update Order screen Task Menu Select Chart Maintenance Select Import/Update License file Select C-MAP Insert USB memory Select [Create update order] in [Updates]

tab of C-MAP Chart Manager Check on [All available zones] and click

[Save]

Select Folder screen Select USB memory

[OK]

(Complete saving of order file)

[OK]

Remove USB memory Send order file saved in USB memory to mail address of RTU server Mail sent

(Perform automatic process in RTU server and return mail) Mail received Save answer file returned from RTU server in USB memory A Insert USB memory Select [Update from file] in [Updates] tab of C-MAP Chart Manager Select Folder screen Select USB memory

[OK]

(Update chart) Update completed Check updated chart information in the Updates filed of [Updates] tab Check Credit Rest in

[Dynamic Licensing] tab Check on [Enable Dynamic Licensing] in

[Dynamic Licensing] tab A Completed xvi Section 1 Procedures for Starting and Exiting Chart Maintenance 1.1 Starting Chart Maintenance 1.1.1 Starting from Task Menu On Task Menu, start Chart Maintenance according to the following procedure.

<Operation Panel>

1) Turn on the power by pressing the [Power] button on the operation panel.

[Power] Button Task Menu appears after a while. 2) Move the cursor and click the [Chart Maintenance] button on Task Menu.

<Task Menu>

[Chart Maintenance] Button 1-1 The Chart Maintenance screen appears.

<Chart Maintenance Screen>

Click the [x] (Close) button to return to the Task Menu. For how to start with these buttons, refer to "1.3 Chart Maintenance Screen Configuration". Caution:

The displayed Task Menu differs dependent on the machine model you use. 1.1.2 Starting from the RADAR Screen In the RADAR screen, start Chart Maintenance according to the following procedure. 1) Start Chart Maintenance on the RADAR screen by using the following procedure.

[Menu] Button 2) Click on the [Chart Maintenance] button on the Menu screen.

[Chart Maintenance] Button 1-2 The Chart Maintenance screen is displayed. When the [x] button is clicked, the RADAR screen is displayed. For how to start with these buttons, refer to 1.3 Chart Maintenance Screen Configuration. When Chart Maintenance is started from the RADAR screen, neither Import/Update Licence file nor Import/Update charts can be executed. 1.1.3 Procedure for Starting from the ECDIS Screen In the ECDIS screen, start Chart Maintenance according to the following procedure. 1) Click the [Menu] button on the ECDIS screen.

[Menu] Button 2) Change the page to the 2nd page by clicking on the page change button on the Menu screen. Page change button 1-3 3) Click the [Chart Maintenance] button in the 2nd page of the Menu screen.

[Chart Maintenance] Button The Chart Maintenance screen appears. Click the [x] button to return to the ECDIS screen. For how to start with these buttons, refer to "1.3 Chart Maintenance Screen Configuration". When Chart Maintenance is started from the ECDIS screen, neither Import/Update Licence file nor Import/Update charts can be executed. 1-4 1.2 Exiting Chart Maintenance Exit Chart Maintenance according to the following procedure. The procedure for exiting Chart Maintenance is the same for Task Menu, ECDIS screen and RADAR screen.

[x] Button 1) Click the [x] button on the Chart Maintenance screen. 1-5 1.3 Chart Maintenance Screen Configuration

<Chart Maintenance Screen>

[Import / Update charts] Button

[Check Status]

Button

[Import / Update Licence file] Button

[Import / Update Licence file]

Pressing this button moves to the Import/Update screen for the chart licence file. Import/update ENC S-63 cell permit files, AVCS cell permit files and AIO cell permit files. Import/update ARCS chart permit files. Import/update C-MAP Ed.3 licenses. 1-6

[Import / Update charts]

Pressing this button moves to the Import/Update screen for charts. Import/Update ENC S-57/S-63 charts, AVCS charts and AIO data. Import/update ARCS charts. Import/update C-MAP Ed.3 charts.

[Check Status]

Pressing this button moves to the Status screen. Displays license information. Displays a list of imported charts. Deletes charts. Displays a log recorded when importing/updating licenses and charts. 1-7 Section 2 Using ENC Charts 2.1 Importing ENC S-57/S-63 Charts, AVCS Charts and AIO Data S-63 chart, AVCS chart, AIO data in the case of use, import them after importing a cell permit file. (Perform the operations described in "2.1.1 Importing Cell Permit Files (S-63, AVCS and AIO)" and then 2.1.2 Importing Charts" in this order.) S-57 chart in the case of use, not necessary to import a cell permit. Perform the operation only of "2.1.2 Import chart". When importing/exporting files using USB memory, be sure to check for viruses on USB memory in advance. If the ECDIS is infected with a virus, it will affect other devices, leading to failures. Never leave USB memory in the USB port. Doing so may cause device failure. 2-1 2.1.1 Importing Cell Permit Files (S-63, AVCS and AIO) 2.1.1.1 Importing Cell Permit Files from CD/DVD Media (Automatic Import) The following example describes the procedure for importing cell permit files from CD/DVD media. 1) Start Chart Maintenance from Task Menu. 2) In the Home window, click the [Import / Update Licence file] button.

<Home Window>

3) In the Chart Category Selection window, click the [ENC] button.

<Chart Category Selection Window>

4) Insert CD/DVD medium on which the cell permit file is stored and wait until import becomes ready. 2-2 5) In the Cell Permit File Import Selection Window, click the [Automatically] button. Search a cell permit file from the path shown in from the following path and start importing it.

<Cell Permit File Import Selection Window>

[Automatically] Button:

Starts importing using the path shown in from the following path. Click from the following path box, can input path manually. If a cell permit file cannot be found, a file not found error message appears in the text box. By referring to "2.1.1.3 If a Cell Permit File Cannot Be Found (Resume by Specifying a Path)", respecify a path.

<Cell Permit File Not Found Window>

2-3 Cell Permit File Importing Window Import the detected cell permit file to the system.

<Cell Permit File Importing Window>

If the cell permit file is incorrect:

If a cell permit file is incorrect, an error message appears in the text box. Stop importing with the [Home] button and redo import operation using a correct cell permit file.

<File Import Error Window>

Examples of error messages if a cell permit file is incorrect

[Home] Button:

Returns to the Home window.

"SSE 12 - Cell Permit format is incorrect. Contact your data supplier and obtain a new permit file."The format of the cell permit file is incorrect.

"SSE 13 - Cell Permit is invalid (checksum is incorrect) or the Cell Permit is for a different system. Contact your data supplier and obtain a new or valid permit file."The CRC of the cell permit does not match. 2-4 6) When the import of a cell permit file is completed, a completion message and the number of licences owned appear in the text box, so check the result.

<Cell Permit File Import Completion Window>

Text Box:

A cell permit file import completion message and the number of licences owned are displayed.

[Home] Button:

Returns to the Home window. 7) Click the [Home] button to finish importing. 2-5 Importing Cell Permit Files from USB Memory (Manual Import) 2.1.1.2 When importing cell permit files from devices other than the DVD drive, such as USB memory and a hard disk, set up the import path first and then import them. The following example describes the procedure for importing cell permit files from USB memory (F drive). 1) Start Chart Maintenance from Task Menu. 2) 3) In the Home window, click the [Import / Update Licence file] button. In the Chart Category Selection window, click the [ENC] button.

(The operation is the same as described in "2.1.1.1 Importing Cell Permit Files from CD/DVD Media

(Automatic Import) " up to here.) Insert USB memory on which the cell permit file is stored and wait until import becomes ready. In the Cell Permit File Import Selection window, click the [Manually] button. The Cell Permit File Path Selection window appears.

<Cell Permit File Import Selection Window>

[Manually] Button:

Select a path and then start importing. 4) 5) 2-6 6) Specify USB memory (F drive) in Drive. Also, specify a folder containing a cell permit file. When a folder containing a cell permit file is selected, the cell permit file name is displayed in the text box.

<Path Selection Window>

Drive Name:

Select a drive. Folder name:

Select a folder. The folders on the drive selected in Drive are displayed in a tree structure. Text Box:

When a cell permit file is stored in the selected folder, the cell permit file name is displayed.

[OK] Button:

Pressing this button starts importing the cell permit file using the selected path. 7) Click the [OK] button. The import of the cell permit file starts using the selected path.

<Cell Permit File Import Window>

8) When the import of a cell permit file is completed, a completion message and the number of licences owned appear in the text box, so check the result. 9) Click the [Home] button to finish importing. 2-7 2.1.1.3 If a Cell Permit File Cannot Be Found (Resume by Specifying a Path) If a cell permit file cannot be found in the Cell Permit File Search window, a file not found error message appears in the text box. Click the [Select path] button to respecify a path. The following example describes the procedure from how to specify a path to how to resume importing a cell permit file by changing to USB memory (F drive).

<Cell Permit File Not Found Window>

[Select path] Button:

Displays the Path Selection window. Text Box:

Displays a file not found error message. In the Cell Permit File Not Found window, click [Select path]. Display the Path Selection window. 1) 2) Specify USB memory (F drive) in Drive. Also, specify a folder containing a cell permit file. When a folder containing a cell permit file is selected, the cell permit file name is displayed in the text box.

<Path Selection Window>

Drive Name:

Select a drive. Folder name:

Select a folder. The folders on the drive selected in Drive are displayed in a tree structure. Text Box:

When a cell permit file is stored in the selected folder, the cell permit file name is displayed.

[OK] Button:

Pressing this button starts importing the cell permit file using the selected path. 2-8 3) Click the [OK] button. The import of the cell permit file resumes using the selected path.

<Cell Permit File Import Window>

4) When the import of a cell permit file is completed, a completion message and the number of licences owned appear in the text box, so check the result. 5) Click the [Home] button to finish importing. 2-9 2.1.1.4 Changing a Path to Use for Automatic Import If a path is selected with the [Browse] button when always using USB memory to import cell permit files, the selected path will be saved as a path used by the auto-import. Cell permit files can then be imported with the

[Automatically] button from the saved path thereafter. The following example describes how to change "path used by the auto-import" by changing to USB memory

(F drive). 1) Start Chart Maintenance from Task Menu. 2) 3) 4) 5) In the Home window, click the [Import / Update Licence file] button. In the Chart Category Selection window, click the [ENC] button.

(The operation is the same as described in "2.1.1.1 Importing Cell Permit Files from CD/DVD Media

(Automatic Import)" up to here.) Insert USB memory on which the cell permit file is stored and wait until import becomes ready. In the Cell Permit File Import Selection window, click the [Browse] button. The Cell Permit File Path Selection window appears.

<Cell Permit File Import Selection Window>

[Browse] Button:

Changes "path used by the auto-import". 2-10 6) Specify USB memory (drive F) as the drive name and select the path to be used by auto-import. If a folder is selected, data path is displayed in the text box.

<Path Selection Window>

Drive Name:

Select a drive. Folder name:

Select a folder. The folders on the drive selected in Drive are displayed in a tree structure. Text Box:

When a cell permit file is stored in the selected folder, the cell permit file name is displayed.

[OK] Button:

Changes "path used by the auto-import" with the path by which the cell permit file was selected. 7) Click the [OK] button. Set the path selected as the path to be used in auto-import. 2-11 2.1.2 Importing Charts 2.1.2.1 The following example describes the procedure for importing S-57/S-63 charts, AVCS charts and AIO data from CD/DVD media. Importing Charts from CD/DVD Media (Automatic Import) In the Home window, click the [Import / Update charts] button. 1) Start Chart Maintenance from Task Menu. 2)

<Home Window>

3)

<Chart Category Selection Window>

4) In the Chart Category Selection window, click the [ENC] button. Insert CD/DVD medium on which chart data (or AIO data) is stored and wait until import becomes ready. 2-12 5) In the Chart Import Selection window, click the [Automatically] button. Search chart data from the path shown in from the following path and start importing it.

<Chart Import Selection Window>

[Automatically] Button:

Starts importing using the path shown in from the following path. Click from the following path box, can input path manually. 2-13 Chart Search Window Search chart data.

<Chart Search Window>

Searches chart data using the path shown in

"Searching chart database in". If chart data cannot be found, a data not found error message appears. By referring to

"2.1.2.3 If Chart Data Cannot Be Found (Resume by Specifying a Path)", respecify a path.

<Chart Not Found Window>

2-14 In the case of S-63 chats or AVCS charts, Check the SA certificate file.

(In the case of S-57 charts and AIO data, skip and check chart data.>

When an SA certificate file is other than IHO.CRT, "SSE26" error message appears; however, it is not an error, so import operation continues.

<When an SA Certificate File Is Other than IHO.CRT>

Import operation continues. In the text box, SSE26 message is displayed. 2-15 If SA certificate files cannot be imported normally:

If SA certificate files cannot be imported normally such as when SA certificate files cannot be found, an error message appears and import operation stops. Close the Import window using the [Home] button, prepare a medium containing a normal SA certificate file first, and then import charts from the beginning. Examples of Error Message Generations

<When a file cannot be found> <Expiry data has been reached> <A file is incorrect>

Returns to the Home window.

[Home] Button:

2-16 Chart Data Check Window Check chart data.

<Chart Data Check Window>

6) When chart data check is completed, the Chart Import Method Selection window appears. Click the [All]

button. The import of chart data with chart licence starts. In the case of chart update, all the charts newer than already imported charts will be imported from charts with chart licence.

<Chart Import Method Selection Window>

[All] Button:

Imports all charts that require update. When the [Select] button is pressed, charts to be imported can be selected individually for import. For more information about operation, see "2.1.2.5 Importing Charts by Selecting". 2-17 Import Log:

Progress Bar:

[Log Display Switch] Button:

Displays a log during import. Displays the progress of import. Switches between show/hide of import log.

[Abort] Button Import stopping confirmation message is displayed. Stops the import click the [OK] button. When chart import is started, the number of imported charts is displayed and progress is shown by a progress bar.

<Chart Import Progress Window (When Displaying Import Log)>

When the [Log Display Switch] button is selected:

When the [Log Display Switch] button is clicked, the log text box is hidden.

<Chart Import Progress Window (When Hiding Import Log)>

Switches between show/hide of import log.

[Log Display Switch] Button:

2-18 7) When the import of chart data is finished, the number of imported charts is displayed List of messages for each chart appears in the log text box.

<Chart Import Completion Window>

Log Text Box:

Import log and import completion messages are displayed. 8) In the case of CD/DVD media, the chart import continuation confirmation dialog appears after import is completed. If charts have been imported from all CD/DVD media, click the [No] button. Finish chart import and close the window.

<Chart Import Continuation Confirmation Dialog Box>

[No] Button:

Finish chart import and close the dialog box. 2-19 If there are still charts to be imported:

If there are still charts that need to be imported, click the [Yes] button in the Chart Import Continuation dialog box. The Chart CD/DVD Media Insertion Window appears, so change CD/DVD medium and click the [OK] button.

<Chart Import Continuation Confirmation Dialog Box>

[Yes] Button:

Continues chart import. The Chart CD/DVD Media Insertion Confirmation dialog box appears.

<Chart CD/DVD Media Insertion Confirmation Dialog Box>

[OK] Button:

Starts searching charts on CD/DVD medium. Chart data search is performed. For the succeeding operation, see page 2-14 "<Chart Search Window>

<Chart Search Window>

2-20 Importing Charts from USB Memory (Manual Import) 2.1.2.2 When importing chart data from devices other than the DVD drive, such as USB memory and a hard disk, set up the import path first and then import them. The following example describes the procedure for importing charts from USB memory (F drive). 1) Start Chart Maintenance from Task Menu. 2) 3) In the Home window, click the [Import / Update charts] button. In the Chart Category Selection window, click the [ENC] button.

(The operation is the same as described in "2.1.2.1 Importing Charts from CD/DVD Media (Automatic Import)" up to here.) Insert USB memory on which chart data is stored and wait until import becomes ready. In the Chart Import Selection window, click the [Manually] button. The Chart Data Path Selection window appears. 4) 5)

<Chart Import Selection Window>

[Manually] Button:

Select a path manually and then start importing. 2-21 6) Specify USB memory (F drive) in Drive. Select the folder higher by one layer than the folder (ENC_ROOT) in which the chart data is stored.

<Path Selection Window>

Drive Name:

Select a drive. Folder name:

Select a folder. The folders on the drive selected in Drive are displayed in a tree structure. Text Box:

Select a folder, data path is displayed.

[OK] Button:

Start the import of the chart. 7) Click the [OK] button. The import of charts starts.

<Chart Search Window>

8) When chart data check is completed, the Chart Import Method Selection window appears. Click the

[All] button. The import of chart data with chart licence starts. 9) When the import of chart data is finished, the number of imported charts is displayed. Import results are displayed in the chart to log text box. 10) Click the [Home] button to finish importing. 2-22 If Chart Data Cannot Be Found (Resume by Specifying a Path) 2.1.2.3 If chart data cannot be found, a data not found error message appears. Click [Select path] to display the Path Selection window and then select a chart path. The following example describes the procedure from how to specify a path to how to resume importing charts by changing to USB memory (F drive).

<Chart Not Found Window>

A chart data not found error message is displayed.

[Select path] Button:

Displays the Path Selection window. 1) 2) Specify USB memory (F drive) in Drive. Also, select a folder containing chart data. In the Chart Not Found window, click [Select path]. The Path Selection window is displayed. Drive Name:

Folder name:

Select a drive. Select the folder higher by one layer than the folder (ENC_ROOT) in which the chart data is stored.

<Path Selection Window>

Select a folder. The folders on the drive selected in Drive are displayed in a tree structure. Select a folder, data path is displayed. Resume the import of chart.

[OK] Button:

Text Box:

2-23 3) Click the [OK] button. The import of chart data resumes using the selected path.

<Chart Search Window>

4) When chart data check is completed, the Chart Import Method Selection window appears. Click the

[All] button. The import of chart data with chart licence starts. 5) When the import of chart data is finished, the number of imported charts is displayed. Import results are displayed in the chart to log text box. 6) Click the [Home] button to finish importing. 2-24 2.1.2.4 Changing a Path to Use for Automatic Import If a path is selected with the [Browse] button when always using USB memory to import chart data, the selected path will be saved as a path used by the auto-import.. Chart data can then be imported with the

[Automatically] button from the saved path thereafter. The following example describes how to change path used by the auto-import. by changing to USB memory

(F drive). 1) Start Chart Maintenance from Task Menu. 2) 3) In the Home window, click the [Import / Update charts] button. In the Chart Category Selection window, click the [ENC] button.

(The operation is the same as described in "2.1.2.1 Importing Charts from CD/DVD Media (Automatic Import)" up to here.) Insert USB memory on which chart data is stored and wait until import becomes ready. In the Chart Import Selection window, click the [Browse] button. The Chart Data Path Selection window appears.

<Chart Import Selection Window>

4) 5)

[Browse] Button:

Changes path used by the auto-import. 2-25 6) Specify USB memory (drive F) as the drive name, and then select the path to be used by auto-import. When a folder is selected, the data path is displayed in the text box.

<Path Selection Window>

Drive Name:

Select a drive. Folder name:

Select a folder. The folders on the drive selected in Drive are displayed in a tree structure. Text Box:

Select a folder, data path is displayed.

[OK] Button:

Set the pass which chose as a pass to use in auto-import. 7) Click the [OK] button. changed to the selected path is the path to be used in automatic import.

<Chart Import Selection Window>

2-26 Importing Charts by Selecting 2.1.2.5 Charts to be imported can be selected individually for import. The following example describes the procedure for importing charts from CD/DVD media. 1) Start Chart Maintenance from Task Menu. 2) 3) 4) In the Home window, click the [Import / Update charts] button. In the Chart Category Selection window, click the [ENC] button. Insert CD/DVD medium on which chart data (or AIO data) is stored and wait until import becomes ready. In the Chart Import Selection window, click the [Automatically] button. Search chart data from the path shown in path used by the auto-import and start importing it.

(The operation is the same as described in "2.1.2.1 Importing Charts from CD/DVD Media (Automatic Import)" up to here.) 5) 6) When chart data check is completed, the Chart Import Method Selection window appears. Click the

[Select] button. A window for selecting charts to be imported appears.

<Chart Import Method Selection Window>

[Select] Button:

Imports charts by selecting. 2-27 7) Select charts to be imported by checking their checkboxes.

<Chart Selection Window>

Checkboxes:

Select charts to be imported. The checkboxes of the charts that need to be updated are checked when the Chart Selection window is displayed. Checkbox (Title Bar):

Select (deselect) all selectable charts.

: Unselected chart

: Chart to be imported

: Unselectable

[Import] Button:

Starts importing the selected charts. Caution:

If there are no cell permits for charts or charts have already been expired, the corresponding checkboxes will be disabled. 2-28 8) Click the [Import] button after selecting charts to start importing them. Progress Bar:

When chart import is started, the number of imported charts is displayed and progress is shown by a progress bar.

<Chart Import Progress Window (When Displaying Import Log)>

Switches between show/hide of import log. Displays the progress of import. Displays a log during import.

[Log Display Switch] Button:

Import Log:

9) When the import of chart data is finished, the number of imported charts is displayed 10) Import results are displayed in the chart to log each text box. In the case of CD/DVD media, the chart import continuation confirmation dialog appears after import is completed. If charts have been imported from all CD/DVD media, click the [No] button. Finish chart import and close the window. If there are still charts that need to be imported, click the [Yes] button in the Chart Import Continuation dialog box. The Chart CD/DVD Media Insertion Window appears, so change CD/DVD media and click the [OK] button. Chart data will then be searched. For the succeeding operation, please see the operation described from page 2-15. 2-29 2.2 Updating Charts To update charts, perform the same operation as import. In the Home window, click the [Import / Update charts] button. 1) Start Chart Maintenance. 2) 3) Go to the Chart Category Selection window and click the [ENC] button. For the succeeding operation, see "2.1.2 Importing Charts". 2-30 2.3 Updating Cell Permit Files To update cell permit files, perform the same operation as import. In the Home window, click the [Import / Update Licence file] button. 1) Start Chart Maintenance. 2) 3) Go to the Chart Category Selection window and click the [ENC] button. For the succeeding operation, see "2.1.1 Importing Cell Permit Files (S-63, AVCS and AIO)"

. 2-31 2.4 Using Check Status Check Status provides the following functions. Display a list of imported charts and chart license information. Display the log when importing/updating cell permits and charts permits. Display the log when importing/updating charts. Delete already imported charts. 2.4.1 How to Start Check Status On Task Menu, start Check Status according to the following procedure. 1) Click the [Chart Maintenance] button on Task Menu. 2) In the Chart Maintenance window, click the [Check Status] button. The Check Status window appears.

[Check Status] Button 2-32 Chart Type Buttons:

Change the chart type. Executes import/update. Window Switching Tabs:

Switch between the Status List window

[Import/Update Licence]

button:

2.4.2 Configuration of the Check Status Window The Check Status window consists of the Status List window and the Log window. Status List Window: Displays a list of imported charts and chart license information. You can also delete already imported charts by selecting them. Displays the log when importing/updating charts. Log Window:

Also displays the log when importing/updating cell permits and charts permits. 2.4.2.1 Status List Window Displays folders containing imported charts. Displays SA certificate Information SA certificate Information:

Displays a list of imported charts. Folder List Display:

Chart List Display:

Cell Information:

[Delete] Button:

Deletes charts. Licence Information:

Displays licence information of charts. Displays cell information of charts. 2-33 2.4.2.2 Log Window

<Functions of Each Button>

Chart Type Buttons:

Import/Update Buttons:

Log Window:

Displays a log recorded when importing/updatin g licences and charts.

[ENC] Button:

Displays the Chart information and ENC log.

[Import/Update Licence] Button:

Imports/updates licences. Goes to the Licence Import window for the type of charts being displayed. Please see "2.1.1 Importing Cell Permit Files".

[Import/Update Charts] Button:

Imports/updates charts. Goes to the Chart Import window for the type of charts being displayed. Please see "2.1.2 Importing Charts". 2-34 Window Switching Tabs

[Delete] Button:

<Folder List Display>

The window for the selected tab appears.

[Status List] Tab:

Display information about the licences on a chart and a list of imported chart.

[Log] Tab:

Displays a log recorded when importing/updating licences and charts.

[Delete] Button:

Deletes the items whose checkboxes are marked in the Chart List. Please see 2.7 Deleting ENC Charts Displays a list of folders containing imported charts. Charts contained in the selected folder are displayed in the Chart List window. 2-35 2.5 Checking Chart Update History 2.5.1 Checking from Chart Maintenance 1) Start Chart Maintenance from Task Menu. 2) Click the [Check Status] button in the Home window. 3) Click the [ENC] button in the Check Status window.

[ENC] Button 2-36 4) Check the update history in the Last Update column of the Chart List window. Issue Date:

Cell Ver.:

The chart editions are displayed. The chart issue dates are displayed. Last Update:

The last date when charts were imported to the system are displayed. 2-37 2.5.2 Checking from ECDIS screen 1) Start ECDIS. 2) Select [Menu] [Chart] [Select S-57 Chart] in this order. 2-38 A Chart List is displayed. Chart List Item Names 3) Scrolling the Last Update column on Chart List to the right will display the update history. Chart List Items (All Items) Up No.:

Issue Date:

Last Update:

The chart update numbers are displayed. The chart issue dates are displayed. The last chart update dates are displayed. 2-39 2.6 Checking the Contents of Contracts The contents of contracts can be checked from Check Status. 1) Start Chart Maintenance from Task Menu. 2) Click the [Check Status] button in the Home window. 3) Click the [ENC] button in the Check Status window. The ENC chart information is displayed.

[ENC] Button 2-40 2.6.1 Checking the Expiry Dates of Cell Permits Having Contract Check the expiration dates in the Expiry Date column of the Chart List window. Expiry Date: Expiration date of permit Expires within 30 days Yellow Already expired Orange If the chart expiry data has been reached, please check the contents of the contract and contact your chart distributor. S-63 User Permit:

Displays the S-63 user permit. 2.6.2 Checking Licence information S-63 Cell Permit:

2-41 Displays the number of S-63 chart licences owned and the number of expired chart licences. SA certificate:

Displays the SA certificate file names. 2.6.3 Checking SA Certificate Files Load new SA certificate:

Data Server:

Caution:

2-42 Displays the data server information of the SA certificate files. Clicking the [Load new SA certificate file] button in the SA certificate column will import a new SA certificate file. It is necessary to select and import an SA certificate file into the system for each of the data severs (PRIMAR, UKHO (AVCS), Hydrographic and Oceanographic Department of Japan Coast Guard, etc.). ECDIS provides a function for enabling to use charts issued from multiple data servers. When importing charts, it is necessary to import and select an SA certificate file on chart CD-ROM issued by a data server for ENC certification and assurance. 2.6.4 Reimporting SA Certificate Files 1) Insert media (CD/DVD, USB memory) on which an SA certificate file has been stored and wait until import becomes ready. 2) Click the [Load new SA certificate] button. 3) When the Path Selection window appears in a separate window, specify the drive and folder in which the SA certificate file is stored.

<Path Selection Window>

Drive Name:

Select a drive. Folder name:

Select a folder. The folders on the drive selected in Drive are displayed in a tree structure. Text Box:

When an SA certificate file is stored in the selected folder, the file name is displayed.

[OK] Button:

Import the SA certificate file and closes this window. (If a file name is not displayed in the text box, the [OK] button is disabled.) For following operations, refer to page 2-15 and subsequent pages. 2-43 2.6.5 Checking Chart Cell Information Check Cell Information in the Check Status window. Cell Information:

Displays the information of the selected chart in the chart list. 2-44 2.7 Deleting ENC Charts 1) Start Chart Maintenance from Task Menu. 2) Click the [Check Status] button in the Home window. 3) Click the [ENC] button in the Check Status window.

[ENC] Button

[Delete] Button Checkboxes 2-45 4) Check the checkboxes of charts that need to be deleted in the Chart List window. 5) Click the [Delete] button in the Chart List window. 6) The Delete dialog box appears. Clicking the [OK] button will delete the checked charts in the Chart List. 2-46 If deleted ENC chart on Check StatusWindow, select either Delete the license only, or Delete the license and the chart. 1) Start ECDIS screen or RADAR screen (chart display option) from Task Menu. 2) Select [Menu] [Settings] [Chart]. Display the setting dialog about chart operation. 3) Select the Deletion Mode on Deletion Mode (Chart Maintenance). Deletion Mode (Chart Maintenance) Set the Deletion Mode on Check Status Window. Only S-63 Cell Permit Delete the license only. S-63 Cell Permit and Chart Delete the license and the chart. The setting of Deletion Mode (Chart Maintenance) is valid only under S-63 (ENC that requires the permit). Under S-57 (ENC that does not require the permit), the chart is also deleted regardless of this setting. 2-47 Section 3 ARCS Charts 3.1 About ARCS Charts

(a)

(d) Licences (Chart Permits) have an expiry date. 30 days Present

(b)

(c) 30 days Expiry date of licence Future

(a) For 30 days before expiry date of licence A warning message is displayed. Please refer to "Notice regarding Alert Information of ARCS Charts" provided as a reference document at the end of this document.

(b) For 30 days after expiry date of licence An error message is displayed. Please refer to "Notice regarding Alert Information of ARCS Charts" provided as a reference document at the end of this document. Although the licence has been disabled, ARCS charts can be displayed continuously.

(c) From 30 days after expiry date of licence

(d) A warning message is displayed. Chart permits are disabled and no ARCS charts are displayed. Please refer to "Notice Regarding Alert Information of ARCS Charts" provided as a reference document at the end of this document. If charts that have been displayed so far can no longer be displayed, the following causes may be considered. ARCS charts are of trial version (free for 3 months). The details of the contract were changed. Caution:

Regarding the contents of the contract, please check with the chart contractor or chart dealer. 3-1

 

 

Section 3 ARCS Charts 3.1 About ARCS Charts

(a)

(d) Licences (Chart Permits) have an expiry date. 30 days Present

(b)

(c) 30 days Expiry date of licence Future

(a) For 30 days before expiry date of licence A warning message is displayed. Please refer to "Notice regarding Alert Information of ARCS Charts" provided as a reference document at the end of this document.

(b) For 30 days after expiry date of licence An error message is displayed. Please refer to "Notice regarding Alert Information of ARCS Charts" provided as a reference document at the end of this document. Although the licence has been disabled, ARCS charts can be displayed continuously.

(c) From 30 days after expiry date of licence

(d) A warning message is displayed. Chart permits are disabled and no ARCS charts are displayed. Please refer to "Notice Regarding Alert Information of ARCS Charts" provided as a reference document at the end of this document. If charts that have been displayed so far can no longer be displayed, the following causes may be considered. ARCS charts are of trial version (free for 3 months). The details of the contract were changed. Caution:

Regarding the contents of the contract, please check with the chart contractor or chart dealer. 3-1 3.2 Importing ARCS Charts 3.2.1 Importing Chart Permit Files Import ARCS chart permit files according to the following procedure. When importing/exporting files using USB memory, be sure to check for viruses on USB memory in advance. If the ECDIS is infected with a virus, it will affect other devices, leading to failures. Never leave USB memory in the USB port. It may cause malfunction. Caution:

If the received chart permit files are Backup gb.lcn and Backup gb.ncp, rename them to gb.lcn and gb.ncp. With chart permit file names other than gb.lcn and gb.ncp, ARCS charts cannot be imported correctly. Do not alter the contents of chart permit files. If the contents of chart permit files were altered, ARCS charts cannot be imported correctly. 3-2 3.2.1.1 Importing Chart Permit Files from CD/DVD Media (Automatic Import) The following example describes the procedure for importing chart permit files from CD/DVD media. 1) Start Chart Maintenance from Task Menu. 2) In the Home window, click the [Import / Update Licence file] button.

<Home Window>

3) In the Chart Category Selection window, click the [ARCS] button.

<Chart Category Selection Window>

3-3 4) 5) Insert CD/DVD medium on which the ARCS chart permit files are stored and wait until import becomes ready. In the Chart Permit Import Selection window, click the [Automatically] button. Search a chart permit file from the path (CD/DVD drive) shown in from the following path and start importing it.

<Chart Permit Import Selection Window>

[Automatically] Button:

Starts importing using the path shown in from the following path. Click from the following path box, can input path manually. If a chart permit file cannot be found, a file not found error message appears in the text box. By referring to "3.2.1.3 If a Chart Permit File Cannot Be Detected", respecify a path.

<Chart Permit File Not Found Window>

3-4

<Chart Permit File Import Search Window>

Search a chart permit file.

<Chart Permit File Search Window>

<Chart Permit File Import Window>

Import the detected chart permit file to the system.

<Chart Permit File Import Window>

3-5 If the chart permit file is incorrect:

If a chart permit file is incorrect, an error message appears in the text box. Return to the Home window by pressing the [Home] button, prepare a normal chart permit file and then redo import operation.

<File Import Error Window>

Examples of error messages if a chart permit file is incorrect

[Home] Button:

Returns to the Home window. ARCS01 - The contents of the GB.LCN file have been altered. You may be in breach of the licensing arrangements that relate to the use of the charts. Licence is invalid. Please contact your ARCS agent/distributor to correct this error. ARCS02 - Chart Permit corrupted. Please re-load from the original media. 6) When the import of the chart permit file is completed, a completion message and the number of licences owned appear in the text box, so check the result.

<Chart Permit File Import Completion Window>

Text Box:

A chart permit file import completion message and the number of licences owned are displayed.

[Home] Button:

Returns to the Home window. 7) Click the [Home] button to finish importing. 3-6 3.2.1.2 Importing Chart Permit Files from USB Memory (Manual Import) When importing chart permit files from devices other than the CD/DVD drive, such as USB memory and a hard disk, set up the import path first and then import them. The following example describes the procedure for importing chart permit files from USB memory (F drive). 1) Start Chart Maintenance from Task Menu. 2) 3) In the Home window, click the [Import / Update Licence file] button. In the Chart Category Selection window, click the [ARCS] button.

(The operation is the same as described in "3.2.1.1 Importing Chart Permit Files from CD/DVD Media (Automatic Import) up to here.) Insert USB memory on which the chart permit files are stored and wait until import becomes ready. In the Chart Permit Import Selection window, click the [Manually] button. The Chart Permit File Path Selection window appears.

<Chart Permit Import Selection Window>

4) 5)

[Manually] Button:

Select a path and then start importing. 3-7 6) Specify USB memory (F drive) in Drive. Also, specify a folder containing a chart permit file. When a folder containing a chart permit file is selected, the chart permit file name is displayed in the text box.

<Path Selection Window>

Drive Name:

Select a drive. Folder name:

Select a folder. The folders on the drive selected in Drive are displayed in a tree structure. Text Box:

When a chart permit file is stored in the selected folder, the chart permit file name is displayed.

[OK] Button:

Starts importing the chart permit file using the selected path. Caution:

When ARCS Chart Permits are supplied by E-mail, save the two files, gb.lcn and gb.ncp files (ARCS Chart Permit), attached to E-mail to the USB memory. Insert USB memory and select [F:] (F drive). Save only the gb.lcn and gb.ncp files to USB memory without saving the entire E-mail. If the gb.lcn files are compressed, decompress them first and then save them to USB memory. 3-8 7) Click the [OK] button. The import of the chart permit files start using the selected path.

<Chart Permit File Import Start Window>

<Chart Permit Import Window>

8) When the import of the chart permit files are completed, a completion message and the number of licences owned appear in the text box, so check the result. 9) Click the [Home] button to finish importing. 3-9 3.2.1.3 If a Chart Permit File Cannot Be Found (Resume by Specifying a Path) If a chart permit file cannot be found in the Chart Permit File Search window, a file not found error message appears in the text box. Click the [Select path] button to respecify a path. The following example describes the procedure from how to specify a path to how to resume importing a chart permit file by changing to USB memory (F drive).

<Chart Permit File Not Found Window>

Error Message:

A file not found error message is displayed.

[Select path] Button:

Displays the Path Selection window. 1) In the Chart Permit File Not Found window, click [Select path]. The Path Selection window appears. 2) Specify USB memory (F drive) in Drive. Also, specify a folder containing a chart permit file. When a folder containing a chart permit file is selected, the chart permit file name is displayed in the text box.

<Path Selection Window>

Drive Name:

Select a drive. Folder Name:

Select a folder. The folders on the drive selected in Drive are displayed in a tree structure. Text Box:

When a chart permit file is stored in the selected folder, the chart permit file name is displayed.

[OK] Button:

Resume importing the chart permit file using the selected path. 3-10 3) Click the [OK] button. The import of the chart permit file start using the selected path.

<Chart Permit File Search Window>

4) When the import of the chart permit file is completed, a completion message and the number of licences owned appear in the text box, so check the result. 5) Click the [Home] button to finish importing. 3-11 3.2.1.4 Changing a Path to Use for Automatic Import If a path is selected with the [Browse] button when always using USB memory to import Chart Permit data, the selected path will be saved as a path used by the automatic import Chart Permit data can then be imported with the [Automatically] button from the saved path thereafter. The following example describes how to change path used by the automatic import by changing to USB memory (F drive). 1) Start Chart Maintenance from Task Menu. 2) 3) In the Home window, click the [Import / Update Licence file] button. In the Chart Category Selection window, click the [ARCS] button.

(The operation is the same as described in "3.2.1.1 Importing Chart Permit Files from CD/DVD Media (Automatic Import) up to here.) Insert USB memory on which the chart permit files are stored and wait until import becomes ready. In the Chart Permit Import Selection window, click the [Browse] button. The Chart Permit File Path Selection window appears.

<Chart Permit Import Selection Window>

4) 5)

[Browse] Button:

Changes path used by the automatic import. 3-12 6) Specify USB memory (F drive) in Drive. Also, specify a folder containing a chart permit file. When a folder containing a chart permit file is selected, the chart permit file name is displayed in the text box.

<Path Selection Window>

Drive Name:

Select a drive. Folder Name:

Select a folder. The folders on the drive selected in Drive are displayed in a tree structure. Text Box:

elect a folder, data path is displayed.

[OK] Button:

et the path selected as the path to be used in automatic import. 7) Click the [OK] button. Set the path selected as the path to be used in automatic import. 3-13 3.2.1.5 Manually Entering a Chart Permit If chart permits cannot be imported from a chart permit file, they can be manually entered with the [Enter manually] button. 1) Start Chart Maintenance from Task Menu. 2) 3) In the Home window, click the [Import / Update Licence file] button. In the Chart Category Selection window, click the [ARCS] button.

(The operation is the same as described in "3.2.1.1 Importing Chart Permit Files from CD/DVD Media

(Automatic Import) up to here.) In the Chart Permit Import Selection window, click the [Enter manually] button. The Chart Permit Manual Entry window appears.

<Chart Permit Import Selection Window>

4)

[Enter manually] Button:

Enter chart permits you want to import manually. 3-14 5) Click the Chart Permit Entry Box. Using the software keyboard that appears, enter a chart permit.

<Chart Permit Manual Entry Window>

[Import] Button:

Imports the chart permits in the Chart Permit List. Chart Permit Entry Box:

Click to enter a chart permit from the software keyboard that appears. Chart Permit List:

Displays the added chart permits in a list.

[+] Button:

Adds the contents entered into the Chart Permit Entry Box to the Chart Permit List.

[] Button:

Deletes the selected chart permit to the Chart Permit List. 6) Click the [+] button. The entered chart permit is added to the Chart Permit List. 7) Click the [Import] button. The import of the chart permits being displayed in the list starts. 8) When the import of the chart permit file is completed, a completion message and the number of licences owned appear in the text box, so check the result. 9) Click the [Home] button to finish importing. 3-15 3.2.2 Importing Charts 3.2.2.1 The following example describes the procedure for importing ARCS charts from CD/DVD media. Importing Charts from CD/DVD (Automatic Import) 1) Start Chart Maintenance from Task Menu. 2) In the Home window, click the [Import / Update charts] button.

<Home Window>

3) In the Chart Category Selection window, click the [ARCS] button.

<Chart Category Selection Window>

4) Insert CD/DVD medium on which chart data is stored and wait until import becomes ready. 3-16 5) In the Chart Import Selection window, click the [Automatically] button. Search chart data from the path shown in from the following path and start importing it.

<Chart Import Selection Window>

[Automatically] Button:

Starts importing using the path shown in from the following path. Click from the following path box, can input path manually. 3-17 Chart Search Window Search chart file.

<Chart Search Window>

Find the chart file. If chart data cannot be found, a data not found error message appears. By referring to

"3.2.2.3 If Chart Data Cannot Be Found (Resume by Specifying a Path)", respecify a path.

<Chart Not Found Window>

3-18 6) When chart data check is completed, the Chart Import Method Selection window appears. Click the

[All] button. The import of all chart data starts. In the case of chart update, all the charts newer than already imported charts will be imported from charts with chart licence.

<Chart Import Method Selection Window>

[All] Button:

Imports all charts that require update. When the [Select] button is selected, individual charts can be selected for import. For detailed operation, please refer to 3.2.2.5 Importing Charts by Selecting. 3-19 Chart Import Progress Window When chart import is started, the number of imported charts is displayed. Also, the progress is shown by a progress bar.

<Chart Import Progress Window (When Displaying Import Log)>

Progress Bar:

Displays the progress of import.

[Log Display Switch] Button:

Switches between show/hide of import log. Import Log:

Displays a log during import. When the [Log Display Switch] button is selected:

When the [Log Display Switch] button is clicked while importing, the log text box is hidden.

<Chart Import Progress Window (When Hiding Import Log)>

[Log Display Switch] Button:

Switches between show/hide of import log. 3-20 7) When the import of chart data is finished, the number of imported charts is displayed. List of messages for each chart appears in the log text box.

<Chart Import Completion Window>

Log Text Box:

Import log and import completion messages are displayed. 8) In the case of CD/DVD media, the following chart import continuation confirmation dialog appears after import is completed. If there are no more CD/DVD media from which to import charts, click the [No] button. Finish chart import and close the window.

<Chart Import Continuation Confirmation Dialog Box>

[No] Button:

Finish chart import and close the window. 3-21 If there are still chats to be imported:

If there are still charts that need to be imported, click the [Yes] button in the Chart Import Continuation dialog box. The Chart CD/DVD Media Insertion window appears, so change CD/DVD medium and click the [OK] button.

<Chart Import Continuation Confirmation Dialog Box>

[Yes] Button:

Continues chart import. The Chart CD/DVD Media Insertion Confirmation dialog box appears.

<Chart CD/DVD Media Insertion Confirmation Dialog Box>

[OK] Button:

Starts searching charts on CD/DVD medium. Chart data search is performed. For succeeding operation, please see the operation from the Chart Search Window (page 3-18).

<Chart Search Window>

3-22 Importing Charts from USB Memory (Manual Import) 3.2.2.2 When importing chart data from devices other than the DVD drive, such as USB memory and a hard disk, set up the import path first and then import them. The following example describes the procedure for importing charts from USB memory (F drive). 1) Start Chart Maintenance from Task Menu. 2) 3) In the Home window, click the [Import / Update charts] button. In the Chart Category Selection window, click the [ARCS] button.

(The operation is the same as described in "3.2.2.1 Importing Charts from CD/DVD (Automatic Import)" up to here.) Insert USB memory on which chart data is stored and wait until import becomes ready. In the Chart Import Selection window, click the [Manually] button. The Chart Data Path Selection window appears. 4) 5)

<Chart Import Selection Window>

[Manually] Button:

Select a path and then start importing. 3-23 6) Specify USB memory (F drive) in Drive. Select the folder higher by one layer than the folder (RASCHTS) in which the chart data is stored.

<Path Selection Window>

Drive Name:

Select a drive. Folder Name:

Select a folder. The folders on the drive selected in Drive are displayed in a tree structure. Text Box:

Select a folder, data path is displayed. 7) Click the [OK] button. The import of charts starts using the selected path.

[OK] Button:

Starts importing using the path selected by confirming the chart path. At this time, close the window.

<Chart Search Window>

8) When chart data check is completed, the Chart Import Method Selection window appears. Click the [All] button. 9) The import of all chart data starts. When the import of chart data is finished, the number of imported charts is displayed. Import results are displayed in the chart to log text box. 10) Click the [Home] button to finish importing. 3-24 If Chart Data Cannot Be Found (Resume by Specifying a Path) 3.2.2.3 If chart data cannot be found, a data not found error message appears. Click [Select path] to display the Path Selection window and then select a chart path. The following example describes the procedure from how to specify a path to how to resume importing charts by changing to USB memory (F drive).

<Chart Not Found Window>

A chart data not found error message is displayed.

[Select path] Button:

Displays the Path Selection window. In the Chart Not Found window, click [Select path]. The Path Selection window is displayed. 1) 2) Specify USB memory (F drive) in Drive. Select the folder higher by one layer than the folder

(RASCHTS) in which the chart data is stored.

<Path Selection Window>

Drive Name:

Select a drive. Folder Name:

Select a folder. The folders on the drive selected in Drive are displayed in a tree structure. Text Box:

Select a folder, data path is displayed.

[OK] Button:

The import of chart data resume using the selected path. 3-25 3) Click the [OK] button. The import of chart data resumes using the selected path.

<Chart Search Window>

4) When chart data check is completed, the Chart Import Method Selection window appears. Click the [All] button. 5) The import of all chart data starts. When the import of chart data is finished, the number of imported charts is displayed. Import results are displayed in the chart to log text box. 6) Click the [Home] button to finish importing. 3-26 3.2.2.4 Changing a Path to Use for Automatic Import If a path is selected with the [Browse] button when always using USB memory to import chart data, the selected path will be saved as a path used by the automatic import. Chart data can then be imported with the

[Automatically] button from the saved path thereafter. The following example describes how to change path used by the automatic import by changing to USB memory (F drive). 1) Start Chart Maintenance from Task Menu in the Home window. 2) Click the [Import / Update charts] button. 3) In the Chart Category Selection window, click the [ARCS] button.

(The operation is the same as described in "3.2.2.1 Importing Charts from CD/DVD (Automatic Import)" up to here.) 4) Insert USB memory on which chart data is stored and wait until import becomes ready. 5) In the Chart Import Selection window, click the [Browse] button. The Chart Data Path Selection window appears.

<Chart Import Selection Window>

[Browse] Button:

Changes path used by the automatic import. 3-27 6) Specify USB memory (drive F) as the drive name and then select the path to be used by the automatic import. When a folder is selected, the data path is displayed in the text box.

<Path Selection Window>

Drive Name:

Select a drive. Folder Name:

Select a folder. The folders on the drive selected in Drive are displayed in a tree structure. Text Box:

When a folder is selected, the data path is displayed in the text box.

[OK] Button:

Set the path that has been selected as the path to be used by automatic import. 7) Click the [OK] button. The path that is used by automatic import is changed to the selected path.

<Chart Import Selection Window>

3-28 Importing Charts by Selecting 3.2.2.5 Charts to be imported can be selected individually for import. Regarding the chart import method selection, the following example describes the procedure for importing charts from CD/DVD media. 1) Start Chart Maintenance from Task Menu. 2) Click the [Import / Update charts] button from Home window. 3) 4) 5) In the Chart Category Selection window, click the [ARCS] button. Insert CD/DVD medium on which chart data is stored and wait until import becomes ready. In the Chart Import Selection window, click the [Automatically] button. Search chart data from the path shown in path used by the automatic import and start importing it.

(The operation is the same as described in "3.2.2.1 Importing Charts from CD/DVD (Automatic Import)" up to here.) 6) When chart data check is completed, the Chart Import Method Selection window appears. Click the

[Select] button. A window for selecting charts to be imported appears.

<Chart Import Method Selection Window>

[Select] Button:

Imports Charts by Selecting 3-29 7) Select charts you want to import and check the checkboxes of the charts you want to import.

<Chart Selection Window>

Checkboxes:

Select charts to be imported. The checkboxes of the charts that need to be updated are displayed with a check mark when the Chart Selection window is displayed. Checkbox (Title Bar):

Select (deselect) all selectable charts.

: Unselected chart

: Chart to be imported

[Import] Button:

Starts importing the selected charts. 3-30 8) Click the [Import] button after selecting charts to start importing them. The number of imported charts is displayed and progress is shown by a progress bar.

<Chart Import Progress Window (When Displaying Import Log)>

Progress Bar:

Displays the progress of import.

[Log Display Switch] Button:

Switches between show/hide of import log. Import Log:

Displays a log during import. 9) When the import of chart data is finished, the number of imported charts is displayed. 10) Import results are displayed in the chart to log each text box. In the case of CD/DVD media, the chart import continuation confirmation dialog appears after import is completed. If there are no more CD/DVD media from which to import charts, click the [No] button. Finish chart import and close the window. If there are still charts that need to be imported, click the [Yes] button in the Chart Import Continuation dialog box. The Chart CD/DVD Media Insertion window appears, so change CD/DVD medium and click the [OK] button. Chart data search is performed. For succeeding operation, please see the operation from the Chart Search Window (page 3-19). 3-31 3.3 Updating Charts The update operation of ARCS charts is the same as the import operation. 1) Start Chart Maintenance from Task Menu. 2) Click [Import / Update charts] in the Home window. 3) Click the [ARCS] button. For the succeeding operation, please see "3.2.2 Importing Charts". 3-32 3.4 Updating Chart Permits The update operation of chart permits is the same as the import operation. 1) Start Chart Maintenance from Task Menu. 2) Click [Import / Update Licence file] in the Home window. 3) Click the [ARCS] button. For the succeeding operation, please see "3.2.1 Importing Chart Permit Files". 3-33 3.5 Using Check Status Check Status provides the following functions. Display a list of imported charts and chart licence information. Display the log when importing/updating Chart permits and charts. Display the log when importing/updating charts. Delete already imported charts. 3.5.1 How to Start Check Status On Task Menu, start Check Status according to the following procedure. 1) Click the [Chart Maintenance] button on Task Menu. 2) In the Home window, click the [Check Status] button. The Check Status window appears.

[Check Status] Button 3) Click the [ARCS] button in the Check Status window.

[ARCS] Button 3-34

[Import/Update Licence]

button:

Executes import/update. Chart Type Buttons:

Change the chart type. Window Switching Tabs:

Switch between the Status List window 3.5.2 Configuration of the Check Status Window The Check Status window consists of the Status List window and the Log window. Status List Window: Displays a list of imported charts and chart licence information. You can also delete already imported charts by selecting them. Displays the log when importing/updating charts. Log Window:

Also displays the log when importing/updating chart permits and chart. 3.5.2.1 Status List Window Displays folders containing imported charts. Displays a list of imported charts. Folder List Display:

Chart List Display:

[Delete] Button:

Deletes charts. Licence Information:

Displays licence information of charts. Cell Information:

Displays cell information of charts. 3-35 3.5.2.2 Log Window

<Functions of Each Button>

Chart Type Buttons:

Import/Update Buttons:

Log Window:

Displays a log recorded when importing/updating licences and charts.

[ARCS] Button:

Displays the Chart information and ARCS log.

[Import/Update Licence] Button:

Imports/updates licences. Goes to the Licence Import window for the type of charts being displayed. Please see 3.2.1 Importing Chart Permit Files".

[Import/Update Charts] Button:

Imports/updates charts. Goes to the Chart Import window for the type of charts being displayed. Please see 3.2.2 Importing Charts. 3-36

[Delete] Button:

Window Switching Tabs

<Folder List Display>

[Delete] Button:

Deletes the items whose checkboxes are marked in the Chart List. Clicking the [Delete] button displays the following chart deletion confirmation dialog. Please see 3.8 Deleting ARCS Charts. The window for the selected tab appears.

[Status List] Tab:

Display information about the licences on a chart and a list of imported chart.

[Log] Tab:

Displays a log recorded when importing/updating licences and charts. Displays a list of folders containing imported charts. Charts contained in the selected folder are displayed in the Chart List window. 3-37 3.6 Checking Chart Update History 3.6.1 Checking from Chart Maintenance 1) Start Chart Maintenance from Task Menu. 2) Click [Check Status] button in the Home window.

[ARCS] Button 3) Click the [ARCS] button in the Check Status window. 3-38 4) Check the update history in the Last Update column of the Chart List window. Cell Ver.:

The chart editions are displayed. Edition Date The chart issue dates are displayed. Last Update:

The last date when charts were updated in the system are displayed. 3-39 3.6.2 Checking from ECDIS screen 1) Start ECDIS. 2) Right-click on a chart and select "Readout chart Information" on the Context menu. 3) The ARCS Information screen is displayed. Check the chart update history. Chart:

Displays the chart name. Version Number:

Displays the HCRF version. Edition Date:

Displays the editing date. Latest NM:

Displays the latest NM. File Issue Date:

Displays the issue date. 4) To close the ARCS Information window, click [] button. 3-40 3.7 Checking the Contents of Contracts The contents of contracts can be checked from Check Status. 3.7.1 Displaying Check Status 1) Start Chart Maintenance from Task Menu. 2) Click [Check Status] button in the Home window. 3) Click the [ARCS] button in the Check Status window.

[ARCS] Button 3-41 3.7.2 Checking the Expiry Dates of Chart Permits Having Contract Check the expiration dates in the Expiry Date column of the Chart List window. Expiry Date:

Expiration date of permit Expires within 30 days Yellow Already expired Orange If the chart expiry data has been reached, please check the contents of the contract and contact your chart distributor. 3.7.3 Checking ARCS User Permit 3.7.3.1 Checking the Check Status Check the ARCS User Permit. in the Licence Information column of the Check Status window. ARCS User Permit:

Displays the ARCS user permit. 3-42 3.7.3.2 Checking in the ARCS Path Entry Window 1) Click the [Route Planning / Route Monitoring (ECDIS)] button on Task Menu. 2) The window display changes and, after a while, the [ARCS PIN] panel appears. Check [User Permit]. Caution:

If [] button was selected on the [ARCS PIN] panel without entering the ARCS PIN, the ARCS items of Chart View (ECDIS) are disabled and thus unselectable. To display ARCS charts, be sure to enter the ARCS PIN on the [ARCS PIN] panel. Enter the ARCS PIN. 3-43 3.7.4 Checking the Detailed Information of Chart Permits Having Contract Check the detailed information in the Licence Information column of the Check Status window. ARCS Chart Permit:

Displays the number of ARCS chart licences owned and the number of expired chart licences. Licensee:

Display the name of the licence owner. Vessel Name:

Displays the vessel name. Fixed Site #1:

Displays Fixed Site #1. Host Name:

Displays the host name. Licence Type:

Display the licence type. 3.7.5 Checking Chart Cell Information Check Cell Information in the Check Status window. Cell Information:

Displays the information of charts selected in the Chart List. 3-44 3.8 Deleting ARCS Charts 1) Start Chart Maintenance. 2) Click [Check Status] button in the Home window.

[Delete] Button Check boxes

[ARCS] Button 3) Click [ARCS] button in the Check Status window. 3-45 4) Check the checkboxes of charts that need to be deleted in the Chart List window. 5) Click the [Delete] button in the Check status window. The Delete dialog box appears. 6) Click the [OK] button. The charts that have been checked in the Chart List are deleted. 3-46

 

 

Section 4 Using C-MAP Ed.3 Charts 4.1 Dynamic Licensing Service 4.1.1 Introduction Up to now, the ENC licensing requires mostly manual operation of determining charts needed for the coming voyage and placing an order for such chart licenses on a cell-by-cell or unit-by-unit basis. The ENC coverage is constantly changing with increasing availability of data as well as cell replacements and termination of existing cells. Dynamic Licensing is a subscription service agreement that provides an effective and user-friendly way to give immediate access to ENCs. To utilize Dynamic Licensing, the user needs to do the following. Inform Jeppesen Marine that Dynamic Licensing is active, and agree to the terms and conditions of using the service (no fees are incurred at this stage ) Define a geographical limitation in one or more zones and areas Designate the maximum amount of money that can be spent on a yearly basis (the vessels credit limit) The Dynamic Licensing system will grant user access to ENCs up to the defined credit limit without the need to obtain and enter any license codes. ENCs are recorded as used" when they have been loaded. This is the record of two applications: visual display of charts and non-visual display such as route check. ENCs are normally licensed for 3 months depending on what is allowed by the Hydrographic Office that has issued the ENCs. Licenses will expire after the allowed subscription period, which is normally 3 months. To continuously use ENCs, it is necessary to get license again. There is no fee for unused charts. Reporting of the cells that have been used must be carried out on a regular basis (at least once every two weeks). Otherwise, the credit balance will be used up and access to ENC will be automatically blocked by the navigation system. Since most modern day vessels are already equipped with Online Update Service for updating the charts, Internet and e-mail can be used for easy reporting. Jeppesen Marine is responsible for ensuring that all customers are reporting on a regular basis. Access to the Dynamic Licensing Service is controlled by Jeppesen Marine on the server side. If the customer does not comply with the terms and conditions of the service, Jeppesen Marine shall terminate the contract, resulting in blocked access. 4-1 4.1.2 Activating Dynamic Licensing The Dynamic Licensing service is activated when the customer contacts his/her local Jeppesen Marine distributor and signs up for Dynamic Licensing. The customer must designate the following items:

Name of vessel, delivery address, invoicing address and other general information System ID on the bridge that will use Dynamic Licensing Geographical limitation (zones and/or areas) Credit limit (can be checked by C-MAP) When the customer receives a permission confirmation from Jeppesen Marine via e-mail or fax, it becomes possible to start using Dynamic Licensing. The service can then be activated by creating an Online Update request on the ECDIS and sending it to Jeppesen Marine (updates@c-map.no). The response from the automated server contains initialization instructions that are processed internally within the ECDIS. Dynamic Licensing can be used as soon as the Online Update response is installed correctly. On and Off of Dynamic Licensing can be switched any time. 4-2 4.2 About C-MAP Ed.3 Charts 4.2.1 C-MAP Ed.3 Checkout (Static Licence) Expiry date of license (eToken) Licenses have an expiry date.

(a) Present a) For 60 days before expiry date of license 60 days

(b) Future Expiry date of license A warning message as shown below is displayed. Expiry date of license 4-3 b) After expiry date of license An error message as shown below is displayed. The chart is displayed only for 15 minutes after it is started. Caution:

Contact your C-MAP distributor If the message (a) or (b) above is displayed, it is necessary to update the license(s). 4-4 4.2.2 C-MAP Ed.3Checkout (Dynamic Licence) Expiry date of license (eToken) Each dataset has an expiry date. a) Licensing by Credit When credit is used (paid), the license of all datasets can take effect. The fees for date sets are different depending on the type. Dataset opened date Available Unavailable 3/6/9/12 months

(Contract period) Expiry date of dataset Available Unavailable Available Future 3/6/9/12 months

(Contract period) Expiry date of dataset Future 3/6/9/12 months

(Contract period) Dataset reopened Dataset A Dataset B b) Reporting The customer using Dynamic Licensing must send a report to Real Time Updating (RTU) Service. The reporting interval is set to maximum 2 weeks. If no report is sent after 2 weeks, C-Map Ed.3 charts will no longer be displayed. Dataset A Dataset opened date Dataset B Dataset opened date Expiry date of dataset Dataset C Expiry date of dataset Send a report within 2 weeks Future Future Future 4-5 c) During the time when Dynamic License is being used, the following caution is displayed daily in ECDIS screen. 4-6 4.3 Importing C-MAP Ed.3 There are several types of CM-93/3 Electronic Chart Database, including World, ENC and Professional+. The following example of implementation method shows an import operation using ENC. Import operation can be performed in the same manner for other databases. Caution:

4.3.1 Importing C-MAP Ed.3 Charts 1) Insert the chart database disc into the CD/DVD drive in advance. 2) Click the [Chart Maintenance] button on Task Menu. 3) In the Home window, click the [Import / Update charts] button. 4)

[Import / Update charts] Button In the Chart Category Selection window, click the [C-MAP] button.

[C-MAP] Button 4-7

[Databases] Tab 5) The C-MAP Chart Manager window appears while the [Databases] tab is being selected. 6) Click the [Search automatically] button.

[Search automatically] Button 4-8 7) The Automatic database search window appears, so select the data drive browse destination and then click the [Search] button.

[Search] Button 8) A database is displayed in the right pane of the window, so click the [Check signature] button after checking it. 9) Signature check is executed. Click the [OK] button after checking is completed.

[Check signature] Button Checking starts. Confirm completion. 4-9 10) Click the [Register database] button. 11) A confirmation dialog appears, so click the [Yes] button. 12) Select a save destination folder, Click the [OK] button.

[Register database] Button D:\MFD\Data\cm93_3\ENC Select a folder. 4-10 Copying starts. Copying takes about 20 min. If the overwrite confirmation pop-up is displayed, click on the [Yes] button. 13) Click the [OK] button after copying is completed. 14) To import continuously, repeat the same procedure from the beginning. Check the chart database name, released date and path. 4-11 15) Click the [Close] button after importing is completed. 4-12 4.3.2 Importing Licences When importing/exporting files using USB memory, be sure to check for viruses on USB memory in advance. If the ECDIS is infected with a virus, it will affect other devices, leading to failures. Never leave USB memory in the USB port. It may cause malfunction. Copy the licence file (password.usr) sent by Jeppesen in advance to USB memory and insert it into the USB port of the main body of the ECDIS. 4.3.2.1 In the Case of Static Licence In the Home window, click the [Import / Update Licence file] button. 1) Click the [Chart Maintenance] button on Task Menu. 2)

[Import / Update Licence file]

Button 4-13

[C-MAP] Button

[Licenses] Tab In the Chart Category Selection window, click the [C-MAP] button. 3) 4) Click the [Licenses] tab in the C-MAP Chart Manager window. 4-14 5) Select a database and then click the [Import from file] button.

[Import from file] Button 6) Select [password.usr] and then click the [Open] button. Select password.usr. Caution:

When a license is provided by e-mail, save the password.usr file (License) attached to e-mail into USB memory. Insert USB memory and select the USB drive.

- Save only the password.usr file into USB memory.

- If the password.usr file is compressed, decompress it and then save it to USB memory. 4-15 7) When the following dialog box appears, click the [OK] button. 8) Check the installation result as shown below. Check Coverage and Expiry Date. Select [Show all]. 4-16 In the Case of Dynamic Licence 4.3.2.2 Dynamic License must be activated by importing the answer file acquired from Real Time Updating (RTU) Service. Via Real Time Updating (RTU) Service Importing the answer file for the activation of Dynamic Licensing by e-mail Order Send User C-MAP RTU Server ECDIS Create an order file (e.g. JRC eT 30001.ord) with C-MAP Chart Manager and save it into USB memory. Attach the order file to e-mail and send it to the RTU server (e-mail:updates@c-map.no). Update Receive ECDIS User C-MAP RTU Server e-mail is automatically processed by the RTUserver and an answer file is returned. (Example:

u001x002.ans) Save the answer file into USB memory and then import the answer file with C-MAP Chart Manager. C-MAP RTU server e-mail address e-mail: updates@c-map.no 4-17

[Import / Update Licence file]

Button

[C-MAP] Button

[Updates] Tab In the Home window, click the [Import / Update Licence file] button. In the Chart Category Selection window, click the [C-MAP] button. 1) Click the [Chart Maintenance] button on Task Menu. 2) 3) 4) Click the [Updates] tab in the C-MAP Chart Manager window. 4-18 Insert USB memory into the USB port. 5) 6) Click the [Create update order] button. 7) Check [All available zones] and click the [Save] button.

[Create update order] Button Select the check box.

[Save] Button 4-19 8) Select [Removable Disk] you inserted and Click [OK] button. 9) The order file is saved to USB memory. Click the [OK] button. 4-20 10) Attach the saved order file (JRC eT *****.ord) to e-mail and send it to the RTU server (e-mail:

updates@c-map.no). e-mail is automatically processed by the RTU server and an answer file is returned. (Example:

u001x002.ans)

(1) Send " JRC eT *****.ord" you have saved.

(2) You receive an answer file. User C-MAP RTU Server RTU server e-mail address: updates@c-map.no File name convention uXXXxYYY.ans One "*.ans" file is attached to each e-mail. YYY: Number of files XXX: File number Example: 4 divisions u001x004.ans u002x004.ans u003x004.ans u004x004.ans Caution:

Check your number in e-mail from C-MAP (updates@c-map.no) . 11) Save the received answer file to USB memory. 12) Insert USB memory containing the answer file you saved into the USB port. Caution:

Save answer files in the root directory of USB memory. 4-21 13) Click the [Update from file] button. 14) Select [Removable Disk] you inserted and then click the [OK] button.

[Update from file] Button 15) The answer file is imported. (Dynamic License takes effect.) 4-22 16) Select the [Dynamic Licensing] tab, and confirm increased credit balance. 17) Check [Enable Dynamic Licensing] and Click the [Close] button.

[Close] Button 4-23

[Route Planning / Route Monitoring (ECDIS)] Button 4.3.3 Checking Chart Display 1) On Task Menu, click the [Route Planning / Route Monitoring (ECDIS)] button. 2) In the ECDIS screen, click the [Menu] button.

[Menu] Button 4-24 3) In the Menu window, select [View] [Options] in this order.

[View] button

[Options] button 4) Select [Chart Common]. Change the page to page 2 by clicking on the [Next] button and set the checkbox of the database to be used to ON in C-MAP Ed.3 Database. Chart Common

[Next] button C-MAP Ed.3 Database:

Set the checkbox of the database to be used to ON. 4-25 5) Click [Chart View]. In Chart Type on the [View1] tab, click the [C-MAP3] button.

[View1] Tab

[C-MAP3] Button Chart View 6) Click the [] button to close the [View] - [Options] window. 4-26 4.4 Updating C-MAP Ed.3 Charts 4.4.1 Updating C-MAP Ed.3 Charts by Using CD (or DVD) Caution:

There are several types of CM-93/3 Electronic Chart Database, including World, ENC and Professional+. The following example of implementation method shows an import operation using Professional+. Import operation can be performed in the same manner for other databases. In the Home window, click the [Import / Update charts] button. 1) Click the [Chart Maintenance] button on Task Menu. 2) 3) In the Chart Category Selection window, click the [C-MAP] button.

[Import / Update charts]

Button

[C-MAP] Button 4-27

[Databases] Tab 4) The C-MAP Chart Manager window appears while the [Databases] tab is being selected. 5) 6) Click the [Update database] button. Insert the C-MAP Ed.3 DVD-ROM into the DVD drive.

[Update database] Button 4-28 7) The Automatic Database Update window appears and update starts automatically. 8) When update is completed, click the [Close] button. Check completion.

[Close] Button 4-29 4.4.2 Updating C-MAP Ed.3Charts with RTU Real Time Updating (RTU) Service The Real Time Updating (RTU) Service updates the CM-93/3 chart databases via e -mail using the RTU server. Updating C-MAP Ed. 3 Charts via e-mail Order ECDIS Send User C-MAP RTU Server Create an order file (e.g. JRC eT 30001.ord) with C-MAP Chart Manager and save it into USB memory. Attach the order file to e-mail and send it to the RTU server (e-mail:updates@c-map.no). Update Receive ECDIS User C-MAP RTU Server e-mail is automatically processed by the RTUserver and an answer file is returned. (Example:

u001x002.ans) Save the answer file into USB memory and then update the CM-93/3 chart database with C-MAP Chart Manager. C-MAP RTU server e-mail address e-mail: updates@c-map.no 4-30

[Import / Update charts]

Button

[C-MAP] Button

[Updates] Tab In the Chart Category Selection window, click the [C-MAP] button. In the Home window, click the [Import / Update charts] button. 1) Click the [Chart Maintenance] button on Task Menu. 2) 3) 4) Click the [Updates] button in the Home window. 4-31 Insert USB memory into the USB port. 5) 6) Select the database from [Select database] tab. 7) Click the [Create update order] button. 8) Check [All available zones] and click the [Save] button.

[Create update order] Button

[Save] button 4-32 9) Select [Removable Disk] you inserted and then click the [OK] button. Save complete pop-up is displayed. Click the [OK] button. 4-33 10) Attach the saved order file (JRC eT *****.ord) to e-mail and send it to the RTU server

(e-mail:updates@c-map.no). e-mail is automatically processed by the RTU server and an answer file is returned. (Example:

u001x002.ans)

(1) Send " JRC eT *****.ord" you have saved.

(2) You receive an answer file. User C-MAP RTU Server RTU server e-mail address: updates@c-map.no Caution:

Check your number in e-mail from C-MAP (updates@c-map.no) . One "*.ans YYY: Number of files XXX: File number uXXXxYYY.ans File name convention file is attached to each e-mail. Ex: 4 divisions u001x004.ans u002x004.ans u003x004.ans u004x004.ans 11) Save the received answer file to USB memory. 12) Insert a USB memory where you saved the answer file. Caution:

Be sure to save answer files in the root directory of USB memory. 4-34 13) Click the [Update from file] button. 14) Select [Update folder] from the folder of the USB memory that was inserted and click the [OK] button.

[Update from file] Button 4-35 15) C-MAP charts are updated. Click the [OK] button. 16) Check the updated charts and then click the [Close] button.

[Close] Button 4-36 4.5 Reporting the Use of Dynamic License Caution:

The customer must send a report to Real Time Updating (RTU) Service. The reporting interval is set to maximum 2 weeks. If no report is sent after 2 weeks, C-Map Ed.3 charts will no longer be displayed.

[Import/Update charts]

Button In the Home window, click the [Import/Update charts] button. 4.5.1 Checking the Next Report Date 1) Click the [Chart Maintenance] button on Task Menu. 2) 3) In the Chart Category Selection window, click the [C-MAP] button. 4-37

[C-MAP] Button

[Dynamic Licensing] Tab 4) In the C-MAP Chart Manager window, click the [Dynamic Licensing] tab. 5) Check Next Report Date and Non-reported datasets. Next Report Date Non-reported datasets 4.5.2 Reporting the Use of Dynamic License The reporting procedure is the same as for the license import, so please see "4.3.2.2 In the Case of Dynamic License". 4-38 In the Home window, click the [Import/Update Licence file] button. 4.6 Checking the License 4.6.1 In the Case of Static License 1) Click the [Chart Maintenance] button on Task Menu. 2) 3) In the Chart Category Selection window, click the [C-MAP] button.

[Import/Update Licence file] Button

[C-MAP] Button 4-39

[Licenses] Tab In the C-MAP Chart Manager window, click the [Licenses] tab. 4) 5) Check the installation result as shown below. 6) After checking, click the [Close] button. 4-40

[Import/Update Licence file]

Button In the Home window, click the [Import/Update Licence file] button. 4.6.2 In the Case of Dynamic License 1) Click the [Chart Maintenance] button on Task Menu. 2) 3) In the Chart Category Selection window, click the [C-MAP] button.

[C-MAP] Button 4-41 In the C-MAP Chart Manager window, click the [Dynamic Licensing] tab.

[Dynamic Licensing] Tab 4) 5) Select [Dynamic Licensing] tab and check [Reported datasets] and [Non-reported datasets]. 6) After checking, click the [Close] button. 4-42 In the Chart Category Selection window, click the [C-MAP] button. 4.7 Checking the Update List In the Home window, click the [Import/Update charts] button. 1) Click the [Chart Maintenance] button on Task Menu. 2) 3)

[Import/Update charts]

Button

[C-MAP] Button 4-43

[Updates] Tab 4) The C-MAP Chart Manager window appears while the [Updates] tab is being selected. 5) From the drop down list of the selected database, check the applied updates.

: Issue source

: Chart name

: Update unit

: Object 4-44 6 Click the [Review updating log] button.

[Review updating log] Button 7) Check the Review Updating Log that appears. 8) After checking, click the [Close] button. 4-45 4.8 Deleting C-MAP Ed.3 Charts and Licence If the contents of a contract have changed when the license is update in C-Map Ed.3 (e.g. when updating to register from a trial license to a regular license), the expired license also remains in the data; thus, a license expiration message will be displayed each time ECDIS is started. Using the following procedure, please delete the database and expired license to prevent this message from appearing, and also register only a new license.

[Import/Update charts]

Button

[C-MAP] Button In the Chart Category Selection window, click the [C-MAP] button. In the Home window, click the [Import/Update charts] button. 1) Click the [Chart Maintenance] button on Task Menu. 2) 3) 4-46

[Databases] Tab 4) Click the [Databases] tab in the Chart Manager window. 5) Select the database that you want to delete and then click the [Unregister database] button.

[Unregister database] Button 4-47 6) Check the deletion of the database. 7) After checking, click the [Close] button. 4-48

[Import/Update charts]

Button In the Home window, click the [Import/Update charts] button. In the Chart Category Selection window, click the [C-MAP] button. 4.9 Checking eToken Devices 4.9.1 Checking the System ID of Chart Manager 1) Click the [Chart Maintenance] button on Task Menu. 2) 3)

[C-MAP] Button 4-49

[System Info] Tab In the C-MAP Chart Manager window, click the [System Info] tab. 4) 5) Check [System ID]. 6) After checking, click the [Close] button.

*) Clicking [Export user file] will export the [USER.USR] file. The [USER.USR] file contains the following information.

[User]

System ID=JeT JRC 70005 User Key=eToken

*This is sample data. 4-50 4.10 Using Check Status Check Status provides the following functions. Display a list of imported charts information. 4.10.1 How to Start Check Status On Task Menu, start Check Status according to the following procedure. 1) Click the [Chart Maintenance] button on Task Menu. 2) In the Home window, click the [Check Status] button. The Check Status window appears.

[Check Status] Button 3) Click the [C-MAP] button in the Check Status window.

[C-MAP] Button 4-51 4.10.2 Configuration of the Check Status Window The Check Status window consists of the Status List window. Status List Window: Displays a list of imported charts and chart licence information. When the chart type is C-MAP, these buttons are disabled. Used to change chart type Import/Update button:

Chart type button:

screen. For import, refer to 4.3 Importing C-MAP Ed.3 and for update, refer to 4.4 Updating C-MAP Ed.3 Charts. Import/update the chart and licence on the C-MAP Chart Manager Folder list display:

Displays the folder containing imported charts. Chart list display:

Displays a list of imported charts.

[Delete] button:

When the chart type is C-MAP, this button is disabled. Delete a chart and a licence on the C-MAP Chart Manager screen. Refer to 4.8 Deleting C-MAP Ed.3 Charts and Licence. Cell information:

Displays the cell information of the chart. 4-52 Section 5 Troubleshooting The symptoms mentioned in the section Symptom/Cause/Countermeasure may occur in connection with chart importing/updating. The symptoms are NOT ECDIS malfunctions. Caution:

1. Symptom/Cause/Countermeasure (common) Symptom Cause Countermeasure Message Chart database is not found. Select the data path manually. is displayed in Chart Maintenance. CD -ROM is not inserted into a CD/DVD-ROM drive. CD/DVD-ROM is not Chart CD. Path setting is wrong. License has expired. Insert Chart CD into a CD/DVD-ROM drive. Press [Select path] to set the path as the correct position. Import the latest License within the expiration date. Chart cannot be imported in Chart Maintenance. An attempt is made to import chart without importing license. Press [Import / Update Licence file] in Chart Maintenance to import license. 5-1 2. Symptom/Cause/Countermeasure (S-57/63) Symptom Cause Countermeasure S-57/S-63 chart is not dis-

played. S-57/S-63 chart is not selected. Select S-57/S-63 chart (Select [Menu] -

[View] - [Options] - [Chart View]). Refer to Reference Document 4:

Method for Selecting Chart. Refer to the attached document Reference Document 1:

Alert Information of S-57/S63 Chart. Insert the CD containing a chart with license in the CD/DVD-ROM drive. Import correct cell permit. Use the correct CD or import correct cell permit. Refer to the cause of the attached document Reference Document 1:

Alert Information of S-57/S63 Chart. The CD does not contain a chart with license. Cell permit has not been imported. Cell permit has been deleted. Data server ID written in serial.enc that is included in CD is different from Data server ID written in Cell Permit. Cell permits has expired. Register the latest cell permits. There are some cell permits that will expire within 30 days. Register the latest cell permits. SA Certificate file has expired. Import the unexpired SA Certificate file. Selected SA is Certificate supplied from the Non-IHO. There is no problem in chart importing. The Error message, Error:

xxx, is displayed on the Check Status screen of Chart Maintenance. Chart cannot be imported in Chart Maintenance. Chart cannot be imported in Chart Maintenance. Message Warning: SSE 10 -

Permits not available for this data provider. is displayed in Chart Maintenance Message "Warning: SSE 15 -

Subscription service has expired. Please contact your data supplier to renew the subscription licence." is displayed in Chart Maintenance. Message Warning: SSE 20 -

Subscription service will expire in less than 30 days. Please contact your data supplier to renew the subscription license. is displayed in Chart Maintenance. Message Error: SSE 22 - SA Digital Certificate file has expired. A new SA Public Key

(certificate) can be obtained from the IHO website or your data supplier. is displayed in Chart Maintenance. Message SSE 26 - This ENC is not authenticated by the IHO acting as the Scheme Administrator. is displayed in Chart Maintenance. Corrupted chart has been imported. Re-Import the chart. See Reference Document 6: Re-Import the ENC chart, ARCS chart. 5-2 3. Symptom/Cause/Countermeasure (ARCS) Symptom Cause Countermeasure Chart is imported when the term of validity of ARCS has expired. Expired Permit has been registered. ARCS chart is not displayed. PIN input was canceled when ECDIS was started. ARCS chart is not selected. Register the latest Chart Permit within the expiration date, and then import ARCS chart. Enter PIN number when starting ECDIS and select ARCS chart.

(Select [Menu] -[View] - [Options] - [Chart View]) Select ARCS chart (Select [Menu] - [View]

- [Options] - [Chart View]). Refer to Reference Document 4: Method for Selecting Chart. ARCS chart will not be dis-

played, though it has been displayed normally by that time. Permit has been shifted from trial version to regular version. Contact the retailer from whom the chart was purchased to check the details of the contract. Alert occurs frequently while ARCS chart is displayed. ECDIS has detected the alert information regarding ARCS chart itself and displayed the alert. Check the details of the alert. See Reference Document 2:

Alert Information of ARCS Chart. Clean the CD/DVD-ROM drive. Refer to Reference Document 3:

Method for Cleaning by the lens cleaner for CD/DVD drive Perform the import procedure again and if the error persists, the CD/DVD-ROM drive may be out of order. Contact the JRC sales representative to request repair of the CD/DVD-ROM drive. Insert CD-ROM into other PC. When CD-ROM is not loaded into other PC, CD-ROM may be out of order. Contact the distributor of the chart to request for replacement of CD-ROM. Reading from CD-ROM was incorrect. Error code (0xFFFFFF73) is displayed while ARCS chart is imported in Chart Portfolio. CD-ROM was incorrect. 5-3 Symptom Cause Countermeasure ARCS chart permit cannot be imported. File name of Chart permit is wrong. E.g. Backup gb.lcn / Backup gb.ncp File contract of Chart permit is wrong. E.g. Renamed Zipped Chart permit (*.zip) to gb.lcn / gb.ncp Import the Chart permit after renaming to gb.lcn / gb.ncp. Unzip the Chart permit to correct files, gb.lcn / gb.ncp. Unnecessary code is added to the permit sent by e-mail when downloading to USB memory. Download the permit to USB memory without opening other application software. If the symptom is not clear, contact to chart distributor. ARCS Chart cannot import. Chart permit is not correct. Corrupted chart has been imported. Compare the permit with permit number assigned with ECDIS. See 3.7.3 Checking ARCS User Permit in this manual. If the symptom is not clear, contact to chart distributor. Re-Import the chart. See Reference Document 6: Re-Import the ENC chart, ARCS chart. 5-4 4. Symptom/Cause/Countermeasure (C-MAP Ed.3) Symptom Cause Countermeasure C-MAP Ed.3 chart is not dis-

played. License has been Expired. C-MAP Ed.3 chart is not selected. e-Token(communication error) warning is displayed under ECDIS screen. The eToken device could not be identified. The eToken device is disconnected. Chart is not imported. eToken license is not registered. Media type (DVD or CD) of database and license do not match. The license is not correct. Message No license installed. is displayed under ECDIS screen. License has not yet been installed. Register the latest license within the expiration date, and then import C-MAP Ed.3 charts. Select C-MAP Ed.3 chart (Select Menu-

[View] - [Options] - [Chart View(ECDIS)]). Refer to Reference Document 4: Method for Selecting Chart. Restart the device. If the device is not recovered even if restart is attempted three times, turn off the power supply of the device and contact the distributor. Contact the distributor. Before registering the license, import Chart. The license depends on the media type

(DVD or CD) of chart. Connect chart distributor to request computerized license. Check the eToken device number. Connect chart distributor to request computerized license. Register the license in C-MAP Chart Manager. Refer to 4.3.2 Importing License. Message One or more licenses expired. Please contact your Jeppesen Marine agent for a license renewal. is displayed under ECDIS screen. Message One or more licenses will expire at YYYY-MM-DD. Please contact your Jeppesen Marine agent for a license renewal. is displayed under ECDIS screen. The license is invalid. Contact the distributor of Jeppesen Marine for updating the license. The chart is displayed only for 15 minutes after it is started. The license will expire on YYYY/DD/MM. It will expire in less than 2 months. Contact the distributor of Jeppesen Marine for updating the license. 5-5 5. The reference about a chart Refer to the following purchase of chart, contract, and service. UKHO (ARCS, S63) URL: http://www.admiralty.co.uk/

e-mail: customerservices@ukho.gov.uk C-MAP (Ed3) URL: http://www.jeppesen.com/marine e-mail: info.marine@jeppesen.com 5-6 Reference Document 1:

Alert Information of S-57/S63 Chart This section explains the details of the alarm information that may appear inside the log window of Chart Status while S-57/S-63 chart is imported/updated on ECDIS. Errors that are displayed on the log window Cause Countermeasure CRC value error of the chart file Exchange target data error File structure error Chart object topology error Chart area object link error Line object link error Outside of the chart object boundary Sequential number sequence error Link structure Error message No. 1 Error: CRC 2 Error: Exchange 3 Error: Data 4 Error: Topology 5 Error: Area Object 6 Error: Line Object 7 Error: Object outside range 8 Error: Sequential number error. 9 Error: File not 10 Error: Data not 11 Error: Data error found Link found Offset Address There is no chart that is defined in the chart CD catalog file. The chart CD does not contain any specified data. File data error Attribute value error of the object that is defined in the chart file Internal memory address (instruction section) error Internal memory offset (instruction section) error 12 Error: Attribute 13 Error: Instruction 14 Error: Instruction 15 Error: PL Rule 16 Error: PL Rule 17 Error: Attribute 18 Error: Enc File 19 Error: Object Class 20 Error: Directory 21 Error: Memory get There is no SENC chart object name. SENC chart file size acquisition error 22 Error: Index get SENC file write error Data acquisition error (PL rule section) Acquisition error of attribute data of chart object Chart Object information acquisition error Memory allocation error (PL rule section) File path error Information Information Memory create write get 5-7 Fatal error of chart CD. The chart can neither be imported nor updated. Clean CD/DVD-ROM and import the chart again. If the error is displayed again, contact the chart supplier. Not a chart CD fatal error. Chart CD fatal error. The chart can neither be imported nor updated. Clean CD/DVD-ROM and import the chart again. If the error is displayed again, contact the chart supplier. Contact the distributor. Contact the distributor. No. Error message Cause Countermeasure Fatal error of chart CD. The chart can neither be imported nor updated. Clean CD/DVD-ROM and import the chart again. If the error is displayed again, contact the chart supplier. Contact the distributor. Fatal error of chart CD. The chart can neither be imported nor updated. Clean CD/DVD-ROM and import the chart again. If the error is displayed again, contact the chart supplier. 23 Error: Object not found SENC chart file acquisition error size data change) error SENC warning file size acquisition error 24 Error: Chart Cell 25 Error: Chart Cell SENC warning file acquisition error 26 Error: Object index Chart CD data structure (FFPC field 27 Error: FFPC delete Chart CD data structure (FSPC field deletion) error Chart CD data structure (FSPC field change) error 30 Error: FSPC edit 31 Error: VRPC 28 Error: FFPC edit 29 Error: FSPC delete Chart CD data structure (VRPC field deletion) error Chart CD data structure (VRPC field change) error Chart CD data structure (SGCC field deletion) error Chart CD data structure (SGCC field change) error Chart CD data structure (coordinate type) error Chart CD chart point object error 32 Error: VRPC edit 33 Error: SGCC 34 Error: SGCC edit 35 Error: Coordinate 36 Error: Point 37 Error: Edition 38 Error: Data Length Chart CD catalog file structure error 39 Error: File extention SENC chart file size acquisition error There is no chart object of SENC. Chart CD edition number error Chart CD file extension error number delete delete Type get 40 Error: File count 0 41 Error: Object data 42 Error: Field Tag 43 Error: Chart area The chart CD does not contain any chart file. Chart CD object information acquisition error Chart CD field tag information error Chart CD chart area information error 5-8 Reference Document 2:

Alert Information of ARCS Chart This document provides a notice about alert messages displayed on ECDIS when opening ARCS chart. When ARCS chart is displayed on ECDIS, chart-related alerts may occur frequently. It is obligated to display these alerts on ECDIS, and such frequent occurrence of the alerts is not the result of a malfunction of ECDIS. Alerts that appear when displaying ARCS chart No. Error Message Countermeasure Timing of occurrence/Display position 1

[ARCS01] The contents of the GB.LCN file have been altered. You may be in breach of the licensing arrangements that relate to the use of the chart. License is invalid. Please contact your ARCS agent/distributor to correct this error 2

[ARCS02] Chart Permit corrupted. Please reload original media. Contact your ARCS agent/distributor to request a valid license. The current license has been altered and is invalid. Displayed in the Check Status log at chart import. Re-register Chart Permit as the data are incorrect. If the re-registration does not restore the status, contact your ARCS agent/distributor to request a valid license. Displayed in the Check Status log at chart import 3 4 5

[ARCS03] Chart Chart#. Update information relates to a newer version of the chart. Please load the chart media that contains Chart#

with an issue date of RCID. Import the latest Chart Media and Update Media. The chart version of Update CD is different from the version of imported chart.

[ARCS04] Chart Chart#. The chart data already incorporates this update information. Please load the latest update media. Import the latest Chart Media and Update Media. The data contained in the Update Media inserted have already been imported. Displayed in the Check Status log at chart import Displayed in the Check Status log at chart import

[ARCS05] Chart Chart#. License expired updating is not permitted. Please contact your agent to re-new license. Contact your agent to renew the license. Chart updating is not permitted because the license has already expired. Displayed in the Check Status log at chart import 5-9 No. Error Message Countermeasure Timing of occurrence/Display position 6 7 8 9

[ARCS08] Warning License expired in less than one month. Please contact your ARCS agent for a license renewal.

[ARCS09] Chart Chart#. Warning License expired. The displayed chart may not be up to date. Contact your Agent to arrange for a license renewal.

[ARCS10] Chart Chart#. License expired. ARCS charts can not be displayed. Contact your ARCS agent for a license renewal. Contact your ARCS agent to renew the license, as it will expire in less than one month. Displayed in a dialog box when displaying a chart Contact your ARCS agent to renew the license. The license

(Chart Permit) expired within the past month. Contact your ARCS agent to renew the license. ARCS charts cannot be displayed because its been more than one month since the license (Chart Permit) expired. Displayed in a dialog box when displaying a chart Displayed in a dialog box when displaying a chart

[ARCS11] Chart Chart#. The loaded version of this chart is too old to be used with the license. Please load a more recent version of the chart. Chart version is Enc#, Permit version is Penc#. Import the latest version of Chart Permit and Chart Media. ARCS charts cannot be displayed because the Encryption Number of chart is different from the Permitted Encryption Number. Displayed in a dialog box when displaying a chart 10

[ARCS12] Chart Chart#. The license is too old to be used with this version of the chart. Please contact your agent to obtain a new license. Contact the agent to supply a new chart permit. The chart encoding version number does not match the chart permit encoding version number. The chart is not displayed. Displayed in a dialog box when displaying a chart 11 Larger scale RNC available for the area of the vessel For more detailed information on the area, a larger-scale chart can be displayed. Displayed in the Alert Status area when displaying a chart 12 Chart Shift 13 Chart Shift to WGS84 Be careful. Positions on the currently displayed chart are shifted based on the users setting. Displayed in the Alert Status area when displaying a chart Be careful. Positions on the currently displayed chart are shifted. Position data of the currently displayed chart have been transformed from a geographic coordinate system other than WGS-84 into WGS-84 based on the offset value of chart data. Displayed in the Alert Status area when displaying a chart 5-10 No. Error Message Countermeasure Timing of occurrence/Display position 14 WGS84 position cannot be related accurately to chart Chart#. 15 Loading Different Datum Chart 16 Loaded unknown datum chart 17 Illegal PIN Be careful. The geographic coordinate system of currently displayed chart is not WGS-84, and positions on the chart are not shifted to WGS-84 because the chart data have no offset value. Be careful. A chart with a geographic coordinate system other than WGS-84 is currently displayed. Displayed in a dialog box when displaying a chart Displayed in the Alert Status area when displaying a chart Be careful. A chart with an unknown geographic coordinate system is currently displayed. Displayed in the Alert Status area when displaying a chart Check your Personal Identification Number (PIN). The number you entered is incorrect. Displayed in a dialog box upon entering PIN to start ECDIS. 5-11 Reference Document 3:

Method for Cleaning by the lens cleaner for CD/DVD drive When the lens of the CD/DVD-ROM drive is dirty, CD cannot be read correctly. Clean the lens according to the following procedure. Clean the lens according to the following procedure. Insert the attached CD-ROM lens cleaner in the CD/DVD drive. 1) This is a sample. Use the attached cleaner. 2) Select [Menu] [Maintenance] [DVD Drive Cleaning]. 3) The DVD Drive Cleaning dialog appears, then cleaning starts. Execute cleaning for several minutes. 5-12 4) When the termination announcement is issued, terminate cleaning by clicking the [OK] button or [x]

button. 5) Remove the CD-ROM lens cleaner from the CD/DVD drive. 5-13 Reference Document 4:

Method for Selecting Chart Select the type of the chart to be displayed in ECDIS screen. 1) Start the equipment by pressing the Power button. 2) Click the [Route Planning / Route Monitoring (ECDIS)] button from the task menu.

[Route Planning / Route Monitoring (ECDIS)] button 3) On the ECDIS screen, click the [Menu] button.

[Menu] button 5-14 4) Select [View] [Options] on the Menu screen in that order.

[View] button

[Options] button

*Use the following procedure 5) when using the C-MAP Ed.3 chart. When using a chart other than the C-MAP Ed.3 chart, proceed with the next procedure 6). 5) Select Chart Common. Then click the [Next] button to switch to Page 2/2. After that, set the checkbox of the database to be used to ON in C-MAP Ed.3 Database. Chart Common

[Next] button C-MAP Ed.3 Database Set the checkbox of the database to be used to ON. 5-15 6) Select Chart View. Select the chart to be used by using Chart Type of the [View1] tab.

[View1] tab Select the chart to be used. Example: In the following case, C-MAP Ed.3 is selected. Chart View 7) Click the [] button to close the [View] [Options] screen. Caution:

When [X] is selected (clicked) from the [ARCS PIN] panel without inputting ARCS PIN, the ARCS item of Chart View is disabled, so that the item cannot be selected. When displaying the ARCS chart, be sure to enter ARCS PIN from the [ARCS PIN] panel. Enter ARCS PIN. 5-16 Reference Document 5: C-MAP Chart Manager This document describes functions included in C-MAP Chart Manager for C-Map. Databases Tab

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7)

(8)

(1)

(1) All registered databases are displayed in the Registered databases list. Columns in the list are:

Default Database The database name

# The database issue number. The large the database issue number, the later is its release date and more up-to-date data it contains. Released Release date of the database Path Path to the database location Besides changing a database priority and adding databases to the view or deleting them from the view, the following operations with databases are possible:

(2) Search automatically Register New CM93/3 Database from DVD-ROM drive.

(3) Register manually Do not use this function.

(4) Update database Renew CM93/3 Database.

(5) Unregister database Unregisters a specified database. The database will not be displayed until it is registered again. Destroys the license applied for the database. If you register this database later, you will need to apply the license for it again.

(6) Check signature This operation checks the consistency of the selected database. (whether all data are correct.)

(7) Check integrity This operation checks the consistency of the update of the selected database. (whether all data are correct.) 5-17

(1)

(8) Set as Default Do not use this function Licenses Tab

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7)

(8)

(1) Selected database Import license data or select the database to be displayed.

(2) License list Coverage Contracted zone Expiry The expire date

(3) Add manually Do not use this function.

(4) Import from file Use to apply License file (static license).

(5) Delete selected Delete specified license.

(6) Show options Always select Show all. 5-18 Updates Tab

(1)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7)

(2)

(1) Selected database Select database to be updated.

(2) Updates The list on the right part of the panel displays a four level directory tree. The first level of the directory tree is the list of hydrographic offices that have issued the received updates. The second level is the list of chart numbers or corresponding datasets to which the updates have been applied. The third level is the list of update files containing the updates (the third level entry consists of the update file number, update file issue date, and system ID of the update dataset). The fourth level is the list of updated objects.

: Publisher

: Chart name

: Update unit

: Object Updates by Hydrographic offices Shown tree by each HO. Chart updates report Displays tree of each chart.

(3) View available updates Do not use this function.

(4) Update via Internet Do not use this function.

(5) Update from file Imports update file that was received via e-mail. Imports Dynamic license that was received via e-mail. 5-19

(6) Create update order. Creates order file for request updating. Creates report file for Dynamic license.

(7) Review updating log Displays update history. Dynamic Licensing Tab

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(8)

(6)

(7)

(9)

(1) Enable Dynamic Licensing Do not use this function.

(2) Credit Rest The rest of credit in the dongle, this value is sent to you each time you receive updates in a confirmation answer.

(3) Next Report Date The date when the next report should be sent to C-Map.

(4) Confirmation Date The date when the last confirmation answer was received.

(5) Refresh Refresh Next Report / Confirmation Date.

(6) Available Databases The list of databases that can be dynamically licensed.

(7) Available Collections The list of chart collections of a specified database which were indicated in the dynamic licensing agreement with C-Map.

(8) Reported datasets The list of reported datasets (names and access expiry dates). 5-20

(9) Non-reported datasets The list of datasets that were viewed but are not reported yet (names and date of first use). Network Config Tab

(1)

(2)

(1) Select the New State Always select Server, do not change to Client.

(2) Do not change any other setting. 5-21 System Info Tab

(1)

(2)

(3)

(1) System ID Show eToken ID.

(2) Installed runtime version Show version of draw engine. (for engineer)

(3) Export Chart Database Status Do not use this function. 5-22 Reference Document 6:

Re-Import the ENC chart, ARCS chart caution All ENC chart and ARCS chart imported already are deleted by the operation. In the case of emergency (e.g. when corrupted chart has been imported), the operation should be done. License and chart data of C-MAP Ed.3 Charts not delete. This section describes method of re-importing the ENC chart and ARCS chart. Re-import ENC chart 1) Click on the password input section on Task Menu. A password input dialog is displayed. Password input section 2) ENC cell permit is exported to USB flash memory. Enter the password, 2222. 5-23 3) Confirmation dialog box appears, folder name for exporting is displayed. Default setting for the folder name is (serial number)_(YYYYMMDD)(current time). Folder name can change by clicking folder name input box. Folder name input box 4) Click on the [OK] button, then cell permit file is exported to above folder in USB flash memory. When completed, Task Menu is displayed. 5) Click on the password input section. A password input dialog is displayed. 6) Enter the password, 5739. Then, a confirmation dialog box appears. 7) When click on the [OK] button, deleting start. 8) When delete is completed, a confirmation dialog box appears. Click on the [OK] button. Then, the software restarts and displays Task Menu automatically. 5-24 9) After restart, the dialog shown below appears on Task Menu. All chart data is deleted, so repair the index of chart data. Click on the [OK] button. When repair completed, Task Menu is display. 10) Import the ENC cell permit and ENC chart. Re-import ARCS chart 1) Click on the password input section on Task Menu. A password input dialog is displayed. 2) Enter the password, 0939. Then, a confirmation dialog box appears. 3) When click on the [OK] button, deleting start. 4) When delete is completed, a confirmation dialog box appears. Click on the [OK] button. Then, the software restarts and displays Task Menu automatically. Import the ARCS chart permit and ARCS chart. 5) 5-25 1 2 3 4 5 Procedures for Starting and Exiting Chart Maintenance Using ENC Charts ARCS Charts Using C-MAP Ed.3 Charts Troubleshooting JMR-7200/9200 Series JAN-7201/9201 Marine Radar Equipment ECDIS Additional Manual for Chart Installation For further information,contact:

URL http://www.jrc.co.jp Marine Service Department Telephone :

Facsimile :

e-mail :

+81-3-3492-1305

+81-3-3779-1420 tmsc@jrc.co.jp SEATTLE Branch Telephone :

Facsimile :

e-mail :

+1-206-654-5644

+1-206-654-7030 marineservice@jrcamerica.com URL http://www.alphatronmarine.com Rotterdam (Head office) Alphatron Marine B.V. Telephone :

Facsimile :

e-mail :

+31 (0)10- 453 4000

+31 (0)10- 452 9214 service@alphatronmarine.com Singapore Branch Alphatron Marine Systems Pte Ltd

+65 6863 0335

+65 6863 3305 service@alphatronmarinesystems.com Telephone :

Facsimile :

e-mail :

01ETM ISO 9001, ISO 14001 Certified JUL. 2015 Edition 3 JRC JUL. 2015 Edition 3 JRC Printed in Japan Not use the asbestos CODE No.7ZPNA4461A CODE No.7ZPNA4461A

 

 

JMR-9230-S/S3 JMR-9230-S/S3 JMR-9225-7X3/9X3/6X/9X/6XH JMR-9225-7X3/9X3/6X/9X/6XH JMR-9210-6X/6XH JMR-9210-6X/6XH JMR-9272-S JMR-9272-S JMR-9282-S/SH JMR-9282-S/SH JMR-7230-S/S3 JMR-7230-S/S3 JMR-7225-7X3/9X3/6X/9X/6XH JMR-7225-7X3/9X3/6X/9X/6XH JMR-7210-6X/6XH JMR-7210-6X/6XH JMR-7272-S JMR-7272-S JMR-7282-S/SH JMR-7282-S/SH JAN-9201 JAN-9201 JAN-7201 JAN-7201 JAN-9202 JAN-9202 JAN-7202 JAN-7202 MARINE RADAR EQUIPMENT MARINE RADAR EQUIPMENT ECDIS ECDIS CONNING DISPLAY CONNING DISPLAY FIELD SERVICE MANUAL FIELD SERVICE MANUAL For further information,contact:

URL http://www.jrc.co.jp Marine Service Department Telephone :

Facsimile :

e-mail :

+81-3-3492-1305

+81-3-3779-1420 tmsc@jrc.co.jp SEATTLE Branch Telephone :

Facsimile :

e-mail :

+1-206-654-5644

+1-206-654-7030 marineservice@jrcamerica.com URL http://www.alphatronmarine.com Rotterdam (Head office) Alphatron Marine B.V. Telephone :

Facsimile :

e-mail :

+31 (0)10- 453 4000

+31 (0)10- 452 9214 service@alphatronmarine.com Singapore Branch Alphatron Marine Systems Pte Ltd

+65 6863 0335

+65 6863 3305 service@alphatronmarinesystems.com Telephone :

Facsimile :

e-mail :

01ETM ISO 9001, ISO 14001 Certified JUL. 2015 Edition 3 JRC JUL. 2015 Edition 3 JRC Printed in Japan Not use the asbestos CODE No.7ZPNA4467A CODE No.7ZPNA4467A

PREFACE This Field Service Manual describes the structure, I/O specifications and method for maintenance of JMR-7200/JMR-9200 series and JAN-7200/JAN-9200 series.

For maintenance, inspection, repair, please use this manual.

Keep this manual in a convenient place for future reference.

The LCD of this equipment uses thin film transistors (TFT). If some pixels on the screen are not clear, the color is different, or the screen is brighter than usual, it is not because of defect, instead it is because of inherent characteristic of the TFT display technology.

The information in this manual is subject to change without notice at any time.

7ZPNA4467A

Safety Cautions Cautions for High Voltage High voltages, ranging from several hundreds to tens of thousands of volts, are used in electronic apparatus, such as radio and radar instruments. These voltages are totally harmless in most operations. However, touching a component inside the unit is very dangerous. (Any person other than authorized service engineers should not maintain, inspect, or adjust the unit.) High voltages on the order of tens of thousand volts are most likely to cause instant deaths from electrical shocks. At times, even voltages on the order of several hundred volts could lead to electrocution. To defend against electrical shock hazards, don't put your hand into the inside of apparatus. When you put in a hand unavoidably in case of urgent, it is strongly suggested to turn off the power switch and allow the capacitors, etc. to discharge with a wire having its one end positively grounded to remove residual charges. Before you put your hand into the inside of apparatus, make sure that internal parts are no longer charged. Extra protection is ensured by wearing dry cotton gloves at this time. Another important precaution to observe is to keep one hand in your pocket at a time, instead of using both hands at the same time. It is also important to select a secure footing to work on, as the secondary effects of electrical shock hazards can be more serious. In the event of electrical shocks, disinfect the burnt site completely and obtain medical care immediately. Precautions for Rescue of Victim of Electric Shock When a victim of electric shock is found, turn off the power source and ground the circuit immediately. If this is impossible, move the victim away from the unit as quick as possible without touching him or her with bare hands. He or she can safely be moved if an insulating material such as dry wood plate or cloth is used. Breathing may stop if current flows through the respiration center of brain due to electric shock. If the electric shock is not large, breathing can be restored by artificial respiration. A victim of electric shock looks pale and his or her pulse may become very weak or stop, resulting in unconsciousness and rigidity at worst. It is necessary to perform first aid immediately. ii Emergency Measures Method of First-Aid Treatment Precautions for First-Aid Treatments Whenever a person is struck by an electrical shock, give the patient artificial respiration immediately on the spot, unless it is absolutely necessary to move the patient for safety's sake. Once started, artificial respiration should be continued rhythmically.

(1) Refrain from touching the patient carelessly as a result of the accident; the first-aider could suffer from electrical shocks by himself or herself.

(2) Turn off the power calmly and certainly, and move the patient apart from the cable gently.

(3) Call or send for a physician or ambulance immediately, or ask someone to call doctor.

(4) Lay the patient on the back, loosening the necktie, clothes, belts and so on.

(5) (a) Feel the patient's pulse.

(b) Check the heartbeat by bringing your ear close to the patient's heart.

(c) Check for respiration by bringing your face or the back of your hand to the patient's face.

(d) Check the size of patient's pupils.

(6) Opening the patient's mouth, remove artificial teeth, cigarettes, chewing gum, etc. if any. With the patient's mouth open, stretch the tongue and insert a towel or the like into the mouth to prevent the tongue from being withdrawn into the throat. (If the patient clenches the teeth so tight that the mouth won't open, use a screwdriver or the like to force the mouth open and then insert a towel or the like into the mouth.)

(7) Wipe off the mouth to prevent foaming mucus and saliva from accumulating. iii Treatment to Give When the Patient Has a Pulse Beating but Has Ceased to Breathe Performing mouth-to-mouth artificial respiration - Fig. 1

(1) Bend the patient's face backward until it is directed to look back. (A pillow may be placed under the neck.)

(2) Pull up the lower jaw to open up the airway. (To spread the airway)

(3) Pinching the patient's nose, breathe deeply and blow your breath into the patient's mouth strongly, with care to close it completely. Then, move your mouth away and take a deep breath, and blow into his or her mouth. Repeat blowing at 10 to 15 times a minute (always with the patient's nostrils closed).

(4) Continue artificial respiration until natural respiration is restored.

(5) If the patient's mouth won't open easily, insert a pipe, such as one made of rubber or vinyl, into either nostril. Then, take a deep breath and blow into the nostril through the pipe, with the other nostril and the mouth completely closed.

(6) The patient may stand up abruptly upon recovering consciousness. Keep the patient lying calmly, giving him or her coffee, tea or any other hot drink (but not alcoholic drink) to keep him or her warm. Mouth-to-mouth artificial respiration with the patient's head lifted

[1]

[2]

[3]

(1) Lift the back part of the patient's head. Support the forehead with one of your hand and the neck with the other hand.[1]. Many patients will have their airways opened by lifting their head in this way to ease mouth-to-mouth artificial respiration.

(2) Closing the patient's mouth with your mouth, press your cheek against the patient's nose [2]. Alternatively, hold the patient's nose with your finger to prevent air leak

[3].

(3) Blowing air into the patient's lungs. Blow air into the patient's lungs until chest is seen to rise. The first 10 breaths must be blown as fast as possible. Fig. 1 Mouth-to-mouth artificial respiration iv Listen to the appeal of the injured or ill person and give the necessary first-aid Recovery position

- Lay the injured or ill person on his/her side and wait for the arrival of the emergency services. Note(1) Omission of rescue breathing:

If there is a fear of infection because the injured or ill person has an intraoral injury, you are hesitant about giving mouth-to-mouth resuscitation, or preparing the mouthpiece for rescue breathing takes too long, omit rescue breathing and proceed to the next step. Electric shock is not needed. Breathing Responding Not breathing Not responding Give 2 rescue breaths; omittable Note(1) Open the airway.

- Check for breathing. Check for response.

- Call while tapping the shoulder. Ask for help.

- Make an emergency call.

- Ask to bring an AED. Give CPR.

- 30 chest compressions

- Give 2 rescue breaths; omittable Note(1) A person is collapsing. A person is collapsing.

- Secure the safety of the surrounding area.

- Secure the safety of the surrounding area.

- Prevent secondary disasters.

- Prevent secondary disasters. Flow of Cardiopulmonary Resuscitation (CPR) Arrival of an AED

- Turn on the power.

- Use the AED by following its voice prompts. Fitting of the electrode pads, etc. Automatic electrocardiogram analysis

- Do not touch the injured or ill Resume CPR from chest compressions by following the voice prompts of the AED. The AED automatically analyzes the heart rhythm every 2 min. Electric shock is needed. Delivery of electric shock When to stop CPR person. v When the injured or ill person has been handed over to the emergency services or has started moaning or breathing normally, lay him/her on his/her side in a recovery position and wait for the arrival of emergency services. Specific Procedures for Cardiopulmonary Resuscitation (CPR) 1. Check the scene for safety to prevent secondary disasters Are you OK?

a) Do not touch the injured or ill person in panic when an accident has occurred. (Doing so may cause electric shock to the first-aiders.) b) Do not panic and be sure to turn off the power. Then, gently move the injured or ill person to a safe place away from the electrical circuit. 2. Check for responsiveness 3. 4. a) Tap the shoulder of the injured or ill and shout in the ear saying, "Are you OK?"

b) It the person opens his/her eyes or there is some response or gesture, determine it as

"responding." But, if there is no response or gesture, determine it as "not responding."

If responding a) Give first-aid treatment. Please call an ambulance. Please bring an AED. If not responding a) Ask for help loudly. Ask somebody to make an emergency call and bring an AED. Somebody has collapsed. Please help. Please call an ambulance. Please bring an AED. If there is nobody to help, call an ambulance yourself. 5. Open the airway a) Touch the forehead with one hand. Lift the chin with the two fingers of the middle finger and forefinger of the other hand and push down on the forehead as you lift the jaw to bring the chin forward to open the airway. If neck injury is suspected, open the airway by lifting the lower jaw. 6. Check for breathing a) After opening the airway, check quickly for breathing for no more than 10 seconds. Put your cheek down by the mouth and nose area of the injured or ill person, look at his/her chest and abdomen, and check the following three points. Look to see if the chest and abdomen are rising and falling. Listen for breathing. Feel for breath against your cheek. vi b) If the injured or ill person is breathing, place him/her in the recovery position and wait for the arrival of the emergency services. Position the injured or ill person on his/her side, maintain a clear and open airway by pushing the head backward while positioning their mouth downward. To maintain proper blood circulation, roll him/her gently to position them in the recovery position in the opposite direction every 30 minutes. 7. Give 2 rescue breaths (omittable) Roll gently in the opposite direction every 30 minutes. a) If opening the airway does not cause the injured or ill person to begin to breathe normally, give rescue breaths. CPR mask b) If there is a fear of infection because the injured or ill person has an intraoral injury, you are hesitant about giving mouth-to-mouth resuscitation, or getting and preparing the mouthpiece for rescue breathing takes too long, omit rescue breathing and perform chest compressions. c) When performing rescue breathing, it is recommended to use a mouthpiece for rescue breathing and other protective devices to prevent infections. d) While maintaining an open airway, pinch the person's nose shut with your thumb and forefinger of the hand used to push down the forehead. Mouthpiece for rescue e) Open your mouth widely to completely cover the mouth of the injured or ill person so that no air will escape. Give rescue breathing twice in about 1 second and check if the chest rises. 8. Cardiopulmonary resuscitation (CPR) (combination of chest compressions and rescue breaths) a) Chest compressions 1) Position of chest compressions Position the heel of one hand in the center of the chest, approximately between the nipples, and place your other hand on top of the one that is in position. vii 2) Perform chest compressions Perform uninterrupted chest compressions of 30 at the rate of about 100 times per minute. While locking your elbows positioning yourself vertically above your hands. Compress with these parts (the heels of both hands). With each compression, depress the chest wall to a depth of approximately 4 to 5 cm. 30 times 2 times b) Combination of 30 chest compressions and 2 rescue breaths 1) After performing 30 chest compressions, give 2 rescue breaths. If rescue breathing is omitted, perform only chest compressions. 2) Continuously perform the combination of 30 chest compressions and 2 rescue breaths without interruption. 3) If there are two or more first-aiders, alternate with each other approximately every two minutes (five cycles of compressions and ventilations at a ratio of 30:2) without interruption. 9. When to stop cardiopulmonary resuscitation (CPR) a) When the injured or ill person has been handed over to the emergency services b) When the injured or ill person has started moaning or breathing normally, lay him/her on his/her side in a recovery position and wait for the arrival of emergency services. 10. Arrival and preparation of an AED a) Place the AED at an easy-to-use position. If there are multiple first-aiders, continue CPR until the AED becomes ready. b) Turn on the power to the AED unit. Depending on the model of the AED, you may have to push the power on button, or the AED automatically turns on when you open the cover. Turn on the power. c) Follow the voice prompts of the AED. 11. Attach the electrode pads to the injured or ill person's bare chest a) Remove all clothing from the chest, abdomen, and arms (male or female). b) Open the package of electrode pads, peel the pads off and securely place them on the chest of the injured or ill person, with the adhesive viii side facing the chest. If the pads are not securely attached to the chest, the AED may not function. Paste the pads exactly at the positions indicated on the pads, If the chest is wet with water, wipe dry with a dry towel and the like, and then paste the pads. If there is a pacemaker or implantable cardioverter defibrillator (ICD), paste the pads at least 3cm away from them. If a medical patch or plaster is present, peel it off and then paste the pads. If the injured or ill person's chest hair is thick, paste the pads on the chest hair once, peel them off to remove the chest hair, and then paste new pads. c) Some AED models require to connect a connector by following voice prompts. d) The electrode pads for small children should not be used for children over the age of 8 and for adults. 12. Electrocardiogram analysis a) The AED automatically analyzes electrocardiograms. Follow the voice prompts of the AED and ensure that nobody is touching the injured or ill person while you are operating the AED. b) On some AED models, you may need to push a button to analyze the heart rhythm. 13. Electric shock (defibrillation) a) If the AED determines that electric shock is needed, the voice prompt saying, "Shock is needed" is issued and charging starts automatically. b) When charging is completed, the voice prompt saying, "Push the shock button" is issued and the shock button flashes. c) The first-aider must get away from the injured or ill person, make sure that no one is touching him/her, and then press the shock button. Press the shock button. d) When electric shock is delivered, the body of the injured or ill person may jerk. 14. Resume cardiopulmonary resuscitation (CPR). Resume CPR consisting of 30 chest compressions and 2 rescue breaths by following the voice prompts of the AED. 15. Automatic electrocardiogram analysis a) When 2 minutes have elapsed since you resumed cardiopulmonary resuscitation (CPR), the AED automatically analyzes the electrocardiogram. b) If you suspended CPR by following voice prompts and AED voice prompt informs you that shock is needed, give electric shock again by following the voice prompts. If AED voice prompt informs you that no shock is needed, immediately resume CPR. ix 16. When to stop CPR (Keep the electrode pads on.) a) When the injured or ill person has been handed over to the emergency services b) When the injured or ill person has started moaning or breathing normally, lay him/her on his/her side in a recovery position and wait for the arrival of emergency services. x Pictorial Indication Pictorial Indication Various pictorial indications are included in this manual and are shown on this equipment so that you can operate them safely and correctly and prevent any danger to you and / or to other persons and any damage to your property during operation. Such indications and their meanings are as follows. Please understand them before you read this manual:

DANGER This indication is shown where incorrect equipment operation due to negligence may cause death or serious injuries. This indication is shown where any person is supposed to be in danger of being killed or seriously injured if this indication is neglected and these equipment are not operated correctly. WARNING CAUTION This indication is shown where any person is supposed to be injured or any property damage is supposed to occur if this indication is neglected and these equipment are not operated correctly. Examples of Pictorial Indication Electric Shock Disassembling Prohibited Disconnect the power plug Warning Label The mark represents CAUTION (including DANGER and WARNING). Detailed contents of CAUTION ("Electric Shock" in the example on the left) is shown in the mark. The mark represents prohibition. Detailed contents of the prohibited action ("Disassembling Prohibited" in the example on the left) is shown in the mark. The mark represents instruction. Detailed contents of the instruction ("Disconnect the power plug"

in the example on the left) is shown in the mark. There is a warning label on the top cover of the equipment. Do not try to remove, break or modify the label. xi Precautions upon Equipment Operation DANGER Never attempt to check or repair the inside of the equipment. Checking or repair by an unqualified person may cause a fire or an electric shock. Contact our head office, or a nearby branch or local office to request servicing. Never remove the cover of this equipment. Touching the high-voltage section inside will cause an electric shock. Do not attempt to disassemble or tamper with this equipment. Otherwise, a fire, an electric shock, or a malfunction may occur. When conducting maintenance, make sure to turn the main power off. Failure may result in electric shock. Turn off the main power before cleaning the equipment. Especially when a rectifier is used, make sure to turn it off since voltage is still outputted from the rectifier even after the indicator and the radar are turned off. Failure may result in equipment failure, or death or serious injury due to electric shock. When conducting maintenance work on the radar antenna, make sure to turn its main power off. Failure may result in electric shock or injuries. Make sure to turn off the radar antenna safety switch. Failure may result in injuries caused by physical contact with the rotating radar antenna. xii When turning off the power supply, do not hold down the power button of the operation unit. Otherwise, a trouble may occur due to termination failure. Never directly touch the internal components of the radar antenna or indicator. Direct contact with these high-voltage components may cause electric shock. For maintenance, inspection, or adjustment of equipment components, consult with our branch office, branch shop, sales office, or our distributor in your district. Do not get close to the radiant section of the radar antenna. It is a rotating part, and it may cause injuries if it suddenly starts rotating and consequently hits the body. It is recommended that the radiant section be installed at a high place such as on the roof of the wheelhouse, on the flying bride, on the trestle, or on the radar mast so that no one can get close to it. Microwave radiation level of the radar antenna:

Keep away from the radar antenna during transmission. Microwaves are generated from the front center of the radiant section of the radar antenna at the levels indicated in the table below. Exposure to microwaves at close range can result in injury (especially damage to eyes). Microwave radiation level of the radar antenna System 50 W/m2 20 W/m2 2.5 W/m2 n/a NKE-2103 NKE-1125/1129/2254 5 cm 11 cm NKE-1130/1139 1.38cm NKE-2632 NKE-1632 1.45cm 26 cm 81 cm 76 cm 3.1cm 3.25cm 123 cm 162 cm 181 cm 209.76cm 128.37cm Make sure to install the radar antenna at a place higher than human height. Direct exposure to electromagnetic wave at close range will have adverse effects on the human body. When it is necessary to get close to the radar antenna for maintenance or inspection purposes, make sure to turn the power switch of the display unit to

"OFF" or "STBY". Direct exposure to electromagnetic waves at close range will have adverse effects on the human body. When conducting maintenance work, make sure to turn off the power so that the power supply to the equipment is completely cut off. Some equipment components can carry electrical current even after the power switch is turned off, and conducting maintenance work may result in electric shock, equipment failure, or accidents. xiii When cleaning the display screen, do not wipe it too strongly with a dry cloth. Also, do not use gasoline or thinner to clean the screen. Failure will result in damage to the screen surface. Do not change MBS Level/Area unless absolutely necessary. Incorrect adjustment will result in deletion of nearby target images and thus collisions may occur resulting in death or serious injuries. Confirm computer virus does not exist in USB flash memory beforehand when reading and writing of the file by using USB flash memory. Influences other equipment when the display unit is infected with the virus, and it may cause a breakdown. Do not remove USB flash memory while the access lamp (in USB flash drive) is flashing. Data may be damaged when the USB flash memory is inserted or removed while accessing it, and it may cause a breakdown. Do not place a glass or cup containing water, etc., or a small metal object on this equipment. If water or such object gets inside, a fire, an electric shock, or a malfunction may occur. In case water or a metal object gets inside the equipment, turn off the power immediately, unplug the power supply cable from an electric outlet, and contact our head office, or a nearby branch or local office to request servicing. Keeping the equipment in operation under such condition may cause a fire, an electric shock or a malfunction. In case you find smoke, unusual odor or extreme high heat coming from the equipment, turn off the power immediately, unplug the power supply cable from an electric outlet, and contact our head office, or a nearby branch or local office to request servicing. Keeping the equipment in operation under such condition may cause a fire or an electric shock. Do not use the offset function during navigation. If the equipment is used with the offset value entered as the own ship position

(deviated from the actual position), accidents may result. When the offset values are entered, the [Offset] badge is displayed at the position display on the Own Ship Information. Check the indication, and cancel the offset function if necessary. Also, the message "Position Shift" is displayed in the message display area. xiv Before starting automatic sailing, be sure to check the safety of the route and the safety when crossing safety contour. Otherwise, accidents may result. If the own ship has arrived at the boundary of a WPT during automatic sailing, be sure to check the safety and perform turning manually by the operator him/herself. Otherwise, the ship keeps the course with the leg bearing, and accidents may result. Input the ships parameter accurately according to the specification of the ship. Otherwise, accidents may result. Change of the color of the Day/Night button, particularly the use of the [Night]

color, may interfere with the recognition of display information. When moving the dialog box, move to the position that does not cover the operation area. If the dialog box covers the operation area, it may interfere the recognition of the display information. Do not apply strong shock to the coaxial cable by striking it with a tool or hammering it. Otherwise, an open circuit failure may result. Do not place anything heavy on the coaxial cable. Otherwise, an open circuit failure may result. Do not twist or pull the coaxial cable. Otherwise, an open circuit failure may result. xv Use the radar only as a navigation aid. The final navigation decision must always be made by the operator him/herself. Making the final navigation decision based only on the radar display information may cause accidents such as collisions or running aground. A malfunction as the screen is disordered or unshown may occur if the power in the ship is instantaneously interrupted during operation of the radar. In this case, the power should be turned on again. Use Target Tracking (TT) function only as a navigation aid. The final navigation decision must always be made by the operator him/herself. Making the final navigation decision based only on tracking target information may cause accidents. Tracking target information such as vector, target numerical data, and alarms may contain some errors. Also, targets that are not detected by the radar cannot be acquired or tracked. Making the final navigation decision based only on the radar display may cause accidents such as collisions or running aground. In the short distance range, do not set the sea clutter suppression function so that all reflections from the sea are suppressed. This suppresses not only the echo from waves, etc., but also the echo from floating objects such as ships or dangerous objects, etc., and obstructs their detection. When using the sea clutter suppression function, always make the best suppression setting. Do not set the rain/snow clutter suppression setting to an excessive level, because not only the echo from rain or snow but also the echo from floating objects such as ships or dangerous objects, etc., and obstructs their detection. When using the rain/snow clutter suppression function, always make the best suppression setting. When setting a guard zone, make sure to properly adjust gain, sea-surface reflection suppression level, and rain/snow reflection suppression level so that the optimal target images are always on the radar screen. The guard zone alarm will not be activated for targets undetected by the radar, and it may result in accidents such as collisions. The simulation function is used exclusively for deciding whether or not target tracking is properly operating. Therefore, never use this function unless you wish to check target tracking operations. Note especially that, if this function is used during actual navigation, simulated targets are displayed and may become confused with other actual targets. Therefore, never use this function during actual navigation. xvi Since these alarms may include some errors depending on the target tracking conditions, the navigation officer himself should make the final decision for ship operations such as collision avoidance. Making the final navigation decision based only on the alarm may cause accidents such as collisions. Optimal values have been set for VD Level and Constant; therefore, never change their values unless absolutely necessary. Failure may result in accidents that would lower target tracking performance. When replacing magnetrons, make sure to shut off the main power and let the equipment stand for more than 5 minutes to discharge the high-voltage circuit. Failure may result in electric shock. Make sure to take off your watch when your hand must get close to the magnetron. Failure may result in damage to the watch since the magnetron is a strong magnet. Make sure that two or more staff member work together when replacing the LCD. If only one person attempts to replace the LCD, he/she may drop it and become injured. Do not directly touch the inverter circuit of the LCD display with a bare hand since high voltage temporarily remains in the circuit even after the main power is shut off. Failure may result in electric shock. Any adjustments must be made by specialized service personnel. Incorrect settings may result in unstable operation, and this may lead to accidents or equipment failure. Do not make any adjustments during navigation. Failure may result in adverse effects on the radar function which may lead to accidents or equipment failure. Do not change the quantization level settings unless absolutely necessary. If set at an inappropriate value, the acquisition of target tracking function and the tracking function deteriorate, and this may lead to accidents. Do not use or leave the equipment under direct sunlight for a long time or in the temperatures above 55C. Otherwise, a fire or a malfunction may occur. xvii Do not block the ventilation opening of the equipment. Otherwise, heat may accumulate inside to cause a fire or a malfunction. This equipment is intended for use as an aid to navigation only. If no backup measures, such as using another ECDIS unit for confirmation, are taken, be sure to use official marine charts together with this equipment to make any navigational decision. This equipment is not designed to assess the positional information automatically. The positional information should always be checked by the operator. Otherwise, accidents may result. Do not touch the equipment with hands or gloves wet with water. Otherwise, an electric shock or a malfunction may occur. Do not leave the disc in the DVD drive. Malfunctions of the drives may result. Do not place any object on the operation panel. In particular, if a hot object is placed on the operation panel, it can cause deformation of the surface of the operation panel. Do not apply any undue shock on the operation panel, trackball and dials. Otherwise, a malfunction may result. Make sure that the main power is turned off before inspection or replacement of parts. Otherwise, an electric shock, a fire, or a malfunction may occur. If a fan alarm or CPU temperature rise alarm has occurred, immediately turn off the power. Keeping the equipment in operation under such condition may cause a fire or a malfunction. After turning off the power, contact our head office, or a nearby branch or local office to request servicing. Edit routes in accordance with the world geodetic system (WGS-84). Use of routes edited with any other geodetic systems may cause accidents. xviii During sailing, be sure to check the own ships position and bearing as often as necessary, regardless of whether the automatic sailing is in operation or not. Otherwise, accidents may result. Do not turn off the power during Backup/Restore. Otherwise, a function may fail, and an accident may occur. Do not do the backup operation of data while sailing. The radar application should be ended to begin the data backup. It becomes impossible to observe using radar and this may lead to accidents. Since the image within the previous observation range is displayed by expanding/contracting for the period from immediately after switching of the observation range from the next image updating, do not use this image for navigation. If this image is used for navigation, an accident may occur. In the case of turning on the power under the condition of low temperature, do pre-heat more than 30 minutes. Otherwise, an operation failure may occur and an accident may occur. Normally, use the automatic tuning mode. If you use the manual tuning mode, an accident may be caused by a transmission/reception problem. Use the manual tuning mode only when you cannot bet the best tuning conditions in the automatic tuning mode. Always keep the sensitivity adjusted to the best condition. If you raise the sensitivity excessively, the visibility of the target will be reduced by unwanted signals including receiver noise and pseudo image. This may cause an accident. If the sensitivity is reduced excessively, detection of a target such as a ship or hazardous material will be interrupted. Adjust the preset of the observation scene according to the oceanographic condition, with the thorough understanding of the features of the radar signal processing setting. The optimum radar performance may not be able to be demonstrated due the oceanographic condition at that time. the changed setting or the contents of to xix AIO AIS ARCS ARPA Glossary

: Admiralty Information Overlay. AIO is a digital dataset that is designed to provide additional information to the navigation published by United Kingdom Hydrographic Office (UKHO).

: Automatic Identification System

: Admiralty Raster Chart Service. A raster chart published by UKHO

: Automatic Radar Plotting Aid AUTO SAIL

: The system automatically navigates to keep the scheduled route. Same as automatic sailing. AZ

: Acquisition/Activation zone Anti-clutter rain

: Rain/snow clutter suppression Anti-clutter sea

: Sea clutter suppression AZI Base CD BCR/BCT

: AZImuth stabilization mode

: Chart CD containing a complete chart data

: Bow Crossing Range/Bow Crossing Time Cell Permit

: A file containing an encryption key for S-63 chart. Supplied by UKHO, PRIMAR STAVANGER, and Hydrographic and Oceanographic Department of Japan Coast Guard. Chart Maintenance

: Software to manage the charts. Imports and updates the charts. C-MAP Ed.3

: C-MAP Edition 3. A digital chart format by Jeppesen (formerly, C-MAP, Norway) C-MAP

: Digital chart data by Jeppesen (formerly, C-MAP, Norway) CTS COG C up CCRP

: Course To Steer. Heading command.

: Course Over the Ground

: Course up. Own ships course is pointed to the top center of the radar display.

: Consistent Common Reference Point. The own ship position, to which all horizontal measurements such as target range, bearing, relative course, relative speed, CPA or TCPA are referenced, typically the conning position of the bridge. xx CORREL CPA/TCPA

: CORRELation

: Distance to the Closest Point of Approach/Time to the Closest Point of Approach. CTW

: Course Through Water. The direction of the ship's movement through the water Data Server

: Organization providing S-63 chart DIST DR

: Distance

: Dead Reckoning Dynamic License

: Dynamic licensing of C-Map chart license by Jeppesen DNV DRIFT EBL ECDIS ENC ETA ETD ENH F.ETA GC GPS HDG HL HSC H up IHO IMO

: Det Norske Veritas

: The current velocity for manual correction or the current speed on the horizontal axis of the 2-axis log is displayed.

: Electronic Bearing Line

: Electronic Chart Display and Information System

: Electronic Navigation Chart. Meaning S-57 and S-63.

: Estimated Time of Arrival

: Estimated Time of Departure

: Enhance

: Final Estimated Time of Arrival. Extimated time of arrival to the last WPT

: Great Circle

: Global Positioning System

: Heading. Ships heading

: Heading Line

: High Speed Craft. Vessels which comply with the definition in SOLAS for high speed craft

: Head up. Own ships heading line is always pointed to the top center of the radar display.

:

:

International Hydrographic Office International Maritime Organization xxi IR ISW LMT LON LAT LP MED MFD MMSI MOB MON MP NM N up P0N

: Radar Interference Rejecter

:

InterSWitch unit

: Local Mean Time

: Longitude

: Latitude

: Long Pulse

: Marine Equipment Directive. Request standard for standardization of marine equipment within the EU region

: Abbreviation of this equipment name. The formal name is Multi Function Display. The navigation support functions such as radar, ECDIS, CID, and AMS with this equipment can be executed by switching.

: Maritime Mobile Service Identity

: Man Over Board

: Performance MOnitor

: Medium Pulse

: Nautical Mile 1 NM=1852 m

: The north is always pointed to the top center of the radar display.

(North up)

: Unmodulated pulse, which is a type of transmission radio wave. While it is a type of radio wave usually used by radars equipped with magnetrons, radio waves with a short pulse length are used also by solid-state radars for short-range detection. PRIMAR STAVENGER

: A Norwegian company supplying charts. Publisher of encrypted charts, S-63 PI

: Parallel Index line Past positions

: Equally time-spaced past position marks of a tracked or AIS target and POSN PRF PROC the own ship.

: POSitioN

: Pulse Repetition Frequency. The number of radar pulses transmitted each second.

: PROCess. Radar signal processing function xxii Q0N RL RR

: A type of radio wave with intra-pulse frequency modulation. It is used for solid-state pulse compression radars.

: Rhumb Line

: Range Rings Relative vector

: A predicted movement of a target relative to own ships motion RM RM(R) RM(T) ROT Route S-57 S-63 SA Certificate file

: Relative Motion. A display on which the position of own ship remains fixed, and all targets move relative to own ship.

: Relative Motion. Relative Trails

: Relative Motion. True Trails

: Rate Of Turn. Change of heading per time unit

: A set of waypoints

:

:

:

IHO Transfer Standard for Digital Hydrographic Data IHO Data Protection Scheme An electronic file certifying the supplier of S-63 chart. Required for import/ update of S-63 chart. SENC SOG SART SET SP STAB STW TCS TCPA TM To WPT Trails

: System Electronic Navigational Chart

: Speed Over the Ground

: Search And Rescue Transponder

: The current direction for manual correction or the current speed on the horizontal axis of the 2-axis log is displayed.

: Short Pulse

: STABilization

: Speed Through Water

: Track Control Systems

: Time to Closest Point of Approach to own ship

: True Motion. A display across which the own ship and targets move with their own true motions.

: To Waypoint

: Tracks displayed by the radar echoes of targets in the form of an afterglow xxiii Trial maneuver

: A graphical simulation facility used to assist the operator to perform a proposed maneuver for navigation and collision avoidance purposes True vector

: A vector representing the predicted true motion of a target, as a result of input of the course and speed of the own ship TT TTG TXRX UKHO

: Target Tracking

: Time To Go. Time to next waypoint.

: Transmitter-Receiver Unit

: United Kingdom Hydrographic Office Update CD

: Chart CD containing the chart data updated from Base CD. This can be used when Base CD data has been imported. USER CODE

: A user-specific code assigned by JRC. Required in using ARCS and UTC VRM VDR WOL WOP WPT S-63 charts.

: Universal Time, Coordinated

: Variable Range Marker

: Voyage Data Recorder

: Wheel Over Line

: Wheel Over Point

: Waypoint WPT-WPT

: The division of the leg specified by two points. Displays data between two consecutive waypoints.

: Cross Track Distance

: Cross Track Limit XTD XTL Activated target

: A target representing the automatic or manual activation of a sleeping AIS target for the display of additional information Associated target

: A target simultaneously representing a tracked target and a AIS target which are decided as the same Chirp

: A type of transmission waveform with intra-pulse frequency modulation used by solid-state radars. Its radio wave type is classified as Q0N. Clutter

: Unwanted reflections on a radar screen, from sea surface, rain or snow. xxiv Display

: Screen displayed on the LCD Frequency deviation range

: The range of variation of the Q0N frequency used for transmission waves of a solid-state radar. Generally, the greater the frequency deviation range, the higher the resolution in the range direction. Hydrographic and Oceanographic Department :

Hydrographic and Oceanographic Department of Japan Coast Guard. Publisher of ENC Import (Chart Maintenance) : A procedure of enabling the chart supplied by Base CD to be displayed on ECDIS Interswitch Unit

: A device to switch over two or more radar display units and two or more radar antennas Leg

: Line between two consecutive waypoints Lost AIS target

: A target symbol representing the last valid position of an AIS target before the reception of its data was lost, or its last dead-reckoned position. Lost tracked target

: One for which target information is no longer available due to poor, lost or obscured signals. Power amplifier

: A radio frequency amplifier circuit consisting of semiconductor elements used for solid-state radars. It employs a high frequency, high power FET. Primary

: Main positioning sensor Pulse compression

: Correlation processing performed when a transmitted chirp signal is received by a solid-state radar after reflecting off the target. This processing gain enables the radar to have necessary detection capability even when a transmission power is low. Radar beacon

: A navigation aid which responds to the radar transmission and generates radio wave Range

: An area of the chart displayed on the screen. Represented by one half of the length of the chart display screen. Reference target

: A fixed target specified to calculate the speed over the ground Report

: User report to be issued periodically for using the Dynamic License method of Jeppesen continuously Rubber band

: Border that indicates the selected range. Scale

: The display scale xxv Sea state

: Status of the sea condition due to the weather environment, expressed as a sea state 0 for flat conditions with minimal wind, to sea state 8 for very rough sea conditions. Ship-avoiding operation

: To operate the ship in order to avoid obstacles during automatic navigation, regardless of the scheduled route Sleeping AIS target

: A target indicating the presence and orientation of a vessel equipped with AIS Spot depth

: Numeric representation of depth SSR: Solid State Radar

: Radar that uses semiconductor elements instead of magnetron, which requires periodic replacement. It is built with a system that ensures necessary detection capability even when a transmission output is low, by using chirp signals with a long pulse length upon transmission and performing pulse compression upon reception Update (Chart Maintenance) : A procedure of reflecting the update data supplied by Update CD on the imported chart. xxvi How to Use This Manual Structure of this manual This manual is structured as shown below. Read the necessary section according to the purpose. Item Preface Safety Cautions Emergency Measures Pictorial Indication Precautions Upon Equipment Operation Glossary How to use this manual System Overview

(Chapter 1) System Configuration

(Chapter 2) Repair Parts

(Chapter 3) Replacement Procedure

(Chapter 4) Program Update

(Chapter 5) Connection Settings with External Equipment

(Chapter 6) Trouble Shooting

(Chapter 7) Appendix

(Chapter 8) Contents Describes the purposes of using this equipment. Describes the cautions for a high voltage, precautions for rescue of victims of an electric shock, and the method of First-Aid treatment. Describes the safety precautions and warning on this equipment. Describes the special terminologies and equipment-specific terminologies that are used in this manual. This page. Describes the common functions of RADAR / ECDIS / MFD. Describes the System Configuration of Scanner Units and Display Units. Describes the Repair Parts. Describes the Replacement Procedure. Describes the Program Update Procedure. Describes the Connection Settings with External Equipment. Describes the Trouble Shooting and passwords. Drawings of Display units and Scanner units. xxvii Notations Operation notations Track ball operations on the operation panel are expressed as follows. Operation Click the left button. Double-click the left button. Click the right button Notation Click Example: Click on the object. Double-click Example: Determine the drawing by double-click. Click the right mouse button Example: Display the context menu by clicking the right mouse button. The buttons and dialog boxes on the screen are expressed as follows. Button type Button with button name indicated Notation Example:

[ AUTO] button Button with an indication other than the button name such as an icon Shown as follows. Example:

Task switching button A series menu selection operations is expressed as follows. Click on [User Map][Information Mark Property][Position] on the menu. Touch panel operation In this manual, the use of a track ball is applied as the precondition of the operation explanation. When the optional touch panel is used, read the notations in this manual as follows. Track ball operation Touch panel operation

(Left) click Double-click Right click Single tap Double tap Long tap For the operations that can be executed by touch panel operations, refer to the section 3.16 Touch Panel (Option). xxviii Contents 1 2.4 2.3.1 2.3.2 Contents Chapter 1 System Overview ........................................................................................ 1-1 Functions ........................................................................................................... 1-1 1.1 1.2 Features ............................................................................................................. 1-3 1.3 Scanner Units .................................................................................................... 1-6 1.4 Transmitter Receiver Units ............................................................................... 1-9 1.5 Display Units .................................................................................................... 1-10 Chapter 2. System Configuration ................................................................................ 2-1 2.1 Components ...................................................................................................... 2-1 2.2 Power System Diagram ..................................................................................... 2-7 2.3 Function System Diagrams ............................................................................ 2-13 Scanner unit / transmitter-receiver unit ....................................................... 2-13 Display unit ................................................................................................. 2-19 I/O Specifications ............................................................................................ 2-23 2.4.1. CCU : Central Control Unit NDC-1590 I/O Specifications .......................... 2-23 2.4.2. PSU : Power Supply Unit NBD-913 I/O specifications ................................ 2-30 2.4.3. SLC : Serial LAN Interface Circuit CMH-2370 ............................................ 2-33 2.4.4. AOC : Analog Option Circuit CMJ-560 I/O specifications ......................... 2-43 2.4.5. GIF : Gyro Interface Circuit CMJ-554 I/O specifications .......................... 2-45 2.4.6. RIF :Radar Interface Circuit CQD-2273 I/O specifications ......................... 2-47 2.5 DIP-SW and Jumper Pin Settings................................................................... 2-53 2.5.1. Setting for CQD-2273 Radar Interface Circuit ............................................ 2-53 2.5.2. Settings for CMJ-554 Gyro Interface Circuit ............................................... 2-55 2.5.3. Settings for CMH-2370 Serial LAN Interface Circuit ................................... 2-59 2.5.4. Settings for CMJ-560 Analog Option Circuit ............................................... 2-72 2.5.5. Settings for NDC-1590 Central Control Unit: CCU ..................................... 2-75 2.5.6. Settings for T/R Control circuit CMC-1205R ............................................... 2-79 2.5.7. Settings for NKE-1632 Scanner Unit .......................................................... 2-80 2.5.8. Settings for NKE-2632 Scanner Unit .......................................................... 2-81 2.5.9. Settings for NKE-2632-H Scanner Unit ...................................................... 2-82 2.5.10. Setting for UPS ........................................................................................... 2-83 2.5.11. Settings for Interswitch ............................................................................... 2-84 Chapter 3. Repair Parts ................................................................................................ 3-1 List of Repair Parts ............................................................................................ 3-1 3.1 4.2.1 4.2.2 3.1.1 3.1.2 3.1.3 3.1.4 4.1.1 4.1.2 4.1.3 4.1.4 4.1.5 4.1.6 4.1.7 4.1.8 Parts required for periodic replacement ....................................................... 3-1 Spares .......................................................................................................... 3-3 Special Parts ................................................................................................ 3-3 Circuit blocks ................................................................................................ 3-6 3.2 Exploded view drawings ................................................................................. 3-14 Chapter 4. Replacement Procedure ............................................................................ 4-1 4.1 Replacement Procedures for Scanner Unit ..................................................... 4-2 NKE-1130 Scanner Unit ............................................................................... 4-8 NKE-1139 Scanner Unit ............................................................................. 4-69 NKE-1125 Scanner Unit ............................................................................. 4-90 NKE-1129 Scanner Unit ........................................................................... 4-151 NKE-2254-HS Scanner Unit ..................................................................... 4-156 NKE-2103, NKE-2103-HS Scanner Unit .................................................. 4-170 NKE-1632 Scanner Unit ........................................................................... 4-209 NKE-2632, NKE-2632-H Scanner Unit ..................................................... 4-233 4.2 Replacement Procedures for Transmitter-receiver Unit ............................ 4-260 NTG-3225 Transmitter-receiver Unit ........................................................ 4-261 NTG-3230 Scanner Unit ........................................................................... 4-287 4.3 Replacement Procedures for Display Unit ..................................................... 310 26 Inch Monitor Unit: MNU NWZ-208 .......................................................... 314 4.3.1 19 Inch Monitor Unit: MNU NWZ-207 ...................................................... 321 4.3.2 Central Control Unit: CCU NDC-1590 ......................................................... 328 4.3.3 Trackball Operation Unit: TOPU NCE-5605 ................................................ 389 4.3.4 Keyboard Operation Unit: KOPU NCE-5625 ............................................... 409 4.3.5 Power Supply Unit: PSU NBD-913 .............................................................. 417 4.3.6 Junction Box: JB NQE-1143 ........................................................................ 426 4.3.7 Relay Terminal Block: CQD-2312 ................................................................ 455 4.3.8 4.3.9 Sensor LAN Switch Unit: NQA-2443 ........................................................... 466 4.3.10 Replacing the UPS ...................................................................................... 478 4.3.11 Detaching the front frame of the Display unit mount kit. ............................. 501 4.4 Setting up after replacements ......................................................................... 509 4.4.1. To display the Service menu for Engineers: ................................................ 509 4.4.2. Displaying the "Maintenance" dialog box .................................................... 510 4.4.3. Setting up anfter replacing Scanner Units ................................................... 511 4.4.4. Setting up anfter replacing Display Units ..................................................... 514 Chapter 5. Software Update ......................................................................................... 5-1 5.2.1 5.2.2 5.2.1 5.2.2 6.1.1 6.1.2 5.1 Updating the Software ...................................................................................... 5-1 5.2 Backing Up/Recovering Data ........................................................................... 5-5 Backing Up Data .......................................................................................... 5-5 Restoring Backup Data ................................................................................ 5-7 5.3 Recovering the C Drive Image ........................................................................ 5-10 5.3.1 Starting the OS on the D Drive to Start This Equipment ............................. 5-11 5.3.2 Executing the SSD Recovery Tool .............................................................. 5-12 5.3.3 Starting the OS on the C Drive to Start This Equipment (Automatic Recovery of Software) .............................................................................................................. 5-13 5.3.4 Setting C-MAP Again .................................................................................. 5-13 5.4 Rollback of the Software ................................................................................. 5-14 5.5 Update of Firmware ......................................................................................... 5-18 Update the CCU firmware .......................................................................... 5-19 Update the TOPU firmware ........................................................................ 5-24 Chapter 6. Connection to and Settings of External Navigation Equipment ............. 6-1 6.1 Connection with Radar Options ....................................................................... 6-1 Interswitch Unit ............................................................................................. 6-1 Power Control Unit ....................................................................................... 6-3 6.2 Connection with VDR ...................................................................................... 6-11 Checking the Installation Status ................................................................. 6-11 VDR Interface Kit ........................................................................................ 6-11 6.3 Connection with ECDIS ................................................................................... 6-12 Checking the Installation Status ................................................................. 6-12 Connecting with the ECDIS ........................................................................ 6-12 6.4 Connection with BNWAS ................................................................................ 6-13 6.5 Subsystem Installation ................................................................................... 6-14 Displaying the "Subsystem Installation" dialog ........................................... 6-14 Changing the subsystem configuration ...................................................... 6-15 Saving subsystem configuration changes .................................................. 6-17 6.6 Setting Up a Serial Port ................................................................................... 6-18 Displaying the "Serial Port" dialog. ............................................................ 6-18 Setting a serial port .................................................................................... 6-19 To change the communication settings of the Serial Port ........................... 6-22 Checking the communication status ........................................................... 6-25 6.7 Setting Contacts (Contact Input/Output) ....................................................... 6-29 Displaying the "Contact" dialog .................................................................. 6-29 6.6.1 6.6.2 6.6.3 6.6.4 6.5.1 6.5.2 6.5.3 6.3.1 6.3.2 6.2.1 6.2.2 6.7.1 6.7.2 6.7.3 6.7.4 6.7.5 6.7.6 6.7.7 Enabling the watch timer reset contact output of the Task station .............. 6-30 Enabling the contact output for PWR FAIL of a task station ....................... 6-31 Selecting the function to be assigned to each contact input of the SLC/ALC 6-31 Selecting a function to be assigned to each contact output of SLC/ALC .... 6-31 Testing each contact output ........................................................................ 6-34 Checking the status of each contact input .................................................. 6-34 Chapter 7. Troubleshooting ......................................................................................... 7-1 7.1 Maintenance Functions Executed from the Menu .......................................... 7-1 Starting Maintenance Functions ................................................................... 7-1 7.1.1 Confirming System Information .................................................................... 7-1 7.1.2 Confirming Software Information .................................................................. 7-2 7.1.3 Checking the Enable/Disable Statuses of the Functions that Have Been 7.1.4 Installed ..................................................................................................................... 7-4 Confirming the H/W Key ............................................................................... 7-8 7.1.5 7.1.6 Confirming the Compliant Standards for the Equipment ............................ 7-10 Confirming the Operating Time................................................................... 7-12 7.1.7 7.1.8 Setting and Confirming the Sensor Source ................................................ 7-13 7.2 Performance Check ......................................................................................... 7-16 Starting the Diagnosis Function.................................................................. 7-17 7.2.1 Confirming the screen status [Monitor Test] ............................................... 7-18 7.2.2 Confirming the Performance of the Operation Unit [Key Test] .................... 7-22 7.2.3 Confirming the Alert Sound [Sound Test] .................................................... 7-24 7.2.4 Testing the Brightness of LED [Light Test] .................................................. 7-25 7.2.5 Testing a Motor [Vibration Test] .................................................................. 7-26 7.2.6 Checking the Magnetron Current Level of the RADAR [Magnetron Curr.] .. 7-27 7.2.7 Checking the Memory Memory Check ................................................... 7-28 7.2.8 7.2.9 Checking the Performance Monitor Status ................................................. 7-29 7.2.10 Cleaning the Lens of the DVD Drive ........................................................... 7-33 7.2.11 Cleaning the Trackball ................................................................................ 7-34 7.3 Troubleshooting .............................................................................................. 7-35 7.4 Alert List ........................................................................................................... 7-49 7.4.1 Alarms ........................................................................................................ 7-50 7.4.2 Warnings .................................................................................................... 7-51 7.4.3 Cautions ..................................................................................................... 7-64 List of Alert Icons ........................................................................................ 7-67 7.4.4 7.5.1 7.5.2 7.5.3 7.5.4 7.5 Password List .................................................................................................. 7-68 Password List ............................................................................................. 7-68 Password on System Information ............................................................... 7-69 Password on Code Input ............................................................................ 7-72 Password on Task Menu ............................................................................ 7-78 Chapter 8. Appendix ..................................................................................................... 8-1 8.1 Outline Drawings ............................................................................................... 8-1 NKE-1139 Scanner Unit Outline Drawings ................................................... 8-1 8.1.1 NKE-1130 Scanner Unit Outline Drawings ................................................... 8-2 8.1.2 NKE-1129-7 Scanner Unit Outline Drawings ................................................ 8-3 8.1.3 NKE-1129-9 Scanner Unit Outline Drawings ................................................ 8-4 8.1.4 NKE-1125-6 Scanner Unit Outline Drawings ................................................ 8-5 8.1.5 NKE-1125-9 Scanner Unit Outline Drawings ................................................ 8-6 8.1.6 NTG-3230 Transmitter Receiver Unit Outline Drawings ............................... 8-7 8.1.7 NTG-3225 Transmitter Receiver Outline Drawings ...................................... 8-8 8.1.8 NKE-2103-6/NKE-2103-6HS Scanner Unit Outline Drawings ...................... 8-9 8.1.9 8.1.10 NKE-1632 Scanner Unit Outline Drawings ................................................. 8-10 8.1.11 NKE-2632 Scanner Unit Outline Drawings ................................................. 8-10 8.1.12 NKE-2632-H Scanner Unit Outline Drawings ............................................. 8-12 8.1.13 NWZ-208 26-inch Monitor Unit Outline Drawings .................................... 8-13 8.1.14 NWZ-207 19-inch Monitor Unit Outline Drawings ....................................... 8-14 8.1.15 NCE-5605 Trackball Operation Unit Outline Drawings ............................... 8-15 8.1.16 NCE-5625 Keyboard Operation Unit Outline Drawings .............................. 8-16 8.1.17 CWB-1593 Large Tray Outline Drawings ................................................... 8-17 8.1.18 NDC-1590 Central Controll Unit Outline Drawings ..................................... 8-18 8.1.19 NBD-913 Power Supply Unit Outline Drawings .......................................... 8-18 8.1.20 NQE-1143 Junction Box Outline Drawings ................................................. 8-20 8.1.21 NQA-2443 Sensor LAN Switch Unit Outline Drawings ............................... 8-21 8.1.22 CWA-246 26-inch Display Unit Mount Kit Outline Drawings ....................... 8-22 8.1.23 CWA-245 19-inch Display Unit Mount Kit Outline Drawings ....................... 8-23 8.1.24 CWB-1595 26-inch Desktop Frame Outline Drawings ............................... 8-24 8.1.25 CWB-1594 19-inch Desktop Frame Outline Drawings ............................... 8-25 8.1.26 CWB-1596 OPU Desktop Frame Outline Drawings ................................... 8-26 8.1.27 NQE-3141-4A Interswitch Unit Outline Drawings (Optional) ....................... 8-27 8.1.28 NQE-3141-8A Interswitch Unit Outline Drawings (Optional) ....................... 8-28 8.1.29 NQE-3167 Power Control Unit Outline Drawings (Optional) ...................... 8-29 8.2 General System Diagrams .............................................................................. 8-30 JMR-9230-S3 General System Diagrams .................................................. 8-30 8.2.1 JMR-9230-S General System Diagrams .................................................... 8-32 8.2.2 JMR-9225-7X3 General System Diagrams ................................................ 8-34 8.2.3 JMR-9225-9X3 General System Diagrams ................................................ 8-36 8.2.4 JMR-9225-6X General System Diagrams .................................................. 8-38 8.2.5 JMR-9225-9X General System Diagrams .................................................. 8-40 8.2.6 JMR-9225-6XH General System Diagrams ................................................ 8-42 8.2.7 JMR-9210-6X General System Diagrams .................................................. 8-44 8.2.8 JMR-9210-6XH General System Diagrams ................................................ 8-46 8.2.9 8.2.10 JMR-9272-S General System Diagrams .................................................... 8-48 8.2.11 JMR-9282-S General System Diagrams .................................................... 8-50 8.2.12 JMR-9282-SH General System Diagrams .................................................. 8-52 8.2.13 JMR-7230-S3 General System Diagrams .................................................. 8-54 8.2.14 JMR-7230-S General System Diagrams .................................................... 8-56 8.2.15 JMR-7225-7X3 General System Diagrams ................................................ 8-58 8.2.16 JMR-7225-9X3 General System Diagrams ................................................ 8-60 8.2.17 JMR-7225-6X General System Diagrams .................................................. 8-62 8.2.18 JMR-7225-9X General System Diagrams .................................................. 8-64 8.2.19 JMR-7225-6XH General System Diagrams ................................................ 8-66 8.2.20 JMR-7210-6X General System Diagrams .................................................. 8-68 8.2.21 JMR-7210-6XH General System Diagrams ................................................ 8-70 8.2.22 JMR-7272-S General System Diagrams .................................................... 8-72 8.2.23 JMR-7282-S General System Diagrams .................................................... 8-74 8.2.24 JMR-7282-SH General System Diagrams .................................................. 8-76 8.2.25 JAN-9201 General System Diagrams ........................................................ 8-77 8.2.26 JAN-7201 General System Diagrams ........................................................ 8-80 8.2.27 JAN-9202 General System Diagrams ........................................................ 8-82 8.2.28 JAN-7202 General System Diagrams ........................................................ 8-84 Interconnection Diagrams .............................................................................. 8-86 JMR-9230-S3 Interconnection Diagrams ................................................... 8-86 JMR-9230-S Interconnection Diagrams ..................................................... 8-90 JMR-9225-7X3/9X3 Interconnection Diagrams .......................................... 8-94 JMR-9225-6X/9X Interconnection Diagrams .............................................. 8-98 JMR-9225-6XH Interconnection Diagrams ............................................... 8-102 JMR-9210-6X/6XH Interconnection Diagrams ......................................... 8-106 8.3.1 8.3.2 8.3.3 8.3.4 8.3.5 8.3.6 8.3 JMR-9272-S Interconnection Diagrams ................................................... 8-110 8.3.7 JMR-9282-S/SH Interconnection Diagrams ............................................. 8-114 8.3.8 8.3.9 JMR-7230-S3 Interconnection Diagrams ................................................. 8-118 8.3.10 JMR-7230-S Interconnection Diagrams ................................................... 8-122 8.3.11 JMR-7225-7X3/9X3 Interconnection Diagrams ........................................ 8-126 8.3.12 JMR-7225-6X/9X Interconnection Diagrams ............................................ 8-130 8.3.13 JMR-7225-6XH Interconnection Diagrams ............................................... 8-134 8.3.14 JMR-7210-6X/6XH Interconnection Diagrams ......................................... 8-138 8.3.15 JMR-7272-S Interconnection Diagrams ................................................... 8-142 8.3.16 JMR-7282-S/SH Interconnection Diagrams ............................................. 8-146 8.3.17 NKE-1139 (AC110V) ................................................................................. 8-150 8.3.18 NKE-1139 (AC220V) ................................................................................ 8-151 8.3.19 NTG-3230 ................................................................................................ 8-152 8.3.20 NKE-1130 (AC110V) ................................................................................. 8-153 8.3.21 NKE-1130 (AC220V) ................................................................................ 8-154 8.3.22 NKE-1129 (AC110V) ................................................................................. 8-155 8.3.23 NKE-1129 (AC220V) ................................................................................ 8-156 8.3.24 NTG-3225 ................................................................................................ 8-157 8.3.25 NKE-1125 (AC110V) ................................................................................. 8-158 8.3.26 NKE-1125 (AC220V) ................................................................................ 8-159 8.3.27 NKE-2254-6HS ......................................................................................... 8-160 8.3.28 NKE-2103-6/6HS ...................................................................................... 8-161 8.3.29 NKE-1632 ................................................................................................. 8-162 8.3.30 NKE-2632/NKE-2632-H ........................................................................... 8-163 1.System Overview Chapter 1 System Overview 1.1 Functions Multi Function Display (referred to as "this equipment" or "MFD" in this manual) is navigation equipment that satisfies the following IMO performance standards.

- IMO Resolution MSC192(79): Performance standards for radar equipment

- IMO Resolution MSC232(82): Performance standards for electronic chart display and information systems (ECDIS)

- IMO Resolution MSC191(79): Performance standards for the presentation of navigation related information on shipborne navigational displays General requirements for shipborne radio equipment

- IMO Resolution MSC74(69) Annex 2: TCS performance standards

- IMO Resolution A.694(17):

This equipment has the following functions for "securement of navigation safety" and "navigation energy saving", as the core equipment of INS (Integrated Navigation System) and IBS (Integrated Bridge System), which can also support a one-man bridge. RADAR ECDIS CID (Conning Information Display) AMS (Alert Management System), etc. Main functions of the RADAR mode Sensitivity adjustment, sea clutter and rain/snow clutter suppression Bearing and range measurement using a cursor, fixed/variable range markers, and electronic Interference rejection bearing line Colored own track display User map creation and display TM (True Motion) presentation Self-diagnostic facilities Radar performance monitoring (Performance Monitor) Target tracking functions (manual/automatic target acquisition and tracking, vector and trail displays and alarm displays) 8-unit switchover (Inter-switch) function (Option) Electronic navigational chart display*1 (Option)

*1: The following databases can be displayed (ARCS cannot be displayed.)

- S-57 Ed3.0/3.1

- S-63

- C-Map Ed3.0 Professional/Professional+

- C-Map ENC

- Jeppesen PRIMAR ECDIS Service 1-1 Chapter 1 System Overview Main functions of ECDIS mode The following databases can be displayed.

- S-57 Ed3.0/3.1

- S-63

- C-Map Ed3.0 Professional/Professional+

- C-Map ENC

- Jeppesen PRIMAR ECDIS Service

- ARCS Own ships track display and planned-route display on the electronic chart Automatic checking of the safety contours and dangerous areas of the own ship (not available for ARCS) TT target display and AIS target display on the electronic chart Overlay of radar echo on the electronic chart True/Relative motion display North-up/Course-up/Head-up/Waypoint-up display Display of route information such as latitude/longitude at destinations, bearings/ranges up to waypoints, and planned arrival time Availability of two EBLs/VRMs Writing of memos with alphabetic characters into the electronic chart Display of information such as the date/time, current position, heading, and ships speed Selection of colors (conforming to the IMO/IHO) suitable for the daytime, nighttime, dawn and evening Editing of route information Addition, deletion, and modification of WPTs on the electronic chart or the list Calculation of the distance between WPTs, bearings, and planned arrival time Up to 512 WPTs per route Checking on the crossing of the safety contours and dangerous areas on created routes Route tracking (option) Course change Safety contours crossing alarm Dangerous areas approaching warning Waypoint arrival warning Off-track warning Logging of navigation information onto the SSD Own ships playback using logged data Note This manual describes the methods of handling the RADAR mode and the ECDIS mode, however, this manual does not describe the handling method of the Conning mode. For the handling of the conning mode, refer to the JAN-7202/9202 Conning Display Instruction Manual. Chapter 1 System Overview 1-2 1.2 Features This MFD has the following features:

Common functions:

Utilization of an icon menu Intuitive operation system based on the workflow High-resolution large screen Message reception notification function Notifies arrival of a new AIS message and so on with a sound and a badge. Utilization of a common information window Enables display of target information and simple conning information (wind direction/wind speed information, etc.) with a simple switching operation. Display of chart information read results by grouping Enables immediate access to the required information. Display of the cause of alert as well as the action guideline Equipped with the Help function The built-in HTML Help enables the search of operation methods in this equipment instead of the hardcopy manual whenever required. Visual highlight of target symbols Enables identification of the target that matches the condition such as the sailing direction, ships length, and ships type by highlighted display. Wave analysis function (option) Analyzes and displays information on the surrounding waves (height, length, cycle, and direction of waves) and enables monitoring of dangerous waves for ships. Equipped with the white list type virus protection function of Trend Micro Incorporated 1-3 Chapter 1 System Overview RADAR function:

Realized a clear large screen with its high resolution. By using the high definition 26inch color LCD of 19201200 pixels, radar image display of diameter 320mm or more is secured. Image presentation of high resolution is also possible in near ranges. Equipped with high performance radar signal processing ASIC BLZZARD of new design By eliminating unnecessary signals (clutters) from the radar video signals obtained from a wide dynamic range receiver, target detection is enhanced. Target tracking (TT) function by utilizing the latest technology By using the latest high-speed DSP and tracking algorithm, the target acquisition/tracking performance is improved, achieving stable operation for target tracking inside of clutters also.

- Acquisition and tracking of up to 100 targets as standard

- Expressing danger status with a sound and shape and color of a symbol

- Equipped with a trial maneuvering function

- Capable of 10-color coded display by storing target trails. Background tracking function (Full-screen acquisition function) Since detectable radar echoes are acquired and tracked automatically in background, the vector can be displayed immediately after initial acquisition. Top screen with strictly selected information Information that is constantly displayed on the Top screen of the radar is strictly selected to enable users to find the required information effortlessly. Sortable TT/AIS list Provides a sortable TT/AIS list (for instance in the TCPA descending order) to enable users to check the ship in the highest danger. Dual PPI display Capable of monitoring of near-range images and far-range images concurrently with one radar

(JMR-9200 Series only). Superimposed display of radar image, chart, and own ships trail Capable of superimposed display of a user-created map, an imported chart of a coastline and buoys, own ships trail, and other ships trails, radar images, and radar trails in all the display modes including Head Up display. Improved Day/Night function The Day/Night function supports up to 5 types of display screen color combinations and enables users to reproduce screen colors suitable for the user utilization environment with simple key operations. The function provides easy-to-understand screens through color coded radar images and a variety of graphics. Built-in self-diagnosis program Chapter 1 System Overview 1-4 By constantly monitoring all the system functions, this program displays a warning message on the screen at detection of function deterioration and issues a warning sound. The system function test can be performed easily during normal operation (excluding some tests). Performance monitor function This function monitors radar performance (transmission output and reception sensitivity) on the screen. Interswitch function (Option) By connecting to the interswitch unit (optional), up to 8 radars can be inter-switched with simple operations. Up to 4 units: An interswitch unit separate type from the indicator and cable for connecting each indicator are necessary. Up to 8 units: An interswitch unit separate type from the indicator and cable for connecting each indicator are necessary. ECDIS function:

This function minimizes the information that is displayed constantly and expands the chart display area.

- Can display vector charts (ENC and C-MAP) and raster chart (ARCS).

- Realizes safer sailing through the safety contour line and crossing and approaching danger zone monitoring function. (Excluding ARCS)

- Realizes high operability through high-speed drawing and high-speed processing.

- Facilitates creation of user charts.

- Applies a multi-display screen that can display two charts concurrently. (ARCS and C-MAP Ed.3 cannot be displayed concurrently with a chart of a different type)

- Enables a course plan with multi-view.

- Can display a wide view screen while a single chart or multi-view is displayed.

- Enables creation of a route plan with the table editing function and the graphic editing function.

- Can create an alternative route while sailing.

- Automatic sailing is enabled by connecting with Auto Pilot. (option)

- The playback function enables checking of the sailed routes.

- The S-57 chart can be updated. (Chart Maintenance) 1-5 Chapter 1 System Overview 1.3 Scanner Units S-band Magnetron 30kW 3units 12ft. Scanner Unit: NKE-1139 S-band Magnetron 30kW 2units 12ft. Scanner Unit: NKE-1130 S-band Solid State 250W 2units 12ft. Scanner Unit: NKE-1632 S-band Solid State 250W 2units 8ft. Scanner Unit:

S-band Solid State 250W 2units 8ft. High Speed Scanner Unit: NKE-2632-H NKE-2632 Chapter 1 System Overview 1-6 X-band Magnetron 25kW 3units 7ft. Scanner Unit: NKE-1129-7 X-band Magnetron 25kW 3units 9ft. Scanner Unit: NKE-1129-9 X-band Magnetron 25kW 2units 6ft. Scanner Unit: NKE-1125-6 X-band Magnetron 25kW 2units 9ft. Scanner Unit: NKE-1125-9 1-7 Chapter 1 System Overview X-band Magnetron 25kW 2units 6ft. High Speed Scanner Unit: NKE-2254-6HS X-band Magnetron 10kW 2units 6ft. Scanner Unit:

X-band Magnetron 10kW 2units 6ft. High Speed Scanner Unit: NKE-2103-6HS NKE-2103-6 Chapter 1 System Overview 1-8 1.4 Transmitter Receiver Units The transmitter-receiver unit generates radar signals for transmission, amplifies and demodulates received signals. It sends the radar video signals to the display unit along with the transmission timing signals and antenna rotation signals. Four types of transmitter-receiver units are available, which are suited to different uses:

1) X band Magnetron 10 kW type: Compact and lightweight 2) X band Magnetron 25 kW type: High resolution, high sensitivity 3) S band Magnetron 30 kW type: All-weather type 4) S band Solid State 250 W type: All-weather, high durability The X band 25 kW type and the S band 30 kW type are available as either a 2-unit type, in which the transmitter-receiver unit is built into the scanner unit, or a 3-unit type, which has a separate transmitter-receiver unit to be installed inside the cabin. The S band solid state 250W type and X band 10 kW type are only available as a 2-unit type. For the 3-unit types, radio wave signals are fed between the indoor transmitter-receiver unit and the outdoor scanner unit through a waveguide for the X band types or a coaxial tube for the S band type. S-band Magnetron 30kW Transmitter-Receiver Unit: NTG-3230 (for NKE-1139 Scanner Unit) X-band Magnetron 25kW Transmitter-Receiver Unit: NTG-3225 (for NKE-1129 Scanner Unit) 1-9 Chapter 1 System Overview 1.5 Display Units 19-inch and 26-inch display units are available:

1) 19-inch type (effective size: 250 mm or more)

: JMR-7200/JAN-7200 Series 2) 26-inch wide type (effective size: 320 mm or more) : JMR-9200/JAN-7200 Series JMR-7200/9200 series represents the RADAR or MFD. JAN-7200/9200 series represents the ECDIS or Conning display. JMR-7200/JAN-7200 Series display unit JMR-9200/JAN-9200 Series display unit Chapter 1 System Overview 1-10 Trackball Operation Unit: TOPU NCE-5605 Keyboard Operation Unit: KOPU NCE-5625 (Option) Central Control Unit: CCU NDC-1590 Power Supply Unit: PSU NBD-913 1-11 Chapter 1 System Overview Junction Box: JB NQE-1143 Option 19 inch Monitor Unit: MNU NWZ-207 26 inch Monitor Unit: MNU NWZ-208 Chapter 1 System Overview 1-12 Power Control Unit: NQE-3167 (Option 4ch. Inter Switch Unit: NQE-3141-4A (Option) 8ch. Inter Switch Unit: NQE-3141-8A (Option) 1-13 Chapter 1 System Overview Chapter 1 System Overview 1-14

 

 

Initial Setup 4.3.3.4 Precaution Never turn the power off until initial setting is finished. System data may be destroyed and a trouble may occur. Never disconnect the USB flash drive until initial setting is finished. If you remove the USB flash drive while initial setting is ongoing, system data may be destroyed and a trouble may occur. Before removing the USB flash drive, check for its access lamp and make sure that it is not being accessed. If you remove the USB flash drive when it is accessed, data may be destroyed and a trouble may occur. After you have done a replacement of a CCU or CCU Repair Kit, be sure to configure it properly by using "Initial setting tool" along the following steps. In the initial setting, items below will be set up. Step 1. Set up the date, name of the operator. Step 2. Copy the Lisence file. Step 3. Set up the model name. Step 4. Checking for the splash screen Step 5. Set up the serial number Step 6. Software update Step 7. Set up an IP address 4-359 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure The flowchart of the Initial setting tool. The flowchart of the Initial setting tool is shown below. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-360 Launch the Initial setting tool A USB flash drive which has the Initial setting tool and the Lisence file is required for this work Table Required Tools No 1 Name Appearance example A USB flash drive which contains the Initial setting tool and the Lisence file *1

*1 Do not use Flash drives which are password protected or encrypted. Before conducting work, always be sure that all of cables, connectors, are connected securely. Since The Initial Setting Tool is an auto-run application, be sure that connect your USB flash drive before turning on the power. For the details that how to obtain The Initial Setting Tool, please contact our head office or a nearby branch or local office beforehand. 1: Connect your USB flash drive Before you turn on the power of the Display Unit, connect your USB flash drive which contains the Initial setting tool and the Lisence file. 4-361 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 2: Start up the Display Unit Switch on both AC and DC circuit breakers at the PSU. Main Switch Main Breaker Turn on the main switch. The system is turned on automatically only after the first time turning on the main switch. And after a few seconds, the system of the power is down and up automatically. This is a normal behavior. Go on to next step. When the system will not boot up, check the ship's main and the main switch of PSU and press the power button on the trackball operation unit. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-362 After splash screen appears, the Initial setting tool will launch automatically. 3: The Initial setting tool Along the Initial setting tool, setup the Dispay Unit. Step 1:

Date and Name Enter the Inspection date, inspector name. And then click [ SET ] button. FORMAT EXAMPLE name@company Taro@JRC 4-363 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure Step 2:

Licence Copy The Hardware ID of HASP is compared with the Hardware ID in the licence file. If they match, the licence file is copied over. HASP: Hardware Against Software Piracy (included in NDC-1590 Central Control Unit) If they mismatch, following dialog is displayed. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-364 Step 3:

Model Enter the monitor size, model name. By referring to the descriptions on the Ship Lists, select corresponding item from the drop-down list. Choose a corresponding model name to the general model name label which is affixed on the Display Unit. And then click [ SET ] button. 4-365 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure After clicking the [SET] button, the following image will be displayed

. Confirm that the image and the label are the same. a) Stand alone type The Name label has been affixed to the front cover of the Display Unit mount kit. ExampleJMR-9230-S label on the Display Unit mount kit Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-366 b) Desktop type or flush mount type The Name label has been affixed to the top side of NDC-1590 :CCU. ExampleJMR-9230-S label on NDC-1590: CCU 4-367 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure After confirming that the image corresponds to the label, click [ OK ] button. The following screen will be displayed and start-up screen will be changed automatically. It will take a few minutes to process. Please press any key because it is a key input required at the end. Then the following screen is displayed. Make sure that the model name that appears during a restart and model name selected in step 3 matches. Restart by clicking the [RESTART] button. Or restart automatically after 30 seconds. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-368 Step 4:

Checking for the splash screen Confirm that the Model name displayed on the splash screen and the Name Label pasted in step 3 are match. Matched: Click [ YES ] button and proceed to the next step. Mismatched: Click [ NO ] button. Initialization tool will return to the screen of step3. Please check the equipment information again. 4-369 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure Step 5:

Serial Number Enter the serial number of each unit. And then click the [ SET ] button.

- Please make sure that the serial number which you now entered corresponds the number which is written in the Ships List.

- When setting the desktop type or flush mount type, may not enter the serial number of the monitor.

-When input the JB ( Junction box ) serial number , enter the barcode number and suffix of JB.

- May not enter the serial number of SLC, AOC, GIF, RIF, SLC#2. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-370 Step 6: Software Update Software Update takes several minutes. Furthermore, The Display Unit will restart several times during the software update. This is normal behavior.

# Software Update will be skipped if the software version which has been installed already is the latest. 4-371 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure Step 7: IP Address By referring the Ships List, enter the IP address. Then click the [ SET ] button. Step 8: Cleanup The tool deletes unnecessary files automatically. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-372 Step 9:

Click [FINISH] button. The resulting CSV file will be output. Result This concludes the initial setting. 4-373 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure Replacing the DVD Drive: CDD-754 4.3.3.5

[Required Tools]

The tools shown in the following table are required for replacement work. Table Required Tools Size Appearance No. 1 Name Flat head screwdriver 6 mm 2 Phillips screwdriver Size #2 3 Diagonal pliers 4 Cable-tie *1

*1 A number of cable-ties may be required. Before conducting replacement work, turn OFF the circuit breaker for the power supply of the display unit. Do not lose the screws as they will be needed again. To prevent damage to the Unit during the replacement work, cut off cable-ties that fasten the cable of the unit beforehand. Step 1 Remove the CCU. Remove the CCU from the display unit mount kit. For more information about the removal procedure, refer to "Replacing with the CCU Repair Kit: NZC-1590."

Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-374 Step 2 Remove the CCU cover and pull out the upper base. Remove the CCU cover and pull out the upper base. For more information about how to remove the cover and how to take out the upper base, refer to "Replacing with the CCU Repair Kit:

NZC-1590."

Step 3 Change the DVD Drive. Remove the mounting brackets of the DVD drive and change the DVD drive. After replacing the DVD drive, assemble to the original condition by repeating the same procedure in the reverse order. For more information about the cable installation destinations, refer to "Replacing with the CCU Repair Kit: NZC-1590."

4-375 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure Step 4 Check operation. After DVD drive replacement is completed, turn ON the circuit breaker for the power supply of the display unit and check the operation as follows.

(1) Turn ON the display unit and start the Display Unit application. Insert DVD-ROM into the DVD drive and check that there is no problem in reading the DVD-ROM. This completes DVD drive replacement. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-376 4.3.3.6 Replacing with the CCU Replacement FAN Kit: 7ZYNA4006

[Required Tools]

The tools shown in the following table are required for replacement work. No. Name Table Required Tools Size Appearance 1 Flat head screwdriver 6 mm 2 Phillips screwdriver Size #2 3 Diagonal pliers 4 Cable-tie *1

*1 A number of cable-ties may be required. Before conducting replacement work, turn OFF the circuit breaker for the power supply of the display unit. Do not lose the screws as they will be needed again. To prevent damage to the Unit during the replacement work, cut off cable-ties that fasten the cable of the unit beforehand. Step 1 Remove the CCU. Remove the CCU from the display unit mount kit. For more information about the removal procedure, refer to "Replacing with the CCU Repair Kit: NZC-1590."

4-377 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure Step 2 Change the fan. Remove the screws (M4: 4 locations) that fasten the fan. Pull out the fan and disconnect the connector. Be careful with the fan mounting direction. Install the fan so that the air flows to the exhaust direction. Air flo w Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-378 Install a new fan in such a way that the fan cable comes out from the lower right when viewed from the front. F a n c a ble Have enough clearance to prevent the cables from being caught in the blades of the fan. After fan replacement is completed, reinstall the CCU into the display unit mount kit by repeating the same procedure in the reverse order. Please make sure to tighten all the screws and connect all the cables back in place. Step 3 Check operation. After fan replacement is completed, turn ON the circuit breaker for the power supply of the display unit and check the operation as follows.

(1) Turn ON the display unit and start the MFD application. Check that there is no problem in its operation and processing.

(2) Check that the fan alarm "CCU (Fan)" does not occur. This completes fan replacement. 4-379 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4.3.3.7 Replacing HASP CYC-344

[Required Tools]

The tools shown in the following table are required for replacement work. Table Required Tools No. Name Size Appearance 1 Flat head screwdriver 6 mm 2 Phillips screwdriver Size #2 3 Diagonal pliers 4 Cable-tie *1 5 USB flash drive *2 1 GB or more

*1

*2 A number of cable-ties may be required. Do not use Flash drives which are password protected or encrypted. Before conducting replacement work, turn OFF the circuit breaker for the power supply of the display unit. Do not lose the screws as they will be needed again. To prevent damage to the Unit during the replacement work, cut off cable-ties that fasten the cable of the unit beforehand. For the details that how to obtain the data files for HASP replacement, please contact our head office or a nearby branch or local office beforehand. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-380

[The flowchart of HASP replacement work]

4-381 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure Step 1 From nearby JRC sales department, receive the data files for HASP replacement. From JRC head office, or a nearby branch or local office, receive the following four items for HASP replacement. 1. Licence file for new HASP 2. Ships equipment information These data files must be saved into your USB flash drive, and brought to the ship at the replacement work. For the details that how to obtain those data files for HASP replacement, please contact our head office or a nearby branch or local office beforehand. The USB flash drives which are password protected or encrypted are not available in this work. Detach the CCU Step 2 Detach the CCU from Display Unit Mount kit. For further information, see Field Service Manual 4.3.3.2 Replacing with the CCU Repair Kit: NZC-1590. Step 3 Remove the upper base of CCU. For further information, Field Service Manual 4.3.3.2 Replacing with the CCU Repair Kit: NZC-1590. Remove the upper base of CCU. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-382 Step 4 Replace the HASP. Disconnect and replace the HASP being connected to the upper base of the NDC-1590. The color of HASP is green. Green CYC-344 HASP Be careful not to mistake HASP for e-Token. The color of the e-Token is blue with a JEPPESEN company tag. The appearance of HASP and e-Token may change without notice. Since the HASP has been fixed by cable-ties, cut them before disconnecting it. After replacement is completed, fasten the new HASP again with cable-ties. Insert the HASP securely all the way to the roots. When fastening it, be sure to fasten securely so that there is no looseness. When the replacement of the HASP is completed, assemble the CCU by repeating the same procedure in the reverse order. For further information, see Field Service Manual 4.3.3.2 Replacing with the CCU Repair Kit: NZC-1590. 4-383 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure After assembling the CCU is completed, reinstall it into the display unit mount kit by repeating the same procedure in the reverse order. Be careful not to forget to insert the cable connectors. Step 5 Check that Display unit is booting up correctly. Turn ON the circuit breaker for the power supply of the display unit to start up the Display unit. Check that the Display unit boots up correctly. Step 6 Import the new Licence file Connect your USB flash drive which contains the new License file into the Display Unit. Enter the password 9380 on the task menu to import the new Licence file. For further information, see Field Service Manual 7.5.4.6 9380 Launch the Licence Import Tool. Step 7 Re-install the electronic charts for ECDIS / CHART RADAR. If the License file imported to the Display Unit has either:

- ECDIS licence

- RADAR with Chart optional licence, or

- MFD which has ECDIS licence, re-install the ENC electronic charts and S-63 Cell Permit by reffering the followings:

-

-

Installation information at the time of commissioning, which is described in the installation check list Additional Manual for Chart Installation 2.1 Importing ENC S-57/S-63 Charts, AVCS Charts and AIO Data When you replace a HASP, ENC charts that have been using on the Display Unit will become unavailable because of the User Permit / Cell Permit change. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-384 Step 8 Check operation. After licence file re-importing is completed, check the operation as follows.

(1) Start the MFD application. Check that there is no problem in its operation and processing.

(2) Conduct the operational inspection as described in "Field Service Manual 7.2 Operational Inspection".

(3) Confirm that there is no problem in display of the electronic charts if you re-installed them. This completes HASP replacement. 4-385 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4.3.3.8 Replacing e-Token CYC-735

[Required Tools]

The tools shown in the following table are required for replacement work. Table Required Tools No. Name Size Appearance 1 Flat head screwdriver 6 mm 2 Phillips screwdriver Size #2 3 Diagonal pliers 4 Cable-tie *1 A number of cable-ties may be required.

*1 Before conducting replacement work, turn OFF the circuit breaker for the power supply of the display unit. Do not lose the screws as they will be needed again. To prevent damage to the Unit during the replacement work, cut off cable-ties that fasten the cable of the unit beforehand. Detach the CCU Step 1 Detach the CCU from Display Unit Mount kit. For further information, see Field Service Manual 4.3.3.2 Replacing with the CCU Repair Kit: NZC-1590. Step 2 Remove the upper base of CCU. For further information, Field Service Manual 4.3.3.2 Replacing with the CCU Repair Kit: NZC-1590. Remove the upper base of CCU. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-386 Step 3 Replace the e-Token. Disconnect and replace the e-Token being connected to the upper base of the NDC-1590. The color of the e-Token is blue with a JEPPESEN company tag which is written the System ID. Be careful not to mistake e-Token for HASP. The color of HASP is green. The appearance of e-Token and HASP may change without notice. Since the e-Token has been fixed by cable-ties, cut them before disconnecting it. After replacement is completed, fasten the new e-Token again with cable-ties. 4-387 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure Insert the e-Token securely all the way to the roots. When fastening it, be sure to fasten securely so that there is no looseness. When the replacement of the e-Token is completed, assemble the CCU by repeating the same procedure in the reverse order. For further information, see Field Service Manual 4.3.3.2 Replacing with the CCU Repair Kit: NZC-1590. After assembling the CCU is completed, reinstall it into the display unit mount kit by repeating the same procedure in the reverse order. Be careful not to forget to insert the cable connectors. Step 4 Check that Display unit is booting up correctly. Turn ON the circuit breaker for the power supply of the display unit to start up the Display unit. Check that the Display unit boots up correctly. Step 5 Recover the C Drive Image. In order to apply the new e-Token ID information to OS registry, recover the C Drive Image. Perform system recovery by referring Field Service Manual 5.3 Recovering the C Drive Image. Step 6 Re-install C-MAP charts. Re-install the electronic charts by referring the followings:

-

-

Installation information at the time of commissioning, which is described in the installation check list Additional Manual for Chart Installation 4.3 Importing C-MAP Ed.3 When you replace an e-Token, C-map charts that have been using on the Display Unit will become unavailable. Step 7 Check operation. After chart re-importing is completed, check the operation as follows.

(1) Start the MFD application. Check that there is no problem in its operation and processing.

(2) Conduct the operational inspection as described in "Field Service Manual 7.2 Operational Inspection".

(3) Confirm that there are no errors on the electronic chart display. This completes e-Token replacement. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-388 4.3.4 Trackball Operation Unit: TOPU NCE-5605 4.3.4.1 Replacing the TOPU: NCE-5605

[Required Tools]

The tools shown in the following table are required for replacement work. Table Required Tools Name Size Appearance No. 1 Flat head screwdriver 6 mm 2 Phillips screwdriver Size #2 3 Diagonal pliers 4 Cable-tie *1

*1 A number of cable-ties may be required. Before conducting replacement work, turn OFF the circuit breaker for the power supply of the display unit. Do not lose the screws as they will be needed again. To prevent damage to the Unit during the replacement work, cut off cable-ties that fasten the cable of the unit beforehand. 4-389 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure Step 1 Remove the front cover of the display unit mount kit. Loosen the screws that fasten the front cover of the display unit mount kit with a flat head screwdriver and then take out the front cover. Step 2 Cut off the cable-tie that fastens the TOPU cable. Cut off the cable-tie that fastens the TOPU cable (W61). Examples for Stand-alone type are shown below. Before conducting Unit replacement work, always be sure that every cable-tie that fastens the cable has been removed. Replacement work without the above may lead Unit/cable breakage. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-390 Step 3 Remove the screws of the TOPU. Remove the two screw covers at the bottom right and left of the trackball. The screw covers can come off by pushing them down inward. Remove the screws (M4: 2 locations) inside the screw covers that fasten the TOPU. Step 4 Change the TOPU. Flip over the TOPU and remove the rear cable (W6: J601). J601 can be released by pulling it out while holding down the center tab. It is difficult that pulling out J601 without pressing the tab enough. If it would not be released, reinsert it once and try again. If you try to pull out the cable before pressing the center tab, the connector may become difficult to be released. In that case, push the connector itself to insertion direction once, and then pull it out while holding down the center tab again. If a keyboard operation unit (KOPU) is mounted, also remove the KOPU cable (W64: J614). J614 can be released by pushing the both ends of the connector. Remove the TOPU from the mounting frame and change it. After replacing the TOPU, assemble to the original condition by repeating the same procedure in the reverse order. Apply new cable-ties to the cables from where cable-ties were cut off. Please make sure to tighten all the screws and connect all the cables back in place. 4-391 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure Step 5 Check operation. After the replacement of the TOPU is completed, turn ON the circuit breaker for the power supply of the display unit and check the operation as follows.

(1) By referring to "7.2.3 Checking the Operation of the Operation Unit [Key Test]," check that all the buttons and knobs of the TOPU respond normally.

(2) By referring to "7.2.4 Checking Alert Sound [Sound Test]," check the alert sound volume.

(3) By referring to "7.2.5 Testing LED Brightness [Light Test]," check the brightness of the LEDs.

(4) By referring to "7.2.6 Testing the Motor [Motor Test]," check the operation of the motor. This completes the replacement of the TOPU. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-392 4.3.4.2 Cleaning the Trackball: CCK-1060

[Required Tools]

The tools shown in the following table are required for replacement work. No. 1 Name Soft dry cloth Table Required Tools Size Before conducting replacement work, turn OFF the circuit breaker for the power supply of the display unit. Step 1 Remove the ball. Rotate the stopper in the direction of the triangle marks (counterclockwise) on the periphery of the ball in the TOPU, and release the lock of the ball. Remove the ball together with the stopper on the periphery. Step 2 Clean the inside. Clean the ball and the inside of the ball stand with a soft dry cloth. After cleaning them, reinstall the ball assembly by repeating the same procedure in the reverse order. Don't forget to tighten the stopper. Never use thinner, alcohol, benzine, alkaline detergents and bleach. Using them will cause malfunction. 4-393 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure Step 3 Check operation. After trackball cleaning is completed, turn ON the circuit breaker for the power supply of the display unit and check the operation as follows.

(1) Check that the trackball moves normally. This completes the cleaning of the trackball. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-394 4.3.4.3

[Required Tools]

Replacing the Trackball: CCK-1060 The tools shown in the following table are required for replacement work. Table Required Tools No. 1 Phillips screwdriver Name Size Size #2 Appearance 2 Diagonal pliers 3 Cable-tie *1

*1 A number of cable-ties may be required. Before conducting replacement work, turn OFF the circuit breaker for the power supply of the display unit. Do not lose the screws as they will be needed again. To prevent damage to the Unit during the replacement work, cut off cable-ties that fasten the cable of the unit beforehand. Remove the screws of the TOPU and take out. Step 1 Remove the screws (M4: 2 locations) inside the two screw covers at the bottom right and left of the trackball, and take out the TOPU from the mounting frame. For details, please refer to the

"Replacing the TOPU: NCE-5605."

4-395 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure Remove the front panel of the TOPU. Step 2 Remove the screws (M3: 6 locations) on the rear of the TOPU and take out the front panel. Pull out the three connectors from the operation circuit A (CCK-1050) and then remove the front panel. W65: J611 and J618 W66: J612 Remove Remove J612 J618 CCK-1050 J611 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-396 Step 3 Remove the Operaition Circuit A: CCK-1050 Remove the screws (M3: 12 locations) that fasten the CCK-1050. Float it from rear case by hooking its edge. Pull out the W67 from the J617, and then remove it. CCK-1050 J615 Reverse Side J631 J617 Reverse Side Ferrite Core W67 Change the trackball: CCK-1060. Step 4 Open the ferrite core which has been attached to the W67 firstly. Remove the screws (M3: 2 locations) that fasten the trackball. Float the trackball. Then remove it together with W67. Disconnect the W67 from the trackball, and change it to new one. 4-397 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure When closing the front panel, be sure not to catch the cables in between. Please check the following points when you rebuild the rear case. 1) Do not forget to put washers on the screws when you install CCK-1060 to the rear case. If you try to tighten the screws without washers, CCK-1060 may be damaged. 2) Adjust the position of CCK-1060 at the middle roughly before you tighten the screws. 3) Be sure that each guide pole of CCK-1050 fits into each guide hole on the rear case when you install it. Please check the following points when you rebuild the front panel. 1) Be sure that the USB cover fits into the guide pin on the front panel. 2) Be sure that the waterproof packing fits into the groove of the front panel. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-398 After replacing the trackball, assemble the TOPU to the original condition by repeating the same procedure in the reverse order. Please make sure to tighten all the screws and connect all the cables back in place. Step 5 Check operation. After the replacement of the trackball is completed, turn ON the circuit breaker for the power supply of the display unit and check the operation as follows.

(1) By referring to "7.2.3 Checking the Operation of the Operation Unit [Key Test]," check that all the buttons and knobs of the TOPU respond normally.

(2) By referring to "7.2.4 Checking Alert Sound [Sound Test]," check the alert sound volume.

(3) By referring to "7.2.5 Testing LED Brightness [Light Test]," check the brightness of the LEDs.

(4) By referring to "7.2.6 Testing the Motor [Motor Test]," check the operation of the motor. This completes the replacement of the trackball. 4-399 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4.3.4.4

[Required Tools]

Replacing the Operation Circuit A: CCK-1050 The tools shown in the following table are required for replacement work. Table Required Tools No. Name Size Appearance 1 Phillips screwdriver Size #2 2 Diagonal pliers 3 Cable-tie *1

*1 A number of cable-ties may be required. Before conducting replacement work, turn OFF the circuit breaker for the power supply of the display unit. Do not lose the screws as they will be needed again. To prevent damage to the Unit during the replacement work, cut off cable-ties that fasten the cable of the unit beforehand. Step 1 Remove the screws of the TOPU and take out. Remove the screws (M4: 2 locations) inside the two screw covers at the bottom right and left of the trackball, and take out the TOPU from the mounting frame. For details, please refer to the

"4.3.4.1 Replacing the TOPU: NCE-5605."

Step 2 Remove the front panel of the TOPU. Remove the screws (M3: 6 locations) on the rear of the TOPU and take out the front panel. For details, please refer to the "4.3.4.3 Replacing the Trackball: CCK-1060."

Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-400 Change the operation circuit A: CCK-1050. Step 3 Remove the screws (M3: 12 locations) that fasten the CCK-1050. Float it from rear case by hooking its edge. Pull out the W67 from the J617, and then change it. CCK-1050 J615 Reverse Side J631 J617 Reverse Side Ferrite Core W67 After replacing the CCK-1050, assemble to the original condition by repeating the same procedure in the reverse order. Please make sure to tighten all the screws and connect all the cables back in place. When closing the front panel, be sure not to catch the cables in between. Step 4 Check operation. After the replacement of the operation circuit A is completed, turn ON the circuit breaker for the power supply of the display unit and check the operation as follows.

(1) By referring to "7.2.3 Checking the Operation of the Operation Unit [Key Test]," check that all the buttons and knobs of the TOPU respond normally.

(2) By referring to "7.2.4 Checking Alert Sound [Sound Test]," check the alert sound volume.

(3) By referring to "7.2.5 Testing LED Brightness [Light Test]," check the brightness of the LEDs.

(4) By referring to "7.2.6 Testing the Motor [Motor Test]," check the operation of the motor. This completes the replacement of the operation circuit A. 4-401 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4.3.4.5 Replacing the Operation Circuit SW: CCK-1069

[Required Tools]

The tools shown in the following table are required for replacement work. Table Required Tools No. 1 Phillips screwdriver Name Size Size #2 Appearance 2 Diagonal pliers 3 Cable-tie *1

*1 A number of cable-ties may be required. Before conducting replacement work, turn OFF the circuit breaker for the power supply of the display unit. Do not lose the screws as they will be needed again. To prevent damage to the Unit during the replacement work, cut off cable-ties that fasten the cable of the unit beforehand. Step 1 Remove the TOPU. Remove the screws (M4: 2 locations) inside the two screw covers at the bottom right and left of the trackball, and take out the TOPU from the mounting frame. For details, please refer to the

"Replacing the TOPU: NCE-5605."

Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-402 Step 2 Remove the front panel. Remove the screws (M3: 6 locations) on the rear of the TOPU and take out the front panel. Pull out the two connectors from the operation circuit SW (CCK-1069) and then remove the front panel. W65: J621 W66: J622 Remove Remove J612 J618 CCK-1050 J611 4-403 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure Step 3 Remove the knob of the multi dial. Remove the knob of the multi dial. The knob can be removed by pulling it out. Step 4 Change the operation circuit SW: CCK-1069. Disconnect the two connectors (J623 & J624) from the CCK-1069. They are for the speaker and the vibration mortor. Disconnect W65, W65 from J621, J622 respectively. Remove the screws (M3: 10 locations) that fasten the CCK-1069 and take it out. After replacing it, assemble to the original condition by repeating the same procedure in the reverse order. Please make sure to tighten all the screws and connect all the cables back in place. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-404 l. When closing the front panel, be sure not to catch the cables in between. Please check the following points when you rebuild the front panel. 1) Be sure that each guide pole of CCK-1069 fits into each guide hole on the front panel when you install it. 2) Be sure that the USB cover fits into the guide pin on the front panel. 3) Be sure that the waterproof packing fits into the groove of the front pane 4-405 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure Step 5 Check operation. After the replacement of the operation circuit SW is completed, turn ON the circuit breaker for the power supply of the display unit and check the operation as follows.

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4) By referring to "7.2.3 Checking the Operation of the Operation Unit [Key Test]," check that all the buttons and knobs of the TOPU respond normally. By referring to "7.2.4 Checking Alert Sound [Sound Test]," check the alert sound volume. By referring to "7.2.5 Testing LED Brightness [Light Test]," check the brightness of the LEDs. By referring to "7.2.6 Testing the Motor [Motor Test]," check the operation of the motor. This completes the replacement of the operation circuit SW. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-406 4.3.4.6

[Required Tools]

Replacing the Operation Circuit CN: CCK-1070 The tools shown in the following table are required for replacement work. No. 1 Phillips screwdriver Name Table Required Tools Size Appearance Size #2 2 Diagonal pliers 3 Cable-tie *1

*1 A number of cable-ties may be required. Before conducting replacement work, turn OFF the circuit breaker for the power supply of the display unit. Do not lose the screws as they will be needed again. To prevent damage to the Unit during the replacement work, cut off cable-ties that fasten the cable of the unit beforehand. Step 1 Remove the screws of the TOPU and take out. Remove the screws (M4: 2 locations) inside the two screw covers at the bottom right and left of the trackball, and take out the TOPU from the mounting frame. For details, please refer to the

"Replacing the TOPU: NCE-5605."

Step 2 Remove the front panel of the TOPU. Remove the screws (M3: 6 locations) on the rear of the TOPU and take out the front panel. For details, please refer to the " Replacing the Trackball: CCK-1060."

Step 3 Remove the operation circuit A. Remove the screws (M3: 12 locations) that fasten the operation circuit A. Remove the J617 and the J631, and change the operation circuit A. For details, please refer to the "Replacing the Operation Circuit A: CCK-1050"

4-407 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure Step 4 Change the operation circuit CN: CCK-1070. Remove the screws (M3: 4 locations) that fasten the CCK-1070. After replacing it, assemble to the original condition by repeating the same procedure in the reverse order. Fit the guide holes of CCK-1070 into the guide poles on the rear case.Please make sure to tighten all the screws and connect all the cables back in place. When closing the front panel, be sure not to catch the cables in between. Step 5 Check operation. After the replacement of the operation circuit CN is completed, turn ON the circuit breaker for the power supply of the display unit and check the operation as follows.

(1) By referring to "7.2.3 Checking the Operation of the Operation Unit [Key Test]," check that all the buttons and knobs of the TOPU respond normally.

(2) By referring to "7.2.4 Checking Alert Sound [Sound Test]," check the alert sound volume.

(3) By referring to "7.2.5 Testing LED Brightness [Light Test]," check the brightness of the LEDs.

(4) By referring to "7.2.6 Testing the Motor [Motor Test]," check the operation of the motor. This completes the replacement of the operation circuit CN. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-408 4.3.5 Keyboard Operation Unit: KOPU NCE-5625 4.3.5.1 Replacing the Keyboard Operation Unit: KOPU NCE-5625

[Required Tools]

The tools shown in the following table are required for replacement work. Table Required Tools No. 1 Phillips screwdriver Name Size Size #2 Appearance Before conducting replacement work, turn OFF the circuit breaker for the power supply of the display unit. Do not lose the screws as they will be needed again. Step 1 Remove the screws of the KOPU. Remove the four screw covers at the top and bottom of the KOPU. The screw covers can come off by pushing them down inward. Remove the screws (M4: 4 locations) inside the screw covers that fasten the TOPU. 4-409 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure Step 2 Change the KOPU. Float the KOPU from the mounting frame. While keeping it afloat, remove the rear cable (W64:

J642). The cable can be removed by pushing the both ends of the connector. Remove the KOPU from the mounting frame and change it. After replacing the KOPU, assemble to the original condition by repeating the same procedure in the reverse order. Please make sure to tighten all the screws and connect all the cables back in place. Step 3 Check operation. After the replacement of the KOPU is completed, turn ON the circuit breaker for the power supply of the display unit and check the operation as follows.

(1) Check that a keyboard open error has not occurred.

(2) By referring to "7.2.3 Checking the Operation of the Operation Unit [Key Test]," check that all the buttons and knobs of the KOPU respond normally.

(3) By referring to "7.2.5 Testing LED Brightness [Light Test]," check the brightness of the LEDs. This completes KOPU replacement. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-410 4.3.5.2 Replacing the Operation Circuit B: CCK-1059

[Required Tools]

The tools shown in the following table are required for replacement work. Table Required Tools No. 1 Phillips screwdriver Name Size Size #2 Appearance Before conducting replacement work, turn OFF the circuit breaker for the power supply of the display unit. Do not lose the screws as they will be needed again. Step 1 Remove the screws of the KOPU and take out. Remove the screws (M4: 4 locations) inside the four screw covers at the top and bottom of the KOPU, and take out it from the mounting frame. For details, please refer to the "Replacing the Keyboard Operation Unit: KOPU NCE-5625."

Step 2 Remove the knobs of all the dials of the KOPU. Remove the knobs of all the dials (EBL, RAIN, SEA, GAIN & VRM) of the KOPU. The knobs can be removed by pulling them out upward. 4-411 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure Step 3 Change the operation circuit B: CCK-1059. Disconnect the FPC that connects between the CCK-1059 and the keyboard. FPC can be released by sliding the actuator of J641 horizontally. Remove the screws (M3: 16 locations) that fasten the CCK-1059 and change it. After replacing the operation circuit B, assemble to the original condition by repeating the same procedure in the reverse order. Please make sure to tighten all the screws and connect all the cables back in place. When mounting the operation circuit B, fit it into the guide hole. Be sure to place the key rubber in the correct position as it is easy to be displaced. Exercise caution when handling the FPC as it is very fragile. When installing the FPC, be careful not to insert them slanted or bend them. Guide hole Guide hole CCK-1059 J641 FPC Guide hole Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-412 Step 4 Check operation. After the replacement of the operation circuit B is completed, turn ON the circuit breaker for the power supply of the display unit and check the operation as follows.

(1) Check that a keyboard open error has not occurred.

(2) By referring to "7.2.3 Checking the Operation of the Operation Unit [Key Test]," check that all the buttons and knobs of the KOPU respond normally.

(3) By referring to "7.2.5 Testing LED Brightness [Light Test]," check the brightness of the LEDs. This completes the replacement of the operation circuit B. 4-413 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4.3.5.3 Replacing the Keyboard: CCK-1061

[Required Tools]

The tools shown in the following table are required for replacement work. No. 1 Phillips screwdriver Name Table Required Tools Size Appearance Size #2 Before conducting replacement work, turn OFF the circuit breaker for the power supply of the display unit. Do not lose the screws as they will be needed again. Step 1 Remove the screws of the KOPU and take out. Remove the screws (M4: 4 locations) inside the four screw covers at the top and bottom of the KOPU, and take out the KOPU from the mounting frame. For details, please refer to the

"Replacing the Keyboard Operation Unit: KOPU NCE-5625."

Step 2 Change the keyboard: CCK-1061. Disconnect the FPC that connects between the operation circuit B and the keyboard: CCK-1061. FPC can be released by sliding the actuator of J641 horizontally. Remove the screws (M3: 13 locations) that fasten the CCK-1061 and change it. After replacing the CCK-1061, assemble to the original condition by repeating the same procedure in the reverse order. Please make sure to tighten all the screws and connect all the cables back in place. When mounting the new keyboard, be careful so that the waterproof packing dos not get into the inside of the keyboard. Exercise caution when handling the FPC as it is very fragile. When installing the FPC, be careful not to insert them slanted or bend them. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-414 4-415 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure Step 3 Check operation. After the replacement of the keyboard is completed, turn ON the circuit breaker for the power supply of the display unit and check the operation as follows.

(1) Check that a keyboard open error has not occurred.

(2) By referring to "7.2.3 Checking the Operation of the Operation Unit [Key Test]," check that all the buttons and knobs of the KOPU respond normally.

(3) By referring to "7.2.5 Testing LED Brightness [Light Test]," check the brightness of the LEDs. This completes keyboard replacement. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-416

 

 

4.3.6 Power Supply Unit: PSU NBD-913 4.3.6.1 Replacing the Fuses of the Power Supply Unit: PSU NBD-913

[Required Tools]

The tools shown in the following table are required for replacement work. No. 1 Needle-nose pliers Name 6 inch Table Required Tools Size Appearance Before conducting replacement work, turn OFF the circuit breaker for the power supply of the display unit. Step 1 Remove the front cover of the display unit mount kit. Loosen the screws that fasten the front cover of the display unit mount kit with a flat head screwdriver and then take out the front cover. 4-417 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure Step 2 Open the fuse covers on the front of the PSU. The fuse covers open from left to right when viewed from the front. Open the fuse covers. Change the fuses. Step 3 Using a pair of 6 inch needle-nose pliers, change the fuses. The fuses are blade fuses. After replacing the fuses, assemble to the original condition by repeating the same procedure in the reverse order. Please make sure to tighten all the screws and set all the switches back in place. Name Unit Name Location of Use Q'ty Use Model Name (Code) Blade Fuse

(Auto Fuse) NBD-913 NBD-913 2 DC32V 15A 1015 (5ZFCK00008) Step 4 Check operation. After the replacement of the PSU fuses is completed, turn ON the circuit breaker for the power supply of the display unit and check the operation as follows.

(1) Start [RADAR] on the Task menu and check that 24VDC is output to the scanner unit.

(2) Perform transmission after the completion of scanner unit preheating and check that normal radar images are displayed. This completes PSU fuse replacement. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-418 4.3.6.2 Replacing the Power Supply Unit: PSU NBD-913 AC and DC power supplies have been fed to PSU. Before replacement work, be sure to turn OFF the applicable power circuit breaker. Not following this instruction will cause electric shock and/or malfunction.

[Required Tools]

The tools shown in the following table are required for replacement work. Table Required Tools Name Size Appearance Flat head screwdriver 6 mm No. 1 2 Phillips screwdriver Size #2 3 Diagonal pliers 4 Cable-tie *1

*1 A number of cable-ties may be required. Before conducting replacement work, turn OFF the circuit breaker for the power supply of the display unit. Do not lose the screws as they will be needed again. To prevent damage to the Unit during the replacement work, cut off cable-ties that fasten the cable of the unit beforehand. 4-419 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure Step 1 Remove the front cover of the display unit mount kit. Loosen the screws that fasten the front cover of the display unit mount kit with a flat head screwdriver and then take out the front cover. Remove the PSU from the display unit mount kit. Step 2 Remove all the connectors being connected to the front of the PSU. Loosen the two screws of the TB1 on the right and left of the front and remove it together with the wires. The J50 and the J51 can be removed by pulling them out while holding down the tabs at the top center. Remove the screws (M5: 2 locations) of the mounting plate that fasten the PSU, pull out the CCU together with the mounting plate, and then remove it from the display unit mount kit. To secure safety, turn OFF the main power circuit breakers of AC and DC power supplies before replacement work. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-420 Before conducting Unit replacement work, always be sure that every cable-tie that fastens the cable has been removed. Replacement work without the above may lead Unit/cable breakage. Step 3 Change the PSU. Remove the screws (M4: 4 locations) of the mounting plate and pull out the PSU from the mounting plate. After replacing the PSU, assemble to the original condition by repeating the same procedure in the reverse order. Please make sure to tighten all the screws and set all the switches back in place. Step 4 Check operation. After PSU replacement is completed, turn ON the circuit breaker for the power supply of the display unit and check the operation as follows.

(1) Turn ON the power to the display unit, make sure that screen display is normal, and there are no abnormalities in operation and processing.

(2) If a scanner unit is being connected, start [RADAR] on the Task menu, perform transmission, and check that normal radar images are displayed. This completes PSU replacement. 4-421 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4.3.6.3 Replacing the PSU Replacement FAN Kit: 7ZYNA4007 AC and DC power supplies have been fed to PSU. Before replacement work, be sure to turn OFF the applicable power circuit breaker. Not following this instruction will cause electric shock and/or malfunction.

[Required Tools]

The tools shown in the following table are required for replacement work. No. Name Table Required Tools Size Appearance 1 Flat head screwdriver 6 mm 2 Phillips screwdriver Size #2 3 Diagonal pliers 4 Cable-tie *1

*1 A number of cable-ties may be required. Before conducting replacement work, turn OFF the circuit breaker for the power supply of the display unit. Do not lose the screws as they will be needed again. To prevent damage to the Unit during the replacement work, cut off cable-ties that fasten the cable of the unit beforehand. Step 1 Remove the PSU. Remove the front cover of the display unit mount kit and the mounting plate of the PSU, and then pull out the PSU. For more information about the removal procedure, refer to "4.3.6.2 Replacing the Power Supply Unit: PSU NBD-913."

Step 2 Remove the PSU from the mounting plate. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-422 Remove the screws (M4: 4 locations) of the mounting plate and pull out the PSU from the mounting plate. For more information about the removal procedure, refer to "4.3.6.2 Replacing the Power Supply Unit: PSU NBD-913."

Step 3 Remove the PSU side plates. Remove the side plate covering the fans of the PSU (M3: 6 locations). Step 4 Disconnect the connector of the fans. Lift the side plate covering the fans of the PSU. Disconnect the connector of the fans inside the PSU. 4-423 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure Step 5 Change the fans. Remove the screws (M4: 8 locations) that fasten the fans. Change the fans. Install the fans in order to satisfy the following directions:

Upper center Outward Fan cables:

Wind flow:

Be careful with the fan mounting direction. Have enough clearance to prevent the cables from being caught in the blades of the fans. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-424 After replacing the fans, assemble to the original condition by repeating the same procedure in the reverse order. Please make sure to tighten all the screws and connect all the cables back in place. Step 6 Check operation. After PSU fan replacement is completed, turn ON the circuit breaker for the main power supply and the circuit breaker for the power supply of the display unit, and check the operation as follows.

(1) Turn ON the power to the display unit, make sure that screen display is normal, and there are no abnormalities in operation and processing.

(2) Check that the fan alarm "POWER (Fan)" does not occur. This completes PSU fan replacement. 4-425 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4.3.7 Junction Box: JB NQE-1143 4.3.7.1 Checking the Installation State There are the following combinations of the circuits incorporated into the NQE-1143 junction box

(JB). Before starting replacement work, check the installation state inside the JB. Suffix

-R

-S

-SR

-SS

-GR

-SAR

-SA

-SGR

-SAGR

-SG

-SAG

-SAS Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-426 4.3.7.2 Replacing the Fuses of the Serial LAN Interface Circuit:

SLC CMH-2370

[Required Tools]

The tools shown in the following table are required for replacement work. Table Required Tools No. Name Size Appearance 1 Flat head screwdriver 6 mm 2 Phillips screwdriver Size #2 3 Needle-nose pliers 6 inch Before conducting replacement work, turn OFF the circuit breaker for the power supply of the display unit. Do not lose the screws as they will be needed again. A DC power supply has fed to SLC. Before replacement work, be sure to turn OFF the DC power circuit breaker. Remove the front cover of the display unit mount kit. Loosen the screws that fasten the front cover of the display unit mount kit with a flat head screwdriver and then take out the front cover. 4-427 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure Step 1 Step 2 Remove the lid of the JB. Remove the screws (M4: 4 locations) that fasten the lid of the JB and then take it out. Step 3 Turn OFF the power switch of the SLC. Turn OFF the power S1 switch of the SLC. SLC Power SW OFF Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-428 Step 4 Change the fuses. Using a pair of 6 inch needle-nose pliers, change the fuses. The fuses are blade fuses. After replacing the fuses, assemble to the original condition by repeating the same procedure in the reverse order. Please make sure to tighten all the screws and set all the switches back in place. Name Unit Name Location of Use Q'ty Use Model Name (Code) Blade (mini) Fuse

(Auto Fuse) Blade (mini) Fuse

(Auto Fuse) NQE-1143 CMH-2370 1 2 DC32V 15A 1215(5ZFCK00017) DC32V 3A 1203(5ZFCK00016) SLC Fuses Step 5 Check operation. After the replacement of the SLC fuses is completed, turn ON the circuit breaker for the power supply of the display unit and check the operation as follows.

(1) Check that the 24V buzzer being connected to the SLC functions. This completes SLC fuse replacement. 4-429 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4.3.7.3 Replacing the Serial LAN Interface Circuit: SLC CMH-2370

[Required Tools]

The tools shown in the following table are required for replacement work. Table Required Tools Size Appearance No. 1 Name Flat head screwdriver 2 mm, 6 mm 2 Phillips screwdriver Size #1, Size #2 3 Nut driver*1 5.5 mm Step 1

*1 Required when an Analog Option Circuit (AOC) is installed. Before conducting replacement work, turn OFF the circuit breaker for the power supply of the display unit. Do not lose the screws as they will be needed again. A DC power supply has fed to SLC. Before replacement work, be sure to turn OFF the DC power circuit breaker. Remove the front cover of the display unit mount kit and the lid of the JB. Remove the front cover of the display unit mount kit and the lid of the JB. For more information about the removal procedure, refer to "Replacing the Fuses of the Serial LAN Interface Circuit:

SLC CMH-2370."

Step 2 Turn OFF the power switch of the SLC and remove the wires together with the two-piece terminal block. Turn OFF the power S1 switch of the SLC. Disconnect the Ethernet cables. Remove the two-piece terminal block together with wires if wires are connected to it. They can be removed by pulling them out. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-430 Step 3 Remove the AOC (if installed) If an AOC is installed, remove the screws at four corners (M3: 4 locations) that fasten the AOC and then take out it. 4-431 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure Step 4 Remove the FFC on the GIF side and then remove the SLC. If a GIF is installed, turn OFF the S1 switch of the GIF, open the J821 of the GIF, and then remove the FFC (W82). For more information about the S1 switch of the GIF, refer to "Replacing the Fuses of the Gyro Interface Circuit: GIF CMJ-554."

Remove the screws that fasten the SLC and take it out.

: M3 9 locations

: M3 5 locations

: 5.5 mm threaded hex spacer x 4 locations If an AOC is not installed If an AOC is installed Exercise caution when handling the FFCs as they are very fragile. M3 screws

(w/o AOC) or 5.5 mm Threaded Hex Spacers

(w/ AOC) W82 J821 SLC J8115 GIF P Step 5 Set up the switches/jumper pins of new SLC and replace. Set up the switches and jumper pins of the new SLC by referring following informations.

- Ships List

- Chapter 2.5 DIP-SW and Jumper Pin Settings

- SLC you just removed. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-432 Next, connect the FFC W82 to the J8115 on the back of the SLC first, and then assemble the new SLC according to the SLC replacement procedure in the reverse order. Please make sure to tighten all the screws and connect all the cables back in place. Exercise caution when handling the FFCs as they are very fragile. When installing the FFCs, be careful not to insert them slanted or bend them. W82 SLC J821 GIF P J8115 To reconnect the cables and the two-piece terminal blocks, connect them to the same locations as before removing them. Step 6 Teke over SLC serial port settings After the replacement of the SLC is completed, turn ON the power switch of the SLC and the circuit breaker for the power supply of the display unit. Setting information of the SLC which is to be replaced have been stored at the CCU. Take over those information to the new SLC from the CCU by conducting the following steps. Click [Menu] -> [Service] -> [Installation] to open the Installation window. Select [System Configuration] in the 1st Classification pane and [Subsystem Installation] in the 2nd Classification pane. On left below of Edit/Result pane, click to unmark the check box of the Junction box that has the replaced SLC once, then mark it again. The setting information will be loaded into the new SLC from the CCU. 6-1. 6-2. 6-3. For further information, see Installation Manual 4.4 Subsystem Installation. 4-433 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure Step 7 Check operation. Check the operation as follows.

(1) Check that a cable open error has not occurred.

(2) Check that the values of the sensor being connected to the SLC are displayed on the screen.

(3) Check that the 24V buzzer functions correctly if it is being connected to the SLC.

(4) Check that the contact input can be read correctly if contact signal input is being connected to the SLC.

(5) Check that the contact output functions correctly if contact signal output is being connected to the SLC. This completes SLC replacement. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-434 4.3.7.4 Replacing the Analog Option Circuit: AOC CMJ-560

[Required Tools]

The tools shown in the following table are required for replacement work. Table Required Tools Size Appearance No. 1 Name Flat head screwdriver 6 mm 2 Phillips screwdriver Size #2 Step 1 Before conducting replacement work, turn OFF the circuit breaker for the power supply of the display unit. Do not lose the screws as they will be needed again. The power to the AOC is supplied from the SLC. A DC power supply has fed to SLC. Before replacement work, be sure to turn OFF the DC power circuit breaker. Remove the front cover of the display unit mount kit and the lid of the JB. Remove the front cover of the display unit mount kit and the lid of the JB. For more information about the removal procedure, refer to "Replacing the Fuses of the Serial LAN Interface Circuit:

SLC CMH-2370."

Step 2 Turn OFF the power switch of the SLC and remove the wires together with the two-piece terminal block. Turn OFF the power S1 switch of the SLC. Remove the wires of the AOC together with the two-piece terminal block. The terminal block can be removed by pulling it out. 4-435 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure Step 3 Remove the AOC. Remove the screws at four corners (M3: 4 locations) that fasten the AOC and then take out the AOC. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-436 Step 4 Set up the new AOC and replace. Set up the switches and jumper pins of the new AOC by referring following informations.

- Ships List

- Chapter 2.5 DIP-SW and Jumper Pin Settings

- AOC you just removed. Next, assemble the new AOC by repeating the same procedure in the reverse order. Please make sure to tighten all the screws and connect all the cables back in place. When mounting the new AOC, be sure to insert the TB841 in the correct position as it is easy to be displaced. Step 5 Check operation. After the replacement of the AOC is completed, turn ON the power switch of the SLC and the circuit breaker for the power supply of the display unit, and check the operation as follows.

(1) Check that the values of the sensor being connected to the AOC are displayed on the screen. The sensor values may deviate due to circuit board replacement; in such a case, please adjust the values by referring to "4.8 A/D (Analog/Digital Settings)" in the Installation Manuals. Also, to change the sensor wiring (connection channel change) from the time before the replacement of the AOC, reset by referring to "4.8 A/D (Analog/Digital Settings)" in the "JMR-7200/9200 series, Installation Manuals. This completes AOC replacement. 4-437 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4.3.7.5 Replacing the Fuses of the Gyro Interface Circuit: GIF CMJ-554

[Required Tools]

The tools shown in the following table are required for replacement work. Table Required Tools Size Appearance No. 1 Name Flat head screwdriver 4 mm, 6 mm 2 Phillips screwdriver Size #2 Step 1 Before conducting replacement work, turn OFF the circuit breaker for the power supply of the display unit. Do not lose the screws as they will be needed again. The GIF uses the gyro compass signal as its power source. Before changing the fuses of the GIF, be sure to turn OFF the S1 switch of the GIF. Remove the front cover of the display unit mount kit and the lid of the JB. Remove the front cover of the display unit mount kit and the lid of the JB. For more information about the removal procedure, refer to "Replacing the Fuses of the Serial LAN Interface Circuit:

SLC CMH-2370."

Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-438 Step 2 Turn OFF the S1 switch of the GIF. Turn OFF the S1 switch in the lower part of the GIF. Signals from the gyro compass are blocked. Change the fuses. Step 3 Open the fuse holders and change the fuses. Each of the fuse holders can be opened by slowly turning the holder head counterclockwise while pushing it down. The fuses are glass tube fuses. After replacing the fuses, assemble to the original condition by repeating the same procedure in the reverse order. Please make sure to tighten all the screws and set all the switches back in place. If any of the fuse holders cannot be opened because it is too tight, push a 6 mm tip width flat head screwdriver against the groove on the fuse holder head and rotate it slowly counterclockwise. When closing the fuse holders, do not use a flat head screwdriver, however. Using a flat head screwdriver may lead to damage to the fuse holders. Name Unit Name Location of Use Q'ty Use Model Name (Code) Glass Fuse NQE-1143 CMJ-554 4 250V 0.5A MF51NR250V0.5A

(5ZFGD00019) 4-439 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure Step 4 Check operation. After the replacement of the GIF fuses is completed, turn ON the S1 switch of the GIF and the circuit breaker for the power supply of the display unit, and check the operation as follows.

(1) Check that true bearing values are displayed on the screen. This completes GIF fuse replacement. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-440 4.3.7.6 Replacing the Gyro Interface Circuit: GIF CMJ-554

[Required Tools]

The tools shown in the following table are required for replacement work. Table Required Tools Size Appearance No. 1 Name Flat head screwdriver 2 mm, 6 mm 2 Phillips screwdriver Size #2 Before conducting replacement work, turn OFF the circuit breaker for the power supply of the display unit. Do not lose the screws as they will be needed again. The GIF uses the gyro compass signal as its power source. Before changing the GIF, be sure to turn OFF the S1 switch of the GIF. Remove the front cover of the display unit mount kit and the lid of the JB. Remove the front cover of the display unit mount kit and the lid of the JB. For more information about the removal procedure, refer to "Replacing the Fuses of the Serial LAN Interface Circuit:

SLC CMH-2370."

Step 2 Turn OFF the S1 switch of the GIF and remove the wires together with the two-piece terminal block. Turn OFF the S1 switch in the lower part of the GIF. Signals from the gyro compass are blocked. Remove the wired two-piece terminal block J823. 4-441 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure Step 1 Step 3 Remove the GIF. If an SLC is installed, disconnect the FFC (W82: J821) that connects with the SLC. If an RIF is installed, disconnect the cable (W81: J822) that connects with the RIF. Exercise caution when handling the FFCs as they are very fragile. Remove the screws (M3: 6 locations) that fasten the GIF and then take out the GIF from the JB. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-442 Step 4 Set up the new GIF and replace.. Set up the switches and jumper pins of the new GIF by referring following informations.

- Ships List

- Chapter 2.5 DIP-SW and Jumper Pin Settings

- GIF you just removed. Next, assemble the new GIF by repeating the removal work in the reverse order. Please make sure to tighten all the screws and connect all the cables back in place. Exercise caution when handling the FFCs as they are very fragile. When installing the FFCs, be careful not to insert them slanted or bend them. 4-443 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure Step 5 Check operation. After the replacement of the GIF is completed, turn ON the S1 switch of the GIF and the circuit breaker for the power supply of the display unit, and check the operation as follows.

(1) Check that a cable open error has not occurred.

(2) Check that true bearing values are displayed on the screen. This completes GIF replacement. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-444

 

 

4.3.7.7 Replacing the Radar interface circuit: RIF CQD-2273

[Required Tools]

The tools shown in the following table are required for replacement work. Table Required Tools Name Size Appearance No. 1 Flat head screwdriver 2 mm, 4 mm*1, 6 mm 2 Phillips screwdriver Size #2 3 Diagonal pliers 4 Cable-tie *2

*1 Use for TB840 on the RIF if NKE-2254-6HS or NKE-2103-6/-6H type scanner unit has been installed.

*2 A number of cable-ties may be required. Step 1 Before conducting replacement work, turn OFF the circuit breaker for the power supply of the display unit. Before replacement work, be sure that all the LEDs on the front of the PSU NBD-913 are unlit. Charged electricity may still remain in the internal capacitor. Do not lose the screws as they will be needed again. To prevent damage to the Unit during the replacement work, cut off cable-ties that fasten the cable of the unit beforehand. Remove the front cover of the display unit mount kit and the lid of the JB. Remove the front cover of the display unit mount kit and the lid of the JB. For more information about the removal procedure, refer to "Replacing the Fuses of the Serial LAN Interface Circuit:

SLC CMH-2370."

4-445 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure Step 2 Remove the wires of the RIF. Remove the wires of the RIF according to the following order. 2-1 Tow-piece terminal blocks (J832, J833, J834, J836) 2-2 Terminal block (TB838 ANT side or TB840) 2-3 Interconnections (J831, J837 or J839, TB838 PSU side) 2-4 GIF cable (J835: only if a GIF has been installed) 2-1 Remove the two-piece terminal blocks. Remove the two-piece terminal blocks together with wires if wires are connected to them. They can be removed by pulling them out. Tow-piece terminal blocks: J832, J833, J834, J836 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-446 2-2 Remove the wiring from the terminal blocks. There are two types of terminal board wiring depending on the scanner unit installed. If the 2695110056 cable has been used, disconnect the yellow and green cables being connected to the TB838 ANT side. The y can be removed by pulling them out. Scanner units and transmitter-receiver units which installed with 2695110056 cable are:

(JMR-9230-S, JMR-7230-S)

(JMR-9225-6X/9X, JMR-7225-6X/9X)

(JMR-9230-S3, JMR-7230-S3)

(JMR-9225-7X3/9X3, JMR-7225-7X3/9X3)

(JMR-9272-S, JMR-7272-S)

(JMR-9282-S/SH, JMR-7282-S/SH) NKE-1130 NKE-1125 NTG-3230 NTG-3225 NKE-1632 NKE-2632/-H Yellow Green RIF Clear cover TB838 ANT TB838 PSU 4-447 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure If the CFQ-6912 cable has been used, disconnect the cables being connected to the TB840. They can be released by inserting a 4 mm width flat head screwdriver into the driver slots above the cable slots.

(JMR-9225-6XH, JMR-7225-6XH)

(JMR-9210-6X/6XH, JMR-7210-6X/6XH) Scanner units which installed with CFQ-6912 cable are:

NKE-2254-6HS NKE-2103-6/6HS Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-448 2-3 Remove the internal wiring There are two types of internal wirng depending on the scanner unit installed. If the W851 or W852 cable has been installed, remove the following terminal blocks, connector and screw. TB838:

TB838:

J837:

Loosen the screws (M4) and remove the crimp terminal with "U" stamp seal of W851/W852. Loosen the screws (M4) and remove the crimp terminal with "V" stamp seal of W851/W852. Using a flat head screwdriver, hold down the tab of the connector with a P837 stamp seal of W851/W852 and pull it out. Screw at the lower right of the RIF board: Remove the screw (M3) and then disconnect the crimp terminal with FG stamp seal of W851/W852. Next, disconnect the connection cable with the CCU, either the W841 or the W842, from the J831. The W841/W842 cable can be disconnected by cutting off the cable-tie that fastens the J841/J842 cable to the cable clamp of the JB first and pulling out the W841/W842 cable while pressing down the tab of the P831 connector next. Scanner units and transmitter-receiver units using the W851/W852 cable:

(JMR-9230-S, JMR-7230-S)

(JMR-9225-6X/9X, JMR-7225-6X/9X)

(JMR-9230-S3, JMR-7230-S3)

(JMR-9225-7X3/9X3, JMR-7225-7X3/9X3)

(JMR-9272-S, JMR-7272-S)

(JMR-9282-S/SH, JMR-7282-S/SH) NKE-1130 NKE-1125 NTG-3230 NTG-3225 NKE-1632 NKE-2632/-H W851 / W852 P837 U V FG P831 W841 / W842 4-449 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure Before conducting Unit replacement work, always be sure that every cable-tie that fastens the cable has been removed. Replacement work without the above may lead Unit/cable breakage. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-450 If the W853 or W854 cable has been installed, remove the following connector and screw. J839:

Using a flat head screwdriver, hold down the tab of the connector with a P839 stamp seal of W853/W854 and pull it out. Screw at the lower right of the RIF board: Remove the screw (M3) and then disconnect the crimp terminal with FG stamp seal of W853/W854. Next, disconnect the connection cable with the CCU, either the W841 or the W842, from the J831 connector. The W841/W842 cable can be disconnected by cutting off the cable-tie that fastens the W841/W842 cable to the cable clamp of the JB first and pulling out the W841/W842 cable while pressing down the tab of the P831 connector next. Scanner units using the W853/W854 cable:

NKE-2254-6HS NKE-2103-6/6HS

(JMR-9225-6XH, JMR-7225-6XH)

(JMR-9210-6X/6XH, JMR-7210-6X/6XH) P839 FG P831 W853 / W854 W841 / W842 4-451 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure Before conducting Unit replacement work, always be sure that every cable-tie that fastens the cable has been removed. Replacement work without the above may lead Unit/cable breakage. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-452 2-4 Disconnect the GIF cable. If a GIF is installed, turn OFF the S1 switch of the GIF and then remove the connection cable with the GIF (W81: J835). For more information about the S1 switch of the GIF, refer to "Replacing the Fuses of the Gyro Interface Circuit: GIF CMJ-554."

4-453 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure Step 3 Change the RIF. Remove the remaining screws (M3: 5 locations) that fasten the RIF and change the RIF. After replacing the RIF, assemble to the original condition by repeating the same procedure in the reverse order. Please make sure to tighten all the screws and connect all the cables back in place. Securely install the clear cover of the TB838 to prevent it from dropping. Be careful not to forget to fasten the J841/J842 connector to the cable clamp of the JB with a cable-tie

. J837 J839 J831 TB838 U V CQD-2273 RIF Step 4 Check operation. After the replacement of the RIF is completed, turn ON the circuit breaker for the power supply of the display unit and check the operation as follows.

(1) Check that a cable open error has not occurred.

(2) Start [RADAR] on the Task menu, perform transmission, and check that normal radar images are displayed. This completes RIF replacement. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-454 4.3.8 Relay Terminal Block: CQD-2312 4.3.8.1 Packing List Relay Terminal Block CQD-2312 is composed of the following. Name Code Relay terminal block H-7JTNA4061 DIN rail bracket assy. Bracket : MTB409517 DIN rail : MTA302172 Screws : BSNB04008R 2-core cabtyre cable VCT-2C-70/0.32 3-core cabtyre cable VCT-3C-45/0.32 White PVC coated wire 250V-HV-37/0.26-(9) Black PVC coated wire 250V-HV-37/0.26-(0) Remark

-

-

Length : 900mm Cross section : 5.5 mm2 Length : 1200mm Cross section : 3.5 mm2 Length : 4000mm Cross section : 2.0 mm2 Length : 4000mm Cross section : 2.0 mm2 Insulated ring terminal Cable-tie V5.5-5(LF) SHT18R

-

-

4-455 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4.3.8.2 Wire processing Required Tools The tools shown in the following table are required for replacement work. No 1 Knife Name 2 Ruler *1 3 Crimping tool Table Required Tools Size Appearance For Insulated ring terminal

(Yellow, 5.5sq)

*1 Either a ruler or a tape measure is mandatory. Be careful not to hurt yourself during wire processing. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-456 The following table shows the list of cutting / stripping length. They shall be processed within tolerance of +/- 10%. Table. List of cutting / stripping length for Relay terminal block CQD-2312 Name and Length Name Cutting Length

[mm]

VCT-2C 5.5sq 550 White PVC Black PVC 700 VCT-3C 3.5sq 1000 White PVC Black PVC 900 White PVC Black PVC 1200 White PVC Black PVC 500 White PVC Black PVC 700 Relay terminal block Sheath strip length

[mm]

100

-

200

-

-

-

-

Insulation strip length

[mm]

12 12 12 12 12 12 12 Relay terminal block AC DC AC DC DC DC DC Destination Insulation strip length

[mm]

For PSU AC IN PSU DC IN 12 12 UPS AC IN UPS DC OUT 26 Sensor LAN DC IN 19 Sensor LAN DC IN SLC #1 DC IN 8 8 8 8 8

* Tolerance: +/- 10%

Sheath strip length

[mm]

150

-

100

-

-

-

-

4-457 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure Wiring between PSU AC IN and CQD-2312 AC Cut and strip the 2-core cabtyre cable off as follows. Table. List of cutting / stripping length of the cable between PSU AC IN and CQD-2312 AC Destination For Insulation strip length

[mm]

Sheath strip length

[mm]

PSU AC IN 12 150

* Tolerance: +/- 10%

Name and Length Name Cutting length

[mm]

VCT-2C 5.5sq 550 Relay terminal block Sheath strip length

[mm]

Insulation strip length

[mm]

100 12 Relay terminal block AC Wiring between UPS AC IN and CQD-2312 AC Cut and strip the 2-core cabtyre cable off as follows. Crimp the ring terminal to the conductor with white insulation of CQD-2312 side. Table. List of cutting / stripping length of wires between UPS AC IN and CQD-2312 AC Destination For Insulatio n strip length

[mm]

Sheath strip length

[mm]

UPS AC IN 8 100

* Tolerance: +/- 10%

Name and Length Name Cutting Length

[mm]

VCT-3C 3.5sq 1000 Relay terminal block Sheath strip length

[mm]

Insulatio n strip length

[mm]

200 12 Relay terminal block AC Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-458 Wiring between each unit and CQD-2312 DC Cut and strip off each white / black PVC coated wire for DC power. For cutting length L1 and Insulation strip length of each Unit L2, refer the table below. Table. List of cutting / stripping length of wires between Units and CQD-2312 DC Destination For Insulation strip length L2 [mm]

PSU DC IN 12 UPS DC OUT 26 Sensor LAN DC IN 19 Sensor LAN DC IN SLC #1 DC IN 8 8 8 8

* Tolerance: +/- 10%

Name and Length Name Cutting length L1 [mm]

White PVC Black PVC 700 White PVC Black PVC 900 White PVC Black PVC 1200 White PVC Black PVC 500 White PVC Black PVC 700 Relay terminal block Insulation strip length

[mm]

12 12 12 12 12 Relay terminal block DC DC DC DC DC 4-459 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure The each wire pair shall be twisted at least ten times for the sake of common mode noise reduction. This completes wire processing. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-460 4.3.8.3 Replacing the Relay Terminal Block: CQD-2312 AC and DC power supplies have been connected to the Relay terminal block. Before replacement work, be sure to turn OFF the applicable power circuit breaker. Not following this instruction will cause electric shock and/or malfunction. When UPS has been connected to the Relay terminal block, be sure to set the "Bat-Select" rotary switch at "Service" on the UPS controller. Furthermore, be sure to eject the fuse of the UPS battery. Not following this instruction will cause electric shock and/or malfunction. Required Tools The tools shown in the following table are required for replacement work. Table Required Tools Name Size Appearance No 1 Flat head screwdriver 3mm, 4mm, 6mm 2 Phillips screwdriver Size #2 3 Diagonal pliers 4 Cable-tie *1

*1 A number of cable-ties may be required. Before conducting replacement work, turn OFF the circuit breaker for the power supply of the display unit. Do not lose the screws as they will be needed again. To prevent damage to the Unit during the replacement work, cut off cable-ties that fasten the cable of the unit beforehand. 4-461 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure Step 1 Remove the front cover of the display unit mount kit. Loosen the screws that fasten the front cover of the display unit mount kit with a flat head screwdriver and then take out the front cover. Step 2 Stop the UPS. (If it has been installed) If the UPS has been installed, disable its operation. To stop the UPS opetaion, first, remove the Junction box and then set the Bat-select rotaly-swich to Service. Last, eject the blade fuse from the battery. For further information, see 4.3.10 Replacing the UPS. Step 3 Disconnect all cables / wires from CQD-2312 Disconnect all cables / wires from Relay terminal block: CQD-2312.They can be released by inserting a 3 mm width flat head screwdriver into the driver slots above the cable slots. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-462 When UPS has been connected to the Relay terminal block, be sure to set the

"Bat-Select" rotary switch at "Service" on the UPS controller. Furthermore, be sure to eject the fuse of the UPS battery. Not following this instruction will cause electric shock and/or malfunction. Step 4 Dismount the terminal block from DIN rail bracket At first, dismount the right-side endplate. It can be removed from the DIN rail using the principle of leverage, by inserting a 3 mm width flat head screwdriver into its groove. Next, dismount the terminal block. It can be removed by sliding itself along the DIN rail. 4-463 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure Dismount the left-side endplate by using a flat head screwdriver as well Step 5 Remove the DIN rail bracket and Change to New CQD-2312 Remove the screws that fasten the DIN rail bracket (M4: 2 locations) and then change it to New CQD-2312. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-464 After replacing the relay terminal block, assemble to the original condition by repeating the same procedure in the reverse order. Please make sure to tighten all the screws and connect all the cables back in place. Cables / wires must be connected to the same slot as before replacement. Be aware not to make reverse connection of DC+ and DC-. When UPS has been installed, make sure that the rotary switch of UPS is being set at the same position as before replacement. Do not forget inserting the fuse into UPS battery. Step 6 Check operation. After the replacement of the Relay terminal block is completed, turn ON the circuit breaker for the main power supply and for the power supply of the display unit. Check the operation as follows.

(1) Turn ON the power to the display unit, make sure that screen display is normal, and there are no abnormalities in operation and processing.

(2) If a scanner unit is being connected, start [RADAR] on the Task menu, perform transmission, and check that normal radar images are displayed. This completes Relay terminal block replacement. 4-465 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4.3.9 Sensor LAN Switch Unit: NQA-2443 4.3.9.1 Replacing the Sensor LAN Switch Unit: NQA-2443 in 26 inch display unit mount kit A DC power supply has fed to sensor LAN switch unit. Before replacement work, be sure to turn OFF the DC power circuit breaker. Not following this instruction will cause electric shock and/or malfunction.

[Required Tools]

The tools shown in the following table are required for replacement work. Table Required Tools Size Appearance No. 1 Name Flat head screwdriver 2 mm, 3mm, 4 mm, 6 mm 2 Phillips screwdriver Size #2 3 Phillips stubby screwdriver Size #2 4 Diagonal pliers 5 Cable-tie *1

*1 A number of cable-ties may be required. Before conducting replacement work, turn OFF the circuit breaker for the power supply of the display unit. Do not lose the screws as they will be needed again. To prevent damage to the Unit during the replacement work, cut off cable-ties that fasten the cable of the unit beforehand. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-466 Step 1 Remove the front cover of the display unit mount kit and the lid of the JB. Remove the front cover of the display unit mount kit and the lid of the JB. For more information about the removal procedure, refer to "Replacing the Fuses of the Serial LAN Interface Circuit:

SLC CMH-2370."

If an SLC is installed, turn OFF the power S1 switch of the SLC. For more information about the S1 switch of the SLC, refer to "Replacing the Fuses of the Serial LAN Interface Circuit: SLC CMH-2370."

If a GIF has been installed, turn OFF the power S1 switch of the GIF. For more information about the S1 switch of the GIF, refer to "Replacing the Fuses of the Gyro Interface Circuit: GIF CMJ-554."

Step 2 Remove all the cable-ties and cable retainers. Disconnect all the cables that are fastened to the cable clamps of the JB. To disconnect the bottom right cables in the JB that are fastened with cable retainers, remove the screws (M4: 2 locations each) of the cable retainers. To disconnect the cables that are fastened with cable-ties, cut off all the cable-ties. Before conducting Unit replacement work, always be sure that every cable-tie that fastens the cable has been removed. Replacement work without the above may lead Unit/cable breakage. 4-467 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure Step 3 Remove the two-piece terminal blocks on the internal circuits of the JB. Among the two-piece terminal blocks on the internal circuits (SLC, AOC, GIF & RIF) in the JB, remove the terminal blocks together with wires if wires are being connected. The terminal blocks can be removed by pulling them out. Step 4 Remove the internal wiring. If an SLC has been installed, disconnect the Ethernet cables from the J8111 and J8112 connectors. Furthermore, if the toroidal inductors have been installed, disconnect their crimp terminal with ship's 24Vdc power line. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-468 If an RIF has been installed, refer to the "4.3.7.7 Replacing the Radar interface circuit: RIF CQD-2273" and disconnect all the cables for interconnection that are being connected to the RIF. Remove the wing screw at the right bottom corner of the JB and disconnect the ground cable. Step 5 Remove the JB. Among the screws (M5: 4 locations) that fasten the JB to the display unit mount kit, loosen the upper two screws, remove the lower two screws, and then take out the JB. 4-469 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure Step 6 Remove the Relay terminal block: CQD-2312 Disconnect all cables / wires from Relay terminal block by using a 3 mm width flat head screwdriver. Then, dismount the Relay terminal block from the DIN rail. For the details of dismounting, refer to the " Replacing the Relay Terminal Block: CQD-2312". AC and DC power supplies have been connected to the Relay terminal block. Before replacement work, be sure to turn OFF the applicable power circuit breaker. Not following this instruction will cause electric shock and/or malfunction. When UPS has been connected to the Relay terminal block, be sure to set the

"Bat-Select" rotary switch at "Service" on the UPS controller. Furthermore, be sure to eject the fuse of the UPS battery. Not following this instruction will cause electric shock and/or malfunction. Step 7 Remove the two metal planks. Using a Phillips stubby screwdriver, remove the screws (M5: total of 4 locations) that fasten the two top and bottom metal planks and take out both of them. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-470 Step 8 Disconnect the sensor LAN switch unit cables. Disconnect all the LAN cables being connected to the sensor LAN switch unit. Use the same LAN cable connection ports after replacement. Remove the screw (M4: 2 locations) from the power supply port terminal block of the sensor LAN switch unit and take out the power cable together with the terminal block. If a UPS is installed, remove the fuse of the UPS battery first, and then disconnect the power connector of the UPS. The power connector of the UPS can be removed using the principle of leverage, by inserting a 2 mm width flat head screwdriver into the groove at the root of the terminal block in the upper part of the input filter ME-NAX-NEF/QUINT20. For more information, refer to

"4.3.10.1 Replacing the UPS Input Filter: ME-NAX-NEF/QUINT20."

An AC power supply has been fed to UPS. Before replacement work, be sure to turn OFF the circuit breaker of the main power line. Not following this instruction will cause electric shock and/or malfunction. 4-471 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure Step 9 Remove the rear panel. Among the screws (M5: 4 locations) that fasten the rear panel, loosen the upper two screws, remove the lower two screws, and then take out the rear panel together with the sensor LAN switch unit. If a UPS is installed, the weight of the rear panel increases to 10 kg or more. Be careful not to catch your hands while removing the rear panel. Step 10 Change the sensor LAN switch unit. Remove the screws (M3: 4 locations on the back of the rear panel) that fasten the sensor LAN switch unit onto the rear panel and change the sensor LAN switch unit. After replacing the sensor LAN switch unit, assemble to the original condition by repeating the same procedure in the reverse order. Please make sure to tighten all the screws and connect all the cables back in place. Connect the Eithernet cables to the same connection ports after replacement. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-472 When reinstalling the two metal planks, be careful with vertical direction. To reconnect the cables and the two-piece terminal blocks, connect them to the same locations as before removing them. Step 11 Check operation. After the replacement of the sensor LAN switch unit is completed, turn ON the circuit breaker for the power supply of the display unit and check the operation as follows.

(1) Check that the values of the sensor being connected are displayed on the screen. This completes sensor LAN switch unit replacement. 4-473 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4.3.9.2 Replacing the Sensor LAN Switch Unit: NQA-2443 in 19 inch display unit mount kit A DC power supply has been fed to the sensor LAN switch unit. Before replacement work, be sure to turn OFF the DC power circuit breaker. Not following this instruction will cause electric shock and/or malfunction.

[Required Tools]

The tools shown in the following table are required for replacement work. Table Required Tools Size Appearance No. 1 Name Flat head screwdriver 2 mm, 4 mm, 6 mm 2 Phillips screwdriver Size #2 3 Phillips stubby screwdriver Size #2 4 Diagonal pliers 5 Cable-tie *1

*1 A number of cable-ties may be required. Before conducting replacement work, turn OFF the circuit breaker for the power supply of the display unit. Do not lose the screws as they will be needed again. To prevent damage to the Unit during the replacement work, cut off cable-ties that fasten the cable of the unit beforehand. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-474 Step 3 Step 1 Remove the JB from the display unit mount kit. Remove the JB from the display unit mount kit. For more information about the JB removal procedure, refer to "4.3.9.1 Replacing the Sensor LAN Switch Unit: NQA-2443."

Step 2 Remove the Relay terminal block: CQD-2312 Disconnect all cables / wires from Relay terminal block by using a 3 mm width flat head screwdriver. Then, dismount the Relay terminal block from the DIN rail. For the details of dismounting, refer to the " Replacing the Relay Terminal Block: CQD-2312". AC and DC power supplies have been connected to the Relay terminal block. Before replacement work, be sure to turn OFF the applicable power circuit breaker. Not following this instruction will cause electric shock and/or malfunction. When UPS has been connected to the Relay terminal block, be sure to set the

"Bat-Select" rotary switch at "Service" on the UPS controller. Furthermore, be sure to eject the fuse of the UPS battery. Not following this instruction will cause electric shock and/or malfunction. Remove the two metal planks. Remove the screws (M5: total of 4 locations) that fasten the two top and bottom metal planks and take out both of them. For more information, refer to "4.3.9.1 Replacing the Sensor LAN Switch Unit: NQA-2443."

Step 4 Disconnect the sensor LAN switch unit cables and the UPS power supply cables. Disconnect the sensor LAN switch unit cables. If a UPS is installed, remove the fuse of the UPS first, and then take out the power line together with the terminal block. For more information, refer to "4.3.9.1 Replacing the Sensor LAN Switch Unit: NQA-2443."

Step 5 Remove the rear panel. Among the screws (M5: 4 locations) that fasten the rear panel, loosen the upper two screws, remove the lower two screws, and then take out the rear panel together with the sensor LAN switch unit. If a UPS is installed, the weight of the rear panel increases to 10 kg or more. Be careful not to catch your hands while removing the rear panel. 4-475 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure Step 6 Change the sensor LAN switch unit. Remove the screws (M3: 4 locations on the back of the rear panel) that fasten the sensor LAN switch unit onto the rear panel and change the sensor LAN switch unit. After replacing the sensor LAN switch unit, assemble to the original condition by repeating the same procedure in the reverse order. Please make sure to tighten all the screws and connect all the cables back in place. Connect the LAN cables to the same connection ports after replacement. When reinstalling the two metal planks, be careful with vertical direction. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-476 To reconnect the cables and the two-piece terminal blocks, connect them to the same locations as before removing them. Step 7 Check operation. After the replacement of the sensor LAN switch unit is completed, turn ON the circuit breaker for the power supply of the display unit and check the operation as follows.

(1) Check that the values of the sensor being connected are displayed on the screen. This completes sensor LAN switch unit replacement. 4-477 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4.3.10 Replacing the UPS The UPS consists of the following four devices. Input filter

: ME-NAX-NEF/QUINT20 AC-DC converter : QUINT-PS/1AC/24DC/20

: QUINT-DC-UPS/24DC/20 UPS controller Battery

: QUINT-BAT/24DC/3.4AH L E N Input AC Output DC L E N L EN

++ -

--

DC 24V Battery Input Output

+ - + - + -

Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-478 4.3.10.1 Replacing the UPS Input Filter: ME-NAX-NEF/QUINT20 An AC power supply has been fed to UPS. Before replacement work, be sure to turn OFF the circuit breaker of the main power line. Not following this instruction will cause electric shock and/or malfunction. Before starting UPS replacement work, be sure to remove the fuse of the UPS battery. Not following this instruction will cause electric shock and/or malfunction.

[Required Tools]

The tools shown in the following table are required for replacement work. Table Required Tools Size Appearance No. 1 Name Flat head screwdriver 2 mm, 4 mm, 6 mm 2 Phillips screwdriver Size #2 3 Phillips stubby screwdriver Size #2 4 Diagonal pliers 5 Cable-tie *1

*1 A number of cable-ties may be required. Before conducting replacement work, turn OFF the circuit breaker for the power supply of the display unit. Do not lose the screws as they will be needed again. To prevent damage to the Unit during the replacement work, cut off cable-ties that fasten the cable of the unit beforehand. 4-479 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure Step 1 Remove the JB from the display unit mount kit. Remove the JB from the display unit mount kit. For more information about the JB removal procedure, refer to "4.3.9.1 Replacing the Sensor LAN Switch Unit: NQA-2443."

Step 2 Set "Bat-Select" of the UPS controller QUINT-DC-UPS/24DC/20 at

"Service."

Set the "Bat-Select" rotary switch of the UPS controller at "Service."

Step 3 Remove the blade fuse of the UPS battery QUINT-BAT/24DC/3.4AH. Remove the fuse of the UPS battery. After removing the fuse, leave it for at least 5 min until the electricity charged in the internal capacitor is discharged. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-480 Step 5 Step 4 Remove the Relay terminal block: CQD-2312 Disconnect all cables / wires from Relay terminal block by using a 3 mm width flat head screwdriver. Then, dismount the Relay terminal block from the DIN rail. For the details of dismounting, refer to the " Replacing the Relay Terminal Block: CQD-2312". AC and DC power supplies have been connected to the Relay terminal block. Before replacement work, be sure to turn OFF the applicable power circuit breaker. Not following this instruction will cause electric shock and/or malfunction. Remove the two metal planks. Remove the screws (M5: total of 4 locations) that fasten the two top and bottom metal planks and take out both of them. For more information, refer to "4.3.9.1 Replacing the Sensor LAN Switch Unit: NQA-2443."

Step 6 Remove the power wiring of the UPS. Disconnect the power connector of the UPS. The power connector of the UPS can be removed using the principle of leverage, by inserting a 2 mm width flat head screwdriver into the groove at the root of the terminal block in the upper part of the input filter ME-NAX-NEF/QUINT20. An AC power supply is connected to the UPS. Before starting replacement work, turn OFF the circuit breaker of the AC power supply. N Earth L If a sensor LAN switch unit is installed, disconnect the wiring of the sensor LAN switch unit. For more information, refer to "4.3.9.1 Replacing the Sensor LAN Switch Unit: NQA-2443."

4-481 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure Step 7 Remove the UPS output cables. Using a 4 mm width flat head screwdriver, disconnect the output cables at the bottom of the UPS controller. The output cables are fastened using a European-style terminal block. UPS Output cable L E N Input AC Output DC L E N L EN

++ -

--

DC 24V Battery Input Output

+ - + - + -

Step 8 Remove the rear panel. Among the screws (M5: 4 locations) that fasten the rear panel, loosen the upper two screws, remove the lower two screws, and then take out the rear panel. If a UPS is installed, the weight of the rear panel increases to 10 kg or more. Be careful not to catch your hands while removing the rear panel. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-482 Before conducting Unit replacement work, always be sure that every cable-tie that fastens the cable has been removed. Replacement work without the above may lead Unit/cable breakage. Step 9 Change the USP Input Filter: ME-NAX-NEF/QUINT20 Loosen the European-style terminal blocks in the lower part of the UPS input filter ME-NAX-NEF/QUINT20 and disconnect the cables. The UPS input filter is fastened to the DIN rail. The UPS input filter can be removed from the DIN rail using the principle of leverage, by inserting a 6 mm width flat head screwdriver into the groove of the metal fixture in the lower part of the UPS input filter. 4-483 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure Step 10 Put back the rear panel and check for LED lighting. After replacing the UPS input filter, assemble to the original condition by repeating the same procedure in the reverse order. Put back the wiring and perform setting in the following sequence.

(i)

(ii)

(iii)

(iv) UPS output cable UPS power cable UPS battery blade fuse Setting "Bat-Select" to "3.4" on the UPS controller Make sure that the ground cable of the European-style terminal block in the upper part of the input filter is connected with the ground of the ship. While maintaining the OFF state of the circuit breaker for the power supply of the display unit, turn ON the circuit breaker of the main power line and check that the LEDs of the UPS controller turn ON/OFF as follows. LED Color ON/OFF Status Alerm Bat.-Mode Bat.-Charge Power In OK Red Yellow Green OFF Flashing or OFF ON Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-484 Step 11 Put back all other cables and covers. Turn OFF the circuit breaker of the main power line again. Put all the remaining cables and covers back in place by repeating the same procedure in the reverse order. Please make sure to tighten all the screws and connect all the cables back in place. When reinstalling the two metal planks, be careful with vertical direction. To reconnect the cables and the two-piece terminal blocks, connect them to the same locations as before removing them. This completes the replacement of the UPS input filter. 4-485 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure

 

 

4.3.10.2 Replacing the UPS AC-DC Converter:

QUINT-PS/1AC/24DC/20 An AC power supply has been fed to UPS. Before replacement work, be sure to turn OFF the circuit breaker of the main power line. Not following this instruction will cause electric shock and/or malfunction. Before starting UPS replacement work, be sure to remove the fuse of the UPS battery. Not following this instruction will cause electric shock and/or malfunction.

[Required Tools]

The tools shown in the following table are required for replacement work. Table Required Tools Size Appearance No. 1 Name Flat head screwdriver 2 mm, 4 mm, 6 mm 2 Phillips screwdriver Size #2 3 Phillips stubby screwdriver Size #2 4 Diagonal pliers 5 Cable-tie *1

*1 A number of cable-ties may be required. Before conducting replacement work, turn OFF the circuit breaker for the power supply of the display unit. Do not lose the screws as they will be needed again. To prevent damage to the Unit during the replacement work, cut off cable-ties that fasten the cable of the unit beforehand. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-486 Step 1 Remove the JB from the display unit mount kit. Remove the JB from the display unit mount kit. For more information about the JB removal procedure, refer to "4.3.9.1 Replacing the Sensor LAN Switch Unit: NQA-2443."

Step 2 Set "Bat-Select" of the UPS controller QUINT-DC-UPS/24DC/20 at

"Service."

Set the "Bat-Select" rotary switch of the UPS controller at "Service." For more information, refer to "4.3.10.1 Replacing the UPS Input Filter: ME-NAX-NEF/QUINT20."

Step 3 Remove the blade fuse of the UPS battery QUINT-BAT/24DC/3.4AH. Remove the fuse of the UPS battery. After removing the fuse, leave it for at least 5 min until the electricity charged in the internal capacitor is discharged. For more information, refer to "4.3.10.1 Replacing the UPS Input Filter: ME-NAX-NEF/QUINT20."

Step 4 Remove the Relay terminal block: CQD-2312 Disconnect all cables / wires from Relay terminal block by using a 3 mm width flat head screwdriver. Then, dismount the Relay terminal block from the DIN rail. For the details of dismounting, refer to the " Replacing the Relay Terminal Block: CQD-2312". AC and DC power supplies have been connected to the Relay terminal block. Before replacement work, be sure to turn OFF the applicable power circuit breaker. Not following this instruction will cause electric shock and/or malfunction. Remove the two metal planks. Remove the screws (M5: total of 4 locations) that fasten the two top and bottom metal planks and take out both of them. For more information, refer to "4.3.9.1 Replacing the Sensor LAN Switch Unit: NQA-2443."

Step 6 Remove the power wiring of the UPS. Disconnect the power connector of the UPS. The power connector of the UPS can be removed using the principle of leverage, by inserting a 2 mm width flat head screwdriver into the groove at the root of the terminal block in the upper part of the input filter ME-NAX-NEF/QUINT20. For more information, refer to "4.3.10.1 Replacing the UPS Input Filter: ME-NAX-NEF/QUINT20."

An AC power supply has been connected to the UPS. Before starting replacement work, turn OFF the circuit breaker of the AC power supply. 4-487 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure Step 5 If a sensor LAN switch unit is installed, disconnect the wiring of the sensor LAN switch unit. For more information, refer to "4.3.9.1 Replacing the Sensor LAN Switch Unit: NQA-2443."

Step 7 Remove the UPS output cables. Using a 4 mm width flat head screwdriver, disconnect the output cables at the bottom of the UPS controller. The output cables are fastened using an European-style terminal block. For more information, refer to "4.3.10.1 Replacing the UPS Input Filter: ME-NAX-NEF/QUINT20."

Step 8 Remove the rear panel. Remove the screws (M5: 4 locations) that fasten the rear panel and take out the rear panel together with the UPS. For more information, refer to "4.3.10.1 Replacing the UPS Input Filter:

ME-NAX-NEF/QUINT20."

If a UPS has been installed, the weight of the rear panel increases to 10 kg or more. Step 9 Be careful not to catch your hands while removing the rear panel. Change the UPS AC-DC converter: QUINT-PS/1AC/24DC/20. Loosen the European-style terminal blocks in the lower part of the UPS AC-DC converter QUINT-PS/1AC/24DC/20 and disconnect the cables. After disconnecting the cables, remove the UPS AC-DC converter. The UPS AC-DC converter is fastened to the DIN rail. The UPS AC-DC converter can be removed from the DIN rail using the principle of leverage, by inserting a 6 mm width flat head screwdriver into the groove of the metal fixture in the lower part of the UPS AC-DC converter. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-488 Step 10 Put back the rear panel and check for LED lighting. After replacing the UPS input filter, assemble to the original condition by repeating the same procedure in the reverse order. Put back the wiring and perform setting in the following sequence.

(i)

(ii)

(iii)

(iv) UPS output cable Ups power cable UPS battery blade fuse Set the "Bat-Select" rotary switch of the UPS controller at "3.4."

While maintaining the OFF state of the circuit breaker for the power supply of the display unit, turn ON the circuit breaker of the main power line and check that the LEDs of the UPS controller turn ON/OFF as follows. For more information, refer to "4.3.10.1 Replacing the UPS Input Filter:

ME-NAX-NEF/QUINT20."

LED Color ON/OFF Status Alerm Bat.-Mode Bat.-Charge Power In OK Red Yellow Green OFF Flashing or OFF ON Make sure that the ground cable of the European-style terminal block in the upper part of the input filter is connected with the ground of the ship. Step 11 Put back all other cables and covers. Turn OFF the circuit breaker of the main power line again. Put all the remaining cables and covers back in place by repeating the same procedure in the reverse order. Please make sure to tighten all the screws and connect all the cables back in place. When reinstalling the two metal planks, be careful with vertical direction. 4-489 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure To reconnect the cables and the two-piece terminal blocks, connect them to the same locations as before removing them. This completes the replacement of the UPS AC-DC conveter. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-490 4.3.10.3 Replacing the UPS Controller: QUINT-DC-UPS/24DC/20 An AC power supply has fed to the UPS. Before replacement work, be sure to turn OFF the circuit breaker of the main power line. Not following this instruction will cause electric shock and/or malfunction. Before starting UPS replacement work, be sure to remove the fuse of the UPS battery. Not following this instruction will cause electric shock and/or malfunction. Before replacing the UPS controller, be sure to set the "Bat-Select" rotary switch of the UPS controller at "Service." Not following this instruction will cause electric shock and/or malfunction.

[Required Tools]

The tools shown in the following table are required for replacement work. Table Required Tools Size Appearance No. 1 Name Flat head screwdriver 2 mm, 4 mm, 6 mm 2 Phillips screwdriver Size #2 3 Phillips stubby screwdriver Size #2 Before conducting replacement work, turn OFF the circuit breaker for the power supply of the display unit. Do not lose the screws as they will be needed again. An AC power supply has been connected to the UPS. Before starting replacement work, turn OFF the circuit breaker of the main power supply. 4-491 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure Step 1 Remove the JB from the display unit mount kit. Remove the JB from the display unit mount kit. For more information about the JB removal procedure, refer to "4.3.9.1 Replacing the Sensor LAN Switch Unit: NQA-2443."

Step 2 Set "Bat-Select" of the UPS controller QUINT-DC-UPS/24DC/20 at

"Service."

Set the "Bat-Select" rotary switch of the UPS controller at "Service." For more information, refer to "4.3.10.1 Replacing the UPS Input Filter: ME-NAX-NEF/QUINT20."

Step 3 Remove the blade fuse of the UPS battery QUINT-BAT/24DC/3.4AH. Remove the fuse of the UPS battery. After removing the fuse, leave it for at least 5 min until the electricity charged in the internal capacitor is discharged. For more information, refer to "4.3.10.1 Replacing the UPS Input Filter: ME-NAX-NEF/QUINT20."

Step 4 Remove the Relay terminal block: CQD-2312 Disconnect all cables / wires from Relay terminal block by using a 3 mm width flat head screwdriver. Then, dismount the Relay terminal block from the DIN rail. For the details of dismounting, refer to the " Replacing the Relay Terminal Block: CQD-2312". AC and DC power supplies have been connected to the Relay terminal block. Before replacement work, be sure to turn OFF the applicable power circuit breaker. Not following this instruction will cause electric shock and/or malfunction. Remove the two metal planks. Remove the screws (M5: total of 4 locations) that fasten the two top and bottom metal planks and take out both of them. For more information, refer to "4.3.9.1 Replacing the Sensor LAN Switch Unit: NQA-2443."

Step 6 Remove the power wiring of the UPS. Disconnect the power connector of the UPS. The power connector of the UPS can be removed using the principle of leverage, by inserting a 2 mm width flat head screwdriver into the groove at the root of the terminal block in the upper part of the input filter ME-NAX-NEF/QUINT20. For more information, refer to "4.3.10.1 Replacing the UPS Input Filter: ME-NAX-NEF/QUINT20."

An AC power supply has been connected to the UPS. Before starting replacement work, turn OFF the circuit breaker of the main power supply. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-492 Step 5 If a sensor LAN switch unit is installed, disconnect the wiring of the sensor LAN switch unit. For more information, refer to "4.3.9.1 Replacing the Sensor LAN Switch Unit: NQA-2443."

Step 7 Remove the UPS output cables. Using a 4 mm width flat head screwdriver, disconnect the output cables at the bottom of the UPS controller. The output cables are fastened using a European-style terminal block. For more information, refer to "4.3.10.1 Replacing the UPS Input Filter: ME-NAX-NEF/QUINT20."

Step 8 Remove the rear panel. Remove the screws (M5: 4 locations) that fasten the rear panel and take out the rear panel together with the UPS. For more information, refer to "4.3.10.1 Replacing the UPS Input Filter:

ME-NAX-NEF/QUINT20."

If a UPS has been installed, the weight of the rear panel increases to 10 kg or more. Step 9 Be careful not to catch your hands while removing the rear panel. Change the UPS controller: QUINT-DC-UPS/24DC/20. Loosen the European-style terminal blocks in the lower part of the UPS controller QUINT-DC-UPS/24DC/20 and disconnect the cables. After disconnecting the cables, change the UPS controller. The UPS controller is fastened to the DIN rail. The UPS controller can be removed from the DIN rail using the principle of leverage, by inserting a 6mm width flat head screwdriver into the groove of the metal fixture in the lower part of the UPS controller. When installing a new UPS controller, be sure to set the "Bat-Select" rotary switch of the UPS controller at "Service."

4-493 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure When removing the cables of the UPS battery, be sure to leave the battery for at least 5 min after removing the fuse. Not doing so may cause electric shock. Remove two screws shown in figure below if they interfere with attachment of the UPS controller. Step 10 Put back the rear panel and check for LED lighting. After replacing the UPS input filter, assemble to the original condition by repeating the same procedure in the reverse order. Put back the wiring and perform setting in the following sequence.

(i) UPS output cable

(ii) UPS power cable

(iii) UPS battery blade fuse

(iv) Set the "Bat-Select" rotary switch of the new UPS controller at "3.4."

While maintaining the OFF state of the circuit breaker for the power supply of the display unit, turn ON the circuit breaker of the main power line and check that the LEDs of the UPS controller turn ON/OFF as follows. For more information, refer to "4.3.10.1 Replacing the UPS Input Filter:

ME-NAX-NEF/QUINT20."

Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-494 LED Color ON/OFF Status Alerm Bat.-Mode Bat.-Charge Power In OK Red Yellow Green OFF Flashing or OFF ON Make sure that the ground cable of the European-style terminal block in the upper part of the input filter is connected with the ground of the ship. Step 11 Put back all other cables and covers. Turn OFF the circuit breaker of the main power line again. Put all the remaining cables and covers back in place by repeating the same procedure in the reverse order. Please make sure to tighten all the screws and connect all the cables back in place. When reinstalling the two metal planks, be careful with vertical direction. To reconnect the cables and the two-piece terminal blocks, connect them to the same locations as before removing them. This completes the replacement of the UPS controller. 4-495 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4.3.10.4 Replacing the UPS Battery: QUINT-BAT/24DC/3.4AH DANGER Never handle the battery as stated below. Not following this instruction will cause liquid leak, heat generation, fire, explosion, damage, burn or other damage or injury. Short circuit between the positive and negative terminals Use other than designated Disassembly, modification and disposal Use beyond the expiration date An AC power supply has fed to UPS. Before replacement work, be sure to turn OFF the circuit breaker of the main power line. Not following this instruction will cause electric shock and/or malfunction. Before starting UPS replacement work, be sure to remove the fuse of the UPS battery. Not following this instruction will cause electric shock and/or malfunction. Before replacing the UPS battery, be sure to set the "Bat-Select" rotary switch of the UPS controller at "Service." Not following this instruction will cause electric shock and/or malfunction. When disposing of used batteries, follow the regulations and/or rules of the local regulatory authority which has control over the location of disposal. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-496

[Required Tools]

The tools shown in the following table are required for replacement work. Table Required Tools Size Appearance No. 1 Name Flat head screwdriver 2 mm, 4 mm, 6 mm 2 Phillips screwdriver Size #2 3 Phillips stubby screwdriver Size #2 Step 1 Before conducting replacement work, turn OFF the circuit breaker for the power supply of the display unit. Do not lose the screws as they will be needed again. Remove the JB from the display unit mount kit. Remove the JB from the display unit mount kit. For more information about the JB removal procedure, refer to "4.3.9.1 Replacing the Sensor LAN Switch Unit: NQA-2443."

Step 2 Set "Bat-Select" of the UPS controller QUINT-DC-UPS/24DC/20 at

"Service."

Set the "Bat-Select" rotary switch of the UPS controller at "Service." For more information, refer to "4.3.10.1 Replacing the UPS Input Filter: ME-NAX-NEF/QUINT20."

Step 3 Remove the blade fuse of the UPS battery QUINT-BAT/24DC/3.4AH. Remove the fuse of the UPS battery. After removing the fuse, leave it for at least 5 min until the electricity charged in the internal capacitor is discharged. For more information, refer to "4.3.10.1 Replacing the UPS Input Filter: ME-NAX-NEF/QUINT20."

Step 4 Remove the Relay terminal block: CQD-2312 Disconnect all cables / wires from Relay terminal block by using a 3 mm width flat head screwdriver. Then, dismount the Relay terminal block from the DIN rail. For the details of dismounting, refer to the " Replacing the Relay Terminal Block: CQD-2312". AC and DC power supplies have been connected to the Relay terminal block. Before replacement work, be sure to turn OFF the applicable power circuit breaker. Not following this instruction will cause electric shock and/or malfunction. 4-497 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure Step 5 Remove the two metal planks. Remove the screws (M5: total of 4 locations) that fasten the two top and bottom metal planks and take out both of them. For more information, refer to "4.3.9.1 Replacing the Sensor LAN Switch Unit: NQA-2443."

Step 6 Remove the power wiring of the UPS. Disconnect the power connector of the UPS. The power connector of the UPS can be removed using the principle of leverage, by inserting a 2 mm width flat head screwdriver into the groove at the root of the terminal block in the upper part of the input filter ME-NAX-NEF/QUINT20. For more information, refer to "4.3.10.1 Replacing the UPS Input Filter: ME-NAX-NEF/QUINT20."

An AC power supply has been fed to the UPS. Before starting replacement work, turn OFF the circuit breaker of the main power supply. If a sensor LAN switch unit has been installed, disconnect the wiring of the sensor LAN switch unit. For more information, refer to "4.3.9.1 Replacing the Sensor LAN Switch Unit: NQA-2443."

Step 7 Remove the UPS output cables. Using a 4 mm width flat head screwdriver, disconnect the output cables at the bottom of the UPS controller. The output cables are fastened using an European-style terminal block. For more information, refer to "4.3.10.1 Replacing the UPS Input Filter: ME-NAX-NEF/QUINT20."

Step 8 Remove the rear panel. Remove the screws (M5: 4 locations) that fasten the rear panel and take out the rear panel together with the UPS. For more information, refer to "4.3.10.1 Replacing the UPS Input Filter:

ME-NAX-NEF/QUINT20."

If a UPS has been installed, the weight of the rear panel increases to 10kg or more. Step 9 Be careful not to catch your hands while removing the rear panel. Change the UPS Battery: QUINT-BAT/24DC/3.4AH. The UPS battery QUINT-BAT/24DC/3.4AH is connected with the UPS controller QUIT-DC-UPS/24DC/20. Loosen the European-style terminal block in the lower part of the UPS controller and disconnect the cables. After removing the cables, remove the screws (M4: 4 locations) that fasten the UPS battery QUINT-DC-UPS/24DC/20. Before installing a new UPS battery, be sure to remove the fuse of the UPS battery. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-498 Before removing the cables of the UPS battery, leave it for at least 5 min after removing its fuse. Not doing so may cause electric shock. Be sure to remove the fuse of a new UPS battery before installing it. Not doing so may cause electric shock. Step 10 Put back the rear panel and check for LED lighting. After replacing the UPS input filter, assemble to the original condition by repeating the same procedure in the reverse order. Put back the wiring and perform setting in the following sequence.

(i)

(ii)

(iii)

(iv) UPS output cable UPS power cable UPS battery blade fuse Set the "Bat-Select" rotary switch of the UPS controller at "3.4."

While maintaining the OFF state of the circuit breaker for the power supply of the display unit, turn ON the circuit breaker of the main power line and check that the LEDs of the UPS controller turn ON/OFF as follows. For more information, refer to "4.3.10.1 Replacing the UPS Input Filter:

ME-NAX-NEF/QUINT20."

LED Color ON/OFF Status Alerm Bat.-Mode Bat.-Charge Power In OK Red Yellow Green OFF Flashing or OFF ON Make sure that the ground cable of the European-style terminal block in the upper part of the input filter is connected with the ground of the ship. 4-499 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure Step 11 Put back all other cables and covers. Turn OFF the circuit breaker of the main power line again. Put all the remaining cables and covers back in place by repeating the same procedure in the reverse order. Please make sure to tighten all the screws and connect all the cables back in place. When reinstalling the two metal planks, be careful with vertical direction. To reconnect the cables and the two-piece terminal blocks, connect them to the same locations as before removing them. Step 12 Reset the usage time.

(1) Reset the usage time of the UPS. For the reset method, please refer to " " in the Instruction Manual. Step 13 Dispose of the used UPS battery. When disposing of used batteries, follow the regulations and/or rules of the local regulatory authority which has control over the location of disposal. This completes the replacement of the UPS battery. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-500 4.3.11 Detaching the front frame of the Display unit mount kit. 4.3.11.1 Precaution Do not disassemble the front frame except under unavoidable circumstances for the sake of the ship's structure. It may lead to unexpected accidents. Be sure to do it with at least two persons. If only one person does this work, he/she may lead to unexpected accidents. You can pull out the front frame of the Display Unit mount kit if the door of the bridge is too narrow for the stand alone Display Unit. 4-501 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4.3.11.2 Dimension diagrams of the Display Unit mount kit without a front frame Dimension diagrams of CWA-246: 26 Display Unit mount kit without a front frame Dimension diagrams of CWA-245: 19 Display Unit mount kit without a front frame Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-502 Detaching the front frame of the Display Unit mount kit 4.3.11.3 Required Tools The tools shown in the following table are required for this work Table Required Tools Name No 1 Phillips screwdriver Size Size #2 2 Phillips stubby screwdriver Size #2 3 Diagonal pliers 4 Cable-tie *1 Appearance

*1 A number of cable-ties may be required. Do not lose the screws as they will be needed again Do not detach the front frame except under unavoidable circumstances for the sake of the ship's structure. It may lead to unexpected accidents. To prevent damage to the Unit during the replacement work, cut off cable-ties that fasten the cable of the unit beforehand. 4-503 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure Step 1 Remove the monitor Remove the monitor from the Display Unit mount kit by referring Chapter 4. Step 2 Remove the Trackball Operation Unit Remove the Trackball Operation Unit from the Display Unit mount kit by referring Chapter 4. It is not necessary to remove Keyboard OPU. (If it has been installed.) Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-504 Step 3 Remove Operation Unit frame Remove the screws (M4: 9 locations) that fasten the Operation Unit frame and then take out it. Taking out the OPU frame from 26 Display Unit mount kit Taking out the OPU frame from 19 Display Unit mount kit 4-505 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure Step 4 Remove the bottom sheet metal Remove the bottom sheet metal of OPU frame. In the 26 Display Unit mount kit, Remove the screws (M3: 2 locations) that fasten the sheet metal and then take out it. Taking out the OPU sheet metal from 26 Display Unit mount kit In the 19 Display Unit mount kit, you can remove the sheet metal and OPU frame together. Step 5 Remove the front cover and the Junction Box Remove the front cover from the Display Unit mount kit by referring Chapter 4. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-506 If the Junction box has been installed, remove it as well. Step 6 Remove the front frame Using a Phillips stubby screwdriver, remove the M4 screws that fasten the front frame. They are 4 locations in one side, 8 locations in total. 4-507 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure Pull up the front frame slowly in the obliquely upward direction along its line and take away. After carrying in the stand alone Display Unit is completed, assemble to the original condition by repeating the same procedure in the reverse order. Please make sure to tighten all the screws and connect all the cables back in place. This completes carrying in the stand alone Display Unit into the bridge that has a narrow door by detaching its front frame. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-508 4.4 Setting up after replacements Whenever you have done the replacement of the components in Scanner Unit or in Display Unit, set up the system as follows. 4.4.1. To display the Service menu for Engineers:

Service menu for Engineers appears when you enter the password 0009 on Code Input dialog. For futher information, see Chapter 7 Troubleshooting. Enter 0009 in Password. 0009 The [Service] button is added to the menu. 4-509 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure Displaying the "Maintenance" dialog box 4.4.2. Clicking the [Maintenance] button in the submenu displays the "Maintenance" dialog box. The "Maintenance" dialog box in the submenu consists of the Classification pane and the Edit/Result pane. The Classification pane consists of two-level layers of the First Classification pane and the Second Classification pane. First Classification pane Second Classification pane Edit/Result pane Note In the ECDIS screen, [RADAR] finction does not work. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-510 Setting up anfter replacing Scanner Units 4.4.3. Use the "RADAR" dialog to maintain the radar. 4.4.3.1 Displaying the "RADAR" dialog When you select [RADAR] in the Classification pane, the RADAR dialog is displayed in the Edit/Result pane. Transmission result display 4.4.3.2 Changing the operation mode of the safety switch Open the list of the [Safety Switch] box and select the operation to be performed when the safety switch of the antenna is set to OFF. Setting TX-Off Standby TX-On Operation No radiant section's rotation and transmission PPI screen in the transmitting state Maintains the transmitting state without generating BP or BZ alarm No radiant section's rotation and transmission PPI screen standby No radiant section's rotation, with transmission PPI screen in the transmitting state Maintains the transmitting state without generating BP or BZ alarm 4-511 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4.4.3.3 Clearing a radar antenna operation time The total transmission time and the total motor rotation time of a radar antenna can be cleared. Clearing the total transmission time of a radar antenna 1. Click on the [Clear TX Time] (resetting transmission time) button. Clearing the total motor rotation time of a radar antenna 1. Click on the [Clear Motor Time] (resetting the motor rotation time) button. 4.4.3.4 Replacing a TXRX circuit of a radar antenna Verify the total transmission time and the total motor rotation time of the radar antenna and use the information as the guideline for replacement. Acquiring the data of the total transmission time and the total motor rotation time from a radar antenna Click on the [TXRX To Display Unit] (transmitting from an antenna to a display unit) button. The data of the total transmission time and the total motor rotation time is acquired from the antenna and is stored in a display unit. The time that is acquired is displayed on the [Saved Time To Display Unit] display section. Transmit:

Motor Rotate: Total motor rotation time acquired from the radar antenna Total time acquired from the radar antenna Storing data of the total transmission time and the total motor rotation time in the radar antenna Click the [Display Unit To TXRX] button (transmission from the display to the radar antenna). The total transmission time and total motor ration time saved in the display unit are saved to the radar antenna. If data is saved normally, the data saved in the display unit will be deleted. When a command is sent from the display unit to the radar antenna, the transmission result is displayed as follows. Result waiting state: "Sending..." is displayed blinking at intervals of 1 sec. When the result is success: "Completed" is displayed. When the result is failure: "Not Completed" is displayed. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-512 Replacing a TXRX circuit The operation procedure and notes are displayed on the Notice display. 1. By clicking on the [TXRX To Display Unit] button, load the data of the total transmission time and the total motor rotation time from the radar antenna to the display unit. 2. Turn off the power of the system and replace the TXRX circuit. 3. Turn on the power of the system and write the data of the total transmission time and the total motor rotation time in the transceiver unit of the radar antenna by clicking on the

[Display Unit To TXRX]. Note Make sure that data is written to the transceiver unit of the same radar antenna when the data is loaded. 4.4.3.5 To set up or adjust radar antennas To set up or adjust following items, please refer JMR-920xx/72xx, JAN-920x/720x Instruction manual chapter 4.

- Tune adjustment

- Bearing adjustment

- Distance adjustment

- Radar antenna height adjustment

- Tuning bar peak value adjustment

- Performance monitor

- Sector blank

- TT function

- MBS adjustment

- CCRP 4-513 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4.4.4. 4.4.4.1 Setting up anfter replacing Display Units Clearing operation time of Workstation Open the service menu for Engineers by entering password 0009 at [ Menu] -> [ Code Input ]. Click [ Maintenance] -> [ Operation Time Setup ] tab. Clearing the total operation time of a Workstation 1. Click on the [ Clear ] button next of Total. Clearing the operation time of a LCD 1. Click on the [ Clear ] button next of LCD. Clearing the operation time of a LCD Fan 1. Click on the [ Clear ] button next of LCD FAN. Clearing the operation time of a CCU Fan 1. Click on the [ Clear ] button next of CCU FAN. Clearing the operation time of a CCU 1. Click on the [ Clear ] button next of CCU. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-514 Clearing the operation time of a PSU FAN 1. Click on the [ Clear ] button next of PSU FAN. Clearing the operation time of a UPS 1. Click the calendar picker button in order to enter the date of UPS replacement. The check box on the left of Setup Date (UTC) will be reset. 2. Select it again, and the operation time of a UPS will return to 0. 4-515 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure

 

 

5. Software Update Chapter 5. Software Update 5.1 Updating the Software This section describes software update of this equipment. Note When software update starts, the tasks that are active are automatically terminated. Complete the necessary operation such as saving of settings prior to the start of update. Required Item The following item is required to update the MFD software. Table Required Item No. 1 Name Model Name CD/DVD or USB memory containing software update data *1

*1 Do not use Flash drives which are password protected or encrypted. When you want to use a USB flash memory to read or write a file, make sure in advance that the USB flash memory is not affected by a computer virus. If the display unit is infected with a virus, other equipment will also be infected, with the result that a trouble will occur. Before removing the USB flash memory, check for the access lamp of the USB flash memory and make sure that it is not being accessed. If you remove the USB flash memory when it is accessed, data may be destroyed and a trouble may occur. 5-1 Section 5 Software Update Procedure 1. Set the CD/DVD or USB flash memory containing the update data. Click on the [Menu] button on the left toolbar. The menu is displayed. Click on [Maintenance] - [Software Update] - [Software Update] on the menu. The "Software Update" dialog box appears. Click on the [Software Update] button. 2. 3. 4. Section 5 Software Update 5-2 A file selection dialog box appears. From the [Drive] combo box, select the drive you want to store updated data. From the file list, select the file MFD_Setup.exe. MFD_xx.xx.xxxx.exe is displayed in [File name]. Click on the [OK] button. The update content confirmation dialog box appears. 5. 6. 7. 5-3 Section 5 Software Update 8. Confirm the contents and click on [OK]. Installation of the update is started and the following message is displayed. Wait for a while until the installation completes. Note This equipment may restart during installation. When installation is completed, the following message is displayed. Turn off the power of this equipment. 9. 10. Restart this equipment. 11. Start MFD, and confirm that the software version number has been updated in the

[Software] tab by selecting [Maintenance] - [System Information]. Section 5 Software Update 5-4 5.2 Backing Up/Recovering Data Do not turn off the power during Backup/Restore. Otherwise, a function may fail, and an accident may occur. Do not do the backup operation of data while sailing. The radar application should be ended to begin the data backup. It becomes impossible to observe using radar and this may lead to accidents. Before removing the USB flash memory, check for the access lamp of the USB flash memory and make sure that it is not being accessed. If you remove the USB flash memory when it is accessed, data may be destroyed and a trouble may occur. 5.2.1 Backing Up Data For the maintenance of your data, please back up your data periodically according to the following procedure. Connect a USB memory stick or other external storage medium for data backup. 1. Press the Power ON button on the operation unit. The Power button illuminates. After a while, the task menu is displayed. Click on the [Data Backup/Restore] button on the task menu. 2. The "Backup/Restore" dialog box appears. 5-5 Section 5 Software Update Click on the [Data Backup] tab Drive selection combo box

[Data Type] combo box

[Start] button Select the backup destination of your data from the drive selection combo box. In the [Data Type] combo box, select the type of the data you are backing up. Backs up all of the user data. Backs up the user data excluding chart data. All:

Except Charts:

Click on the [Start] button. The following confirmation dialog box appears. Click on the [OK] button. Copying of data to the backup destination you selected in the drive selection combo box starts. Note Do not perform any other operations until backup finishes. Doing other operations may cause the backup operation to fail. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Section 5 Software Update 5-6 5.2.2 Restoring Backup Data To restore backup data to this equipment, perform the following procedure. Connect a USB memory stick or other external storage medium containing backup data. 1. Press the [Power] button on the operation panel. The [Power] button illuminates. After a while, the task menu is displayed. Click on the [Data Backup/Restore] button on the task menu. 2. 3. 4. 5. The "Backup/Restore" dialog box appears. Click on the [Data Restore] tab Drive selection combo box

[Data Type] combo box

[Start] button Select the drive in which backup data is stored from the drive selection combo box. In the [Data Type] combo box, select the type of the data you are restoring. All:

Except Charts: Restores the user data excluding chart data. Restores all of the user data. 5-7 Section 5 Software Update Section 5 Software Update 5-8 6. Click on the [Start] button. The following confirmation dialog box appears. 7. Click on the [OK] button Restoration of data from the drive you selected in the drive selection combo box starts. lf data already exists on the SSD, an overwrite confirmation dialog box appears. To start restoring data, click on the [OK] button. Note Do not perform any other operations until restoration finishes. Doing other operations may cause the restoration operation to fail. Memo If there is no compatibility between the data you attempted to restore and this equipment, the following dialog box appears and restoration will not be performed. Click on the [OK] button and cancel data restoration. 5-9 Section 5 Software Update 5.3 Recovering the C Drive Image Do not turn off the power during Backup/Restore. Otherwise, a function may fail, and an accident may occur. Do not do the backup operation of data while sailing. The radar application should be ended to begin the data backup. It becomes impossible to observe using radar and this may lead to accidents. Whenever you try to perform disk image recovery, always make sure that the backup power is fed to the PSU of the Display Unit. Unexpected shutdown during recovery may cause a system malfunction. The operating system (OS) of this equipment runs on the C drive. The entire content of the C drive is saved in the D drive C in its image. In case the operation of the OS on the C drive becomes unstable, the image of the C drive can be written back from the D drive. Note Once the image of the C drive is written back, the information concerning C-MAP is cleared. After image write back is performed, re-register the C-MAP database and license, and perform update as necessary. The flow of C drive image write back is as follows. Start the OS on the D drive to start this equipment. 5.3.1 Starting the OS on the D Drive to Start This Equipment Execute the recovery SSD tool. 5.3.2 Executing the SSD Recovery Tool Start the OS on the C drive to start this equipment. 5.3.3 Starting the OS on the C Drive to Start This Equipment (Automatic Recovery of Software) Set C-MAP again. 5.3.4 Setting C-MAP Again End recovery. Section 5 Software Update 5-10 5.3.1 Starting the OS on the D Drive to Start This Equipment Start the OS on the D drive to start this equipment according to the following procedure. 1. Enter the power to this equipment while simultaneously holding down the [SILENCE] key and [ZOOM OUT] keys. When startup is completed, the following message is displayed. The recovery SSD tool can be executed in this state. 5-11 Section 5 Software Update 5.3.2 Executing the SSD Recovery Tool Execute the SSD recovery tool to write back the C drive image. 1. Click on the [Disk Recovery] button in the dialog box that appears after starting from the D drive. The following dialog box appears. 2. 3. Select the image file you want to write back to the C drive. Normally, select the image file that is displayed in the dialog box. To specify another image file, click on the [Change File] button and then select the desired image file from the file list that appears. Note Because the equipment has been started from the D drive, the regular C drive is displayed as the D drive and the regular D drive is displayed as the C drive. So please be careful with this when selecting an image file. Click on the [OK] button. Image file write back starts. Caution Do not perform any other operations until write back finishes. Doing other operations may cause image write back to fail. When write back is completed, the following message is displayed. Section 5 Software Update 5-12 5.3.3 Starting the OS on the C Drive to Start This Equipment (Automatic Recovery of Software) Start the OS written back to the C drive to start this equipment. 1. Click on the [OK] button in the dialog box that appears when write back finishes. As the OS starts from the C drive, the applications and the various settings of the OS on the C drive automatically recover. The following dialog box appears during recovery operation. Caution This equipment restarts during recovery operation. Do not perform any other operations until recovery finishes. Doing so may cause recovery to fail, leading to accidents. When recovery is completed, the following messages are displayed. Press the [Power] button on the operation panel to turn OFF the power to this equipment. 2. 5.3.4 Setting C-MAP Again Start this equipment again and perform settings associated with C-MAP. Register the database and license again. Also, perform update as necessary. For further information, see Additional Manual for Chart Installation 4.3 Importing C-MAP Ed.3. 5-13 Section 5 Software Update 5.4 Rollback of the Software Do not turn off the power during Rollback. Otherwise, a function may fail, and an accident may occur. Do not do the rollback operation of data while sailing. The radar application should be ended to begin the data backup. It becomes impossible to observe using radar and this may lead to accidents. Whenever you try to perform rollback, always make sure that the backup power is fed to the PSU of the Display Unit. Unexpected shutdown during rollback may cause a system malfunction. By rollback operation, you can downgrade MFD software version to the previous version. The software version you can downgrade is until the version you have updated just before. You cannot downgrade the software version to the second or more versions from the latest install version. If the software of the Display Unit have never updated ever, you cannot downgrade it. Turn on the Display Unit power. The splash screen will appear. 1. Section 5 Software Update 5-14 Press [ALERT ACK] and [ZOOM IN] buttons simultaneously and repeatedly when the splash screen become blackout a moment. Keep pressing the two buttons repeatedly until the Restore dialog appears. 5-15 Section 5 Software Update 2. Note If you try to press the two buttons at the same time of its booting up, the MFD application would not start up correctly because of freeze at the splash screen. In that case, turn OFF the power by pressing the PWR button on the TOPU, and then turn ON it again. Restore dialog appears. Confirm the contents and click [OK]. Rollback will start and the following message will be displayed. Note If you perform a rollback, Following user data of the latest version will be erased. Certificate, Connection setting for ISW, Portlist, Personal settings, Route, User chart, Total distance Wait for a while until the rollback completes. Note This equipment may restart during installation. 3. Section 5 Software Update 5-16 When rollback is completed, the following message is displayed. Turn off the power of this equipment. Restart this equipment. Start MFD, and confirm that the software version number has been updated in the

[Software] tab by selecting [Maintenance] - [System Information]. 4. 5. 6. 5-17 Section 5 Software Update 5.5 Update of Firmware When you want to use a USB flash memory to read or write a file, make sure in advance that the USB flash memory is not affected by a computer virus. If the display unit is infected with a virus, other equipment will also be infected, with the result that a trouble will occur. Before removing the USB flash memory, check for the access lamp of the USB flash memory and make sure that it is not being accessed. If you remove the USB flash memory when it is accessed, data may be destroyed and a trouble may occur. Do not turn off the power during firmware updating. Otherwise, a function may fail, and an accident may occur. Do not do the firmware updating operation of data while sailing. The radar application should be ended to begin the data backup. It becomes impossible to observe using radar and this may lead to accidents. Whenever you try to CCU or TOPU firmware updating, always make sure that the backup power is fed to the PSU of the Display Unit. Unexpected shutdown during updating may cause a system malfunction. This section describes the procedures for CCU, TOPU, and SLC/ALC firmware updating. Section 5 Software Update 5-18 5.2.1 Update the CCU firmware Note When firmware update starts, the tasks that are active are automatically terminated. Complete the necessary operation such as saving of settings prior to the start of update. The following item is required to update the CCU Firmware. Table Required Item No. 1 Name Model Name USB flash drive containing CCU Firmware update Tool and data *1

*1 Do not use Flash drives which are password protected or encrypted 1.

(1) Apply power to the Display Unit by using the PWR switch of the trackball operation unit. The Turn the power ON and activate the maintenance tool Task selection screen will be displayed. 5-19 Section 5 Software Update

(2) Position the cursor on the Password window and left-click on it. The Password input screen is displayed. Enter 1074. 2. Updating the CCU Firmware by using the remote update tool

(1) The maintenance tool is activated. Connect the USB flash drive containing the CCU Firmware remote update tool to the USB port of the trackball operation unit.

(2) Select CompanionUpdate.exe and press OK. The remote update tool is activated.

(3) Check the COM port in the Step1 Setup Interface item. Check that COM4:blzam Virtual Com Port is selected. Do not select any other COM port. After checking, press the Open button. Section 5 Software Update 5-20

(4) Press the Get Version button in the Step2 Select Software item. Subsequently, select COMPANION-APL (Ver.01.**) from the tab. (**: Firmware version)

(5) Press the Browse button in the Step3 Select update file item. When the Explorer screen is displayed, select the latest CMP firmware file (CMP_APL_***.img). 5-21 Section 5 Software Update When the Firmware type and the update file do not match, an error occurs.

(6) After the file is selected, the Update button is enabled in the Step4 Update item. Start Update by pressing the button.

(7) When Update is finished normally, the Update completion window is displayed. When the OK button is pressed, the remote update tool is terminated and processing returns to the Task screen. When the restart confirmation screen is displayed, restart. 3. Confirming the updating version After updating, confirm the firmware version in maintenance menu.

(1) Click on the [Menu] button on the left toolbar. The menu is displayed. Section 5 Software Update 5-22

(2) Click on the [Maintenance] - [System Information] button on the menu. The [System Information] dialog box appears. Click on the [Software] tab.

(3) The software information is displayed. Click on this list and code input dialog is displayed. Enter 0000 and additional software information is displayed.

(4) Confirm updating firmware version. Confirm that the version number displayed at Carrier Board equals to the CMP firmware file. 5-23 Section 5 Software Update 5.2.2 Update the TOPU firmware Note When firmware update starts, the tasks that are active are automatically terminated. Complete the necessary operation such as saving of settings prior to the start of update. Note In TOPU update, do NOT use the USB port on TOPU. It will be reset during the firmware update sequence. The port will become unavailable and the updating will be failure. The following items are required to update the TOPU Firmware. Table Required Item No Name Size External Appearance 1 Flat head screwdriver 2 USB flash drive containing TOPU firmware update Tool and data *1 6 mm

-

-

*1 Do not use Flash drives which are password protected or encrypted 1. Supplying the power and activating the maintenance tool

(1) Supply the power to the Display Unit by using the PWR switch of the trackball operation unit. The Task selection screen is displayed. Section 5 Software Update 5-24

(2) Connect the USB flash drive containing the TOPU Firmware remote update tool to the USB port of the CCU.

(3) Position the cursor on the Password window and left-click on it. The password input screen is displayed. Enter 1074. 5-25 Section 5 Software Update TOPU Firmware updating by using the remote update tool 2.

(1) The maintenance tool is activated. CAUTION!!

In TOPU firmware update, do NOT use the USB port of TOPU. Otherwise, the TOPU operation unit is reset during updating, making update impossible. Use USB Ports of CCU.

(2) Select OperationUpdate.exe and press OK. The remote update tool is activated. Section 5 Software Update 5-26

(3) Check the COM port in the Step1 Setup Interface item. Check that COM6:NCE-5605 Virtual COM Port is selected. Do not select any other COM port. After checking, press the Open button.

(4) Press the Get Version button in the Step2 Select Software item. Subsequently, select OPERATION-APL (Ver.V01.**) from the tab. (**: Firmware version)

(5) Press the Browse button in the Step3 Select update file item. When the Explorer screen is displayed, select the latest TOPU CMP firmware file (OPU_APL_***.img). 5-27 Section 5 Software Update When the Firmware type and the update file do not match, an error occurs.

(6) After the file is selected, the Update button is enabled in the Step4 Update item. Start Update by pressing the button.

(7) When Update is finished normally, the Update completion window is displayed. When the OK button is pressed, the remote update tool is updated and processing returns to the Task screen. When the restart confirmation screen is displayed, restart. 3. Confirming the updating version After updating, confirm the firmware version in maintenance menu.

(1) Click on the [Menu] button on the left toolbar. The menu is displayed.

(2) Click on the [Maintenance] - [System Information] button on the menu. The [System Information] dialog box appears. Click on the [Software] tab. Section 5 Software Update 5-28

(3) The software information is displayed. Click on this list and code input dialog is displayed. Input 0000 and additional software information is displayed.

(4) Confirm updating firmware version. Confirm that the version number displayed at USB Operation Unit equals to the TOPU CMP firmware file. 5-29 Section 5 Software Update Update the SLC/ALC firmware Update the firmware of SLC/ALC that have been installed to the latest version. The items shown in the following table are required for updating work. Table Required Tools No Name 1 Flat head screwdriver 2 Phillips screwdriver Size 6 mm Size #2 Appearance 3 USB flash drive containing SLC firmware update Tool and data *1

-

-

*1 Do not use Flash drives which are password protected or encrypted Do not lose the screws as they will be used again. Note When firmware update starts, the tasks that are active are automatically terminated. Complete the necessary operation such as saving of settings prior to the start of update. 4. Prior confirmation Confirm the following contents before the update.

(1) Number of SLCs/ALCs that are installed on this ship Check the JB on this ship and check the number of SLCs/ALCs that have been installed. Firmware updating must be carried out for all the SLCs/ALCs. Open the cover (fixed by four screws) of each JB and check that SLC or ALC have been installed. Section 5 Software Update 5-30

(2) Confirming the setting of SLC/ALC S3 rotary switch Check the setting of S3 rotary switch of SLC/ALC. If there is an SLC with the same switch setting in each of the MAIN network and SUB network, the firmware cannot be updated correctly. SLC/ALC S3 rotary switch LAN connector J8111: For Main J8112: For Sub Main/Sub network setting MAIN/SUB network identification seal SLC No. identification seal SLC/ALC identification seal

(3) Confirming network connection By using the network connection from Display Unit, update the SLC firmware. Check the network connection in advance. Check that Display Unit, NQA-2443 Sensor LAN Unit (referred to as the Sensor LAN Unit henceforth), and SLC/ALC are all turned on. SLC that is connected to MAIN LAN:

Check that CCU LAN1 - Sensor LAN unit for Main - SLC J8111 are connected through the Ethernet Cable. SLC that is connected to SUB LAN:

Check that CCU LAN2 - Sensor LAN unit for Sub - SLC J8112 are connected through the Ethernet cable. 5-31 Section 5 Software Update 5. Supplying the power and activating the maintenance tool Check that Display Unit, Sensor LAN Unit, and SLC are all turned on. For Display Unit, check also that the breaker of NBD-913 is turned ON. Update can be performed from any Display units as long as they are connected to SLC through the network.

(1) Turn on the power of Display Unit by using the PWR switch of the trackball operation unit. The Task selection screen will be displayed. CAUTION!!

Whenever you begin update the SLC firmware, make sure that the other Display Unit on the network does not run the Task applications (RADAR, ECDISetc.). Other Display Units must be set Task select Screen during the updating. Section 5 Software Update 5-32

(2) Position the cursor on the Password window and left-click on it. The Password input screen is displayed. Enter 1074. 6. Updating SLC/ALC firmware by using the remote update tool

(1) The maintenance tool is activated. Connect the USB flash drive containing the SLC/ALC remote update tool to the USB port of the trackball operation unit.

(2) Select SlcAlcUpdate.exe and press OK. The remote update tool is activated.

(3) Select a network in the Step1 Setup Interface item. SLC that is connected to MAIN LAN:

SLC that is connected to SUB LAN:

IEC61162-450 Network-MAIN:172.16.60.*

IEC61162-450 Network-SUB :172.17.60.*

5-33 Section 5 Software Update

(4) In Equipment of Step2 Select equipment, select the SLC for which firmware update is to be performed. The IP address of the selected SLC is automatically input in Equipment IP. Do not change the port. Use the No.* seal of SLC as the numeric digits of SLC*. For instance, No.2 SLC=SCL2. Section 5 Software Update 5-34 The following table shows the list of IP addresses of SLC/ALC for confirmation. S3 Operation Position mode No. Main LAN Sub LAN 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F SLC ALC SLC8 SLC7 SLC6 SLC5 SLC4 SLC3 SLC2 SLC1 172.16.60.107 172.16.60.108 172.16.60.109 172.16.60.110 172.16.60.111 172.16.60.112 172.16.60.113 172.16.60.114 172.16.60.115 SLC9 SLC10 172.16.60.116 SLC11 172.16.60.117 SLC12 172.16.60.119 172.16.60.118 ALC1 172.16.60.120 172.16.60.121 172.16.60.122 ALC3 ALC2 ALC4 172.17.60.107 172.17.60.108 172.17.60.109 172.17.60.110 172.17.60.111 172.17.60.112 172.17.60.113 172.17.60.114 172.17.60.115 172.17.60.116 172.17.60.117 172.17.60.118 172.17.60.119 172.17.60.120 172.17.60.121 172.17.60.122

(5) Press the Get Version button on the Step3 Select Software item. Subsequently, select SLC/ALC-APL (Ver.01.00.**) from the tab. (**: Firmware version) 5-35 Section 5 Software Update

(6) Press the Browse button in the Step4 Select update file item. When the Explorer screen is activated, select the latest SLC/ALC firmware file (SLC _APL_***.img). When the firmware type and update file do not match, an error occurs.

(7) After the file is selected, the Update button is enabled in the Step5 Update item. Start Update by pressing the button. Section 5 Software Update 5-36

(8) When Update is finished normally, the Update completion window is displayed. When the OK button is pressed, the remote update tool is terminated and processing returns to the Task screen. When the activation confirmation screen is displayed, restart. 7. Confirming the update version After updating, confirm the firmware version in maintenance menu.

(1) Click on the [Menu] button on the left toolbar. The menu is displayed.

(2) Click on the [Maintenance] - [System Information] button on the menu. The [System Information] dialog box appears. Click on the [Software] tab.

(3) The software information is displayed. Click on this list and code input dialog is displayed. Enter 0000 and additional software information is displayed. 5-37 Section 5 Software Update

(4) Confirm updating software version. Confirm that the version number displayed at SLC(n) equals to the SLC/ALC firmware file. Section 5 Software Update 5-38 6. Connection to External Navigation Equipment Chapter 6. Connection to and Settings of External Navigation Equipment 6.1 Connection with Radar Options 6.1.1 6.1.1.1 Checking the Installation Status Interswitch Unit For information about checking the installation status of the interswitch unit, please refer to Chapter 5 in the "JMR-92XX/72XX JAN-92XX/72XX Installation Manual."

6.1.1.2 Setting the Interswitch Unit For information about checking the installation status of the interswitch unit, please refer to Chapter 5 in the "JMR-92XX/72XX JAN-92XX/72XX Installation Manual."

6-1 Chapter 6 Connection to External Navigation Equipment 6.1.1.3 Interconnection Diagram Chapter 6 Connection to External Navigation Equipment 6-2 6.1.2 Power Control Unit The NQE-3167 power control unit is used when a scanner unit and a transmitter-receiver unit are installed away from the bridge, such as at the foremast. In the case of a dual scanner unit, the maximum cable length between the display unit and the scanner unit is "65 m." In the case of a triple scanner unit, the maximum cable length between the display unit and the scanner unit is "35 m."

By using the NQE-3167 power control unit, it is possible to extend the maximum cable length between the display unit and the scanner unit (transmitter-receiver unit) up to "465 m."

Maximum cable length between the scanner unit and the transmitter-receiver unit 30 m Maximum cable length between the transmitter-receiver unit and the power control unit 35 m Maximum cable length between the display unit and the power control unit 400 m 6.1.2.1 Checking the Installation Status For information about checking the installation status of the interswitch unit, please refer to Chapter 5 in the "JMR-92XX/72XX JAN-92XX/72XX Installation Manual."

6-3 Chapter 6 Connection to External Navigation Equipment 6.1.2.2 Interconnection Diagram for JMR-9230-S3, JMR-7230-S3 Chapter 6 Connection to External Navigation Equipment 6-4 6.1.2.3 Interconnection Diagram for JMR-9230-S, JMR-7230-S R O T I N O M E C N A M R O F R E P f o g n i r i W l

. d e t e p m o c s i 1 P I T P E T P I X T E X T 2 P R V L S M P E T H W N R B U L B D E R K L B R O T I N O M 4 8

-

U J N E C N A M R O F R E P T H W N R B U L B D E R K L B 1 8 P I T P E T P I X T E X T 2 8 P R V L S M P E G V 8 4

+

V 8 4

+

2 0 1 B T 1 U 1 V 1 W H T U U V 1 2 3 4 5 6 0 7 8 9 1 1 1 2 1 D E R U L B L E Y N R G

+

P B

-

P B

+

Z B

-

Z B

+

G I R T

-

G I R T

+

R T M

-

R T M E R T M

+

D V

-

D V 1 0 1 B T 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 1 1 3 K L B 4 K L B 2 K L B L E Y

-

T H W T H W

-

T H W 1 K L B T I N U R E N N A C S 2

/

1

-

0 3 1 1

-

E K N

) R A D A R W k 0 3 D N A B

-

S

(

R E T A E H r o f

, 1

, z H 0 6

/

0 5

, V 0 2 2 C A I S N A M S P H S I 5

. 1

-

Y C Y P D

-

V k 1

/

6

. 0 R E M R O F S N A R T N W O D

-

P E T S 5 7 1

-

L B N

) Y L P P U S C R J

(

E L B A C E T I S O P M O C S E R O C

-

4 1

) 6 5 0 0 1 1 5 9 6 2

(

V T B T B V X C 4 1 M C 5

. 1

-

S Y C Y P D

-

V k 1

/

6

. 0 3 B T

+

T M

-

T M E T M E D V D V G R T 2 E G T 2

+

P B 2

-

P B 2

+

Z B 2

-

Z B 2 D N G A 1 A 2

+

M

+

M

-

M

-

M 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 6 1 7 1 8 1 N R O

-

T H W 1 K L B

-

T H W T H W 2 K L B 3 K L B 4 K L B D E R U L B

+

G R T

-

G R T 2 B T

+

P B

-

P B

+

Z B

-

Z B

+

R T M

-

R T M E R T M

+

X R T

/

V 8 4

+

-

X R T

/

G V 8 4 R T H T H R S I S I 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 0 9 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 6 1 N O I T P O R E T A E H D 5

. 1

-

Y C Y P D

-

V k 1

/

6

. 0 R E K A E R B T I U C R I C

) Y L P P U S D R A Y P I H S

(

A 5 5

. 1

-

S Y C Y P D

-

V k 1

/

6

. 0 W 0 0 1

, 1

, V 0 0 1 C A 2 K L B 3 K L B 4 K L B L E Y

-

T H W

-

T H W T H W L E Y N R G 1 B T N I U N I V N I W N I H U N I H V T U O H U T U O H V T U O U T U O V T U O W

+

M R A F

-

M R A F

+

D V

-

D V I S N A M S P H S I 1 z H 0 6

/

0 5 V 0 4 2

-

0 2 2 C A

/

V 5 1 1

-

0 0 1 C A 6

-

Y C Y P D

-

V k 1

/

6

. 0 X A M m 0 0 4

) 6 5 0 0 1 1 5 9 6 2

(

V T B T B V X C 4 1 M C

) Y L P P U S C R J

(

E L B A C E T I S O P M O C S E R O C

-

4 1 X A M m 0 0 4

) 3 5 1 1 1 1 1 6 6 2

(

Y U

/

0 1

-

G R

) Y L P P U S C R J

(

O E D I V r o f E L B A C L A I X A O C T I N U L O R T N O C R E W O P 7 6 1 3

-

E Q N l t

-

) e p y T e n o a d n a S C D 6 3 8

-

L M C

(

4 6 1 4 A N C Z 7

) e p y T p o t k s e D

-

F C D 6 3 8

-

L M C

(

5 6 1 4 A N C Z 7

:

:

1 4 8 W 2 4 8 W 0 9 5 1

-

C D N o T l

) e p y T e n o a d n a S C D 6 3 8

-

L M C

-

t

) e p y T p o t k s e D

-

F C D 6 3 8

-

L M C

(

(

0 6 1 4 A N C Z 7 1 6 1 4 A N C Z 7

:

:

3 5 8 W 4 5 8 W 3 1 9

-

D B N o T N O I T C E N N O C O N 3 4 1 1

-

E Q N X O B N O I T C N U J 7 3 8 J I N _ C S _ C A 9 3 8 J I N _ C S _ C D 1 3 8 J F

/

I U C C N O I T C E N N O C O N N O I T C E N N O C O N

) V 0 2 2

/

0 0 1 C A

(

8 3 8 B T U V 1 2

) R T M V 4 2 C D

(

0 4 8 B T

+

-

1 2 2 K L B 3 K L B 4 K L B L E Y

-

T H W T H W

-

T H W D E R U L B

+

D V

-

D V

+

G R T

-

G R T 2 3 8 J

+

P B

-

P B

+

Z B

-

Z B

+

R T M

-

R T M G R T M

)

. C

. N

(

+

C D

-

C D 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 t i u c r i C e c a f r e t n I r a d a R 3 7 2 2

-

D Q C 6-5 Chapter 6 Connection to External Navigation Equipment 6.1.2.4 Interconnection Diagram for JMR-9272-S, JMR-7272-S J2 Chapter 6 Connection to External Navigation Equipment 6-6 6.1.2.5 Interconnection Diagram for JMR-9282-S/SH, JMR-7282-S/SH 6-7 Chapter 6 Connection to External Navigation Equipment 6.1.2.6 Interconnection Diagram for JMR-9225-7X3/9X3, JMR-7225-7X3/9X3 Chapter 6 Connection to External Navigation Equipment 6-8 6.1.2.7 Interconnection Diagram for JMR-9225-6X/9X, JMR-7225-6X/9X 6-9 Chapter 6 Connection to External Navigation Equipment 6.1.2.8 Interconnection Diagram for JMR-9210-6X/6XH, JMR-7210-6X/6XH Chapter 6 Connection to External Navigation Equipment 6-10 6.2 Connection with VDR 6.2.1 Checking the Installation Status The following two types of connection methods are available for connection with the voyage data recorder (VDR). 1. Connection via LAN (IEC61162-450). 2. Connection through analog RGB Please refer to Chapter 5 in the "JMR-92XX/72XX JAN-92XX/72XX Installation Manual" and check the installation status with the VDR. 6.2.2 VDR Interface Kit The VDR interface kit is used to connect the analog RGB signal to the VDR. For the details, refer to Chapter 5 in the "JMR-92XX/72XX JAN-92XX/72XX Installation Manual". VDR Interface Kit CQD-1891 Packing list:

DSUB15P BNC cable (KB5BNC2K, 2 meters) BNC to BNC adapter (BNC-A-JJ) BNC connector (3CV-P2) Use a 3C-2V coaxial cable for connection. 1 pc. 5 pc. 5 pc. NDC-1590 J4205 KB-5BNC2K RED GRN BLU GRY BLK

:red

:green

:blue

:HSYNC

:VSYNC RED GRN BLU GRY BLK BNC BNC-A-JJ 3CV-P2 BNC BNC-A-JJ 3CV-P2 BNC BNC-A-JJ 3CV-P2 BNC BNC-A-JJ 3CV-P2 BNC BNC-A-JJ 3CV-P2 3C-2V 3C-2V 3C-2V 3C-2V 3C-2V CQD-1891 TO VDR 6-11 Chapter 6 Connection to External Navigation Equipment 6.3 Connection with ECDIS 6.3.1 Checking the Installation Status Please refer to Chapter 3 in the "JMR-92XX/72XX JAN-92XX/72XX Installation Manual" and check the installation status with the ECDIS. 6.3.2 Connecting with the ECDIS The video signal of the RADAR is output from the J836 of the CQD-2273 radar interface circuit. The radar interface circuit is mounted in the NQE-1143 JB. Connect the No.1 ECDIS to J836 EX_OUT (VD+, VD-, TRG+, TRG-, BP+, BP-, BZ+, BZ-). Target tracking information is output via LAN. Connect the ECDIS to the NQA-2443 Sensor LAN switch. When connecting an ECDIS of the JAN-901B/701B, JAN-901/901M/701 or JAN-2000 model to the JMR-9200/7200 Series RADAR, perform output settings of the IEC61162-1 TX terminal of the serial LAN interface circuit (SLC) in the display unit of the RADAR, and then output the target tracking information. For the details, please refer to Chapter 3 in the "JMR-92XX/72XX JAN-92XX/72XX Installation Manual"

Chapter 6 Connection to External Navigation Equipment 6-12 6.4 Connection with BNWAS The display unit of this product has the function to input/output the various contact signals for the Bridge Navigational Watch Alarm System (BNWAS*). Connect necessary signals by referring to the table below. All signals are preset at normally open when shipped from the factory. Terminal Block CMH-2370 SLC J8108 CMH-2370 SLC J8108 NDC-1590 J4302 Signal Name SYS ALM ARPA ALM PWR FAIL CMH-2370 SLC J8107 SYS ACK CMH-2370 SLC J8107 ARPA ACK CMH-2370 SLC J8108 NDC-1590 J4302 ACK OUT WMRS T

(*) BNWAS IN/OUT Description Remarks OUT OUT OUT IN IN OUT OUT The system alarm status is output. Set to normally closed with a jumper.* 1 The dangerous ship alarm status is output. Set to normally closed with a jumper.*

The disconnection of the ship's main power supply is detected. It is necessary to connect the backup DC24V power supply of the NBD-913 PSU in advance. The ACK signal of system alarm is input. The ACK signal of dangerous ship alarm is input. The ACK signal of alarm is output. Normally closed

"False" denotes either an open or disconnected state.

"True" denotes a closed state.

"False" denotes either an open or disconnected state.

"True" denotes a closed state. Set to normally open with a jumper.* 1 The watch timer reset signal is output. Normally open

*1 Serial LAN interface circuit jumper settings Normal Close Setting Normal Open Setting 24V Out Setting Bridge Navigation Watch Alarm System 6-13 Chapter 6 Connection to External Navigation Equipment 6.5 Subsystem Installation Use the "Subsystem Installation" dialog to verify and change the subsystem configuration of this equipment. 6.5.1 Displaying the "Subsystem Installation"

dialog 1 Display the dialog of the Installation submenu. 2 Select [System Configuration] in the 1st Classification pane and [Subsystem Configuration] in the 2nd Classification pane. The "Subsystem Installation" dialog is displayed in the Edit/Result pane. Chapter 6 Connection to External Navigation Equipment 6-14 6.5.2 Changing the subsystem configuration Set the following items in the "Subsystem Installation" dialog. If the presence/absence of the equipment is set in this dialog, the menu display/hide and configuration contents relating to the equipment change according to the setting contents. Setting item Own Task Station Junction Box Description of setting Setting value Select the Task Station number of the equipment from the combo box. Select from the task stations that were set in Task Stations 1 to 8 of Device Installation. Select installation/non-installation of the USB OPU

(Operation Unit) by using the [USB OPU] check box. When the unit is installed, select the installation contents in the [USB OPU] combo box. Memo When OPU is installed, the OPU active/inactive monitoring is performed. When there is no response, the following alert is displayed and OPU is restarted. OPU: OPU-USB(Communication error) Keyboard: OPA-OPB(Communication error) Select the installation/non-installation of Serial OPU (Operation Unit) by using the [Serial OPU]

check box. When OPU is installed, select the installation contents in the [Serial OPU] combo box. Memo When OPU is installed, the OPU active/inactive monitoring is performed. When there is no response, the following alert is displayed and OPU is restarted. OPU: OPU-Serial(Communication error) Keyboard: OPA-OPB(Communication error) Select installed/not installed of junction boxes 1 to 8 from the [Junction Box 1 ~ 8] check boxes. In the combo box for selecting a Task Station, select the equipment that is directly connected to Radar I/F or Gyro I/F of the junction box. Select the equipment to be installed in the Junction Box that was selected from [Junction Box 1 ~ 8] check boxes. When SLC is selected from the combo box, select installed/not installed of AOC with the [AOC] check box. Task Station 1 ~ Task Station 8 Installation/non-installation of the unit Absent: Clear Present: Select Installation contents No keyboard operation unit

(optional):

Select Trackball. Keyboard operation unit

(optional):

Select Trackball + Keyboard. Installation/non-installation Non-installation: Clear Installation: Select Installation contents No keyboard operation unit

(optional):

Select Trackball. Keyboard operation unit

(optional):

Select Trackball + Keyboard. Not installed: Clear. Installed: Select. Equipment that is assigned to any of Task Stations 1 to 8 of Device Installation None SLC 1 to 8(Main) SLC 1 to 8(Sub) ALC 1 to 8 RIF GIF RIF + GIF Not installed: Clear. Installed: Select. 6-15 Chapter 6 Connection to External Navigation Equipment Setting item Device Installation Description of setting Setting value Select installed/not installed of the device by using the check box of each subsystem. For the subsystem that is installed, select the parameters from the combo box. No restrictions are placed on the order of assigning the devices to Taskstation1-Taskstation8. The following shows an example of device assignment to task stations:

(Example) Device assignment in ascending order of the values of IP-address 4th octets

(Refer to 4.11 "JRC Network IP Address.") 1: No.1 RADAR 2: No.2 RADAR 3: No.1 ECDIS 4: No.2 ECDIS 5: No.1 CON Note:

The subsystems that are displayed as disabled will be supported in the future. Not installed: Clear. Installed: Select. Subsystem Task Station 1~Task Station 8 RADAR 1, 2 *1 VDR(JRC) Primer Heading Sensor 1, 2 Log 1, 2 GPS 1~4 Ships Clock Echo Sounder (T/D 1~4) AIS NAVTEX Anemometer Water TEMP Meter Current Meter Climate Meter Autopilot Rudder Engine/Propeller Engine Telegraph Bow Thruster Stem Thruster Azimuth Thruster Generator Fin Stabilizer YEOMAN Digitizer Radar Simulator S-JOY 1 to 5 GPS Selector Log Selector

(*1) For ECDIS, the communication radar is to be checked. Table 4-1 Device numbers that can be selected No. Device numbers that can be selected No. None No.1 RADAR No.2 RADAR No.3 RADAR No.4 RADAR No.5 RADAR No.6 RADAR No.7 RADAR No.8 RADAR No.1 ECDIS No.2 ECDIS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 Chapter 6 Connection to External Navigation Equipment 6-16 Device numbers that can be selected No.3 ECDIS No.4 ECDIS No.1 CON No.2 CON No.1 CON (Wing) No.2 CON (Wing) No.1 CON (Remote) No.2 CON (Remote) No.1 RPS No.2 RPS Setting example The following diagram shows the setting example of [Own Task Station] and [Device Installation] when the subsystem is configured as follows:

No.1 RADAR (S band radar) as Task Station 1 No.2 RADAR (X band radar) as Task Station 2 No.1 ECDIS as Task Station 3 No.2 ECDIS as Task Station 4 Conning as Task Station 5 6.5.3 Saving subsystem configuration changes 1 Click on the [Set] button in the "Subsystem Installation" dialog. A dialog is displayed prompting confirmation of saving the configuration changes. 2 To save the changes, click on the [OK] button. To cancel the changes, click on the

[Cancel] button. 6-17 Chapter 6 Connection to External Navigation Equipment 6.6 Setting Up a Serial Port Use the "Serial Port" dialog to verify the setting of the serial port of this equipment and perform the initial setting. The status of ISW/MTR and Serial OPU can also be monitored. 6.6.1 Displaying the "Serial Port" dialog. 1. Display the dialog of the Installation submenu. 2. Select [System Configuration] in the 1st Classification pane and [Serial Port] in the 2nd Classification pane. The "Serial Port" dialog is displayed in the Edit/Result pane. Tab name SLC18(M)/

SLC18(S)/

ALC18 Is displayed only if the SLC1 ~ 8 (S). Refer to "For making SLC(Main) and SLC(Sub) the same setup".

[Diagnosis] lamp light colors The [Diagnosis] lamp displays the diagnosis result as to whether the sentence of the specified sensor is received for each serial port and also displays the status of ISW/MTR and Serial OPU. Lit in red:

Data not received. Lit in green: Data is receiving. Lit in orange: In diagnosis (before decision). No color:

Serial port is disabled. Note When the RADAR slave mode is active, the [Diagnosis] lamp of ISW/MTR is disabled. When the [Serial OPU] check box is set to Off after selecting [Service]-[Installation]-[System Configuration]-[Subsystem Installation], the [Diagnosis] lamp of serial OPU is disabled. Chapter 6 Connection to External Navigation Equipment 6-18 6.6.2 Setting a serial port In the "Serial Port" dialog, allocate the sensor to be connected for the serial port on CCU and the serial port on SLC(Main/Sub)/ALC. Serial port setting on CCU CCU SLC/ALC Serial port setting on SLC/ALC

[Setting a serial port on CCU]

Setting Value To enable: Select. To disable: Clear. The sensors that can be selected vary according to the subsystem installation status. Refer to "Table 4-2 Sensors that can be selected on the Task Station". Description of Setting 1. Select the check box and enable the serial port for the Gyro. 2. Select the sensor to be connected to the Gyro serial port from the [Sensor] combo box. When no sensor is selected, select [-]. 1. Select the check box and enable the serial port for the LOG. 2. Select the sensor to be connected to the LOG serial port from the [Sensor] combo box. When no sensor is selected, select [-]. 1. Select the check box and enable the serial port for the GPS. 2. Select a sensor to be connected to the serial port for the GPS from the [Sensor] combo box. When no sensor is selected, select [-]. 1. Select the check box and enable the serial port for the AIS. 2. Select a sensor to be connected to the serial port for the AIS from the [Sensor] combo box. When no sensor is selected, select [-]. 6-19 Chapter 6 Connection to External Navigation Equipment Setting Item Gyro LOG GPS AIS Table 4-2 Sensors that can be selected on CCU Serial port Sensor name Gyro LOG GPS AIS Heading Sensor(NMEA) Heading Sensor(Gyro I/F) Log(NMEA) Log(Gyro I/F) *1 Selector GPS 1 GPS 2 GPS 3 GPS 4 Selector AIS Devices required as the subsystem

(set to "installed" in the "Subsystem Installation" dialog) Heading Sensor 1 Log 1 Log Selector GPS 1 GPS 2 GPS 3 GPS 4 GPS Selector AIS

(*1) Can be selected only when "Heading Sensor (Gyro I/F)" is selected for the Gyro port. When "Log(Gyro I/F)" is selected, log data is acquired together with the Heading Sensor data from the Gyro port and communication is not performed through the LOG port. Therefore, the Diagnosis lamp, the Detail button, and the Monitor button are disabled.

[Setting serial ports on the SLC/ALC that is installed]

Description of Setting Setting Value Setting Item CH1 to CH8

(IEC-61162-1) 1. Click on any of SLC1(M) to SLC8(M), SLC1(S) to SLC8(S) and ALC1 to ALC8 tabs. 2. Enable the serial port of the channel by selecting the check box. 3. Select the sensor to be connected to the channel from the [Sensor] combo box. When no sensor is selected, select [-]. CH9/CH10

(IEC-61162-2) 1. Click on any of SLC1(M) to SLC8(M), SLC1(S) to SLC8(S) and ALC1 to ALC8 tabs. Gyro I/F 2. Enable the serial port of the channel by selecting the check box. 3. Select the sensor to be connected to the channel from the [Sensor] combo box. When no sensor is selected, select [-]. Items are displayed only for SLC + "GIF" "RIF+GIF"

in Gyro I/F. 1. Click on any of SLC1(M) to SLC8(M) and SLC1(S) to SLC8(S) tabs. 2. Enable the serial port of the channel by selecting the check box. 3. Select the sensor (Gyro and Log) to be connected to the channel from the [Sensor]

combo box. When no sensor is selected, select

[-]. Chapter 6 Connection to External Navigation Equipment 6-20 To enable: Select. To disable: Clear. that can be The sensors selected vary according to the subsystem installation status. Refer to "Table 4-3 Sensors that can be selected on SLC/ALC". To enable: Select. To disable: Clear. Sensors that can be selected:

Gyro: Heading Sensor 1/2 Log: Log 1/2

* The sensors that can be selected vary according to the subsystem installation status. Table 4-3 Sensors that can be selected on the SLC/ALC Sensor name Devices required as the subsystem (set to "installed" in the

"Subsystem Installation" dialog) Heading Sensor 1 Heading Sensor 2 Log 1 Log 2 GPS 1 GPS 2 GPS 3 GPS 4 Ships Clock Echo Sounder(Depth) AIS NAVTEX Anemometer(Wind) Heading Sensor 1 Heading Sensor 2 Log 1 Log 2 GPS 1 GPS 2 GPS 3 GPS 4 Ships Clock Echo Sounder(Depth) AIS NAVTEX Anemometer(Wind) Water Temperature Meter Water Temperature Meter Current Meter Climate Meter TRI *1 Autopilot Rudder Engine/Propeller Engine Telegraph Thruster Azimuth Thruster Generator Fin Stabilizer YEOMAN Digitizer RADAR1(TT RX) RADAR2(TT RX) Other than sensors Alert(to CAM) *2 Alert(from Subsystem) *2 Alert(to BNWAS) *2 IAS(NMEA) *2 DSC *2

*3 Current Meter Climate Meter TRI Autopilot Rudder Engine/Propeller Engine Telegraph Thruster Azimuth Thruster Generator Fin Stabilizer YEOMAN Digitizer RADAR1 RADAR2

(*1) TRI (Turn Rate Indicator): Indicates a device that transmits ROT.

(*2) Used for alert handling. For details, refer to "4.8 CAM Configuration and Setting". 6-21 Chapter 6 Connection to External Navigation Equipment

(*3) In the case of the port used for a data output, it is used. Refer to "4.10 Setting Data Output".

[port settings for data output]

[CHx] check box

[Sensor] combo box :

: Select to enable. 6.6.3 To change the communication settings of the Serial Port 1. Click the [Detail] button of the enabled serial port and display the [Detail]

dialog. For SLC Gyro I/F, sensor names are displayed in two lines. (*1) Displayed only for SLC CH8-CH10 Alert handling setting (*2)

(*1) Sensor name display pattern

[For sensor other than SLC Gyro I/F]

[For SLC Gyro I/F]

(*2) Display pattern of alert handling setting

[Various sensors (*1)]

(*1) Other than "Alert(from Subsystem / to CAM / to BNWAS)", and "DSC"

[When the sensor is "Alert(from Subsystem)"]

[When the sensor is "Alert(to CAM)"]

[When the sensor is " Alert(to BNWAS)"]

Chapter 6 Connection to External Navigation Equipment 6-22

[When the sensor is "DSC", or "- (not selected)"]

No display 2. Perform the settings shown in the following table and then click on the

[Set] button. Setting Item Description of Setting Baud Rate

[Baud Rate] addition ratio combo box Data Length Parity Stop Bits (Stop Bit Length) Buffer Size Time Out Checksum Subsystem Primary/Secondary Sentence Select the baud rate of the corresponding serial port from the combo box. In the [Detail] dialog of CH8 to CH10, the [Baud Rate] addition ratio combo box is displayed on the right side of the [Baud Rate] combo box. Addition ratio The combo box is displayed in the [Detail]

dialog of AIS, GYRO *1, and CH8 to CH10. The addition ratio (%) for adjusting the baud rate can be changed in the combo box. The baud rate that is used for communication is the value obtained by adding the addition ratio set here to the value that is set in the

[Baud Rate] combo box. Example) 4800 (1 + 1.5/100) = 4872

<Adjustment method>

At first, use 1.5% as the addition ratio. If data cannot be received, decrease it in decrements of 0.5%.

(*1) Only when selection of a sensor is other than "Heading Sensor 1/2(Gyro I/F)". Select the data length of the corresponding serial port from the combo box. Select the parity of the corresponding serial port from the combo box. Select the stop bit length of the corresponding serial port from the combo box. Enter the buffer size of the corresponding serial port in the box. Enter the time-out duration of the corresponding serial port on the box. Select the check box and enable the checksum of the sentence of the corresponding serial port. This item is displayed only when "Alert(from Subsystem)" or "Alert(to CAM)" is selected as the sensor. Select a device for alert handling. For details, refer to "4.8 CAM Configuration and Setting."

Displayed only when "IAS(MODBUS)" is selected for the sensor. Set Primary/Secondary for the input from IAS. Set the type of alert sentence. If "-" is selected, no alert checks are made. Setting Value rates Selectable baud vary depending on the serial port (refer to "Table 4-4 baud rates"). 0.0% to 3.0% (Can be set in the unit of 0.5%) Selectable 5/6/7/8 None/Odd/Even 1/2 0 to 10240 bytes 0 to 999sec To enable: Select. To disable: Clear. Subsystem installed (task station and sensor)/BNWAS Primary / Secondary

-/ALR/ALF

* The selection of "-"

indicates that the type of alert sentence is unselected; it can be selected only for general sensors (e.g., GPS and Log). 6-23 Chapter 6 Connection to External Navigation Equipment Access Source Displayed only when "Alert(to BNWAS)" is selected for the sensor. Select the equipment that communicates with BNWAS. When the system configuration does not contain CAM, select ECDIS. In other cases, select AMS. AMS/ECDIS Table Selectable baud rates Serial port Baud rate Serial port on CCU Gyro (when Heading Sensor (NMEA) is selected) Gyro (when Heading Sensor (Gyro I/F) is selected) Log (when Log (NMEA) is selected) GPS AIS Selector Serial port on SLC/ALC CH1-8 CH9/10 Gyro I/F 4800/38400 Fixed to 38400 Fixed to 4800 Fixed to 4800 Fixed to 38400 Fixed to 4800 2400/4800/9600 2400/4800/9600/19200/38400 Fixed to 38400 Note

- In the case of the serial port which assigned "IAS (NMEA)", carry out network transmission setting of Primary(connects to SLCx(Main)), and Secondary (connects toSLCx(Sub)) to the same setup. For making SLC(Main) and SLC(Sub) the same setup A setup of SLC(Sub) can be changed into the contents set up by SLC(Main). When there is connection which is different by SLC(Main) and SLC(Sub), after performing this operation, it changes individually. 1. The tab of SLCx(S) which sets up is chosen. 2. Click the "Same as SLCx (Main)" button. The preset value of SLCx(Sub) is changed into the same contents as SLCx(Main). Chapter 6 Connection to External Navigation Equipment 6-24 6.6.4 Checking the communication status The communication status can be displayed in order to see if serial port communication is being performed normally.

[Line Monitor] and [Packet Monitor] are available to display the communication status. Line Monitor:

Packet Monitor:

Displays the serial port communication data. Displays the LAN communication status between the SLC/ALC and this equipment.

(Only for SLC/ALC serial ports) Memo

- For the sentence format, refer to "Chapter 6 Sentence Format."

- When communication statuses are displayed on multiple equipment units through one port, and any of the equipment unit stopped monitoring, monitoring has stopped by all the equipment units. In this case, restart monitoring. Line Monitor 1. Click on the [Monitor] button of the enabled serial port to display the "Monitor"

dialog box. Selected port information Selection of serial communication monitor or packet monitor

(Packet Monitor can be selected only for SLC/ALC ports.) Serial communication setting information Start/stop of monitoring, clearing of the monitoring data, and specification that saves data in a log file at the start of monitoring Selection of display format Monitoring data 2. Click on the [Start] button to start monitoring. Monitoring will be started. If communication is being performed, the communication data is displayed in the [Input Data] and [Output Data] areas. To save the monitoring data in a log file, select the [Log] check box, and then click on the [Start]

button. A dialog box is displayed for selecting the file to be saved. 6-25 Chapter 6 Connection to External Navigation Equipment Enter the file name and click on the [OK] button. Monitoring will be started. Memo Data saved in a log file is limited to 5MB. When the data size has reached the limit, the save processing is stopped automatically. To change the data display format, select [ASCII] or [Binary], and then click on the [Start]

button. The data display format currently displayed can also be changed after monitoring is complete.

<Monitoring data display example>

3. Click on the [Stop] button to stop monitoring. Chapter 6 Connection to External Navigation Equipment 6-26 Packet Monitor 1. Click on the [Monitor] button of the enabled serial port to display the "Monitor"

dialog box, and click on the [Packet Monitor] tab. Selected port information Selection of serial communication monitor or packet monitor

(Packet Monitor can be selected only for SLC/ALC ports.) Selection Main/Sub network Start/stop of monitoring, clearing of the monitoring data, and specification that saves data in a log file at the start of monitoring List of packets received (in time series) Packet data The data of the packet selected in the packet list is displayed. 2. Click on the [Start] button to start monitoring. Monitoring will be started. If communication is being performed, the packets received are displayed in the packet list. To save the monitoring data in a log file, select the [Log] check box, and then click on the [Start]

button. A dialog box is displayed for selecting the file to be saved. Enter the file name and click on the [OK] button. Monitoring will be started. 6-27 Chapter 6 Connection to External Navigation Equipment Memo Data saved in a log file is limited to 5MB. When the data size has reached the limit, the save processing is stopped automatically.

<Monitoring data display example>

3. Click on the [Stop] button to stop monitoring. Chapter 6 Connection to External Navigation Equipment 6-28 6.7 Setting Contacts

(Contact Input/Output) In the "Contact" dialog, functions can be assigned to the input/output of the contacts that belong to CCU and SLC/ALC. CCU contact output CCU SLC/ALC contact output SLC/ALC SLC/ALC contact input 6.7.1 Displaying the "Contact" dialog Display the dialog of the Installation submenu. 1. 2. Select [System Configuration] in the 1st Classification pane and [Contact] in the 2nd Classification pane. The "Contact" dialog is displayed in the Edit/Result pane. 6-29 Chapter 6 Connection to External Navigation Equipment When SLC1(Main) to SLC8(Main), SLC1(Sub) to SLC8(Sub), and ALC1 to ALC8 are selected as "installed" in the "Subsystem Installation" dialog, the functions that are currently assigned to the contact output of Contact 1 to Contact 8 are displayed on the [Contact Output] tab. The functions that are currently assigned to the contact input of Contact 1 to Contact 4 are displayed on the [Contact Input] tab. 6.7.2 Enabling the watch timer reset contact output of the Task station Select the check box of [WMRST] (watch timer reset). Select the function to be assigned:

1. 2. WMRST (BNWAS timer reset) Power Fail (Alarm issued if the main AC power supply fails) Chapter 6 Connection to External Navigation Equipment 6-30 6.7.3 Enabling the contact output for PWR FAIL of a task station Select the [PWR FAIL] (power fail) check box. Select the function to be assigned:

1. 2. Power Fail (Alarm issued if the main AC power supply fails) INS System Fail (Alarm to notify that alert notifications cannot be transmitted to BNWAS via the SLC/ALC)

(For details of INS System Fail, refer to "4.8 CAM Configuration and Setting." in the Installation Manual) 6.7.4 Selecting the function to be assigned to each contact input of the SLC/ALC 1. Select any of the SLC1(M) to SLC8(M), SLC1(S) to SLC8(S), and ALC1 to ALC8 tabs. 2. Select the [Contact Input] tab. 3. Select the function to be assigned to each contact input from the [Contact 1] to

[Contact 4] combo boxes:

ACK In (ACK input) BZ Off In (BNWAS) (Buzzer Off input from BNWAS)*1 BZ Off In (A/P) (Buzzer Off input from Autopilot) *1 No.1 Gyro SEL (Gyro 1 selection contact input) No.2 Gyro SEL (Gyro 2 selection contact input) PWR ACK IN (PWR ACK input) Event (event input)

(*1) Refer to "4.8 CAM Configuration and Setting" in the Installation Manual. Active/Inactive of each function is indicated by the diagnosis lamp. Lit in green: Active Off: Inactive 4. The task station used by the [Task Station] combo box is chosen to the point of contact which assigned the function. In the case of the item referred to at all the task stations, "All" is chosen. 6.7.5 Selecting a function to be assigned to each contact output of SLC/ALC 1. Select any of the SLC1(M) to SLC8(M), SLC1(S) to SLC8(S), and ALC1 to ALC8 tabs. 2. Click on the [Detail] (detail setting) button of any of Contact 1 to Contact 8. The "Contact-Detail" dialog is displayed. 6-31 Chapter 6 Connection to External Navigation Equipment 3. Click on the function to be assigned from the combo box. For the functions that can be assigned, refer to "Table. Contact outputs that can be selected". Selecting [ACK OUT]

Check boxes are displayed in the "Contact-Detail" dialog box. Select the alert to be enabled by clicking on the check box of it. When the selected alert is acknowledged, the contact is activated. Selecting [Multi Alert Output]

Check boxes are displayed in the "Contact-Detail" dialog box. Select the alerts to be enabled by clicking on the check box of them. When any of the checked alert occurs, the contact is activated. 4. Click on the [OK] button. The selected function is assigned to each contact output. To change the function to be Chapter 6 Connection to External Navigation Equipment 6-32 assigned or cancel the assignment, click on the [Cancel] button. 5. The task station used by the [Task Station] combo box is chosen to the point of contact which assigned the function. If function is Timer Reset, All can choose. If function is "BZ Off Out(A/P)", it is fixed to "AMS & TCS". Contact output that can be selected ACK Out BZ Off Out (BNWAS)*2 BZ Off Out (A/P)*2 BZ Off Out (Gyro)*2 Alarm Transfer Timer Reset Position Sensor Failure Position Monitor Heading Sensor Failure Heading Monitor *1 Speed Sensor Failure Autopilot Failure Hardware Malfunction Software Malfunction Approach to Critical Point Actual Course Change Course difference Cross of Track End of track Back-up Navigator Call Track Control Stopped Low Speed Crossing Safety Contour Crossing Area Boundary Crossing a Danger CPA/TCPA AZ Lost Target Target Capacity Multi Alert Output Table. Contact output that can be selected Description ACK output (contact output to be output when the enabled alert are approved) Buzzer OFF output for BNWAS Buzzer OFF output for Autopilot Buzzer OFF output for Gyro Compass BNWAS ALARM output (contact output that is output from CAM to BNWAS for transfer of alarm via BNWAS) Timer reset notification Position sensor failure alarm (automatic sailing) Position monitor warning (position reliability deterioration) Heading sensor failure alarm (automatic sailing) Heading alarm Speed sensor failure alarm (automatic sailing) Autopilot and communication failure warning (automatic sailing) Hardware failure alert System malfunction alarm Approach to critical point warning Reply notification alert Course difference (ships heading departing from the course) warning Cross track alarm Final destination arrival alarm Backup navigator call alarm TCS stopped Low speed warning Crossing safety contour alarm Crossing special area boundary warning Warning for approaching to danger CPA/TCPA alarm Automatic acquisition/automatic activation warning Target lost warning Warning on targets reaching maximum, Warning of reaching 95% of capacity Select when outputting multiple alerts from one contact. When this 6-33 Chapter 6 Connection to External Navigation Equipment output is selected, the Multi-Alert Output group is displayed.

(*1) Scheduled to be installed under INS support

(*2) Refer to "4.8 CAM Configuration and Setting" in the Installation Manual. 6.7.6 Testing each contact output 1. Select one of the tabs from SLC1(M) to SLC8(M), SLC1(S) to SLC8(S), and ALC1 to ALC8. 2. Select the [Contact Output] tab. 3. Turn on the light by clicking on the [Test] button of one of Contact1 to Contact8. 4. To stop test output, turn off the light by clicking on the [Test] button again. 6.7.7 Checking the status of each contact input 1. Select one of the tabs from SLC1(M) to SLC8(M), SLC1(S) to SLC8(S), and ALC1 to ALC8. 2. Select the [Contact Input] tab. 3. Confirm the display of the Diagnosis lamp.

: On (Active) status

: Off (Normal) status Green lamp display White lamp display Chapter 6 Connection to External Navigation Equipment 6-34

 

 

7. Troubleshooting Chapter 7. Troubleshooting 7.1 Maintenance Functions Executed from the Menu This section explains maintenance functions that are executed from the menu. 7.1.1 Starting Maintenance Functions 1. Click on the [Menu] button on the left toolbar. The menu is displayed. 2. Click on the [Maintenance] button on the menu. The submenu is displayed. 3. Click on a button on the submenu. The dialog box of the selected maintenance function is displayed. 7.1.2 Confirming System Information System information can be confirmed. 1. Click on the [Menu] button on the left toolbar. The menu is displayed. 2. Click on the [Maintenance] - [System Information] button on the menu. The [System Information] dialog box appears. The contents of the dialog will be switched by clicking on the selection tabs provided in the dialog box. 7-1 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting Selection tabs 7.1.3 Confirming Software Information When you want to use a USB flash memory to read or write a file, make sure in advance that the USB flash memory is not affected by a computer virus. If the display unit is infected with a virus, other equipment will also be infected, with the result that a trouble will occur. Before removing the USB flash memory, check for the access lamp of the USB flash memory and make sure that it is not being accessed. If you remove the USB flash memory when it is accessed, data may be destroyed and a trouble may occur. Software information can be displayed. 1. Click on the [Menu] button on the left toolbar. The menu is displayed. 2. Click on the [Maintenance] - [System Information] button on the menu. The [System Information] dialog box appears. Click on the [Software] tab. Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 7-2 3. The software information is displayed.

(1)

(2)

(3)

(1) [X] button Click on this button to close the "System Information" dialog box.

(2) Software information Item Jxx-xxxx Application Maintenance No. TXRX No.1 GPS No.2 GPS TCS Presentation Library Displayed information Type and model name of the system Version of the application software 8-digit maintenance number Version of the software used for the radar transmitter-receiver unit

* This information is displayed when the system is equipped with the RADAR function. Software version of GPS 1

* Displayed when a medium-sized radar equipped with 1 or 2 units of GPS is used. Software version of GPS

* Displayed when a medium-sized radar equipped with 2 units of GPS is used. Version of the software used for TCS

* This information is displayed when the system is equipped with the TCS function. Edition of S52 Presentation Library Displayed for ECDIS or RADAR (ENC chart display license available) only

(3) [Save to USB Device] (Saving to USB flash memory) button Click on this button to save the displayed information in a USB flash memory in the text format. 7-3 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 7.1.4 Checking the Enable/Disable Statuses of the Functions that Have Been Installed When you want to use a USB flash memory to read or write a file, make sure in advance that the USB flash memory is not affected by a computer virus. If the display unit is infected with a virus, other equipment will also be infected, with the result that a trouble will occur. Before removing the USB flash memory, check for the access lamp of the USB flash memory and make sure that it is not being accessed. If you remove the USB flash memory when it is accessed, data may be destroyed and a trouble may occur. 1. Click on the [Menu] button on the left toolbar. The menu is displayed. 2. Click on the [Maintenance] - [System Information] button on the menu. The [System Information] dialog box appears. 3. Click on the [Functionality] tab. The functionality information is displayed. The display contents vary depending on the number of operation modes and whether the modes include the primary task (shown by this equipment). Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 7-4

[The system has any one of RADAR, ECDIS, and Conning modes]

[The system has multiple operation modes and RADAR is the primary task]

[1]

[2]

[3]

[4]

[1]

[2]

[3]

[4]

7-5 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting

[Section that is displayed when the above screen is scrolled down (example)]

[3]

[3]

[3]

Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 7-6

[1] [X] button Click on this button to close the "System Information" dialog box.

[2] Format The system format and model name of this equipment are displayed.

(Example: JMR-xxxx-x CHART RADAR (for Chart RADAR) The [Primary] badge is displayed in front of the format for the primary task.

[3] Functionality The functions that are installed are displayed in [Device License] and [Option License]. One of the following is displayed in [Status].

[Status]

Enable Disable Value (such as 500) Stand-alone Meaning Indicates that the function can be used. Indicates that the function cannot be used. Indicates the setting value of the option license of the function. This indicates that it is not possible to use the function of synchronization with other equipment, and independent operation has to be made.

[4] [Save to USB Device] (Saving to USB flash memory) button Click on this button to save the displayed information in a USB flash memory in the text format. 7-7 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 7.1.5 Confirming the H/W Key When you want to use a USB flash memory to read or write a file, make sure in advance that the USB flash memory is not affected by a computer virus. If the display unit is infected with a virus, other equipment will also be infected, with the result that a trouble will occur. Before removing the USB flash memory, check for the access lamp of the USB flash memory and make sure that it is not being accessed. If you remove the USB flash memory when it is accessed, data may be destroyed and a trouble may occur. Hardware information can be displayed. This information is displayed only for the equipment with the ECDIS function. 1. Click on the [Menu] button on the left toolbar. The menu is displayed. 2. Click on the [Maintenance] - [System Information] button on the menu. The [System Information] dialog box appears. 3. Click on the [H/W Key] tab. The hardware key information is displayed. Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 7-8

[1]

[2]

[3]

[4]

[1] [X] button Click on this button to close the "System Information" dialog box.

[2] [ARCS Information]

The ARCS PIN number and User Permit are displayed.

[3] [S-63 Information]

The S-63 User Permit is displayed.

[4] [Save to USB Device] (Saving to USB flash memory) button Click on this button to save the displayed information in a USB flash memory in the text format. 7-9 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 7.1.6 Confirming the Compliant Standards for the Equipment When you want to use a USB flash memory to read or write a file, make sure in advance that the USB flash memory is not affected by a computer virus. If the display unit is infected with a virus, other equipment will also be infected, with the result that a trouble will occur. Before removing the USB flash memory, check for the access lamp of the USB flash memory and make sure that it is not being accessed. If you remove the USB flash memory when it is accessed, data may be destroyed and a trouble may occur. If there is a RADAR or ECDIS equipment license, the standards related to the equipment license are displayed. 1. Click on the [Menu] button on the left toolbar. The menu is displayed. 2. Click on the [Maintenance] - [System Information] button on the menu. The [System Information] dialog box appears. 3. Click on the [Specification] tab. The equipment license standard specification information is displayed.

[In the case of RADAR]

Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 7-10

[1]

[2]

[3]

Memo The IHO information is displayed only when there is ENC chart display as an optional license.

[In the case of ECDIS]

[1]

[2]

[3]

[1] [X] button Click on this button to close the "System Information" dialog box.

[2] Equipment license information The equipment license standard specification information is displayed.

[3] [Save to USB Device] (Saving to USB flash memory) button Click on this button to save the displayed information in a USB flash memory in the text format. 7-11 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 7.1.7 Confirming the Operating Time Confirm the operating time of this equipment. 1. Click on the [Menu] button on the left toolbar. The menu is displayed. 2. Click on the [Maintenance] - [Operating Time] button on the menu. The [Operating Time] dialog box appears.

[1]

[2]

[3]

[1] [X] button Click on this button to close the "Operating Time" dialog box.

[2] [Operating Time Of Work Station]

The operating time of this equipment is displayed.

[Total]:

[SSD1]:

[SSD2]:

[LCD]:

[LCD FAN]: Total operating time of LCD FAN. The estimated replacement time is indicated in ( ).

[CCU FAN]: Total operating time of CCU FAN. The estimated replacement time is indicated in ( ).

[PSU FAN]: Total operating time of PSU FAN. The estimated replacement time is indicated in ( ).

[UPS]:

Total operating time of this equipment Total operating time of SSD1. The estimated replacement time is indicated in ( ). Total operating time of SSD2. The estimated replacement time is indicated in ( ). Total operating time of LCD. The estimated replacement time is indicated in ( ). Total operating time of UPS. The estimated replacement time is indicated in ( ). Memo

[UPS] is displayed only when it is installed as an option. Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 7-12

[3] [Operating Time of Scanner]

The total operating time of the scanner unit is displayed.

[Total]:

[Transmit]: Total operating time of the transmitter. The estimated replacement time is indicated in Total operating time of the scanner unit

( ). Total operating time of the motor. The estimated replacement time is indicated in ( ). Total operating time of the scanner unit fan.

[Motor]:

[FAN]:

Memo

[Operation Time of Scanner] is displayed in the RADAR mode only. Memo To clear each operating time, see 4.4.4.1 Clearing operation time of Workstation. 7.1.8 Setting and Confirming the Sensor Source Set and confirm the sensor source. 1. Click on the [Menu] button on the left toolbar. The menu is displayed. 2. Click on the [Maintenance] - [Sensor Selection/Status] button on the menu. The [Sensor Selection/Status] dialog box appears.

[3]

[1]

[1] [X] button

[2]

Click on this button to close the "Sensor Selection/Status" dialog box.

[2] [Sensor Selection]

Enables selection of a sensor source. 7-13 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting Setting item Position POSN (Sub) Heading STW (Speed Through Water) COG/SOG

(Course Over the Ground/Speed Over the Ground) Time (Time correction) Depth (Water depth) Setting contents Select a Primary Position sensor source from the combo box. Select a Secondary Position sensor source from the combo box.

*Displayed for ECDIS only. Select a heading sensor source from the combo box.

*The source that can be selected varies depending on the installation. When the sensor source is set to [Manual], the heading value can also be input in the input box. Heading value input range: 0.0-359.9 Select a Speed Through Water sensor source from the combo box.

*The source that can be selected varies depending on the installation. When the sensor source is set to [Manual], a Speed Through Water can also be input in the input box. Speed Through Water value input range:

0.0-99.9 kn Select Course Over the Ground/Speed Over the Ground sensor source from the combo box.

*The source that can be selected varies depending on the installation. When GPS is selected for Position, the same GPS is selected automatically. Select a sensor source to be used for time correction of this equipment from the combo box.

*The source that can be selected varies depending on the installation. Select a water depth sensor source from the combo box.

*The source that can be selected varies depending on the installation. Setting value GPS x DR

("x" indicates the equipment number) None, GPS x

("x" indicates the equipment number) MAN, Gyro x

("x" indicates the equipment number) MAN, Logx

("x" indicates the equipment number) Log x, GPS GPS, Ship Clock FWD Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 7-14

[3] Disclosure button When clicked, the hidden left pane appears. When the left pane is displayed 7-15 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 7.2 Performance Check Make performance check on the radar equipment regularly and if any problem is found, investigate it immediately. Pay special attention to the high voltage sections in inspection and take full care that no trouble is caused by any error or carelessness in measurement. Take note of the results of inspection, which can be used effectively in the next inspection work. Carry out performance check on the items listed in the check list below. Check List Equipment Item to be checked Criteria Transmitter-

receiver unit Display unit Synchronization LED of Receiver Video and echoes on the screen Sensitivity Brightness Various markers Various numerical indications Lighting Cleaning the DVD drive Cleaning the Trackball Scanner Unit Magnetron current Performance Monitor The LED is lit during operation Can be correctly controlled 7.2.10 Cleaning the lens of the DVD drive 4.3.4.2 Cleaning the Trackball 7.2.7 Checking the magnetron current level of the scanner unit

[Magnetron Current]

7.2.9 Checking the performance monitor status Remarks 48 NM range Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 7-16 7.2.1 Starting the Diagnosis Function 1. Click on the [Menu] button on the left toolbar. The menu is displayed. 2. Click on the [Maintenance] - [Diagnosis] button on the menu. The "Diagnosis" dialog box appears. Disclosure button Diagnosis functions The Diagnosis functions are displayed in the left pane. Click on the disclosure button to hide the left pain. 3. Click on a diagnosis function to be executed. The execution dialog of the selected diagnosis function is displayed. 7-17 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 7.2.2 Confirming the screen status [Monitor Test]

Confirm the screen status. 1. Click on the [Menu] button on the left toolbar. The menu is displayed. 2. Click on the [Maintenance] - [Diagnosis] - [Monitor Test] button on the menu. When the color or pattern of the dialog is clicked on, the color or pattern is displayed on the screen. Check the screen status with the display status. To reset the display, click the button again. Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 7-18 Pattern list Pattern button name All Red Display The entire screen is displayed in red. All Green The entire screen is displayed in green. All Blue The entire screen is displayed in blue. All White The entire screen is displayed in white. Pattern4 Displays the pattern for checking the communication quality for VDR. 7-19 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting Pattern button name Pattern5 Display Displays the pattern for checking the communication quality for VDR. Displays the pattern for checking the communication quality for VDR. Displays the grey scale pattern for checking the monitor brightness adjustment. Grey scale patterns can be identified with brightness in day/night mode. By adjusting the monitor brightness to facilitate identification of grey scale patterns, the optimum brightness can be set. The brightness in night mode can also be adjusted in the same way. Use the Day/Night button on the right Toolbar for switching between the day and night mode. For the details of the Day/Night button, refer to 2.2.1 Right toolbar. Pattern6 Gray Scale Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 7-20 Pattern button name S-57 Color Pattern Display A color test pattern of the S57 chart is displayed. By identifying the color pattern, the S57 chart display status can be verified. A color pattern can be displayed in Day/Night mode. Use the Day/Night button on the right Toolbar for switching between the day and night mode. For the details of the Day/Night button, refer to "2.2.1 Right toolbar". The "ARCS Color Pattern" dialog is displayed. ARCS Color Pattern A color test pattern of the ARCS chart is displayed. By identifying the color pattern, the ARCS chart display status can be verified. A color pattern can be displayed in Day/Night mode. Use the Day/Night button on the right Toolbar for switching between the day and night mode. For the details of the Day/Night button, refer to "2.2.1 Right toolbar". 7-21 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 7.2.3 Confirming the Performance of the Operation Unit [Key Test]

Confirm the operation of the keys of the operation unit. 1. Click on the [Menu] button on the left toolbar. The menu is displayed. 2. Click on the [Maintenance] - [Diagnosis] - [Key Test] button on the menu. 3. Click on the [Key Test Start] button. Key Test window is displayed. Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 7-22 4. Operate the keys, buttons and dials in the operation unit. If the performance of the operation unit is normal, the colors of the keys, buttons and dials are changed. 5. Click on the [Key Test Stop] button after the performance check. Returns to the "Diagnosis" dialog box. 7-23 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 7.2.4 Confirming the Alert Sound [Sound Test]

Confirm the alert sound. 1. Click on the [Menu] button on the left toolbar. The menu is displayed. 2. Click on the [Maintenance] - [Diagnosis] - [Sound Test] button on the menu. 3. Click on the [Sound Test Start] button. A sound test starts. All the available beep sound volumes can be tested from 0. Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 7-24 7.2.5 Testing the Brightness of LED [Light Test]

Test the brightness of LED. 1. Click on the [Menu] button on the left toolbar. The menu is displayed. 2. Click on the [Maintenance] - [Diagnosis] - [Light Test] button on the menu. 3. Click on the [Light Test Start] button. An LED brightness test starts. All the available brightness levels can be tested by increasing the level from 0. 7-25 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 7.2.6 Testing a Motor [Vibration Test]

Test the vibrations of the motor. 1. Click on the [Menu] button on the left toolbar. The menu is displayed. 2. Click on the [Maintenance] - [Diagnosis] - [Vibration Test] button on the menu. 3. Click on the [Vibration Test] button. The motor continuously vibrates while the button is pressed. When the button is released, vibration stops. Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 7-26 7.2.7 Checking the Magnetron Current Level of the RADAR [Magnetron Curr.]

This function is used to check the magnetron current level of the radar. This function is displayed only when the magnetron radar scanner unit is connected. 1. Click on the [Menu] button on the left toolbar. The menu is displayed. 2. Click on the [Maintenance] - [Diagnosis] - [Magnetron Current] button on the menu. The magnetron current level of the scanner unit is displayed. 7-27 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 7.2.8 Checking the Memory Memory Check Check the memory. 1. Click on the [Menu] button on the left toolbar. The menu is displayed. 2. Click on the [Maintenance] - [Diagnosis] - [Memory Check] button on the menu. 3. Click on the [Memory Check Start] button. Memory checking starts and the checking result is displayed on the [Result] list. Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 7-28 7.2.9 Checking the Performance Monitor Status This function is used to check the condition of the radar performance monitor. Items displayed under this function vary depending on the type of the scanner unit. When magnetron radar is used, the following dialog box appears. For the details of this dialog box, refer to "MON Check". When a solid-state radar is used, the following dialog box will be displayed. For the details of this dialog box, refer to "MON Check (SSR)". For more information about the adjustment operation while checking the performance monitor, refer to "Adjusting the performance monitor."

7-29 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting MON Check 1. Click on the [Menu] button on the left toolbar. The menu is displayed. 2. Click on the [Maintenance] - [Diagnosis] - [MON Check] button on the menu.

[1]

[2]

[3]

[1] [X] button Click on this button to close the "Diagnosis" dialog box.

[2] [Transmitter System]

The amount of attenuation at the radar transmitter is displayed in a bar graph as well as in a numerical value [dB].

[3] [Receiver System]

MON Pattern Range The distance [NM] is displayed when the user adjusts VRM to the farthest edge of the performance monitor pattern. Attenuation Value The amount of attenuation at the radar receiving unit is displayed in a numerical value [dB]. Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 7-30 Adjustment of the performance monitor Check the condition of the performance monitor and adjust the performance monitor as necessary. In the case of equiped with Interswitch Unit function (Option) To check the performance with the performance monitor, set the Interswitch Unit connection to straight (i.e. No. 1 scanner unit is connected to No. 1 display unit). Adjust VRM to the farthest edge of the performance monitor pattern. 1. Click on the [Menu] button on the left toolbar. Performance monitor pattern

(If the performance of the receiver degrades, the pattern range becomes short ) The menu is displayed. 2. Click on the [Maintenance] - [Diagnosis] - [MON Check] or [MON Check (SSR)] button 3. on the menu. Turn the [VRM] dial on the KOPU to the farthest edge of the performance monitor pattern. 4. Check the amount of attenuation in the dialog box. Benchmarks for the amount of attenuation are as follows:

Attention Value of Transmitter:

At normal: -6.9 dB to +2.0 dB At degrading performances: -15.0 dB to -7.0 dB Attention Value of Receiving Unit:

At normal: -2.9 dB to +3.5 dB At degrading performances: -15.0 dB to -3.0 dB 7-31 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting When confirming the attenuation value of the transmitter, after opening the dialog box, wait for one minute, and then read its value. If the attenuation value of the transmitter is -7dB or lesser, or that of the receiver is -3dB or lesser, it indicates that performances of the transmitter/receiving unit are degrading. In this case, inspection by the specialized service personnel is required. Contact our dealer, the nearest service representative or JRC sales. MON Check (SSR) 1. Click on the [Menu] button on the left toolbar. The menu is displayed. 2. Click on the [Maintenance] - [Diagnosis] - [MON Check (SSR)] button on the menu.

[1]

[2]

[3]

[1] [X] button Click on this button to close the "Diagnosis" dialog box.

[2] [Transmitter System]

The amount of attenuation at the radar transmitter is displayed in a numerical value [dB].

[3] [Receiver System]

The amount of attenuation at the radar receiving unit is displayed in a numerical value [dB]. Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 7-32 7.2.10 Cleaning the Lens of the DVD Drive 1. 2. Click on the [Menu] button on the left toolbar. Insert the supplied lens cleaner CD into the DVD drive. The menu is displayed. 3. Click [Maintenance] - [Diagnosis] - [DVD Cleaning] from the menu. Cleaning automatically starts. The following dialog box appears during cleaning:

4. When the cleaning completion dialog box appears, click on the [OK] button. The supplied lens cleaner CD is ejected. 7-33 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting Note It is recommended that the DVD drive is cleaned at least once a month. If the lens becomes dirty, it may not be possible to read data from a CD/DVD, or else it may not be possible to install a chart or an update. When reading the lens cleaner CD fails, an error dialog box appears. 7.2.11 Cleaning the Trackball Refer to "4.3.4.2 Cleaning the trackball" of Chapter 4. Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 7-34 7.3 Troubleshooting When this equipment does not operate correctly, check the following points before asking for repairs. Consult with your nearest subsidiary company, branch office, or sales office if the problem does not get solved even after checking and correcting these points, or if there are any abnormally locations other than the following items. Cause Action Symptom The power is not supplied. Alternatively, the equipment does not start even if the Power button of the operation unit is pressed. Although the power is supplied to the monitor, the screen is not displayed. The brightness of the monitor cannot be adjusted. The trackball or the option keyboard cannot be operated. The AC or DC power supply is not connected. The circuit breaker at the front of the PSU (NBD-913) is not set to ON. The AC or DC power supply is not input within the specified voltage range. The internal wiring is faulty. The PSU (NBD-913) is faulty. The CCU (NDC-1590) is faulty. The CCU (NCE-5605) is faulty. The MNU (NWZ-208/NWZ-207) is faulty. The brightness of the monitor is set to the minimum level. The internal wiring is faulty. The MNU (NWZ-208/NWZ-207) is faulty. The MNU (NWZ-208/NWZ-207) is faulty. Connect the AC or DC power supply. Set the breaker to ON by pushing up the lever of the breaker. Connect the AC or DC power supply within the specified voltage range. Make a request to the distributor for repair. Make a request to the distributor for repair. Make a request to the distributor for repair. Make a request to the distributor for repair. Activate the display unit. Make a request to the distributor for repair. Make a request to the distributor for repair. Adjust the brightness of the monitor to the appropriate level. Make a request to the distributor for repair. Make a request to the distributor for repair. Make a request to the distributor for repair. The internal wiring is faulty. The display unit

(NCE-5605/NCE5625) is faulty. Make a request to the distributor for repair. Make a request to the distributor for repair. The power is not supplied to the monitor. The display unit is not activated. The internal wiring is faulty. 7-35 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting Symptom Cause Action The trackball does cannot be moved smoothly. Although the power is supplied and the screen is displayed, the display is frozen, disabling processing to advance up to display of the task menu. Some task menus cannot be selected. The cursor is not displayed correctly. Characters/symbols are not displayed correctly. Position information

(GPS) is not displayed. The trackball is dirty. Clean the trackball. The CCU (NDC-1590) is abnormal. Make a request to the distributor for repair. The device license has not been installed. Install the license of the device to be used. The CCU (NDC-1590) is faulty. The CCU (NDC-1590) is faulty. The communication is not set correctly. The power supply for the GPS unit is not turned on. The GPS unit does not perform positioning. The connection with the GPS unit is abnormal. The power supply for the SLC

(CMH-2370) is not turned on.

(Case where the GPS unit is connected to the SLC) The SLC (CMH-2370) is faulty.

(Case where the GPS unit is connected to the SLC) Make a request to the distributor for repair. Make a request to the distributor for repair. Set the communication correctly. Turn on the power supply for the GPS unit. Check the state of the GPS unit. Check the connection with the GPS unit. If a GPS unit is connected to the SLC, check that the LED of the corresponding port is lit during data reception. Turn on the power supply for the SLC. Make a request to the distributor for repair. The internal wiring is faulty. The CCU (NDC-1590) is faulty. Make a request to the distributor for repair. Make a request to the distributor for repair. Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 7-36 Symptom Cause Action AIS information is not displayed. The communication is not set correctly. The power supply for the AIS unit is not turned on. The AIS unit does not perform receiving. The connection with the AIS unit is abnormal. The power supply for the SLC

(CMH-2370) is not turned on.

(Case where the AIS unit is connected to the SLC) The SLC (CMH-2370) is faulty.

(Case where the AIS unit is connected to the SLC) Set the communication correctly. Turn on the power supply for the AIS unit. Check the state of the AIS unit. Check the connection with the AIS unit. If an AIS unit is connected to the SLC, check that the LED of the corresponding port is lit during data reception. Turn on the power supply for the SLC. Make a request to the distributor for repair. The internal wiring is faulty. The CCU (NDC-1590) is faulty. Make a request to the distributor for repair. Make a request to the distributor for repair. 7-37 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting Symptom Cause Action Set the communication correctly. Turn on the power supply for the gyro compass. Check the connection with the gyro compass. If the gyro compass is connected to the SLC or GIF, check that the corresponding LED is lit during signal reception. Turn on the power supply for the SLC. Make a request to the distributor for repair. Set the GIF correctly according to the gyro compass. Replace the fuse of the GIF. Make a request to the distributor for repair. Make a request to the distributor for repair. Make a request to the distributor for repair. The azimuth of the Gyro compass is not displayed. Alternatively, the azimuth rotation direction is not displayed correctly. The communication is not set correctly. The power supply for the gyro compass is not turned on. The connection with the gyro compass is abnormal. The power supply for the SLC

(CMH-2370) is not turned on.

(Case where the gyro compass is connected to the SLC The SLC (CMH-2370) is faulty.

(Case where the gyro compass is connected to the SLC The GIF (CMJ-554 is not set correctly

(Case where the gyro compass is connected to the GIF The fuse of the GIF (CMJ-554) has blown.

(Case where the gyro compass is connected to the GIF) The GIF (CMJ-554is faulty.

(Case where the gyro compass is connected to the GIF) The internal wiring is faulty. The CCU (NDC-1590) is faulty. Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 7-38 Symptom Cause Action Vessel speed is not displayed or the values are not displayed correctly. The communication is not set correctly. The power supply for the speed log is not turned on. The connection with the speed log is abnormal. The power supply for the SLC

(CMH-2370) is not turned on.

(Case where the speed log is connected to the SLC. The SLC (CMH-2370) is faulty.

(Case where the speed log is connected to the SLC. The GIF (CMJ-554) is not set correctly.

(Case where the speed log is connected to the GIF. The GIF (CMJ-554 is faulty.

(Case where the speed log is connected to the GIF. Set the communication correctly. Turn on the power supply for the speed log. Check the connection with the speed log. If the speed log is connected to the SLC or GIF, check that the corresponding LED is lit during signal reception. Turn on the power supply for the SLC. Make a request to the distributor for repair. Set the GIF correctly according to the speed log. Make a request to the distributor for repair. The internal wiring is faulty. The CCU (NDC-1590) is faulty. Make a request to the distributor for repair. Make a request to the distributor for repair. 7-39 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting Symptom Cause Action Rudder angles are not displayed. Alternatively, the values are not displayed correctly. The communication is not set correctly. The power supply for the rudder angle indicator is not turned on. The connection with the rudder angle indicator is abnormal. The power supply for the SLC

(CMH-2370) is not turned on.

(Case where the rudder angle indicator is connected to the SLC or the rudder angle indicator is connected to the AOC) The SLC (CMH-2370) is faulty.

(Case where the rudder angle indicator is connected to the SLC or the rudder angle indicator is connected to the AOC) The AOC (CMJ-560) is not set correctly.

(Case where the rudder angle indicator is connected to the AOC) Set the communication correctly. Turn on the power supply for the rudder angle indicator. Check the connection with the rudder angle indicator. If the rudder angle indicator is connected to the SLC, check that the LED of the corresponding port is lit during data reception. Turn on the power supply for the SLC. Make a request to the distributor for repair. Set the AOC correctly according to the rudder angle indicator. The AOC (CMJ-560) is faulty.

(Case where the rudder angle indicator is connected to the AOC) Make a request to the distributor for repair. The internal wiring is faulty. The CCU (NDC-1590) is faulty. Make a request to the distributor for repair. Make a request to the distributor for repair. Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 7-40 Symptom Cause Action The digital anemometer values (wind direction and speed) are not displayed. The communication is not set correctly. The power supply for the anemometer is not turned on. The connection with the anemometer is abnormal Water depth values are not displayed. The power supply for the SLC

(CMH-2370) is not turned on. The SLC (CMH-2370) is faulty. The internal wiring is faulty. The CCU (NDC-1590) is faulty. The communication is not set correctly. The power supply for the echo sounder is not turned on. The connection with the echo sounder is abnormal. The power supply for the SLC

(CMH-2370) is not turned on. The SLC (CMH-2370) is faulty. The internal wiring is faulty. The CCU (NDC-1590) is faulty. Set the communication correctly. Turn on the power supply for the anemometer. Check the connection with the anemometer. Check that the LED of the corresponding port in the SLC is lit during data reception. Turn on the power supply for the SLC. Make a request to the distributor for repair. Make a request to the distributor for repair. Make a request to the distributor for repair. Set the communication correctly. Turn on the power supply for the echo sounder. Check the connection with the echo sounder. Check that the LED of the corresponding port in the SLC is lit during data reception. Turn on the power supply for the SLC. Make a request to the distributor for repair. Make a request to the distributor for repair. Make a request to the distributor for repair. 7-41 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting Symptom Cause Action Sensor signals are not displayed. The communication is not set correctly. The power supply for the sensor equipment is not turned on. The connection with the sensor equipment is abnormal. The power supply for the SLC

(CMH-2370) is not turned on. The internal wiring is faulty. The display unit such as the SLC

(CMH-2370), AOC (CMJ-560), and CCU (NDC-1590) is faulty. Auto sailing is disabled. The communication is not set correctly. The Auto sailing function is not operated correctly. The power supply for the Auto sailing unit is not turned on. The connection with the Auto sailing unit is faulty. The power supply for the SLC

(CMH-2370) is not turned on. The SLC (CMH-2370) is faulty. The internal wiring is faulty. The CCU (NDC-1590) is faulty. Set the communication correctly. Turn on the power supply for the sensor equipment. Check the connection with the sensor equipment. Check that the LED of the corresponding port in the SLC is lit during data reception. Turn on the power supply for the SLC. Make a request to the distributor for repair. Make a request to the distributor for repair. Set the communication correctly. Operate Auto sailing correctly. Turn on the power supply for the Auto sailing unit. Check the connection with the Auto sailing unit. Check that the LED of the corresponding port in the SLC is lit during data reception. Turn on the power supply for the SLC. Make a request to the distributor for repair. Make a request to the distributor for repair. Make a request to the distributor for repair. Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 7-42 Symptom Cause Action Contact signals are not output. The scanner unit is not recognized The power supply for the SLC

(CMH-2370) is not turned on.

(Case where contact signal output is acquired from the SLC) The SLC (CMH-2370) is faulty.

(Case where contact signal output is acquired from the SLC) The internal wiring is faulty. The CCU (NDC-1590) is faulty. The connection with the scanner unit is abnormal. Power is not supplied from the PSU to the scanner unit. Only AC power is supplied to the PSU.

(NKE-2254 or NKE-2103 is connected as the scanner unit) The RIF (CQD-2273) is not set correctly. The RIF (CQD-2273) is faulty. The scanner unit is faulty. The internal wiring is faulty. The CCU (NDC-1590) is faulty. Turn on the power supply for the SLC. Make a request to the distributor for repair. Make a request to the distributor for repair. Make a request to the distributor for repair. Check the connection with the scanner unit. Check the power supply wiring between the PSU and the RIF. Check the power supply connection inside of the scanner unit.

[Note]

For checking wiring inside of the scanner unit, always request the work to the specialized service person. Before starting the work, turn off the power supply of the display unit. Otherwise, an unexpected accident may occur. To connect the NKE-2254 or NKE-2103 scanner unit, the DC power supply must be connected to the PSU. Set the RIF correctly. Make a request to the distributor for repair. Make a request to the distributor for repair. Make a request to the distributor for repair. Make a request to the distributor for repair. 7-43 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting Symptom The power is not supplied to the scanner unit. Cause Action The connection with the scanner unit is abnormal. The connection with the scanner unit is abnormal and overcurrent protection is functioning in the PSU. DC power is not supplied to the PSU.

(NKE-2254 or NKE-2103 is connected as the scanner unit) The DC24V output fuse is blown out.

(NKE-2254 or NKE-2103 is connected as the scanner unit.) The RIF (CQD-2273) is faulty. The internal wiring is faulty. Check the connection with the scanner unit. Check the connection with the scanner unit and remove the cause of short-circuit. To connect the NKE-2254 or NKE-2103 scanner unit, DC power supply must be connected to the PSU. After removing the cause of fuse blow-out, replace the fuse. The fuse is the 15A blade fuse at the front of the PSU (NBD-913). Make a request to the distributor for repair. Make a request to the distributor for repair. The PSU (NBD-913) is abnormal. Make a request to the distributor for The CCU (NDC-1590) is faulty. The preheat count down of the scanner unit is not displayed. The connection with the scanner unit is abnormal. The safety switch of the scanner unit is set to OFF. A solid-state scanner unit is connected. The scanner unit is faulty. repair. Make a request to the distributor for repair. Check the connection with the scanner unit. Set the safety switch of the scanner unit to ON.

[Note]

For operating the safety switch of the scanner unit, always request the work to the specialized service person. Before starting the work, turn off the power supply of the display unit. Otherwise, an unexpected accident may occur. Preheat count-down is not displayed for a solid-state scanner unit. Make a request to the distributor for repair. The RIF (CQD-2273) is not set correctly. Set the RIF correctly. The RIF (CQD-2273) is faulty. Make a request to the distributor for repair. Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 7-44 Symptom Cause Action The internal wiring is faulty. The CCU (NDC-1590) is faulty. The scanner unit does not rotate even if the

[Transmit] button is pressed. The connection with the scanner unit is abnormal. The safety switch of the scanner unit is set to OFF. Power is not supplied from the PSU to the scanner unit. The motor driver circuit inside of the scanner unit is not set correctly.

(NKE-1632, NKE-2632, or NKE-2632-H is connected as the scanner unit.) The rotating part of the scanner unit is frozen. Make a request to the distributor for repair. Make a request to the distributor for repair. Check the connection with the scanner unit. Set the safety switch of the scanner unit to ON.

[Note]

For operating the safety switch of the scanner unit, always request the work to the specialized service person. Before starting the work, turn off the power supply of the display unit. Otherwise, an unexpected accident may occur. Check the power supply wiring between the PSU and the RIF. Check the power supply connection inside of the scanner unit.

[Note]

For checking the wiring inside of the scanner unit, always request the work to the specialized service person. Before starting the work, turn off the power supply of the display unit. Otherwise, an unexpected accident may occur. Set the motor driver circuit correctly.

[Note]

For setting the motor driver circuit, always request the work to the specialized service person. Before starting the work, turn off the power supply of the display unit. Otherwise, an unexpected accident may occur. De-freeze the frozen section by using the neck heater option. 7-45 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting Symptom Cause Action Strong wind of relative wind velocity exceeding 100 kt (about 51.5 m/s) is blowing. The scanner unit is faulty. The RIF (CQD-2273) is faulty. The internal wiring is faulty. When strong wind of relative wind velocity exceeding 100 kt is blowing, the scanner unit does not rotate due to the protection function. Make a request to the distributor for repair. Make a request to the distributor for repair. Make a request to the distributor for repair. The PSU (NBD-913) is abnormal. Make a request to the distributor for repair. Make a request to the distributor for repair. Check the connection with the scanner unit. Set a proper value for GAIN. Set a proper value for SEA/RAIN. Replace the magnetron.

[Note]

For magnetron replacement, always request the work to the specialized service person. Before starting the work, turn off the power supply of the display unit. Otherwise, an unexpected accident may occur. Make a request to the distributor for repair. Make a request to the distributor for repair. Make a request to the distributor for repair. repair. Make a request to the distributor for repair. No radar image is displayed. The CCU (NDC-1590) is faulty. The connection with the scanner unit is abnormal. The GAIN value is set to the minimum. The SEA/RAIN value is set to the maximum. The magnetron is deteriorated significantly.

(Case where an scanner unit that uses a magnetron is connected The scanner unit is faulty. The RIF (CQD-2273) is faulty. The internal wiring is faulty. The CCU (NDC-1590) is faulty. Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 7-46 The PSU (NBD-913) is abnormal. Make a request to the distributor for Symptom Cause Action Radar images cannot be tuned The magnetron is deteriorated significantly.

(Case where a scanner unit that uses a magnetron is connected A solid-state scanner unit is connected. The azimuth is not set correctly. CCRP is not set correctly. The GPS antenna position is not set correctly. The range is not set correctly. CCRP is not set correctly. The GPS antenna position is not set correctly. Power for the Interswitch Unit is not turned on. The connection with the Interswitch Unit is abnormal. The Interswitch Unit is faulty. The RIF (CQD-2273) is not set correctly. The RIF (CQD-2273) is faulty. The internal wiring is faulty. The CCU (NDC-1590) is faulty. The CCU (NDC-1590) is faulty. The azimuth of the radar image is not displayed correctly. The range of the radar image is not displayed correctly. Interswitch Unit does not function. If the power supply is turned off, the trail data is cleared without being stored. Replace the magnetron.

[Note]

For magnetron replacement, always request the work to the specialized service person. Before starting the work, turn off the power supply of the display unit. Otherwise, an unexpected accident may occur. Tuning bar is not displayed for a solid-state scanner unit. Set the azimuth correctly. Set CCRP correctly. Set the GPS antenna position correctly. Set the range correctly. Set CCRP correctly. Set the GPS antenna position correctly. Turn on the power for the Interswitch Unit. Check the connection with the Interswitch Unit. Make a request to the distributor for repair. Set the RIF correctly. Make a request to the distributor for repair. Make a request to the distributor for repair. Make a request to the distributor for repair. Make a request to the distributor for repair. 7-47 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting Symptom Cause Action Radar images cannot be overlaid. UPS does not function. There is no optional license for radar overlay. The connection with the scanner unit is abnormal. The connection with the radar display unit is abnormal. The RIF (CQD-2273) is faulty. The internal wiring is faulty. The PSU (NBD-913) is faulty. The CCU (NDC-1590) is faulty. Implement an optional license for radar overlay. Check the connection with the scanner unit. Check the connection with the radar display unit. Make a request to the distributor for repair. Make a request to the distributor for repair. Make a request to the distributor for repair. Make a request to the distributor for repair. The connection with UPS is faulty. Check the connection with UPS. UPS is not set correctly. The UPS battery is extremely depleted. Set UPS correctly. Replace the battery.

[Note]

At the battery replacement, make a request for the work to the specialized service staff. During the replacement, turn off the corresponding power supply breaker in the ship. Otherwise, an unexpected accident may occur. Make a request to the distributor for repair. Make a request to the distributor for repair. The internal wiring is faulty. UPS is faulty. Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 7-48 7.4 Alert List When an alert occurs, alert information is displayed in the alert notification area. Alarm button Alert message Warning button Caution button Each of the above buttons shows the number of alerts occurred in the corresponding category Memo The buttons of the categories in which no alerts have occurred are not displayed. The display colors of alert messages are defined as follows according to the type and seriousness of alerts. Alert Type Alarms

(An alert indicating a state asking sailors to pay immediate attention and take immediate action.) Warnings

(An alert indicating that the state has changed, which although not immediately dangerous, but may become so in the near future if no action is taken. Warnings are alerts displayed for preventing possible future hazardous states.) Cautions

(Although these are neither alarms nor warnings, these alerts indicate that it is necessary to pay more than normal attention to cautions, statuses, or to the supplied information.) No Alarm Alert Class

(Seriousness) Display Color Alert Display Status Alert Sound Alarms Red Before alarm acknowledgement:

Blinking After alarm acknowledgement:

Lighting Present

(repetitive) Warnings Orange Before alarm recognition: Blinking After alarm recognition:

Lighting Present

(once) Cautions Yellow Lighting No sound

-

Green

-

7-49 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting The list of alert messages by alert type is shown below. 7.4.1 Alarms Message Location of occurrence Explanation ACCA ACCA (Back-up Navigator Call) TCS TCS AIS (CPA/TCPA) Cross Track Crossing Safety Contour Depth Below Keel Dragging Anchor End Of Track End Of Track (Back-up Navigator Call) Failure of reduction in power supply Heading (Sensor Failure) Heading (Sensor Failure, Back-up Navigator Call) POSN1 (Sensor Failure) POSN1 (Sensor Failure, Back-up Navigator Call) POSN2 (Sensor Failure) Speed (Sensor Failure) Speed (Sensor Failure, Back-up Navigator Call) Track Control Stopped Track Control Stopped (Back-up Navigator Call) TT (CPA/TCPA) RADAR/AIS ECDIS ECDIS ECDIS ECDIS TCS TCS HCS TCS TCS TCS TCS TCS TCS TCS TCS TCS Warning for reaching wheel over line Warning for reaching wheel over line

(Back-up navigator call) CPA/TCPA alarm The off-track distance from the planned route exceeded the limit. Crossing the safety contour Alarm on the depth below the keel Exited from the dragging anchor monitoring area 1 to 5 minutes before the arrival of the last WP Not acknowledged by EOT alarm for 30 seconds Failure or reduction of power supply Heading sensor failure Heading sensor failure (back-up navigator call) POSN1 sensor failure POSN1 sensor failure (back-up navigator call) POSN2 sensor failure Speed sensor failure Speed sensor failure (back-up navigator call) TCS stopped. TCS stop alarm was not acknowledged. RADAR/AIS CPA/TCPA alarm Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 7-50 Explanation Action to take Blizzard 1 (Temperature) Control unit Blizzard1 7.4.2 Warnings Message Location of occurrence Blizzard #n (Communication Failed, DSP #m) Control unit Blizzard 1 (Load Failed, DSP 1) Control unit Blizzard 1 (Load Failed, DSP 2) Control unit Blizzard 2 (Load Failed, DSP 1) Control unit Blizzard 2 (Load Failed, DSP 2) Control unit Blizzard 2 (Temperature) CCU (Fan) CIF (Communication Failed) CMP RelaySoftware

(Communication Failed) Control unit Control unit Control unit Communication error with the DSP

(ASIC#n - DSP#m) The transfer of the DSP program did not succeed. The transfer of the DSP program did not succeed. temperature rise The transfer of the DSP program did not succeed. The transfer of the DSP program did not succeed. temperature rise Drop in CCU fan revolution per minute Drop in CCU fan revolution per minute Communication error between the companion MPU relay software and the MFD Control unit Blizzard2 CPU (Temperature, Core 1) Control unit CPU core 1 temperature rise CPU (Temperature, Core 2) Data Disk (Failed) Control unit CPU core 2 Control unit temperature rise The data disk failed and cannot be accessed. Data Disk (Not Connected) e-Token (Communication Failed) Control unit The data disk not acknowledged yet Communication error between the CPU and e-Token Control unit Make a request to the distributor for repair. Make a request to the distributor for repair. Make a request to the distributor for repair. Make a request to the distributor for repair. Make a request to the distributor for repair. Make a request to the distributor for repair. Make a request to the distributor for repair. Make a request to the distributor for repair. Make a request to the distributor for repair. Make a request to the distributor for repair. Make a request to the distributor for repair. Make a request to the distributor for repair. Make a request to the distributor for repair. Make a request to the distributor for repair. Make a request to the distributor for repair. 7-51 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting Message GIF (Communication Failed) GIF-RIF (Open) GIF-SLC (Open) Location of occurrence Control unit Control unit Control unit HASP (Communication Failed) Control unit Keyboard (Communication Failed) OPU (Communication Failed, Serial) OPU (Communication Failed, USB) Operation unit Control unit Control unit LCD (FAN #n) LCD (Temperature) Power (AC Voltage, Low) Power (DC Voltage, Low) Power (Fan) Power (Unit Failure) MNU MNU Power supply Power supply Power supply Power supply Explanation Action to take Communication error between the companion MPU and the Gyro IF

(USB connection) The open state was detected between the GIF and the RIF. The open state was detected between the GIF and the SLC. Communication error between the CPU and the HASP The open state was detected between the OPA and the OPB. Communication error between the companion MPU and the operation unit (serial) Communication error between the companion MPU and the operation unit (USB connection) The LCD fan stopped. LCD temperature rise When AC input voltage is 75 V or less When DC input voltage is 18 V or less The fan in the PSU is broken. When the 48 V output is abnormal/the internal temperature of the power supply has risen Make a request to the distributor for repair. Check the connection status of the GIF and the RIF. Check the connection status of the GIF and the SLC. Make a request to the distributor for repair. Check the connection status of the TOPU and the KOPU. Make a request to the distributor for repair. Make a request to the distributor for repair. Make a request to the distributor for repair. Make a request to the distributor for repair. Connect an AC power supply in the designated voltage range. Connect a DC power supply in the designated voltage range. Make a request to the distributor for repair. Make a request to the distributor for repair. Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 7-52 Message RIF (Communication Failed) Location of occurrence Control unit Touch Panel

(Communication Failed) Control unit TXRX (Azimuth Change Pulse) TXRX (Azimuth Reset Pulse) TXRX (Fan #n) TXRX (Magnetron Drive Voltage) TXRX (Magnetron Heater Voltage) TXRX (Motor Communication) TXRX (Motor Controller) TXRX (Motor Drive Current) TXRX (Motor Drive Current) Scanner Unit Scanner Unit Scanner Unit Scanner Unit Scanner Unit Scanner Unit Scanner Unit Scanner Unit TXRX (Motor Drive Voltage, High) Scanner Unit TXRX (Motor Drive Voltage, Low) Scanner Unit TXRX (Motor Input Voltage, High) Scanner Unit Explanation Action to take Communication error between the MPU and the RIF Communication error between the CPU and the touch panel Azimuth signal abnormality

(transmitting-receiving unit) Azimuth reference signal abnormality

(transmitting-receiving unit) Fan #n abnormality

(transmitting-receiving unit) Magnetron drive voltage abnormality

(transmitting-receiving unit) Magnetron heater voltage abnormality

(transmitting-receiving unit) Drive unit control/monitoring communication error

(drive unit)

(drive unit) Motor supply current abnormality (drive unit) Motor supply current abnormality (drive unit) Motor drive voltage abnormality

(exceeded) (drive unit) Motor drive voltage abnormality

(insufficient) (drive unit) Drive unit input voltage abnormality

(exceeded) (drive unit) Make a request to the distributor for repair. Make a request to the distributor for repair. Make a request to the distributor for repair. Make a request to the distributor for repair. Make a request to the distributor for repair. Make a request to the distributor for repair. Make a request to the distributor for repair. Make a request to the distributor for repair. Make a request to the distributor for repair. Make a request to the distributor for repair. Make a request to the distributor for repair. Make a request to the distributor for repair. Make a request to the distributor for repair. Make a request to the distributor for repair. Scanner Unit Operation abnormality 7-53 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting Message TXRX (Motor Input Voltage, Low) TXRX (Motor IPM Temperature) TXRX (Motor Rotation Speed, High) TXRX (Motor Rotation Speed, Illegal) TXRX (Motor Rotation Speed, Low) TXRX (Motor Sensor) TXRX (Motor Temperature) TXRX (Option Module) Location of occurrence Scanner Unit Scanner Unit Scanner Unit Scanner Unit Scanner Unit Scanner Unit Scanner Unit Scanner Unit TXRX (Power Supply Circuit) Scanner Unit TXRX (Processor Circuit) TXRX (Received Signal Trigger) TXRX (Received Signal) Scanner Unit Scanner Unit Scanner Unit Explanation Action to take Drive unit input voltage abnormality

(insufficient) (drive unit) IPM temperature abnormality (drive unit) Antenna rotation speed abnormality

(high speed rotation)

(drive unit) Antenna rotation speed abnormality

(abnormal rotation)

(drive unit) Antenna rotation speed abnormality

(low speed rotation)

(drive unit) Motor sensor abnormality (drive unit) Motor temperature abnormality (drive unit) Option module abnormality

(transmitting-

receiving unit) Antenna Power supply circuit abnormality Radar processor unit circuit abnormality

(transmitting-

receiving unit) Trigger signal abnormality

(transmitting-

receiving unit) Radar video signal abnormality

(transmitting-

receiving unit) Make a request to the distributor for repair. Make a request to the distributor for repair. Make a request to the distributor for repair. Make a request to the distributor for repair. Make a request to the distributor for repair. Make a request to the distributor for repair. Make a request to the distributor for repair. Make a request to the distributor for repair. Make a request to the distributor for repair. Make a request to the distributor for repair. Make a request to the distributor for repair. Make a request to the distributor for repair. Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 7-54 Message TXRX (ROM access, write) TXRX (Rotation Direction) TXRX (Safety Switch)) TXRX (S-band Magnetron Drive Voltage) TXRX (S-band Magnetron Heater Voltage) TXRX (Temperature) TXRX (Transmitter Clock) TXRX (X-band Magnetron Drive Voltage) TXRX (X-band Magnetron Heater Voltage) Location of occurrence Scanner Unit Scanner Unit Explanation Action to take ROM value abnormality

(transmitting-

receiving unit) Antenna rotation direction abnormality (drive unit) Make a request to the distributor for repair. Make a request to the distributor for repair. Scanner Unit The Safety switch Scanner Unit Scanner Unit Scanner Unit Scanner Unit Scanner Unit Scanner Unit is OFF. S-band magnetron drive voltage abnormality

(transmitting-

receiving unit) S-band magnetron heater voltage abnormality

(transmitting-

receiving unit) Interior temperature abnormality

(transmitting-

receiving unit) Transmitter clock abnormality

(transmitting-

receiving unit) X-band magnetron drive voltage abnormality

(transmitting-

receiving unit) X-band magnetron heater voltage abnormality

(transmitting-

receiving unit) Turn on the safety switch. Make a request to the distributor for repair. Make a request to the distributor for repair. Make a request to the distributor for repair. Make a request to the distributor for repair. Make a request to the distributor for repair. Make a request to the distributor for repair. 7-55 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ACCI Message Location of occurrence TCS AIS ACT (MAX Target) AIS (Communication Failed, Direct) RADAR/AIS INS AIS (Communication Failed, Main LAN) AIS (Communication Failed, Sub LAN) AIS (Invalid) AIS (Lost) AIS (MAX Target) AIS (New Target) AIS (Unavailable) ALC #n (Communication Failed, Main LAN) ALC #n (Communication Failed, Sub LAN) Anchorage Area Anchorage Prohibited INS INS INS RADAR/AIS RADAR/AIS RADAR/AIS INS INS INS ECDIS ECDIS Anemometer (Communication Failed, Main LAN) Approach to mariner entered feature ECDIS INS Archipelagic Sea Lane ARCS (Chart Shift) ARCS (Security Failed) ARCS (Shift to WGS84) ARCS (Unknown Datum) Arrived at WPT AutoPilot (Communication Failed, Main LAN) AutoPilot (Communication Failed, Sub LAN) AutoPilot (Invalid, #n) ECDIS ECDIS ECDIS ECDIS ECDIS ECDIS INS INS INS Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 7-56 Explanation The activated AIS target count reached the maximum activation target count. AIS serial communication failed AIS communication failed in MAIN LAN AIS communication failed in SUB LAN AIS data validity error An AIS target is lost. The AIS target count exceeded the maximum target display count The AIS is in the initial acquisition state. AIS data not received yet Anemometer communication failed in MAIN LAN ALC#n communication failed in SUB LAN Approaching an anchorage area Approaching an anchorage prohibited area The activated AIS target count reached the maximum activation target count. Anemometer communication failed in MAIN LAN Reached the point set by the navigation officer Approaching an archipelagic sea lane ARCS chart was shifted

[ARCS] Alert related to ARCS security An ARCS chart was shifted to WGS84. Attempted to load an unknown geodetic system chart Arrived at a WPT AutoPilot communication was disconnected in the Main LAN. AutoPilot communication was disconnected in the Sub LAN. AutoPilot data validity error Location of occurrence Explanation Message AutoPilot (Not Plausible, #n) AutoPilot (Unavailable, #n) Cable Area Cargo Transshipment Area Caution Area Channel Clock (Communication Failed, Main LAN) Clock (Communication Failed, Sub LAN) COG/SOG (Doubtful) COG/SOG (Failed) COG/SOG (Invalid, GPS #n) COG/SOG (Invalid, Log #n) INS INS ECDIS ECDIS ECDIS ECDIS INS INS INS INS INS INS COG/SOG (Not Plausible, GPS #n) INS COG/SOG (Not Plausible, Log #n) INS COG/SOG (Unavailable, GPS #n) INS COG/SOG (Unavailable, Log #n) INS Course difference (heading deviates from track course) Current (Invalid, Current Meter) Current (Not Plausible, Current Meter) Current (Unavailable, Current Meter) CurrentMeter (Communication Failed, Main LAN) Dangerous Area Dangerous Line DATUM (Invalid, GPS #n) DATUM (Not Plausible, GPS #n) DATUM (Unavailable, GPS #n) Deeper Water Route TCS INS INS INS INS ECDIS ECDIS INS INS INS ECDIS AutoPilot data plausibility error AutoPilot data not received yet Approaching a cable area Approaching a cargo transshipment area Approaching a traffic precautionary area Approaching a channel Communication with the ship's clock was disconnected in the Main LAN. Communication with the ship's clock was disconnected in the Sub LAN. Integrity verification of COG/SOG data is doubtful. Integrity verification of COG/SOG data failed. Validity error in COG/SOG data of GPS #n Validity error in COG/SOG data of Log

#n Plausibility error in COG/SOG data of GPS #n Plausibility error in COG/SOG data of Log #n COG/SOG data of GPS #n not received yet COG/SOG data of Log #n not received yet Course difference (ship's heading deviates from track course) Current data validity error Current data plausibility error Current data not received yet Current meter communication was disconnected in the Main LAN. Approaching a dangerous area Approaching a dangerous line DATUM data validity error DATUM data plausibility error DATUM data not received yet Approaching deeper water route 7-57 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting Message Depth Area DPTH (Doubtful) DPTH (Failed) DPTH (Invalid, Echo Sounder #n) DPTH (Not Plausible, Echo Sounder

#n) DPTH (Unavailable, Echo Sounder

#n) Dredge Area DSP (Heading Data) DSP (Sweep Data) Dumping Ground ECCI ECDIS #n (Communication Failed, Main LAN) ECDIS #n (Communication Failed, Sub LAN) EchoSounder#n (Communication Failed, Main LAN) EchoSounder#n (Communication Failed, Sub LAN) Emergency Mode ENC (NON-WGS84) Location of occurrence ECDIS INS INS INS INS INS ECDIS RADAR/AIS RADAR/AIS ECDIS TCS INS INS INS INS Others ECDIS EPA (Update) RADAR/AIS External TT (Invalid ARPA #n) External TT (Unavailable, ARPA #n) Fairway File System Failure Fishing Ground Fishing Prohibited GPS #n (Communication Failed, Direct) GPS #n (Communication Failed, Main LAN) INS INS ECDIS ECDIS ECDIS ECDIS INS INS Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 7-58 Explanation Sailing shallower water than safety water Integrity verification of DPTH data is doubtful. Integrity verification of DPTH data failed. Validity error in water depth data of echo sounder #n Plausibility error in water depth data of echo sounder #n Water depth data of echo sounder #n not received yet Approaching a dredge area Heading data error (heading error received by the companion MPU) Missing header in sweep data, etc. Approaching a dumping ground Early notification of turning No.#n ECDIS communication was disconnected in the Main LAN. No.#n ECDIS communication was disconnected in the Sub LAN. Echo sounder communication was disconnected in the Main LAN. Echo sounder communication was disconnected in the Sub LAN. The system is running in the Emergency Mode activated when both disks have failed. The ENC is using a geodetic system other than the WGS84. The EPA is placed in the update request state. TT#n data validity error TT#n data not received yet Approaching a fairway The file system device failed. Approaching a fishing ground Approaching a fishing prohibited area GPS#n communication was disconnected in serial communication. GPS#n communication was disconnected in the Main LAN. Message Location of occurrence Explanation GPS #n (Communication Failed, Sub LAN) HDG (Doubtful) HDG (Failed) HDG (Invalid, Heading #n) HDG (Not Plausible, Heading #n) HDG (Unavailable, Heading #n) Heading #n (Communication Failed, Direct) Heading #n (Communication Failed, Main LAN) Heading #n (Communication Failed, Sub LAN) Heading Monitor Heading monitor (deviation from second heading source) INS INS INS INS INS INS INS INS INS TCS HCS Ice Area Incineration Area Inshore Traffic Zone ISW (Communication Failed) ECDIS ECDIS ECDIS RADAR/AIS LAT (Out Of Bounds) ECDIS Loading Different Datum Chart ECDIS Log#n (Communication Failed ,Direct) Log#n (Communication Failed, Main LAN) Log#n (Communication Failed, Sub LAN) Low Speed Marine Farm/Aquaculture Military Practice Area Off heading alarm Offshore Production Area INS INS INS TCS ECDIS ECDIS HCS ECDIS GPS#n communication was disconnected in the Sub LAN. Integrity verification of HDG data is doubtful. Integrity verification of HDG data failed. Validity error in HDG data of heading sensor #n Plausibility error in HDG data of heading sensor #n HDG data of heading sensor #n not received yet Heading#n communication was disconnected in serial communication. Heading#n communication was disconnected in the Main LAN. Heading#n communication was disconnected in the Sub LAN. Monitoring of ship's heading Monitoring of ship's heading

(deviating from the second heading of the ship) Approaching an ice area Approaching an incineration area Approaching an inshore traffic zone Communication error between the companion MPU and the ISW Exceeded the system's operating latitude range (out of bounds) Loading a different geodetic system chart Log#n communication was disconnected in serial communication. Log#n communication was disconnected in the Main LAN. Log#n communication was disconnected in the Sub LAN. Low speed alarm Approaching a marine farm/aquaculture Approaching a military practice area Alarm for the ship's deviated heading Approaching an offshore production area 7-59 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting Location of occurrence Explanation Message Pipeline Area Position Monitor Positioning System Failure POSN (Doubtful) POSN (Failed) POSN (Invalid, GPS #n) POSN (Not Plausible, GPS #n) POSN (Unavailable, GPS #n) POSN1 (NON-WGS84) POSN2 (NON-WGS84) ECDIS TCS ECDIS INS INS INS INS INS ECDIS ECDIS PROC (Azimuth Change Pulse) RADAR/AIS PROC (Azimuth Reset Pulse) RADAR/AIS PROC (Interrupt 1) PROC (Interrupt 2) RADAR/AIS RADAR/AIS PROC (Received Signal Trigger) RADAR/AIS PROC (Received Signal) RADAR/AIS Radar #n (Communication Failed, Main LAN) Radar #n (Communication Failed, Sub LAN) RADAR Alarm (In) RADAR Alarm (Out) RADAR PROC (Data) INS INS RADAR/AIS RADAR/AIS RADAR/AIS Recommended Traffic Lane Restricted Area RNC (NON-WGS84) ROT (Invalid, Heading #n) ROT (Not Plausible, Heading #n) ROT (Unavailable, Heading #n) ECDIS ECDIS ECDIS INS INS INS Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 7-60 Approaching a pipeline area Monitoring of the position Positioning system failure Integrity verification of POSN data is doubtful. Integrity verification of POSN data failed. Validity error in POSN data of GPS #n Plausibility error in POSN data of GPS

#n POSN data of GPS #n not received yet The primary geodetic system is abnormal. The secondary geodetic system is abnormal. Azimuth signal abnormality (radar processor unit) Heading line signal abnormality (radar processor unit) Abnormal interrupting of stun in the signal processor unit Abnormal interrupting of stun in the signal processor unit Trigger signal abnormality (radar processor unit) Radar video signal abnormality (radar processor unit) No.#n Radar communication was disconnected in the Main LAN. No.#n Radar communication was disconnected in the Sub LAN. Radar alarm (approach) Radar alarm (deviation) RADAR PROC or RADAR Draw control failure Approaching a recommended traffic lane Approaching a restricted traffic area The RNC is using a geodetic system other than the WGS84. ROT data validity error ROT data plausibility error ROT data not received yet Message Location of occurrence Explanation RSA (Invalid, Rudder #n) RSA (Not Plausible, Rudder #n) RSA (Unavailable, Rudder #n) Seaplane Landing Area Sensitive Sea Area SLC #n (Communication Failed, Main) SLC #n (Communication Failed, Sub) Specially Protected Area Spoil Ground STW (Doubtful) STW (Failed) STW (Invalid, Log #n) STW (Not Plausible, Log #n) STW (Unavailable, Log #n) Submarine Transit Area TEMP (Invalid, Water Temperature Meter) TEMP (Not Plausible, Water Temperature Meter) TEMP (Unavailable, Water Temperature Meter) TIME (Doubtful) TIME (Failed) TIME (Invalid, Clock) TIME (Invalid, GPS #n) TIME (Not Plausible, Clock) TIME (Not Plausible, GPS #n) TIME (Unavailable, Clock) TIME (Unavailable, GPS #n) Track Control System Failed INS INS INS ECDIS ECDIS INS INS ECDIS ECDIS INS INS INS INS INS ECDIS INS INS INS INS INS INS INS INS INS INS INS TCS RSA data validity error RSA data plausibility error RSA data not received yet Approaching a seaplane landing area Approaching a sensitive sea area SLC (MAIN)1 communication was disconnected. SLC (SUB)1 communication was disconnected. Approaching a specially protected area Approaching a spoil ground Integrity verification of STW data is doubtful. Integrity verification of STW data failed. Validity error in STW data of Log #n Plausibility error in STW data of Log

#n STW data of Log #n not received yet Approaching a submarine transit area Water temperature data validity error Water temperature data plausibility error Water temperature data not received yet Integrity verification of TIME data is doubtful. Integrity verification of TIME data failed. Validity error in TIME data of ship's clock Validity error in TIME data of GPS #n Plausibility error in TIME data of ship's clock Plausibility error in TIME data of GPS

#n TIME data of ship's clock not received yet TIME data of GPS #n not received yet Automatic sailing is abnormal. 7-61 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting Message Traffic Crossing Traffic Precautionary Traffic roundabout Traffic Separation Zone TT (Lost) TT (MAX Target) TT (New Target) Two Way Traffic TXRX (Communication Failed) Location of occurrence ECDIS ECDIS ECDIS ECDIS RADAR/AIS RADAR/AIS RADAR/AIS ECDIS RADAR/AIS VDR (Communication Failed, Main LAN) WaterThermometer (Communication Failed, Main LAN) Wind (Invalid, Anemometer) INS INS INS Wind (Not Plausible, Anemometer) INS Wind (Unavailable, Anemometer) INS Explanation Approaching traffic crossing Approaching traffic precautionary Approaching traffic roundabout Approaching a traffic separation zone A TT target is lost. The maximum number of TT targets is being acquired. The TT is in the initial acquisition state. Approaching two way traffic Communication error between the companion MPU and the scanner unit VDR communication was disconnected in the Main LAN. Water thermometer communication was disconnected in the Main LAN. Wind direction/wind speed data validity error Wind direction/wind speed data plausibility error Wind direction/wind speed data not received yet Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 7-62 The AIS alerts received from external sensors are as shown below. For the AIS alerts received from external sensors, alert messages are suffixed by (External). Example: Antenna VSWR exceeds limit (External) Message Subject Explanation Alert ID 002 063 Antenna VSWR exceeds limit AIS Data Flash memory err AIS external EPFS lost general failure Heading lost/invalid MKD connection lost mkd connection lost no sensor position in use no valid COG information no valid ROT information no valid SOG information Not Transmitting Tx malfunction Pa current error Pa temp error AIS AIS AIS AIS AIS AIS AIS AIS AIS AIS AIS AIS Power supply error AIS Program Flash memory err AIS AIS Rx channel 1 malfunction Rx channel 2 malfunction AIS AIS Rx channel 70 malfunction SSD mismatch AIS Tx pll unlock Tx power down Tx power supply error Tx power too high Tx power too low Tx stop interrupt Vr error AIS AIS AIS AIS AIS AIS AIS 026 064 008 025 006 032 030 035 029 001 Abnormality in antenna output Abnormality in the transponder data storage circuit Abnormality in external EPFS connection General error Ship's heading data has not been input or is invalid. Abnormality in the connection between the transponder and the controller No response from the transponder (detected in the display) Internal GPS data has not been input or is invalid. COG data has not been input or is invalid. ROT data has not been input or is invalid. SOG data has not been input or is invalid. Abnormality in transmission or while transmitting Abnormality in the current during transmission Abnormal temperature rise during transmission Abnormality in power supply voltage 053 Abnormality in the transponder control circuit 062 003 Abnormality in reception channel 1 Abnormality in reception channel 2 004 005 Abnormality in reception channel 70 Mismatch in static information (between the 065 display and the transponder) Abnormality in the synthesizer circuit for transmission Transmit by reducing output power due to error Abnormality in power supply voltage during transmission Power is higher than the specified transmission power. Power is lower than the specified transmission power. Transmission is forcibly stopped by the transmission monitoring circuit. Transmission system output error 057 054 055 058 056 060 051 052 059 7-63 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 7.4.3 Cautions Message AIS ACT (95% Capacity) AIS (95% Capacity) AIS (Invalid) AIS (Unavailable) AutoPilot (Invalid, #n) AutoPilot (Not Plausible, #n) AutoPilot (Unavailable, #n) Chart (License Expired) Chart (License Will Expire) Chart (Not Up-to-date) Location of occurrence RADAR/AIS RADAR/AIS INS INS INS INS INS ECDIS ECDIS ECDIS COG/SOG (Invalid, GPS #n) COG/SOG (Invalid, Log #n) COG/SOG (Not Plausible, GPS #n) INS INS INS COG/SOG (Not Plausible, Log #n) INS COG/SOG (Unavailable, GPS #n) COG/SOG (Unavailable, Log #n) Current (Invalid, Current Meter) Current (Not Plausible, Current Meter) Current (Unavailable, Current Meter) Danger (Buoy/Light) Danger (Dangerous Symbol) Danger (Obstruction) Danger (Spot Sounding) Danger (Under Water Rock) Danger (Wreck) DATUM (Invalid, GPS #n) DATUM (Not Plausible, GPS #n) DATUM (Unavailable, GPS #n) Dongle (Disable Mode) INS INS INS INS INS ECDIS ECDIS ECDIS ECDIS ECDIS ECDIS INS INS INS ECDIS DPTH (Invalid, Echo Sounder #n) INS Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 7-64 Explanation Exceeded 95% of the maximum number of AIS activation targets Exceeded 95% of the maximum number of AIS targets AIS data validity error AIS data not received yet AutoPilot data validity error AutoPilot data plausibility error AutoPilot data not received yet The chart license has expired. The chart license will expire within 30 days. When the chart being displayed is not up-to-date Validity error in COG/SOG data of GPS #n Validity error in COG/SOG data of Log #n Plausibility error in COG/SOG data of GPS

#n Plausibility error in COG/SOG data of Log

#n COG/SOG data of GPS #n not received yet COG/SOG data of Log #n not received yet Current data validity error Current data plausibility error Current data not received yet Approaching a danger (buoy/lighthouse) Approaching a danger (dangerous symbol) Approaching a danger (obstruction) Approaching a danger (spot sounding) Approaching a danger (under water rock) Approaching a danger (wreck) DATUM data validity error DATUM data plausibility error DATUM data not received yet Dongle disable mode (USB dongle still broken) Validity error in water depth data of echo sounder #n Message DPTH (Not Plausible, Echo Sounder #n) DPTH (Unavailable, Echo Sounder

#n) Exchange BackLight (LCD) Exchange FAN (CCU) Exchange FAN (LCD) Exchange FAN (Power) Exchange FAN (TXRX #n) Exchange Magnetron (TXRX #n) Exchange Motor (TXRX #n) Exchange SSD#n Exchange UPS Location of occurrence INS INS Explanation Plausibility error in water depth data of echo sounder #n Water depth data of echo sounder #n not received yet Maintenance The end of the estimated life span of the LCD backlight is approaching. Maintenance The end of the estimated life span of the CCU fan is approaching. Maintenance The end of the estimated life span of the LCD fan is approaching. Maintenance The end of the estimated life span of the power fan is approaching. Maintenance The end of the estimated life span of the TXRX fan is approaching. The end of the estimated life span of the magnetron is approaching (#n is the antenna number). Maintenance Maintenance The end of the estimated life span of the TXRX motor is approaching. Maintenance The end of the estimated life span of the SSD#n is approaching. Maintenance The end of the estimated life span of the UPS is approaching. TT#n data validity error External TT (Invalid, RADAR #n) External TT (Unavailable, RADAR

#n) GPS #n (HDOP Exceeded) GPS #n (Position Not Differential) HDG (Invalid, Heading #n) INS INS INS INS INS HDG (Not Plausible, Heading #n) INS HDG (Unavailable, Heading #n) INS Position Shift POSN (Invalid, GPS #n) POSN (Not Plausible, GPS #n) POSN (Unavailable, GPS #n) ROT (Invalid, Heading #n) ROT (Not Plausible, Heading #n) ROT (Unavailable, Heading #n) RSA (Invalid, Rudder #n) RSA (Not Plausible, Rudder #n) ECDIS INS INS INS INS INS INS INS INS TT#n data not received yet HDOP increased (GPS accuracy lowered) GPS#n is not the DGPS. Validity error in HDG data of heading sensor

#n Plausibility error in HDG data of heading sensor #n HDG data of heading sensor #n not received yet When own ship's position was offset Validity error in POSN data of GPS #n Plausibility error in POSN data of GPS #n POSN data of GPS #n not received yet ROT data validity error ROT data plausibility error ROT data not received yet RSA data validity error RSA data plausibility error 7-65 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting Explanation RSA data not received yet The scanner is rotating (waveforms not yet transmitted): ICE CLASS standby Validity error in STW data of Log #n Plausibility error in STW data of Log #n STW data of Log #n not received yet Water temperature data validity error Water temperature data plausibility error Water temperature data not received yet Validity error in TIME data of ship's clock Validity error in TIME data of GPS #n Plausibility error in TIME data of ship's clock Plausibility error in TIME data of GPS #n TIME data of ship's clock not received yet TIME data of GPS #n not received yet Exceeded 95% of the maximum number of TT targets A tracked target went out of 32NM range. Communication error in general-purpose USB Overcurrent occurred in one of the USB terminals. The delivery of capture images for the VDR failed continuously for 1 min (i.e, continuously 4 times). An abnormality when there was some sort of reception by the socket being connected when distributing images to the VDR

(support for error display by IEC62388 Standard H.2.3.3) Wind direction/wind speed data validity error Wind direction/wind speed data plausibility error Wind direction/wind speed data not received yet Message RSA (Unavailable, Rudder #n) Scanner Rotating Location of occurrence INS RADAR/AIS STW (Invalid, Log #n) STW (Not Plausible, Log #n) STW (Unavailable, Log #n) TEMP (Invalid, Water Temperature Meter) TEMP (Not Plausible, Water Temperature Meter) TEMP (Unavailable, Water Temperature Meter) TIME (Invalid, Clock) TIME (Invalid, GPS #n) TIME (Not Plausible, Clock) TIME (Not Plausible, GPS #n) TIME (Unavailable, Clock) TIME (Unavailable, GPS #n) TT (95% Capacity) TT (Out of Range ) USB (Communication Failed) USB (Over current) VDR (Delivery Failed) INS INS INS INS INS INS INS INS INS INS INS INS RADAR/AIS RADAR/AIS Control unit Control unit RADAR/AIS VDR (Unexpected Data) RADAR/AIS Wind (Invalid, Anemometer) Wind (Not Plausible, Anemometer) INS INS Wind (Unavailable, Anemometer) INS Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 7-66 7.4.4 List of Alert Icons The alert icons displayed in the alert notification area are listed below. Functional outline Alert icon Name of alert icon No. 1 Active unacknowledged alarm 2 Active silenced alarm 3 Active acknowledged alarm 4 Active - responsibility transferred alarm 5 Rectified unacknowledged alarm 6 Active -

unacknowledged warning 7 Active silenced warning 8 Active acknowledged warning A flashing red triangle. A symbol of loudspeaker in the middle of the triangle. A flashing red triangle. A symbol as in icon number 1 with a prominent diagonal line above it. A red triangle. An exclamation mark in the middle of the triangle. A red triangle. An arrow pointing towards the right in the middle of the triangle. A flashing red triangle. A tick mark in the middle of the triangle. A flashing yellowish orange circle. A symbol of loudspeaker in the middle of the circle. A flashing yellowish orange circle. A symbol as in icon number 6 with a prominent diagonal line above it. A yellowish orange circle. An exclamation mark in the middle of the circle. 9 Active - responsibility transferred warning A yellowish orange circle. An arrow pointing towards the right in the middle of the circle. 10 Rectified unacknowledged warning 11 Caution a Aggregation b Acknowledge not allowed for alarm c Acknowledge not allowed for warning A flashing yellowish orange circle. A tick mark in the middle of the circle. A yellow square. An exclamation mark in the middle of the square. A plus sign. To be presented together with icons number 1 to 11 A red triangle with a cross in the middle of triangle. To be presented together with icons number 1, 2 and 5. A yellowish orange circle with a cross in the middle of circle. To be presented together with icons number 6, 7 and 10. 7-67 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 7.5 Password List 7.5.1 Password List The list of password is shown below. Where to enter Password Description Table. Password List System Information*1 Code Input Task Menu 0000 0 0009 1501 5763 9999 0913 1074 1111 5254 5963 9380 9999 Show the detail of software versions. Show the Service menu for Users. Show the Service menu for Engineers. Show the Utilities menu. S57/S63 Auto Select ON.

( available in ECDIS) Return to Task Menu. Launch a WEB browser Open the file chooser for additional maintenance tools from manufacturer. Choose the tool to run. Copy \mfd\INI folder into your USB storage device. Open the file chooser for Conning INI file renewal. Choose the file to import. Shut down.

(Power OFF) Launch the Licence Import Tool. Quit Task Menu.

(Launch Windows Task Manager)

*1 To enter the password on System Information window, click software information list. The password input dialog will appear. Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 7-68 7.5.2 Password on System Information When you want to use a USB flash memory to read or write a file, make sure in advance that the USB flash memory is not affected by a computer virus. If the display unit is infected with a virus, other equipment will also be infected, with the result that a trouble will occur. Before removing the USB flash memory, check for the access lamp of the USB flash memory and make sure that it is not being accessed. If you remove the USB flash memory when it is accessed, data may be destroyed and a trouble may occur. 0000 - Show the detail of software versions. 7.5.2.1 You can confirm the system information. To obtain the detail information of software, enter the password 0000 to the window. Password input dialog will appear by clicking the software information list. 1. Click on the [Menu] button on the left Toolbar. The menu will be displayed. 2. Click on the [Maintenance] - [System Information] button on the menu.

[System Information] dialog box appears. Click on the [Software] tab. 7-69 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 3. Software Information will be displayed. 4. Click on the Software list and enter the password 0000 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 7-70

(1)

(2)

(3) 5. Details of Software information will be displayed.

(1) [X] button Details of Software information will be displayed.

(2) Datails of Software Information Item Jxx-xxxx Application Maintenance No. TXRX No.1 GPS No.2 GPS TCS Displayed information Type and model name of the system Version of the application software 8-digit maintenance number Version of the software used for the radar transmitter-receiver unit

* This information is displayed when the system is equipped with the RADAR function. Software version of GPS 1

* Displayed when a medium-sized radar equipped with 1 or 2 units of GPS is used. Software version of GPS 2

* Displayed when a medium-sized radar equipped with 2 units of GPS is used. Version of the software used for TCS

* This information is displayed when the system is equipped with the TCS function. 7-71 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting Presentation Library C-MAP SDK Carrier Board DSP(n) DSP(Boot) USB Operation Unit SLC(n) Edition of S52 Presentation Library

* Displayed for ECDIS or RADAR (ENC chart display license available) only Version of the software used for C-MAP SDK

* Displayed for ECDIS only Software version of Carrier Board. Software version of No. n DSP. Software version of DSP Boot section. Software version of Trackball Operation Unit. Software version of No. n SLC

(3) [Save to USB Device] (Saving to USB flash memory) button Click on this button to save the displayed information in a USB flash memory in the text format. 7.5.3 Password on Code Input Never have the equipment adjusted by unauthorized service personnel. If the equipment is set up incorrectly, it may cause unstable operation. Further, an accident or trouble may occur. Never make adjustments while sailing. Doing so may adversely affect the radar functions, causing accidents and/or malfunctions. 7.5.3.1 How to enter. 1. Click on the [MENU] button on the Left Tool Bar. The menu will be displayed. 2. Change over to the second page of the menu using the page switching button of the menu. Click on the [Code Input] button on the Menu. Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 7-72 3. Enter the password. Additional menu will appear in accordance with the password you enter. 7.5.3.2 0 - Service menu for Users / 0009 - Service menu for Engineers. The Service menu consists of three submenus of Adjustment, Installation and Maintenance. To display it, password 0 or 0009 is required. This section also describes the differences between those two passwords. 1. Enter the password 0009 in Code Input The [Service] button will be added at 2nd page of menu. 2. Click on the [Service] button. The submenu will be displayed. 3. Display a submenu dialog box by clicking on one of the [Adjustment], [Installation], and [Maintenance] buttons. The contents of each menu will be different in accordance with the password 0 or 0009. The list of Service menu is shown below. 7-73 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 1st Category 2nd Category 3rd Category Password 0 0009 t n e m t s u d A j Basic Adjustment TXRX PerformanceMonitor/

PerformanceMonitor

(SSR) Sector Blank TNI Blank Input BP Count Output BP Count Echo Noise Level TT STC/FTC/MBS Cable Attenuation Tune Adjustment YES YES Bearing Adjustment YES YES Range Adjustment YES YES Master/Slave YES YES Antenna Height YES YES Tune Peak Adjustment

-

YES Tune Indicator YES YES Output BP YES YES Performance Monitor YES YES Sector Blank YES

-

-

Output Pulse

-

TT

-

-

-

-

-

-

YES YES

-

YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 7-74 1st Category 2nd Category 3rd Category Password 0 0009 n o i t a l l a t s n I Installation Information Language

-

-

Subsystem Installation System Configuration Ship's Parameters Connection Diagnosis Settings CCRP Serial Port Contact A/D Data Selection Data Output Network Ship General LAN communication test Sensor communication test Data output test Alert communication test Alert AC Power Failure Interswitch VDR TCS AFT Operation

-

-

-

YES YES

-

-

-

-

-

YES

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

YES

-

YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES 1st Category e c n a n e t n i a M 2nd Category 3rd Category Storage RADAR Operating Time Setup Logging Initialization Management

-

-

-

-

Password 0 0009 YES YES YES YES YES YES YES

-

-

YES 7-75 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 7.5.3.3 1501 - Utilities menu. Password 1501 opens the Utilities menu which is for advanced settings. 1. Enter the password 1501 in Code Input. 2. Utilities menu will be appear. Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 7-76 5763 - S57/S63 Auto Select ON (available in ECDIS). 7.5.3.4 Password 5763 enables automatic selection function of ENC S57 chart and S63 chart. This function is available only in ECDIS. 1. Enter the password 5763 in Code Input. 2. S57/S63 Auto Select ON dialog will be appear. 3. Click [OK] button to enable S57/S63 automatic selection function. 7.5.3.5 Password 9999 quits the MFD application and you can return to Task menu. 9999 - Return to Task Menu. 1. Enter password 9999 in Code Input. 2. MFD application will close and return to Task menu automatically. 7-77 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 7.5.4 Password on Task Menu When you want to use a USB flash memory to read or write a file, make sure in advance that the USB flash memory is not affected by a computer virus. If the display unit is infected with a virus, other equipment will also be infected, with the result that a trouble will occur. Before removing the USB flash memory, check for the access lamp of the USB flash memory and make sure that it is not being accessed. If you remove the USB flash memory when it is accessed, data may be destroyed and a trouble may occur. On Task Menu, password input section is located on the lower left of the window. Password input section on Task Menu Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 7-78 7.5.4.1 0913 - Launch a WEB browser. Password 0913 on Task Menu launches a WEB browser. 7.5.4.2 1074 - Run the additional maintenance tools from manufacturer. Password 1074 can run the additional maintenance tools (.exe) from manufacturer in your USB storage device. 1. Connect your USB storage device or CD-ROM which contains the maintenance tools into the Display Unit. 2. Enter the Password 1074 on Task Menu. Maintenance Tools Startup dialog will appear. 7-79 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 3. Choose the maintenance tool to run. Select the drive which has the maintenance tool to run from the [Drive] combo box. Select the name of maintenance tool (.exe) from the [File Name] combo box and click on the [OK] button to run. 7.5.4.3 1111 - Back up the INI folder. Password 1111 can back up the INI folder into your USB storage device. INI folder consists of user configuration information, system configuration information, installation information, and software version information. 1. Connect your USB storage device into the Display unit 2. Enter the Password 1111 on Task Menu System dialog will appear. Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 7-80 3. Enter the folder name to back up Type an arbitrary folder name and then click on [OK] button. That folder will be created into your USB storage device and following folders will be copied in it. has installation information. has system configuration information. has user configuration information. describes software version. service folder system folder user folder VERSION.TXT 7.5.4.4 5254 - Renew the INI file of Conning Display INI file. Password 5254 can change the contents, placement of information of the Conning display by renewing the INI file. The Conning Block in RADAR or in ECDIS will also change by this. 1. Connect your USB storage device or CD-ROM which contains new INI file for Conning Display into the Display Unit. 2. Enter the Password 5254 on the Task Menu. Conning Setting File Update dialog will appear. 3. Choose the folder which contains the new Conning INI file, and then click on the

[OK] button. The new INI file will be loaded, and the Conning Display will be renewal. 4. Start up Navigation Data Monitoring (Conning Display) to confirm the Conning Display contents 7-81 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 7.5.4.5 5963 - Shut down (Power OFF). Password 5963 shuts down the Display Unit power. 7.5.4.6 9380 - Launch the Licence Import Tool. Password 9380 launches the Licence import tool and can import the Licence files. 1. Connect the USB flash memory or CD-ROM in which the license information (.lcn) is stored into the Display Unit. 2. Enter the Password 9380 on the Task Menu Import Licence dialog will appear. 3. Choose the new Licence file and then click on the [Import] button. Click on the [Browse] button to choose the Licence file (.lcn) to be imported. Click on the [Import] button to imported. 4. Confirm the System Information window. Start up the MFD application (RADAR, ECDIS). Click on the [Menu] - [Maintenance]- [System Information] to display the System Information dialog. Click on the Functionality tab, and confirm that the Status of the function which corresponding to the Licence file you imported was changed from Disable to Enable. Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 7-82 7-83 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 7.5.4.7 9999 Quit Task Menu. Password 9999 on the Task Menu quits Task Menu and launches Windows Task Manager. Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 7-84 8Appendix Chapter 8. Appendix 8.1 Outline Drawings 8.1.1 NKE-1139 Scanner Unit Outline Drawings 8-1 Chapter 8 Appdendix 8.1.2 NKE-1130 Scanner Unit Outline Drawings Chapter 8 Appdendix 8-2 8.1.3 NKE-1129-7 Scanner Unit Outline Drawings 8-3 Chapter 8 Appdendix 8.1.4 NKE-1129-9 Scanner Unit Outline Drawings Chapter 8 Appdendix 8-4 8.1.5 NKE-1125-6 Scanner Unit Outline Drawings 8-5 Chapter 8 Appdendix 8.1.6 NKE-1125-9 Scanner Unit Outline Drawings Chapter 8 Appdendix 8-6 8.1.7 NTG-3230 Transmitter Receiver Unit Outline Drawings 8-7 Chapter 8 Appdendix 8.1.8 NTG-3225 Transmitter Receiver Outline Drawings Chapter 8 Appdendix 8-8 8.1.9 NKE-2103-6/NKE-2103-6HS Scanner Unit Outline Drawings 8-9 Chapter 8 Appdendix 8.1.10 NKE-1632 Scanner Unit Outline Drawings 8.1.11 NKE-2632 Scanner Unit Outline Drawings Chapter 8 Appdendix 8-10 8-11 Chapter 8 Appdendix 8.1.12 NKE-2632-H Scanner Unit Outline Drawings Chapter 8 Appdendix 8-12 8.1.13 NWZ-208 26-inch Monitor Unit Outline Drawings 8-13 Chapter 8 Appdendix 8.1.14 NWZ-207 19-inch Monitor Unit Outline Drawings Chapter 8 Appdendix 8-14 8.1.15 NCE-5605 Trackball Operation Unit Outline Drawings 8-15 Chapter 8 Appdendix 8.1.16 NCE-5625 Keyboard Operation Unit Outline Drawings Chapter 8 Appdendix 8-16 8.1.17 CWB-1593 Large Tray Outline Drawings 8-17 Chapter 8 Appdendix 8.1.18 NDC-1590 Central Controll Unit Outline Drawings 8.1.19 NBD-913 Power Supply Unit Outline Drawings Chapter 8 Appdendix 8-18 8-19 Chapter 8 Appdendix 8.1.20 NQE-1143 Junction Box Outline Drawings Chapter 8 Appdendix 8-20 8.1.21 NQA-2443 Sensor LAN Switch Unit Outline Drawings 8-21 Chapter 8 Appdendix 8.1.22 CWA-246 26-inch Display Unit Mount Kit Outline Drawings

(with display, trackball operation unit and keyboard operation unit installed) Chapter 8 Appdendix 8-22 8.1.23 CWA-245 19-inch Display Unit Mount Kit Outline Drawings

(with display, trackball operation unit and keyboard operation unit installed) 8-23 Chapter 8 Appdendix 8.1.24 CWB-1595 26-inch Desktop Frame Outline Drawings Chapter 8 Appdendix 8-24 8.1.25 CWB-1594 19-inch Desktop Frame Outline Drawings 8-25 Chapter 8 Appdendix 8.1.26 CWB-1596 OPU Desktop Frame Outline Drawings Chapter 8 Appdendix 8-26 8.1.27 NQE-3141-4A Interswitch Unit Outline Drawings (Optional) 8-27 Chapter 8 Appdendix 8.1.28 NQE-3141-8A Interswitch Unit Outline Drawings (Optional) Chapter 8 Appdendix 8-28 8.1.29 NQE-3167 Power Control Unit Outline Drawings (Optional) 8-29 Chapter 8 Appdendix

 

 

8.2 General System Diagrams 8.2.1 Stand alone type JMR-9230-S3 General System Diagrams Chapter 8 Appdendix 8-30 Desktop type 8-31 Chapter 8 Appdendix 8.2.2 Stand alone type JMR-9230-S General System Diagrams Chapter 8 Appdendix 8-32 Desktop type 8-33 Chapter 8 Appdendix 8.2.3 Stand alone type JMR-9225-7X3 General System Diagrams Chapter 8 Appdendix 8-34 Desktop type 8-35 Chapter 8 Appdendix 8.2.4 Stand alone type JMR-9225-9X3 General System Diagrams Chapter 8 Appdendix 8-36 Desktop type 8-37 Chapter 8 Appdendix 8.2.5 Stand alone type JMR-9225-6X General System Diagrams Chapter 8 Appdendix 8-38 Desktop type 8-39 Chapter 8 Appdendix 8.2.6 Stand alone type JMR-9225-9X General System Diagrams Chapter 8 Appdendix 8-40 Desktop type 8-41 Chapter 8 Appdendix 8.2.7 Stand alone type JMR-9225-6XH General System Diagrams Chapter 8 Appdendix 8-42 Desktop type 8-43 Chapter 8 Appdendix 8.2.8 Stand alone type JMR-9210-6X General System Diagrams Chapter 8 Appdendix 8-44 Desktop type 8-45 Chapter 8 Appdendix 8.2.9 Stand alone type JMR-9210-6XH General System Diagrams Chapter 8 Appdendix 8-46 Desktop type 8-47 Chapter 8 Appdendix 8.2.10 Stand alone type JMR-9272-S General System Diagrams Chapter 8 Appdendix 8-48 Desktop type 8-49 Chapter 8 Appdendix 8.2.11 Stand alone type JMR-9282-S General System Diagrams Chapter 8 Appdendix 8-50 Desktop type 8-51 Chapter 8 Appdendix 8.2.12 Stand alone type JMR-9282-SH General System Diagrams Chapter 8 Appdendix 8-52 Desktop type 8-53 Chapter 8 Appdendix 8.2.13 Stand alone type JMR-7230-S3 General System Diagrams Chapter 8 Appdendix 8-54 Desktop type 8-55 Chapter 8 Appdendix 8.2.14 Stand alone type JMR-7230-S General System Diagrams Chapter 8 Appdendix 8-56 Desktop type 8-57 Chapter 8 Appdendix 8.2.15 Stand alone type JMR-7225-7X3 General System Diagrams Chapter 8 Appdendix 8-58 Desktop type 8-59 Chapter 8 Appdendix 8.2.16 Stand alone type JMR-7225-9X3 General System Diagrams Chapter 8 Appdendix 8-60 Desktop type 8-61 Chapter 8 Appdendix 8.2.17 Stand alone type JMR-7225-6X General System Diagrams Chapter 8 Appdendix 8-62 Desktop type 8-63 Chapter 8 Appdendix 8.2.18 Stand alone type JMR-7225-9X General System Diagrams Chapter 8 Appdendix 8-64 Desktop type 8-65 Chapter 8 Appdendix 8.2.19 Stand alone type JMR-7225-6XH General System Diagrams Chapter 8 Appdendix 8-66 Desktop type 8-67 Chapter 8 Appdendix 8.2.20 Stand alone type JMR-7210-6X General System Diagrams Chapter 8 Appdendix 8-68 Desktop type 8-69 Chapter 8 Appdendix 8.2.21 Stand alone type JMR-7210-6XH General System Diagrams Chapter 8 Appdendix 8-70 Desktop type 8-71 Chapter 8 Appdendix 8.2.22 Stand alone type JMR-7272-S General System Diagrams Chapter 8 Appdendix 8-72 Desktop type 8-73 Chapter 8 Appdendix 8.2.23 Stand alone type JMR-7282-S General System Diagrams Chapter 8 Appdendix 8-74 Desktop type 8-75 Chapter 8 Appdendix 8.2.24 Stand alone type JMR-7282-SH General System Diagrams Chapter 8 Appdendix 8-76 Desktop type 8.2.25 Stand alone type JAN-9201 General System Diagrams 8-77 Chapter 8 Appdendix Chapter 8 Appdendix 8-78 Desktop type 8-79 Chapter 8 Appdendix 8.2.26 Stand alone type JAN-7201 General System Diagrams Chapter 8 Appdendix 8-80 Desktop type 8-81 Chapter 8 Appdendix 8.2.27 Stand alone type JAN-9202 General System Diagrams Chapter 8 Appdendix 8-82 Desktop type 8-83 Chapter 8 Appdendix 8.2.28 Stand alone type JAN-7202 General System Diagrams Chapter 8 Appdendix 8-84 Desktop type 8-85 Chapter 8 Appdendix 8.3 Interconnection Diagrams 8.3.1 Stand alone type JMR-9230-S3 Interconnection Diagrams Chapter 8 Appdendix 8-86 8-87 Chapter 8 Appdendix Desktop type Chapter 8 Appdendix 8-88 8-89 Chapter 8 Appdendix 8.3.2 Stand alone type JMR-9230-S Interconnection Diagrams Chapter 8 Appdendix 8-90 8-91 Chapter 8 Appdendix Desktop type Chapter 8 Appdendix 8-92 8-93 Chapter 8 Appdendix 8.3.3 Stand alone type JMR-9225-7X3/9X3 Interconnection Diagrams Chapter 8 Appdendix 8-94 8-95 Chapter 8 Appdendix Desktop type Chapter 8 Appdendix 8-96 8-97 Chapter 8 Appdendix 8.3.4 Stand alone type JMR-9225-6X/9X Interconnection Diagrams Chapter 8 Appdendix 8-98 8-99 Chapter 8 Appdendix Desktop type Chapter 8 Appdendix 8-100

 

 

8-101 Chapter 8 Appdendix 8.3.5 Stand alone type JMR-9225-6XH Interconnection Diagrams Chapter 8 Appdendix 8-102 8-103 Chapter 8 Appdendix Desktop type Chapter 8 Appdendix 8-104 8-105 Chapter 8 Appdendix 8.3.6 Stand alone type JMR-9210-6X/6XH Interconnection Diagrams Chapter 8 Appdendix 8-106 8-107 Chapter 8 Appdendix Desktop type Chapter 8 Appdendix 8-108 8-109 Chapter 8 Appdendix 8.3.7 Stand alone type JMR-9272-S Interconnection Diagrams Chapter 8 Appdendix 8-110 8-111 Chapter 8 Appdendix Desktop type Chapter 8 Appdendix 8-112 8-113 Chapter 8 Appdendix 8.3.8 Stand alone type JMR-9282-S/SH Interconnection Diagrams Chapter 8 Appdendix 8-114 8-115 Chapter 8 Appdendix Desktop type Chapter 8 Appdendix 8-116 8-117 Chapter 8 Appdendix 8.3.9 Stand alone type JMR-7230-S3 Interconnection Diagrams Chapter 8 Appdendix 8-118 8-119 Chapter 8 Appdendix Desktop type Chapter 8 Appdendix 8-120 8-121 Chapter 8 Appdendix 8.3.10 Stand alone type JMR-7230-S Interconnection Diagrams Chapter 8 Appdendix 8-122 8-123 Chapter 8 Appdendix Desktop type Chapter 8 Appdendix 8-124 8-125 Chapter 8 Appdendix 8.3.11 Stand alone type JMR-7225-7X3/9X3 Interconnection Diagrams Chapter 8 Appdendix 8-126 8-127 Chapter 8 Appdendix Desktop type Chapter 8 Appdendix 8-128 8-129 Chapter 8 Appdendix 8.3.12 Stand alone type JMR-7225-6X/9X Interconnection Diagrams Chapter 8 Appdendix 8-130 8-131 Chapter 8 Appdendix Desktop type Chapter 8 Appdendix 8-132 8-133 Chapter 8 Appdendix 8.3.13 Stand alone type JMR-7225-6XH Interconnection Diagrams Chapter 8 Appdendix 8-134 8-135 Chapter 8 Appdendix Desktop type Chapter 8 Appdendix 8-136 8-137 Chapter 8 Appdendix 8.3.14 Stand alone type JMR-7210-6X/6XH Interconnection Diagrams Chapter 8 Appdendix 8-138 8-139 Chapter 8 Appdendix Desktop type Chapter 8 Appdendix 8-140 8-141 Chapter 8 Appdendix 8.3.15 Stand alone type JMR-7272-S Interconnection Diagrams Chapter 8 Appdendix 8-142 8-143 Chapter 8 Appdendix Desktop type Chapter 8 Appdendix 8-144 8-145 Chapter 8 Appdendix 8.3.16 Stand alone type JMR-7282-S/SH Interconnection Diagrams Chapter 8 Appdendix 8-146 8-147 Chapter 8 Appdendix Desktop type Chapter 8 Appdendix 8-148 8-149 Chapter 8 Appdendix Interconnection Diagrams of Scanner Unit 8.3.17 NKE-1139 (AC110V) 3

, S W 0 3 W 0 3 5 5 2

-

A F C I I T U C R C E K A R B k 2 1

. k 2 1

. I I B T U C R C E K A R B 2 6 2

-

A F C 4 1 6 2

-

A F C I I A T U C R C E K A R B 1 0

-

9 0 2 0 5 3

-

1 2.BKS2 1.BKS1 3.BKH2 2.NC 1.BKH1 0

-

0 1 2 0 5 3

-

1 2.E 1.VERR P 2

-

L I H V

-

P 3 B 1 R 1

. C N 2

. 2 R 3

. 2.E 1.VERR H V

-

P 2 B 3.N 2.NC 1.P 3.BLK 1.RED 2 U M 1

. C N 2

. 2 V M 3

. 2.N 1.P B6P-VH D N G 6 C N 5 C N 4

. R O T O M 5.M3 4.NC 3.M2 2.NC 1.M1 6.S6 5.S5 4.S4 3.S3 2.S2 1.S1 V 2 1

+

1

. C N 2

. E V 2 1

+

3

. A

-

H X

-

B 3 S 1 R R E V 1

. H V

-

S P 2 B E 2

. 7 5 4 1 D R C Z 8 8 2 1 D R C Z

. T D E R

. T K L B T H W 3 6 9 5 8 2 D E R 7 8 2 1 D R C Z

. T D E R

. T K L B 7 5 6

-

D S C I H C T W S Y T E F A S 4 8

-

U J N M P T H W K L B T H W N R B 1 U L B D E R K L B 1 2 8 P 2 8 J

. G S

. T T H W

. T T H 9 W 0 5 1 D R C Z 7 1 0 4 W D E R p 0 0 2 2 V 0 5 2 0 1 C

+

1 0 1 C 0 0 0 1 V 6 1

. G S

. G S

. 2 0 1 B E S T H W D E R 1 A 1 7

-

T H C R E D O C N E K L B L E Y U L B D L E H S I T H W

. G S

. BLK BLK 1 8 P 1 8 J 6 7 2 1 D R C Z 1 U 1 V U V H T U V 2 1

+

2 C E Z Z A B E I T P E T P R V L S M P E I X T E X T 1 R R E V E Chapter 8 Appdendix 8-150 8.3.18 NKE-1139 (AC220V) I I B T U C R C E K A R B 2 6 2

-

A F C I I A T U C R C E K A R B 4 1 6 2

-

A F C 3

, S R O T O M I I T U C R C E K A R B k 2 1

. W 0 3 k 2 1

. W 0 3 5 5 2

-

A F C H V

-

P 3 B 1 R 1

. C N 2

. 2 R 3

. 2 U M 1

. C N 2

. 2 V M 3

. C N 4

. C N 5

. D N G 6

. P 2

-

L I H V

-

P 2 B 1 0

-

9 0 2 0 5 3

-

1 0

-

0 1 2 0 5 3

-

1 V 2 1

+

1

. C N 2

. E V 2 1

+

3

. A

-

H X

-

B 3 S R R E V 1

. H V

-

S P 2 B E 2

. 7 5 4 1 D R C Z 8 8 2 1 D R C Z

. T D E R

. T K L B T H W 3 6 9 5 8 2 D E R 7 8 2 1 D R C Z

. T D E R

. T K L B 7 5 6

-

D S C I H C T W S Y T E F A S

. T T H W

. T T H 9 W 0 5 1 D R C Z 7 1 0 4 W p 0 0 2 2 V 0 5 2 0 1 C

+

1 0 1 C 0 0 0 1 V 6 1

. G S

. G S

. 2 0 1 B E S T H W D E R 1 A 1 7

-

T H C R E D O C N E K L B L E Y U L B D L E H S I T H W

. G S

. 1 8 P 1 8 J 6 7 2 1 D R C Z T H W K L B T H W N R B 1 U L B D E R K L B 1 2 8 P 2 8 J D E R 4 8

-

U J N M P

. G S

. 1 U 1 V U V H T U V 2 1

+

2 C E Z Z A B E I T P E T P R V L S M P E I X T E X T 1 R R E V E 8-151 Chapter 8 Appdendix 8.3.19 NTG-3230 MD-12N1 MD-12N1 8W 150 1/2W 2.7K 200V 0.22UF YEL GRN IL-2P 3.MV2 2.GND 1.MU2 4.NC 3.V1 2.NC 1.U1 IL-3P V0 U0 V1 U1 BLK RED BLK RED V0 U0 V1 U1 3.MN 2.NC 1.MH BLK.T 3.MN 2.NC 1.MH

+48VG

+48V WHT.T RED.T 1.2A 2.1A 1.2A 2.1A 1.2A 2.1A

+48VG

+48V B GND A Z ZE C2

+12V E VERR TXE TXI E PMS LVR PTE PTI MTRE MTR-

MTR+

BZ+

BP+

TRIG-

TRIG+

VD-

VD+

2.C2 1.+12V WHT RED 3.FAN_ERR2 2.GND 1.+12V 3.FAN_ERR1 2.GND 1.+12V 9.NC 8.STABY_REQ 7.+15V 6.+5V 5.CNT 4.GND 3.TISTOP1 2.HVGATE1 1.HTER1 5.GND 4.+24V 3.PW3 2.PW2 1.PW1 8.NC 7.TXE 6.TXI 5.GND 4.PMS 3.LVR 2.PTE 1.PTI 4.GND 3.+5V 2.TXD 1.RXD 11.TRG2 10.GND 9.+15V 8.TNI 7.-15V 6.TNL 5.TGTE 4.TGT 3.GSE 2.GS 1.MONI 8.+5V 7.VDIN 6.VDINE 5.MicPS 4.TNC 3.BS1 2.BS2 1.BS3 7.GND 6.+15V 5.TNI 4.-15V 3.TNL 2.TGTE 1.TGT 9.NC 8.+5V 7.VD 6.VDE 5.MPS 4.TNC 3.BS1 2.BS2 1.BS3 Chapter 8 Appdendix 8-152 8.3.20 NKE-1130 (AC110V) I I B T U C R C E K A R B 4 1 6 2

-

A F C I I A T U C R C E K A R B

. G S

. 9 2 2

-

R F C I R E T L F G A M I T U C R C I

. G S

. MD-12N1 MD-12N1 8W 150 5 5 5 1 M YEL 0

-

9 0 2 0 5 3

-

1 2.BKS2 1.BKS1 3.BKH2 2.NC 1.BKH1 0

-

0 1 2 0 5 3

-

1 V 5 1

+

1

. C N 2

. E V 5 1

+

3

. A

-

H X

-

B 3 S 1 2 6 2

-

A F C 5 F p 0 2 2 1/2W 2.7K

. G S

. G S

. V K 1 F U 1 0 0

. 6 4 2 2 1 0 D R P L 7

-

H 5 3 V 0 0 2 F U 2 2 0

. 200V 0.22UF GRN 2 1

. 2 o N

. 1 o N 1 X 1

. 2 X 2

. I T 5

. I E T 6

. 3.MN 2.NC 1.MH BLK.T

) 1 0 2 W V 5 1

+

7

. D N G 8

. C N 9

. C N 0 1

. 4 0 0 W Y M M U D R E T L F I T R O H S 1

. T R O H S 1

. I G A M 2

. I G A M 2

. 1 X 3

. 2 X 4

. 1 X 3

. 2 X 4

. k 2 1

. H V

-

P 3 B 1 R 1

. C N 2

. 2 R 3

. 2.E 1.VERR H V

-

P 2 B 2.E 1.VERR P 2

-

L I 2 U M 1

. P

. 1 N

. 2 B6P-VH 2 V M 3 C N 4 C N 5

. C N 2

. 0

-

0 0 7 0 8 4

-

1 3.N 2.NC 1.P E 2

. 1 R R E V 1

. P 2

-

L I E 2

. 1 R R E V 1

. 3.BLK 1.RED 2 0 2 1 P V N

-

P 3 B 2 0 2 1 J 2 U M 1

. 2 V M 3 1 0 D 2 N 1 J G 4.NC2 3.V1 2.NC 1.U1 H V

-

P 4 B 1.2A 2.1A 1.2A 2.1A 1.2A 2.1A T N C M H 1

. V 5 1

+

2

. D N G 3

. U L B T H W K L B IL-3P

+

M 1

.

-

M 2

. 3.MN 2.NC 1.MH V 5 1

+

1

. V 2 1

+

2

. V 8

+

3

. D N G 4

. V 5 1

-

5

. V 0 1 6

. E V 0 1 7

. V 5

+

8

. T C M 1

. K B M 2

. P S H 3

. R E T H 4

. P O T S T 5 I

. D N G 7

. S P M 8

. 2 C 6

. I R E M 9

. I I T U C R C E K A R B 5 5 2

-

A F C R O T O M 2

, w k 0 3 S 5.M3 4.NC 3.M2 2.NC 1.M1 6.S6 5.S5 4.S4 3.S3 2.S2 1.S1 W 0 3 D N G 6

. BLK.T RED.T 9 6 3 8 5 2 BLK.T RED.T

) 3 0 2 W

(

) 8 0 0 W

(

T H W D E R 9 0 5 1 D R C Z 7 1 0 4 W

. T T H W

. T T H W V U V U UTH UTH 4 3 2 1 W1 V1 U1 4 3 2 1 W1 V1 U1

+48VG

+48VG

+48V

+48V V 5 1

+

7

. D N G 8

. C N 0 1

. C N 1 1

. C N 2 1

. C N 9

. T N C M H 1

. V 5 1

+

2

. D N G 3

. V 5 1

+

1

. V 2 1

+

2

. D N G 3

. D N G 4

. V 5 1

-

5

. V 0 1 6

. E V 0 1 7

. V 5

+

8

. T C M 1

. K B M 2

. I E T 6

. P O T S T 3 I

. D N G 4

. S P M 5

. I R E M 6

. I T 5

. 4.GND 3.+5V 2.TXD 1.RXD 11.TRG2 10.GND 9.+15V 8.TNI 7.-15V 6.TNL 5.TGTE 4.TGT 3.GSE 2.GS 1.MONI 8.+5V 7.VDIN 6.VDINE 5.MicPS 4.TNC 3.BS1 2.BS2 1.BS3 E Z 2

. Z 1

. 7.GND 6.+15V 5.TNI 4.-15V 3.TNL 2.TGTE 1.TGT 9.NC 8.+5V 7.VD 6.VDE 5.MPS 4.TNC 3.BS1 2.BS2 1.BS3 V 2 1

+

5

. D N G 6

. B 4

. I Y T 1

. I E Y T 2

. E P B 4

. Z B 5

. E Z B 6

. P B 3

. E D V 2

. D V 1

.

+

R T M 3

.

-

R T M 4

.

+

P B 1

.

-

P B 2

.

+

Z B 3

.

-

Z B 4

. I

+

G R T 5

. I

-

G R T 6

.

+

R T M 7

.

-

R T M 8

. E R T M 9

.

+

D V 0 1

.

-

D V 1 1

. A

. 3 L E Y K L B U L B T H W D E R D L E H S I E S 2.C2 1.+12V 3.FAN_ERR2 2.GND 1.+12V 3.FAN_ERR1 2.GND 1.+12V 9.NC 8.STABY_REQ 7.+15V 6.+5V 5.CNT 4.GND 3.TISTOP1 2.HVGATE1 1.HTER1 5.GND 4.+24V 3.PW3 2.PW2 1.PW1 8.NC 7.TXE 6.TXI 5.GND 4.PMS 3.LVR 2.PTE 1.PTI YEL BLU RED YEL BLU RED N A F

) 8 0 3 W

(

N A F

. G S

. 3.E 2.PMS 1.LVR BLK RED BLU J82 P82 4.TXE 3.TXI 2.PTE 1.PTI BRN WHT BLK WHT J81 P81 M P 4 8

-

U J N 8-153 Chapter 8 Appdendix 8.3.21 NKE-1130 (AC220V) I I B T U C R C E K A R B 4 1 6 2

-

A F C I I A T U C R C E K A R B

. G S

. 9 2 2

-

R F C I R E T L F G A M I T U C R C I

. G S

. MD-12N1 MD-12N1 8W 150 5 5 5 1 M YEL 0

-

9 0 2 0 5 3

-

1 2.BKS2 1.BKS1 3.BKH2 2.NC 1.BKH1 0

-

0 1 2 0 5 3

-

1 V 5 1

+

1

. C N 2

. E V 5 1

+

3

. A

-

H X

-

B 3 S 1 2 6 2

-

A F C 5 F p 0 2 2 1/2W 2.7K

. G S

. G S

. k 2 1

. H V

-

P 3 B 1 R 1

. C N 2

. 2 R 3

. 2.E 1.VERR H V

-

P 2 B 2.E 1.VERR P 2

-

L I 2 U M 1

. P

. 1 N

. 2 B6P-VH 2 V M 3 C N 4 C N 5

. C N 2

. 0

-

0 0 7 0 8 4

-

1 3.N 2.NC 1.P E 2

. 1 R R E V 1

. P 2

-

L I E 2

. 1 R R E V 1

. 3.BLK 1.RED 2 0 2 1 P V N

-

P 3 B 2 0 2 1 J 2 U M 1

. 2 V M 3 1 0 D 2 N 1 J G 4.NC2 3.V1 2.NC 1.U1 I I T U C R C E K A R B 5 5 2

-

A F C R O T O M 2

, w k 0 3 S 5.M3 4.NC 3.M2 2.NC 1.M1 6.S6 5.S5 4.S4 3.S3 2.S2 1.S1 W 0 3 D N G 6

. BLK.T RED.T 9 6 3 8 5 2 BLK.T RED.T V K 1 F U 1 0 0

. 6 4 2 2 1 0 D R P L 7

-

H 5 3 V 0 0 2 F U 2 2 0

. 200V 0.22UF GRN 2 1

. 2 o N

. 1 o N 1 X 1

. 2 X 2

. I T 5

. I E T 6

. 3.MN 2.NC 1.MH BLK.T

) 1 0 2 W V 5 1

+

7

. D N G 8

. C N 9

. C N 0 1

. 4 0 0 W Y M M U D R E T L F I T R O H S 1

. T R O H S 1

. I G A M 2

. I G A M 2

. 1 X 3

. 2 X 4

. 1 X 3

. 2 X 4

. T N C M H 1

. V 5 1

+

2

. D N G 3

. U L B T H W K L B IL-3P

+

M 1

.

-

M 2

. 3.MN 2.NC 1.MH V 5 1

+

1

. V 2 1

+

2

. V 8

+

3

. D N G 4

. V 5 1

-

5

. V 0 1 6

. E V 0 1 7

. V 5

+

8

. T C M 1

. K B M 2

. P S H 3

. R E T H 4

. P O T S T 5 I

. D N G 7

. S P M 8

. 2 C 6

. I R E M 9

. V 5 1

+

7

. D N G 8

. C N 0 1

. C N 1 1

. C N 2 1

. C N 9

. T N C M H 1

. V 5 1

+

2

. D N G 3

. V 5 1

+

1

. V 2 1

+

2

. D N G 3

. D N G 4

. V 5 1

-

5

. V 0 1 6

. E V 0 1 7

. V 5

+

8

. T C M 1

. K B M 2

. I E T 6

. P O T S T 3 I

. D N G 4

. S P M 5

. I R E M 6

. I T 5

. 4.GND 3.+5V 2.TXD 1.RXD 11.TRG2 10.GND 9.+15V 8.TNI 7.-15V 6.TNL 5.TGTE 4.TGT 3.GSE 2.GS 1.MONI 8.+5V 7.VDIN 6.VDINE 5.MicPS 4.TNC 3.BS1 2.BS2 1.BS3 E Z 2

. Z 1

. 7.GND 6.+15V 5.TNI 4.-15V 3.TNL 2.TGTE 1.TGT 9.NC 8.+5V 7.VD 6.VDE 5.MPS 4.TNC 3.BS1 2.BS2 1.BS3 V 2 1

+

5

. D N G 6

. B 4

. I Y T 1

. I E Y T 2

. E P B 4

. Z B 5

. E Z B 6

. P B 3

. E D V 2

. D V 1

.

+

R T M 3

.

-

R T M 4

.

+

P B 1

.

-

P B 2

.

+

Z B 3

.

-

Z B 4

. I

+

G R T 5

. I

-

G R T 6

.

+

R T M 7

.

-

R T M 8

. E R T M 9

.

+

D V 0 1

.

-

D V 1 1

. A

. 3 L E Y K L B U L B T H W D E R D L E H S I E S Chapter 8 Appdendix 8-154 H V

-

P 4 B 1.2A 2.1A 1.2A 2.1A 1.2A 2.1A

) 3 0 2 W

(

2.C2 1.+12V 3.FAN_ERR2 2.GND 1.+12V 3.FAN_ERR1 2.GND 1.+12V 9.NC 8.STABY_REQ 7.+15V 6.+5V 5.CNT 4.GND 3.TISTOP1 2.HVGATE1 1.HTER1 5.GND 4.+24V 3.PW3 2.PW2 1.PW1 8.NC 7.TXE 6.TXI 5.GND 4.PMS 3.LVR 2.PTE 1.PTI

) 8 0 0 W

(

T H W D E R YEL BLU RED YEL BLU RED N A F

) 8 0 3 W

(

9 0 5 1 D R C Z 7 1 0 4 W

. T T H W

. T T H W V U V U UTH UTH 4 3 2 1 W1 V1 U1 4 3 2 1 W1 V1 U1

+48VG

+48VG

+48V

+48V N A F

. G S

. 3.E 2.PMS 1.LVR BLK RED BLU J82 P82 4.TXE 3.TXI 2.PTE 1.PTI BRN WHT BLK WHT J81 P81 M P 4 8

-

U J N 8.3.22 NKE-1129 (AC110V) k 2 1

. W 0 1 k 2 1

. W 0 1 3 5 2

-

A F C I I T U C R C E K A R B 3

, X I I B T U C R C E K A R B 4 9 5 2

-

A F C I I A T U C R C E K A R B 1 0 6 2

-

A F C 0

-

9 0 2 0 5 3

-

1 2.BKS2 1.BKS1 3.BKH2 2.NC 1.BKH1 0

-

0 1 2 0 5 3

-

1 2.E 1.VERR P 2

-

L I H V

-

P 3 B 1 R 1

. C N 2

. 2 R 3

. 2.E 1.VERR H V

-

P 2 B 3.N 2.NC 1.P 3.BLK 1.RED 2 U M 1

. 2.N 1.P B6P-VH 2 V M 3 C N 4 C N 5

. C N 2

. R O T O M 5.M3 4.NC 3.M2 2.NC 1.M1 6.S6 5.S5 4.S4 3.S3 2.S2 1.S1 D N G 6

. V 2 1

+

1

. C N 2

. E V 2 1

+

3

. A

-

H X

-

B 3 S 1 R R E V 1

. E 2

. 5 5 4 1 D R C Z U V H T U 5 8 2 1 D R C Z 5 5 6

-

D S C I H C T W S Y T E F A S 6 8 2 1 D R C Z

. T D E R

. T K L B 1 4 7 2 5 8 T H W

. T D E R

. T K L B D E R 5 8

-

U J N M P T H W K L B T H W N R B 1 2 8 P 2 8 J U L B D E R K L B 1 U L B D E R K L B

. G S

. 1 8 P 1 8 J 8 7 2 1 D R C Z 1 A 1 7

-

T H C R E D O C N E

. G S

. G S

. p 0 0 2 2 V 0 5 2 0 1 C

+

1 0 1 C 0 0 0 1 V 6 1 2 0 1 B E S D E R D L E H S I T H W L E Y U L B K L B K L B

. G S

. 1 U 1 V 1 W V 2 1

+

2 C E Z Z A B E I T P E T P R V L S M P E I X T E X T 1 R R E V E 8-155 Chapter 8 Appdendix 3

, X 5 8

-

U J N M P 8.3.23 NKE-1129 (AC220V) k 2 1

. W 0 1 k 2 1

. W 0 1 3 5 2

-

A F C I I T U C R C E K A R B I I B T U C R C E K A R B 4 9 5 2

-

A F C I I A T U C R C E K A R B 1 0 6 2

-

A F C 0

-

9 0 2 0 5 3

-

1 2.BKS2 1.BKS1 3.BKH2 2.NC 1.BKH1 0

-

0 1 2 0 5 3

-

1 2.E 1.VERR P 2

-

L I H V

-

P 3 B 1 R 1

. C N 2

. 2 R 3

. 2.E 1.VERR H V

-

P 2 B 3.N 2.NC 1.P 3.BLK 1.RED 2 U M 1

. 2.N 1.P B6P-VH 2 V M 3 C N 4 C N 5

. C N 2

. R O T O M 5.M3 4.NC 3.M2 2.NC 1.M1 6.S6 5.S5 4.S4 3.S3 2.S2 1.S1 D N G 6

. V 2 1

+

1

. C N 2

. E V 2 1

+

3

. A

-

H X

-

B 3 S 1 R R E V 1

. E 2

. 5 5 4 1 D R C Z U V H T U 5 8 2 1 D R C Z 5 5 6

-

D S C I H C T W S Y T E F A S 6 8 2 1 D R C Z

. T D E R

. T K L B 1 4 7 2 5 8 T H W

. T D E R

. T K L B D E R

. G S

. G S

. p 0 0 2 2 V 0 5 2 0 1 C

+

1 0 1 C 0 0 0 1 V 6 1 2 0 1 B E S D E R

. G S

. T H W K L B T H W N R B 1 2 8 P 2 8 J U L B D E R K L B 1 U L B D E R K L B 1 8 P 1 8 J 8 7 2 1 D R C Z 1 A 1 7

-

T H C R E D O C N E D L E H S I T H W L E Y U L B K L B K L B

. G S

. 1 U 1 V 1 W V 2 1

+

2 C E Z Z A B E I T P E T P R V L S M P E I X T E X T 1 R R E V E Chapter 8 Appdendix 8-156 8.3.24 NTG-3225 MD-12N1 MD-12N1 8W 150 1/2W 2.7K 200V 0.22UF IL-2P 3.MV2 2.GND 1.MU2 4.NC 3.V1 2.NC 1.U1 IL-3P V0 U0 V1 U1 BLK RED BLK RED V0 U0 V1 U1 3.MN 2.NC 1.MH BLK.T 3.MN 2.NC 1.MH 4.GND 3.+5V 2.TXD 1.RXD 11.TRG2 10.GND 9.+15V 8.TNI 7.-15V 6.TNL 5.TGTE 4.TGT 3.GSE 2.GS 1.MONI 8.+5V 7.VDIN 6.VDINE 5.MicPS 4.TNC 3.BS1 2.BS2 1.BS3 15.VD 14.VDE 13.TNL 12.VD_DC 11.TNI 10.TGTE 9.TGT 8.GND 7.+15V 6.-15V 5.+5V 4.TNC 3.BS1 2.BS2 1.BS3

+48VG

+48V WHT.T RED.T 1.2A 2.1A 1.2A 2.1A 1.2A 2.1A 2.C2 1.+12V WHT RED 3.FAN_ERR2 2.GND 1.+12V 3.FAN_ERR1 2.GND 1.+12V 9.NC 8.STABY_REQ 7.+15V 6.+5V 5.CNT 4.GND 3.TISTOP1 2.HVGATE1 1.HTER1 5.GND 4.+24V 3.PW3 2.PW2 1.PW1 8.NC 7.TXE 6.TXI 5.GND 4.PMS 3.LVR 2.PTE 1.PTI

+48VG

+48V B E A Z ZE C2

+12V E VERR TXE TXI E PMS LVR PTE PTI MTRE MTR-

MTR+

BZ+

BP+

TRIG-

TRIG+

VD-

VD+

8-157 Chapter 8 Appdendix 8.3.25 NKE-1125 (AC110V) 2 W 0 3 k 2 1

. I I T U C R C E K A R B 3 5 2

-

A F C I I B T U C R C E K A R B 0 6 2

-

A F C 4 9 5 2

-

A F C I I A T U C R C E K A R B 9 2 2

-

R F C

. G S

. I R E T L F G A M I T U C R C I 1 5 F p 0 2 2

. G S

. MD-12N1 MD-12N1 8W 150 S B 8 6 5 1 M 1/2W 2.7K

. G S

. G S

. YEL GRN V K 1 F U 1 0 0

. 6 4 2 2 1 0 D R P L 7

-

H 5 3 V 0 0 2 F U 2 2 0

. 2 1 200V 0.22UF

. 2 o N

. 1 o N 1 X 1

. 2 X 2

. 3.MN 2.NC 1.MH V 5 1

+

7

. D N G 8

. C N 9

. C N 0 1

. I E T 6

. R E T L F I Y M M U D T R O H S 1

. T R O H S 1

. I G A M 2

. I G A M 2

. 1 X 3

. 2 X 4

. I T 5

. 1 X 3

. 2 X 4

. I T 5

. 0

-

9 0 2 0 5 3

-

1 2.BKS2 1.BKS1 3.BKH1 2.NC 1.BKH1 0

-

0 1 2 0 5 3

-

1 2.E 1.VERR P 2

-

L I BLK RED 3.N 2.NC 1.P 0

-

0 0 7 0 8 4

-

1 H V

-

P 3 B 1 R 1

. C N 2

. 2 R 3

. 2.E 1.VERR H V

-

P 2 B B6P-VH 2 V M 3 C N 4 C N 5

. C N 2

. 2.N 2 U M 1

. 1.P V 2 1

+

1

. C N 2

. E V 2 1

+

3

. A

-

H X

-

B 3 S 3.MN 2.NC 1.MH 1 R R E V 1

. H V

-

S P 2 B E 2

. E 2

. 1 R R E V 1

. 2 1 2 1 P 2 1 2 1 J P 2

-

L I 2 0 2 1 P 2 0 2 1 J 2 U M 1

. D N G 2

. 2 V M 3

. V N

-

P 3 B 1 0 2 1 J H V

-

P 4 B 4.NC 3.V1 2.NC 1.U1 T N C M H 1

. V 5 1

+

2

. D N G 3

. U L B T H W K L B

+

M 1

.

-

M 2

. 1.2A 2.1A 1.2A 2.1A 1.2A 2.1A V 5 1

+

1

. V 2 1

+

2

. V 8

+

3

. D N G 4

. V 5 1

-

5

. 1 X 6

. 2 X 7

. V 5

+

8

. T C M 1

. K B M 2

. P S H 3

. R E T H 4

. P O T S T 5 I

. D N G 7

. S P M 8

. 2 C 6

. I R E M 9

. 5.M3 4.NC 3.M2 2.NC 1.M1 R O T O M

, 2 W k 5 2 X 6.S6 5.S5 4.S4 3.S3 2.S2 1.S1 D N G 6

. BLK.T RED.T 7 4 1 8 5 2 BLK.T RED.T 8 0 5 1 D R C Z 7 1 0 4 W D E R WHT.T H T U H T U V V U U

. T T H W T H W W1 V1 U1 W1 V1 U1 T H W D E R RED

+12V 0 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

+48VG

+48VG

+48V

+48V BLK.T 1 0 1 W 3 12 3 2 1 BLK.T W101 T H W K U L L B B 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 U L B T H W K L B T N C M H 1

. V 5 1

+

2

. D N G 3

. V 5 1

+

7

. D N G 8

. C N 0 1

. C N 1 1

. C N 2 1

. C N 9

. V 5 1

+

1

. V 2 1

+

2

. D N G 3

. D N G 4

. V 5 1

-

5

. V 0 1 6

. E V 0 1 7

. V 5

+

8

. T C M 1

. K B M 2

. P O T S T 3 I

. D N G 4

. S P M 5

. I R E M 6

. I E T 6

. 4.GND 3.+5V 2.TXD 1.RXD 11.TRG2 10.GND 9.+15V 8.TNI 7.-15V 6.TNL 5.TGTE 4.TGT 3.GSE 2.GS 1.MONI 8.+5V 7.VDIN 6.VDINE 5.MicPS 4.TNC 3.BS1 2.BS2 1.BS3 E Z

. 2 Z

. 1 A

. 3 B

. 4 V 2 1

+

5

. D N G 6

. L E Y K L B U L B T H W D E R D L E H S I E S 15.VD 14.VDE 13.TNL 12.VD_DC 11.TNI 10.TGTE 9.TGT 8.GND 7.+15V 6.-15V 5.+5V 4.TNC 3.BS1 2.BS2 1.BS3 I Y T 1

. E P B 4

. Z B 5

. E Z B 6

. P B 3

. E D V 2

. D V 1

.

+

R T M 3

.

-

R T M 4

.

+

P B 1

.

-

P B 2

.

+

Z B 3

.

-

Z B 4

. I

+

G R T 5

. I

-

G R T 6

.

+

R T M 7

.

-

R T M 8

. E R T M 9

.

+

D V 0 1

.

-

D V 1 1

. I E Y T 2

. Chapter 8 Appdendix 8-158 2.C2 1.+12V WHT RED 3.FAN_ERR2 2.GND 1.+12V 3.FAN_ERR1 2.GND 1.+12V 9.NC 8.STABY_REQ 7.+15V 6.+5V 5.CNT 4.GND 3.TISTOP1 2.HVGATE1 1.HTER1 5.GND 4.+24V 3.PW3 2.PW2 1.PW1 8.NC 7.TXE 6.TXI 5.GND 4.PMS 3.LVR 2.PTE 1.PTI YEL BLU RED YEL BLU RED N A F N A F

. G S

. 3.E 2.PMS 1.LVR BLK RED BLU J82 P82 4.TXE 3.TXI 2.PTE 1.PTI BRN WHT BLK WHT J81 P81 M P 5 8

-

U J N 8.3.26 NKE-1125 (AC220V) 2 W 0 3 k 2 1

. I I T U C R C E K A R B 3 5 2

-

A F C 5.M3 4.NC 3.M2 2.NC 1.M1 R O T O M

, 2 W k 5 2 X 6.S6 5.S5 4.S4 3.S3 2.S2 1.S1 D N G 6

. BLK.T RED.T 7 4 1 8 5 2 BLK.T RED.T 8 0 5 1 D R C Z 7 1 0 4 W D E R WHT.T H T U H T U V V U U

. T T H W I I B T U C R C E K A R B 0 6 2

-

A F C 4 9 5 2

-

A F C I I A T U C R C E K A R B 9 2 2

-

R F C

. G S

. I R E T L F G A M I T U C R C I 1 5 F p 0 2 2

. G S

. MD-12N1 MD-12N1 8W 150 S B 8 6 5 1 M 1/2W 2.7K

. G S

. G S

. YEL GRN V K 1 F U 1 0 0

. 6 4 2 2 1 0 D R P L 7

-

H 5 3 V 0 0 2 F U 2 2 0

. 2 1 200V 0.22UF

. 2 o N

. 1 o N 1 X 1

. 2 X 2

. 0

-

9 0 2 0 5 3

-

1 2.BKS2 1.BKS1 3.BKH2 2.NC 1.BKH1 0

-

0 1 2 0 5 3

-

1 2.E 1.VERR P 2

-

L I BLK RED 3.N 2.NC 1.P 0

-

0 0 7 0 8 4

-

1 H V

-

P 3 B 1 R 1

. C N 2

. 2 R 3

. 2.E 1.VERR H V

-

P 2 B B6P-VH 2 V M 3 C N 4 C N 5

. C N 2

. 2.N 2 U M 1

. 1.P V 2 1

+

1

. C N 2

. E V 2 1

+

3

. A

-

H X

-

B 3 S 3.MN 2.NC 1.MH 1 R R E V 1

. H V

-

S P 2 B E 2

. E 2

. 1 R R E V 1

. 2 1 2 1 P 2 1 2 1 J P 2

-

L I 2 0 2 1 P 2 0 2 1 J 2 U M 1

. D N G 2

. 2 V M 3

. V N

-

P 3 B 1 0 2 1 J H V

-

P 4 B 4.NC 3.V1 2.NC 1.U1 T N C M H 1

. V 5 1

+

2

. D N G 3

. U L B T H W K L B

+

M 1

.

-

M 2

. 1.2A 2.1A 1.2A 2.1A 1.2A 2.1A BLK.T 1 0 1 W 3 12 3 2 1 BLK.T W101 T H W K U L L B B 1 2 3 3.MN 2.NC 1.MH V 5 1

+

7

. D N G 8

. C N 9

. C N 0 1

. I E T 6

. R E T L F I Y M M U D T R O H S 1

. T R O H S 1

. I G A M 2

. I G A M 2

. 1 X 3

. 2 X 4

. I T 5

. 1 X 3

. 2 X 4

. I T 5

. V 5 1

+

1

. V 2 1

+

2

. V 8

+

3

. D N G 4

. V 5 1

-

5

. 1 X 6

. 2 X 7

. V 5

+

8

. T C M 1

. K B M 2

. P S H 3

. R E T H 4

. P O T S T 5 I

. D N G 7

. S P M 8

. 2 C 6

. I R E M 9

. 0 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 T H W W1 V1 U1 W1 V1 U1 RED

+12V T H W D E R 7 8

+48VG

+48VG

+48V

+48V 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 U L B T H W K L B T N C M H 1

. V 5 1

+

2

. D N G 3

. V 5 1

+

7

. D N G 8

. C N 0 1

. C N 1 1

. C N 2 1

. C N 9

. V 5 1

+

1

. V 2 1

+

2

. D N G 3

. D N G 4

. V 5 1

-

5

. V 0 1 6

. E V 0 1 7

. V 5

+

8

. T C M 1

. K B M 2

. P O T S T 3 I

. D N G 4

. S P M 5

. I R E M 6

. I E T 6

. 4.GND 3.+5V 2.TXD 1.RXD 11.TRG2 10.GND 9.+15V 8.TNI 7.-15V 6.TNL 5.TGTE 4.TGT 3.GSE 2.GS 1.MONI 8.+5V 7.VDIN 6.VDINE 5.MicPS 4.TNC 3.BS1 2.BS2 1.BS3 E Z

. 2 Z

. 1 A

. 3 B

. 4 V 2 1

+

5

. D N G 6

. L E Y K L B U L B T H W D E R D L E H S I E S 15.VD 14.VDE 13.TNL 12.VD_DC 11.TNI 10.TGTE 9.TGT 8.GND 7.+15V 6.-15V 5.+5V 4.TNC 3.BS1 2.BS2 1.BS3 I Y T 1

. E P B 4

. Z B 5

. E Z B 6

. P B 3

. E D V 2

. D V 1

.

+

R T M 3

.

-

R T M 4

.

+

P B 1

.

-

P B 2

.

+

Z B 3

.

-

Z B 4

. I

+

G R T 5

. I

-

G R T 6

.

+

R T M 7

.

-

R T M 8

. E R T M 9

.

+

D V 0 1

.

-

D V 1 1

. I E Y T 2

. 2.C2 1.+12V WHT RED 3.FAN_ERR2 2.GND 1.+12V 3.FAN_ERR1 2.GND 1.+12V 9.NC 8.STABY_REQ 7.+15V 6.+5V 5.CNT 4.GND 3.TISTOP1 2.HVGATE1 1.HTER1 5.GND 4.+24V 3.PW3 2.PW2 1.PW1 8.NC 7.TXE 6.TXI 5.GND 4.PMS 3.LVR 2.PTE 1.PTI YEL BLU RED YEL BLU RED N A F N A F

. G S

. 3.E 2.PMS 1.LVR BLK RED BLU J82 P82 4.TXE 3.TXI 2.PTE 1.PTI BRN WHT BLK WHT J81 P81 M P 5 8

-

U J N 8-159 Chapter 8 Appdendix 8.3.27 NKE-2254-6HS I R E T L F G A M

. G S

. 9 2 2

-

R F C

. G S

. S B 8 6 5 1 M 2 8 1

-

P B C R O T O M S H 4 5 2 2

-

E K N R O T O M N R G L E Y N R B

. T U L B

. T K L B

. T T H W 5 F p 0 2 2

-

T N C M 1

.

+

T N C M 2

. C N 3

.

+

M 1

. C N 2

.

-

M 3

. C N 4

. I T U C R C I

. G S

. 6 V K 1 F U 1 0 0

. 5 2 2 1 0 D R P L 7

-

H V 0 0 2 F U 2 2 0

. 4 3 2 1

. G S

. T N C M H 1

. V 5 1

+

2

. E 3

. 2 o N

. 1 o N 1 X 1

. 2 X 2

.

+

M 1

.

-

M 2

. R E T L F I Y M M U D T R O H S 1

. I G A M 2

. 1 X 3

. 2 X 4

. 1 4 7 2 5 8 T H W D E R I E T 6

. V 5 1

+

7

. D N G 8

. C N 9

. C N 0 1

. V 5 1

+

1

. V 2 1

+

2

. V 8

+

3

. D N G 4

. V 5 1

-

5

. 1 X 6

. 2 X 7

. V 5

+

8

. T C M 1

. K B M 2

. P S H 3

. R E T H 4

. P O T S T 5 I

. D N G 7

. S P M 8

. 2 C 6

. I R E M 9

. I T 5

. T R O H S 1

. I G A M 2

. 1 X 3

. 2 X 4

. I T 5

. I E T 6

. U L B T H W K L B 1 2 3 0 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 U L B T H W K L B T N C M H 1

. V 5 1

+

2

. D N G 3

. V 5 1

+

7

. D N G 8

. C N 0 1

. C N 1 1

. C N 2 1

. C N 9

. V 5 1

+

1

. V 2 1

+

2

. D N G 3

. D N G 4

. V 5 1

-

5

. V 0 1 6

. E V 0 1 7

. V 5

+

8

. T C M 1

. K B M 2

. P O T S T 3 I

. D N G 4

. S P M 5

. I R E M 6

. t n e m u c o d n o i t a c i f c e p s e h t f o n o s v e r s n a e m

*

i i

. o N t n e m u c o d n o i t a c i f i c e p s s n a e m

#

:

*

#

#

#

#

D R C Z 7

-

H

. G S

. N A F N A F I E Y T 2

. I Y T 1

. E Z

. 2 Z

. 1 A

. 3 B

. 4 V 2 1

+

5

. D N G 6

. L E Y K L B U L B T H W D E R D L E H S I E S E P B 4

. P B 3

. Z B 5

. E Z B 6

. E D V 2

. D V 1

.

+

R T M 3

.

-

R T M 4

.

+

P B 1

.

-

P B 2

.

+

Z B 3

.

-

Z B 4

. I

+

G R T 5

. I

-

G R T 6

.

+

R T M 7

.

-

R T M 8

. E R T M 9

.

+

D V 0 1

.

-

D V 1 1

. M P 5 8

-

U J N Chapter 8 Appdendix 8-160 8.3.28 NKE-2103-6/6HS 1 8 P 1 8 J M P

. G S

. 2 8 P 2 8 J U L B D E R K L B R V L 1

. S M P 2

. E 3

. T H W K L B T H W N R B I T P 1

. E T P 2

. I X T 3

. E X T 4

. I N O T P O

(

5 8

-

U J N

. o N t n e m u c o d n o i t a c i f i c e p s s n a e m

#

:

*

#

#

#

#

D R C Z 7

-

H

. t n e m u c o d n o i t a c i f c e p s e h t f o n o s v e r s n a e m

*

i i 1 0 1 S W I H C T W S Y T E F A S 5 2 4 1 4 0 5 1 J 1 S M 1

. 2 S M 3

. C N 2

. 5 0 5 1 J T N C M H 1

. V 5 1

+

2

. D N G A 3

. A 2 1

. A 1 2

. 5 J A 2 1

. A 1 2

.

) 1 0 5 1 C P

(

9 7 7 1

-

D B C 4 J I I T U C R C R E W O P L O R T N O C R O T O M C N 3

. 2 0 5 1 J

+

M 1

. C N 2

.

-

M 3

. C N 4

. 2 0 1 B E S L E Y K L B U L B T H W D E R D L E H S I 8 0 2 J Z

. 1 E 2

. A

. 3 B

. 4 V 2 1

+

5

. G F 6

. 8 P 8 J I T P 1

. E T P 2

. R V L 3

. S M P 4

. I X T 6

. E X T 7

. C N 8

. E 5

. 1

-

9 2 5

-

E A C d e e p S l a m o N

:

t r o h s 2

-

1 d e e p S h g H i

:

t r o h s 3

-

2 1 B T

) 1 0 2 C P

(

-

E M C I I T U C R C R O T A L U D O M E N U T 1

. V 5

+

2

. D N G 3

. C N 4

. F I

. 5 I C M 5 1

-

1 0 2 T 6 1

-

1 0 2 T H M 1

. 6 0 2 J N M 3

. 5 0 2 J V 5 1

+

1

. V 2 1

+

2

. V 8

+

3

. D N G A 4

. V 5 1

-

5

. 1 X 6

. 2 X 7

. R E T H 9

. V 5

+

8

. R E V H 0 1

. A 2 1

. A 1 2

. 4 0 2 J A 2 1

. A 1 2

. 3 0 5 1 J

+

T N C M 1

.

-

T N C M 2

. 5 2 1 J

) 3 2 8

-

A M C I N O T C E N N O C R E T N I I T N U R E V E C E R I

(

1 0 1 E 9 6 9 1 T J N 1 0 3 A 0 3 9 6 S J N

) 1 0 3 C P

(

I I T U C R C P M A F I 2 0 1 A 1 0 1 A 9 9 5

-

K M C T N U R E V E C E R I I I N O T C E N N O C R E T N I I T N U R E V E C S N A R T I I T Z T N U R E V E C S N A R T I 6

/

4

-

B 6 1

-

X A N A N N E T N A 4 0 1 A R E T L F I Y M M U D 3 0 1 A N O R T E N G A M 1 0 1 V N 5 6 5 1 F A M G A M N R G L E Y

. G S

. 2 5 2

-

A F C I I T U C R C K A E R B 3 0 0 1 J H M 1

. N M 3

. 2 0 0 1 J V 5 1

+

1

. V 2 1

+

2

. V 8

+

3

. D N G A 4

. V 5 1

-

5

. 1 X 6

. 2 X 7

. R E T H 9

. V 5

+

8

. R E V H 0 1

. 1 0 0 1 J A 2 1

. A 1 2

. I T U C R C I

) 1 0 0 1 C P

(

3 8 7 1

-

D B C Y L P P U S R E W O P 3 F p 0 0 1 R O T O M 8 4 0 0 D R D B 7

-

H 1 0 1 B 2 0 2

-

P B C R O T R O M 8-161 Chapter 8 Appdendix

. G S

. 4 3 2

-

R F C I R E T L F G A M I T U C R C I 8.3.29 NKE-1632 1 0 3 4 J R O T O M 1 0 1 B

. t n e m u c o d n o i t a c i f c e p s e h t f o n o s v e r s n a e m

*

i i I T N O J Y R A T O R

) r o t c e n n o c e p y t N

(

R E C U D S N A R T 1 0 3 1 1 P 0 3 1 J

*

3 7 6 1 D R C Z 7 1 0 1 W A N N E T N A R O T N O M I E C N A M R O F R E P 1 0 3 4 P

*

4 7 6 1 D R C Z 7 1 0 5 W

*

6 7 6 1 D R C Z 7 1 0 2 W

*

7 7 6 1 D R C Z 7 2 0 2 W 3 0 2 W 5 7 6 1 D R C Z 7

*

8 6 6 1 D R C Z 7 3 0 1 W 2 0 1 3 P 2 0 1 3 J 5 3

-

R

-

B 0 P T N A _ F R 4 0 1 3 P 4 0 1 3 J 5 3

-

R

-

B 0 P T U O M P _ 2 0 1 W

*

7 6 6 1 D R C Z 7 K S 2 4 J

-

B 2 0 C S R P X H G

-

5 0 5 3 J V 2 3

+

. 1 D N G

. 2 5 0 5 3 P 1 0 3 5 P V 2 3

+

1

. D N G 2

. 1 0 3 5 J R P X H G

-

K S 2 4 J

-

B 2 0 C S 1 0 9 2 J G A T J U P C 2 0 9 2 J 3 0 9 2 G J A T J A G P F F

/

I A T A D 4 0 5 1 P 1 W

*

0 8 6 1 D R C Z 7 4 0 5 1 J

)

, N S F L

(

H V

-

P 3 B 1 M 1

. C N 2

. 2 M 3

. C N 4

. 3 M 5

. 2 0 5 1 J

)

, N S F L

(

H V

-

5 P 3 B 3 0 5 1 J

)

, N S F L

(

1

-

K S A X O B 6 0 B 1 S 1

. 2 S 2

. 3 S 3

. 4 S 4

. 5 S 5

. 6 S 6

.

)

+

X R T _ T O M 3

.

-

X R T _ T O M 4

. D N G 5

. V 2 1

+

1

. D N G 2

. l e g n a L

(

0 1 5 0

-

6 2 4 3 5 5 0 5 1 J 5 0 5 1 P

, N S F L

(

H V

-

P 4 B 1 0 5 1 J 1 0 5 1 P U M 1

. C N 2

. V M 3

. C N 4

. P D 0 3

-

F 0 2 F D

) 9 5

(

H 1

-

3 0 5 2 J

-

X R T _ R T M 8

. D N G 2

. D N G 3

. D V 1

. D N G 6

. P B 4

. Z B 5

. I Y T 7

. N T R _ Y T 9 I

.

+

X R T _ R T M 0 1

.

+

X T _ T N M 3 1

.

-

X T _ T N M 5 1

. D N G 4 1

. D N G 1 1

. D N G 2 1

.

-

X R _ T N M 9 1

. B H P 0 2

.

+

X R _ T N M 1 2

. D N G 2 2

. D N G 3 2

.

-

X R T _ T O M 4 2

.

+

X R T _ T O M 6 2

. 2 C 5 2

. D N G 7 2

. D N G 8 2

. Z H P 6 1

. D N G 7 1

. A H P 8 1

. _ 0 T N C N A F 9 2

. N A F S U T A T S _ S P 0 3

. V 3 3

+

. D N G T

-

3

-

V P 1 0 5 2 J 1 0 5 2 P T

-

3

-

V P 2 0 5 2 J 2 0 5 2 P 4 0 2 W

*

9 6 6 1 D R C Z 7

*

1 7 6 1 D R C Z 7 4 0 1 W

+

X R T _ R T M 0 1

.

+

X T _ T N M 3 1

.

-

X T _ T N M 5 1

. D N G 4 1

. D N G 1 1

. D N G 2 1

.

-

X R _ T N M 9 1

.

+

X R _ T N M 1 2

. B H P 0 2

. D N G 2 2

. D N G 3 2

.

-

X R T _ T O M 4 2

.

+

X R T _ T O M 6 2

. 2 C 5 2

. D N G 7 2

. D N G 8 2

. Z H P 6 1

. D N G 7 1

. A H P 8 1

. _ 0 T N C N A F 9 2

. 1 0 2 5 P 5 0 1 5 P 1 0 2 5 J H V

-

S P 2 B

. V 3 3

+

. 1 D N G

. 2 5 0 1 5 J A

-

H X

-

B 2 S V 2 1

+

1

. N T R 2

. S U T A T S _ S P 0 3

. 3 0 2 5 J

) 9 5

(

H 1

-

P D 0 3

-

F 0 2 F D

+

D V 1

.

-

D V 2

. D N G 3

. P B 4

. Z B 5

. D N G 6

.

-

X R T _ R T M 8

. I Y T 7

. N T R _ Y T 9 I

.

*

4 9 6 1 D R C Z 7 3 0 3 W

. T D E R

. T K L B 3 96 2 5 8

*

3 9 6 1 D R C Z 7 2 0 3 W

*

2 9 6 1 D R C Z 7 1 0 3 W

. T D E R

*

2 8 6 1 D R C Z 7 1 0 4 W

. T D E R

. T D E R

. T K L B 1 U 1 V 1 U 1 V 2 0 1 B T C 4 0

-

P 6

-

E N 0 0 3

-

M G O

. T T H W

. T T H W H T U H T U U V U V

]

O G A W

[

0 0 0

-

1 0 0

/

4 4 3

-

1 3 2 1 0 1 B T

+

D V 1

.

-

D V 2

. I

+

G R T 3

.

+

R T M 9

.

-

R T M 0 1

. G R T M 1 1

. C N

. 2 1

+

V 8 4 C D

. 3 1 G V 8 4 C D

. 4 1

+

P B 5

.

-

P B 6

.

+

Z B 7

.

-

Z B 8

. A S D 2

-

P 5 1 0 9 5 J

-

A 3 F D P

-

X R

-

T N M 1

. P

-

X T

-

T N M 2

. N

-

X R

-

T N M 3

. N

-

X T

-

T N M 4

. E T N M 5

. I

-

G R T 4

. Chapter 8 Appdendix 8-162 8.3.30 NKE-2632/NKE-2632-H 1 0 3 4 J R O T O M 1 0 1 B

. t n e m u c o d n o i t a c i f c e p s e h t f o n o s v e r s n a e m

*

i i I T N O J Y R A T O R

) r o t c e n n o c e p y t N

(

R E C U D S N A R T 1 0 3 1 1 P 0 3 1 J

*

3 7 6 1 D R C Z 7 1 0 1 W A N N E T N A R O T N O M I E C N A M R O F R E P 1 0 3 4 P

*

4 7 6 1 D R C Z 7 1 0 5 W 2 0 1 3 P 2 0 1 3 J 5 3

-

R

-

B 0 P T N A _ F R 4 0 1 3 P 4 0 1 3 J 5 3

-

R

-

B 0 P T U O M P _ I_INTx) 27DP-LR-PS-1 J3201

*

6 7 6 1 D R C Z 7 1 0 2 W P2301P3201

*

7 7 6 1 D R C Z 7 2 0 2 W IF_OUT(Tx) 27DP-LR-PS-1 J2301 1 0 9 2 J G A T J U P C 2 0 9 2 J 3 0 9 2 G J A T J A G P F F

/

I A T A D IF_OUTRx) 27DP-LR-PS-1 J3203 P3203 P2302 IF_IN(Rx) 27DP-LR-PS-1 J2302 10.TX_MONI 9.GND 8.PM_MODE 7.GND 6.RF_GATE 5.GND 4.LO_MODE 3.NC 2.RF_STC 1.GND 10.TX_MONI 9.GND 8.PM_MODE 7.GND 6.RF_GATE 5.GND 4.LO_MODE 3.NC 2.RF_STC 1.GND DF20F-10DP-1H(59) J3206 P3206 P2303 DF20F-10DP-1H(59) J2303

-

X R T _ R T M 8

. D N G 2

. D N G 3

. D V 1

. P B 4

. Z B 5

. D N G 6

. I Y T 7

. N T R _ Y T 9 I

.

+

X R T _ R T M 0 1

. D N G 1 1

.

+

X T _ T N M 3 1

. D N G 2 1

. P D 0 3

-

F 0 2 F D

) 9 5

(

H 1

-

3 0 5 2 J

-

X T _ T N M 5 1

. D N G 4 1

. Z H P 6 1

. D N G 7 1

.

-

X R _ T N M 9 1

. A H P 8 1

.

+

X R _ T N M 1 2

. B H P 0 2

. D N G 2 2

. D N G 3 2

.

-

X R T _ T O M 4 2

.

+

X R T _ T O M 6 2

. 2 C 5 2

. D N G 7 2

. D N G 8 2

. _ 0 T N C N A F 9 2

. S U T A T S _ S P 0 3

. T

-

3

-

V P 1 0 5 2 J 1 0 5 2 P 3 0 2 W 5 7 6 1 D R C Z 7

*

8 6 6 1 D R C Z 7 3 0 1 W 2 0 1 W

*

7 6 6 1 D R C Z 7 K S 2 4 J

-

B 2 0 C S R P X H G

-

5 0 5 3 J V 2 3

+

. 1 D N G

. 2 5 0 5 3 P 1 0 3 5 P V 2 3

+

1

. D N G 2

. 1 0 3 5 J R P X H G

-

K S 2 4 J

-

B 2 0 C S P2503 P5203 3 0 2 5 J

) 9 5

(

H 1

-

P D 0 3

-

F 0 2 F D

+

D V 1

.

-

D V 2

. D N G 3

. P B 4

. Z B 5

. D N G 6

.

-

X R T _ R T M 8

. I Y T 7

.

+

X R T _ R T M 0 1

. D N G 1 1

. N T R _ Y T 9 I

. 1 0 2 5 P 5 0 1 5 P 1 0 2 5 J H V

-

S P 2 B

. V 3 3

+

. 1 D N G

. 2 5 0 1 5 J A

-

H X

-

B 2 S V 2 1

+

1

. N T R 2

. S U T A T S _ S P 0 3

. 5.GND 4.MOT_TRX-

3.MOT_TRX+

2.RTN 1.+12V 53426-0510 J5103 P5103

+

X R _ T N M 1 2

. B H P 0 2

. D N G 2 2

. D N G 3 2

.

-

X R T _ T O M 4 2

.

+

X R T _ T O M 6 2

. 2 C 5 2

. D N G 7 2

. D N G 8 2

. _ 0 T N C N A F 9 2

.

+

X T _ T N M 3 1

. D N G 2 1

.

-

X T _ T N M 5 1

. D N G 4 1

. Z H P 6 1

. D N G 7 1

.

-

X R _ T N M 9 1

. A H P 8 1

. 1 M 1

. C N 2

. 2 M 3

. C N 4

. 3 M 5

. 2 0 5 1 J

)

, N S F L

(

H V

-

5 P 3 B 3.R2 2.NC 1.R1 3 0 5 1 J

)

, N S F L

(

1

-

K S A X O B 6 0 B 1 S 1

. 2 S 2

. 3 S 3

. 4 S 4

. 5 S 5

. 6 S 6

.

) l e g n a L

(

0 1 5 0

-

6 2 4 3 5 5 0 5 1 J 5 0 5 1 P V 2 1

+

1

. D N G 2

.

+

X R T _ T O M 3

.

-

X R T _ T O M 4

. D N G 5

.

, N S F L

(

H V

-

P 4 B 1 0 5 1 J 1 0 5 1 P U M 1

. C N 2

. V M 3

. C N 4

. 4 0 5 1 J

)

, N S F L

(

H V

-

P 3 B 4 0 5 1 P 1 W

*

0 8 6 1 D R C Z 7 N A F V 3 3

+

. D N G T

-

3

-

V P 2 0 5 2 J 2 0 5 2 P

*

9 6 6 1 D R C Z 7 4 0 2 W 2.C2 1.+12V 53426-0210 J5102 P5102 6.GND 5.PHZ 4.PHB 3.PHA 2.RTN 1.+12V DF3A-6P-2DS(01) J5101 BLKSHIELD YEL WHT BLU BLK RED P5101

+

R T M 9

.

-

R T M 0 1

. G R T M 1 1

. C N

. 2 1

+

V 8 4 C D

. 3 1 G V 8 4 C D

. 4 1

+

P B 5

.

-

P B 6

.

+

Z B 7

.

-

Z B 8

. A S D 2

-

P 5 1 0 9 5 J

-

A 3 F D P

-

X R

-

T N M 1

. P

-

X T

-

T N M 2

. N

-

X R

-

T N M 3

. N

-

X T

-

T N M 4

. E T N M 5

.

]

O G A W

[

0 0 0

-

1 0 0

/

4 4 3

-

1 3 2 1 0 1 B T

+

D V 1

.

-

D V 2

. I

+

G R T 3

. I

-

G R T 4

.

*

1 7 6 1 D R C Z 7 4 0 1 W

*

0 7 6 1 D R C Z 7 3 0 3 W

. T D E R

. T K L B 3 96 2 5 8

*

9 7 6 1 D R C Z 7 a m r o N l

*

6 0 7 1 D R C Z 7 S H 2 0 3 W

*

8 7 6 1 D R C Z 7 1 0 3 W

. T D E R

*

2 8 6 1 D R C Z 7 1 0 4 W

. T D E R

. T D E R

. T K L B 1 U 1 V 1 U 1 V 2 0 1 B T C 4 0

-

P 6

-

E N 0 0 3

-

M G O

. T T H W

. T T H W H T U H T U U V U V 8-163 Chapter 8 Appdendix Chapter 8 Appdendix 8-164 JMR-9230-S/S3 JMR-9230-S/S3 JMR-9225-7X3/9X3/6X/9X/6XH JMR-9225-7X3/9X3/6X/9X/6XH JMR-9210-6X/6XH JMR-9210-6X/6XH JMR-9272-S JMR-9272-S JMR-9282-S/SH JMR-9282-S/SH JMR-7230-S/S3 JMR-7230-S/S3 JMR-7225-7X3/9X3/6X/9X/6XH JMR-7225-7X3/9X3/6X/9X/6XH JMR-7210-6X/6XH JMR-7210-6X/6XH JMR-7272-S JMR-7272-S JMR-7282-S/SH JMR-7282-S/SH JAN-9201 JAN-9201 JAN-7201 JAN-7201 JAN-9202 JAN-9202 JAN-7202 JAN-7202 MARINE RADAR EQUIPMENT MARINE RADAR EQUIPMENT ECDIS ECDIS CONNING DISPLAY CONNING DISPLAY FIELD SERVICE MANUAL FIELD SERVICE MANUAL For further information,contact:

URL http://www.jrc.co.jp Marine Service Department Telephone :

Facsimile :

e-mail :

+81-3-3492-1305

+81-3-3779-1420 tmsc@jrc.co.jp SEATTLE Branch Telephone :

Facsimile :

e-mail :

+1-206-654-5644

+1-206-654-7030 marineservice@jrcamerica.com URL http://www.alphatronmarine.com Rotterdam (Head office) Alphatron Marine B.V. Telephone :

Facsimile :

e-mail :

+31 (0)10- 453 4000

+31 (0)10- 452 9214 service@alphatronmarine.com Singapore Branch Alphatron Marine Systems Pte Ltd

+65 6863 0335

+65 6863 3305 service@alphatronmarinesystems.com Telephone :

Facsimile :

e-mail :

01ETM ISO 9001, ISO 14001 Certified JUL. 2015 Edition 3 JRC JUL. 2015 Edition 3 JRC Printed in Japan Not use the asbestos CODE No.7ZPNA4467A CODE No.7ZPNA4467A

 

 

2. System Configuration Chapter 2. System Configuration 2.1 Components A list of components and optional accessories is shown below. Components of the Display Unit Table 2.1.1 The list of components of the Display Unit Q'ty Unit LCD monitor Touch Panel monitor

(JMR-92XX/JAN-92XX)

(JMR-72XX/JAN-72XX)

(JMR-92XX/JAN-92XX)

(JMR-72XX/JAN-72XX) Power Supply Unit 8GB System SSD 256GB Data SSD DVD Drive HASP e-Token Central Processing Circuit CCU Interface Circuit CCU Interface Terminal CCU Interconnection COM Express Board WES7P Licence TMSL Licence Operation Circuit A Trackball Operation Circuit SW Operation Circuit CN TOPU Interconnection Operation Circuit B Option Keyboard KOPU Interconnection QUINT-PS/1AC/24DC/20 QUINT-BAT/24DC/3.4AH QUINT-DC-UPS/QUINT20 ME-MAX-NEF/QUINT20 Serial LAN Circuit Analog Option Circuit Gyro Interface Circuit Radar Interface Circuit Scanner AC Power Cable Scanner AC Power Cable(F) Scanner DC Power Cable Scanner DC Power Cable(F) Central Control Unit Control Unit Trackball Operation Unit Keyboard Operation Unit Large Tray UPS Junction Box Sensor LAN Switch Unit Type name NWZ-208 NWZ-207 NWZ-208-TP NWZ-207-TP NCM-928 NBD-913 NDC-1590 CDD-752 CDD-753 CDD-754 CYC-344 CYC-735 CDC-1410 CMH-2406 CQD-2286 CML-902 CMC-1406 CYC-847 CYC-848 NCE-5605 CCK-1050 CCK-1060 CCK-1069 CCK-1070 CMD-1103 NCE-5625 CCK-1059 CCK-1061 CMD-1106 CWB-1593

-

-

-

-

NQE-1143 CMH-2370 CMJ-560 CMJ-554 CQD-2273 CML-836AC CML-836ACF CML-836DC CML-836DCF Remarks 26inch LCD monitor 19inch LCD monitor Option 26inch Option 19inch Standard Equipment Standard Equipment Standard Equipment Included in the NDC-1590 Standard Equipment Inclueded in the NCE-5605 Option(NCE-5625 or CWB-1593) Included in the NCE-5625 Option(NCE-5625 or CWB-1593) Option Option Option Option Option Option 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 max 2 1 Any one of these cables include to the CQD-2273 NQA-2443 max 2 16Port Switch HUB CQL-221 Sensor LAN Switch Interconnection CML-841 1 1 Option In case of standalone type 26inch:max 2 19inch:only 1 Included in the NQA-2443 2-1 Chapter 2 System Configuration Table 2.1.2 The list of components of the Display Unit Stand-alone type Frame & Cables Desktop type Frame & Cables Flush-mount type Cables Interswitch Unit Power Control Unit Digital Signal Converter Remote monitor display Buzzer Unit connection Cover Hood Accessory Spare Parts Printer Unit 26inch Display Mount Kit 19inch Display Mount Kit Display Unit Interconnection Relay Terminal Touch Panel Interconnection 26inch Desktop Frame 19inch Desktop Frame OPU Desktop Frame Display Unit Interconnection(F) Touch Panel Interconnection(F) Display Unit Interconnection(F) Touch Panel Interconnection(F) 4ch 8ch 32ch 64ch RGB Video Distribution Amplifier Monitor Extension Kit

(JMR-92XX/JAN-92XX)

(JMR-72XX/JAN-72XX)

(JMR-92XX/JAN-92XX)

(JMR-72XX/JAN-72XX) CD Cleaner NBD-913 Spare Parts CMH-2370 Spare Parts CMJ-554 Spare Parts 7HPNA4003 Printer spare parts NCT-82/83 Spare Parts Printer L-Type Stopper(Printer fixture) Type name CWA-246 CWA-245 CML-901 CQD-2312 CML-839 CWB-1595 CWB-1594 CWB-1596 CML-901-F CML-839-F CML-901-F CML-839-F NQE-3141-4A NQE-3141-8A NQE-3167 NCT-82 NCT-83 CGC-25 VAC-2001HB-A CFQ-5957 CWB-1621 CWB-1619 CWB-1620 CWB-1618 7ZZNA0426B 7ZXNA4021 7ZXNA4020 7ZXNA4022 7ZXNA4011 7ZXNA4017 7HPNA4003 QL-58 Q'ty 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Remarks For 26inch Monitor For 19inch Monitor Cables for stand-alone For AC/DC Power distribution Option For 26inch Monitor For 19inch Monitor For operation unit Longer than CML-901 Option Longer than CML-901 Option Option Option Option Option Option Option TCS Buzzer Option Option Option Packing 1 box Packing 1 box Option Option Option Option Option Option Option Chapter 2 System Configuration 2-2 Manuals Model JMR-7200/9200 Series JAN-7201/9201 JAN-7202/9202 Table 2.1.3 The list of Manuals Title JMR-7200/9200 Series Marine Radar Equipment Instruction Manual <Basic Operation> (1/3) *English JMR-7200/9200 Series Marine Radar Equipment Instruction Manual <Function> (2/3) *English JMR-7200/9200 Series Marine Radar Equipment Instruction Manual <Reference> (3/3) *English JMR-7200/9200 Series Marine Radar Equipment Quick Operation Guide *English JMR-7200/9200 Series JAN-7201/9201 Marine Radar Equipment ECDIS Additional Manual for Chart Installation *English JMR-7200/9200 Series JAN-7201/9201 JAN-7202/9202 Marine Radar Equipment ECDIS Conning Display Installation Manual *English JMR-7200/9200 Series JAN-7201/9201 JAN-7202/9202 Marine Radar Equipment ECDIS Conning Display Field Service Manual *English JAN-7201/9201 ECDIS Instruction Manual <Basic Operation> (1/3) *English JAN-7201/9201 ECDIS Instruction Manual <Function> (2/3) *English JAN-7201/9201 ECDIS Instruction Manual <Reference> (3/3) *English JAN-7201/9201 ECDIS Quick Operation Guide *English JMR-7200/9200 Series JAN-7201/9201 Marine Radar Equipment ECDIS Additional Manual for Chart Installation *English JAN-7201/9201 ECDIS Additional Manual for Automatic Sailing YOKOGAWA Autopilot PT500A TCS model Category B/C *English JAN-7201/9201 ECDIS Additional Manual for Automatic Sailing TOKYO KEIKI Autopilot PR-6000/9000 TCS model Category B/C *English JAN-7201/9201 ECDIS Type Specific ECDIS TrainingReference for TCS *English JMR-7200/9200 Series JAN-7201/9201 JAN-7202/9202 Marine Radar Equipment ECDIS Conning Display Installation Manual *English JMR-7200/9200 Series JAN-7201/9201 JAN-7202/9202 Marine Radar Equipment ECDIS Conning Display Field Service Manual *English JAN-7202/9202 Conning Display Instruction Manual *English JMR-7200/9200 Series JAN-7201/9201 JAN-7202/9202 Marine Radar Equipment ECDIS Conning Display Installation Manual *English JMR-7200/9200 Series JAN-7201/9201 JAN-7202/9202 Marine Radar Equipment ECDIS Conning Display Field Service Manual *English

*1 Revision symbol(A,B,C..) is added to the end of each type name. Code 7ZPNA4446*1 7ZPNA4447*1 7ZPNA4448*1 7ZPNA4395*1 Remarks Standard Equipment Standard Equipment Standard Equipment Standard Equipment 7ZPNA4461*1 Option 7ZPNA4466*1 Option 7ZPNA4467*1 7ZPNA4449*1 7ZPNA4450*1 7ZPNA4451*1 7ZPNA4405*1 Option Standard Equipment Standard Equipment Standard Equipment Standard Equipment 7ZPNA4461*1 Option 7ZPNA4462*1 Option 7ZPNA4463*1 Option 7ZPNA4464*1 Option 7ZPNA4466*1 Option 7ZPNA4467*1 7ZPNA4452*1 Option Standard Equipment 7ZPNA4466*1 Option 7ZPNA4467*1 Option 2-3 Chapter 2 System Configuration Radar Antenna Types and Specifications Table 2.1.4 The list of Radar Antenna Types and Specifications Radar antenna type NKE-1632 NKE-2632 NKE-2632-H NKE-1139 NKE-1130 NKE-1129-9 NKE-1129-7 NKE-1125-9 NKE-1125-6 NKE-2254-6HS NKE-2103-6 NKE-2103-6HS Radio wave type P0N,Q0N P0N,Q0N P0N,Q0N P0N P0N P0N P0N P0N P0N P0N P0N P0N ft 12 8 8 12 12 9 7 9 6 6 6 6 Transmitter-

receiver unit Transmitting power Band Power supply Rate of rotation Category

-

-

-

NTG-3230

-

NTG-3225 NTG-3225

-

-

-

-

-

250W 250W 250W 30kW 30kW 25kW 25kW 25kW 25kW 25kW 10kW 10kW S S S S S X X X X X X X AC AC AC AC AC AC AC AC AC DC DC DC 24rpm 24rpm 48rpm 24rpm 24rpm 24rpm 24rpm 24rpm 24rpm 48rpm 27rpm 48rpm CAT 1C CAT 1C CAT 1C CAT 1C CAT 1C CAT 1C CAT 1C CAT 1C CAT 1C CAT 1C CAT 1C CAT 1C Chapter 2 System Configuration 2-4 General Type Name Table 2.1.5 The list of General Type Name General type name Model Radar antenna JMR-9272-S *

JMR-9282-S *

JMR-9282-SH *

JMR-9230-S3 JMR-9230-S JMR-9225-9X3 JMR-9225-7X3 JMR-9225-9X JMR-9225-6X JMR-9225-6XH JMR-9210-6X JMR-9210-6XH JAN-9201 JAN-9202 JMR-7272-S JMR-7282-S JMR-7282-SH JMR-7230-S3 JMR-7230-S JMR-7225-9X3 JMR-7225-7X3 JMR-7225-9X JMR-7225-6X JMR-7225-6XH JMR-7210-6X JMR-7210-6XH JAN-7201 RADAR/MFD NKE-1632 NKE-2632 NKE-2632-H NKE-1139 NKE-1130 NKE-1129-9 NKE-1129-7 NKE-1125-9 NKE-1125-6 NKE-2254-6HS NKE-2103-6 NKE-2103-6HS ECDIS Conning

-

-

RADAR/MFD NKE-1632 NKE-2632 NKE-2632-H NKE-1139 NKE-1130 NKE-1129-9 NKE-1129-7 NKE-1125-9 NKE-1125-6 NKE-2254-6HS NKE-2103-6 NKE-2103-6HS ECDIS

-

Transmitter-

receiver unit

-

-

-

NTG-3230

-

NTG-3225 NTG-3225

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

NTG-3230

-

NTG-3225 NTG-3225

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

JAN-7202

* JMR-9272-S and JMR-9282-S/SH are Solid state RADARs. Conning

-

Display Ships mains 26inch NWZ-208 19inch NWZ-207 Specify 100-115VAC or 220-240VAC when ordering. 50/60 Hz Single phase 24VDC

(For backup) AC wide range Input 24VDC

(For backup) Specify 100-115VAC or 220-240VAC when ordering. 50/60 Hz Single phase 24VDC

(For backup) AC wide range Input 24VDC

(For backup) 2-5 Chapter 2 System Configuration Option list of radar antenna Table 2.1.6 Option list of radar antenna Name Model name Remarks NJU-84 For S-band radars excluding NKE-1632, 2632 and Performance monitor 4 unit switching interswitch 8 unit switching interswitch Power control unit Note:

NJU-85 NQE-3141-4A NQE-3141-8A NQE-3167 2632-H For X-band radars Separate unit Separate unit (special order) Separate unit 1. The drive motor for the radar antenna is available in 100-115VAC 50/60 Hz single phase or 220-240VAC 50/60 Hz single phase type for NKE-1632/2632/1139/1130/1129/1125/2254/2103 series. Please specify the power source type when ordering. 2. The radar antenna can be equipped with anti-icing system (neck heater) as an option, and -D shall be suffixed to the type name (-D or -E shall be suffixed to NKE-1632, NKE-2632, and NKE-2632-H.). - 100ac (50/60Hz)

- 220ac (50/60Hz) Reference:

The suffix(s) in the type name is/are changed by applying motor voltage, anti-icing system, etc.

(Example) NKE-1130-1D D: Attached anti-icing system 1: Motor voltage 100-115Vac (50/60Hz) 2: Motor voltage 220-240Vac (50/60Hz) 3. When using the ships mains of 440VAC as the radar power source, a step-down transformer shall be used. SCANNER UNIT TRANSMITTER-RECEIVER UNIT MONITOR UNIT Rader antenna Transmitter-receiver unit Display section Track ball operation section TRACK BALL OPERATION UNIT Keyboard operation section KEYBOARD OPERATION UNIT Central processing section CENTRAL CONTROL UNIT Power supply section Junction box Rader LAN switch section RADAR LAN SWITCH UNIT Sensor LAN switch section SENSOR LAN SWITCH UNIT Cradle frame 4. The following are the each unit name on the ones plate:

5. In JMR-9225-9X3/JMR-9225-7X3 and JMR-7225-9X3/JMR-7225-7X3, the following type name of JRC is used for the waveguide between the transmitter-receiver unit and the radar antenna. POWER SUPPLY UNIT JUNCTION BOX CRADLE FRAME Waveguide FR-9 FR-9 6. In JMR-9230-S3 and JMR-7230-S3, the following type name of JRC is used for the coaxial Type name of JRC H-7AWRD0003 H-7AWRD0004 Length 20MT 30MT cable between the transmitter-receiver unit and the radar antenna. Coaxial cable HF-20D Length 30MT Type name of JRC HF-20D (30MT) Chapter 2 System Configuration 2-6 2.2 Power System Diagram Fig. 2.2.1 The Power System Diagram 2-7 Chapter 2 System Configuration Table. 2.2.1 General Specification of Power Supply Unit NBD-913 GENERAL SPECIFICATION AC Input Voltage Voltage Range Overvoltage Protection Input Current Over current Protection DC Input Voltage Voltage Range Overvoltage Protection Input Current Over current Protection Rated Output Output 1 Output 2A (for CCU) Output 2B (for MNU) Output 3 (for TXRX) Mechanical Dimension Mass FAN Environment Operational Temperature Operational Humidity Vibration EMC Ingress Protection Rating NBD-913: Power Supply Unit 100 to 115VAC, 50/60Hz, single phase 220 to 240VAC, 50/60Hz, single phase 85 to 264VAC 295VAC 2V Max 6.8A(100VAC) / 3.4A(220VAC) YES 24VDC 21.6 to 31.2VDC 42V Max 16A YES 12.0V 0.24V 2A 24.0V 0.48V 4A 24.0V 0.48V 6A 48.0V 0.96V 4A Width 400 x Depth 240 x Height 85 (mm) 4.2kg 2

-15C to +55C 40C RH 93%

Sweep 2Hz to 13.2Hz at 1mm, 13.2Hz to 100Hz at 7m/s2 and for 2h on each resonance, otherwise 2h at 30Hz in all three axes IEC60945-Ed4.0 IP20 Chapter 2 System Configuration 2-8 The power system diagram is shown in Fig. 2.2.1. PSU (Power Supply Unit: NBD-913) supplies power to the Scanner Unit and Display Unit which consists of MNU(Monitor Unit), CCU (Central Control Unit), OPU(Operation Unit), and JB(Junction Box). The lists of Input/Output features of the PSU are given in Table 2.2.2 and Table 2.2.3. Input AC Input Voltage Voltage ranges Overvoltage Protection Frequency Input Current Over current Protection DC Input Voltage Voltage ranges Overvoltage Protection Input Current Over current Protection Control Signals N_24V_ON N_MTR_ON N_MNU_ON Table 2.2.2 The list of PSU input section Detail 100 to 115Vac 220 to 240Vac 85 to 264VAC 295VAC2V, 50Hz / 60Hz Max 6.8A(100VAC) / 3.4A(220VAC) equipped 24Vdc 21.6 to 31.2Vdc 42V Max 16A equipped CCU power control signal. Open Collector Input. Logic Level L: 24Vdc (CCU) ON. Scanner unit power control signal. Open Collector Input. Logic Level L: 100-220Vac, 48Vdc, 24Vdc (M+. M-), and 24Vdc (1A, 2A) ON. Monitor unit power control signal. Open Collector Input. Logic Level L: 24Vdc (MNU) ON. 2-9 Chapter 2 System Configuration Output AC Output Table 2.2.3 The list of PSU output section Detail For 100-220Vac AC Scanner 50/60Hz Single phase DC Output Motor 48Vdc AC Scanner 24Vdc

(M+, M-) 24Vdc

(1A, 2A) DC Scanner Motor DC Scanner 24Vdc (CCU) CCU 24Vdc (MNU) MNU 12Vdc

(P+12V) CCU, OPU, GIF, RIF Alarm Signals AC FAIL CCU DC EMPTY CCU FAN_ALM CCU N_PWRGD CCU Through output. Overcurrent protection by a circuit breaker. Overvoltage and overcurrent protection by a solid state switch. Through output. Overcurrent protection by a blade fuse.(15A) Through output. Overcurrent protection by a blade fuse.(15A) Overvoltage and overcurrent protection by a solid state switch. Overvoltage and overcurrent protection by a solid state switch. Standby output. AC input low voltage alarm. Open Collector Output Logic Level H (within 40ms) :100-220Vac IN is less than 75Vac typ. DC input low voltage alarm. Open Collector Output Logic Level H (within 40ms) : 24Vdc IN is less than 18Vdc typ. Fan anomaly alarm. Open Collector Output Logic Level H: the Fan motor anomaly. Power good signal. Open Collector Output. Logic Level H: PSU has low output voltage under output anomaly ( overvoltage, overcurrent ) or inner temperature anomaly. Chapter 2 System Configuration 2-10 PSU Input Section To drive PSU, AC power input, DC power input, and control signal inputs are required. The ship's AC power supply is input to each stabilized power supply circuit via a circuit breaker and a line filter, and generates the required voltage. If only DC power (24Vdc) is input to PSU, It will not generate 48Vdc. Each power supply circuit is a highly efficient switching power supply circuit. PSU is equipped with overvoltage protection. If the input voltage exceeds the set upper limit, the circuit breaker trips to prevent the excessive voltage from being applied to the system. It is not necessary to change input voltage setting of 100 or 220Vac because PSU has a wide range AC input. Control signals are used to control the outputs which are 100-220Vac, 48Vdc, 24Vdc(M+, M-), 24Vdc(1A, 2A), 24Vdc(MNU), 24Vdc(CCU). They are open collector signals. The control signals are the follows:

PSU Output Section The Outputs of PSU are 100-220Vac, 48Vdc, 24Vdc (M+, M-), 24Vdc (1A, 2A), 24Vdc (MNU), 24Vdc (CCU), 12Vdc (P+12V), and alarm signals. 12Vdc (P+12V) power supply operates even when the operating unit is turned off. This power supply is used in functions such as the control circuit of the power supply circuit and the interswitch control function. When the power switch of OPU is turned on, PSU used in the system is activated and outputs power at the following voltages:

: CCU power control signal

: Scanner unit power control signal

: Monitor unit power control signal N_24V_ON N_MTR_ON N_MNU_ON 24Vdc (MNU) 24Vdc (CCU)

: for Monitor Unit

: for Central Control Unit 100-220Vac and 48Vdc power supply for the AC scanner power are output independently from the power for the system itself. When N_MTR_ON the scanner unit power control signal is input from the interswitch unit, 100-220Vac and 48Vdc power supply come on. Where the interswitch function is not used, these actions are linked to the power switch of OPU. 48Vdc power supply is used in the internal control circuit of the AC scanner unit and in the transmitter-receiver unit. It is the same for DC scanner power. In DC scanner, 24Vdc (M+, M-) and 24Vdc (1A, 2A) are used. Each power supply output has output overcurrent protection, so that if there is a short circuit of the load or the rated output is exceeded, protective functions are activated and shut down the output. The system is equipped with a function to provide notification that the ship's AC power supply is shut off. Connecting the system to the ship's battery (24V) makes it possible for an alarm to be sounded from the OPU when the ship's AC power supply is shut down. 2-11 Chapter 2 System Configuration ACFAIL DC EMPTY FAN_ALM N_PWRGD The alarm signals are the follows:

: AC input undervoltage alarm

: DC input undervoltage alarm

: Fan anomaly alarm

: Power good signal Chapter 2 System Configuration 2-12 2.3 Function System Diagrams 2.3.1 Scanner unit / transmitter-receiver unit NKE-1139/NKE-1129 Scanner Unit SLOT ANTENNA MOTOR DRIVER PC1501 ERROR MOTOR B101 ROTARY JOINT ENCODER A,B,Z AC100/110/220/230V 50/60Hz,1 SAFETY SWITCH S101 Status NTG-3230/NTG-3225 Transceiver Unit FILTER MAG V101 PULSE TRANS SWITCHING CIRCUIT PC201 DUMMY LOAD Tx Trigger/Pulse Width MH GENERATOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT AVR PC1001 MOTOR RELAY PC1201 DIODE LIMITER

/ TRHPL PIN ATT

(X-band) RECEIVER Tune Control RF AMP Receiver Bandwidth Control IF AMP VIDEO AMP INTERFACE CIRCUIT PC1101 Relay Control Serial Com, BP, BZ, VD, TRIG DC+48V AC100/110/220/230V 50/60Hz,1 Fig. 2.3.1 Function Diagram of 3-unit Scanner/Transmitter-Receiver unit 2-13 Chapter 2 System Configuration NKE-1130/NKE-1125 Scanner Unit SLOT ANTENNA ERROR MOTOR B101 MOTOR DRIVER PC1501 MAG V101 PULSE TRANS SWITCHING CIRCUIT PC201 ENCODER A,B,Z ROTARY JOINT FILTER DIODE LIMITER RECEIVER Tune Control RF AMP Receiver Bandwidth Control IF AMP VIDEO AMP INTERFACE CIRCUIT PC1101 DUMMY LOAD Tx Trigger/Pulse Width MH GENERATOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT AVR PC1001 Relay Control Status MOTOR RELAY PC1201 SAFETY SWITCH S101 Serial Com, BP, BZ, VD, TRIG DC+48V AC100/110/220/230V 50/60Hz,1 Fig. 2.3.2 Function Diagram of 2-unit Scanner/Transmitter-Receiver unit Chapter 2 System Configuration 2-14 V 0 4 2

-

0 2 2

/

5 1 1

-

0 0 1 C A 1

, z H 0 6

/

0 5 m o C l a i r e S V 2 1

+

V 2 1

+

Fig. 2.3.3 Function Diagram of Solid state Scanner/Transmitter-Receiver unit 2-15 Chapter 2 System Configuration Fig. 2.3.1, Fig. 2.3.2, and Fig. 2.3.3 show the function system diagram for the scanner unit /

transmitter-receiver unit of 3-unit, 2-unit, and 2-unit solid state respectively. In the 3-unit type, the transmitter-receiver unit is installed indoors, away from the scanner unit. In the 2-unit type, the transmitter-receiver unit is installed inside the scanner unit. Magnetron Scanner Unit When the +48V power supply in the display unit starts, the power supply circuit in the transmitter-receiver unit activates and power is supplied to the circuits in the scanner unit and the transmitter-receiver unit. Once the power supply starts, the CPU in the interface circuit starts and perform initial settings. Then the preheating of the magnetron begins, and the transmitter-receiver unit waits for a communication signal to be sent from the display unit. When it receives the communication signal from the display unit, a communication link is established, and the scanner unit and the transmitter-receiver unit are subsequently controlled from the display unit. While the magnetron is preheating, the interface circuit sets the operation of the various circuits in the transmitter-receiver unit according to the initial setting values it receives from the display unit. When the preheating is complete, the transmitter-receiver unit notifies the display unit. When the user performs the operation to start transmission, the display unit sends the transmission start command via the communication line and the transmitter-receiver unit starts the rotation of the antenna motor and begins transmission. A transmission timing pulse is generated in the interface circuit, which is input to the modulator switching circuit for high voltage switching. The pulse transformer further increases the voltage of the high-voltage pulse, and the high voltage is applied to the magnetron. In this way, pulse-modulated microwaves are obtained. The pulse width of the radar wave and the pulse-repetition frequency are specified by means of control commands from the display unit. The radar wave passes through a duplexer circuit that uses a circulator and then through a rotary joint, before being transmitted into the air from the antenna. A signal reflected from a target is input from the antenna to the receiving block using the duplexer function. The received signal is amplified before being converted to the IF frequency, after which logarithmic detection is performed and the signal becomes a radar video signal. If the receiving tuning function is set to the auto mode, the interface circuit processes the received signal and automatically controls the tuning voltage so as to match the optimum local frequency. When the interface circuit turns on the scanner unit relay, AC power is supplied to the motor driver circuit and the antenna motor rotates. If the safety switch is off, the power supplied to the motor driver is forcibly shut off, stopping the rotation of the antenna motor. The beam azimuth of the antenna is detected by the encoder. The received radar video signal, the transmission timing signal, and the antenna rotation signal are all sent to the display unit. The radar video signal is an unprocessed log-compressed signal. The antenna rotation signal is an incremental signal which uses the 2048 pulse/rotation pulse and the azimuth reference pulse. When a set period of time has elapsed after the communication signal from the display unit has Chapter 2 System Configuration 2-16 stopped, the interface circuit switches to the protection mode and forcibly stops transmission and the rotation of the antenna. When the radiator is subjected to external force of wind (corresponding wind speed is greater than 51.5m/s) that exceed the ability to drive the scanner unit, the scanner unit stop to drive the motor. Because a built-in overload protection circuit is activated. If the scanner unit rotates by the wind in a counterclockwise direction, the TXRX[Reverse] alarm will be appeared, and stop to transmit. If the scanner unit rotates by the wind in a clockwise direction, the scanner unit stops to drive the motor. Therefore the TXRX[AZI] alarm will be appeared when the wind is calm down. When the corresponding wind speed is less than or equal to 51.5m/s, the break circuit (in the scanner unit) can reduce the scanner rotation speed to 11rpm less than, therefore the radar can transmit normally. Solid state Scanner Unit Fig. 2.3.3 shows the Function diagram of Solid state scanner unit. Solid state scanner unit consists of motor drive unit, transceiver/receiver unit, and power supply unit. It constructs 2-unit type marine radar equipment by connecting with the display unit. When the +48V power supply in the display unit starts, the power supply circuit in the solid state scanner unit activates and power is supplied to each circuits of it. Once the power supply starts, the CPU in the Radar processor unit CDC-1492 starts and performs initial settings. Then it waits for a communication signal to be sent from the display unit. Solid state scanner does not need preheating. When it receives the communication signal from the display unit, a communication link is established, and the scanner units are subsequently controlled from the display unit. When the Radar processor received range table data that includes information such as the pulse width of the radar wave and the pulse-repetition frequency, it starts the function setting sequence corresponding to designated transmission and reception spec. When the function setting sequence is finished, the Radar processor notifies the transmission and reception preparation completion status to the display unit. When the user performs the operation to start transmission, the display unit sends the transmission start command via the communication line and the scanner unit starts the rotation of the antenna motor and begins transmission. Since solid state scanner unit does not use a magnetron, it needs no preheating. Therefore, it can begin transmission and reception immediately after the end of above settings. In this time, the transmission control signals such as the transmission trigger signal that synchronized with the transmission IF signal flow together, and perform the operation timing control of TRX module. The transmission IF signal consists of unmodulated pulse signal P0N and frequency modulation pulse signal Q0N. TRX module performs time division transmission control. That allows P0N narrow pulse width signal to be used for detection at the range scale which would be the blind echo in the main-bang of Q0N wide pulse width signal. Transmission RF signal is amplified to approx.250W peak-power by the power amplifier unit constituted of RF FETs, and it is outputs as the transmission signal from TRX module via circulator. This signal is input to the antenna port via coaxial cable, and then it is transmitted into the air from the antenna. 2-17 Chapter 2 System Configuration A part of the signal is reflected from a target and received by the antenna. The signal received by the antenna propagates the coaxial cable which is the same as transmitting, and it is input to receiver unit of the TRX module as the reception signal via the circulator. After amplification the signal level by Low Noise Amplifier, the reception RF signal that is input to the receiver unit is downconverted into the reception IF signal by frequency converter unit. Then it is amplified to desired signal level again, flows into the AD converter via the BPF of the radar processor. The digital signal that has converted by the AD converter is supplied to the Radar processor, and it undergoes the digital signal processing such as pulse compression processing, coherent integration processing, and, P0N and Q0N transmission synthesis processing. After conversion into analog signal by the DA converter, this processed digital signal is input to the display unit as the radar video signal. Simultaneously, the bearing pulse signal, the heading line signal, and the transmission trigger signal are input together. The performance monitor function that monitors the degradation state of transmission and reception performance of the radar equipment is follows. In order to monitor the transmission system, the level detector unit monitors the output level of the power amplifier unit. In order to monitor the reception system, the radar antenna monitors the reception level of the PM signal which is emitted to the air by the TRX module via the PM antenna CAY-77. Since AC power for the motor driven is supplied via the safety switch, it can be forced outage of the motor when it is turned off under maintenance. The state of the safety switch is always monitored as the status signal, and it is sent to the display unit. Though the motor and motor driver circuit are varied by the Radar antenna type, the setting of motor power 100Vac or 220Vac is set by jumper plug of the motor driver circuit. Chapter 2 System Configuration 2-18 2.3.2 Display unit Fig. 2.3.4 Block diagram of Display unit (26inch) 2-19 Chapter 2 System Configuration Fig. 2.3.5 Block diagram of Display unit (19inch) Chapter 2 System Configuration 2-20 MNU : Monitor Unit The function system diagram of Display Unit is shown in Fig. 2.3.4 and Fig. 2.3.5 Display Unit is composed of following units:

CMH-2370 CMJ-560 CMJ-554 CQD-2273 SLC : Serial LAN Interface Circuit AOC : Analog Option Circuit GIF : Gyro Interface Circuit RIF : Radar Interface Circuit NWZ-208 (26inch) NWZ-207 (19inch) NDC-1590 CCU : Central Control Unit PSU : Power Supply Unit NBD-913 TOPU : Trackball Operation Unit NCE-5605 KOPU : Keyboard Operation Unit NCE-5625(*) NQA-2443(*) Sensor LAN Switch Unit JB : Junction Box NQE-1143(*), (**)

(*) Option.

(**) JB may include following circuits and they depend on the system:

Starting the system Turning on the power switch of TOPU starts PSU, 24Vdc (MNU) and 24Vdc (CCU) are supplied to MNU and CCU respectively. After starting its OS up, CCU initializes the various parameters and DSPs and it provides the functions such as Radar processing and display function, Electronic Chart Display function, Ship's sensors Information display function and more. After that, CCU sets the internal status according to the sensor data input from the various communication lines, such as the GYRO and GPS, and issues an initialization command to the transmitter-receiver unit via the communication line to initialize the transmitter-receiver unit. This concludes the initialization of the system. Circuit functions Operation circuit detects the operating status of the switches and dials of the TOPU and KOPU and sends the operation data to the CCU through the communication line. SLC : Serial LAN Interface Circuit converts serial signals sent by ship's various sensors into LAN data packets. It sends that signal to CCU via an Ethernet cable. AOC : Analog Option Circuit mediates Ship's analog sensor signals to CCU via SLC. It has four input ports. You can choose the kind of input type for each port which are -10V to 10V voltage input or 4-20mA current loop input. GIF : Gyro Interface Circuit processes the gyro signal, which is in the synchro or step format, calculates the true azimuth, and sends the true azimuth data to the radar processing circuit at regular intervals using serial communication. As long as the GIF circuit is receiving the gyro signal, 2-21 Chapter 2 System Configuration it is supplied with power and the CPU operates even if the display unit power is turned off. Therefore, even if the display unit power is turned off, the GIF circuit can continue to calculate the true azimuth. RIF : Radar Interface Circuit mediates radar signals from transmitter-receiver unit or interswitch unit to CCU. Also, it mediates the power such as 100-220Vac, 48Vdc, and 24Vdc from PSU to scanner motor and transmitter-receiver unit. Basic radar operations In magnetron radar, the preheating of the magnetron of the transmitter-receiver unit is required. It takes several tens of seconds. When the preheating of the magnetron is complete, the display unit will be on standby state for transmitting. In solid state radar, no preheating is required. the display unit will be standby state at the same time as starting up. By clicking the TX/STBY button in the screen or pressing that button on the KOPU, the system will be in transmission state. CCU issues a start transmission command to the transmitter-receiver unit, the transmitter-receiver unit starts transmitting, and the antenna starts to rotate. The radar signals sent by the transmitter-receiver unit are input to CCU via RIF. Unwanted waves are suppressed by powerful DSPs and advanced signal processing technologies. The radar image will always be displayed optimal in every range. The switches and dials on KOPU can be used to change the settings of the signal processing in CCU and the screen display, the results of which are immediately reflected in the radar image display. Interswitch Function The interswitch NQE-3141 allows the user to freely switch the connections between multiple display units and the scanner unit, so that even if there is a problem with one display unit, the operation of the system as a whole is maintained. For example, without the interswitch function, if a problem occurred in the No.1: S-band display unit, it would become impossible to use the S band radar, which would affect maritime safety in adverse weather conditions. With the inter switch function, however, it is possible to connect the functioning No. 1 scanner unit to the No. 2 display unit, and continue to use S band radar. The inter switch is easily operated from the radar screen. CCU automatically detects, when the system is started, whether or not there is an interswitch. If there is, it operates in the interswitch mode. If there is no inter switch, or if the interswitch or its cable is damaged, preventing the inter switch from being detected, CCU automatically operates in the standalone mode. Chapter 2 System Configuration 2-22 2.4 I/O Specifications 2.4.1. CCU : Central Control Unit NDC-1590 I/O Specifications Fig. 2.4.1 CCU front view Table 2.4.1 CCU I/O specifications 1 Label Name Pin Signal Name I/O Specification Detail J4101 DVI-MNU J4118 USB. T.P. J4201 USB-OPU DVI-MNU USB. T.P. USB-OPU I/O I/O I/O DVI-D WUXGA USB 2.0 Internal wiring Internal wiring Operation Unit Internal wiring J4202 SER-OPU SER-OPU I/O Operation Unit Internal wiring J4203 CCU-RIF CCU-RIF I/O Radar Interface Circuit Internal wiring 2-23 Chapter 2 System Configuration Table 2.4.2 CCU I/O specifications 2 I/O Specification Detail Label Name Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 J4204 PSU-CONT Signal Name AC FAIL DC EMPTY FAN ALM IN IN IN Open Collector Input Open Collector Input Open Collector Input Open Collector N_PWRGD IN SG SG

-

-

N_24V_ON OUT Input

-

-

8 N_MTR_ON OUT Output Open Collector Output OUT Open Collector Output 3.3Vdc, 10k ohm Internal Pull-up. 3.3Vdc, 10k ohm Internal Pull-up. 3.3Vdc, 10k ohm Internal Pull-up. 3.3Vdc, 10k ohm Internal Pull-up.

-

-

24Vdc (Motor) ON Logic level L:

ACOUT_L/N and 48Vdc ON Logic level L:

24Vdc(MNU) ON Open Collector Logic level L:

I/O USB 2.0 Internal wiring 9 N_MNU_O N USB1 USB2 J4206 USB1 USB2 Chapter 2 System Configuration 2-24 Table 2.4.3 CCU I/O specifications 3 Label Name Pin Signal Name GPS-RX SDME-RX J4303 PWR FAIL WMRST GPS-RX SDME-RX PWR FAIL WMRST A B A B

+

-

+

-

I/O Specification Detail IN IN IN IN IEC61162-1 A See Fig. 2.4.2 CCU IEC61162-1 GPS-RX detail B IEC61162-1 A IEC61162-1 B Dry Contact Out Normally-closed

(Factory default) Dry Contact Out Normally-open

(Factory default) See Fig. 2.4.3 CCU SDME-RX detail Choose Normally-open/

closed by TB2. See Fig. 2.4.4 CCU PWR FAIL detail Choose Normally-open/

closed by TB2. See Fig. 2.4.5 CCU WMRST detail 2-25 Chapter 2 System Configuration Fig. 2.4.2 CCU GPS-RX detail Fig. 2.4.3 CCU SDME-RX detail Chapter 2 System Configuration 2-26 Fig. 2.4.4 CCU PWR FAIL detail Fig. 2.4.5 CCU WMRST detail 2-27 Chapter 2 System Configuration Table 2.4.4 CCU I/O specifications 4 Label Name Pin Signal Name J4302 AIS-RX GYRO-RX A B C A B C AIS-RX GYRO-RX I/O Specification Detail IN IN IN IN IEC61162-2 A IEC61162-2 B IEC61162-2 C IEC61162-2 A IEC61162-2 B IEC61162-2 C By TB5, choose Termination enabled or disabled. See Fig. 2.4.6 CCU AIS-RX detail By TB6, choose Termination enabled or disabled. See Fig. 2.4.7 CCU GYRO-RX detail Fig. 2.4.6 CCU AIS-RX detail Fig. 2.4.7 CCU GYRO-RX detail Chapter 2 System Configuration 2-28 Table 2.4.5 CCU I/O specifications 5 I/O Specification Label Name Pin Signal Name P+12V 1 Detail 10BASE-T

/ 100BASE-TX

/ 1000BASE-T 10BASE-T

/ 100BASE-TX

/ 1000BASE-T 10BASE-T

/ 100BASE-TX

/ 1000BASE-T IN IN IN IN IN IN IN 12Vdc Common wire for P+12V 24Vdc Common wire for

+24V F.G. I/O IEC61162-450 I/O IEC61162-450 I/O IEC61162-450 2 3 4 5 6 7

-

-

-

P+12VE

+24V

+24V

+24VE

+24VE F.G.

-

-

-

J4301 PWR-PSU J4115 RADAR-

LAN J4117 LAN1 J4122 LAN2 2-29 Chapter 2 System Configuration 2.4.2. PSU : Power Supply Unit NBD-913 I/O specifications Fig. 2.4.8 PSU front view Table 2.4.6 PSU I/O specifications 1 I/O Specification Detail Label Name ACIN TB1 N.C. DCIN J50 AC SCANNER POWER Pin Signal Name AC IN : L 1 IN IN

-

IN IN AC IN : N

-

DC IN +

DC IN -

ACOUT: L OUT N.C.

+

N.C.

-

OUT

-

ACOUT: N OUT F.G.

-

N.C.

-

OUT

-

2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Chapter 2 System Configuration 2-30 100-220Vac , 50/60Hz, Single phase Overvoltage protection by a circuit breaker N.C. 24Vdc +

24Vdc -

100-220Vac, 50/60Hz, single phase N.C. 48Vdc +

N.C. 100-220Vac, 50/60Hz, single phase F.G. 48Vdc -

N.C.

-

Overvoltage protection by a circuit breaker

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

Table 2.4.7 PSU I/O specifications 2 Label Name Pin J51 DC SCANNER POWER J52 CCU_MNU POWER 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Signal Name M+

N.C. 1A M-

N.C. 2A 24V GND F.G. 24V GND 12V GND F.G. I/O Specification Detail OUT

-

OUT OUT

-

OUT OUT

-

-

OUT

-

OUT

-

-

24Vdc + (Motor) 15A Fuse N.C. 24Vdc +

-

15A Fuse 24Vdc - (Motor) N.C. 24Vdc -

24Vdc+ (MNU) 24Vdc- (MNU) F.G. 24Vdc+ (CCU) 24Vdc- (CCU) P+12V +

P+12V -

F.G.

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

2-31 Chapter 2 System Configuration Table 2.4.8 PSU I/O specifications 3 Label Name Pin Signal Name I/O Specification Detail 1 AC FAIL OUT 2 DC EMPTY OUT 3 FAN ALM OUT Open Collector Output Open Collector Output Open Collector Output 4 N_PWRGD OUT Open Collector Output J53 PSU_CONT Logic level H (within 40ms) : AC IN is less than 75Vac typ. Logic level H (within 40ms) : DC IN is less than 18Vdc typ. Logic level H: The Fan motor anomaly. Logic level H: PSU has low output voltage under output anomaly such as overvoltage, overcurrent or inner temperature anomaly. It is enabled while N_MTR_ON is L. If it is H, N_PWRGD is forced to be L except under inner temperature anomaly. 5 6 7 SG SG

-

-

N_24V_ON IN 8 N_MTR_ON IN 9 N_MNU_ON IN

-

-

-

-

Open Collector Input Open Collector Input Open Collector Input Logic level L: 24Vdc

(CCU) ON Logic level L:

ACOUT(L/N), 48Vdc(+,-), 24Vdc(M+, M-), and 24Vdc(1A, 2A) ON Logic level L: 24Vdc

(MNU) ON Chapter 2 System Configuration 2-32 2.4.3. SLC : Serial LAN Interface Circuit CMH-2370 Fig. 2.4.9 SLC top view Table 2.4.9 SLC I/O specifications 1 Label Name Pin I/O Specification Signal Name 1 24V+

J8100 DC24V IN POWER 2 24V_GND 21.6Vdc to 31.2Vdc 400mA(Typ.) Detail Reverse connection protection by 3A blade fuses

(FS1, FS2). 2-33 Chapter 2 System Configuration Detail By TB3, choose full duplex mode or half duplex mode. By TB15, Choose Termination enabled or disabled. See Fig. 2.4.10 SLC IEC61162-2 TXRX detail By TB2, choose full duplex mode or half duplex mode. By TB14, Choose Termination enabled or disabled. See Fig. 2.4.10 SLC IEC61162-2 TXRX detail Label Name Table 2.4.10 SLC I/O specifications 2 Specification Pin I/O Signal Name 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 TX10A OUT TX10B OUT TX10C RX10A

-

IN RX10B IN RX10C

-

TX9A OUT TX9B OUT TX9C RX9A RX9B

-

IN IN 6 RX9C

-

IEC61162-2 A IEC61162-2 B IEC61162-2 C IEC61162-2 A IEC61162-2 B IEC61162-2 C IEC61162-2 A IEC61162-2 B IEC61162-2 C IEC61162-2 A IEC61162-2 B IEC61162-2 C J8101 IEC61162-2 Ch.1 J8102 IEC61162-2 Ch.0 Chapter 2 System Configuration 2-34 Fig. 2.4.10 SLC IEC61162-2 TXRX detail 2-35 Chapter 2 System Configuration Table 2.4.11 SLC I/O specifications 3 I/O Specification Detail Label Name Pin J8105 IEC61162-1 1/2 J8104 IEC61162-1 3/4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Signal Name RX1A RX1B IN IN TX1A OUT TX1B OUT RX2A RX2B IN IN TX2A OUT TX2B OUT RX3A RX3B IN IN TX3A OUT TX3B OUT RX4A RX4B IN IN TX4A OUT TX4B OUT IEC61162-1 A IEC61162-1 B IEC61162-1 A IEC61162-1 B IEC61162-1 A IEC61162-1 B IEC61162-1 A IEC61162-1 B IEC61162-1 A IEC61162-1 B IEC61162-1 A IEC61162-1 B IEC61162-1 A IEC61162-1 B IEC61162-1 A IEC61162-1 B See Fig. 2.4.11 SLC IEC61162-1 RX1 detail See Fig. 2.4.12 SLC IEC61162-1 TX1 detail See Fig. 2.4.11 SLC IEC61162-1 RX1 detail See Fig. 2.4.12 SLC IEC61162-1 TX1 detail See Fig. 2.4.11 SLC IEC61162-1 RX1 detail See Fig. 2.4.12 SLC IEC61162-1 TX1 detail See Fig. 2.4.11 SLC IEC61162-1 RX1 detail See Fig. 2.4.12 SLC IEC61162-1 TX1 detail Chapter 2 System Configuration 2-36 Table 2.4.12 SLC I/O specifications 4 Label Name Pin J8103 IEC61162-1 5/6 J8106 IEC61162-1 7/8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Signal Name RX5A RX5B I/O IN IN TX5A OUT TX5B OUT RX6A RX6B IN IN TX6A OUT TX6B OUT RX7A RX7B IN IN TX7A OUT TX7B OUT RX8A RX8B IN IN TX8A OUT TX8B OUT Specification IEC61162-1 Detail A IEC61162-1 B IEC61162-1 A IEC61162-1 B IEC61162-1 A IEC61162-1 B IEC61162-1 A IEC61162-1 B IEC61162-1 A IEC61162-1 B IEC61162-1 A IEC61162-1 B IEC61162-1 A IEC61162-1 B IEC61162-1 A IEC61162-1 B See Fig. 2.4.11 SLC IEC61162-1 RX1 detail See Fig. 2.4.12 SLC IEC61162-1 TX1 detail See Fig. 2.4.11 SLC IEC61162-1 RX1 detail See Fig. 2.4.12 SLC IEC61162-1 TX1 detail See Fig. 2.4.11 SLC IEC61162-1 RX1 detail See Fig. 2.4.12 SLC IEC61162-1 TX1 detail See Fig. 2.4.11 SLC IEC61162-1 RX1 detail See Fig. 2.4.12 SLC IEC61162-1 TX1 detail 2-37 Chapter 2 System Configuration Fig. 2.4.11 SLC IEC61162-1 RX1 detail Fig. 2.4.12 SLC IEC61162-1 TX1 detail Chapter 2 System Configuration 2-38 Table 2.4.13 SLC I/O specifications 5 Label Name J8107 Contact In Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Signal Name I/O Specification IN1 GND IN2 GND IN3 GND IN4 GND IN

-

IN

-

IN

-

IN

-

Dry Contact Input 5V/50mA Detail 5V, 1k ohm Internal Pull-up. See Fig. 2.4.13 SLC Contact In detail. Fig. 2.4.13 SLC Contact In detail 2-39 Chapter 2 System Configuration Table 2.4.14 SLC I/O specifications 6 Signal Name I/O Specification Label Name Pin Detail Choose Normally Open, Normally Close, or 24VDC by TB6. See Fig. 2.4.14 SLC Contact Out detail. Choose Normally Open, Normally Close, or 24VDC Output by TB7. See Fig. 2.4.14 SLC Contact Out detail. Choose Normally Open, Normally Close, or 24VDC Output by TB8. See Fig. 2.4.14 SLC Contact Out detail. Choose Normally Open, Normally Close, or 24VDC Output by TB9. See Fig. 2.4.14 SLC Contact Out detail. 1 OUT1

-

2 RET1

-

Dry Contact 1 or 24V Supply 1 for Buzzer Max. 2A 3 OUT2

-

4 RET2

-

5 OUT3

-

6 RET3 7 OUT4

-

-

8 RET4

-

Dry Contact 2 or 24V Supply 2 for Buzzer Max. 2A Dry Contact 3 or 24V Supply 3 for Buzzer Max. 2A Dry Contac 4 or 24V Supply 4 for Buzzer Max. 2A J8108 Contact Out Chapter 2 System Configuration 2-40 Table 2.4.15 SLC I/O specifications 7 Label Name Pin Signal Name I/O Specification J8108 Contact Out 9 OUT5

-

10 RET5 11 OUT6

-

-

12 RET6

-

13 OUT7

-

14 RET7

-

15 OUT8

-

16 RET8

-

Dry Contact 5 or 24V Supply 5 for Buzzer Max. 2A Dry Contact 6 or 24V Supply 6 for Buzzer Max. 2A Dry Output 7 or 24V Supply 7 for Buzzer Max. 2A Dry Contact 8 or 24V Supply 8 for Buzzer Max. 2A Detail Choose Normally Open, Normally Close, or 24VDC Output by TB17. See Fig. 2.4.14 SLC Contact Out detail. Choose Normally Open, Normally Close, or 24VDC Output by TB16. See Fig. 2.4.14 SLC Contact Out detail. Choose Normally Open, Normally Close, or 24VDC Output by TB11. See Fig. 2.4.14 SLC Contact Out detail. Choose Normally Open, Normally Close, or 24VDC Output by TB10. See Fig. 2.4.14 SLC Contact Out detail. These 24Vdc output for buzzer are overcurrent protected by a common 15A blade fuse. (FS3) 2-41 Chapter 2 System Configuration Fig. 2.4.14 SLC Contact Out detail. Table 2.4.16 SLC I/O specifications 8 Label Name Pin Specification Signal Name I/O J8111 LAN ch.0 J8112 J8115 TB801 LAN ch.1 GIF_SLC SLC-AOC

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

I/O IEC61162-450 IEC61162-450 I/O I/O Gyro Interface Circuit I/O Analog Option Circuit Detail 10BASE-T

/ 100BASE-TX 10BASE-T

/ 100BASE-TX Internal wiring Internal wiring Note: The number of LAN port that you can use is only 1 port, either J8111 or J8112. Chapter 2 System Configuration 2-42 2.4.4. AOC : Analog Option Circuit CMJ-560 I/O specifications Fig. 2.4.15 AOC top view Table 2.4.17 AOC I/O specifications 1 Label Name Pin TB841 AOC_SLC

-

Signal Name I/O Specification Serial LAN Circuit I/O

-

Detail Internal wiring 2-43 Chapter 2 System Configuration Table 2.4.18 AOC I/O specifications 2 Label Name Pin Signal Name I/O Specification 1 AN1+

IN 2 AN1-

IN

+/- 10V Input or 4-20mA Current Loop Input 3 AN2+

IN

+/- 10V Input or 4-20mA Current 4 AN2-

IN Loop Input 5 AN3+

IN

+/- 10V Input 6 AN3-

IN 7 AN4+

IN or 4-20mA Current Loop Input

+/- 10V Input or 4-20mA Current Loop Input J842 Analog Sensor Input Detail Choose +/- 10V Input or 4-20mA Input by TB2, TB6, and TB7. See Fig. 2.4.16 and 2.5 DIP-SW and Jumper Pin Settings. Choose +/- 10V Input or 4-20mA Input by TB3, TB6, and TB7.. See Fig. 2.4.16 and 2.5 DIP-SW and Jumper Pin Settings. Choose +/- 10V Input or 4-20mA Input by TB4, TB6, and TB7.. See Fig. 2.4.16 and 2.5 DIP-SW and Jumper Pin Settings. Choose +/- 10V Input or 4-20mA Input by TB5, TB6, and TB7.. See Fig. 2.4.16 and 2.5 DIP-SW and Jumper Pin Settings. Chapter 2 System Configuration Fig. 2.4.16 AOC input detail. 2-44 2.4.5. GIF : Gyro Interface Circuit CMJ-554 I/O specifications Fig. 2.4.17 GIF top view Table 2.4.19 GIF I/O specifications 1 Label Name Pin J821 SLC_GIF J822 RIF_GIF

-

-

Signal Name

-

-

I/O I/O I/O Specification Detail Serial LAN Circuit Internal wiring Radar Interface Internal wiring Circuit 2-45 Chapter 2 System Configuration Table 2.4.20 GIF I/O specifications 2 I/O Specification Detail Label Name Pin J823 Gyro

-

Log 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Signal Name 1_R1 2_S1 3_S2 S3 IN IN IN IN 5_R2 IN Synchro/Step Gyro Compass Input N.C.

-

N.C. P+

IN P-

IN Pulse Log Input Choose Sync Gyro or Step Gyro Input by TB1. Sync Gyro: AC24 - 115V

(50 / 60 / 400Hz) Step Gyro: DC21.6 - 70V 36x / 90x / 180x / 360x

-

0-50V, Vth = 2V. 5V, 1k ohm Internal Pull-up 100p / 200p / 400p/ 800p See Fig. 2.4.18 GIF Log Input detail. Fig. 2.4.18 GIF Log Input detail. Chapter 2 System Configuration 2-46 2.4.6. RIF :Radar Interface Circuit CQD-2273 I/O specifications J835 J833 J 8 3 1 T B 8 3 8 J834 TB840 J839 J837 J832 Fig. 2.4.19 SLC Contact In detail J836 Detail Table 2.4.21 RIF I/O specifications 1 Specification I/O Label Name Pin Signal Name CCU I/F J831 CCU I/F

-

I/O Central Control Unit Internal wiring 2-47 Chapter 2 System Configuration Label Name Table 2.4.22 RIF I/O specifications 2 Pin Specification I/O Signal Name Detail VD+

IN Radar Video Signal. 0 to -2.6V

(except NKE-2103) VD-

IN See Fig. 2.4.20 RIF VD TRG signals 0 to -1.8V (NKE-2103) detail. 1 2 3 4 5 6 TRG+

IN TRG-

IN BP+

IN BP-

IN Radar Trigger Signal 0 to +13.6V (min. 10.6V) Bearing Pulse 0 to +5V, Pull-up J832 SCANNER 7 BZ+

IN 8 BZ-

IN 9 MTR+

I/O 10 11 12 13 MTR-

I/O MTRG N.C. DC+

-

-

OUT 14 DC-

OUT Bearing Zero Open Collector Input. RS-485, UART 9600 to 38400 bps Start bit: 1bit Stop bit: 2bits Parity bit: Even Parity Data bit: 8bits N.C. 48Vdc or 24Vdc Chapter 2 System Configuration 2-48 Pulse Width :

1us to 4.4us See Fig. 2.4.20 RIF VD TRG signals detail. 2048 pulses /

1 rotation See Fig. 2.4.21 RIF BP BZ signals detail 1 pulse / 1 rotation 5V, 510ohm Internal Pull-up. See Fig. 2.4.21 RIF BP BZ signals detail

-

-

Depends on the Scanner Type Fig. 2.4.20 RIF VD TRG signals detail Fig. 2.4.21 RIF BP BZ signals detail 2-49 Chapter 2 System Configuration Table 2.4.23 RIF I/O specifications 3 Specification Detail Interswitch Unit

-

Interswitch Unit

-

Label Name Pin J833 ISW_OUT J834 ISW_IN 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Signal Name ISWO_VD+

ISWO_VD-

ISWO_TRG+

ISWO_TRG-

ISWO_BP+

ISWO_BP-

ISWO_BZ+

ISWO_BZ-

ISWO_MTR+

ISWO_MTR-

ISWO_MTRG ISWI_VD+

ISWI_VD-

ISWI_TRG+

ISWI_TRG-

ISWI_BP+

ISWI_BP-

ISWI_BZ+

ISWI_BZ-

ISWI_MTR+

ISWI_MTR-

ISWI_MTRG PWROUT PWROUTE PWRIN PWRINE I/O OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT I/O I/O I/O IN IN IN IN IN IN IN IN I/O I/O I/O OUT OUT IN IN Chapter 2 System Configuration 2-50 Label Name J835 GYRO I/F Table 2.4.24 RIF I/O specifications 4 Pin Signal Name I/O Specification Detail

-

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

-

1 2

-

1 2 GYRO I/F I/O VD_OUT+ OUT VD_OUT- OUT TRG_OUT+ OUT TRG_OUT- OUT BP_OUT+ OUT BP_OUT- OUT BZ_OUT+ OUT BZ_OUT- OUT

-

-

GND N.C. Gyro Interface Circuit 0 to -2.6V Output Z : 50 ohm 50dB / V 0 to 4V Output Z : 50 ohm Pulse width : 1us Open Collector Output 5V, 1k ohm Pull-up is recommended. Internal wiring See Fig. 2.4.22 RIF VD_OUT detail See Fig. 2.4.23 RIF TRG_OUT detail See Fig. 2.4.24 RIF BP BZ_OUT detail GND N.C.

-

-

AC_SC_IN

(DC48V) U V DC_SC_IN

(DC24V PSU)

+

-

-

Power Supply Unit Internal wiring OUT OUT

-

OUT OUT 100-220Vac , 50/60Hz, Single phase Depends on PSU AC IN Power Supply Unit Internal wiring 24Vdc PSU DC IN 2-51 Chapter 2 System Configuration J836 EX_OUT J837 TB838 J839 TB840 AC_SC_IN

(DC48V) AC_MTRPWR

(AC100/220V) DC_SC_IN

(DC24V PSU) DC_MTRPWR

(DC24V MTR) Fig. 2.4.22 RIF VD_OUT detail Fig. 2.4.23 RIF TRG_OUT detail Fig. 2.4.24 RIF BP BZ_OUT detail Chapter 2 System Configuration 2-52 2.5 DIP-SW and Jumper Pin Settings 2.5.1. Setting for CQD-2273 Radar Interface Circuit TB1: INTERSWITCH CONTROL SETTING Fig. 2.5.1 CQD-2273 Radar Interface Circuit Table. 2.5.1 Radar Interface Circuit TB1 Settings Radar Interface Circuit TB1 Settings Description 1-2 SHORT CIRCUIT ISW_AUTO

(Factory default) 2-3 SHORT CIRCUIT ISW_ONLY

(Not allowed) OPEN ISW_OFF

(Not allowed) You can switch the scanner unit to be used on your Display unit via the Interswitch unit. Scanner signals always come down to your Display unit via the Interswitch unit. You can switch them on your Display unit in service menu. Scanner signals come down to your Display unit directly. Since they do not come through the Interswitch unit, you cannot switch them. If it is not suggested from JRC office, do not set the TB1 of Radar Interface Circuit to 2-3 SHORT CIRCUIT or OPEN. It may cause a lower radar system performance. 2-53 Chapter 2 System Configuration Connection procedure with Scanner Units 1. Connect the scanner unit to J832 and TB838 or TB840 as follows. J832: Radar signals. TB838: AC motor power. TB840: DC motor power. AC Motor Scanner Unit NKE-1139NKE-1130NKE-1632NKE-2632NKE-2632-H NKE-1129-7NKE-1129-9NKE-1125-6NKE-1125-9 DC Motor Scanner Unit NKE-2254-6HSNKE-2103-6NKE-2103-6HS J832 and TB838 J832 and TB840 For the procedures for processing the equipment cable end, see Chapter 2 of Installation Manual.. Fix the shield part of the equipment cable with pressing by metal fittings which is surrounded by a dotted line frame in the figure below. Connect the shield to the thumbscrew surrounded by the circle.(Recommended crimp terminals V5.5) So that the braided shield is not short-circuited to the power supply terminal block, please insulate the cable and fix with cable tie. Please put the Extra length of the cable to the bottom of the display unit so that the not shorted to 2. When connecting the interswitch unit, see INSTALLATION MANUAL 5.1 Installation of Interswitch Unit. 3. When connecting the ECDIS, see INSTALLATION MANUAL 3.8 Connection with ECDIS. Chapter 2 System Configuration 2-54 2.5.2. Settings for CMJ-554 Gyro Interface Circuit LOG PULSE INDICATOR LED

(GREEN) GYRO SIGNAL LEDs

(GREEN) ERROR INDICATOR LED

(RED) P-

P+

NC 5/R2 S3 3/S2 2/S1 1/R1 TB401, TB402, TB403 TB19 LOW-VOLTAGE GYRO SETTING POWER GOOD LED

(GREEN) TB10 Fig. 2.5.2 CMJ-554 Gyro Interface circuit TB1 Settings SYNC STEP Table. 2.5.2 GIF TB1 settings Description Synchro type Gyro compass Step type Gyro compass Table. 2.5.3 GIF TB401, TB402, TB403, TB19 settings TB401, TB402, TB403, TB19 Settings 1-2 SHORT CIRCUIT 2-3 SHORT CIRCUIT Description Factory default Low voltage settings TB10 Settings Table. 2.5.4 GIF TB10 settings Description SHORT CIRCUIT OPEN Factory default Not allowed If it is not suggested from JRC office, do not set the TB10 of Gyro Interface Circuit to OPEN. It may cause a lower radar system performance. 2-55 Chapter 2 System Configuration S1 Settings OFF ON Table. 2.5.5 GIF S1 settings Description Gyro signals will be disconnected. Gyro signals will be connected. Table. 2.5.6 GIF S2 settings S2 Settings Simulator ON Simulator OFF Simulator ON Simulator OFF NC 1 2 ON OFF ON ON 3 4 GYRO SIM LOG SIM Table. 2.5.7 GIF S3 settings S3 Settings 1 2 GYRO TYPE "STEP"

ON GYRO TYPE "SYNC" OFF 3 4 ON ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF 5 ON OFF 6 ON OFF ON OFF RATIO 36x RATIO 90x RATIO 180x RATIO 360x Direction 'REVERSE'

Direction 'NORMAL'

LONG SHORT LOG ALARM RATIO 100P RATIO 200P RATIO 400P RATIO 800P 7 8 ON ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF GYRO SETTING GYRO RATIO GYRO DIRECTION GYRO ALARM TIME LOG ALARM LOG SETTING Chapter 2 System Configuration 2-56 Gyro Compass and Gyro Interface Circuit will be disconnected. Synchro type Gyro Compass: Set TB1 to SYNC Step type Gyro Compass: Set TB1 to STEP Connection procedure with Gyro Compass 1. Turn S1 off 2. Switch TB1 for the type of your Gyro Compass 3. Set S3 as follows for your Gyro Compass and Speed Log according to Table. 2.5.7 GIF S3 settings. 4. Set TB401-403 and TB19 as follows if your Gyro Compass signals are less than 22V. 5. Connect your Gyro Compass and Speed Log to J823 of CMJ-554 Gyro Interface Circuit as follows. Gyro type (STEP / SYNC) Gyro speed ratio The direction of rotation Gyro alarm time (LONG / SHORT) Log alarm Log settings Factory default. Set this if voltages of step Gyro signals are less than 22V. S2-1 S2-2/3 S2-4 S2-5 S2-6 S2-7/8 1-2 SHORT CIRCUIT:

2-3 SHORT CIRCUIT:

(ON / OFF)

:

:

:

:

:

:

Table. 2.5.8 GIF input section Gyro and Log J823 Synchro Gyro R1, S1, S2, S3 and R2. Step Gyro 1, 2, 3 and 5

( 5 for common ) Pulse Log P+, P-

Description 24 - 115Vac

(50 / 60 / 400Hz) 21.6 - 70V 0-50V, Vth = 2V.

(5V, 1k ohm Internal Pull-up) Your Gyro compass will be connected to the Gyro interface circuit. 6. Turn S1 on 7. Check your Radar Echo and True Bearing Value to make sure that your Gyro Compass is working correctly. 8. Set S3-4 to REVERSE if your Radar Echo and True Bearing have Reverse rotation. 2-57 Chapter 2 System Configuration Table. 2.5.9 shows the setting examples for some gyro compasses. Table. 2.5.9 Setting examples for some gyro compasses item Gyro Compasses Repeater Motors

(For reference only) Excitation Voltage Manufacture Gyro Select Swiches

(S3, TB1 located on the CMJ-554) 1 2 S3 settings 5 4 3 6 7 8 setting TB1 TOKYO KEIKI

(JAPAN) Sperry

(U.S.A) ES-2/11 GLT-100103/105/106K/107/1104, NJZ-501(R501) ES-11A, GM-11/11A/21/110/120, MS-2000/3000 PR-222R/226/237/237-L

/1*8*/2022/2023/22**, TG-200 GLT-201/202/203, MK-14/14T, MKE-1/14T, MOD-1/2/T, PR-500/2502/2503/2507/2507L

/3507/4507/5507, SR-130/140, TG-100/5000 ES-16 SR-120/220 CMZ-700D ES140/160 PR-26**/6*6*/6*7*, SR-140/160 TG-6000/8000 C-1A/2/3/E, HOKUSHIN PLATH-55/C, PLATH HKRK-C3 YOKOGAWA

(JAPAN) C1JR, C-1JUNIOR, CMZ-200A/300, D-1, IPS, IPS-2-H2/2B/2B-H2C/5, KM008, KR-053, PLATH NAVIGAT-1, PT11-H2/21/21-H2 ARMA BROWN

(France) 1351, MK-17/10/20, MKL-1, NOD-4, NB-23-88, SERIE, SGB-1000 ANSCHUTZ

(Germany) C. PLATH

(Germany) 110-301, 139-31, ANSCHUTZ-16/12/14/Z, GM-BH, K8051, NB23-126, Z0658U NAVIGAT 763-331E, PLATH NAVIGAT-II/III

*Numeric Number 115V AC 60Hz 110V AC 60Hz OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON SYNC SYNC Synchro Motor INMS

(TS63N7E13)

(36X) Synchro Motor TSAN60E11

(90X) Step Motor GA-2001G Drawing# 103590810 70V DC ON ON OFF STEP 600 excitation

(180X) Step Motor GA-2001G Drawing# 103590820 150 excitation

(180X) Synchro Motor YM-14 TS-19

(360X) 35V DC 24V DC 60V AC 60Hz ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF STEP SYNC Synchro Motor PY76-N2

(360X) 100V AC 50/60Hz OFF OFF OFF SYNC Step Motor BZ-2191

(180X) Synchro Motor NB23-91

(360X) Synchro Motor YM14A

(360X) 50V DC ON ON OFF 50V AC 50Hz 50V AC 50Hz OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF STEP SYNC SYNC Chapter 2 System Configuration 2-58 2.5.3. Settings for CMH-2370 Serial LAN Interface Circuit IEC61162-1 Connections Connect the communication signals from sensors to the IEC61162-1 port located on the CMH-2370 in JUNCTION BOX NQE-1143. Received signals from sensors will be connected to terminals RX_A and RX_B which is IEC61162 standards. Transmit signals to sensors will be connected to terminals TX_A and TX_B which are IEC61162 standards. The number of port for IEC61162-1 on CMH-2370 is 8 ports including each receiver and transmitter allocated at J8103-J8106 on CMH-2370. See Fig. 2.5.5 Connector location of CMH-2370 Serial LAN interface circuitabout location of J8103-J8106 on CMH-2370. To configure the port, refer to Chapter 4 of Installation Manual Fix the signal cable with the clamp surrounded by the doted line in the figure below. Connect the cable shield to the hex spacer surrounded by the circle in the figure below.

(Recommended crimp terminals V5.5) So that the braided shield is not shorted to the power supply terminal block, please insulate the cable and fix with cable tie. Please put the Extra length of the cable to the bottom of the display unit so that the not shorted to the UPS or SENSOR LAN switch unit. 2-59 Chapter 2 System Configuration Table. 2.5.10 Terminal Assign of J8103-J8106 Terminal Number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 J8105 J8104 J8103 J8106 RX1A RX1B TX1A TX1B RX2A RX2B TX2A TX2B RX3A RX3B TX3A TX3B RX4A RX4B TX4A TX4B RX5A RX5B TX5A TX5B RX6A RX6B TX6A TX6B RX7A RX7B TX7A TX7B RX8A RX8B TX8A TX8B Chapter 2 System Configuration 2-60 IEC61162-2 Connections Connect the communication signals from sensors to the IEC61162-2 port located on the CMH-2370 in JUNCTION BOX NQE-1143. Communication signals from sensors will be connected to terminals RX_A, RX_B and RX_C which are IEC61162 standards. Communication signals to sensors will be connected to terminals TX_A, TX_B and TX_C which is IEC61162 standards. The number of port for IEC-61162-2 on CMH-2370 is two ports including each receiver and transmitter allocated at J8101 and J8102 on CMH-2370. See Fig. 2.5.5 Connector location of CMH-2370 Serial LAN interface circuitabout location of J8101-J8102 on CMH-2370. To configure the port, refer to Chapter 4 of Installation Manual Fix the signal cable with the clamp surrounded by the doted line in the figure below. Connect the cable shield to the hex spacer surrounded by the circle in the figure below.

(Recommended crimp terminals V5.5) So that the braided shield is not shorted to the power supply terminal block, please insulate the cable and fix with cable tie. Please put the Extra length of the cable to the bottom of the display unit so that the not shorted to the UPS or SENSOR LAN switch unit. Table. 2.5.11 Terminal Assign of J8101 and J8102 Terminal Number 1 2 3 4 5 6 J8102 J8101 TX10A TX9A TX10B TX9B TX9C TX10C RX9A RX10A RX9B RX10B RX9C RX10C 2-61 Chapter 2 System Configuration ex. Data communication example of AIS:

AIS data will be displayed on the radar screen by connecting sensor data from AIS to RX_A, RX_B and RX_C. By connecting to AIS from TX_A, TX_B and TX_C, it is possible to stop the AIS alarm displayed on the radar screen. Communication Type and termination Communication type of IEC61162-2 can be selected full duplex (IEC61162-2) mode or half duplex (RS-485) mode by TB2 and TB3 setting on CMH-2370. To select communication type for channel9, terminal of TB2 will be short-circuited by Short Plug. To select communication type for channel10, terminal of TB3 will be short-circuited by Short Plug. To set TB2 and TB3, refer to Table. 2.5.12 and Fig. 2.4.10 SLC IEC61162-2 TXRX detail. Table. 2.5.12 Setting of communication type Type Full duplex

(IEC61162-2) Short terminal No. of TB2 and TB3 5-9, 6-10, 7-11, 8-12 Half Duplex

(RS-485) 5-1, 6-2, 7-3, 8-4 And the termination of receiver can be removable for multi connections by TB14 and TB15 setting on CMH-2370. To set the termination for channel9, terminal of TB14 will be short-circuited by Short Plug. To set the termination for channel10, terminal of TB15 will be short-circuited by Short Plug. To set TB14 and TB15, refer to Table. 2.5.13 Short terminal to select communication typeand Fig. 2.4.10 SLC IEC61162-2 TXRX detail. Table. 2.5.13 Short terminal to select communication type Termination w Termination w/o Termination Short terminal No. of TB14 and TB15 2-3 (Factory default) 1-2 Note: The location of TB2, TB3, TB14, TB15, Refer to Fig. 2.5.5. Chapter 2 System Configuration 2-62 LAN Connection CMH-2370 converts the serial data from each sensor into LAN protocol. And the data converted by CMH-2370 transfer to DISPLAY UNIT via SENSOR LAN UNIT NQE-2443. It can transfer the data not only received from sensors to DISPLAY UNIT but also transmitted to sensor from DISPLAY UNIT. CMH-2370 will be connected to NQE-2443 each RJ-45 by an Ethernet cable. If it is not suggested from JRC office, do not connect PC or other maker's system to JRC-LAN. Connecting PC or other maker's system may cause a lower system performance. Either J8111 or J8112 selected by S4 will be used as an active LAN port. And, you can select the data format either IEC61162-450 or JRC Formant by S4. To set S4, refer to Table. 2.5.14. The location of J8111, J8112 and S4, refer to Fig. 2.5.5 Fix the signal cable with the clamp surrounded by the dotted line in the figure below. Table. 2.5.14 SLC S4 setting table SW1 LAN Setting SW2 LAN Type SW3 SW4 SW4 SW6 Fig. 2.5.3 Outline of S4 OFF Main Channel ON Sub Channel OFF ON Standard JRC Use J8111 Use J8112 IEC61162-450 JRC Format Always set to OFF Always set to OFF Always set to OFF Always set to OFF To apply the setting, please restart CMH-2370 with the S1, because it will be reflected in the startup. 2-63 Chapter 2 System Configuration If some number of CMH-2370s have been installed and connected to the same SENSOR LAN UNIT NQE-2443, you should change IP address of each CMH-2370 by S3 setting. Refer to Table. 2.5.15. CMH-2370 to be connected to the IAS (Integrated Automation System) or AMS (Alert Management System) is set the operation mode: ALC (Alert LAN Converter). Also in this case, set the IP address in refer to Table. 2.5.15. Fig. 2.5.4 Outline of S3 The location of S3, refer to Fig. 2.5.5. Table. 2.5.15 IP Address setting table S3 Position Mode No. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F SLC1 SLC2 SLC3 SLC4 SLC5 SLC6 SLC7 SLC8 SLC9 SLC10 SLC11 SLC12 ALC1 ALC2 ALC3 ALC4 SLC ALC IEC61162-450 JRC Format Main LAN 172.16.60.107 172.16.60.108 172.16.60.109 172.16.60.110 172.16.60.111 172.16.60.112 172.16.60.113 172.16.60.114 172.16.60.115 172.16.60.116 172.16.60.117 172.16.60.118 172.16.60.119 172.16.60.120 172.16.60.121 172.16.60.122 Sub LAN 172.17.60.107 172.17.60.108 172.17.60.109 172.17.60.110 172.17.60.111 172.17.60.112 172.17.60.113 172.17.60.114 172.17.60.115 172.17.60.116 172.17.60.117 172.17.60.118 172.17.60.119 172.17.60.120 172.17.60.121 172.17.60.122 Main LAN 192.168.60.107 192.168.60.108 192.168.60.109 192.168.60.110 192.168.60.111 192.168.60.112 192.168.60.113 192.168.60.114 192.168.60.115 192.168.60.116 192.168.60.117 192.168.60.118 192.168.60.119 192.168.60.120 192.168.60.121 192.168.60.122 Sub LAN 192.168.61.107 192.168.61.108 192.168.61.109 192.168.61.110 192.168.61.111 192.168.61.112 192.168.61.113 192.168.61.114 192.168.61.115 192.168.61.116 192.168.61.117 192.168.61.118 192.168.61.119 192.168.61.120 192.168.61.121 192.168.61.122 SFI:System Function ID of each IEC 61162 channel will also be changed depending on the IP address. Chapter 2 System Configuration 2-64 S3 S3 S4 S4 TB14 TB14 TB15 TB15 TB2 TB2 TB3 TB3 J8111 J8111 J8106 J8106 J8105 J8105 J8104 J8104 J8103 J8103 J8102 J8102 J8101 J8101 J8112 J8112 Fig. 2.5.5 Connector location of CMH-2370 Serial LAN interface circuit 2-65 Chapter 2 System Configuration Fig. 2.5.6 LED Indication of CMH-2370 Serial LAN interface circuit Chapter 2 System Configuration 2-66 Contact Input/Output Contact Input Connect the dry contact of other equipment to the Input port which is on CMH-2370 in JUNCTION BOX NQE-1143. The number of Input port on CMH-2370 is 4 ports allocated at J8107. Terminal assign of J8107, refer to Table. 2.5.16. Dry contact of other equipment will be connected to terminals IN and GND. See Fig. 2.5.9 Dry Contact Connector and TB location on CMH-2370about location of J8107 on CMH-2370. To configure the port, refer to Chapter 4 of Installation Manual. Fix the signal cable with the clamp surrounded by the dotted line in the figure below. Connect the cable shield to the hex spacer surrounded by the circle in the figure below.

(Recommended crimp terminals V5.5) Table. 2.5.16 Terminal Assign of J8107 Terminal Number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 J8107 IN1 GND1 IN2 GND2 IN3 GND3 IN4 GND4 the power supply So that the braided shield is not shorted to terminal block, please insulate the cable and fix with cable tie. Please put the Extra length of the cable to the bottom of the display unit so that the not shorted to the UPS or SENSOR LAN switch unit. Do not apply a voltage signal to contact input ports. Because they have pulled up to 5V with 1k ohm internally, connecting a voltage signal may cause malfunction. 2-67 Chapter 2 System Configuration Contact Output Connect the input of other equipment to the output port which is located on CMH-2370 in JUNCTION BOX NQE-1143. The number of output ports on CMH-2370 is 8 ports allocated at J8108. Terminal assign of J8108, refer to Table. 2.5.17 See Fig. 2.5.9. about location of J8108 on CMH-2370. To configure the port, refer to Chapter 4 of Installation Manual. Connect the cable shield to the hex spacer surrounded by the circle in the figure below.

(Recommended crimp terminals V5.5) So that the braided shield is not shorted to the power supply terminal block, please insulate the cable and fix with cable tie. Please put the Extra length of the cable to the bottom of the display unit so the not shorted to the UPS or SENSOR LAN switch unit. that Table. 2.5.17 Terminal Assign of J8108 Terminal Number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 J8107 OUT1 RET1 OUT2 RET2 OUT3 RET3 OUT4 RET4 OUT5 RET5 OUT6 RET6 OUT7 RET7 OUT8 RET8 2-68 Chapter 2 System Configuration Each Output port can be selected matched interface for your input device as below by setting TB4-TB11, TB16 and TB17 shown in Fig. 2.2.1.

- Dry contact: Normally Open

- Dry contact: Normally Close

- 24V dc for Buzzer: Normally no Supply

- 24V dc for Buzzer: Normally Supply 24V dc for buzzer will be supplied from main power supply of CMH-2370 via 15A fuse. If you set OUT as dry contact, do not set the terminal to GND on TB4 or TB5 which is matched to OUT you want. RELAY(SPDT) 24V 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 TB6-TB11, TB16 and TB17 OUT RET 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 TB4 or TB5 Connected to matched RET Fig. 2.5.7 Output port circuit diagram Matched TB for each OUT and RET is shown in Table. 2.5.18 And, to select Output, the terminals of each TB will be set by Short Plugs shown in Fig. 2.5.8. Table. 2.5.18 Matched TB for OUT setting Port Jumper No. OUT1/RET1 OUT2/RET2 OUT3/RET3 OUT4/RET4 OUT5/RET5 OUT6/RET6 OUT7/RET7 OUT8/RET8 TB6 TB7 TB8 TB9 TB17 TB16 TB11 TB10 24VDC Power GND TB4: 1-5 short circuit TB4: 2-6 short circuit TB4: 3-7 short circuit TB4: 4-8 short circuit TB5: 1-5 short circuit TB5: 2-6 short circuit TB5: 3-7 short circuit TB5: 4-8 short circuit 2-69 Chapter 2 System Configuration Dry contact output: Normally Open RELAY(SPDT) 24V 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 TB6-TB11, TB16 and TB17 Dry contact output: Normally Close RELAY(SPDT) 24V TB4 or TB5 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 TB6-TB11, TB16 and TB17 24V dc supply for Buzzer: Normally no Supply RELAY(SPDT) 24V TB4 or TB5 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 TB6-TB11, TB16 and TB17 24V dc supply for Buzzer: Normally Supply RELAY(SPDT) 24V TB4 or TB5 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 TB6-TB11, TB16 and TB17 Fig. 2.5.8 Output port setting by TB TB4 or TB5 OUT RET OUT RET OUT RET OUT RET Maximum current of RELAY is 2A. Do not connect the load including inrush current which exceed maximum current Chapter 2 System Configuration 2-70 J8108 TB10 TB11 TB16 TB17 TB4 TB5 TB7 TB6 TB8 TB9 J8107 TB3 Fig. 2.5.9 Dry Contact Connector and TB location on CMH-2370 2-71 Chapter 2 System Configuration 2.5.4. Settings for CMJ-560 Analog Option Circuit Connect the analog signals from sensors to J842 located on the CMJ-560 Analog Option Circuit:AOC in JUNCTION BOX NQE-1143. AOC has four channel analog signal inputs. The terminal assign of J842 is shown below. So that the braided shield is not shorted to the power supply terminal block, please insulate the cable and fix with cable tie. Please put the Extra length of the cable to the bottom of the display unit so the not shorted to the UPS or SENSOR LAN switch unit. that AOC shall be configured in accordance with the analog sensor output specifications to be connected. Set the AOC correctly by referring next page. Chapter 2 System Configuration 2-72 Set TB2-7 of CMJ-560 Analog Option Circuit according to ships analog sensors. Settings for voltage signal input When Analog Sensors output specifications is Voltage, set as follows. Input Signal Range -10V to +10V Table. 2.5.19 Setting Table of Voltage Signal Input Channel Setting Table of Voltage Signal Input Reference Setting 1 2 3 4 TB2 Short-circuit the pins 1-2 or Open all pins TB7(10V) Short-circuit the pins 1-5 TB3 Short-circuit the pins 1-2 or Open all pins TB7(10V) Short-circuit the pins 2-6 TB4 Short-circuit the pins 1-2 or Open all pins TB7(10V) Short-circuit the pins 3-7 TB5 Short-circuit the pins 1-2 or Open all pins TB7(10V) Short-circuit the pins 4-8 Short the pins 1-2. Refer to the above table. Short the pins. Refer to the above table. Fig. 2.5.10 Voltage input Settings for CMJ-560 Analog Option Circuit 2-73 Chapter 2 System Configuration Current Signal Input When Analog Sensors output specifications is Current, set as follows. Input Signal Range 4mA to 20mA Table. 2.5.20 Setting Table of Current Signal Input Setting Table of Current Signal Input Channel Reference Setting 1 2 3 4 TB2 TB6(4-20mA) TB3 TB6(4-20mA) TB4 TB6(4-20mA) TB5 TB6(4-20mA) Short-circuit the pins 2-3 Short-circuit the pins 1-5 Short-circuit the pins 2-3 Short-circuit the pins 2-6 Short-circuit the pins 2-3 Short-circuit the pins 3-7 Short-circuit the pins 2-3 Short-circuit the pins 4-8 Short the pins 2-3. Refer to the above table. Short the pins. Refer to the above table. Fig. 2.5.11 Current input settings for CMJ-560 Analog Option Circuit 2-74 Chapter 2 System Configuration 2.5.5. Settings for NDC-1590 Central Control Unit: CCU If it is not suggested from JRC office, this VGA monitor setting is not necessary. Wrong monitor setting may lose video output. Do NOT set the ID rotary switch to position 2 when a DVI monitor is / or both a DVI monitor and a VGA monitor are connected to the CCU. Wrong monitor setting may lose video output. Settings for ONLY connection of the VGA monitor to CCU. This section describes the video output setting that CCU has the only VGA monitor for its display. A VGA monitor will be connected to J4025 (Analog RGB) on CCU. 1. Turn off the CCU power. Then, Set the ID rotary switch as follows. 2. Turn on the CCU power. Confirm that the VGA output displays correctly. Table. 2.5.21 ID rotary switch settings for CCU NDC-1590 CCU NDC-1590 ID rotary switch settings Description 2 Other

( Factory default = 0 ) Only the VGA monitor is connected to J4205

(RGB_OUT) on the CCU. A DVI monitor is connected to J4101 (DVI_MNU) on the CCU. Or, both a DVI monitor and a VGA monitor are connected

(DVI_MNU) and J4205

(RGB_OUT) respectively on the CCU. to J4101 2-75 Chapter 2 System Configuration Fig. 2.5.12 ID rotary switch on CCU NOTE If the CCU has 16-posintions rotary switch (0 to F), it is not supported this VGA monitor setting. Settings for J4303: WMRST / PWRFAIL contact output. PWRFAIL and WMRST contact output configuration can be changed by TB1 and TB2 on the CCU I/F circuit CMH-2406. 1. Disassemble the CCU. Divide it into Upper base and Bottom base. For further information, see Field Service Manual 4.3.3.2 Replacing with the CCU Repair Kit NZC-1590. 2. Set TB1 and TB2 as follows. They are on the CCU I/F circuit mounted on the Upper base. Table. 2.5.22 TB1, TB2 settings on the CCU I/F circuit CMH-2406 CCU I/F circuit CMH-2406 J4303 TB setting Description PWRFAIL TB1 WMRST TB2 1-2 short circuit 2-3 short circuit 1-2 short circuit 2-3 short circuit Normally-closed (Factory default) Normally-open Normally-closed Normally-open (Factory default) Chapter 2 System Configuration 2-76 J4302: Termination resistor settings for GYRO-RX / AIS-RX Termination resistor ON / OFF setting for GYRO-RX and AIS-RX can be changed by TB5 and TB6 on the CCU I/F circuit CMH-2406. If the Display Unit has the Serial number of LC58298 or less, this setting is not available. 1. Confirm that the Serial number of the Display unit is greater than LC58298.

- Stand alone type

:

- Desktop /

Flush mount type

:

The Serial number has been affixed to the front cover of the Display Unit mount kit. The Serial number has been affixed to the top side of NDC-1590 :CCU. 2. Disassemble the CCU. Divide it into Upper base and Bottom base. For further information, see Field Service Manual 4.3.3.2 Replacing with the CCU Repair Kit NZC-1590. 3. Set TB5 and TB6 as follows. They are on the CCU I/F circuit mounted on the Upper base. 2-77 Chapter 2 System Configuration Table. 2.5.23 TB5, TB6 settings for CCU I/F circuit CMH-2406 CCU I/F circuit CMH-2406 J4302 TB settings Termination resistor AIS-RX TB5 GYRO-RX TB6 1-2 short circuit 100 ohm termination resistor.

(Factory default) 2-3 short circuit OFF 1-2 short circuit 100 ohm termination resistor.

(Factory default) 2-3 short circuit OFF Fig. 2.5.13 CCU Upper base and CCU I/F circuit The PCB type code of CMH-2406 which is included to the CCU of LC58298 or less is 7PCNA4070A. Suffix A PCB of CMH-2406 is not supported termination resistor ON /

OFF setting. Chapter 2 System Configuration 2-78 2.5.6. Settings for T/R Control circuit CMC-1205R

[DIP switch types]

SW1, SW2

[Jumper pin types]

J92, J93, J95, J96 NKE-2254 (25 kW, X-band, 2 units, DC motor) Jumper pin settings Jumper pin 3 2 1 SW2 ON DIP switch settings ( indicates a switch.) SW1 ON J92,J93,J95,J96: 1-2 short circuit 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 NKE-2254-HS (25 kW, X-band, 2 units, high-speed DC motor) Jumper pin settings DIP switch settings ( indicates a switch.) Jumper pin SW1 ON 3 2 1 SW2 ON J92,J93,J95,J96: 1-2 short circuit 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 J92,J93,J95,J96: 1-2 short circuit 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 DIP switch settings ( indicates a switch.) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 DIP switch settings ( indicates a switch.) SW1 ON SW1 ON NKE-1130 (30 kW, S-band, 2 units, AC motor) Jumper pin settings Jumper pin 3 2 1 SW2 ON J92,J93,J95,J96: 1-2 short circuit NKE-1125 (25 kW, X-band, 2 units, AC motor) Jumper pin settings Jumper pin 3 2 1 SW2 ON ON 3 2 1 Jumper pin NTG-3225 (25 kW, X-band, 3 units, AC motor) Jumper pin settings J92,J93 1-2 short circuit J95,J96 2-3 short circuit NTG-3230 (30 kW, S-band, 3 units, AC motor) Jumper pin settings J92,J93 1-2 short circuit J95,J96 2-3 short circuit Jumper pin 3 2 1 ON DIP switch settings ( indicates a switch.) SW1 ON SW2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 DIP switch settings ( indicates a switch.) SW2 SW1 ON 1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 2-79 Chapter 2 System Configuration 2.5.7. Settings for NKE-1632 Scanner Unit Voltage Selection of Motor Driver Circuit CBD-1949 1. Set JP1 as follows according to your ships AC voltage. Table. 2.5.24 JP1 settings for Motor Driver Circuit CBD-1949 Motor Driver Circuit CBD-1949 JP1 Settings 1-2 short circuit 2-3 short circuit Description 100Vac 220Vac Fig. 2.5.14 Motor Driver Circuit CBD-1949 in NKE-1632 Chapter 2 System Configuration 2-80 2.5.8. Settings for NKE-2632 Scanner Unit Voltage Selection of Motor Driver Circuit CBD-1949 3. Set JP1 as follows according to your ships AC voltage. Table. 2.5.25 JP1 settings for Motor Driver Circuit CBD-1949 Motor Driver Circuit CBD-1949 JP1 Settings 1-2 short circuit 2-3 short circuit Description 100Vac 220Vac Remove this side cover. Scanner Unit NKE-2632 Fig. 2.5.15 Motor Driver Circuit CBD-1949 in NKE-2632 2-81 Chapter 2 System Configuration 2.5.9. Settings for NKE-2632-H Scanner Unit Voltage Selection of Motor Driver Circuit CBD-1950 1. Set JP1 as follows according to your ships AC voltage. Table. 2.5.26 JP1 settings for Motor Driver Circuit CBD-1950 Motor Driver Circuit CBD-1950 JP1 Settings 1-2 short circuit 2-3 short circuit Description 100Vac 220Vac Fig. 2.5.16 Motor Driver Circuit CBD-1950 in NKE-2632-H Chapter 2 System Configuration 2-82 2.5.10. Setting for UPS Fig. 2.5.17 UPS components Setting for QUINT-DC-UPS/24DC/20 1. Set Bat-Select rotary switch of QUINT-DC-UPS/24DC/20 to 3.4. Bat-Select rotary switch Fig. 2.5.18 QUINT-DC-UPS/24DC/20 Bat-Select rotary switch 2-83 Chapter 2 System Configuration 2.5.11. Settings for Interswitch 4ch Interswitch NQE-3141-4A Since settings have been normally made upon shipment from factory, do not edit them if it is not suggested from JRC office. It may cause a lower radar system performance. Set dip switches SW11, SW12, and SW13 as shown below. For further information, see Chapter 5 of Installation Manual 1) SW11 setting (expansion mode, master/slave setting) Set all OFF. Chapter 2 System Configuration 2-84 2) SW12 setting (radar connection setting) Radar Connection Setting 1 ON No. 1 display unit connected OFF No. 1 display unit NOT connected 2 ON No. 1 antenna unit connected OFF No. 1 antenna unit NOT connected 3 ON No. 2 display unit connected OFF No. 2 display unit NOT connected 4 ON No. 2 antenna unit connected OFF No. 2 antenna unit NOT connected 5 ON No. 3 display unit connected OFF No. 3 display unit NOT connected 6 ON No. 3 antenna unit connected OFF No. 3 antenna unit NOT connected 7 ON No. 4 display unit connected OFF No. 4 display unit NOT connected 8 ON No. 4 antenna unit connected OFF No. 4 antenna unit NOT connected 3) SW13 (unused) Set all OFF 2-85 Chapter 2 System Configuration 8ch Interswitch NQE-3141-8A 8ch Interswitch has two CCL-304Rs like a two-storied structure. Although dip switches settings are basically the same as the settings shown in above, it is necessary to make settings for each of the two SW12. For further information, see Chapter 5 of Installation Manual. Factory default setting SW11-upper SW11-lower SW13-both

(bit1-bit2-bit3-bit4) OFF-OFF-OFF-ON OFF-OFF-ON-ON OFF-OFF-OFF-OFF Setting of upper CCL-304R, SW12 (radar connection setting) Radar Connection Setting 1 ON No. 1 display unit connected OFF No. 1 display unit NOT connected 2 ON No. 1 antenna unit connected OFF No. 1 antenna unit NOT connected 3 ON No. 2 display unit connected OFF No. 2 display unit NOT connected 4 ON No. 2 antenna unit connected OFF No. 2 antenna unit NOT connected 5 ON No. 3 display unit connected OFF No. 3 display unit NOT connected 6 ON No. 3 antenna unit connected OFF No. 3 antenna unit NOT connected 7 ON No. 4 display unit connected OFF No. 4 display unit NOT connected 8 ON No. 4 antenna unit connected OFF No. 4 antenna unit NOT connected Chapter 2 System Configuration 2-86 Setting of lower CCL-304R, SW12 (radar connection setting) Radar Connection Setting 1 ON No. 5 display unit connected OFF No. 5 display unit NOT connected 2 ON No. 5 antenna unit connected OFF No. 5 antenna unit NOT connected 3 ON No. 6 display unit connected OFF No. 6 display unit NOT connected 4 ON No. 6 antenna unit connected OFF No. 6 antenna unit NOT connected 5 ON No. 7 display unit connected OFF No. 7 display unit NOT connected 6 ON No. 7 antenna unit connected OFF No. 7 antenna unit NOT connected 7 ON No. 8 display unit connected OFF No. 8 display unit NOT connected 8 ON No. 8 antenna unit connected OFF No. 8 antenna unit NOT connected 2-87 Chapter 2 System Configuration Chapter 2 System Configuration 2-88

 

 

3. Repair Parts Chapter 3. Repair Parts 3.1 List of Repair Parts 3.1.1 Parts required for periodic replacement Here are parts required for periodic replacement. Part type Name Part name Interval NWZ-207 NWZ-208 NBD-913 NDC-1590 NKE-1130 NKE-1139 NTG-3230 NKE-1125 NKE-1129 FAN 19inch monitor FAN 26inch monitor FAN Power supply unit Central Control unit FAN S band radar antenna S band radar antenna S band transceiver Magnetron Magnetron X band radar antenna Motor Magnetron Motor FAN for motor driver circuit FAN for modulation Motor FAN for magnetron FAN for modulation Motor X band radar antenna X band transceiver Magnetron Magnetron NTG-3225 NKE-2254-HS X band radar antenna Replacement kit type 7ZYNA4004 7ZYNA4005 7ZYNA4007 7ZYNA4006 5VMAA00104 MDBW10823 7BFRD0002 40,000 hours 40,000 hours 100,000 hours 40,000 hours 4,000 hours 10,000 hours 20,000 hours 20,000 hours 10,000 hours 5BFAB00674 MDBW10823 4,000 hours 4,000 hours 10,000 hours 20,000 hours 20,000 hours 10,000 hours 5VMAA00104 5VMAA00106 MDBW10822 7BFRD0002 7BFRD0002 MDBW10822 4,000 hours 4,000 hours 5VMAA00106 5VMAA00106 NKE-2103 NKE-1632 X band radar antenna Solid state Radar antenna NKE-2632 Solid state radar antenna NKE-2632-H Solid state radar Motor 10,000 hours 7BDRD0045A FAN for magnetron 20,000 hours 7BFRD0002 FAN for modulation Magnetron Motor Motor 20,000 hours 4,000 hours 10,000 hours 10,000 hours FAN Motor FAN Motor FAN 100,000 hours 10,000 hours 100,000 hours 10,000 hours 100,000 hours 7BFRD0002 5VMAA00102 7BDRD0048 MDBW10823 109L0912S410 MDBW10823 109L0912S410 MDBW10967 109L0912S410 3-1 Chapter 3 Repair Parts Chapter 3 Repair Parts 3-2 3.1.2 Spares Name Unit Name Location Qty Specification Type (Code) List of Fuses Blade Fuse Auto Fuse Blade (mini) Fuse Auto Fuse Blade (mini) Fuse Auto Fuse Glass Fuse NBD-913 PSU NQE-1143 JB 2 1 2 4 DC32V 15A 1015(5ZFCK00008) DC32V 15A 1215(5ZFCK00017) DC32V 3A 1203(5ZFCK00016) 250V 0.5A MF51NR 250V 0.5

(5ZFGD00019) 3.1.3 Special Parts NKE-1125, NKE-2254 Corresponding model:

JMR-9225-6X/9X/6XH JMR-7225-6X/9X/6XH List of Special Parts of NKE-1125/2254 Parts No. V101 A101/A102 A103 A104 A301 Name Magnetron Circulator Dummy Filter Diode Limiter Type Manufacture M1568BS NJC3901M NJC4002 NJC9952 NJS6930 New JRC New JRC New JRC New JRC New JRC Location Scanner Unit Scanner Unit Scanner Unit Scanner Unit Scanner Unit Code 5VMAA00106 5AJBV00007 5ANDF00001 5AWAX00002 5ATBT00006 3-3 Chapter 3 Repair Parts NTG-3225 Corresponding model:

JMR-9225-7X3/9X3 JMR-7225-7X3/9X3 List of Special Parts of NTG-3225 Parts No. Name Type Manufacture V101 Magnetron M1568BS New JRC A101/A102 Circulator NJC3901M New JRC A103 Dummy NJC4002 New JRC A104 Filter NJC9952 New JRC A301 Diode Limiter NJS6930 New JRC A302 PIN Attenuator NJS6926 New JRC Location Transmitter Receiver Unit Transmitter Receiver Unit Transmitter Receiver Unit Transmitter Receiver Unit Transmitter Receiver Unit Transmitter Receiver Unit Code 5VMAA00106 5AJBV00007 5ANDF00001 5AWAX00002 5ATBT00006 5ATBT00007 NKE-1130 Corresponding model:

JMR-9230-S JMR-7230-S List of Special Parts of NKE-1130 Parts No. V101 A101 A301 Name Magnetron Circulator Diode Limiter Type M1555 NJC3316 NJS6318 Manufacture New JRC New JRC New JRC Location Scanner Unit Scanner Unit Scanner Unit Code 5VMAA00104 5AJBV00008 5ATBT00005 Chapter 3 Repair Parts 3-4 NTG-3230 Corresponding model:

JMR-9230-S3 JMR-7230-S3 List of Special Parts of NTG-3230 Parts No. Name Type Manufacture V101 Magnetron M1555 New JRC A101 Circulator NJC3317 New JRC A301 TR Limiter TL378A New JRC Location Transmitter Receiver Unit Transmitter Receiver Unit Transmitter Receiver Unit Code 5VMAA00104 5AJBV00009 5VLAA00037 NKE-2103-6, NKE-2103-6HS Corresponding model:

JMR-9210-6X/6XH JMR-7210-6X/6XH List of Special Parts of NKE-2103-6/6HS Parts No. V101 A101/A102 A103 A104 A301 Name Magnetron Circulator Dummy Filter Diode Limiter Type Manufacture New JRC MAF1565N FCX68R Orient Microwave NJC4002 NJC9952 NJS6930 New JRC New JRC New JRC Location Scanner Unit Scanner Unit Scanner Unit Scanner Unit Scanner Unit Code 5VMAA00102 5AJIX00027 5ANDF00001 5AWAX00002 5ATBT00006 3-5 Chapter 3 Repair Parts 3.1.4 Circuit blocks NKE-1125 Corresponding model:

JMR-9225-6X/9X JMR-7225-6X/9X Circuit blocks of NKE-1125 Circuit Block GEARED MOTOR Type MDBW10822*

H-7EPRD0035*

CHT-71A H-7EPRD0034*

ENCODER MOTOR DRIVER CIRCUIT MOTOR DRIVER CIRCUIT BRAKE CIRCUIT BRAKE CONTROL CIRCUIT BRAKE UNIT PERFORMANCE MONITOR T/R CONTROL CIRCUIT CMC-1205R MODULATOR UNIT NMA-550-1 CFA-253 CCB-655 NZR-16 NJU-85 NRG-162A CBD-1682A MODULATOR CIRCUIT CPA-264 RECEIVER UNIT POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT RELAY FILTER CIRCUIT FAN CSC-656 H-7BFRD0002*

Remarks For 100 / 220VAC For 220VAC For 100VAC Including CFA-259 / 260 CPA-264, Including CMB-404, and CFR-229. Excluding Magnetron. Including CMA-866A

* means revision, such as A, B, and so on. Chapter 3 Repair Parts 3-6 JMR-9225-7X3/9X3 JMR-7225-7X3/9X3 NKE-1129 Corresponding model:

Circuit blocks of NKE-1129 Circuit Block Type Remarks GEARED MOTOR MDBW10822*

ENCODER MOTOR DRIVER CIRCUIT MOTOR DRIVER CIRCUIT BRAKE CIRCUIT BRAKE CONTROL CIRCUIT BRAKE UNIT PERFORMANCE MONITOR CHT-71A H-7EPRD0034*

H-7EPRD0035*

CFA-253 CCB-655 NZR-15 NJU-85 For 100/220VAC For 220VAC For 100VAC Including CFA-259/260

* means revision, such as A, B, and so on. NTG-3225 Corresponding model:

JMR-9225-7X3/9X3 JMR-7225-7X3/9X3 Circuit blocks of NTG-3225 Circuit Block T/R CONTROL CIRCUIT MODULATOR UNIT Type CMC-1205R NMA-552-1 Remarks Including CPA-264, CMB-405, and CFR-229. Excluding Magnetron. Including CMA-866A CPA-264 NRG-162A CBD-1682A MODULATOR CIRCUIT RECEIVER UNIT POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT RELAY FILTER CIRCUIT CSC-656 3-7 Chapter 3 Repair Parts JMR-9230-S JMR-7230-S NKE-1130 Corresponding model:

Circuit blocks of NKE-1130 Circuit Block Type Remarks For 100/220VAC For 220VAC For 100VAC Including CFA-261 / 262 Including CPA-264, CMB-406, and CFR-229. Excluding Magnetron Including CAF-595 / CAE-499. GEARED MOTOR MDBW10823*

ENCODER MOTOR DRIVER CIRCUIT MOTOR DRIVER CIRCUIT BRAKE CIRCUIT BRAKE CONTROL CIRCUIT BRAKE UNIT PERFORMANCE MONITOR T/R CONTROL CIRCUIT MODULATOR UNIT CHT-71A H-7EPRD0034*

H-7EPRD0035*

CFA-225 CCB-655 NZR-17 NJU-84 CMC-1205R NMA-551-1 MODULATOR CIRCUIT RECEIVER UNIT CPA-264 NRG-229 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT RELAY FILTER CIRCUIT FAN CBD-1682A CSC-656

* means revision, such as A, B, and so on. H-7BFRD0002 Chapter 3 Repair Parts 3-8 JMR-9230-S3 JMR-7230-S3 NKE-1139 Corresponding model:

Circuit blocks of NKE-1139 Circuit Block Type Remarks GEARED MOTOR MDBW10823*

For 100/220VAC CHT-71A H-7EPRD0034* For 220VAC H-7EPRD0035* For 100VAC CFA-255 CCB-655 NZR-17 NJU-84 Including CFA-261 / 262 ENCODER MOTOR DRIVER CIRCUIT MOTOR DRIVER CIRCUIT BRAKE CIRCUIT BRAKE CONTROL CIRCUIT BRAKE UNIT PERFORMANCE MONITOR

* means revision, such as A, B, and so on. NTG-3230 Corresponding model:

JMR-9230-S3 JMR-7230-S3 Circuit blocks of NTG-3230 Circuit Block T/R CONTROL CIRCUIT MODULATOR UNIT Type CMC-1205R NMA-553-1 Remarks Including CPA-264, CMB-407, and CFR-229. Excluding Magnetron. CPA-264 NRG-229 CBD-1682A CSC-656 3-9 Chapter 3 Repair Parts MODULATOR CIRCUIT RECEIVER UNIT POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT RELAY FILTER CIRCUIT JMR-9225-6XH JMR-7225-6XH NKE-2254 Corresponding model:

Circuit blocks of NKE-2254 Circuit Block Type Remarks GEARED MOTOR ENCODER MOTOR DRIVER CIRCUIT BRAKE CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE MONITOR HEATER CONTROLL CIRCUIT POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT T/R CONTROL CIRCUIT MODULATOR UNIT H-7BDRD0045A DC Brushless CHT-71A CBD-1779 CFA-257 NJU-85 CHG-216 CBD-1682A Option100VAC CMC-1205R NMA-550-1 Including CPA-264, CMB-404, CFR-229. Excluding Magnetron. Including CMA-866A. MODULATOR CIRCUIT RECEIVER UNIT FAN CPA-264 NRG-162A H-7BFRD0002 Chapter 3 Repair Parts 3-10 NKE-2103, NKE-2103-HS Corresponding model:

JMR-9210-6X/6XH JMR-7210-6X/6XH Circuit blocks of NKE-2103, NKE-2103-HS Circuit Block Type Remarks GEARED MOTOR H-7BDRD0048* DC Brushless MODULATOR CIRCUIT RECEIVER UNIT POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT ENCODER MOTOR CONTROL POWER SUPPLY BRAKE CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE MONITOR FAN CME-363 NRG-610 CBD-1783 CHT-71A CBD-1779

( Common with HS) Excluding Magnetron. Including CAE-529-1 CFA-252 NJU-85 H-7BFRD0002 NKE-1632 Corresponding model:

JMR-9272-S JMR-7272-S Circuit blocks of NKE-1632 Remarks Circuit Block TRX MODULE RADAR PROCESS UNIT POWER SUPPLY

/ INTERFACE CIRCUIT ENCORDER FAN MOTOR MOTOR DRIVER MOTOR Type CMN-797 NDC-4920 CMP-493 CHT-85 109L0912S410 CBD-1949 MDBW10823 3-11 Chapter 3 Repair Parts NKE-2632 Corresponding model:

JMR-9282-S JMR-7282-S Circuit blocks of NKE-2632 Remarks Remarks Circuit Block TRX MODULE RADAR PROCESS UNIT POWER SUPPLY

/ INTERFACE CIRCUIT ENCORDER FAN MOTOR MOTOR DRIVER MOTOR Type CMN-797 NDC-4920 CMP-493 CHT-85 109L0912S410 CBD-1949 MDBW10823 NKE-2632-H Corresponding model:

JMR-9282-SH JMR-7282-SH Circuit blocks of NKE-2632-H Circuit Block TRX MODULE RADAR PROCESS UNIT POWER SUPPLY

/ INTERFACE CIRCUIT ENCORDER FAN MOTOR MOTOR DRIVER MOTOR Type CMN-797 NDC-4920 CMP-493 CHT-85 109L0912S410 CBD-1950 MDBW10967 Chapter 3 Repair Parts 3-12 Display Unit Corresponding model:

JMR-92xx / JMR-72xx JAN-92xx / JAN-72xx Circuit blocks of Display Unit Circuit Block Monitor Unit 26 inch MNU Replacement FAN kit Monitor Unit 19 inch MNU Replacement FAN kit Power supply Unit PSU Replacement FAN kit Central Control Unit DVD drive CCU Replacement FAN kit CCU Repair kit Trackball Operation Unit Trackball Operation Circuit A Operation Circuit SW Operation Circuit CN Keyboard Operation Unit Operation Circuit B Option Keyboard Knob dia. 38mm Knob dia. 22mm Screw cover (L) Screw cover (U) Serial LAN Interface Circuit Gyro Interface Circuit Radar Interface Circuit Analog Option Circuit Sensor LAN Switch Unit Type NWZ-208 H-7ZYNA4005 NWZ-207 H-7ZYNA4004 NBD-913 H-7ZYNA4007 NDC-1590 CDD-754 H-7ZYNA4006 NZC-1590 NCE-5605 CCK-1060 CCK-1050 CCK-1069 CCK-1070 NCE-5625 CCK-1059 CCK-1061 MPHD30460 MPHD30459 MTV305169 MTV305170 CMH-2370 CMJ-554 CQD-2273 CMJ-560 NQA-2443 Remarks 26inch Included in NWZ-208 19inch Included in NWZ-207 Included in NBD-913 Included in NDC-1590 Included in NCE-5605 Included in NCE-5625 3-13 Chapter 3 Repair Parts 3.2 Exploded view drawings NKE-2103 No. PARTS NAME PRODUCT SERVICE NOTE CODE MDNAX5041 MDNAX5041 BRTG07249 BRTG00404 MTL315466 MPGK31182 MTC301684 MTT309252 Radiator Assy. Radiator Assy. Bolts Spring Washers Washers Support Assy. Antenna Support Slide Plate Waterproof Ring 309256A O-Ring BRPK00054 Upper Housing Assy. MPBX44085 Upper Housing MTC301682 V-Ring BRPK00189 BRBP06738 Liquid-Tight Cable Clamps Drive Assy. MPGK31181 Main Shaft MTC301685 Main Gear MTG300511 Gear MTG300424A Bracket MTC301655 Key MTL325003 Spacer 1 MTL325004 Spacer 2 MTL325005 Bearing BRGK05420 Bearing BRGK05409 Retaining Ring Type-C BRTG05289 Bearing Nut BRTG06929 Cross-recessed Head Screw BSNC03010B Rotary Joint MPAB31563 H-7BDRD00048 Motor CODE NAX-16B-6 7BDRD00048 CBP-202 NAX-16B-6 M10X35SUS S-cort SW10 SUS P42 V-100A OA-W1611EC1-BB 6011ZZ 6009ZZ HC75 SK5 AN09 NC3X8Bs 1 1-1 1-2 1-3 1-4 2 2-1 2-2 2-3 2-4 3 3-1 3-2 3-3 4 4-1 4-2 4-3 4-4 4-5 4-6 4-7 4-8 4-9 4-10 4-11 4-12 5 6 Chapter 3 Repair Parts 3-14 No. PARTS NAME PRODUCT CODE MPAB31564 Wave Guide Unit MTM301722A Wave Guide MTM301843 Flange MTB366792A Push Plate BRTG08900 Bolts MPEM30205 Encoder Assy. MDMW11070 Encoder MTT006909B Gear MTD001842 Turn-Stopper MPBX44086A Lower Housing Assy. MTC301683 Lower Housing MTT312329 Packing MTV302550 Breathing Cap MTT305919A Packing MPPK00925A Switch Cover MTB366112 Cable Push Plate BRBP00009 Cable Clamp Cross-recessed Head Screw BSNK04010B Cross-recessed Head Screw BSNC04010B Cross-recessed Head Screw BSNB05010B MDNZT5023 Transceiver Assy. MPBX44420 Main Chassis Wave Guide Circuit MPAB31606 MTB389799 CIR-Attachment Receiver Unit MDNRG5093 5ATBT00006 Diode Limiter 5AJIX00027 Circulator Filter 5AWAX00002 Guide Plate MT326122 5ANDF00001 Dummy Load Spacer MTL318403 MTL325492 MG-PIN Bolts BRTG07397 Cross-recessed Head Screw BRTG07156 Cross-recessed Head Screw BSNC04010B Spring Washers BSSW04000S 7 7-1 7-2 7-3 7-4 8 8-1 8-2 8-3 9 9-1 9-2 9-3 9-4 9-5 9-6 9-7 9-8 9-9 9-10 10 10-1 10-2 10-2-1 10-2-2 10-2-3 10-2-4 10-2-5 10-2-6 10-2-7 10-2-8 10-2-9 10-2-11 10-2-12 10-2-13 10-2-14 SERVICE CODE NOTE CHT-71A NRG-610 M4X25 SUS SW W NK4X10Bs NC4X10Bs NB5X10Bs NZT-2103 NRG-610 NJS6930 FCX68R NJC-9952 NJC4002 M4X12 SW SUS304 M4X70 Bs NC4X10Bs SW4 3-15 Chapter 3 Repair Parts No. PARTS NAME PRODUCT CODE SERVICE CODE NOTE 10-2-15 Washers 10-3 10-4 10-5 10-6 10-7 10-8 10-9 10-10 10-11 10-12 10-13 BSFW04000B Modulator Unit MPBX44290 Power Supply Unit MPBX44291 MDBW10832 Motor Control PC 5VMAA00102 Magnetron Resistors

-

-

Filter PC Cover MTB389805 MTB388518 Nut Plate MTB388903 Connection Plate Motor Cover MTB391765 BSNB04012B Cross-recessed Head Screw 10-14 Cross-recessed Head BSNC04010B Screw 10-15 Cross-recessed Head BSNC04016B Screw 10-16 Cross-recessed Head BSNC03008B Screw Encoder Plate Stay Grand-Cable Shaft Bolts Spring Washers Washers O-Ring Clamp Gland Cover Gasket Washers Corted Bolts MTB388510A MPDM30321 H-7ZCRD1504 MTL325006 MTL006545A BRTG00747 BRTG00224 BRPK00027 MPTG30399 BRTG01414 MTT308695A BRTG00883 BRTG09192 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 25 W4Bs CME-363 CBD-1783 CBD-1779 CBD-1779 5VMAA00102 MAF1565N CFA-252 CFR-234 NB4X12Bs NC4X10Bs NC4X16Bs NC3X8Bs M8X35 Machining SW8 SUS W8 P7 M8X20 SUS304 corted Chapter 3 Repair Parts 3-16 SERVICE CODE NOTE SUSW8S1 M4X0.7X6 SUS304 M8X25SFESWWZMC4RBU M6X70FESWWZMC4RBU NC4X25Bs M4X12 SW W SUS304 M5X16 SW W SUS304 NB5X10Bs NB4X12Bs NC4X10Bs NC3X8Bs No. PARTS NAME PRODUCT CODE BRTG06850 Sealing Washers BRTG1030G Hex-Head Setscrew BRTG09297 Bolts Bolts BRTG09296 Cross-recessed Head Screw BSNC04025B BRTG06852 Bolts Bolts BRTG09004 Cross-recessed Head Screw BSNB05010B Cross-recessed Head Screw BSNB04012B Cross-recessed Head Screw BSNC04010B Cross-recessed Head Screw BSNC03008B 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 3-17 Chapter 3 Repair Parts Fig. 3.2.1 Exploded view of NKE-2103 Chapter 3 Repair Parts 3-18 NKE-2254 No. PARTS NAME PRODUCT SERVICE NOTE Radiator Assy. Bolt Spring Washer Washer Support Assy. Antenna Support Slide Plate O-Ring Housing Assy. Housing Sleev Breathing Cap Upset Bolt Toggle Switch Cover for SW Cover Cover NK5X10Bs NK5X12Bs Cover Assy. Cover Packing Bolt Spring Washer Washer Sealing Washer Drive Assy. Flange Main Shaft Main Gear Gear Spacer Key 1 1-1 1-2 1-3 2 2-1 2-2 2-3 3 3-1 3-2 3-3 3-4 3-5 3-6 3-7 3-8 3-9 3-10 4 4-1 4-2 4-3 4-5 4-4 4-6 5 5-1 5-2 5-3 5-4 5-5 5-6 CODE BRTG07249 BRTG00404 MTL315466 MPBX40223 MTC301223A MTT309252 BRPK00054 MTC301727 MTL317432 MTT309253 BRTG09305 MDLW11931 MPPK00925A MTB389969 MTB389970 BSNK05010B BSNK05012B MPBX44875 MTC301729 MTV303883 MPTG31381 BRTG00747 BRTG00224 BRTG01826 MPGK30895C MTC301224A MTH300568A MTG300423A MTG300424 MTB366794A MTL317433 CODE NAX-16B-6 6ft HEX10X35 SUS304 SW10 P42 ID41.7 D3.5 M5X12 FF ZMC4RBU CSD-654 M8SUS304 3.2X2 M8 SUS304 M8 SUS 3-19 Chapter 3 Repair Parts No. PARTS NAME PRODUCT CODE BRGK05410 Bearing Bearing BRGK05409 Retaining Ring-C Type BRTG06164 Roling Bearing Washer BRTG07261 O-Ring BRPK05043 Roling Bearing Locknut BSAN10000S BRPK00189 V-Ring Bolt BRTG07268 BRTG07270 Spring Washer BRTG07267 Washer Bolt BRTG06849 MPAB31188 Rotary Joint Assy. MPAB31207A Wave Guide Encoder Assy. MPEM30202 MDMW11068 Encoder Spur Gear MTT006909B Click MTD001842 Plate Encoder Mounting MTB366793A Upset Bolt BRTG06852

-

Motor Assy.

-

Motor

-

-

MTC301225 Flange for Motor Bolt BRTG09307 Bolt Clump Gland Assy.(A30) Clump Gland Gasket Washer Cover Clump Gland Assy.(A25) Clump Gland Gasket Washer Cover Heat radiation Board BRTG09306 MPJD30062A MPTG31572A BRPK00108 BRTG01246 BRTG01415 MPJD30063A MPTG31573A BRPK00134 BRTG00883 BRTG01414 MPBC43035 5-7 5-8 5-9 5-10 5-11 5-12 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 13-1 13-2 13-3 13-4 13-5 14 14-1 14-2 14-3 14-4 14-5 15 15-1 15-2 15-3 15-4 16 16-1 16-2 16-3 16-4 17 Chapter 3 Repair Parts 3-20 NOTE 6012ZZ CM/5K 6009ZZ CM/5K AW10X ID50 G155 AN10 M50X1.5 V-100A M8X25 TI M8 TI M8 TI M8X23 SUS304 CHT-71 M4X12SWWSUS304 M8X30 SW W SUS304 M8X20 ZMC FESWW 30B AL 30 AL A25a 25A AL 25 AL SERVICE CODE CHT-71A 7BDRD0045A No. PARTS NAME PRODUCT SERVICE CODE NOTE CPA-264 CBD-1682A CBD-1779 NZT-1125 NMA-550-1 CPA-264

(MDLW11927) 5VMAA00106 CMC-1205R CMC-1205R NRG-162A NRG-162A M5X16 SW W NJC9952 NJC4002 CODE Power Supply Unit MPBX44439 Chassis for Power Supply MPBX44440 MDBW10837 Power Supply PC

-

-

Motor Control Assy. MPBX44318A Chassis for Control MPBX44319 Motor Power Supply PC MDBW10832 Tranceiver Assy. MDNZT5024A MDNMA5077A Modulator Unit Main Chassis MPBX44445 MPBX44446 Cover Assy.(L) MPBX44447 Cover Assy.S Modulator PC MDLW11930 Magnetoron Pulse Transformer Flame Holding Plate Circulator Diord Limiter Wave Guide Guide Plate Spacer Spurious Filter Dummy Load TR-Control PC Receiver Assy. Nut Plate FAN Cross-Recessed Head Screw

-

-

MPBC43040 MTB389330

-

-

MPAB31622 MTL318911A MTL318403

-

-

-

MDNRG5094A MTB389894 MPEM30151 BSNC04030B BRTG07502 21-22 Bolt BRPK00019 O-Ring Bolt BRTG07397 Cross-recessed Head Screw BRTG05659 Performance Monitor Unit PM Adapter

-

MPBC43041A NJU-85 SUS304 M4X12 SW SUS304 NK4X0.7X65Bs NJU-85 3-21 Chapter 3 Repair Parts 18 18-1 18-2 19 20 20-1 20-2 21 21-1 21-2 21-3 21-4 21-5 21-6 21-7 21-8 21-9 21-10 21-11 21-12 21-13 21-14 21-15 21-16 21-17 21-18 21-19 21-20 21-21 21-23 21-24 21-25 22 23 No. PARTS NAME PRODUCT CODE SERVICE CODE NOTE 24 24-1 24-2 24-3 24-4 25 26 Neck Heator kit Neck Heator Unit Plate Clamp Plate Clamp Terminal Board for heater Cross-recessed Head Screw BSNC04010B Cross-recessed Head Screw BSNC04016B MDMW11067A

-

MTB374149 MTB374150

-

(CHG-216) M4X10 SW LW M4X16 SW LW Chapter 3 Repair Parts 3-22 Fig. 3.2.2 Exploded view of NKE-2254 3-23 Chapter 3 Repair Parts NKE-1125 No. PARTS NAME PRODUCT SERVICE NOTE 1 1-1 1-2 1-3 2 2-1 2-2 2-3 3 3-1 3-2 3-3 3-4 3-5 3-6 3-7 3-8 3-9 3-10 4 4-1 4-2 4-3 4-5 4-4 4-6 5 5-1 5-2 5-3 5-4 5-5 Radiator Assy. Bolt Spring Washer Washer Support Assy. Antenna Support Slide Plate O-Ring Housing Assy. Housing Sleev Breathing Cap Upset Bolt Toggle Switch Cover for SW Cover Cover NK5X10Bs NK5X12Bs Cover Assy. Cover Packing Bolt Spring Washer Washer Sealing Washer Drive Assy. Flange Main Shaft Main Gear Gear Spacer Chapter 3 Repair Parts CODE NAX-16B 9ft/7ft/6ft HEX10X35 SUS304 SW10 P42 ID41.7 D3.5 M5X12 FFZMC4RBU CSD-654 M8SUS304 3.2X2 M8 SUS304 M8 SUS CODE BRTG07249 BRTG00404 MTL315466 MPBX40223 MTC301223A MTT309252 BRPK00054 MTC301727 MTL317432 MTT309253 BRTG09305 MDLW11931 MPPK00925A MTB389969 MTB389970 BSNK05010B BSNK05012B MPBX44875 MTC301729 MTV303883 MPTG31381 BRTG00747 BRTG00224 BRTG01826 MPGK30895C MTC301224A MTH300568A MTG300423A MTG300424 MTB366794A 3-24 No. PARTS NAME PRODUCT CODE MTL317433 Key BRGK05410 Bearing Bearing BRGK05409 Retaining Ring-C Type BRTG06164 Roling Bearing Washer BRTG07261 O-Ring BRPK05043 Roling Bearing Locknut BSAN10000S V-Ring BRPK00189 BRTG07268 Bolt Spring Washer BRTG07270 BRTG07267 Washer BRTG06849 Bolt Rotary Joint Assy. MPAB31188 MPAB31207A Wave Guide MPEM30202 Encoder Assy. Encoder MDMW11068 MTT006909B Spur Gear Click MTD001842 Plate Encoder Mounting MTB366793A BRTG06852 Upset Bolt Motor Assy.

-

MPEM30201 Motor MTG300425 Spur Gear Flange for Motor MTC301225 BRTG09307 Bolt Bolt BRTG09306 Clump Gland Assy.(A30) MPJD30062A MPTG31572A Clump Gland Gasket BRPK00108 BRTG01246 Washer Cover BRTG01415 Clump Gland Assy.(A25) MPJD30063A MPTG31573A Clump Gland Gasket BRPK00134 BRTG00883 Washer Cover BRTG01414 5-6 5-7 5-8 5-9 5-10 5-11 5-12 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 13-1 13-2 13-3 13-4 13-5 14 14-1 14-2 14-3 14-4 14-5 15 15-1 15-2 15-3 15-4 16 16-1 16-2 16-3 16-4 SERVICE CODE NOTE CHT-71A MDBW10822 6012ZZ CM/5K 6009ZZ CM/5K AW10X ID50 G155 AN10 M50X1.5 V-100A M8X25 TI M8 TI M8 TI M8X23 SUS304 CHT-71A M4X12SWWSUS304 CBP-203 M8X30SWWSUS304 M8X20 SWWFEZMC 30B AL 30 AL A25a 25A AL 25 AL 3-25 Chapter 3 Repair Parts No. PARTS NAME PRODUCT CODE MPBC43035 Heat radiation Board MPBX44439 Power Supply Unit Chassis for Power Supply MPBX44440 Power Supply PC MDBW10837 Plate for Terminal Board MTB389888 MTB389888 Plate

-

Terminal Board Motor Control Assy. MPBX45038 MPBX45039 Chassis for Control Motor Driver for 100V

-

-

Motor Driver for 220V

-

Relay PC Brake control PC

-

MDNZT5024A Tranceiver Assy. MDNMA5077A Modulator Unit Main Chassis MPBX44445 MPBX44446 Cover Assy.(L) MPBX44447 Cover Assy.S 17 18 18-1 18-2 19 19-1 19-2 20 20-1 20-2A 20-2B 20-3 20-4 21 21-1 21-2 21-3 21-4 21-5 Modulator PC MDLW11930 21-6 21-7 21-8 21-9 21-10 21-11 21-12 21-13 21-14 21-15 21-16 21-17 21-18 21-19 21-20 21-21 Magnetoron Pulse Transformer Flame Holding Plate Circulator Diord Limiter Wave Guide Guide Plate Spacer Spurious Filter Dummy Load TR-Control PC Receiver Assy. Nut Plate FAN Cross-Recessed Head Screw Chapter 3 Repair Parts

-

-

MPBC43040 MTB389330

-

-

MPAB31622 MTL318911A MTL318403

-

-

-

MDNRG5094A MTB389894 MPEM30151 BSNC04030B 3-26 SERVICE CODE NOTE CBD-1682A CBD-1682A 7EPRD0035 CBD-2001 7EPRD0034 CBD-2000 CSC-632 CSC-656 CCB-655 CCB-655 NZT-1125 NMA-550-1 CPA-264

(MDLW11927) 5VMAA00106 CMC-1205R CMC-1205R NRG-162A NRG-162A NJC9952 NJC4002 CPA-264 No. PARTS NAME 21-22 Bolt O-Ring Bolt Cross-recessed Head Screw Performance Monitor Unit PM Adapter Neck Heator kit Neck Heator Unit Plate Clamp Plate Clamp Terminal Board for heater Cross-recessed Head Screw 21-23 21-24 21-25 22 23 24 24-1 24-2 24-3 24-4 25 26 PRODUCT CODE SERVICE CODE NOTE BRTG07502 BRPK00019 BRTG07397 BRTG05659 M5X16SWW SUS304 M4X12 SW SUS304 NK4X0.7X65Bs

-

MPBC43041A MDMW11067A

-

MTB374149 MTB374150

-

BSNC04010B NJU-85 NJU-85

(CHG-216) M4X10 SW LW M4X8 SW LW Cross-recessed Head BSNC04008B Screw 3-27 Chapter 3 Repair Parts Fig. 3.2.3 Exploded view of NKE-1125 Chapter 3 Repair Parts 3-28 NKE-1129 No. PARTS NAME PRODUCT SERVICE NOTE Radiator Assy. Bolt Spring Washer Washer Support Assy. Antenna Support Slide Plate O-Ring Housing Assy. Housing Sleev Breathing Cap Upset Bolt Toggle Switch Cover for SW Cover Cover NK5X10Bs NK5X12Bs Cover Assy. Cover Packing Bolt Spring Washer Washer Sealing Washer Drive Assy. Flange Main Shaft Main Gear Gear Spacer Key 1 1-1 1-2 1-3 2 2-1 2-2 2-3 3 3-1 3-2 3-3 3-4 3-5 3-6 3-7 3-8 3-9 3-10 4 4-1 4-2 4-3 4-5 4-4 4-6 5 5-1 5-2 5-3 5-4 5-5 5-6 CODE BRTG07249 BRTG00404 MTL315466 MPBX40223 MTC301223A MTT309252 BRPK00054 MTC301727 MTL317432 MTT309253 BRTG09305 MDLW11931 MPPK00925A MTB389969 MTB389970 BSNK05010B BSNK05012B MPBX44875 MTC301729 MTV303883 MPTG31381 BRTG00747 BRTG00224 BRTG01826 MPGK30895C MTC301224A MTH300568A MTG300423A MTG300424 MTB366794A MTL317433 CODE NAX-16B 9ft/7ft HEX10X35 SUS304 SW10 P42 ID41.7 D3.5 M5X12 FF ZMC4RBU CSD-654 M8SUS304 3.2X2 M8 SUS304 M8 SUS 3-29 Chapter 3 Repair Parts SERVICE CODE NOTE CHT-71A MDBW10822 6012ZZ CM/5K 6009ZZ CM/5K AW10X ID50 G155 AN10 M50X1.5 V-100A M8X25 TI M8 TI M8 TI M8X23 SUS304 CHT-71 M4X12 SW W SUS304 CBP-203 M8X30 SW W SUS304 M8X20SWWFE ZMC 30B AL 30 AL No. PARTS NAME PRODUCT 5-7 5-8 5-9 5-10 5-11 5-12 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 13-1 13-2 13-3 13-4 13-5 14 14-1 14-2 14-3 14-4 14-5 15 15-1 15-2 15-3 15-4 CODE BRGK05410 Bearing BRGK05409 Bearing Retaining Ring-C Type BRTG06164 Roling Bearing Washer BRTG07261 O-Ring BRPK05043 BSAN10000S Roling Bearing Locknut V-Ring Bolt Spring Washer Washer Bolt Rotary Joint Assy. Wave Guide Encoder Assy. Encoder Spur Gear Click Plate Encoder Mounting Upset Bolt Motor Assy. Motor Spur Gear Flange for Motor Bolt BRPK00189 BRTG07268 BRTG07270 BRTG07267 BRTG06849 MPAB31188 MPAB31207A MPEM30202 MDMW11068 MTT006909B MTD001842 MTB366793A BRTG06852

-

MPEM30201 MTG300425 MTC301225 BRTG09307 Bolt Clump Gland Assy.(A30) Clump Gland Gasket Washer Cover BRTG09306 MPJD30062A MPTG31572A BRPK00108 BRTG01246 BRTG01415 Chapter 3 Repair Parts 3-30 No. PARTS NAME PRODUCT CODE SERVICE CODE NOTE 16 16-1 16-2 16-3 16-4 17 18 18-1 18-2 19 20 20-1 20-2A 20-2B 20-3 20-4 21 21-1 21-2 22 23 24 24-1 24-2 24-3 24-4 25 26 Clump Gland Assy.(A25) Clump Gland Gasket Washer Cover Bracket Connection Waveguide Waveguide Transformer Waveguide(for 3unit)

-

Motor Control Assy. Chassis for Control Motor Driver Motor Driver

-

Brake control PC Terminal Board Assy. Chassis for Terminal Board Terminal Board Performance Monitor Unit PM Adapter Neck Heator kit Neck Heator Unit Plate Clamp Plate Clamp Terminal Board for heater Cross-recessed Head Screw Cross-recessed Head Screw MPJD30063A MPTG31573A BRPK00134 BRTG00883 BRTG01414 MPBC38474 MPAB31264A MTM301850 MTM301571A

-

MPBX45041 MPBX45039

-

-

-

-

MPTE30368A MPBC38473A MPTE00753

-

MPBC43041A MDMW11067A

-

MTB374149 MTB374150

-

BSNC04010B BSNC04008B A25a 25A AL 25 AL 7EPRD0035 CBD-2001 7EPRD0034 CBD-2000 CCB-655 NJU-85 CCB-655 NJU-85

(CHG-216 M4X10 SW LW M4X8 SW LW 3-31 Chapter 3 Repair Parts Fig. 3.2.4 Exploded view of NKE-1129 Chapter 3 Repair Parts 3-32 NKE-1130 No. PARTS NAME PRODUCT Radiator Assy. Bolt Spring Washer Washer Support Assy. Antenna Support Slide Plate Angle Mounting Flange Plate Bolt O-Ring O-Ring Housing Assy. Housing Cover Cover Cover Eeybolt Bolt Cover Assy. Cover Packing Bolt Spring Washer Washer Sealing Washer Drive Assy. Flange Main Shaft Main Gear Gear Spacer 1 1-1 1-2 1-3 2 2-1 2-2 2-3 2-4 2-5 2-6 2-7 2-8 3 3-1 3-2 3-3 3-4 3-5 3-6 4 4-1 4-2 4-3 4-4 4-5 4-6 5 5-1 5-2 5-3 5-4 5-5 CODE MPAE30494 MPTG30317 BRTG00404 BRTG00402 MPGK31208 MTC301654 MTB085860 MTA301876 MTC301697 MTB388904 BRTG00413 BRPK00077 BRPK00102 MPBX44644 MTC301650A MTB391089 MTB388905 MTB389970 BRTG09377 BRTG00876 MPBX44206 MTC301653A MTV304394 MPTG31381 BRTG00224 BRTG00747 BRTG01826 MPGK31207 MTC301652A MTH300660 MTG300493 MTG300424A MTL325042 3-33 SERVICE CODE NOTE Sband-12ft M10X35SUS SW10 SUS W10 SUS M10X25SUS M10X25SUS HEX6X12SUS_SW_W B8X30 SW8 SUS304 W8 SUS304 Chapter 3 Repair Parts No. PARTS NAME PRODUCT CODE SERVICE CODE NOTE

-

-

MTK300651 Key MTL325041 Plate BRGK05486 Bearing BRGK05419 Bearing BRPK00337 V-Ring MTL325043 Bearing case BRTG04290 Bolt BSAN13000S Roling Bearing Locknut BSAN18000S Roling Bearing Locknut BSAW13000S Roling Bearing Washer BSAW18000S Roling Bearing Washer BRTG09193 Bolt MPAB31588 Rotary Joint Assy. MDBW10823 Motor Assy.

-

Motor MTG300142A Spur Gear BRTG00752 Bolt

-

Turning Switch Assy. MPDM30338 Cap MPSW30170 Toggle Switch MTV001589 Housing MPPK00925A Cover for SW MPJD30062A Clump Gland Assy.(A30) MPTG31572A Clump Gland BRPK00108 Gasket BRTG01246 Washer BRTG01415 Cover MPJD30063A Clump Gland Assy.(A25) MPTG31573A Clump Gland BRPK00134 Gasket BRTG00883 Washer BRTG01414 Cover MPEM30199 Encoder Assy. Encoder MDMW11068 Plate Encoder Mounting MTB366793A 5-6 5-7 5-8 5-9 5-10 5-11 5-12 5-13 5-14 5-15 5-16 5-17 5-18 6 7 7-1 7-2 7-3 8 8-1 8-2 8-3 8-4 9 9-1 9-2 9-3 9-4 10 10-1 10-2 10-3 10-4 11 11-1 11-2 Chapter 3 Repair Parts 3-34 6018ZZCM/5K 6014ZZCM/5K V-180A CAP8X30_SCM435 AN13 AN18 AW13 AW18 M10X30SUS MDBW10823 CBP-205 CHT-71A1 HEX10X40SUS CSD-656 CHT-71A1 No. PARTS NAME PRODUCT CODE Spur Gear MTT006909B Click MTD001842 Wave Guide ASSY MPAB31722 Circulator

-

Spurious Filter MPAB31663 Diord Limiter

-

Dummy Load MPAB31595 Plate MTB391087 Internal unit guide ASSY MPBP31560 Wave Guide ASSY MPAB31723A Power Supply Unit MPBX44646 Chassis for Power Supply MPBC43418 Power Supply PC Modulator Unit Main Chassis MDBW10837A MDNMA5080A MPBC43438 Modulator PC MDLW11946

-

-

-

Magnetoron Holding Plate for Magnetoron MPBP31522 FAN Fan guard Cross-recessed Head Screw BSNC04030B Cross-recessed Head Screw BSNB04010B Receiver Assy. MPBX45031 MPBX45032 Chassis for Receiver Receiver MDNRG5092B MPBC43420 Chassis for TRCONT TR-Control PC Terminal Board MPBC43421 Relay PC MPBX45027 Chassis for Control Brake control PC Motor Control Assy. MPBX44651 Chassis for Motor Control MPBX44653 Motor Driver for 100V Motor Driver for 220V

-

-

11-3 11-4 12 12-1 12-2 12-3 12-4 12-5 13 14 15 15-1 15-2 16 16-1 16-2 16-3 16-4 16-5 16-6 16-7 16-8 17 17-1 17-2 17-3 17-4 17-5 17-6 17-7 17-8 18 18-1 18-2A 18-2B SERVICE CODE NOTE CPA-264 NJS6318 CBD-1682A NMA-551-1 CBD-1682A CPA-264

(MDLW11927) 5VMAA00104 7BFRD0002 NRG-229 CMC-1205R CMC-1205R CSC-656 CCB-655 7PERD0035 CBP-2001 7PERD0034 CBP-2000 NC4X30Bs NC4x10Bs NRG-229 CSC-656 CCB-655 3-35 Chapter 3 Repair Parts No. PARTS NAME PRODUCT 19 Holding PlateA for Unit CODE MPBP31565 SERVICE CODE 20 21 22 23 23-1 23-2 23-3 24 24-1 24-2 24-3 24-4 Holding PlateA for Modulator MTB391101 Holding PlateB for Modulator MTB391102 Holding PlateB for Receiver MTB391103 Performance Monitor Unit Performance Monitor Cradle Bolt Neck Heater kit Neck Heater Unit Plate Clamp Plate Clamp Bolt

-

-

MTB391104 BRTG01690 MDMW11048

-

MTB388896 MTB388897 BRTG00671 NJU-84 NOTE M6X16SWW SUS304 NJU-84 HEX5X12SUS

(CHG-215 HEX6X16SUS Chapter 3 Repair Parts 3-36 Fig. 3.2.5 Exploded view of NKE-1130 3-37 Chapter 3 Repair Parts SERVICE CODE NOTE Sband-12ft M10X35SUS SW10 SUS W10 SUS M10X25SUS M10X25SUS HEX6X12SUS_SW_W B8X30 SW8 SUS304 W8 SUS304 NKE-1139 No. PARTS NAME PRODUCT 1 1-1 1-2 1-3 2 2-1 2-2 2-3 2-4 2-5 2-6 2-7 2-8 3 3-1 3-2 3-3 3-4 3-5 3-6 4 4-1 4-2 4-3 4-4 4-5 4-6 5 5-1 5-2 5-3 5-4 5-5 Radiator Assy. Bolt Spring Washer Washer Support Assy. Antenna Support Slide Plate Angle Mounting Flange Plate Bolt O-Ring O-Ring Housing Assy. Housing Cover Cover Cover Eeybolt Bolt Cover Assy. Cover Packing Bolt Spring Washer Washer Sealing Washer Drive Assy. Flange Main Shaft Main Gear Gear Spacer CODE MPAE30494 MPTG30317 BRTG00404 BRTG00402 MPGK31208 MTC301654 MTB085860 MTA301876 MTC301697 MTB388904 BRTG00413 BRPK00077 BRPK00102 MPBX44644 MTC301650A MTB391089 MTB388905 MTB389970 BRTG09377 BRTG00876 MPBX44206 MTC301653A MTV304394 MPTG31381 BRTG00224 BRTG00747 BRTG01826 MPGK31207 MTC301652A MTH300660 MTG300493 MTG300424A MTL325042 Chapter 3 Repair Parts 3-38 No. PARTS NAME PRODUCT CODE SERVICE CODE NOTE 5-6 5-7 5-8 5-9 5-10 5-11 5-12 5-13 5-14 5-15 5-16 5-17 5-18 6 7 7-1 7-2 7-3 8 8-1 8-2 8-3 8-4 9 9-1 9-2 9-3 9-4 10 10-1 10-2 10-3 10-4 11 11-1 11-2

-

-

MTK300651 Key MTL325041 Plate BRGK05486 Bearing BRGK05419 Bearing BRPK00337 V-Ring MTL325043 Bearing case BRTG04290 Bolt BSAN13000S Roling Bearing Locknut BSAN18000S Roling Bearing Locknut BSAW13000S Roling Bearing Washer BSAW18000S Roling Bearing Washer BRTG09193 Bolt MPAB31588 Rotary Joint Assy. MDBW10823 Motor Assy.

-

Motor(AC110V 1) MTG300142A Spur Gear BRTG00752 Bolt

-

Turning Switch Assy. MPDM30338 Cap MPSW30170 Toggle Switch MTV001589 Housing Cover for SW MPPK00925A Clump Gland Assy.(A30) MPJD30062A MPTG31572A Clump Gland Gasket BRPK00108 BRTG01246 Washer Cover BRTG01415 Clump Gland Assy.(A25) MPJD30063A MPTG31573A Clump Gland BRPK00134 Gasket Washer BRTG00883 BRTG01414 Cover Encoder Assy. MPEM30199 Encoder MDMW11068 Plate Encoder Mounting MTB366793A 6018ZZCM/5K 6014ZZCM/5K V-180A CAP8X30_SCM435 AN13 AN18 AW13 AW18 M10X30SUS MDBW10823 CBP-205 CHT-71A1 HEX10X40SUS CSD-656 CHT-71A1 3-39 Chapter 3 Repair Parts No. PARTS NAME PRODUCT Spur Gear Click Wave Guide Wave Guide Gland ASSY Flange Clump Gland Cover Washer Gasket Bolt Motor Control Assy. Chassis for Control Motor Driver for 100V Motor Driver for 220V Brake control PC Brake PC Terminal Board Assy. Plate for Terminal Board Terminal Board Cross-recessedScrew Head BSNC04020B CODE MTT006909B MTD001842 MPAB31727 MPJD30077 MTC301681 MPTG31993 MTD300791 BRTG01190 BRPK00013 BRTG04312 MPBC43925 MPBC43926

-

-

MPBX45028 MPBX45029 MPBX44654A MTB391106

-

SERVICE CODE NOTE HEX6X20SUS_SW_W 7PERD0035 CBP-2001 7PERD0034 CBP-2000 Performance Monitor Unit Performance Monitor Cradle Bolt Neck Heater kit Neck Heater Unit Plate Clamp Plate Clamp Bolt

-

-

MTB391104 BRTG01690 MDMW11048

-

MTB388896 MTB388897 BRTG00671 NJU-84 NJU-84 HEX5X12SUS

(CHG-215) HEX6X16SUS 11-3 11-4 14 15 15-1 15-2 15-3 15-4 15-5 15-6 16 16-1 16-2A 16-2B 16-3 16-4 17 17-1 17-2 17-3 23 23-1 23-2 23-3 24 24-1 24-2 24-3 24-4 Chapter 3 Repair Parts 3-40 Fig. 3.2.6 Exploded view of NKE-1139 3-41 Chapter 3 Repair Parts SERVICE CODE NOTE M10X35SUS SW10 SUS W10 SUS M10X25SUS M10X25SUS HEX6X12SUS_SW_W B8X30 SW8 SUS304 W8 SUS304 NAX-80 NKE-1632 No. PRODUCT PARTS NAME MTA301876 MTB085860 MTC301654 CODE Radiator Assy. MPAE30494 Bolt MPTG30317 Spring Washer BRTG00404 Washer BRTG00402 Support Assy. MPGK31208A Antenna Support Slide Plate Angle Mounting MTC301697A Flange MTB388904 Plate BRTG00413 Bolt BRPK00077 O-Ring O-Ring BRPK00102 Housing Assy. MPBX45478 MTC301650B Housing MTB391089 Cover

-

-

MTB389970 Cover BRTG09377 Eeybolt Bolt BRTG00876 MPBX44206A Cover Assy. MTC301653B Cover Packing MTV304394 Bolt MPTG31381 Spring Washer BRTG00224 Washer BRTG00747 Sealing Washer BRTG01826 1 1-1 1-2 1-3 2 2-1 Angle 2-3 2-4 2-5 2-6 2-7 2-8 3 3-1 3-2 3-3 3-4 3-5 3-6 4 4-1 4-2 4-3 4-4 4-5 4-6 Chapter 3 Repair Parts 3-42 SERVICE CODE NOTE No. 5 5-1 5-2 5-3 5-4 5-5 5-6 5-7 5-8 5-9 5-10 5-11 5-12 5-13 5-14 5-15 5-16 5-17 CODE PRODUCT PARTS NAME MPGK31207 Drive Assy. MTC301652A Flange MTH300660 Main Shaft MTG300493 Main Gear MTG300424A Gear MTL325042 Spacer

-

-

MTK300651 Key MTL325041 Plate BRGK05486 Bearing BRGK05419 Bearing V-Ring BRPK00337 Bearing case MTL325043 Bolt BRTG04290 Roling Bearing Locknut Roling Bearing Locknut Roling Bearing Washer Roling Bearing Washer BSAW13000S BSAW18000S BSAN13000S BSAN18000S 5-18 Bolt BRTG09193 MDBW10823 MDBW10823

-

MTG300142A BRTG00752 MPAB31588A Rotary Joint Assy. Motor Assy. Motor Spur Gear Bolt Turning Switch Assy. Cap MPDM30356 Toggle Switch MPSW30204 Housing MTV304855 Cover for SW MPPK00925A MPSW30204 6 7 7-1 7-2 7-3 8 8-1 8-2 8-3 8-4 6018ZZCM/5K 6014ZZCM/5K V-180A CAP8X30_SCM435 AN13 AN18 AW13 AW18 M10X30SUS Plating CBP-205 HEX10X40SUS 3-43 Chapter 3 Repair Parts No. PARTS NAME PRODUCT CODE SERVICE CODE NOTE MTB366793A MPJD30063A MPJD30062A BRPK00108 BRTG01246 BRTG01415 Clump Gland Assy.(A30) Clump Gland MPTG31572A Gasket Washer Cover Clump Gland Assy.(A25) Clump Gland MPTG31573A BRPK00134 Gasket BRTG00883 Washer BRTG01414 Cover Encoder Assy. MPEM30264 Encoder MDMW11233 Plate Encoder Mounting Spur Gear Click Clump Gland Assy.(A15) Clump Gland MPTG31574A Gasket Washer Cover 20D-N Type Connector Cable Power supply I/F Unit Power supply I/F Circuit Chassis for Power Supply Back Cover BRPK00222 BRTG01341 BRTG01402 MTT006909B MTD001842 MPBC48362 MPAB32437 MPBX48307 MPJD30067 MTB407208

-

-

CMP-493 9 9-1 9-2 9-3 9-4 10 10-1 10-2 10-3 10-4 11 11-1 11-2 11-3 11-4 12 12-1 12-2 12-3 12-4 13 14 15 15-1 15-2 15-3 Chapter 3 Repair Parts 3-44 No. PARTS NAME PRODUCT CODE SERVICE CODE NOTE 16 16-1 16-2 16-3 16-4 16-5 16-6 16-7 17 18 19 19-1 19-2 20 20-1 20-2 20-3 20-4 21 21-1 21-2 21-3 21-4 MDNDC5537 NDC-4920 NZT-1632 MPBP31963 MPBC48375 MDNZT5034 BSNC04016B BSNC04035B MDHW10842 CMN-797

-

MTB407209 Transmission and Receiver Unit Signal processing Unit Transmission and Receiver Circuit Main Chassis MPBX47975 FAN Fan Base Cross-recessed Head Screw Cross-recessed Head Screw Tarminal Board Assy. Baseboard Motor Control Assy. Chassis for Motor Control Motor Driver for 100V Performance Monitor Unit PM Radome PM Packing Cross-recessed Head Screw Plate Neck Heater kit MDMW11243 CHG-235 Neck Heater Unit Plate Clamp Plate Clamp Bolt MTB388896 MTB388897 BRTG00671 MTV305275 MTV305274 MPBC48809 MPBX48308 BRTG00522 MTB406039 CAY-77

-

-

-

CBD-1949 M4X35Bs_SW_LW M4X16Bs_SW_LW HEX6X16SUS 3-45 Chapter 3 Repair Parts Fig. 3.2.7 Exploded view of NKE-1632 Chapter 3 Repair Parts 3-46 NKE-2632 No. PARTS NAME PRODUCT CODE SERVICE CODE NOTE Radiator Assy. Bolt Spring Washer MDNAX5078 MPTG01390 BRTG00404 BRTG00402 MPGK31559 1 1-1 1-2 1-3 Washer 2 2-1 2-2 2-3 2-4 2-5 2-6 2-7 O-Ring 2-8 O-Ring 2-9 3 3-1 3-2 3-3 3-4 4 4-1 4-2 4-3 4-4 4-5 Washer 4-6 Support Assy. Antenna Support MTC302006A Slide Plate MTT314616 Angle Mounting MTA302014 MTC301697A Flange MTB402474 Plate Bolt BRTG00413 BRPK00102 BRPK00077 BRTG00671 MPBX48305 MTC302003A

-

-

MTB389970 MPBX48304 MTC302005A MTV305276 MPTG31381 BRTG00747 BRTG00224 BRTG01826 Bolt Housing Assy. Housing

-

-

Cover Cover Assy. Cover Packing Bolt Spring Washer Sealing Washer NAX-110 M10X30SUS SW10 SUS W10 SUS M10X25SUS M6X16SUS B8X30 SW8 SUS304 W8 SUS304 3-47 Chapter 3 Repair Parts SERVICE CODE NOTE No. PARTS NAME PRODUCT Drive Assy. Flange Main Shaft Main Gear Gear Spacer Support Ring Key Plate Bearing Bearing V-Ring 5 5-1 5-2 5-3 5-4 5-5 5-6 5-7 5-8 5-9 5-10 5-11 5-12 Coaxial Flange 5-13 Bolt Roling Flange Locknut Roling Flange Locknut Roling Bearing Washer Roling Bearing Washer 5-14 5-15 5-16 5-17 CODE MPGK31557 MTC302004A MTH300728 MTG300550 MTG300424A MTL330503 MTB402490A MTK300677 MTL330502 BRGK05419 BRGK05420 BRPK05214 BRTG03882 BSAN14000S BSAN11000S BSAW14000S BSAW11000S 5-18 Bolt BRTG09193 6 7 7-1 7-2 7-3 8 8-1 8-2 8-3 8-4 MPAB32497 Rotary Joint Assy. MDBW10823 CBP-205 Motor Assy. 7BDRD0049 Motor MTG300142A Spur Gear BRTG00752 Bolt Turning Switch Assy. MPSW30203 MPDM30357 B MPSW30202 MTV304855 MPPK00925A Toggle Switch Housing Cover for SW Cap Chapter 3 Repair Parts 3-48 6014ZZCM/5K 6011ZZCM/5K V-160A MTL330501A CAP8X20_SCM435 AN14 AN11 AW14 AW11 M10X30SUS Plating HEX10X40SUS No. PARTS NAME PRODUCT SERVICE NOTE Encoder Assy. Cover Clump Gland Assy.(A25) Clump Gland Assy.(A30) 9 Clump Gland 9-1 9-2 Gasket 9-3 Washer 9-4 10 10-1 Clump Gland 10-2 Gasket 10-3 Washer 10-4 Cover 11 11-1 Encoder 11-2 Plate Encoder Mounting 11-3 Spur Gear 11-4 Click 12 13 14 15 15-1 Power supply I/F circuit 15-2 Chassis for Power Supply 15-3 Back Cover

-

20D-N Type Connector Cable Power supply I/F Unit 16 Transmission and Receiver Unit CODE CODE MPJD30062A MPTG31572A BRPK00108 BRTG01246 BRTG01415 MPJD30063A MPTG31573A BRPK00134 BRTG00883 BRTG01414 MPEM30263

-

CHT-85 MTB405539 MTT006909B MTD001842

-

MPAB32436

-

MPBX48307 CMP-493

-

MPBC48362 MTB407208 MDNZT5036 NZT-2632 16-1 Signal processing Unit MDNDC5537 NDC-4920 16-2 Transmission and Receiver circuit 16-3 Main 16-4 FAN 16-5 Fan Base 16-6 Cross-recessed Head Screw 16-7 Cross-recessed Head Screw MDHW10842 CMN-797 MPBX48314 109L0912S410 Chassis

-

MTB407209 BSNC04035B BSNC04016B M4X35Bs_SW_LW M4X16Bs_SW_LW 3-49 Chapter 3 Repair Parts No. PARTS NAME PRODUCT CODE SERVICE CODE NOTE CBD-1949 Tarminal Board Assy. Base board Motor Control Assy. Performance Monitor Unit PM Radpme PM Packing MPBP31963 MPBC48800 MPBX48306 MPBC48799

-

MPAE30619 CAY-77 MTV305275 MTV305274 17 18 19 19-1 Chassis for Motor Control 19-2 Motor Driver for 100V 20 20-1 20-2 20-3 Cross-recessed Head Screw BRTG00522 M4X12 SUS 21 21-1 Neck Heater Unit 21-2 21-3 21-4 MDMW11242 CHG-234

-

MTB388896 MTB388897 BRTG00671 HEX6X16SUS Plate Clamp Plate Clamp Bolt Neck Heater kit Chapter 3 Repair Parts 3-50 Fig. 3.2.8 Exploded view of NKE-2632 3-51 Chapter 3 Repair Parts NKE-2632-H No. PARTS NAME PRODUCT SERVICE NOTE CODE Radiator Assy. Bolt Spring Washer MDNAX5078 MPTG01390 BRTG00404 BRTG00402 MPGK31559 CODE NAX-110 Support Assy. Antenna Support MTC302006B Slide Plate MTT314616 Angle Mounting MTA302014 MTC301697A Flange MTB402474 Plate BRTG00413 Bolt BRPK00077 BRPK00102 BRTG00671 MPBX48305 MTC302003A

-

-

MTB389970 MPBX48304 MTC302005A MTV305276 MPTG31381 BRTG00747 BRTG00224 BRTG01826 1 1-1 1-2 1-3 Washer 2 2-1 2-2 2-3 2-4 2-5 2-6 2-7 O-Ring 2-8 O-Ring 2-9 3 3-1 3-2 3-3 3-4 4 4-1 4-2 4-3 4-4 4-5 Washer 4-6 Bolt Housing Assy. Housing

-

-

Cover Cover Assy. Cover Packing Bolt Spring Washer Sealing Washer M10X30SUS SW10 SUS W10 SUS M10X25SUS M6X16SUS B8X30 SW8 SUS304 W8 SUS304 Chapter 3 Repair Parts 3-52 SERVICE CODE NOTE No. PARTS NAME PRODUCT Drive Assy. Flange Main Shaft Main Gear Gear Spacer Support Ring Key Plate Bearing Bearing V-Ring 5 5-1 5-2 5-3 5-4 5-5 5-6 5-7 5-8 5-9 5-10 5-11 5-12 Coaxial Flange 5-13 Bolt CODE MPGK31557 MTC302004A MTH300728A MTG300550 MTG300424A MTL330503 MTB402490A MTK300677 MTL330502 BRGK05419 BRGK05420 BRPK05214 MTL330501A BRTG03882 5-14 5-15 5-16 5-17 5-18 6 7 7-1 7-2 7-3 8 8-1 8-2 8-3 8-4 BSAN11000S BSAN14000S Rolling Flange Locknut Rolling Flange Locknut BSAW14000 Rolling Bearing S Washer BSAW11000 Rolling Bearing S Washer BRTG09865 Bolt MPAB32497 Rotary Joint Assy. MDBW10967 MDBW10967 Motor Assy. 7BDRD0050 Motor MTG300142A Spur Gear BRTG00752 Bolt Turning Switch Assy. MPSW30203 MPDM30357 B

-

MTV304855 MPPK00925A Toggle Switch Housing Cover for SW Cap 6014ZZCM/5K 6011ZZCM/5K V-160A CAP8X20_SCM43 5 AN14 AN11 AW14 AW11 M10X30SUS CBP-227 HEX10X40SUS 3-53 Chapter 3 Repair Parts No. PARTS NAME PRODUCT CODE SERVICE CODE NOTE Encoder Assy. Encoder Plate Encoder Mounting Spur Gear Clump Gland Assy.(A30) Clump Gland Gasket Washer Cover Clump Gland Assy.(A25) 9 9-1 9-2 9-3 9-4 10 10-1 Clump Gland 10-2 Gasket 10-3 Washer 10-4 Cover 11 11-1 11-2 11-3 11-4 Click 12 13 14 15 15-1 15-2 Chassis for Power Supply 15-3 16 16-1 16-2 16-3 Main Chassis 16-4 16-5 16-6 Cross-recessed Head Screw 16-7 Cross-recessed Head Screw

-

20D-N Type Connector Cable Power supply I/F Unit Power supply I/F circuit FAN Fan Base MPJD30062A MPTG31572A BRPK00108 BRTG01246 BRTG01415 MPJD30063A MPTG31573A BRPK00134 BRTG00883 BRTG01414 MPEM30263 5BPAN00009 CHT-85 MTB405539 MTT006909B MTD001842

-

MPAB32436

-

MPBX48307 CMP-493

-

MPBC48362 MTB407208 109L0912S410 MPBX48314 5BFAB00768 MTB407209 BSNC04035B BSNC04016B 109L0912S410 M4X35Bs_SW_LW M4X16Bs_SW_LW Back Cover Transmission and Receiver Unit MDNZT5036 NZT-2632 Signal processing Unit MDNDC5537 NDC-4920 Transmission and Receiver circuit MDHW10842 CMN-797 Chapter 3 Repair Parts 3-54 No. PARTS NAME PRODUCT SERVICE NOTE CODE CODE CBD-1950 Terminal Board Assy. Base board Motor Control Assy. Performance Monitor Unit PM Radome PM Packing MPBP31963 17 MPBC48800 18 MPBX48306 19 MPBC48799 19-1 Chassis for Motor Control

-

19-2 Motor Driver for 100V MPAE30619 CAY-77 20 MTV305275 20-1 20-2 MTV305274 20-3 Cross-recessed Head Screw BRTG00522 21 21-1 Neck Heater Unit 21-2 21-3 21-4 MDMW11242 CHG-234

-

MTB388896 MTB388897 BRTG00671 Plate Clamp Plate Clamp Bolt Neck Heater kit M4X12 SUS HEX6X16SUS 3-55 Chapter 3 Repair Parts Fig. 3.2.9 Exploded view of NKE-2632-H Chapter 3 Repair Parts 3-56 NTG-3225 No. PARTS NAME PRODUCT SERVICE CODE NOTE B6X40SUS M4X12 SW SUS304 NB6X30Bs W8 SUS SW8 SUS NJC3901M NJS6930 NJC4002 NJC-9952 M4X12 SW SUS304 M4X0.7X65BS NC6X16Bs SW4 W4Bs CODE Chassis Assy. MPBX44429 Chassis MPBC43018 Bracket for Modulator MPBC42790 Fixing Plate MTB389236 Clamp MTL305132 Clamp MTL305133 Bolt BRTG00930 Bracket MTB371097 Bracket MPBC43020 Terminal Board MPTE00753 Guide Pin BRTG00313 Teflon Seat MTT016920 Cover MTB005980A Upset Bolt BRTG07397 Cross-recessed Head Screw BSNB06030B Cover Assy. MPBC43061 MPTG32003 Thumb Screw MTB089176 Nut Washer BRTG00224 BRTG00747 Spring Washer MPAB31620 Wave Guide Assy. Wave Guide MTM300794 MTB370775 Bracket for Circulator Circulator

-

-

Diode Limitter Dummy Load

-

Waveguide Transformer MTM301849

-

Spurious Filter Upset Bolt BRTG07397 Cross-recessed Head Screw BRTG05659 Cross-recessed Head Screw BSNC06016B BSSW04000S Spring Washer Washer BSFW04000B 1 1-1 1-2 1-3 1-4 1-5 1-6 1-7 1-8 1-9 1-10 1-11 1-12 1-13 1-14 2 2-1 2-2 2-3 2-4 3 3-1 3-2 3-3 3-4 3-5 3-6 3-7 3-8 3-9 3-10 3-11 3-12 3-57 Chapter 3 Repair Parts No. PARTS NAME PRODUCT Clamping Plate Assy. Bracket1 Bracket2 Spacer Upset Bolt Modulator Unit Chassis for Modulator Cover for Modulator CODE MPBP31515 MTB370773A MTB389242 MTL306498 BRTG06852 MDNMA5076A MPBC43021 MTB389249 Modulator MDLW11926 Pulse Transformer

-

Waveguide MPAB31622 Magnetron

-

Receiver MDNRG5094 Bracket for Receiver MTB389833 Power Supply Unit MPBX44430A Chassis for Power supply MPBC43022 Power Supply PC MDBW10837 MPTE30365A Relay Unit MPBC43023A Chassis for Relay Relay PC

-

-

TR Control PC MTB371105 Cover TR Control Spacer BRBP06891 Cross-recessed Head Screw BSNC04012B Cross-recessed Head Screw BSNC04010B 4 4-1 4-2 4-3 4-4 5 5-1 5-2 5-3 5-4 5-5 5-6 6 6-1 7 7-1 7-2 8 8-1 8-2 9 10 11 12 13 SERVICE CODE NMA-1252 CPA-264

(MDLW11927) 5VMAA00106 NRG-162A CBD-1682A CSC-656 CMC-1205R NOTE M4X12 SW W SUS304 BSB-440E NC4X12Bs NC4X10Bs Chapter 3 Repair Parts 3-58 Fig. 3.2.10 Exploded view of NTG-3225 3-59 Chapter 3 Repair Parts SERVICE CODE NMA-553-1 CPA-264

(MDLW11927) 5VMAA00104 NRG-229 NOTE B6X40 SUS304 M6X35Bs SW W SW8 SUS W8 SUS M6X20 SUS304 SW W M5X16 SUS304 SW W NTG-3230 No. PARTS NAME PRODUCT CODE Chassis Assy. MPBX44501 Chassis MPBC43175 Bracket MPBC38083 Clamp MTL305132 Clamp MTL305133 Bolt BRTG00930 Cross-recessed Head Screw BSNB06035B Spring Washer BSSW06000S MPTE00753 Terminal Board MPBC43178 Cover Assy. Thumb Screw MPTG32003 MTB089176 Nut BRTG00747 Spring Washer Washer BRTG00224 MPAB31661A Wave Guide Assy. Flange MTC301710

-

Circulator

-

Diode Limiter Spurious Filter MPAB31663 MPAB31664 Wave Guide CornerA MPAB31595 Dummy Load Cover MTB328936 BRTG06626 Upset Bolt Upset Bolt BRTG07502 MDNMA5078A Modulator Unit Chassis for Modulator MPBC43180 Modulator MDLW11926 Pulse Transformer Clamping Plate for Magnetron Magnetron Receiver Unit Bracket for Receiver

-

MPBP31522

-

MDNRG5092B MTB388395 1 1-1 1-2 1-3 1-4 1-5 1-6 1-7 1-9 2 2-1 2-2 2-3 2-4 3 3-1 3-2 3-3 3-4 3-5 3-6 3-7 3-8 3-9 4 4-1 4-2 4-3 4-4 4-5 5 5-1 Chapter 3 Repair Parts 3-60 No. PARTS NAME PRODUCT CODE MTB388396 Bracket for Receiver MPBX44503 Power Supply Unit Chassis for Power Supply MPBC43181 Power Supply PC Relay Unit Chassis for Relay Relay PC TR Control PC Cover Cross-recessed Head Screw BSNC06016B Cross-recessed Head Screw BSNC04012B Cross-recessed Head Screw BSNC04010B MDBW10837A MPTE30365A MPBC43023A

-

-

MTB390275 5-2 6 6-1 6-2 7 7-1 7-2 8 9 10 11 12 SERVICE CODE CBD-1682A CSC-656 CMC-1205R NOTE NC6X16Bs NC4X12Bs NC4X10Bs 3-61 Chapter 3 Repair Parts Fig. 3.2.11 Exploded view of NTG-3230 Chapter 3 Repair Parts 3-62 NQE-3167 No. PARTS NAME PRODUCT CODE MPBX43912 Chassis Assy. MPBC42355 Chassis MTL305132 Clamp MTL305133 Clamp Bolt BRTG00930 Cross-recessed Head Screw BSNB03060B Cover Assy. MPBC41009 MTB383852 Cover Thumb Screw BRTG05973 MPBC42360 MPBC42362A

-

-

-

-

7BFRD00002

-

Partition board Assy. Inside board Assy. Power Supply for Modulator Power Supply for Motor Connected circuit PC Fan for Power Supply Fan Fan guard Cross-recessed Head Screw BSNC04030B Cross-recessed Head Screw BSNC03008B Cross-recessed Head Screw BSNB04010B 1 1-1 1-2 1-3 1-4 1-5 2 2-1 2-2 3 4 5 6 7 8 8-1 8-2 8-3 9 10 SERVICE CODE NOTE CQP-58 NB6X30Bs TL-233-8 M6X15 LEP240F-48-T LEP240F-24-T 109P0612M601 NC4X30Bs NC3X8Bs NB4X10Bs 3-63 Chapter 3 Repair Parts Fig. 3.2.12 Exploded view of NQE-3167 Chapter 3 Repair Parts 3-64 Display Unit (JMR-92xx / JAN-92xx) No. DESCRIPTION DRAWING No. CODE NOTE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 MONITOR UNIT CROSS RECESSED HEAD SCREW WITH CAPTIVE WASHER MONITOR COVER CROSS RECESSED HEAD SCREW WITH CAPTIVE WASHER TRACKBALL OPERATION UNIT CROSS RECESSED HEAD SCREW WITH CAPTIVE WASHER SCREW COVER (L) KEYBOARD OPERATION UNIT SCREW COVER (U) CENTRAL CONTROL UNIT TABLE 26 POWER SUPPLY UNIT CWB-1592 SENSOR LAN SWITCH UNIT UPS FILTER 16 ACDC PSU 17 DC UPS 18 UPS BATTERY NWZ-208 M5X14SUS SW W BLACK M3X8SUS SW W BLACK NCE-5605

-

BRTG10239 MTB405535A BRTG10238

-

M5x10SUS SW W BRTG03536 NCE-5625 NDC-1590 NBD-913 CWB-1592 NQA-2443 ME-MAX-NEF/QU INT20A QUINT-PS/1AC/2 4DC/20 QUINT-DC-UPS/2 4DC/20 QUINT-BAT/24DC

/3.4AH MTV305169

-

MTV305170

-

MPBC48027

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

3-65 Chapter 3 Repair Parts No. 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 DESCRIPTION DRAWING No. CODE NOTE CROSS RECESSED HEAD SCREW WITH CAPTIVE WASHER LAN MOUNTING BLACKET CROSS RECESSED HEAD SCREW WITH CAPTIVE WASHER BLANK COVER L BLANK COVER L HEXAGON HEAD SCREW WITH CAPTIVE WASHER FRONT COVER 26 REAR COVER 26INCH DISPLAY UNIT MOUNT KIT M4x10SUS SW W BRTG03527 MPBX48433 M3X12FE SW W BSNB03012R M5X14SUS SW W MPBC48036 MPBC48037 BRTG09016 MPBC48027 MPBC48436 CWA-246

-

Chapter 3 Repair Parts 3-66 Fig. 3.2.13 Exploded view of JMR-92xx / JAN-92xx Display Unit 3-67 Chapter 3 Repair Parts Display Unit (JMR-72xx / JAN-72xx) No. DESCRIPTION DRAWING No. CODE NOTE M5X14SUS SW W BLACK M3X8SUS SW W BLACK NWZ-208 NCE-5605 MONITOR UNIT CROSS RECESSED HEAD SCREW WITH CAPTIVE WASHER MONITOR COVER CROSS RECESSED HEAD SCREW WITH CAPTIVE WASHER TRACKBALL OPERATION UNIT CROSS RECESSED HEAD SCREW WITH CAPTIVE WASHER SCREW COVER (L) KEYBOARD OPERATION UNIT SCREW COVER (U) NDC-1590 CENTRAL CONTROL UNIT TABLE 26 NBD-913 POWER SUPPLY UNIT CWB-1592 CWB-1592 SENSOR LAN SWITCH UNIT NQA-2443 NCE-5625

-

BRTG10239 MTB405535A BRTG10238

-

MTV305169

-

MTV305170

-

MPBC48027

-

-

-

M5x10SUS SW W BRTG03536 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 UPS FILTER 16 ACDC PSU 17 DC UPS 18 UPS BATTERY ME-MAX-NEF/QU INT20A QUINT-PS/1AC/2 4DC/20 QUINT-DC-UPS/2 4DC/20 QUINT-BAT/24D C/3.4AH

-

-

-

-

Chapter 3 Repair Parts 3-68 DESCRIPTION DRAWING No. CODE NOTE CROSS RECESSED HEAD SCREW WITH CAPTIVE WASHER LAN MOUNTING BLACKET CROSS RECESSED HEAD SCREW WITH CAPTIVE WASHER BLANK COVER L BLANK COVER L HEXAGON HEAD SCREW WITH CAPTIVE WASHER FRONT COVER 19 REAR COVER 19INCH DISPLAY UNIT MOUNT KIT M4x10SUS SW W BRTG03527 MPBX48441 M3X12FE SW W BSNB03012R MPBC48036 MPBC48037 M5X14SUS SW W BRTG09016 MPBC48356 MPBC48357A CWA-246

-

3-69 Chapter 3 Repair Parts No. 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 Fig. 3.2.14 Exploded view of JMR-72xx / JAN-72xx Display Unit Chapter 3 Repair Parts 3-70

 

 

4. Replacement Procedure Chapter 4. Replacement Procedure DANGER Never attempt to check or repair the inside of the equipment. Checking or repair by an unqualified person may cause a fire or an electric shock. Contact our head office, or a nearby branch or local office to request servicing. Never remove the cover of this equipment. Touching the high-voltage section inside will cause an electric shock. Do not attempt to disassemble or tamper with this equipment. Otherwise, a fire, an electric shock, or a malfunction may occur. When conducting maintenance, make sure to turn the main power Off. Failure may result in electric shock. Turn Off all the main powers before cleaning the equipment. Make sure to turn it off since voltage is still outputted from the rectifier even after the indicator and the radar are turned Off. Failure may result in equipment failure, or death or serious injury due to electric shock. When conducting maintenance work on the Scanner unit, make sure to turn all the main powers Off. Failure may result in electric shock or injuries. Make sure to turn Off the Scanner unit safety switch. Failure may result in injuries caused by physical contact with the rotating radiator. 4-1 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4.1 Replacement Procedures for Scanner Unit Precautions To turn Off the power, do not keep the Power button depressed long. Otherwise, a trouble may occur due to termination failure. Never directly touch the internal components of the Scanner unit or Display unit. Direct contact with these high-voltage components may cause electric shock. For maintenance, inspection, or adjustment of equipment components, consult with our branch office, branch shop, sales office, or our distributor in your district. Do not get close to the radiator of the Scanner unit. It is a rotating part, and it may cause injuries if it suddenly starts rotating and consequently hits the body. It is recommended that the radiator be installed at a high place such as on the roof of the wheelhouse, on the flying bridge, on the trestle, or on the radar mast so that no one can get close to it. Microwave radiation level of the Scanner unit:

Keep away from the Scanner unit during transmission. Microwaves are generated from the front center of the radiant section of the Scanner unit at the levels indicated in the table below. Exposure to microwaves at close range can result in injury

(especially damage to eyes). Microwave radiation level of the Scanner unit System 50 W/m2 20 W/m2 2.5 W/m2 NKE-2103 NKE-1125/1129/2254 NKE-1130/1139 NKE-2632 NKE-1632 n/a 5 cm 11 cm 1.38cm 1.45cm 26 cm 81 cm 76 cm 3.1cm 3.25cm 123 cm 162 cm 181cm 209.76cm 128.37cm Make sure to install the Scanner unit at a place higher than human height. Direct exposure to electromagnetic wave at close range will have adverse effects on the human body. When it is necessary to get close to the Scanner unit for maintenance or inspection purposes, make sure to turn the power switch of the display unit to "OFF" or "STBY". Direct exposure to electromagnetic waves at close range will have adverse effects on the human body. When conducting maintenance work, make sure to turn Off the power so that the power supply to the equipment is completely cut off. Some equipment components can carry electrical current even after the power switch is turned off, and conducting maintenance work may result in electric shock, equipment failure, or accidents. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-2 Precautions in mounting the cover When the cover is removed for regular inspection and replacement of parts and refitted after such work, the procedures of fastening bolts shall be taken with the following precautions:

(1) The proper fastening torque of the fitting bolts (M8) is 1176 to 1470 Ncm (120 to 150 kgfcm)

(which makes the inside water-tight and protects the packings against permanent compressive strain). The packings start sticking out from the cover at a torque of approximately 1470 Ncm (150 kgfcm). Do not fasten the bolts with a torque exceeding the specified value. Otherwise, the screws may be broken.

(2) Use a box wrench of 11 mm 13 mm or an open-end wrench of 13 mm 17 mm (not longer than 200 mm).

(3) Screw all the bolts by hand first to prevent them playing, then fasten them evenly in order not to cause one-sided fastening. (Fasten the bolts with 25% of the required torque at the first step.)

*: Fasten the bolts in the diagonal order. 4-3 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-M8 (stainless steel) bolt Tightening torque: 120 to 150 kgf/cm 8-M8 (stainless steel) bolt Tightening torque: 120 to 150 kgf/cm

[7]

[1]

[1]

[3]

[3]

[6]

[5]

[4]

[4]

[2]

Bolt Tightening Order of NKE-1125/1129 Cover

[2]

[8]

Bolt Tightening Order of NKE-1130/1139/1632 Cover 6-M8 (stainless steel) bolt Tightening torque: 380kgfcm

[3]

[1]

[5]

[6]

[2]

[4]

Bolt Tightening Order of NKE-2632/2632-H Cover Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-4 Radiator Perform inspection and cleaning of the radiator. Note If the radiator front face (radiation plane) is soiled with smoke, salt, dust, paint or birds droppings, wipe it with a piece of soft cloth wetted with alcohol or water and try to keep it clean at all times. Otherwise, radar beam radiation may attenuate or reflect on it, resulting in deterioration of radar performance. Never use solvents of gasoline, benzene, trichloroethylene and ketone for cleaning. Otherwise, the radiation plane may deteriorate. Rotating section Supply oil seal For machines without a grease nipple, the replenishment of grease oil is unnecessary. For machines with a grease nipple, remove the cap on the grease nipple located on the front of the part at which the radiator is supported, and grease with a grease gun. Make the oiling every six months. The oil quantity shall be approximate 100 g, which is as much as the grease comes out of the oil seal. Use the grease of Mobilux2 of Mobil Oil. Oiling gears Apply grease evenly to the tooth surfaces of the main shaft drive gear and the encoder drive gear with a spreader or brush. Oiling in short intervals is more effective to prevent the gears from wear and tear and extend their service life, but oil at least every six months. Use the grease of Mobilux2 of Mobil Oil or equivalent. Mounting legs Check the mounting legs and mounting bolts of the Scanner unit chassis for corrosion at intervals and maintain them to prevent danger. Apply paint to them once a half year because painting is the best measure against corrosion. Flexible wave guide (JMR-9225-7X3/9X3, JMR-7225-7X3/9X3) Note Install the flexible wave guide without any clearance. Leaving a clearance may cause water leakage or corrosion later. 4-5 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure Coaxial cable (JMR-9230-S3, JMR-7230-S3) The coaxial tube gland of a coaxial cable terminal is fully waterproofed when installed. To prevent a water leakage accident, periodically inspect the coaxial tube gland. In particular, the coaxial tube gland should be repainted every six months. Do not apply strong shock to the coaxial cable by striking it with a tool or hammering it. Otherwise, an open circuit failure may result. Do not place anything heavy on the coaxial cable. Otherwise, an open circuit failure may result. Do not twist or pull the coaxial cable. Otherwise, an open circuit failure may result. For the details, refer to the coaxial cable installation procedure for S-band radars. Transmitter-receiver (NTG-3225/3230) Wipe dust off the transmitter-receiver with a dry cloth or feather duster. Display unit When cleaning the screen, do not wipe it too strongly with a dry cloth. Also, do not use gasoline or thinner to clean the screen. Otherwise the screen surface may be damaged. Dust accumulated on the screen will reduce clarity and darken the video. For cleaning it, wipe it with a piece of soft cloth (flannel or cotton). Do not wipe it strongly with a piece of dry cloth nor use gasoline or thinner. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-6 4-7 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4.1.1 NKE-1130 Scanner Unit 4.1.1.1 Magnetron Replacement/NKE-1130 When replacing magnetrons, make sure to shut off the main power and let the equipment stand for more than 5 minutes to discharge the high-voltage circuit. Failure may result in electric shock. Make sure to take off your watch when your hand must get close to the magnetron. Failure may result in damage to the watch since the magnetron is a strong magnet. Cautions on handling the magnetrons that have been stored for a long period of time Since the magnetrons that have been stored for a long period of time may become unstable at the start of the use due to the occurrence of spark, etc., apply aging by using the following procedure. 1 Extend the preheat period. (Standby: 20 to 30 minutes) 2 Start from the short pulse range and shift to the long pulse range sequentially. If the operation becomes unstable during this period, return to Standby immediately, maintain the status for 5 to 10 minutes and start operation again. Repeat this procedure. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-8

[Required Tools]

The tools shown in the following table are required for replacement work. Table Required Tools No Name Size Appearance 1 Non-magnetic Phillips screwdriver Size #2, Size #3 2 Open-end wrench*1 Width across flats 3 Socket wrench*1 13 mm (for M8 screws) Width across flats 13 mm (for M8 screws)

*1 Either the wrench (adjustable wrench) or socket wrench is mandatory. (mounting/removing the cover, etc.) Before beginning work, turn Off the safety switch of the Scanner unit. Before conducting replacement work, turn Off the circuit breaker for the power supply of the display unit. Exercise care not to lose bolts, screws and other parts removed from the Scanner unit, as they will be used again in later steps. Step 1 Turn Off the safety switch (to the lower side) and remove the cover. The safety switch is located on the rear (stern) side of the scanner unit. Open the cover for the Bow side safety switch and turn it Off (to the lower side). Remove the cover on the left (port) side. Turn Off the safety switch. 4-9 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure Remove the eight hexagonal screws. Example: Port side cover removal Step 2 Remove the screws holding the magnetron cables. Measure the voltage between pin 1 and pin 3 of CPA-264 (modulation circuit) J2101 by using a multimeter (1000 V DC or more), check that there is no remaining electric charge in the modulation high-voltage circuit board. Remove the two screws (M4) holding the magnetron cables (both yellow and green). Magnetron Remove the green cable. Remove the yellow cable. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-10 Remove the two screws. Step 3 Remove the fixture holding the magnetron. Remove the eight screws (M6) to remove the fixture holding the magnetron. The screws cannot Remove the magnetron. be removed from the fixture, so loosen the all eight screws and remove the magnetron together with the fixture. Remove the yellow cable. Loosen the eight screws. The magnetron is held by a hook, but be careful not to let it fall. Use a non-magnetic screwdriver. If the magnetron comes into contact with any metal (tool), its performance may deteriorate. Step 4 Install the new magnetron. Install the new magnetron together with the fixture and tighten the screws to hold the cables. Follow the removal procedure in the reverse order. Do not forget to tighten the bolts or screws, and make sure that the cables are connected. 4-11 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure Step 5 Operation check After you have completed the replacement work, turn On the safety switch and follow the procedure below to check the operation. 1. Turn On the Display unit for the radar. Allow sufficient time for the radar to be preheated (about 20 to 30 minutes/bring the radar unit to STBY mode). 2. Start transmission from the short pulse range and gradually change it to the long pulse range. Open the service engineer menu to perform tuning adjustment. Check the magnetron current on the test menu during the time and if operation becomes unstable, bring the radar unit back to STBY mode and restart transmission after allowing for an interval of 5 to 10 minutes. 3. Transmit radio waves in long pulse range mode for about 15 minutes and reopen the service engineer menu to perform tuning adjustment. Adjust the setting in the service engineer menu until the tuning indication bar on the display unit reaches the 8th calibration marking. Check in the test menu that the magnetron current is between the 6th and 9th calibration markings. 4. Finally, initialize the transmission time in the service engineer menu. This completes magnetron replacement. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-12 4.1.1.2 Motor Replacement/NKE-1130

[Required Tools]

The tools shown in the following table are required for replacement work. Table Required Tools No Name Size Appearance 1 Phillips screwdriver Size #2, Size #3 2 Open-end wrench*1 Width across flats 3 Socket wrench*1 13 mm (for M8 screws), 17 mm (for M10 screws) Width across flats 13 mm (for M8 screws), 17 mm (for M10 screws)

*1 Either the wrench (adjustable wrench) or socket wrench is mandatory. (mounting/removing the cover, etc.) Before beginning work, turn Off the safety switch of the Scanner unit. Before conducting replacement work, turn Off the circuit breaker for the power supply of the display unit. Exercise care not to lose bolts, screws and other parts removed from the Scanner unit, as they will be used again in later steps. Step 1 Set the safety switch to Off (down side) and remove the covers on both sides. The safety switch is located on the rear (stern) side of the scanner unit. Open the cover for the safety switch and turn it Off (to the lower side). Remove the covers on the left (port) and right

(starboard) sides. 4-13 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure Bow side Turn Off the safety switch. Remove the eight hexagonal screws. Example: Port side cover removal Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-14 Step 2 Remove the motor driver circuit board. Loosen the four screws (M4) to remove the driver unit, which has the motor driver circuit board Driver unit (driver circuit board at the back side) on its back side. Disconnect the cables connecting the motor to the motor driver circuit board. Remove the four screws. Driver circuit board Disconnect the cables. 4-15 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure Step 3 Remove the motor fixture. Remove the cover on the left (port) side and remove the five screws (M5) to remove the fixture. Step 4 Remove the metal fixture. Remove the five screws. Remove the motor. Remove the four hexagonal screws (M10x40, SW10, and W10) that hold the motor from both the right and left sides to remove the motor. Remove the four hexagonal screws

(two each on the left and right sides). Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-16 Remove the motor. Step 5 Apply grease to the new motor. Apply grease to the gear wheel of the new motor. Apply grease. Gear wheel 4-17 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure Step 6 Install the new motor. Install the new motor in the scanner unit and secure it using the hexagonal screws. Tighten the screws with the specified torque (380 kgf-cm). After replacing the motor, assemble the unit in the reverse order of the disassembly procedure. Do not forget to tighten the bolts or screws, and make sure that the cables are connected. Step 7 Operation check After completing the replacement work, turn On the safety switch and follow the steps below to check the operation. 1. Turn On the Display unit. After the preheat countdown is completed, start transmission and check that the radar image appears without error. Check that you do not hear any unusual sound when the motor starts, rotates, and stops. 2. Open the service engineer menu to initialize the motor rotation time. This completes motor replacement. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-18 4.1.1.3 Motor Driver Circuit Replacement/NKE-1130

[Required Tools]

The tools shown in the following table are required for replacement work. Table Required Tools No Name Size Appearance 1 Phillips screwdriver Size #2 2 Open-end wrench*1 Width across flats 3 Socket wrench*1 13 mm (for M8 screws) Width across flats 13 mm (for M8 screws)

*1 Either the wrench (adjustable wrench) or socket wrench is mandatory. (mounting/removing the cover, etc.) Before beginning work, turn Off the safety switch of the Scanner unit. Before conducting replacement work, turn Off the circuit breaker for the power supply of the display unit. Exercise care not to lose bolts, screws and other parts removed from the Scanner unit, as they will be used again in later steps. Step 1 Turn Off the safety switch (to the lower side) and remove the cover on the right (starboard) side. The safety switch is located on the rear (stern) side of the scanner unit. Open the cover for the safety switch and turn it Off (to the lower side). Remove the cover on the right (starboard) side. 4-19 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure Bow side Turn Off the safety switch. Remove the eight hexagonal screws. Example: Port side cover removal Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-20 Step 2 Remove the motor driver circuit board. Remove the cover on the right (starboard) side and loosen the four screws (M4) to remove the drive unit, which has the motor driver circuit board on its rear side. Remove the cables connected from the motor to the motor driver circuit board and the cables and four screws connected to the driver circuit to replace the driver circuit board with a new one. Driver unit (driver circuit board at the back side) Remove the four screws. Driver circuit board Voltage specification is indicated here. Remove the four screws. 4-21 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure Step 3 Incorporate the new motor driver circuit. For the motor driver circuit there are two types of specifications, 100 V AC and 220 V AC. Check that the new motor driver circuit uses the appropriate power supply specification. (Described on the silk printing on the circuit board.) 100V AC: 7EPRD0035 220V DC: 7EPRD0034 After replacing the motor driver circuit board, follow the disassembly procedure in the reverse order. Do not forget to tighten the bolts or screws, and make sure that the cables are connected. Step 4 Operation check After replacing the motor driver circuit board, turn On the safety switch and follow the steps below to check the operation. 1. Turn On the Display unit. After the preheat countdown is completed, start transmission and check that the radar image appears without error. Check that you do not hear any unusual sound when the motor starts, rotates, and stops. This completes motor driver circuit board replacement. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-22 4.1.1.4 Motor Drive Circuit Board Fan Replacement/NKE-1130

[Required Tools]

The tools shown in the following table are required for replacement work. Table Required Tools No Name Size Appearance 1 Phillips screwdriver Size #2 2 Open-end wrench*1 Width across flats 3 Socket wrench*1 13 mm (for M8 screws) Width across flats 13 mm (for M8 screws)

*1 Either the wrench (adjustable wrench) or socket wrench is mandatory. (mounting/removing the cover, etc.) Before beginning work, turn Off the safety switch of the Scanner unit. Before conducting replacement work, turn Off the circuit breaker for the power supply of the display unit. Exercise care not to lose bolts, screws and other parts removed from the Scanner unit, as they will be used again in later steps. Step 1 Turn Off the safety switch (to the lower side) and remove the cover on the right (starboard) side. The safety switch is located on the rear (stern) side of the scanner unit. Open the cover for the Bow side safety switch and turn it Off (to the lower side). Remove the cover on the right (starboard) side. Turn Off the safety switch. 4-23 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure Remove the eight hexagonal screws. Example: Port side cover removal Step 2 Remove the fan cable. Remove the cover on the right (starboard) side and loosen the four screws (M4) to open the Remove the cable. cover for the T/R control circuit board. Remove the motor driver circuit board fan cable (connector P1114) from the T/R control circuit board. Loosen the four screws. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-24 Disconnect the cables. T/R control circuit board Replace the fan. Step 3 Fan Remove the four screws (M4) to replace the fan. After replacing the fan, assemble the unit in the reverse order of the disassembly procedure. Do not forget to tighten the bolts or screws, and make sure that the cables are connected. Step 4 Operation check Remove the four screws. After completing the replacement work, turn On the safety switch and follow the steps below to check the operation.

(1) Turn On the Display unit. After the countdown is completed, start transmission and check that the radar image appears without error. Check that no fan alarm comes up. This completes modulation unit fan replacement. 4-25 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4.1.1.5 Modulation Unit fan Replacement/NKE-1130

[Required Tools]

The tools shown in the following table are required for replacement work. Table Required Tools No Name Size Appearance 1 Phillips screwdriver Size #2 2 Open-end wrench*1 Width across flats 3 Socket wrench*1 13 mm (for M8 screws) Width across flats 13 mm (for M8 screws)

*1 Either the wrench (adjustable wrench) or socket wrench is mandatory. (mounting/removing the cover, etc.) Before beginning work, turn Off the safety switch of the Scanner unit. Before conducting replacement work, turn Off the circuit breaker for the power supply of the display unit. Exercise care not to lose bolts, screws and other parts removed from the Scanner unit, as they will be used again in later steps. Step 1 Turn Off the safety switch (to the lower side) and remove the cover on the right (starboard) side. The safety switch is located on the rear (stern) side of the scanner unit. Open the cover for the Bow side safety switch and turn it Off (to the lower side). Remove the cover on the right (starboard) side. Turn Off the safety switch. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-26 Step 2 Remove the eight hexagonal screws. Example: Port side cover removal Remove the modulation unit fan cable. Remove the cover on the left (port) side. Remove the modulation unit fan cable (connector P1112) from the relay connector. Disconnect the cables. Fan 4-27 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure Step 3 Replace the modulation unit fan cable. Fan Remove the four screws (M4) to replace the fan. After replacing the fan, assemble the unit in the reverse order of the disassembly procedure. Do not forget to tighten the bolts or screws, and make sure that the cables are connected. Step 4 Operation check Remove the four screws. After completing the replacement work, turn On the safety switch and follow the steps below to check the operation.

(1) Turn On the Display unit. After the countdown is completed, start transmission and check that the radar image appears without error. Check that no fan alarm comes up. This completes modulation unit fan replacement. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-28 4.1.1.6 Modulation Circuit Board (CPA-264) Replacement/NKE-1130

[Required Tools]

The tools shown in the following table are required for replacement work. Table Required Tools No Name Size Appearance 1 Phillips screwdriver Size #2 2 Open-end wrench*1 Width across flats 3 Socket wrench*1 13 mm (for M8 screws) Width across flats 13 mm (for M8 screws)

*1 Either the wrench (adjustable wrench) or socket wrench is mandatory. (mounting/removing the cover, etc.) Before beginning work, turn Off the safety switch of the Scanner unit. Before conducting replacement work, turn Off the circuit breaker for the power supply of the display unit. Exercise care not to lose bolts, screws and other parts removed from the Scanner unit, as they will be used again in later steps. Step 1 Turn Off the safety switch (to the lower side) and remove the cover on the left (port) side. The safety switch is located on the rear (stern) side of the scanner unit. Open the cover for the safety switch and turn it Off (to the lower side). Remove the cover on the left (port) side. 4-29 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure Bow side Turn Off the safety switch. Remove the eight hexagonal screws. Example: Port side cover removal Remove the modulation circuit board cables. Step 2 Remove the cover on the left (port) side to remove all cables connected to the modulation circuit board (CPA-264). Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-30 Step 3 Replace the modulator circuit board. Remove the two screws (M4) holding the metal sheet and the radiating plate of the modulation circuit board and the six screws (M4) holding the modulation circuit board, to replace the modulation circuit board. If reusing the heat radiation plate on the modulator, be sure to install the insulation sheet between the TR5-8 and the heat radiation plate so that it is straight. After replacing the modulation circuit board, assemble the unit in the reverse order of the disassembly procedure. Do not forget to tighten the bolts or screws, and make sure that the cables are connected. Step 4 Operation check Modulation circuit board Remove the six screws. Remove the two screws. After completing the replacement work, turn On the safety switch and check operation by following the procedure below.

(1) Turn On the Display unit. After the preheat countdown is completed, start transmission and check that the radar image appears without error. Transmit the radio wave in long pulse range mode and open the service engineer menu to check that the magnetron current stands between the 5th and 7th calibration markings. This completes modulation circuit board replacement. 4-31 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4.1.1.7 Modulation Circuit Board (NMA-551) Replacement/NKE-1130

[Required Tools]

The tools shown in the following table are required for replacement work. Table Required Tools No Name Size Appearance 1 Non-magnetic Phillips Size #2, Size #3 screwdriver 2 Open-end wrench*1 3 Socket wrench*1 Width across flats 13 mm (for M8 screws) Width across flats 13 mm (for M8 screws)

*1 Either the wrench (adjustable wrench) or socket wrench is mandatory. (mounting/removing the cover, etc.) Before beginning work, turn Off the safety switch of the Scanner unit. Before conducting replacement work, turn Off the circuit breaker for the power supply of the display unit. Exercise care not to lose bolts, screws and other parts removed from the Scanner unit, as they will be used again in later steps. Step 1 Turn Off the safety switch (to the lower side) and remove the cover. The safety switch is located on the rear (stern) side of the scanner unit. Open the cover for the safety switch and turn it Off (to the lower side). Remove the cover on the left (port) side. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-32 Bow side Turn Off the safety switch. Remove the eight hexagonal screws. Example: Port side cover removal Step 2 Remove the screws holding the magnetron cable. Measure the voltage between pin 1 and pin 3 of CPA-264 (modulation circuit) by using the multimeter (1000 V DC or more), check that there is no remaining electric charge in the modulation high-voltage circuit board. Remove the two screws (M4) holding the magnetron cables (both yellow and green). 4-33 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure Magnetron Remove the green cable. Remove the yellow cable. Remove the two screws. Step 3 Remove the fixture holding the magnetron. Remove the eight screws (M6) to remove the fixture holding the magnetron. The screws cannot be removed from the fixture, so loosen the all eight screws and remove the magnetron together with the fixture. Remove the magnetron. Remove the yellow cable. Loosen the eight screws. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-34 The magnetron is held by a hook, but be careful not to let it fall. Use a non-magnetic screwdriver. If the magnetron comes into contact with any metal (tool), its performance may deteriorate. Step 4 Replace the modulation unit. Remove the two screws (M5), loosen the five screws (M5) holding the modulation unit, and replace it. After replacing the modulation circuit board, assemble the unit in the reverse order of the disassembly procedure. Install the magnetron that was removed to the original position. Do not forget to tighten the bolts or screws, and make sure that the cables are connected. Remove two screws Loosen five screws Step 5 Operation check After completing the replacement work, turn On the safety switch and check operation by following the procedure below.

(1) Turn On the Display unit. After the preheat countdown is completed, start transmission and check that the radar image appears without error. Transmit the radio wave in long pulse range mode and open the service engineer menu to check that the magnetron current stands between the 5th and 7th calibration markings. This completes modulation unit replacement. 4-35 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4.1.1.8 Power Supply Circuit board (CBD-1682A) Replacement/NKE-1130

[Required Tools]

The tools shown in the following table are required for replacement work. Table Required Tools No Name Size Appearance 1 Phillips screwdriver Size #2, Size #3 2 Open-end wrench*1 Width across flats 3 Socket wrench*1 13 mm (for M8 screws) Width across flats 13 mm (for M8 screws)

*1 Either the wrench (adjustable wrench) or socket wrench is mandatory. (mounting/removing the cover, etc.) Before beginning work, turn Off the safety switch of the Scanner unit. Before conducting replacement work, turn Off the circuit breaker for the power supply of the display unit. Exercise care not to lose bolts, screws and other parts removed from the Scanner unit, as they will be used again in later steps. Step 1 Turn Off the safety switch (to the lower side) and remove the cover on the left (port) side. The safety switch is located on the rear (stern) side of the scanner unit. Open the cover for the safety switch and turn it Off (to the lower side). Remove the cover on the left (port) side. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-36 Bow side Turn Off the safety Remove the eight hexagonal screws. Example: Port side cover removal 4-37 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure Step 2 Remove the modulation circuit board cables. Remove the cover on the left (port) side. Remove the cables connected to the modulation circuit board (connectors P2101 and P2102) and the fan cable (P1112). Disconnect the three cables. Modulation circuit board Step 3 Remove the modulation circuit board. Remove the two screws (M5) from the fixture. Loosen the six screws (M6) holding the Loosen the six screws. Remove the two screws. magnetron and the five screws (M5) holding the modulation unit, to remove it. Loosen the five screws. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-38 Step 4 Replace the power supply circuit board Remove the eight screws. Remove the cable connected to the power supply circuit board and the eight screws (M4) to replace it. If the thermal conductive pad on the casing on the back of the power supply circuit board (the soldered side) is damaged, affix a new one to the replacement power supply circuit board. After replacing the power supply circuit board, assemble the unit in the reverse order of the disassembly procedure. Do not forget to tighten the bolts or screws, and make sure that the cables are connected. Step 5 Power supply circuit board Operation check After completing the replacement work, turn On the safety switch and check operation by following the procedure below.

(1) Turn On the Display unit. After the countdown is completed, start transmission and check that the radar image appears without error. This completes power supply circuit board replacement. 4-39 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4.1.1.9 T/R Control Circuit Board (CMC-1205R) Replacement/NKE-1130

[Required Tools]

The tools shown in the following table are required for replacement work. Table Required Tools No Name Size Appearance 1 Phillips screwdriver Size #2 2 Open-end wrench*1 Width across flats 3 Socket wrench*1 13 mm (for M8 screws) Width across flats 13 mm (for M8 screws)

*1 Either the wrench (adjustable wrench) or socket wrench is mandatory. (mounting/removing the cover, etc.) Before beginning work, turn Off the safety switch of the Scanner unit. Before conducting replacement work, turn Off the circuit breaker for the power supply of the display unit. Exercise care not to lose bolts, screws and other parts removed from the Scanner unit, as they will be used again in later steps. Step 1 Back up the scanner unit data. Before starting replacement work, open the service engineer menu on the display unit and back up the scanner unit data (transmission time and motor rotation time). If you do not back up the data, you will lose all data related to the scanner, such as magnetron usage time. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-40 Step 2 Turn Off the safety switch (to the lower side) and remove the cover on the right (starboard) side. The safety switch is located on the rear (stern) side of the scanner unit. Open the cover for the Bow side safety switch and turn it Off (to the lower side). Remove the cover on the right (starboard) side. Turn Off the safety switch. Remove the eight hexagonal screws. Example: Port side cover removal 4-41 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure Step 2 Open the T/R control circuit board cover. Remove the cover on the right (starboard) side. Loosen the four screws (M4) to open the T/R control circuit board cover to the front. Step 3 Loosen the four screws. Replace the T/R control circuit board. Remove the cable connected to the T/R control circuit board and the seven screws (M4) to replace it. Set the DIP switches and the jumper pins on the T/R control circuit board to the settings for NKE-1130. NKE-1130 (30 kW, S-band, 2 units, AC motor) Jumper pin settings Jumper pin 3 2 1 SW2 ON DIP switch settings ( indicates a switch.) SW1 ON J92,J93,J95,J96: 1-2 short circuit 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 After replacing the T/R control circuit board, assemble the unit in the reverse order of the disassembly procedure. Do not forget to tighten the bolts or screws, and make sure that the cables are connected. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-42 T/R control circuit board Step 4 Operation check After completing the replacement work, turn On the safety switch and check operation by following the procedure below.

(1) Turn On the Display unit and open the service engineer menu. Restore the scanner unit time and check that all data is recovered from before replacing the T/R control circuit board (check the transmission time and the motor rotation time).

(2) After the countdown is completed, start transmission and check that the radar image appears without error. This completes T/R control circuit board replacement. 4-43 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4.1.1.10 Relay Filter Circuit Board (CSC-656) Replacement/NKE-1130

[Required Tools]

The tools shown in the following table are required for replacement work. Table Required Tools No Name Size Appearance 1 Phillips screwdriver Size #2 2 Open-end wrench*1 Width across flats 3 Socket wrench*1 13 mm (for M8 screws) Width across flats 13 mm (for M8 screws)

*1 Either the wrench (adjustable wrench) or socket wrench is mandatory. (mounting/removing the cover, etc.) Before beginning work, turn Off the safety switch of the Scanner unit. Before conducting replacement work, turn Off the circuit breaker for the power supply of the display unit. Exercise care not to lose bolts, screws and other parts removed from the Scanner unit, as they will be used again in later steps. Step 1 Turn Off the safety switch (to the lower side) and remove the cover on the right (starboard) side. The safety switch is located on the rear (stern) side of the scanner unit. Open the cover for the safety switch and turn Off it (to the lower side). Remove the cover on the right (starboard) side. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-44 Bow side Turn Off the safety switch. Remove the eight hexagonal screws. Example: Port side cover removal Remove the cable clamps around the relay filter circuit board. Step 2 Remove the cover on the right (starboard) side. Open the T/R control circuit board cover to the front to remove the cable clamps around the relay filter circuit board. 4-45 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure Remove the clamps. Relay filter circuit board Step 3 Remove the metal fixture holding the relay filter circuit board. Remove the four screws (M4) to remove the metal fixture holding the relay filter circuit board, Remove the four screws. which is located at the bottom of the terminal block. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-46 Step 4 Replace the relay filter circuit board Remove the cable connected to the relay filter circuit board and the four screws (M4) to replace Remove the screws. the relay filter circuit board. After replacing it, follow the disassembly procedure in the reverse order. Do not forget to tighten the bolts or screws, and make sure that the cables are connected. Step 5 Operation check Relay filter circuit board After completing the replacement work, turn On the safety switch and check operation by following the procedure below.

(1) Turn On the Display unit. After the countdown is completed, start transmission and check that the radar image appears without error. This completes T/R control circuit board replacement. 4-47 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4.1.1.11 Receiving Unit (NRG-229) Replacement/NKE-1130

[Required Tools]

The tools shown in the following table are required for replacement work. Table Required Tools No Name Size Appearance 1 Phillips screwdriver Size #2, Size #3 2 Open-end wrench*1 Width across flats 3 Socket wrench*1 13 mm (for M8 screws) Width across flats 13 mm (for M8 screws)

*1 Either the wrench (adjustable wrench) or socket wrench is mandatory. (mounting/removing the cover, etc.) Before beginning work, turn Off the safety switch of the Scanner unit. Before conducting replacement work, turn Off the circuit breaker for the power supply of the display unit. Exercise care not to lose bolts, screws and other parts removed from the Scanner unit, as they will be used again in later steps. Step 1 Turn Off the safety switch (to the lower side) and remove the cover on the right (starboard) side. The safety switch is located on the rear (stern) side of the scanner unit. Open the cover for the safety switch and turn Off it (to the lower side). Remove the cover on the right (starboard) side. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-48 Bow side Turn Off the safety switch. Remove the eight hexagonal screws. Example: Port side cover removal 4-49 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure Step 2 Remove the driver unit. Remove the cover on the right (starboard) side. Remove the four screws (M5) to remove the Driver unit Remove the four screws. metal fixture. Loosen the four screws (M4) to remove the driver unit. Metal fixture Loosen the four screws. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-50 Step 3 Replace the receiving unit. Open the T/R control circuit board cover to the front to remove the cables connected to the receiving unit. Remove the four screws (M5) holding the receiving unit flange, the two screws (M5) holding the metal fixture, and the screw at the right side of the receiving unit to replace the it. Attach the metal fixture attached to the flange removed from the receiving unit you just removed and put it onto the new receiving unit. After replacing the receiving unit, assemble the unit in the reverse order of the disassembly procedure. Do not forget to tighten the bolts or screws, and make sure that the cables are connected. Remove the six screws. Disconnect the cables. Remove the two screws. Metal fixture

(reused for the new receiving unit) Step 4 Operation check After replacing the receiving unit, check operation by following the procedure below.

(1) Turn On the Display unit. After the countdown is completed, start transmission and check that the radar image appears without error. Transmit the radio wave in the long range mode and open the service engineer menu to perform tuning adjustment. Adjust the setting in the service engineer menu until the tuning indication bar on the display unit reaches the 8th calibration marking. This completes receiving unit replacement. 4-51 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4.1.1.12 Encoder (CHT-71A) Replacement/NKE-1130

[Required Tools]

The tools shown in the following table are required for replacement work. Name No 1 Phillips screwdriver 2 Open-end wrench*1 3 Socket wrench*1 Table Required Tools Size Appearance Size #2, Size #3 Width across flats 7 mm (for M4 screws), 8 mm (for M6 screws), 13 mm (for M8 screws) Width across flats 7 mm (for M4 screws), 8 mm (for M6 screws), 13 mm (for M8 screws)

*1 Either the wrench (adjustable wrench) or socket wrench is mandatory. (mounting/removing the cover, etc.) Before beginning work, turn Off the safety switch of the Scanner unit. Before conducting replacement work, turn Off the circuit breaker for the power supply of the display unit. Exercise care not to lose bolts, screws and other parts removed from the Scanner unit, as they will be used again in later steps. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-52 Step 1 Set the safety switch to Off and remove the covers on both sides. The safety switch is located on the rear (stern) side of the scanner unit. Open the cover for the Bow side Turn Off the safety switch. safety switch and turn it Off (to the lower side). Remove the covers on both sides. Example: Port side cover removal Remove the eight hexagonal screws. 4-53 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure Step 2 Loosen the receiving unit. Remove the covers on the both sides. Remove the four screws (M5) to remove the metal fixture. Loosen the four screws (M4) so that the receiving unit is held halfway. Step 3 Remove the four screws. Loosen the four screws. Receiving unit Remove the receiving unit. Remove the four screws (M5) from the receiving unit flange and remove the screws loosened Remove the four screws. halfway in (Step 2) above to remove the receiving unit. Receiving unit flange Encoder Receiving unit Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-54 Step 4 Remove the encoder. Loosen the two screws (M4) to remove the encoder together with the metal fixture. Step 5 Encoder Metal fixture Loosen the two screws. Replace the encoder. Remove the metal fixture and the gear wheel attached to the encoder. Put them onto the new Remove the nut encoder and put it back into the unit. After replacing the encoder, follow the disassembly procedure in the reverse order. Do not forget to tighten the bolts or screws, and make sure that the cables are connected. Step 6 Operation check Remove the three screws. Metal fixture Encoder After completing the replacement work, turn On the safety switch and check operation by following the procedure below.

(1) Turn On the Display unit. After the countdown is completed, start transmission and check that the radar image appears without error. Open the service engineer menu to perform azimuth adjustment. This completes encoder replacement. 4-55 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4.1.1.13 Brake Control Circuit (CCB-655A) Replacement/NKE-1130

[Required Tools]

The tools shown in the following table are required for replacement work. Table Required Tools No Name Size Appearance 1 Phillips screwdriver Size #2, Size #3 2 Open-end wrench*1 Width across flats 3 Socket wrench*1 7 mm (for M4 screws), 13 mm (for M8 screws) Width across flats 7 mm (for M4 screws), 13 mm (for M8 screws)

*1 Either the wrench (adjustable wrench) or socket wrench is mandatory. (mounting/removing the cover, etc.) Before beginning work, turn Off the safety switch of the Scanner unit. Before conducting replacement work, turn Off the circuit breaker for the power supply of the display unit. Exercise care not to lose bolts, screws and other parts removed from the Scanner unit, as they will be used again in later steps. Step 1 Turn Off the safety switch (to the lower side) and remove the cover on the right (starboard) side. The safety switch is located on the rear (stern) side of the scanner unit. Open the cover for the safety switch and turn it Off (to the lower side). Remove the cover on the right (starboard) side. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-56 Bow side Turn Off the safety switch. Remove the eight hexagonal screws. Example: Port side cover removal 4-57 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure Step 2 Loosen the screws of the T/R control circuit board plate cover. Remove the cover on the right side (starboard side), remove the two screws (M4) holding the T/R control circuit (CMC-1205R) plate cover, and loosen another two screws. Step 3 Remove the T/R control circuit. Remove the two screws. T/R control circuit board

(CMC-1205R) Plate cover Loosen the two screws. Push down the T/R control circuit cover and remove all the connectors that are connected to it. Remove the two screws (M4) that were loosened by the procedure and remove the T/R control circuit together with the plate cover. T/R control circuit board

(CMC-1205R) Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-58 Step 4 Replace the brake control circuit. Remove all the connectors that are connected to the brake control circuit (CCB-656). Remove the four screws (M4) from the plate on which the brake control circuit is held and replace it together with the plate. After replacing the brake control circuit, reassemble the unit by following the disassembly procedure in the reverse order. Do not forget to tighten the bolts or screws, and make sure that the cables are connected. Brake control circuit that is mounted on the plate

(CCB-656) Step 5 Operation check After completing the replacement work, turn On the safety switch and check operation by following the procedure below.

(1) Turn On the Display unit. After the countdown is completed, start transmission and check that the radar image appears without error. This completes brake control circuit replacement. 4-59 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4.1.1.14 Brake Circuit (CFA-255) Replacement/NKE-1130

[Required Tools]

The tools shown in the following table are required for replacement work. Table Required Tools No Name Size Appearance 1 Phillips screwdriver Size #2 2 Open-end wrench*1 Width across flats 3 Socket wrench*1 13 mm (for M8 screws) Width across flats 13 mm (for M8 screws)

*1 Either the wrench (adjustable wrench) or socket wrench is mandatory. (mounting/removing the cover, etc.) Before beginning work, turn Off the safety switch of the Scanner unit. Before conducting replacement work, turn Off the circuit breaker for the power supply of the display unit. Exercise care not to lose bolts, screws and other parts removed from the Scanner unit, as they will be used again in later steps. Step 1 Turn Off the safety switch (to the lower side) and remove the cover on the right (starboard) side. The safety switch is located on the rear (stern) side of the scanner unit. Open the cover for the safety switch and turn it Off (to the lower side). Remove the cover on the right (starboard) side. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-60 Bow side Turn Off the safety Remove the eight hexagonal screws. Example: Port side cover removal 4-61 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure Step 2 Remove the motor driver unit. Remove the cover on the right (starboard) side and loosen the four screws (M4) to remove the Driver unit

(driver circuit board at the back side) drive unit, which has the motor driver circuit board on its rear side. Remove the cable that is connected from the motor driver to the driver circuit. Remove the four screws. Step 3 Remove the motor driver circuit board. Remove the driver unit and remove the cable that is connected to J1504 of the motor driver circuit (CBD-2000/2001). CBD-2000/2001 J1504 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-62 Step 5 Replace the brake circuit. Remove the two screws (M4) holding the brake circuit on the right side of the chassis and CFA-255 replace it (CFA-255: resistor with cable). After replacing the brake circuit, reassemble the unit by following the disassembly procedure in the reverse order. Do not forget to tighten the bolts or screws, and make sure that the cables are connected. Step 6 Operation check Remove the two screws. After completing the replacement work, turn On the safety switch and check operation by following the procedure below.

(1) Turn On the Display unit. After the countdown is completed, start transmission and check that the radar image appears without error. This completes brake circuit replacement. 4-63 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4.1.1.15 Brake Circuit Unit (NZR-17) Replacement/NKE-1130

[Required Tools]

The tools shown in the following table are required for replacement work. Table Required Tools No Name Size Appearance 1 Phillips screwdriver Size #2, Size #3 2 Open-end wrench*1 Width across flats 3 Socket wrench*1 13 mm (for M8 screws) Width across flats 13 mm (for M8 screws)

*1 Either the wrench (adjustable wrench) or socket wrench is mandatory. (mounting/removing the cover, etc.) Before beginning work, turn Off the safety switch of the Scanner unit. Before conducting replacement work, turn Off the circuit breaker for the power supply of the display unit. Exercise care not to lose bolts, screws and other parts removed from the Scanner unit, as they will be used again in later steps. Step 1 Turn Off the safety switch (to the lower side) and remove the cover on the right (starboard) side. The safety switch is located on the rear (stern) side of the scanner unit. Open the cover for the safety switch and turn it Off (to the lower side). Remove the cover on the right (starboard) side. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-64 Bow side Turn Off the safety switch. Remove the eight hexagonal screws. Example: Port side cover removal 4-65 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure Step 2 Remove the driver unit. Remove the cover on the right (starboard) side. Remove the four screws (M5) to remove the Driver unit Remove the four screws. metal fixture. Loosen the four screws (M4) to remove the driver unit. Step 3 Remove the receiving unit. Metal fixture Loosen the four screws. Open the T/R control circuit board cover to the front to remove the cables connected to the Disconnect the cables. Remove the six screws. receiving unit. Remove the four screws (M5) holding the receiving unit flange, the two screws (M5) holding the metal fixture, and the screw at the right side of the receiving unit to replace it.

(reused for the new receiving unit) Remove the two screws. Metal fixture Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-66 Step 4 Replace the brake circuit unit. Remove the cables that are connected to J1921 and J1911 of the brake control circuit Remove the four screws.

(CCB-655). Remove the four screws (M4) and replace the brake circuit unit (NZR-17). After replacing the brake circuit, reassemble the unit by following the disassembly procedure in the reverse order. Do not forget to tighten the bolts or screws, and make sure that the cables are connected. Step 5 Operation check CCB-655 NZR-17 J1921 J1911 After completing the replacement work, turn On the safety switch and carry out the following work.

(1) Turn On the Display unit. After the countdown is completed, start transmission and check that the radar image appears without error. This completes brake circuit unit replacement. 4-67 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4.1.1.16 Performance Monitor (NJU-84) Replacement/NKE-1130 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-68 4.1.2 NKE-1139 Scanner Unit 4.1.2.1 Motor Replacement/NKE-1139

[Required Tools]

The tools shown in the following table are required for replacement work. Table Required Tools No Name Size Appearance 1 Phillips screwdriver Size #2, Size #3 2 Open-end wrench*1 Width across flats 3 Socket wrench*1 13 mm (for M8 screws), 17 mm (for M10 screws) Width across flats 13 mm (for M8 screws), 17 mm (for M10 screws)

*1 Either the wrench (adjustable wrench) or socket wrench is mandatory. (mounting/removing the cover, etc.) Before beginning work, turn Off the safety switch of the Scanner unit. Before conducting replacement work, turn Off the circuit breaker for the power supply of the display unit. Exercise care not to lose bolts, screws and other parts removed from the Scanner unit, as they will be used again in later steps. 4-69 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure Step 1 Turn Off the safety switch (to the lower side) and remove the cover. The safety switch is located on the rear (stern) side of the scanner unit. Open the cover for the Bow side Turn Off the safety switch. safety switch and turn it Off (to the lower side). Remove the side cover. Example: Port side cover removal Remove the eight hexagonal screws. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-70 Step 2 Remove the motor. Remove the covers on the both sides, and remove the cables that connect the motor driver circuit board in the left (port) side to the motor. Remove the hexagonal bolts on the right and left sides that hold the motor in position (four bolts: M10 x 40, SW10, W10), and then remove it. Remove the hexagonal screws. Motor driver circuit board Disconnect the two cables. Port side Remove the hexagonal screws. Starboard side 4-71 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure Step 3 Apply grease to the new motor. Apply grease to the gear wheel of the new motor. Step 4 Apply grease. Gear wheel Place the replacement motor. Place the replacement motor in the scanner unit and fix it in place with the hexagonal bolts. Tighten the bolts to the appropriate torque (380 kgf-cm), so they are free of looseness. After having replaced the motor, reassemble the unit following the disassembly procedure in the reverse order. Do not forget to tighten the bolts or screws, and make sure that the cables are connected. Step 5 Operation check After completing the replacement work, turn On the safety switch and follow the steps below to check the operation. 1. Turn On the radar. After preheat countdown is finished, start transmission and check that the radar image is correctly displayed. Check that the motor does not make any abnormal sound when it starts to rotate, while it is rotating, or when it stops. 2. Open the service engineer menu and initialize the motor rotation time. This completes motor replacement. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-72 4.1.2.2 Motor Drive Circuit Board Replacement/NKE-1139

[Required Tools]

The tools shown in the following table are required for replacement work. Table Required Tools No Name Size Appearance 1 Phillips screwdriver Size #2 2 Open-end wrench*1 Width across flats 3 Socket wrench*1 13 mm (for M8 screws) Width across flats 13 mm (for M8 screws)

*1 Either the wrench (adjustable wrench) or socket wrench is mandatory. (mounting/removing the cover, etc.) Before beginning work, turn Off the safety switch of the Scanner unit. Before conducting replacement work, turn Off the circuit breaker for the power supply of the display unit. Exercise care not to lose bolts, screws and other parts removed from the Scanner unit, as they will be used again in later steps. Step 1 Turn Off the safety switch (to the lower side) and remove the cover. The safety switch is located on the rear (stern) side of the scanner unit. Open the cover for the safety switch and turn it Off (to the lower side). Remove the side cover. 4-73 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure Bow side Turn Off the safety switch. Remove the eight hexagonal screws. Example: Port side cover removal Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-74 Step 2 Replace the driver circuit board. Remove the cables connected to the driver circuit board and the screws (four M4 screws) and replace it. For the motor driver circuit there are two types of specifications, 100 V AC and 220 V AC. Check that the new motor driver circuit uses the appropriate power supply specification.

(Described on the silk printing on circuit board.) After having replaced the driver circuit board, reassemble the unit following the disassembly procedure in the reverse order. Do not forget to tighten the bolts or screws, and make sure that the cables are connected. Step 3 Operation check After completing the replacement work, turn On the safety switch and follow the steps below to check the operation. 1. Turn On the radar. After preheat countdown is finished, start transmission and check that the radar image is correctly displayed. Check that the motor does not make any abnormal sound when it starts to rotate, while it is rotating, or when it stops. 2. Open the service engineer menu and initialize the motor rotation time. This completes motor replacement. 4-75 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4.1.2.3 Encoder (CHT-71A) Replacement/NKE-1139

[Required Tools]

The tools shown in the following table are required for replacement work. Table Required Tools No Name Size Appearance 1 Phillips screwdriver Size #2, Size #3 2 Open-end wrench*1 Width across flats 3 Socket wrench*1 7 mm (for M4 screws), 8 mm (for M6 screws), 13 mm (for M8 screws) Width across flats 7 mm (for M4 screws), 8 mm (for M6 screws), 13 mm (for M8 screws)

*1 Either the wrench (adjustable wrench) or socket wrench is mandatory. (mounting/removing the cover, etc.) Before beginning work, turn Off the safety switch of the Scanner unit. Before conducting replacement work, turn Off the circuit breaker for the power supply of the display unit. Exercise care not to lose bolts, screws and other parts removed from the Scanner unit, as they will be used again in later steps. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-76 Step 1 Set the safety switches to Off (down) and remove the covers on both sides. The safety switch is located on the rear (stern) side of the scanner unit. Open the cover for the Bow side Turn Off the safety switch. safety switch and turn it Off (to the lower side). Remove the covers on both sides. Example: Port side cover removal Remove the eight hexagonal screws. 4-77 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure Step 2 Remove the terminal block Remove the cover from the right (starboard) and remove the screws (four M5 screws) to remove the terminal block. Step 3 Terminal block Remove the four screws. Remove the encoder block Loosen the two screws (M4) to remove the encoder together with the metal fixture. Encoder Metal fixture Encoder Loosen the two screws. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-78 Step 4 Replace the encoder Remove the metal fixture and the gear wheel attached to the encoder. Put them onto the new Metal fixture Remove the nut encoder and put it back into the unit. After replacing the encoder, follow the disassembly procedure in the reverse order. Do not forget to tighten the bolts or screws, and make sure that the cables are connected. Step 5 Operation check Remove the three screws. Encoder After completing the replacement work, turn On the safety switch and check operation by following the procedure below.

(1) Turn On the Display unit. After the countdown is completed, start transmission and check that the radar image appears without error. Open the service engineer menu to perform azimuth adjustment. This completes encoder replacement. 4-79 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4.1.2.4 Brake Control Circuit (CCB-655A) Replacement/NKE-1139

[Required Tools]

The tools shown in the following table are required for replacement work. Table Required Tools No Name Size Appearance 1 Phillips screwdriver Size #2, Size #3 2 Open-end wrench*1 Width across flats 3 Socket wrench*1 7 mm (for M4 screws), 13 mm (for M8 screws) Width across flats 7 mm (for M4 screws), 13 mm (for M8 screws)

*1 Either the wrench (adjustable wrench) or socket wrench is mandatory. (mounting/removing the cover, etc.) Before beginning work, turn Off the safety switch of the Scanner unit. Before conducting replacement work, turn Off the circuit breaker for the power supply of the display unit. Exercise care not to lose bolts, screws and other parts removed from the Scanner unit, as they will be used again in later steps. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-80 Step 1 Turn Off the safety switch (to the lower side) and remove the side cover. The safety switch is located on the rear (stern) side of the scanner unit. Open the cover for the Bow side Turn Off the safety switch. safety switch and turn it Off (to the lower side). Remove the side cover. Example: Port side cover removal Remove the eight hexagonal screws. 4-81 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure Step 2 Replace the brake control circuit. Plate holding the brake control circuit (CCB-655)

(brake control circuit is behind the plate) Remove the cover on the left side (port side) and remove all the connectors that are connected to the brake control circuit (CCB-655). Remove the four screws (M4) that are holding the mounting plate and replace it by removing the existing one together with the plate. After replacing the brake control circuit, reassemble the unit by following the disassembly procedure in the reverse order. Do not forget to tighten the bolts or screws, and make sure that the cables are connected. Step 3 Operation check After completing the replacement work, turn On the safety switch and check operation by following the procedure below.

(1) Turn On the Display unit. After the countdown is completed, start transmission and check that the radar image appears without error. This completes brake control circuit replacement. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-82 4.1.2.5 Brake Circuit (CFA-255) Replacement/NKE-1139

[Required Tools]

The tools shown in the following table are required for replacement work. Table Required Tools No Name Size Appearance 1 Phillips screwdriver Size #2 2 Open-end wrench*1 Width across flats 3 Socket wrench*1 13 mm (for M8 screws) Width across flats 13 mm (for M8 screws)

*1 Either the wrench (adjustable wrench) or socket wrench is mandatory. (mounting/removing the cover, etc.) Before beginning work, turn Off the safety switch of the Scanner unit. Before conducting replacement work, turn Off the circuit breaker for the power supply of the display unit. Exercise care not to lose bolts, screws and other parts removed from the Scanner unit, as they will be used again in later steps. Step 1 Turn Off the safety switch (to the lower side) and remove the side cover. The safety switch is located on the rear (stern) side of the scanner unit. Open the cover for the Bow side safety switch and turn it Off (to the lower side). Remove the side cover. Turn Off the safety switch. 4-83 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure Step 2 Remove the eight hexagonal screws. Example: Port side cover removal Replace the brake circuit. Remove the cover on the port side and remove the cable that is connected to J1504 of the motor driver circuit (7EPRD0034/35). Remove the two screws (M4) and replace the brake circuit

(CFA-255: resistor with cable). After replacing the circuit, reassemble the unit by following the disassembly procedure in the reverse order. Do not forget to tighten the bolts or screws, and make sure that the cables are connected. CBD-2000/2001 CFA-255 CFA-255 J1504 Remove the four screws. Remove the two screws. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-84 Step 3 Operation check After completing the replacement work, turn On the safety switch and check operation by following the procedure below.

(1) Turn On the Display unit. After the countdown is completed, start transmission and check that the radar image appears without error. This completes brake circuit replacement. 4-85 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4.1.2.6 Brake Circuit unit (NZR-17) Replacement/NKE-1139

[Required Tools]

The tools shown in the following table are required for replacement work. Table Required Tools No Name Size Appearance 1 Phillips screwdriver Size #2, Size #3 2 Open-end wrench*1 Width across flats 3 Socket wrench*1 13 mm (for M8 screws) Width across flats 13 mm (for M8 screws)

*1 Either the wrench (adjustable wrench) or socket wrench is mandatory. (mounting/removing the cover, etc.) Before beginning work, turn Off the safety switch of the Scanner unit. Before conducting replacement work, turn Off the circuit breaker for the power supply of the display unit. Exercise care not to lose bolts, screws and other parts removed from the Scanner unit, as they will be used again in later steps. Step 1 Turn Off the safety switch (to the lower side) and remove the side cover. The safety switch is located on the rear (stern) side of the scanner unit. Open the cover for the Bow side safety switch and turn it Off (to the lower side). Remove the side cover. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure Turn Off the safety switch. 4-86 Step 2 Remove the eight hexagonal screws. Example: Port side cover removal Remove the cable from rake control circuit. Remove the cover on the port side and remove the cables that are connected to J1921 and J1911 of the brake control circuit (CCB-655). Remove the two screws. CCB-655 J1911 J1921 Remove the coating clip. Remove the two screws. Chassis surface 4-87 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure Step 3 Replace the brake circuit unit. Remove the four screws (M5) that are holding the chassis. Remove the four screws that are holding the brake circuit at the rear of the chassis and then remove it. Remove the eight screws (CFA-261) or two screws (CFA-262) that are holding the resistor and replace it. After replacing the brake circuit unit, reassemble the unit by following the disassembly procedure in the reverse order. Do not forget to tighten the bolts or screws, and make sure that the cables are connected. Step 4 Operation check After completing the replacement work, turn On the safety switch and check operation by following the procedure below.

(1) Turn On the Display unit. After the countdown is completed, start transmission and check that the radar image appears without error. This completes brake circuit unit replacement. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-88 4.1.2.7 Performance Monitor (NJU-84) Replacement/NKE-1139 4-89 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4.1.3 NKE-1125 Scanner Unit 4.1.3.1 Magnetron Replacement/NKE-1125 When replacing magnetrons, make sure to shut off the main power and let the equipment stand for more than 5 minutes to discharge the high-voltage circuit. Failure may result in electric shock. Make sure to take off your watch when your hand must get close to the magnetron. Failure may result in damage to the watch since the magnetron is a strong magnet. Cautions on handling the magnetrons that have been stored for a long period of time Since the magnetrons that have been stored for a long period of time may become unstable at the start of the use due to the occurrence of spark, etc., apply aging by using the following procedure. 1 Extend the preheat period. (Standby: 20 to 30 minutes) 2 Start from the short pulse range and shift to the long pulse range sequentially. If the operation becomes unstable during this period, return to Standby immediately, maintain the status for 5 to 10 minutes and start operation again. Repeat this procedure. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-90

[Required Tools]

The tools shown in the following table are required for replacement work. Table Required Tools No Name Size Appearance 1 Non-magnetic Phillips screwdriver Size #2, Size #3 2 Open-end wrench*1 Width across flats 3 Socket wrench*1 13 mm (for M8 screws) Width across flats 13 mm (for M8 screws)

*1 Either the wrench (adjustable wrench) or socket wrench is mandatory. (mounting/removing the cover, etc.) Before beginning work, turn Off the safety switch of the Scanner unit. Before conducting replacement work, turn Off the circuit breaker for the power supply of the display unit. Exercise care not to lose bolts, screws and other parts removed from the Scanner unit, as they will be used again in later steps. Step 1 Turn Off the safety switch and remove the cover. Before beginning work, turn Off the safety switch located on the bottom of the stern side of the scanner unit. Loosen the hexagonal bolts (four bolts) and remove the pedestal cover. Bow side Turn Off the safety switch. 4-91 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure Loosen the four hexagonal bolts. Example: Starboard side cover removal Step 2 Remove the magnetron cover. Remove the covers from the right (starboard) side and loosen the screws (four M4 screws) to remove the magnetron cover. Magnetron cover Loosen the four screws. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-92 Step 3 Replace the magnetron cover. Make sure there is no charge remaining in the modulation high-voltage circuit board, and then remove the screws (two M4 screws) holding the magnetron cables (yellow and green) in place. Remove the screws (four M4 screws) holding the magnetron in place, then replace the magnetron after cutting the leads (yellow and green) for the replacement magnetron to an appropriate length. After having replaced the magnetron, reassemble the unit by following the disassembly procedure in the reverse order. Do not forget to tighten the bolts or screws, and make sure that the cables are connected. Use a non-magnetic screwdriver because the contact of the metal tool with the magnetron causes deterioration of its performance. Make sure that the magnetron leads (yellow and green) do not contact and are pulled away from other parts or the casing. Contact may cause them to discharge. Magnetron Remove the four screws. Remove the green cable. Remove the two screws. Remove the yellow cable. 4-93 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure Step 4 Operation check After completing the replacement work, turn On the safety switch and check operation by following the procedure below.

(1) Turn On the radar and allow sufficient preheating time (20 to 30 minutes in the STBY mode).

(2) Start transmission on a short pulse range and change the range to the longer ranges. Open the service engineer menu and provisionally adjust the tuning. Check the magnetron current on the test menu during the time and if operation becomes unstable, bring the radar unit back to STBY mode and restart transmission after allowing for an interval of 5 to 10 minutes.

(3) After transmitting on a long range for about fifteen minutes, return to the service engineer menu and adjust the tuning. Perform the adjustment in the service engineer menu until the tuning display bar on the display unit reaches the 8th calibration mark. With the service engineer menu open, also make sure the magnetron current is shown between the 6th and 9th calibration markings.

(4) Finally, initialize the transmission time in the service engineer menu. This completes magnetron replacement. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-94 4.1.3.2 Motor Replacement/NKE-1125

[Required Tools]

The tools shown in the following table are required for replacement work. Table Required Tools No Name Size Appearance 1 Phillips screwdriver Size #2, Size #3 2 Open-end wrench*1 Width across flats 3 Socket wrench*1 13 mm (for M8 screws), 17 mm (for M10 screws) Width across flats 13 mm (for M8 screws), 17 mm (for M10 screws)

*1 Either the wrench (adjustable wrench) or socket wrench is mandatory. (mounting/removing the cover, etc.) Before beginning work, turn Off the safety switch of the Scanner unit. Before conducting replacement work, turn Off the circuit breaker for the power supply of the display unit. Exercise care not to lose bolts, screws and other parts removed from the Scanner unit, as they will be used again in later steps. Step 1 Turn Off the safety switch and remove the cover. Before beginning work, turn Off the safety switch located on the bottom of the stern side of the scanner unit. Loosen the hexagonal bolts (four bolts) and remove the pedestal cover. 4-95 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure Bow side Turn Off the safety switch. Loosen the four hexagonal bolts. Example: Starboard side cover removal Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-96 Step 2 Remove the motor. Remove the cover on the left (port) side and remove the cables connected to the motor driver Motor Remove the four bolts. Motor driver circuit board Disconnect the two cables. circuit board. Remove the hexagonal bolts (four M8 bolts) and remove the motor. Step 3 Remove the hexagonal bolts (four M8 bolts) and remove the installation plate from the motor. Attach the installation plate to the replacement motor. Do not forget to tighten the hexagonal bolts to an appropriate torque (210 kgf-cm) so they are free of looseness. Replace the motor. Installation plate Four bolts Motor 4-97 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure Install the motor into the scanner unit. Press the motor against the protrusions of the arm fixed Arm protrusions Tighten the four bolts. to the motor on which the arm extends through the wall of the casing, adjust it to minimize backlash, and fix it in place. Do not forget to tighten the hexagonal bolts, to an appropriate torque

(140 kgf-cm) so they are free of looseness. Step 4 Apply grease to the new motor. Press After having installed the motor, grease the gear wheel. After having replaced the motor, Apply grease. reassemble the unit by following the disassembly procedure in the reverse order. Do not forget to tighten the bolts or screws, and make sure that the cables are connected. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-98 Step 5 Operation check After completing the replacement work, turn On the safety switch and check operation by following the procedure below.

(1) Turn On the Display unit. After the countdown is completed, start transmission and check that the radar image appears without error. Check that the motor does not make any abnormal sound when it starts to rotate, while it is rotating, or when it stops. This completes motor replacement. 4-99 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure

 

 

4.1.3.3 Motor Drive Circuit Board Replacement/NKE-1125

[Required Tools]

The tools shown in the following table are required for replacement work. Table Required Tools No Name Size Appearance 1 Phillips screwdriver Size #2 2 Open-end wrench*1 Width across flats 3 Socket wrench*1 13 mm (for M8 screws) Width across flats 13 mm (for M8 screws)

*1 Either the wrench (adjustable wrench) or socket wrench is mandatory. (mounting/removing the cover, etc.) Before beginning work, turn Off the safety switch of the Scanner unit. Before conducting replacement work, turn Off the circuit breaker for the power supply of the display unit. Exercise care not to lose bolts, screws and other parts removed from the Scanner unit, as they will be used again in later steps. Step 1 Turn Off the safety switch and remove the cover. Before beginning work, turn Off the safety switch located on the bottom of the stern side of the scanner unit. Loosen the hexagonal bolts (four bolts) and remove the pedestal cover. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-100 Bow side Turn Off the safety switch. Loosen the four hexagonal bolts. Example: Starboard side cover removal 4-101 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure Step 2 Remove the metal plate of the motor driver circuit board and relay filter circuit board Remove the cover on the left (port) side. Remove the cable connecting to the motor driver circuit Remove the three screws. board and relay filter circuit board. After removing the screw (three M4 screws) and the cable, remove the metal plate to which the motor driver circuit board and relay filter circuit board are attached. Step 3 Replace the motor driver circuit board. Motor driver circuit board Remove the four screws (M4) and cables connected to the motor driver circuit board and replace it. For the motor driver circuit there are two types of specifications, 100 V AC and 220 V AC. Check that the new motor driver circuit uses the appropriate power supply specification.

(Described on the silk printing on circuit board.) After having replaced the motor driver circuit board, reassemble the unit following the disassembly procedure in the reverse order. Do not forget to tighten the screws and connect the cables. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-102 Remove the four screws. Motor driver circuit board Operation check Step 4 After completing the replacement work, turn On the safety switch and check operation by following the procedure below.

(1) Turn On the Display unit. After the countdown is completed, start transmission and check that the radar image appears without error. Check that the motor does not make any abnormal sound when it starts to rotate, while it is rotating, or when it stops. This completes motor driver circuit board replacement. 4-103 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4.1.3.4 Magnetron Fan Replacement/NKE-1125

[Required Tools]

The tools shown in the following table are required for replacement work. Table Required Tools No Name Size Appearance 1 Phillips screwdriver Size #2, Size #3 2 Open-end wrench*1 Width across flats 3 Socket wrench*1 13 mm (for M8 screws) Width across flats 13 mm (for M8 screws)

*1 Either the wrench (adjustable wrench) or socket wrench is mandatory. (mounting/removing the cover, etc.) Before beginning work, turn Off the safety switch of the Scanner unit. Before conducting replacement work, turn Off the circuit breaker for the power supply of the display unit. Exercise care not to lose bolts, screws and other parts removed from the Scanner unit, as they will be used again in later steps. Step 1 Turn Off the safety switch and remove the cover. Before beginning work, turn Off the safety switch located on the bottom of the stern side of the scanner unit. Loosen the hexagonal bolts (four bolts) and remove the pedestal cover. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-104 Turn Off the safety switch. Bow side Loosen the hexagonal bolts. Example: Starboard side cover removal 4-105 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure Step 2 Remove the transmitter-receiver unit. Remove the cover on the right (starboard) side, remove the cables connected to the transmitter-receiver unit and the screws (three M5 screws) holding it in place, and then remove it. Remove the five cables. Remove the three screws. Step 3 Remove the fan cable. Remove the cable for the fan that is connected to the T/R control circuit board. Remove the cable. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-106 Step 4 Replace the fan. Remove the screws (four M4 screws) holding the fan in place and replace it. After replacing the fan, assemble the unit in the reverse order of the disassembly procedure. Do not forget to tighten the bolts or screws, and make sure that the cables are connected. Remove the four screws. Step 5 Operation check After having completed the replacement, turn On the safety switch and check operation by following the procedure below.

(1) Turn On the Display unit. After the countdown is completed, start transmission and check that the radar image appears without error. Check that the fan alarm is not triggered. This completes magnetron fan replacement. 4-107 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4.1.3.5 Modulator Circuit (CPA-264) Replacement/NKE-1125

[Required Tools]

The tools shown in the following table are required for replacement work. Table Required Tools No Name Size Appearance 1 Phillips screwdriver Size #2 2 Open-end wrench*1 Width across flats 3 Socket wrench*1 7 mm (for M4 screws), 13 mm (for M8 screws) Width across flats 7 mm (for M4 screws), 13 mm (for M8 screws)

*1 Either the wrench (adjustable wrench) or socket wrench is mandatory. (mounting/removing the cover, etc.) Before beginning work, turn Off the safety switch of the Scanner unit. Before conducting replacement work, turn Off the circuit breaker for the power supply of the display unit. Exercise care not to lose bolts, screws and other parts removed from the Scanner unit, as they will be used again in later steps. Step 1 Turn Off the safety switch and remove the cover. Before beginning work, turn Off the safety switch located on the bottom of the stern side of the scanner unit. Loosen the hexagonal bolts (four bolts) and remove the pedestal cover. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-108 Bow side Turn Off the safety switch. Loosen the hexagonal bolts Example: Starboard side cover removal 4-109 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure Step 2 Remove the transmitter-receiver unit. Remove the cover on the right (starboard) side, remove the cables connected to the transmitter-receiver unit and the screws (three M5 screws) holding it in place, and then remove it. Remove the five cables. Remove the three screws. Step 3 Remove the modulator circuit board cover. Loosen the screws (nine M4 screws) holding the cover in place, remove the screws (two M4 screws) holding the heat radiation plate in place, and then remove the cover. Remove the two screws. Loosen the nine screws. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-110 Step 4 Replace the modulator circuit board. Remove the cables connected to the modulator circuit board, then remove the screws (five M4 screws) holding it in place and the spacer (one 7 mm (nominal) spacer), and then replace it. If reusing the heat radiation plate on the modulator, be sure to install the insulation sheet between the TR5-8 and the heat radiation plate so that it is straight. After having replaced the modulator circuit board, reassemble the unit following the disassembly procedure in the reverse order. Do not forget to tighten the screws and connect the cables. Step 5 Remove the spacer. Remove the five screws. Disconnect the five cables. Operation check After having completed the replacement, turn On the safety switch and check operation by following the procedure below.

(1) Turn On the Display unit. After the countdown is completed, start transmission and check that the radar image appears without error. Emit the radio wave in long pulse range mode and open the service engineer menu to check that the magnetron current stands between the 5th and 7th calibration markings. This completes modulator circuit board replacement. 4-111 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4.1.3.6 Modulation Unit Fan Replacement/NKE-1125

[Required Tools]

The tools shown in the following table are required for replacement work. Table Required Tools No Name Size Appearance 1 Phillips screwdriver Size #2, Size #3 2 Open-end wrench*1 Width across flats 3 Socket wrench*1 13 mm (for M8 screws) Width across flats 13 mm (for M8 screws)

*1 Either the wrench (adjustable wrench) or socket wrench is mandatory. (mounting/removing the cover, etc.) Before beginning work, turn Off the safety switch of the Scanner unit. Before conducting replacement work, turn Off the circuit breaker for the power supply of the display unit. Exercise care not to lose bolts, screws and other parts removed from the Scanner unit, as they will be used again in later steps. Step 1 Turn Off the safety switch and remove the cover. Before beginning work, turn Off the safety switch located on the bottom of the stern side of the scanner unit. Loosen the hexagonal bolts (four bolts) and remove the pedestal cover. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-112 Turn Off the safety switch. Bow side Step 2 Loosen the hexagonal bolts Example: Starboard side cover removal Remove the transmitter-receiver unit. Remove the cover on the right (starboard) side, remove the cables connected to the transmitter-receiver unit and the screws (three M5 screws) holding it in place, and then remove it. 4-113 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure Remove the five cables. Remove the three screws. Step 3 Remove the fan cable. Remove the cable for the fan that is connected to the T/R control circuit board. Remove the cable. Loosen the screws (nine M4 screws) holding the cover in place, remove the screws (two M4 screws) holding the heat radiation plate in place, and remove the cover. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-114 Remove the two screws. Loosen the nine screws. Step 4 Replace the modulation unit fan cable. Remove the screws (four M4 screws) holding the fan in place and replace it. After replacing the fan, assemble the unit in the reverse order of the disassembly procedure. Do not forget to tighten the bolts or screws, and make sure that the cables are connected. Remove the four 4 screws Step 5 Operation check After having completed the replacement, turn On the safety switch and check operation by following the procedure below.

(1) Turn On the Display unit. After the countdown is completed, start transmission and check that the radar image appears without error. Check that the fan alarm is not triggered. This completes modulation unit fan replacement. 4-115 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4.1.3.7 Modulation Unit (NMA-550) Replacement/NKE-1125

[Required Tools]

The tools shown in the following table are required for replacement work. Table Required Tools No Name Size Appearance 1 Phillips screwdriver Size #2, Size #3 2 Open-end wrench*1 Width across flats 3 Socket wrench*1 13 mm (for M8 screws) Width across flats 13 mm (for M8 screws)

*1 Either the wrench (adjustable wrench) or socket wrench is mandatory. (mounting/removing the cover, etc.) Before beginning work, turn Off the safety switch of the Scanner unit. Before conducting replacement work, turn Off the circuit breaker for the power supply of the display unit. Exercise care not to lose bolts, screws and other parts removed from the Scanner unit, as they will be used again in later steps. Step 1 Turn Off the safety switch and remove the cover. Before beginning work, turn Off the safety switch located on the bottom of the stern side of the scanner unit. Loosen the hexagonal bolts (four bolts) and remove the pedestal cover. Bow side Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-116 Turn Off the safety switch. Loosen the four hexagonal bolts. Example: Starboard side cover removal Remove the transmitter-receiver unit. Step 2 Remove the cover on the right (starboard) side, remove the cables connected to the transmitter-receiver unit and the screws (three M5 screws) holding it in place, and then remove it. Remove the five cables. Remove the three screws. 4-117 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure Step 3 Remove the transmitter-receiver unit cover and remove the magnetron. Loosen the screws (nine M4 screws) holding the cover in place. Remove the screws (two M4 screws) holding the heat radiation plate in place and remove the cover. Then, remove the magnetron. Remove the two screws. Loosen the nine screws. Step 4 Remove the waveguide holding screws. Remove the two connection waveguide holding screws (M4). Remove Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-118 Step 5 Remove the screws at the rear of the modulation unit. Remove the three screws (M4) at the rear of the modulation unit. Remove 4-119 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure Step 6 Replace the modulation unit. Install the magnetron that was removed in Step 3 to the new modulation unit. Then, reassemble the unit by following the disassembly procedure in the reverse order. Do not forget to tighten the bolts or screws, and do not forget to reconnect the cables. Magnetron Step 7 Operation check After completing the replacement work, turn On the safety switch and check operation by following the procedure below.

(1) Turn On the Display unit. After the countdown is completed, start transmission and check that the radar image appears without error. Transmit the radio wave in long pulse range mode and open the service engineer menu to check that the magnetron current stands between the 5th and 7th calibration markings. This completes modulation unit replacement. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-120 4.1.3.8 Power Supply Circuit Board (CBD-1682A) Replacement/NKE-1125

[Required Tools]

The tools shown in the following table are required for replacement work. Table Required Tools No Name Size Appearance 1 Phillips screwdriver Size #2, Size #3 2 Open-end wrench*1 Width across flats 3 Socket wrench*1 13 mm (for M8 screws) Width across flats 13 mm (for M8 screws)

*1 Either the wrench (adjustable wrench) or socket wrench is mandatory. (mounting/removing the cover, etc.) Before beginning work, turn Off the safety switch of the Scanner unit. Before conducting replacement work, turn Off the circuit breaker for the power supply of the display unit. Exercise care not to lose bolts, screws and other parts removed from the Scanner unit, as they will be used again in later steps. Step 1 Turn Off the safety switch and remove the cover. Before beginning work, turn Off the safety switch located on the bottom of the stern side of the scanner unit. Loosen the hexagonal bolts (four bolts) and remove the pedestal cover. 4-121 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure Bow side Turn Off the safety switch. Loosen the hexagonal bolts Example: Starboard side cover removal Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-122 Step 2 Remove the transmitter-receiver unit. Remove the cover on the right (starboard) side. Remove the cables connected to the transmitter-receiver unit and the screws (three M5 screws) holding it in place, and then remove it. Remove the five cables. Remove the three screws. Step 3 Remove the metal fitting holding the power supply circuit board. Remove the cables connected to the power supply circuit board and the screws (five M4 screws) holding it in place. Remove it together with the metal fitting holding it in place. Remove the five cables. 4-123 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure Step 4 Replace the power supply circuit board Remove the screws (six M4 screws) holding the power supply circuit board in place and then replace it. If the thermal conductive pad on the casing on the back of the power supply circuit board (the soldered side) is damaged, affix a new one to the replacement power supply circuit board. After having replaced the power supply circuit board, reassemble the unit following the disassembly procedure in the reverse order. Do not forget to tighten the bolts or screws, and make sure that the cables are connected. Remove the six screws. Step 5 Operation check After having completed the replacement, turn On the safety switch and check operation by following the procedure below.

(1) Turn On the radar and emit radar waves once the countdown is finished, and check that the radar image is correctly displayed. This completes power supply circuit board replacement. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-124 4.1.3.9 T/R Control Circuit (CMC-1205R) Replacement/NKE-1125

[Required Tools]

The tools shown in the following table are required for replacement work. No Name Size Appearance Table Required Tools 1 Phillips screwdriver Size #2, Size #3 2 Open-end wrench*1 Width across flats 3 Socket wrench*1 13 mm (for M8 screws) Width across flats 13 mm (for M8 screws)

*1 Either the wrench (adjustable wrench) or socket wrench is mandatory. (mounting/removing the cover, etc.) Before beginning work, turn Off the safety switch of the Scanner unit. Before conducting replacement work, turn Off the circuit breaker for the power supply of the display unit. Exercise care not to lose bolts, screws and other parts removed from the Scanner unit, as they will be used again in later steps. Step 1 Back up the scanner unit data. Before beginning the replacement procedure, open the service engineer menu of the radar display unit and back up the scanner unit data (transmission time and motor rotation time). If you do not back up this data, it will not be possible to maintain continuity in scanner data such as the magnetron usage time 4-125 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure Step 2 Turn Off the safety switch and remove the cover. Before beginning work, turn Off the safety switch located on the bottom of the stern side of the Bow side scanner unit. Loosen the hexagonal bolts (four bolts) and remove the pedestal cover. Turn Off the safety switch. Step 3 Loosen the hexagonal bolts Example: Starboard side cover removal Remove the transmitter-receiver unit. Remove the cover on the right (starboard) side, remove the cables connected to the transmitter-receiver unit and the screws (three M5 screws) holding it in place, and then remove it. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-126 Remove the five cables. Remove the three screws. Step 4 Replace the T/R control circuit board. Remove the cables connected to the T/R control circuit board and the screws (seven M4 screws). Then replace it. Set the DIP switch and jumper pins on the T/R control circuit board for the NKE-1125. NKE-1125 (25 kW, X-band, 2 units, AC motor) Jumper pin settings Jumper pin 3 2 1 SW2 ON DIP switch settings ( indicates a switch.) SW1 ON J92,J93,J95,J96: 1-2 short circuit 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 After replacing the T/R control circuit board, assemble the unit in the reverse order of the disassembly procedure. Do not forget to tighten the screws and connect the cables. 4-127 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure Step 5 Operation check After completing the replacement work, turn On the safety switch and check operation by following the procedure below.

(1) Turn On the radar, open the service engineer menu, restore the scanner unit times, and make sure that the data has been correctly continued before/after the T/R control circuit board replacement (check the transmission time and the motor rotation time).

(2) Begin transmission once the countdown is complete and check that the radar image is correctly displayed. This completes T/R control circuit board replacement. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-128 4.1.3.10 Relay Filter Circuit (CSC-656) Replacement/NKE-1125

[Required Tools]

The tools shown in the following table are required for replacement work. Table Required Tools No Name Size Appearance 1 Phillips screwdriver Size #2, Size #3 2 Open-end wrench*1 Width across flats 3 Socket wrench*1 13 mm (for M8 screws) Width across flats 13 mm (for M8 screws)

*1 Either the wrench (adjustable wrench) or socket wrench is mandatory. (mounting/removing the cover, etc.) Before beginning work, turn Off the safety switch of the Scanner unit. Before conducting replacement work, turn Off the circuit breaker for the power supply of the display unit. Exercise care not to lose bolts, screws and other parts removed from the Scanner unit, as they will be used again in later steps. Step 1 Turn Off the safety switch and remove the cover. Before beginning work, turn Off the safety switch located on the bottom of the stern side of the scanner unit. Loosen the hexagonal bolts (four bolts) and remove the pedestal cover. Bow side Turn Off the safety switch. 4-129 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure Step 2 Loosen the hexagonal bolts Example: Starboard side cover removal Remove the metal plate of the motor driver circuit board and relay filter circuit board Remove the cover on the left (port) side. Remove the cable connecting to the motor driver circuit Remove the three screws. board and relay filter circuit board. After removing the screw (three M4 screws) and the cable, remove the metal plate to which the motor driver circuit board and relay filter circuit board are attached. Remove the metal plate of the motor driver circuit board and the relay filter circuit board Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-130 Step 3 Replace the relay filter circuit board. Remove the screws holding the relay filter circuit board in place (four M4 screws) and replace it. Remove the four screws. After having replaced the relay filter circuit board, reassemble the unit following the disassembly procedure in the reverse order. Do not forget to tighten the bolts or screws, and make sure that the cables are connected. Step 4 Operation check Relay filter circuit board After completing the replacement work, turn On the safety switch and check operation by following the procedure below.

(1) Turn On the Display unit. After the countdown is completed, start transmission and check that the radar image appears without error. This completes relay filter circuit board replacement. 4-131 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4.1.3.11 Receiver (NRG-162A) Replacement/NKE-1125

[Required Tools]

The tools shown in the following table are required for replacement work. Table Required Tools No Name Size Appearance 1 Phillips screwdriver Size #2, Size #3 2 Open-end wrench*1 Width across flats 3 Socket wrench*1 13 mm (for M8 screws) Width across flats 13 mm (for M8 screws)

*1 Either the wrench (adjustable wrench) or socket wrench is mandatory. (mounting/removing the cover, etc.) Before beginning work, turn Off the safety switch of the Scanner unit. Before conducting replacement work, turn Off the circuit breaker for the power supply of the display unit. Exercise care not to lose bolts, screws and other parts removed from the Scanner unit, as they will be used again in later steps. Step 1 Turn Off the safety switch and remove the cover. Before beginning work, turn Off the safety switch located on the bottom of the stern side of the Bow side scanner unit. Loosen the hexagonal bolts (four bolts) and remove the pedestal cover. Turn Off the safety switch. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-132 Step 2 Loosen the hexagonal bolts Example: Starboard side cover removal Remove the transmitter-receiver unit. Remove the cover on the right (starboard) side. Remove the cables connected to the transmitter-receiver unit and the screws (three M5 screws) holding it in place, and then remove it. Remove the five cables. Remove the three screws. 4-133 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure Step 3 Replace the receiving unit. Remove the screws (five M4 screws) holding the receiver in place. Remove the cables connected to the receiver, then replace it. Transfer the metal fitting from the removed receiver to the replacement receiver and fit it into the casing. After having replaced the receiver, reassemble the unit by following the disassembly procedure in the reverse order. Do not forget to tighten the bolts or screws, and make sure that the cables are connected. Remove the five screws. Remove the cable. Step 4 Operation check After having completed the replacement, turn On the safety switch and check operation by following the procedure below.

(1) Turn On the Display unit. After the countdown is completed, start transmission and check that the radar image appears without error. Transmit the radio wave in the long range mode and open the service engineer menu to perform tuning adjustment. Perform the adjustment in the service engineer menu until the tuning display bar on the display unit reaches the 8th calibration mark. This completes receiving unit replacement. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-134 4.1.3.12 Encoder (CHT-71A) Replacement/NKE-1125

[Required Tools]

The tools shown in the following table are required for replacement work. Table Required Tools No Name Size Appearance 1 Phillips screwdriver Size #2, Size #3 2 Open-end wrench*1 Width across flats 3 Socket wrench*1 7 mm (for M4 screws), 8 mm (for M6 screws), 13 mm (for M8 screws) Width across flats 7 mm (for M4 screws), 8 mm (for M6 screws), 13 mm (for M8 screws)

*1 Either the wrench (adjustable wrench) or socket wrench is mandatory. (mounting/removing the cover, etc.) Before beginning work, turn Off the safety switch of the Scanner unit. Before conducting replacement work, turn Off the circuit breaker for the power supply of the display unit. Exercise care not to lose bolts, screws and other parts removed from the Scanner unit, as they will be used again in later steps. Step 1 Turn Off the safety switch and remove the cover. Before beginning work, turn Off the safety switch located on the bottom of the stern side of the scanner unit. Loosen the hexagonal bolts (four bolts) and remove the pedestal cover. 4-135 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure Turn Off the safety switch. Bow side Step 2 Loosen the hexagonal bolts Example: Starboard side cover removal Remove the transmitter-receiver unit. Remove the cover on the right (starboard) side, remove the cables connected to the transmitter-receiver unit and the screws (three M5 screws) holding it in place, and then remove it. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-136 Remove the five cables. Remove the three screws. Step 3 Remove the encoder. Loosen the two screws (M4) to remove the encoder together with the metal fixture. Encoder Metal fitting Loosen the two screws. 4-137 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure Step 4 Replace the encoder. Remove the metal fixture and the gear wheel attached to the encoder. Put them onto the new encoder and put it back into the unit. After replacing the encoder, follow the disassembly procedure in the reverse order. Do not forget to tighten the bolts or screws, and make sure that the cables are connected. Remove the nut. Metal fitting Encoder Remove the three screws. Step 5 Operation check After completing the replacement work, turn On the safety switch and check operation by following the procedure below.

(1) Turn On the Display unit. After the countdown is completed, start transmission and check that the radar image appears without error. Open the service engineer menu to perform azimuth adjustment. This completes encoder replacement. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-138 4.1.3.13 Brake Control Circuit (CCB-655A) Replacement/NKE-1125

[Required Tools]

The tools shown in the following table are required for replacement work. No Name Size Appearance Table Required Tools 1 Phillips screwdriver Size #2, Size #3 2 Open-end wrench*1 Width across flats 3 Socket wrench*1 7 mm (for M4 screws), 13 mm (for M8 screws) Width across flats 7 mm (for M4 screws), 13 mm (for M8 screws)

*1 Either the wrench (adjustable wrench) or socket wrench is mandatory. (mounting/removing the cover, etc.) Before beginning work, turn Off the safety switch of the Scanner unit. Before conducting replacement work, turn Off the circuit breaker for the power supply of the display unit. Exercise care not to lose bolts, screws and other parts removed from the Scanner unit, as they will be used again in later steps. Step 1 Turn Off the safety switch and remove the cover. Before beginning work, turn Off the safety switch located on the bottom of the stern side of the scanner unit. Loosen the hexagonal bolts (four bolts) and remove the pedestal cover. 4-139 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure Bow side Turn Off the safety switch. Loosen the hexagonal bolts Example: Starboard side cover removal Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-140 Step 2 Remove the metal plate of the motor driver circuit board and relay filter circuit board Remove the cover on the left (port) side. Remove the cable connecting to the motor driver circuit board and relay filter circuit board. After removing the screw (three M4 screws) and the cable, remove the metal plate to which the motor driver circuit board and relay filter circuit board are attached. Remove the three screws. Motor driver circuit board 4-141 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure Step 3 Replace the brake control circuit. Remove the cable that is connected to the brake control circuit. Then, remove the motor driver circuit by removing the four screws (M4), the relay filter by removing the four screws (M4), and the neck heater terminal block mounting plate by removing the two screws (M4). Motor driver circuit board Terminal block mounting plate for neck heater Replace the brake control circuit by removing the four spacers (M4) and two FET screws (M3) that are holding the circuit board. After replacing the brake control circuit, reassemble the unit by following the disassembly procedure in the reverse order. Do not forget to tighten the bolts or screws, and make sure that the cables are connected. Step 4 Operation check Brake control circuit

(CCB-655) After completing the replacement work, turn On the safety switch and check operation by following the procedure below.

(1) Turn On the Display unit. After the countdown is completed, start transmission and check that the radar image appears without error. This completes brake control circuit replacement. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-142 4.1.3.14 Brake Circuit (CFA-253) Replacement/NKE-1125

[Required Tools]

The tools shown in the following table are required for replacement work. Table Required Tools No Name Size Appearance 1 Phillips screwdriver Size #2 2 Open-end wrench*1 Width across flats 3 Socket wrench*1 13 mm (for M8 screws) Width across flats 13 mm (for M8 screws)

*1 Either the wrench (adjustable wrench) or socket wrench is mandatory. (mounting/removing the cover, etc.) Before beginning work, turn Off the safety switch of the Scanner unit. Before conducting replacement work, turn Off the circuit breaker for the power supply of the display unit. Exercise care not to lose bolts, screws and other parts removed from the Scanner unit, as they will be used again in later steps. Step 1 Turn Off the safety switch and remove the cover. Before beginning work, turn Off the safety switch located on the bottom of the stern side of the scanner unit. Loosen the hexagonal bolts (four bolts) and remove the pedestal cover. Bow side Turn Off the safety switch. 4-143 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure Step 2 Loosen the hexagonal bolts Example: Starboard side cover removal Remove the metal plate of the motor driver circuit board and relay filter circuit board Remove the cover on the left (port) side, remove the cable connecting to the motor driver circuit Remove the three screws. board and relay filter circuit board and the screw (three M4 screws) securing the cable, and remove the metal plate to which the motor driver circuit board and relay filter circuit board is attached. Remove the metal plate of the motor driver circuit board and the relay filter circuit board Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-144 Step 3 Replace the brake circuit. Remove the four screws (M4) on the resistors at the top of the unit. Remove the cable that is connected to J1504 of the motor driver circuit, and replace the brake circuit (CFA-253: resistor with cable). After replacing the brake circuit, reassemble the unit following the disassembly procedure in the reverse order. Do not forget to tighten the bolts or screws, and make sure that the cables are connected. Step 4 Operation check Remove the four screws. After completing the replacement work, turn On the safety switch and check operation by following the procedure below.

(1) Turn On the Display unit. After the countdown is completed, start transmission and check that the radar image appears without error. This completes brake circuit replacement. 4-145 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4.1.3.15 Brake Circuit Unit (NZR-16) Replacement/NKE-1125

[Required Tools]

The tools shown in the following table are required for replacement work. Table Required Tools No Name Size Appearance 1 Phillips screwdriver Size #2 2 Open-end wrench*1 Width across flats 3 Socket wrench*1 13 mm (for M8 screws) Width across flats 13 mm (for M8 screws)

*1 Either the wrench (adjustable wrench) or socket wrench is mandatory. (mounting/removing the cover, etc.) Before beginning work, turn Off the safety switch of the Scanner unit. Before conducting replacement work, turn Off the circuit breaker for the power supply of the display unit. Exercise care not to lose bolts, screws and other parts removed from the Scanner unit, as they will be used again in later steps. Step 1 Turn Off the safety switch and remove the cover. Before beginning work, turn Off the safety switch located on the bottom of the stern side of the scanner unit. Loosen the hexagonal bolts (four bolts) and remove the pedestal cover. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-146 Turn Off the safety switch. Bow side Step 2 Loosen the hexagonal bolts. Example: Starboard side cover removal Remove the brake control circuit cable Remove the cover on the left (port) side and remove the cables connected to J1911 and J1921 of the brake control circuit (CCB-655). 4-147 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure Step 3 J1921 J1911 Motor Remove the motor. Remove the cover on the left (port) side and remove the cables connected to the motor driver Disconnect the two cables. Remove the four bolts. circuit board. Remove the hexagonal bolts (four M8 bolts) and remove the motor. Motor driver circuit board Motor Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-148 Step 4 Replace the brake circuit unit. Remove four screws (M4) and replace the break circuit unit (NZR-16). After replacing the brake circuit, reassemble the unit following the disassembly procedure in the reverse order. Do not forget to tighten the bolts or screws, and make sure that the cables are connected. Step 5 NZR-16 Remove the four screws. Operation check After completing the replacement work, turn On the safety switch and check operation by following the procedure below.

(1) Turn On the Display unit. After the countdown is completed, start transmission and check that the radar image appears without error. This completes brake circuit unit replacement. 4-149 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4.1.3.16 Performance Monitor (NJU-85) Replacement/NKE-1125 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-150 4.1.4 NKE-1129 Scanner Unit 4.1.4.1 Motor Replacement/NKE-1129 See the section for NKE-1125. 4.1.4.2 Motor drive Circuit Board Replacement/NKE-1129 See the section for NKE-1125. 4.1.4.3 Encoder (CHT-71A) Replacement/NKE-1129

[Required Tools]

The tools shown in the following table are required for replacement work. Table Required Tools No Name Size Appearance 1 Phillips screwdriver Size #2, Size #3 2 Open-end wrench*1 Width across flats 3 Socket wrench*1 7 mm (for M4 screws), 8 mm (for M6 screws), 13 mm (for M8 screws) Width across flats 7 mm (for M4 screws), 8 mm (for M6 screws), 13 mm (for M8 screws)

*1 Either the wrench (adjustable wrench) or socket wrench is mandatory. (mounting/removing the cover, etc.) Before beginning work, turn Off the safety switch of the radar antenna. Before conducting replacement work, turn Off the circuit breaker for the power supply of the display unit. Exercise care not to lose bolts, screws and other parts removed from the radar antenna, as they will be used again in later steps. 4-151 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure Step 1 Turn Off the safety switch and remove the cover. Before beginning work, turn Off the safety switch located on the bottom of the stern side of the Bow side scanner unit. Loosen the hexagonal bolts (four bolts) and remove the pedestal cover. Turn Off the safety switch. Loosen the four hexagonal bolts. Example: Removal of starboard si de cover. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-152 Step 2 Remove the plate from the terminal block. Remove the covers from the right (starboard) side. Remove the screws (four M4 screws) to remove the plate to which the terminal block is attached. Remove the four screws. Step 3 Remove the encoder cable. Remove the six cables. 4-153 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure Step 4 Remove the encoder. Loosen the two screws (M4) to remove the encoder together with the metal fixture. Encoder Metal fitting Loosen the two screws. Step 5 Replace the encoder. Remove the metal fixture and the gear wheel attached to the encoder. Put them onto the new encoder and put it back into the unit. After replacing the encoder, follow the disassembly procedure in the reverse order. Do not forget to tighten the bolts or screws, and make sure that the cables are connected. Remove the nut. Metal fitting Encoder Remove the three screws. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-154 Step 6 Operation check After completing the replacement work, turn On the safety switch and check operation by following the procedure below.

(1) Turn On the Display unit. After the countdown is completed, start transmission and check that the radar image appears without error. Open the service engineer menu to perform azimuth adjustment. This completes encoder replacement. 4.1.4.4 Brake Control Circuit (CCB-655A) Replacement/NKE-1129 See the section for NKE-1125. 4.1.4.5 Brake Circuit (CFA-253) Replacement/NKE-1129 See the section for NKE-1125. 4.1.4.6 Brake Circuit Unit (NZR-15) Replacement/NKE-1129 See the section for NKE-1125. 4.1.4.7 Performance Monitor (NJU-85) Replacement/NKE-1129 See the section for NKE-1125. 4-155 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4.1.5 NKE-2254-HS Scanner Unit 4.1.5.1 Magnetron Replacement/NKE-2254-HS See the section for NKE-1125. 4.1.5.2 Motor Replacement/NKE-2254-HS

[Required Tools]

The tools shown in the following table are required for replacement work. Table Required Tools No Name Size Appearance 1 Phillips screwdriver Size #2, Size #3 2 Open-end wrench*1 Width across flats 3 Socket wrench*1 13 mm (for M8 screws), 17 mm (for M10 screws) Width across flats 13 mm (for M8 screws), 17 mm (for M10 screws)

*1 Either the wrench (adjustable wrench) or socket wrench is mandatory. (mounting/removing the cover, etc.) Before beginning work, turn Off the safety switch of the radar antenna. Before conducting replacement work, turn Off the circuit breaker for the power supply of the display unit. Exercise care not to lose bolts, screws and other parts removed from the radar antenna, as they will be used again in later steps. Step 1 Turn Off the safety switch and remove the cover. Before beginning work, turn Off the safety switch located on the bottom of the stern side of the scanner unit. Loosen the hexagonal bolts (four bolts) and remove the pedestal cover. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-156 Bow direction Bow direction Turn off the safety switch. Loosen the four hexagonal bolts. Example: Removal of starboard side cover. 4-157 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure Step 2 Remove the motor. Remove the cover on the left (port) side. Remove the cables connected to the motor driver circuit board. Remove the hexagonal bolts (four M8 bolts) and remove the motor. Remove the four bolts. Remove the two cables. Motor Motor driver circuit board Step 3 Replace the motor. Remove the hexagonal bolts (four M8 bolts) and remove the installation plate from the motor. Attach the installation plate to the replacement motor. Do not forget to tighten the hexagonal bolts to an appropriate torque (210 kgf-cm) so they are free of looseness. Remove the four bolts. Motor Installation plate Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-158 Install the motor into the scanner unit. Press the motor against the protrusions of the arm fixed Arm protrusions Tighten the four bolts. to the motor on which the arm extends through the wall of the casing, adjust it to minimize backlash, and fix it in place. Do not forget to tighten the hexagonal bolts, to an appropriate torque

(140 kgf-cm) so they are free of looseness. Step 4 Apply grease to the new motor. Press After having installed the motor, grease the gear wheel. After having replaced the motor, Apply grease. reassemble the unit by following the disassembly procedure in the reverse order. Do not forget to tighten the bolts or screws, and make sure that the cables are connected. 4-159 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure Step 5 Operation check After completing the replacement work, turn On the safety switch and check operation by following the procedure below.

(1) Turn On the Display unit. After the countdown is completed, start transmission and check that the radar image appears without error. Check that the motor does not make any abnormal sound when it starts to rotate, while it is rotating, or when it stops. This completes motor replacement. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-160 4.1.5.3 Motor drive Circuit Board (CBD-1779) Replacement/NKE-2254-HS

[Required Tools]

The tools shown in the following table are required for replacement work. Table Required Tools No Name Size Appearance 1 Phillips screwdriver Size #2 2 Open-end wrench*1 Width across flats 3 Socket wrench*1 13 mm (for M8 screws), 17 mm (for M10 screws) Width across flats 13 mm (for M8 screws), 17 mm (for M10 screws)

*1 Either the wrench (adjustable wrench) or socket wrench is mandatory. (mounting/removing the cover, etc.) Before beginning work, turn Off the safety switch of the radar antenna. Before conducting replacement work, turn Off the circuit breaker for the power supply of the display unit. Exercise care not to lose bolts, screws and other parts removed from the radar antenna, as they will be used again in later steps. Step 1 Turn Off the safety switch and remove the cover. Before beginning work, turn Off the safety switch located on the bottom of the stern side of the scanner unit. Loosen the hexagonal bolts (four bolts) and remove the pedestal cover. 4-161 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure Bow direction Bow direction Turn off the safety switch. Loosen the four hexagonal bolts. Example: Removal of starboard si de cover. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-162 Step 2 Remove the plate of the Motor driver circuit. Remove the cover on the left (port) side. Remove the screws (three M4 screws) and cables connected to the motor driver circuit board. Remove the metal plate to which motor driver circuit board and relay filter circuit board are attached. Remove the three screws. Step 3 Replace the Motor driver circuit. Remove the cables connected to the motor driver circuit board. Remove the screws (four M4 screws) and then replace it. After having replaced the driver circuit board, reassemble the unit by following the disassembly procedure in the reverse order. Do not forget to tighten the bolts or screws, and make sure that the cables are connected. Remove the eight screws. 4-163 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure Step 4 Operation check After completing the replacement work, turn On the safety switch and check operation by following the procedure below.

(1) Turn On the Display unit. After the countdown is completed, start transmission and check that the radar image appears without error. Check that the motor does not make any abnormal sound when it starts to rotate, while it is rotating, or when it stops. This completes Motor driver circuit replacement. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-164 4.1.5.4 Modulator Circuit (CPA-264) Replacement/NKE-2254-HS See the section for NKE-1125. 4.1.5.5 Modulator (NMA-550) Replacement/NKE-2254-HS See the section for NKE-1125. 4.1.5.6 Power Supply Circuit Board (CBD-1682A) Replacement/NKE-2254-HS See the section for NKE-1125. 4.1.5.7 T/R Control Circuit (CMC-1205R) Replacement/NKE-2254-HS See the section for NKE-1125. For NKE-2254-HS, set the jumper pins and Dip switches as follows. NKE-2254-HS (25 kW, X-band, 2 units, high-speed DC motor) Jumper pin settings DIP switch settings ( indicates a switch.) Jumper pin SW1 ON 3 2 1 SW2 ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 J92,J93,J95,J96: 1-2 short circuit 4.1.5.8 Receiver (NRG-162A) Replacement/NKE-2254-HS See the section for NKE-1125. 4.1.5.9 Encoder (CHT-71A) Replacement/NKE-2254-HS See the section for NKE-1125. 4.1.5.10 Magnetron Fan Replacement/NKE-2254-HS See the section for NKE-1125. 4.1.5.11 Modulator Fan Replacement/NKE-2254-HS See the section for NKE-1125. 4-165 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4.1.5.12 Brake Circuit (CFA-257) Replacement/NKE-2254-HS

[Required Tools]

The tools shown in the following table are required for replacement work. Table Required Tools No Name Size Appearance 1 Phillips screwdriver Size #2 2 Open-end wrench*1 Width across flats 3 Socket wrench*1 13 mm (for M8 screws), 17 mm (for M10 screws) Width across flats 13 mm (for M8 screws), 17 mm (for M10 screws)

*1 Either the wrench (adjustable wrench) or socket wrench is mandatory. (mounting/removing the cover, etc.) Before beginning work, turn Off the safety switch of the radar antenna. Before conducting replacement work, turn Off the circuit breaker for the power supply of the display unit. Exercise care not to lose bolts, screws and other parts removed from the radar antenna, as they will be used again in later steps. Step 1 Turn Off the safety switch and remove the cover. Before beginning work, turn Off the safety switch located on the bottom of the stern side of the scanner unit. Loosen the hexagonal bolts (four bolts) and remove the pedestal cover. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-166 Bow direction Bow direction Turn off the safety switch. Loosen the four hexagonal bolts. Example: Removal of starboard side cover. 4-167 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure Step 2 Remove the plate from the Motor driver circuit. Remove the cover on the left (port) side, Remove the screws (three M4 screws) and cables connected to the motor driver circuit board. Remove the metal plate to which motor driver circuit board and relay filter circuit board are attached.. Remove the three screws. Step 3 Replace the brake circuit. Remove the cable that is connected to J1503 of the Motor driver circuit (CBD-1779). Remove CFA-257 the two screws (M3) that are holding the resistor and replace the brake circuit (CFA-257: Resistor with cable). After replacing the brake, reassemble the unit following the deassembly procedure in the reverse order. Do not forget to tighten the bolts or screws, and make sure that the cables are connected. Remove the two screws. J1503 CBD-1779 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-168 Step 4 Operation check After completing the replacement work, turn On the safety switch and check operation by following the procedure below.

(1) Turn On the Display unit. After the countdown is completed, start transmission and check that the radar image appears without error. This completes brake circuit replacement. 4.1.5.13 Performance Monitor (NJU-85) Replacement/NKE-2254-HS See the section for NKE-1125. 4-169 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4.1.6 NKE-2103, NKE-2103-HS Scanner Unit 4.1.6.1 Magnetron Replacement/NKE-2103 When replacing magnetrons, make sure to shut off the main power and let the equipment stand for more than 5 minutes to discharge the high-voltage circuit. Failure may result in electric shock. Make sure to take off your wristwatch when your hand must get close to the magnetron. Failure may result in damage to the watch since the magnetron is a strong magnet. Cautions on handling the magnetrons that have been stored for a long period of time Since the magnetrons that have been stored for a long period of time may become unstable at the start of the use due to the occurrence of spark, etc., apply aging by using the following procedure. 1 Extend the preheat period. (Standby: 20 to 30 minutes) 2 Start from the short pulse range and shift to the long pulse range sequentially. If the operation becomes unstable during this period, return to Standby immediately, maintain the status for 5 to 10 minutes and start operation again. Repeat this procedure. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-170

[Required Tools]

The tools shown in the following table are required for replacement work. Table Required Tools No Name Size Appearance 1 Non-magnetic Phillips screwdriver Size #2, Size #3 2 Open-end wrench*1 Width across flats 3 Socket wrench*1 13 mm (for M8 screws) Width across flats 13 mm (for M8 screws)

*1 Either the wrench (adjustable wrench) or socket wrench is mandatory. (mounting/removing the cover, etc.) Before beginning work, turn Off the safety switch of the radar antenna. Before conducting replacement work, turn Off the circuit breaker for the power supply of the display unit. Exercise care not to lose bolts, screws and other parts removed from the radar antenna, as they will be used again in later steps. Step 1 Turn Off the safety switch and open the cover. Before beginning work, turn Off the safety switch on the bottom of the scanner unit. Loosen the hexagonal bolts (four bolts) and open the upper cover until the stopper of the stay operates. When closing the upper cover, release the stay stopper and then tighten the cover. Bow direction Turn off the safety switch. 4-171 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure Stay Loosen the four hexagonal bolts. Remove the transmitter-receiver unit cover Step 2 Open the upper cover, loosen the screws (four M4 screws), remove the transmitter-receiver unit cover, and disconnect the cables connected to the transmitter-receiver unit (ten cables). Slide the cover of the transmitter-receiver unit to remove it. Slide the cover. Loosen the four screws. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-172 Step 3 Remove the transmitter-receiver unit Loosen the bolts (five M5 bolts) and remove the transmitter-receiver unit. Slide it upward to remove. Slide the unit. Tighten the five bolts. Step 4 Replace the magnetron cover. Remove the screws (six M4 screws) holding the magnetron in place and then replace it. Cut the leads (yellow and green) for the replacement magnetron to an appropriate length, then tighten the screws and fix the cables in place. After having replaced the magnetron, reassemble the unit by following the disassembly procedure in the reverse order. Do not forget to tighten the bolts or screws, and make sure that the cables are connected. Use a non-magnetic screwdriver because the contact of the metal tool with the magnetron causes deterioration of its performance. Make sure that the magnetron leads (yellow and green) do not contact and are pulled away from other parts or the casing. Contact may cause them to discharge. 4-173 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure Nut plate Remove the six screws. Magnetron Green cable Yellow cable Step 5 Operation check After completing the replacement work, close the cover, turn On the safety switch and check operation by following the procedure below.

(1) Turn On the radar and allow sufficient preheating time (20 to 30 minutes in the STBY mode).

(2) Start transmission on a short pulse range and change the range to the long pulse range. Open the service engineer menu and provisionally adjust the tuning. Check the magnetron current on the test menu during the time and if operation becomes unstable, bring the radar unit back to STBY mode and restart transmission after allowing for an interval of 5 to 10 minutes.

(3) After transmitting on a long range for about fifteen minutes, return to the service engineer menu and adjust the tuning. Perform the adjustment in the service engineer menu until the tuning display bar on the display unit reaches the 8th calibration mark. With the service engineer menu open, also make sure the magnetron current is shown between the 4th and 7th calibration markings.

(4) Finally, initialize the transmission time in the service engineer menu. This completes magnetron replacement. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-174 4.1.6.2 Motor Replacement/NKE-2103

[Required Tools]

The tools shown in the following table are required for replacement work. Table Required Tools No Name Size Appearance 1 Phillips screwdriver Size #2, Size #3 2 Open-end wrench*1 Width across flats 3 Socket wrench*1 10 mm (for M6 screws), 13 mm (for M8 screws) Width across flats 10 mm (for M6 screws), 13 mm (for M8 screws)

*1 Either the wrench (adjustable wrench) or socket wrench is mandatory. (mounting/removing the cover, etc.) Before beginning work, turn Off the safety switch of the radar antenna. Before conducting replacement work, turn Off the circuit breaker for the power supply of the display unit. Exercise care not to lose bolts, screws and other parts removed from the radar antenna, as they will be used again in later steps. Step 1 Turn Off the safety switch and open the cover. Before beginning work, turn Off the safety switch on the bottom of the scanner unit. Loosen the hexagonal bolts (four bolts) and open the upper cover until the stopper of the stay operates. When closing the upper cover, release the stay stopper and then tighten the cover. 4-175 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure Bow direction Turn off the safety switch. Stay Loosen the four hexagonal bolts. Step 2 Remove the transmitter-receiver unit cover Open the upper cover, loosen the screws (four M4 screws), remove the transmitter-receiver unit cover, and disconnect the cables connected to the transmitter-receiver unit (ten cables). Slide the cover of the transmitter-receiver unit to remove it. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-176 Slide the cover. Loosen the four screws. Step 3 Remove the transmitter-receiver unit Loosen the bolts (five M5 bolts) and remove the transmitter-receiver unit. Slide it upward to remove. Slide the unit. Tighten the five bolts. 4-177 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure Step 4 Replace the motor. Remove the hexagonal bolts (four M6 bolts) and remove the motor. Grease the gear wheel of the replacement motor and place it in the casing. Do not forget to tighten the hexagonal bolts to an appropriate torque (72 kgf-cm) so they are free of looseness. After having replaced the motor, reassemble the unit by following the disassembly procedure in the reverse order. Do not forget to tighten the bolts or screws, and do not forget to reconnect the cables. Clamp the cables so they do not interfere with the rotation of the motor's rotors. Step 5 Operation check After completing the replacement work, close the cover, turn On the safety switch and check operation by following the procedure below.

(1) Turn On the Display unit. After the countdown is completed, start transmission and check that the radar image appears without error. Check that the motor does not make any abnormal sound when it starts to rotate, while it is rotating, or when it stops. This completes motor replacement. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-178 4.1.6.3 Motor driver circuit Replacement/NKE-2103

[Required Tools]

The tools shown in the following table are required for replacement work. Table Required Tools No Name Size Appearance 1 Phillips screwdriver Size #2, Size #3 2 Open-end wrench*1 Width across flats 3 Socket wrench*1 13 mm (for M8 screws) Width across flats 13 mm (for M8 screws)

*1 Either the wrench (adjustable wrench) or socket wrench is mandatory. (mounting/removing the cover, etc.) Before beginning work, turn Off the safety switch of the radar antenna. Before conducting replacement work, turn Off the circuit breaker for the power supply of the display unit. Exercise care not to lose bolts, screws and other parts removed from the radar antenna, as they will be used again in later steps. Step 1 Turn Off the safety switch and open the cover. Before beginning work, turn Off the safety switch on the bottom of the scanner unit. Loosen the hexagonal bolts (four bolts) and open the upper cover until the stopper of the stay operates. When closing the upper cover, release the stay stopper and then tighten the cover. 4-179 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure Step 2 Bow direction Turn off the safety switch. Stay Loosen the four hexagonal bolts. Remove the transmitter-receiver unit cover Open the upper cover, loosen the screws (four M4 screws), remove the transmitter-receiver unit cover, and disconnect the cables connected to the transmitter-receiver unit (ten cables). Slide the cover of the transmitter-receiver unit to remove it. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-180 Slide the cover. Loosen the four screws. Step 3 Remove the transmitter-receiver unit Loosen the bolts (five M5 bolts) and remove the transmitter-receiver unit. Slide it upward to remove. Slide the unit. Tighten the five bolts. 4-181 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure Step 4 Replace the Motor driver circuit. Remove the cables and screws (eight M4 screws) connected to the Motor driver circuit, and then replace it. After having replaced the Motor driver circuit, reassemble the unit by following the disassembly procedure in the reverse order. Do not forget to tighten the bolts or screws, and make sure that the cables are connected. Step 5 Remove the eight screws (M4). Operation check After completing the replacement work, close the cover, turn On the safety switch and check operation by following the procedure below.

(1) Turn On the Display unit. After the countdown is completed, start transmission and check that the radar image appears without error. This completes Motor driver circuit replacement. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-182 4.1.6.4 Modulator Circuit (CME-363) Replacement/NKE-2103

[Required Tools]

The tools shown in the following table are required for replacement work. Table Required Tools No Name Size Appearance 1 Phillips screwdriver Size #2, Size #3 2 Open-end wrench*1 Width across flats 3 Socket wrench*1 13 mm (for M8 screws) Width across flats 13 mm (for M8 screws)

*1 Either the wrench (adjustable wrench) or socket wrench is mandatory. (mounting/removing the cover, etc.) Before beginning work, turn Off the safety switch of the radar antenna. Before conducting replacement work, turn Off the circuit breaker for the power supply of the display unit. Exercise care not to lose bolts, screws and other parts removed from the radar antenna, as they will be used again in later steps. Step 1 Turn Off the safety switch and open the cover. Before beginning work, turn Off the safety switch on the bottom of the scanner unit. Loosen the hexagonal bolts (four bolts) and open the upper cover until the stopper of the stay operates. When closing the upper cover, release the stay stopper and then tighten the cover. 4-183 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure Bow direction Turn off the safety switch. Stay Loosen the four hexagonal bolts. Remove the transmitter-receiver unit cover Step 2 Open the upper cover, loosen the screws (four M4 screws), remove the transmitter-receiver unit cover, and disconnect the cables connected to the transmitter-receiver unit (ten cables). Slide the cover of the transmitter-receiver unit to remove it. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-184 Slide the cover. Loosen the four screws. Step 3 Remove the transmitter-receiver unit Loosen the bolts (five M5 bolts) and remove the transmitter-receiver unit. Slide it upward to remove. Slide the unit. Tighten the five bolts. 4-185 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure Step 4 Replace the modulator circuit board. Remove the screws (nine M4 screws) holding the modulator circuit board in place and disconnect the cables connected to it, then replace. If you are reusing the heat radiation plate on the modulator, be sure to install the insulation sheet between TR17, TR18, and the heat radiation plate so that it is straight. After having replaced the modulator circuit board, reassemble the unit by following the disassembly procedure in the reverse order. Do not forget to tighten the bolts or screws, and do not forget to reconnect the cables. Remove the nine screws (M4). Step 5 Operation check After having completed the replacement, close the cover, turn On the safety switch and check operation by following the procedure below.

(1) Turn On the Display unit. After the countdown is completed, start transmission and check that the radar image appears without error. Transmit the radar wave in long pulse range mode and open the service engineer menu to check that the magnetron current stands between the 5th and 7th calibration markings. This completes modulator circuit board replacement. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-186 4.1.6.5 Power Supply Circuit Board (CBD-1783) Replacement/NKE-2103

[Required Tools]

The tools shown in the following table are required for replacement work. Table Required Tools No Name Size Appearance 1 Phillips screwdriver Size #2, Size #3 2 Open-end wrench*1 Width across flats 3 Socket wrench*1 13 mm (for M8 screws) Width across flats 13 mm (for M8 screws)

*1 Either the wrench (adjustable wrench) or socket wrench is mandatory. (mounting/removing the cover, etc.) Before beginning work, turn Off the safety switch of the radar antenna. Before conducting replacement work, turn Off the circuit breaker for the power supply of the display unit. Exercise care not to lose bolts, screws and other parts removed from the radar antenna, as they will be used again in later steps. Step 1 Turn Off the safety switch and open the cover. Before beginning work, turn Off the safety switch on the bottom of the scanner unit. Loosen the hexagonal bolts (four bolts) and open the upper cover until the stopper of the stay operates. When closing the upper cover, release the stay stopper and then tighten the cover. 4-187 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure Bow direction Turn off the safety switch. Stay Loosen the four hexagonal bolts. Remove the transmitter-receiver unit cover Step 2 Open the upper cover, loosen the screws (four M4 screws), remove the transmitter-receiver unit cover, and disconnect the cables connected to the transmitter-receiver unit (ten cables). Slide the cover of the transmitter-receiver unit to remove it. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-188 Slide the cover. Loosen the four screws. Step 3 Remove the transmitter-receiver unit Loosen the bolts (five M5 bolts) and remove the transmitter-receiver unit. Slide it upward to remove. Slide the unit. Tighten the five bolts. 4-189 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure Step 4 Remove the power supply. Remove the cables and screws (six M4 screws). Remove the power supply unit from the transmitter-receiver unit. Remove the six screws. Step 5 Replace the power supply circuit board Remove the screws (six M4 screws and two M3 screws). And then remove the power supply circuit board from the installation plate. If the thermal conductive pad on the casing on the back of the power supply circuit board (the soldered side) is damaged, affix a new one to the replacement power supply circuit board. After having replaced the power supply circuit board, reassemble the unit by following the disassembly procedure in the reverse order. Do not forget to tighten the bolts or screws, and do not forget to reconnect the cables. Remove the two screws (M3). Remove the six screws (M4). Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-190 Step 6 Operation check After having completed the replacement, close the cover, turn On the safety switch and check operation by following the procedure below.

(1) Turn On the Display unit. After the countdown is completed, start transmission and check that the radar image is correctly displayed. This completes power supply circuit board replacement. 4-191 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4.1.6.6 Receiver (NRG-610) Replacement/NKE-2103

[Required Tools]

The tools shown in the following table are required for replacement work. Table Required Tools No Name Size Appearance 1 Non-magnetic Phillips screwdriver 2 Open-end wrench*1 3 Socket wrench*1 Size #2, Size #3 Width across flats 7 mm (for M4 screws) 13 mm (for M8 screws) Width across flats 7 mm (for M4 screws) 13 mm (for M8 screws)

*1 Either the wrench (adjustable wrench) or socket wrench is mandatory. (mounting/removing the cover, etc.) Before beginning work, turn Off the safety switch of the radar antenna. Before conducting replacement work, turn Off the circuit breaker for the power supply of the display unit. Exercise care not to lose bolts, screws and other parts removed from the radar antenna, as they will be used again in later steps. Step 1 Turn Off the safety switch and open the cover. Before beginning work, turn Off the safety switch on the bottom of the scanner unit. Loosen the hexagonal bolts (four bolts) and open the upper cover until the stopper of the stay operates. When closing the upper cover, release the stay stopper and then tighten the cover. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-192 Bow direction Turn off the safety switch. Stay Loosen the four hexagonal bolts. 4-193 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure Step 2 Remove the transmitter-receiver unit cover Open the upper cover, loosen the screws (four M4 screws), remove the transmitter-receiver unit cover, and disconnect the cables connected to the transmitter-receiver unit (ten cables). Slide the cover of the transmitter-receiver unit to remove it. Slide the cover. Loosen the four screws. Step 3 Remove the transmitter-receiver unit Loosen the bolts (five M5 bolts) and remove the transmitter-receiver unit. Slide it upward to remove. Slide the unit. Tighten the five bolts. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-194 Step 4 Remove the magnetron. Remove the screws (six M4 screws) holding the magnetron in place and remove the magnetron. Use a non-magnetic screwdriver because the contact of the metal tool with the magnetron causes deterioration of its performance. Make sure that the magnetron leads (yellow and green) do not contact and are pulled away from other parts or the casing. Contact may cause them to discharge. Nut plate Remove the six screws. Magnetron Green cable Yellow cable 4-195 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure Step 5 Remove the microwave transmission circuit. Remove the M4 screw near the magnetron. Remove the screw

(M4). Remove the screws (three M4 screws) on the motor control power supply side, and remove the microwave transmission circuit from the chassis. Step 6 Replace the receiver. Remove the screws (three M4 screws) on the motor control power supply side, and remove the microwave transmission circuit from the chassis. Motor control power supply circuit Remove the three screws

(M4). Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-196 Remove the two screws (M4) holding the microwave transmission circuit to remove it from the installation plate. Remove the two screws

(M4). Remove the screws (four M4 screws) holding the receiver in place and replace it. After having replaced the receiver, reassemble the unit by following the disassembly procedure in the reverse order. Do not forget to tighten the bolts or screws, and make sure that the cables are connected. After having replaced the receiver, reassemble the transmitter-receiver unit taking care to ensure good fitting. If the fitting is poor, loosen the screws and readjust the unit. Remove the four screws

(M4). 4-197 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure Step 4 Operation check After having completed the replacement, close the cover, turn On the safety switch and check operation by following the procedure below.

(1) Turn On the Display unit. After the countdown is completed, start transmission and check that the radar image appears without error. Transmit the radar wave in the long range mode and open the service engineer menu to perform tuning adjustment. Perform the adjustment in the service engineer menu until the tuning display bar on the display unit reaches the 8th calibration mark. This completes receiving unit replacement. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-198 4.1.6.7 Encoder Replacement/NKE-2103

[Required Tools]

The tools shown in the following table are required for replacement work. Table Required Tools No Name Size Appearance 1 Phillips screwdriver Size #2, Size #3 2 Open-end wrench*1 Width across flats 3 Socket wrench*1 7 mm (for M4 screws), 13 mm (for M8 screws) Width across flats 7 mm (for M4 screws), 13 mm (for M8 screws)

*1 Either the wrench (adjustable wrench) or socket wrench is mandatory. (mounting/removing the cover, etc.) Before beginning work, turn Off the safety switch of the radar antenna. Before conducting replacement work, turn Off the circuit breaker for the power supply of the display unit. Exercise care not to lose bolts, screws and other parts removed from the radar antenna, as they will be used again in later steps. Step 1 Turn Off the safety switch and open the cover. Before beginning work, turn Off the safety switch on the bottom of the scanner unit. Loosen the hexagonal bolts (four bolts) and open the upper cover until the stopper of the stay operates. When closing the upper cover, release the stay stopper and then tighten the cover. 4-199 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure Bow direction Turn off the safety switch. Stay Loosen the four hexagonal bolts. Remove the transmitter-receiver unit cover Step 2 Open the upper cover, loosen the screws (four M4 screws), remove the transmitter-receiver unit cover, and disconnect the cables connected to the transmitter-receiver unit (ten cables). Slide the cover of the transmitter-receiver unit to remove it. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-200 Slide the cover. Loosen the four screws. Step 3 Remove the transmitter-receiver unit Loosen the bolts (five M5 bolts) and remove the transmitter-receiver unit. Slide it upward to remove. Slide the unit. Tighten the five bolts. 4-201 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure Step 4 Remove the encoder. Remove the two screws (M4) holding the encoder to remove it from the housing. Loosen the screw (M4). Encoder Remove the screw (M4). Step 5 Replace the encoder. Remove the metal fixture and the gear wheel attached to the encoder. Put them onto the new encoder and put the encoder back into the unit. After replacing the encoder, follow the disassembly procedure in the reverse order. Do not forget to tighten the bolts or screws, and make sure that the cables are connected. Remove the nut. Metal fitting Encoder Remove the three screws. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-202 Step 6 Operation check After completing the replacement work, turn On the safety switch and check operation by following the procedure below.

(1) Turn On the Display unit. After the countdown is completed, start transmission and check that the radar image appears without error. Open the service engineer menu to perform azimuth adjustment. This completes encoder replacement. 4-203 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure

 

 

4.1.6.8 Brake Circuit (CFA-252) Replacement/NKE-2103

[Required Tools]

The tools shown in the following table are required for replacement work. Table Required Tools No Name Size Appearance 1 Phillips screwdriver Size #2, Size #3 2 Open-end wrench*1 Width across flats 3 Socket wrench*1 13 mm (for M8 screws) Width across flats 13 mm (for M8 screws)

*1 Either the wrench (adjustable wrench) or socket wrench is mandatory. (mounting/removing the cover, etc.) Before beginning work, turn Off the safety switch of the radar antenna. Before conducting replacement work, turn Off the circuit breaker for the power supply of the display unit. Exercise care not to lose bolts, screws and other parts removed from the radar antenna, as they will be used again in later steps. Step 1 Turn Off the safety switch and open the cover. Before beginning work, turn Off the safety switch on the bottom of the scanner unit. Loosen the hexagonal bolts (four bolts) and open the upper cover until the stopper of the stay operates. When closing the upper cover, release the stay stopper and then tighten the cover. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-204 Step 2 Bow direction Turn off the safety switch. Stay Loosen the four hexagonal bolts. Remove the transmitter-receiver unit cover Open the upper cover, loosen the screws (four M4 screws), remove the transmitter-receiver unit cover, and disconnect the cables connected to the transmitter-receiver unit (ten cables). Slide the cover of the transmitter-receiver unit to remove it. 4-205 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure Slide the cover. Loosen the four screws. Step 3 Remove the transmitter-receiver unit Loosen the bolts (five M5 bolts) and remove the transmitter-receiver unit. Slide it upward to remove. Slide the unit. Tighten the five bolts. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-206 Step 4 Replace the brake circuit. Remove the two screws. Disconnect the cable that is connected to J1503 of the Motor driver circuit (CBD-1779). Remove the two screws (M3) that are holding the resistor and then replace the brake circuit

(CFA-252: Resistor with cable). After replacing the brake circuit, reassemble the unit following the disassembly procedure in the reverse order. Do not forget to tighten the bolts or screws, and make sure that the cables are connected. Step 5 Operation check CBD-1779 CFA-252 J1503 After completing the replacement work, turn On the safety switch and check operation by following the procedure below.

(1) Turn On the Display unit. After the countdown is completed, start transmission and check that the radar image appears without error. This completes brake circuit replacement. 4-207 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4.1.6.9 Performance Monitor (NJU-85) Replacement/NKE-2103 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-208 4.1.7 NKE-1632 Scanner Unit 4.1.7.1 TRX Module (CMN-797) Replacement/NKE-1632

[Required Tools]

The tools shown in the following table are required for replacement work. Table Required Tools No Name Size Appearance 1 Phillips screwdriver Size #2 2 Open-end wrench*1 Width across flats 3 Socket wrench*1 13 mm (for M8 screws) Width across flats 13 mm (for M8 screws)

*1 Either the wrench (adjustable wrench) or socket wrench is mandatory. (mounting/removing the cover, etc.) Before beginning work, turn Off the safety switch of the radar antenna. Before conducting replacement work, turn Off the circuit breaker for the power supply of the display unit. Exercise care not to lose bolts, screws and other parts removed from the radar antenna, as they will be used again in later steps. Step 1 Remove the cover. Remove the eight fall prevention bolts (M8) and remove the cover. 4-209 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure M8 Remove the eight bolts

(M8) 8 Step 2 Open the power supply/interface circuit unit (on the starboard side).

[Starboard side] By loosening the bolts (M4) and two screws (M4), the power supply/interface circuit can be opened towards the front. I/F 4 4 2 4 2 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-210 Hold the unit in place by tightening the bolts (M4) and opening the power supply/interface circuit. 4 I/F PM cable PM Step 3 Remove the PM cable.

[Starboard side] Remove the PM cable. Starboard side 4-211 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure Step 4 Close the power supply/interface circuit unit. Loosen the M4 bolts and close the power supply/interface circuit unit. Fix only two screws (M4) on the stern side. I/F 4 4 2 Step 5 Remove the transmitter-receiver unit.

[Starboard side] Remove the four screws (M5). Remove the bolt (M4). Remove the three screws (M4). 4 4 3 5 4 Remove the cable that is connected to the transmitter-receiver unit and remove the unit towards the front. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-212 Step 6 Replace the TRX module. The TRX module is held at the back of the receiver unit. Remove the four screws (M4) and replace the TRX module. After replacing the TRX module, close the cover following the disassembly procedure in the reverse order. Set the safety switch to On and check the operation. This completes TRX module replacement. 4 4 TRX 4-213 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure Step 7 Operation check After completing the replacement work, turn On the safety switch and check operation by following the procedure below.

(1) Turn On the Display unit. Start transmission and check that the radar image appears without error. This completes TRX module replacement. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-214 4.1.7.2 Encoder (CHT-85) Replacement/NKE-1632

[Required Tools]

The tools shown in the following table are required for replacement work. Table Required Tools No Name Size Appearance 1 Phillips screwdriver Size #2 2 Open-end wrench*1 Width across flats 3 Socket wrench*1 13 mm (for M8 screws) Width across flats 13 mm (for M8 screws)

*1 Either the wrench (adjustable wrench) or socket wrench is mandatory. (mounting/removing the cover, etc.) Before beginning work, turn Off the safety switch of the radar antenna. Before conducting replacement work, turn Off the circuit breaker for the power supply of the display unit. Exercise care not to lose bolts, screws and other parts removed from the radar antenna, as they will be used again in later steps. Step 1 Remove the cover. Remove the eight M8 fall prevention bolts (M8) and remove the cover. M8 Remove the eight bolts

(M8) 8 4-215 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure Step 2

(Starboard side) Open the power supply/interface circuit unit.

[Starboard side] By loosening the bolt (M4) and the two screws (M4) and then removing the two screws (M4), the power supply/interface circuit unit can be opened towards the front. I/F 4 4 2 4 2 Tighten the bolt (M4) and hold the unit while the power supply/interface circuit is opened. 4 I/F Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-216 Step 3 Remove the PM cable.

[Starboard side] Remove the PM cable. PM cable PM Starboard side Step 4 Close the power supply/interface circuit unit. Loosen the bolt (M4) and close the power supply/interface circuit unit. Fasten only the two screws (M4) on the stern side. I/F 4 4 2 4-217 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure Step 5 Remove the transmitter-receiver unit.

[Starboard side] Remove the four screws (M5). Remove the bolt (M4) and remove the three screws (M4). 4 4 3 5 4 Remove the cable that is connected to the transmitter-receiver unit and remove the unit towards the front. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-218 Step 6 Replace the encoder. Remove the two bolts (M4) that hold the encoder and replace it. Hold the gear of the encoder by lightly pressing it to the gear of the main shaft. After replacing the encoder, close the cover following the disassembly procedure in the reverse order. Finally, set the safety switch to On and check the operation. Step 7 Operation check 4 2 After completing the replacement work, turn On the safety switch and check operation by following the procedure below.

(1) Turn On the Display unit. After the countdown is completed, start transmission and check that the radar image appears without error. Open the service engineer menu to perform azimuth adjustment. This completes encoder replacement. 4-219 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4.1.7.3 Power Supply/Interface Circuit (CMP-493) Replacement/NKE-1632

[Required Tools]

The tools shown in the following table are required for replacement work. Table Required Tools No Name Size Appearance 1 Phillips screwdriver Size #2 2 Open-end wrench*1 Width across flats 3 Socket wrench*1 13 mm (for M8 screws) Width across flats 13 mm (for M8 screws)

*1 Either the wrench (adjustable wrench) or socket wrench is mandatory. (mounting/removing the cover, etc.) Before beginning work, turn Off the safety switch of the radar antenna. Before conducting replacement work, turn Off the circuit breaker for the power supply of the display unit. Exercise care not to lose bolts, screws and other parts removed from the radar antenna, as they will be used again in later steps. Step 1 Remove the cover. Remove the eight fall prevention bolts (M8) and remove the cover. M8 Remove the eight bolts

(M8) 8 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-220 Step 2 Replace the power supply/interface circuit. The power supply/interface circuit is installed on the starboard side. Remove all the connectors that are connected to the power supply/interface circuit. Remove the five screws that are holding the power supply/interface circuit and replace it. Connect the power supply/interface circuit following the disassembly procedure in the reverse order. Finally, set the safety switch to On and check the operation. 5 IF Step 3 Operation check After completing the replacement work, turn On the safety switch and check operation by following the procedure below.

(1) Turn On the Display unit. Start transmission and check that the radar image appears without error. This completes the power supply/interface circuit. replacement. 4-221 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4.1.7.4 Radar Processor Unit (NDC-4920) Replacement/NKE-1632

[Required Tools]

The tools shown in the following table are required for replacement work. No Name Size Appearance Table Required Tools 1 Phillips screwdriver Size #2 2 Open-end wrench*1 Width across flats 3 Socket wrench*1 13 mm (for M8 screws) Width across flats 13 mm (for M8 screws)

*1 Either the wrench (adjustable wrench) or socket wrench is mandatory. (mounting/removing the cover, etc.) Before beginning work, turn Off the safety switch of the radar antenna. Before conducting replacement work, turn Off the circuit breaker for the power supply of the display unit. Exercise care not to lose bolts, screws and other parts removed from the radar antenna, as they will be used again in later steps. Step 1 Remove the cover. Remove the eight fall prevention bolts (M8) and remove the cover. M8 Remove the eight bolts

(M8) 8 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-222 Step 2 Replace the radar processor unit. The radar processor unit is installed on the starboard side. Remove all the connectors that are connected to the radar processor unit. Remove the four screws that are holding the radar processor unit and replace it. Connect the radar processor unit following the disassembly procedure in the reverse order and close the cover. Finally, set the safety switch to On and check the operation. This completes the radar processor unit replacement. 4 Step 3 Operation check After completing the replacement work, turn on the safety switch and check operation by following the procedure below.

(1) Turn On the Display unit. Start transmission and check that the radar image appears without error. This completes radar processor unit replacement. 4-223 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4.1.7.5 Motor Replacement/NKE-1632

[Required Tools]

The tools shown in the following table are required for replacement work. Table Required Tools No Name Size Appearance 1 Phillips screwdriver Size #2 2 Open-end wrench*1 Width across flats 3 Socket wrench*1 8 mm (for M5 screws). 13 mm (for M8 screws). 17 mm (for M10 screws) Width across flats 8 mm (for M5 screws). 13 mm (for M8 screws). 17 mm (for M10 screws)

*1 Either the wrench (adjustable wrench) or socket wrench is mandatory. (mounting/removing the cover, etc.) Before beginning work, turn Off the safety switch of the radar antenna. Before conducting replacement work, turn Off the circuit breaker for the power supply of the display unit. Exercise care not to lose bolts, screws and other parts removed from the radar antenna, as they will be used again in later steps. Step 1 Remove the cover. Remove the eight fall prevention bolts (M8) and remove the cover. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-224 M8 Remove the eight bolts

(M8) 8 Step 2 Replace the motor.

[Starboard side] Remove the two bolts (M10).

[Port side] Remove the motor cable that is connected to the motor driver unit. Remove the two bolts (M10) and remove the motor towards the front. Apply grease, in advance, on the gear of the motor to be replaced. Tighten the hexagon head bolts with the proper torque (380 kgf.cm) to guarantee tightening them and not leaving loose bolts. After replacing the motor, close the cover following the disassembly procedure in the reverse order. Finally, set the safety switch to On and check the operation. M10 2 4-225 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure M10 2 Step 3 Operation check After completing the replacement work, turn On the safety switch and follow the steps below to check the operation. 1. Turn On the Display unit. Start transmission and check that the radar image appears without error. Check that the motor does not make any abnormal sound when it starts to rotate, while it is rotating, or when it stops. 2. Open the service engineer menu to initialize the motor rotation time. This completes motor replacement. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-226 4.1.7.6 Motor Drive Circuit Board (CBD-1949) Replacement/NKE-1632

[Required Tools]

The tools shown in the following table are required for replacement work. Table Required Tools No Name Size Appearance 1 Phillips screwdriver Size #2 2 Open-end wrench*1 Width across flats 3 Socket wrench*1 13 mm (for M8 screws) Width across flats 13 mm (for M8 screws)

*1 Either the wrench (adjustable wrench) or socket wrench is mandatory. (mounting/removing the cover, etc.) Before beginning work, turn Off the safety switch of the radar antenna. Before conducting replacement work, turn Off the circuit breaker for the power supply of the display unit. Exercise care not to lose bolts, screws and other parts removed from the radar antenna, as they will be used again in later steps. Step 1 Remove the cover. Remove the eight fall prevention bolts (M8) and remove the cover. M8 Remove the eight bolts

(M8) 8 4-227 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure Step 2 Remove the motor driver circuit board. Remove all the connectors that are connected to the motor driver. Remove the four screws that hold the motor driver unit. Remove the four screws Port side Motor driver circuit Step 3 Check the setting of the motor driver circuit. The motor driver applies the 100 V/220 V common circuit. Before commencing replacement, set the power supply of the driver to be replaced according to the power supply specification. Motor drive circuit board CBD-1949 Description JP1 setting 1-2 Short-circuit 2-3 Short-circuit 100 VAC 220 VAC Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-228 Step 4 Operation check After replacing the motor driver circuit board, turn On the safety switch and follow the steps below to check the operation. 1. Turn On the Display unit. Start transmission and check that the radar image appears without error. Check that the motor does not make any abnormal sound when it starts to rotate, while it is rotating, or when it stops. This completes motor drive circuit board replacement. 4-229 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4.1.7.7 Fan Replacement/NKE-1632

[Required Tools]

The tools shown in the following table are required for replacement work. Table: Required Tools No Name Size Appearance 1 Phillips screwdriver Size #2 2 Open-end wrench*1 Width across flats 3 Socket wrench*1 13 mm (for M8 screws) Width across flats 13 mm (for M8 screws)

*1 Either the wrench (adjustable wrench) or socket wrench is mandatory. (mounting/removing the cover, etc.) Before beginning work, turn Off the safety switch of the radar antenna. Before conducting replacement work, turn Off the circuit breaker for the power supply of the display unit. Exercise care not to lose bolts, screws and other parts removed from the radar antenna, as they will be used again in later steps. Step 1 Remove the cover. Remove the eight fall prevention bolts (M8) and remove the cover. M8 Remove the eight bolts

(M8) 8 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-230 Step 2 Remove the fan unit.

[Starboard side] Remove the connector that connects the fan. Remove the two screws that hold the fan unit. 2 Step 3 Replace the fan.

[Starboard side] Remove the connector that connects the fan. Remove the two screws that hold the fan unit. Remove the fan from the fan unit that was removed. Remove the four fan screws and replace the fan. After fan replacement, install the fan by checking the orientation of the fan and the cable position. After replacing the fan, install the fan unit following the disassembly procedure in the reverse order. Finally, set the safety switch to On and check the operation. Fan Cable position Fan orientation Fan mounting bracket 4-231 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure Step 4 Operation check After completing the replacement work, turn On the safety switch and check operation by following the procedure below.

(1) Turn On the Display unit and check that radar images are displayed correctly without issuing a fan alarm. This completes fan replacement. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-232

 

 

4.1.8 NKE-2632, NKE-2632-H Scanner Unit 4.1.8.1 TRX Module (CMN-797) Replacement/NKE-2632, NKE-2632-H

[Required Tools]

The tools shown in the following table are required for replacement work. Table Required Tools No Name Size Appearance 1 Phillips screwdriver Size #2 2 Open-end wrench*1 Width across flats 3 Socket wrench*1 8 mm (for M5 screws), 13 mm (for M8 screws), 17 mm (for M10 screws) Width across flats 8 mm (for M5 screws), 13 mm (for M8 screws), 17 mm (for M10 screws)

*1 Either the wrench (adjustable wrench) or socket wrench is mandatory. (mounting/removing the cover, etc.) Before beginning work, turn Off the safety switch of the radar antenna. Before conducting replacement work, turn Off the circuit breaker for the power supply of the display unit. Exercise care not to lose bolts, screws and other parts removed from the radar antenna, as they will be used again in later steps. 4-233 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure Step 1 Remove the cover. Remove the six fall prevention bolts (M8) and remove the cover. M8 6 Step 2

(Starboard side) Open the power supply/interface circuit unit.

[Starboard side] By loosening the bolt (M4) and the two screws (M4) and removing the two screws (M4), the power supply/interface circuit unit can be opened towards the front. Power supply /

I/F interface circuit 4 Loosen the bolts

(M4) 4 Remove the two screws (M4) 2 Starboard side 4 screws (M4) Loosen the two 2 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-234 Tighten the bolt (M4) and hold the unit while the power supply/interface circuit is opened. 4 Step 3 Remove the PM cable. Remove the PM cable. I/F PM 4-235 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure Step 4 Close the power supply/interface circuit. Loosen the bolt (M4) and close the power supply/interface circuit. Fasten only the two screws

(M4) on the stern side. I/F 4 4 2 Step 5 Remove the transmitter-receiver unit. Remove the four screws (M5). Remove the M4 bolt. Remove the three screws (M4). 4 Remove the bolts (M4) 5 Remove the four screws (M5) 4 4 screws (M4) Tighten the two 2 Starboard side Transmitter-receiver unit Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-236 Remove the cable that is connected to the transmitter-receiver unit and remove the unit towards the front. Step 6 Replace the TRX module. The TRX module is installed at the rear of the transmitter-receiver unit. Remove the four screws

(M4) and replace the TRX module. After replacing the module, close the cover following the disassembly procedure in the reverse order. Finally, set the safety switch to On and check the operation. 4 4 TRX 4-237 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure Step 7 Operation check After completing the replacement work, turn On the safety switch and check operation by following the procedure below.

(1) Turn On the Display unit. After the countdown is completed, start transmission and check that the radar image appears without error. This completes TRX module replacement. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-238 4.1.8.2 Encoder (CHT-85) Replacement/NKE-2632, NKE-2632-H

[Required Tools]

The tools shown in the following table are required for replacement work. No Name Size Appearance Table Required Tools 1 Phillips screwdriver Size #2 2 Open-end wrench*1 Width across flats 3 Socket wrench*1 13 mm (for M8 screws) Width across flats 13 mm (for M8 screws)

*1 Either the wrench (adjustable wrench) or socket wrench is mandatory. (mounting/removing the cover, etc.) Before beginning work, turn Off the safety switch of the radar antenna. Before conducting replacement work, turn Off the circuit breaker for the power supply of the display unit. Exercise care not to lose bolts, screws and other parts removed from the radar antenna, as they will be used again in later steps. Step 1 Remove the cover. Remove the six fall prevention bolts (M8) and remove the cover. M8 6 4-239 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure Step 2 Remove the connector of the encoder. The connector of the encoder is connected to the power supply/interface circuit on the starboard side. Remove the connector of the encoder that is connected to the power supply/interface circuit. I/F Step 3 Remove the motor driver circuit unit. The encoder is installed at the rear of the motor driver circuit on the port side. Remove the four screws (M4) that hold the driver circuit unit and remove it. 4 4 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-240 Step 4 Replace the encoder. Remove the two bolts (M4) that hold the encoder and replace it. Hold the gear of the encoder by lightly pressing it to the gear of the main shaft. After replacing the encoder, close the cover following the disassembly procedure in the reverse order. Finally, set the safety switch to On and check the operation. This completes encoder replacement. M4 2 Step 5 Operation check After completing the replacement work, turn on the safety switch and check operation by following the procedure below.

(1) Turn on the Display unit. Start transmission and check that the radar image appears without error. Open the service engineer menu to perform azimuth adjustment. This completes encoder replacement. 4-241 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4.1.8.3 Power Supply/Interface Circuit (CMP-493) Replacement/NKE-2632, NKE-2632-H

[Required Tools]

The tools shown in the following table are required for replacement work. Table Required Tools No Name Size Appearance 1 Phillips screwdriver Size #2 2 Open-end wrench*1 Width across flats 3 Socket wrench*1 13 mm (for M8 screws) Width across flats 13 mm (for M8 screws)

*1 Either the wrench (adjustable wrench) or socket wrench is mandatory. (mounting/removing the cover, etc.) Before beginning work, turn Off the safety switch of the radar antenna. Before conducting replacement work, turn Off the circuit breaker for the power supply of the display unit. Exercise care not to lose bolts, screws and other parts removed from the radar antenna, as they will be used again in later steps. Step 1 Remove the cover. Remove the eight fall prevention bolts (M8) and remove the cover. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-242 M8 6 Step 2 Replace the power supply/interface circuit.

[Starboard side] The power supply/interface circuit is installed on the starboard side. Remove all the connectors that are connected to the power supply/interface circuit. Remove the five screws that are holding the power supply/interface circuit and replace it. After replacing the power supply/interface circuit, connect the circuit following the disassembly procedure in the reverse order. Finally, set the safety switch to On and check the operation. 5 I/F Step 3 Operation check After completing the replacement work, turn On the safety switch and check operation by following the procedure below.

(1) Turn On the Display unit. After the countdown is completed, start transmission and check that the radar image appears without error. This completes the power supply/interface circuit replacement. 4-243 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4.1.8.4 Radar Processor Unit (NDC-4920) Replacement/NKE-2632, NKE-2632-H

[Required Tools]

The tools shown in the following table are required for replacement work. Table Required Tools No Name Size Appearance 1 Phillips screwdriver Size #2 2 Open-end wrench*1 Width across flats 3 Socket wrench*1 13 mm (for M8 screws) Width across flats 13 mm (for M8 screws)

*1 Either the wrench (adjustable wrench) or socket wrench is mandatory. (mounting/removing the cover, etc.) Before beginning work, turn Off the safety switch of the radar antenna. Before conducting replacement work, turn Off the circuit breaker for the power supply of the display unit. Exercise care not to lose bolts, screws and other parts removed from the radar antenna, as they will be used again in later steps. Step 1 Remove the cover. Remove the eight fall prevention bolts (M8) and remove the cover. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-244 M8 6 Step 2 Replace the radar processor unit. The radar processor unit is installed on the starboard side. Remove all the connectors that are connected to the radar processor unit. Remove the four screws that are holding the radar processor unit and replace it. After completing the replacement, connect the radar processor unit following the disassembly procedure in the reverse order and close the cover. Finally, set the safety switch to On and check the operation. 4 4 Step 3 Operation check After completing the replacement work, turn On the safety switch and check operation by following the procedure below.

(1) Turn On the Display unit. Check that the radar image appears without error. This completes radar processor unit replacement. 4-245 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4.1.8.5 Motor Replacement/NKE-2632, NKE-2632-H

[Required Tools]

The tools shown in the following table are required for replacement work. Table Required Tools No Name Size Appearance 1 Phillips screwdriver Size #2 2 Open-end wrench*1 Width across flats 3 Socket wrench*1 8 mm (for M5 screws). 13 mm (for M8 screws). 17 mm (for M10 screws) Width across flats 8 mm (for M5 screws). 13 mm (for M8 screws). 17 mm (for M10 screws)

*1 Either the wrench (adjustable wrench) or socket wrench is mandatory. (mounting/removing the cover, etc.) Before beginning work, turn Off the safety switch of the radar antenna. Before conducting replacement work, turn Off the circuit breaker for the power supply of the display unit. Exercise care not to lose bolts, screws and other parts removed from the radar antenna, as they will be used again in later steps. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-246 Step 1 Remove the cover. Remove both the left and right covers before replacing the motor. Remove the covers by removing the fall prevention bolts (M8: 6 bolts on one side, 12 bolts on both sides). M8 6 Step 2

(Port side) Remove the motor cable.

[Port side] Remove the motor cable that is connected to the motor driver unit. 4-247 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure Step 2-1 In the case of *NKE-2632-H (port side): Remove the motor cable. In the case of *NKE-2632-H, the HS motor driver unit must be removed.

[Port side] Remove the cable that is connected to the HS motor driver. Remove the four screws

(M5) and remove the motor driver. HS M5 4 Step 3

(Starboard side) Open the power supply/interface circuit unit.

[Starboard side] By loosening the bolt (M4) and the two screws (M4) and removing the two screws (M4), the power supply/interface circuit unit can be opened towards the front. I/F 4 4 2 4 2 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-248 Tighten the bolt (M4) and hold the unit while the power supply/interface circuit is opened. 4 Step 4 Remove the motor.

[Starboard side] Remove the two bolts (M10). I/F M10 2 4-249 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure

[Starboard side] Remove the two bolts (M10) and remove the motor towards the front. M10 2 Apply grease, in advance, on the gear of the motor to be replaced. Tighten the hexagon head bolts with the proper torque (380 kgf.cm) to guarantee tightening them and not leaving loose bolts. After replacing the motor, close the cover following the disassembly procedure in the reverse order. Finally, set the safety switch to ON and check the operation. Step 5 Operation check After completing the replacement work, turn On the safety switch and follow the steps below to check the operation. 1. Turn On the Display unit. Start transmission and check that the radar image appears without error. Check that the motor does not make any abnormal sound when it starts to rotate, while it is rotating, or when it stops. 2. Open the service engineer menu and initialize the motor rotation time. This completes motor replacement. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-250 4.1.8.6 Motor Driver Circuit (CBD-1949) Replacement/NKE-2632

[Required Tools]

The tools shown in the following table are required for replacement work. No Name Size Appearance Table Required Tools 1 Phillips screwdriver Size #2 2 Open-end wrench*1 Width across flats 3 Socket wrench*1 13 mm (for M8 screws) Width across flats 13 mm (for M8 screws)

*1 Either the wrench (adjustable wrench) or socket wrench is mandatory. (mounting/removing the cover, etc.) Before beginning work, turn Off the safety switch of the radar antenna. Before conducting replacement work, turn Off the circuit breaker for the power supply of the display unit. Exercise care not to lose bolts, screws and other parts removed from the radar antenna, as they will be used again in later steps. Step 1 Remove the cover. Remove the six fall prevention bolts (M8) and remove the cover. M8 6 4-251 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure Step 2 Remove the motor driver circuit board. Remove all the connectors that are connected to the motor driver. Remove the four screws that hold the motor driver unit. NKE-2632 Motor driver circuit 4 Remove the four screws (M4) 4 Port side Step 3 Check the setting of the motor driver circuit. The motor driver applies the 100 V/220 V common circuit. Before commencing replacement, set the power supply of the driver to be replaced according to the power supply specification. Motor Driver Circuit CBD-1949 JP1 SETTING Description 1-2 short-circuit 2-3 short-circuit 100 VAC 220 VAC Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-252 Step 4 Operation check After replacing the motor driver circuit board, turn On the safety switch and follow the steps below to check the operation. 1. Turn On the Display unit. Start transmission and check that the radar image appears without error. Check that the motor does not make any abnormal sound when it starts to rotate, while it is rotating, or when it stops. This completes motor driver circuit replacement. 4-253 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4.1.8.7 Motor Driver Circuit Board (CBD-1950) Replacement/NKE-2632-H

[Required Tools]

The tools shown in the following table are required for replacement work. Table Required Tools No Name Size Appearance 1 Phillips screwdriver Size #2 2 Open-end wrench*1 Width across flats 3 Socket wrench*1 13 mm (for M8 screws) Width across flats 13 mm (for M8 screws)

*1 Either the wrench (adjustable wrench) or socket wrench is mandatory. (mounting/removing the cover, etc.) Before beginning work, turn Off the safety switch of the radar antenna. Before conducting replacement work, turn Off the circuit breaker for the power supply of the display unit. Exercise care not to lose bolts, screws and other parts removed from the radar antenna, as they will be used again in later steps. Step 1 Remove the cover. Remove the six fall prevention bolts (M8) and remove the cover. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-254 M8 6 Step 2 Remove the motor driver circuit board. Remove all the connectors that are connected to the motor driver. Remove the four screws that hold the motor driver unit. HS M5 4 Step 3 Check the setting of the motor driver circuit. The motor driver applies the 100 V/220 V common circuit. Before commencing replacement, set the power supply of the driver to be replaced according to the power supply specification. Motor Driver Circuit CBD-1950 JP1 SETTING Description 1-2 short-circuit 2-3 short-circuit 100 VAC 220 VAC 4-255 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure Step 4 Operation check After replacing the motor driver circuit board, turn On the safety switch and follow the steps below to check the operation. 1. Turn On the Display unit. Start transmission and check that the radar image appears without error. Check that the motor does not make any abnormal sound when it starts to rotate, while it is rotating, or when it stops. This completes motor driver circuit replacement. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-256

 

 

4.1.8.8 Fan Replacement/NKE-2632, NKE-2632-H

[Required Tools]

The tools shown in the following table are required for replacement work. Table Required Tools No Name Size Appearance 1 Phillips screwdriver Size #2 2 Open-end wrench*1 Width across flats 3 Socket wrench*1 13 mm (for M8 screws) Width across flats 13 mm (for M8 screws)

*1 Either the wrench (adjustable wrench) or socket wrench is mandatory. (mounting/removing the cover, etc.) Before beginning work, turn Off the safety switch of the radar antenna. Before conducting replacement work, turn Off the circuit breaker for the power supply of the display unit. Exercise care not to lose bolts, screws and other parts removed from the radar antenna, as they will be used again in later steps. Step 1 Remove the cover. Remove both the left and right covers before replacing the fan. Remove the covers by removing the fall prevention bolts (M8: 6 bolts on one side, 12 bolts on both sides). M8 6 4-257 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure Step 2 Remove the fan unit.

[Starboard side] Remove the connector that connects the fan. Remove the two screws that hold the fan unit. 2 Step 3 Replace the fan. After replacing the fan, install the fan unit following the disassembly procedure in the reverse order and close the cover. Finally, set the safety switch to On and check the operation. Cable position Fan Fan mounting bracket Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-258 Fan orientation Step 4 Operation check After completing the replacement work, turn On the safety switch and check operation by following the procedure below.

(1) Turn On the Display unit and check that radar images are displayed correctly without issuing a fan alarm. This completes fan replacement. 4-259 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4.2 Replacement Procedures for Transmitter-receiver Unit Precautions Follow the precautions below and take care to avoid injury while replacing parts. Before you begin the replacement work, check that the power sources for all of the radar units (if more than one unit is in use) are turned off. As a safety precaution, shut off the main power circuit breaker. Use gloves when working, and take care to avoid injury. In addition, in the interest of safety be careful not to drop tools or parts. Where possible, perform the replacement work when the vessel is in still waters, such as in a harbor. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-260 4.2.1 NTG-3225 Transmitter-receiver Unit 4.2.1.1 Magnetron Replacement/NTG-3225 When replacing magnetrons, make sure to shut off the main power and let the equipment stand for more than 5 minutes to discharge the high-voltage circuit. Failure may result in electric shock. Make sure to take off your watch when your hand must get close to the magnetron. Failure may result in damage to the watch since the magnetron is a strong magnet. Cautions on handling the magnetrons that have been stored for a long period of time Since the magnetrons that have been stored for a long period of time may become unstable at the start of the use due to the occurrence of spark, etc., apply aging by using the following procedure. 1 Extend the preheat period. (Standby: 20 to 30 minutes) 2 Start from the short pulse range and shift to the long pulse range sequentially. If the operation becomes unstable during this period, return to Standby immediately, maintain the status for 5 to 10 minutes and start operation again. Repeat this procedure 4-261 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure

[Required Tools]

The tools shown in the following table are required for replacement work. Table Required Tools Name Size Appearance Flat head screwdriver 6 mm Phillips screwdriver(shielded) Size #2 No 1 2 Before conducting replacement work, turn Off the circuit breaker for the power supply of the display unit. Exercise care not to lose bolts, screws and other parts removed from the radar antenna, as they will be used again in later steps. Step 1 Remove the cover. Loosen the four screws and remove the cover. The screws are slotted captive screws. Use a flat head screwdriver. Loosen the four screws. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-262 Step 2 Remove the tightening metal fitting. Loosen the upset head bolt (one M4 bolt), and slide the tightening metal fitting, located between Modulator the modulator and the circulator, to remove it. The magnetron is installed within the modulator. Tightening metal fitting Tightening metal fitting Remove the screws. Circulator Circulator 4-263 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure Step 3 Remove the screws of the modulation unit and slide the unit. Loosen the inside screws of the modulator (four M4 screws). Removing the outside screws makes it possible to slide the modulator. Tightening metal fitting Modulator Loosen the four inside screws. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-264 Step 4 Remove the modulation unit. Remove the cables connected to the modulator and the screws on the outside of the modulator

(four M4 screws) and slide the modulator to the right to remove it. Modulator Remove the four outside screws. 4-265 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure Step 5 Remove the modulation unit cover. Remove the screws (six M4 screws) and take off the modulator cover. Step 6 Remove the six screws. Replace the magnetron cover. Remove the screws holding the cables (two M4 screws) and the screws holding the magnetron

(four M4 screws) and remove the metal fitting and the magnetron. Be careful to attach the colored cables (yellow and green) to the correct connections on the replacement magnetron. After having replaced the magnetron, reassemble the unit by following the disassembly procedure in the reverse order. Do not forget to tighten the bolts or screws and connect the cables. Use a shielded screwdriver because the contact of the metal tool with the magnetron causes deterioration of its performance. Make sure that the magnetron leads (yellow and green) do not contact and are pulled away from other parts or the casing. Contact may cause them to discharge. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-266 Step 7 Magnetron Remove the two screws. Green cable Yellow cable Remove the four screws. Pulse transformer Green cable Yellow cable Magnetron Operation check After completing the replacement work, turn On the safety switch and check operation by following the procedure below.

(1) Turn On the radar and allow sufficient preheating time (20 to 30 minutes in the STBY mode).

(2) Start transmission on a short pulse range and change the range to the long pulse range. Open the service engineer menu and provisionally adjust the tuning. 4-267 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure Check the magnetron current on the test menu during the time and if operation becomes unstable, bring the radar unit back to STBY mode and restart transmission after allowing for an interval of 5 to 10 minutes.

(3) After transmitting on a long range for about fifteen minutes, return to the service engineer menu and adjust the tuning. Perform the adjustment in the service engineer menu until the tuning display bar on the display unit reaches the 8th calibration mark. With the service engineer menu open, also make sure the magnetron current is shown between the 6th and 9th calibration markings.

(4) Finally, initialize the transmission time in the service engineer menu. This completes magnetron replacement. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-268 4.2.1.2 Modulator Circuit Board (CPA-264) Replacement/NTG-3225

[Required Tools]

The tools shown in the following table are required for replacement work. Table Required Tools Name Size Appearance Flat head screwdriver 6 mm Phillips screwdriver Size #2 No 1 2 Before conducting replacement work, turn Off the circuit breaker for the power supply of the display unit. Exercise care not to lose bolts, screws and other parts removed from the radar antenna, as they will be used again in later steps. Step 1 Remove the cover. Loosen the four screws and remove the cover. The screws are slotted captive screws. Use a flat head screwdriver. Loosen the four screws. 4-269 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure Step 2 Remove the tightening metal fitting. Loosen the upset head bolt (one M4 bolt), and slide the tightening metal fitting, located between Modulator the modulator and the circulator, to remove it. The magnetron is installed within the modulator. Tightening metal fitting Tightening metal fitting Remove the screws. Circulator Circulator Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-270 Step 3 Remove the screws of the modulation unit and slide the unit. Loosen the inside screws of the modulator (four M4 screws). Removing the outside screws makes it possible to slide the modulator. Tightening metal fitting Modulator Loosen the four inside screws. 4-271 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure Step 4 Remove the modulation unit. Remove the cables connected to the modulator and the screws on the outside of the modulator

(four M4 screws) and slide the modulator to the right to remove it. Modulator Remove the four outside screws. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-272 Step 5 Remove the modulation unit cover. Remove the screws (six M4 screws) and take off the modulator cover. Step 6 Remove the six screws. Replace the modulator circuit board. Remove all the cables connected to the modulator circuit board and remove the screws holding the modulator circuit board (six M4 screws) and the screws holding the heat radiation plate (two M4 screws) and remove the modulator circuit board. After having replaced the modulator circuit board, reassemble the unit following the disassembly procedure in the reverse order. Do not forget to tighten the bolts or screws, and make sure that the cables are connected. Remove the two screws. Modulator circuit board Remove the six screws. Disconnect the cables. 4-273 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure Step 7 Operation check After having completed the replacement, check operation by following the procedure below.

(1) Turn On the Display unit. After the countdown is completed, start transmission and check that the radar image appears without error. Transmit the radar wave in long pulse range mode and open the service engineer menu to check that the magnetron current stands between the 5th and 7th calibration markings. This completes modulator circuit board replacement. 4.2.1.3 Modulator (NMA-552) Replacement/NTG-3225 See Section, "Magnetron replacement/NTG-3225". Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-274 4.2.1.4 Power Supply Circuit Board (CBD-1682A) Replacement/NTG-3225

[Required Tools]

The tools shown in the following table are required for replacement work. Table Required Tools Name Size Appearance Flat head screwdriver 6 mm Phillips screwdriver Size #2 No 1 2 Before conducting replacement work, turn Off the circuit breaker for the power supply of the display unit. Exercise care not to lose bolts, screws and other parts removed from the radar antenna, as they will be used again in later steps. Step 1 Remove the cover. Loosen the four screws and remove the cover. The screws are slotted captive screws. Use a flat head screwdriver. Loosen the four screws. 4-275 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure Step 2 Remove the power supply circuit board. After having removed all the cables connected to the power supply circuit board, remove the fixing screws (four M4 screws) and remove the power supply circuit board with the attached heat radiation plate. Step 3 Replace the power supply circuit board Remove the four screws. Remove the fixing screws (nine M4 screws) and remove the power supply circuit board from the heat radiation plate. If the thermal conductive pad on the heat radiation plate is torn, replace it with the sheet that comes with the replacement power supply circuit board. After having replaced the power supply circuit board, reassemble the unit by following the disassembly procedure in the reverse order. Do not forget to tighten the bolts or screws, and make sure that the cables are connected. Thermal conductive pad Remove the nine screws. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-276 Step 4 Operation check After having completed the replacement, turn On the safety switch and check operation by following the procedure below.

(1) Turn On the Display unit. After the countdown is completed, start transmission and check that the radar image is correctly displayed. This completes power supply circuit board replacement. 4-277 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4.2.1.5 T/R Control Circuit Board (CMC-1205R) Replacement

[Required Tools]

The tools shown in the following table are required for replacement work. No Name Size Appearance Table Required Tools Flat head screwdriver 6 mm Phillips screwdriver Size #2 Socket wrench*1 Width across flats 13 mm (for M7 screws) 1 2 3 Before conducting replacement work, turn Off the circuit breaker for the power supply of the display unit. Exercise care not to lose bolts, screws and other parts removed from the radar antenna, as they will be used again in later steps. Step 1 Back up the scanner unit data. Before beginning the replacement procedure, open the service engineer menu of the radar display unit and back up the scanner unit data (transmission time and motor rotation time). Unless backing up this data, it will not be possible to maintain continuity in scanner data such as the magnetron usage time. Step 2 Remove the cover. Loosen the four screws and remove the cover. The screws are slotted captive screws. Use a flat head screwdriver. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-278 Loosen the four screws. Step 3 Remove the cover of the T/R control circuit and replace the circuit. Remove the T/R control circuit board cover (Four M4 screws). Remove the cables connected to the T/R control circuit board and then remove the supports (four 7 mm supports) and the screws

(three M4 screws) and replace the T/R control circuit board. Set the DIP switch and jumper pins of the T/R control circuit board to suit the NTG-3225. After replacing the T/R control circuit board, assemble the unit in the reverse order of the disassembly procedure. Do not forget to tighten the bolts or screws, and make sure that the cables are connected. Remove the four screws. 4-279 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure Step 4 7mm M4 M4 M4 7mm 7mm 7mm T/R control circuit board Operation check After completing the replacement work, turn On the safety switch and check operation by following the procedure below.

(1) Turn On the radar, open the service engineer menu, restore the scanner unit times, and make sure that the data has been correctly continued before/after the T/R control circuit board replacement (check the transmission time and the motor rotation time).

(2) Begin transmission once the countdown is complete and check that the radar image is correctly displayed. This completes T/R control circuit board replacement. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-280 4.2.1.6 Relay Filter Circuit (CSC-656) Replacement/NTG-3225

[Required Tools]

The tools shown in the following table are required for replacement work. No 1 2 Table Required Tools Name Size Appearance Flat head screwdriver 6 mm Phillips screwdriver Size #2 Before conducting replacement work, turn Off the circuit breaker for the power supply of the display unit. Exercise care not to lose bolts, screws and other parts removed from the radar antenna, as they will be used again in later steps. Step 1 Remove the cover. Loosen the four screws and remove the cover. The screws are slotted captive screws. Use a flat head screwdriver. Loosen the four screws. 4-281 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure Step 2 Remove the relay filter circuit board. After having removed all the cables connected to the relay filter circuit board, remove the fixing screws (four M4 screws) and remove the relay filter circuit board together with the metal fitting. Step 3 Replace the relay filter circuit board. Remove the four screws. Remove the screws holding the relay filter circuit board in place (four M4 screws) and replace the relay filter circuit on the metal fitting. After having replaced the relay filter circuit board, reassemble the unit following the disassembly procedure in the reverse order. Do not forget to tighten the screws and connect the cables. Remove the four screws. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-282 Step 4 Operation check After completing the replacement work, turn On the safety switch and check operation by following the procedure below.

(1) Turn On the Display unit. After the countdown is completed, start transmission and check that the radar image appears without error. This completes relay filter circuit board replacement. 4-283 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4.2.1.7 Receiver (NRG-162A) Replacement/NTG-3225

[Required Tools]

The tools shown in the following table are required for replacement work. Table Required Tools No Name Size Appearance Flat head screwdriver 6 mm Phillips screwdriver Size #2 Open-end wrench Width across flats 7 mm (for M4 screws) 1 2 3 Before conducting replacement work, turn Off the circuit breaker for the power supply of the display unit. Exercise care not to lose bolts, screws and other parts removed from the radar antenna, as they will be used again in later steps. Step 1 Remove the cover. Loosen the four screws and remove the cover. The screws are slotted captive screws. Use a flat head screwdriver. Loosen the four screws. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-284 Step 2 Replace the receiving unit. Replace the receiving unit according to the following procedure.

(1) Remove the cable connected to the receiver. (One cable)

(2) Remove the screws holding the metal fitting for the receiver. (Three screws)

(3) Loosen the screws on the metal fitting holding the receiver. (Two screws)

(4) Remove the metal fitting. (One fitting)

(5) Remove the screws on the receiver flange. (Three screws in the back) Receiver (NRG-162A) 4-285 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure

(3) Loosen the two screws.

(5) Remove the flange screws

(three screws in the back)

(2) Remove the three screws.

(4) Remove the metal fitting. After having replaced the receiver, reassemble the unit by following the disassembly procedure in the reverse order. Do not forget to tighten the bolts or screws, and make sure that the cables are connected. Step 3 Operation check After having completed the replacement, turn On the safety switch and check operation by following the procedure below.

(1) Turn On the Display unit. After the countdown is completed, start transmission and check that the radar image appears without error. Transmit the radar wave in the long range mode and open the service engineer menu to perform tuning adjustment. With the service engineer menu open, also make sure the magnetron current is shown between the 8th and 10th calibration markings. This completes receiving unit replacement. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-286 4.2.2 NTG-3230 Scanner Unit 4.2.2.1 Magnetron Replacement/NTG-3230 When replacing magnetrons, make sure to shut off the main power and let the equipment stand for more than 5 minutes to discharge the high-voltage circuit. Failure may result in electric shock. Make sure to take off your watch when your hand must get close to the magnetron. Failure may result in damage to the watch since the magnetron is a strong magnet. Cautions on handling the magnetrons that have been stored for a long period of time Since the magnetrons that have been stored for a long period of time may become unstable at the start of the use due to the occurrence of spark, etc., apply aging by using the following procedure. 1 Extend the preheat period. (Standby: 20 to 30 minutes) 2 Start from the short pulse range and shift to the long pulse range sequentially. If the operation becomes unstable during this period, return to Standby immediately, maintain the status for 5 to 10 minutes and start operation again. Repeat this procedure 4-287 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure

[Required Tools]

The tools shown in the following table are required for replacement work. Table Required Tools Name Size Appearance Flat head screwdriver 6 mm Phillips screwdriver(shielded) Size #2, Size #3 No 1 2 Before conducting replacement work, turn Off the circuit breaker for the power supply of the display unit. Exercise care not to lose bolts, screws and other parts removed from the radar antenna, as they will be used again in later steps. Step 1 Remove the cover. Loosen the four screws and remove the cover. The screws are slotted captive screws. Use a flat head screwdriver. Loosen the four screws. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-288 Step 2 Remove the modulation unit cover. Remove the screws (six M4 screws) and slide the modulator cover to the right to remove it. Step 3 Modulator cover Loosen the six screws. Replace the magnetron cover. Remove the screws holding the cables (two M4 screws) and the bolts holding the magnetron

(eight M6 screws) and remove the metal fitting and the magnetron. Be careful to attach the colored cables (yellow and green) to the correct connections on the replacement magnetron. After having replaced the magnetron, reassemble the unit by following the disassembly procedure in the reverse order. Do not forget to tighten the bolts or screws and connect the cables. Use a shielded screwdriver because the contact of the metal tool with the magnetron causes deterioration of its performance. Make sure that the magnetron leads (yellow and green) do not contact and are pulled away from other parts or the casing. Contact may cause them to discharge. 4-289 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure Modulator Yellow cable Remove the two screws. Green cable Remove the eight bolts. Magnetron Yellow cable Green cable Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-290 Step 4 Operation check After completing the replacement work, turn On the safety switch and check operation by following the procedure below.

(1) Turn On the radar and allow sufficient preheating time (20 to 30 minutes in the STBY mode).

(2) Start transmission on a short pulse range and change the range to the long pulse range. Open the service engineer menu and provisionally adjust the tuning. Check the magnetron current on the test menu during the time and if operation becomes unstable, bring the radar unit back to STBY mode and restart transmission after allowing for an interval of 5 to 10 minutes.

(3) After transmitting on a long range for about fifteen minutes, return to the service engineer menu and adjust the tuning. Perform the adjustment in the service engineer menu until the tuning display bar on the display unit reaches the 8th calibration mark. With the service engineer menu open, also make sure the magnetron current is shown between the 6th and 9th calibration markings.

(4) Finally, initialize the transmission time in the service engineer menu. This completes magnetron replacement. 4-291 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4.2.2.2 Modulator Circuit Board (CPA-264) Replacement/NTG-3230

[Required Tools]

The tools shown in the following table are required for replacement work. Table Required Tools Name Size Appearance Flat head screwdriver 6 mm Phillips screwdriver(shielded) Size #2 No 1 2 Before conducting replacement work, turn Off the circuit breaker for the power supply of the display unit. Exercise care not to lose bolts, screws and other parts removed from the radar antenna, as they will be used again in later steps. Step 1 Remove the cover. Loosen the four screws and remove the cover. The screws are slotted captive screws. Use a flat head screwdriver. Loosen the four screws. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-292 Step 2 Replace the modulator circuit board. Remove all the cables connected to the modulator circuit board and remove the screws holding the modulator circuit board (six M4 screws) and the screws holding the heat radiation plate (two M4 screws) and remove the modulator circuit board. After having replaced the modulator circuit board, reassemble the unit by following the Modulator circuit board Remove the two cables. disassembly procedure in the reverse order. Do not forget to tighten the bolts or screws, and make sure that the cables are connected. Step 3 Operation check Remove the two screws. Remove the six screws. After having completed the replacement, check operation by following the procedure below.

(1) Turn On the Display unit. After the countdown is completed, start transmission and check that the radar image appears without error. Transmit the radar wave in long pulse range mode and open the service engineer menu to check that the magnetron current stands between the 5th and 7th calibration markings. This completes modulator circuit board replacement. 4-293 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4.2.2.3 Modulator (NMA-553) Replacement/NTG-3230

[Required Tools]

The tools shown in the following table are required for replacement work. Table Required Tools No Name Size Appearance Flat head screwdriver 6 mm Phillips screwdriver Size #2 Open-end wrench Width across flats 7 mm (for M4 screws) 1 2 3 Before conducting replacement work, turn Off the circuit breaker for the power supply of the display unit. Exercise care not to lose bolts, screws and other parts removed from the radar antenna, as they will be used again in later steps. Step 1 Remove the cover. Loosen the four screws and remove the cover. The screws are slotted captive screws. Use a flat head screwdriver. Loosen the four screws. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-294 Step 2 Remove the modulation unit cover. Remove the screws (six M4 screws) and slide the modulator cover to the right to remove it. Step 3 Modulator cover Loosen the six screws. Replace the magnetron cover. Remove the screws holding the cables (two M4 screws) and the bolts holding the magnetron

(eight M6 screws) and remove the metal fitting and the magnetron. Modulator Yellow cable Remove the two screws. Green cable Remove the eight bolts. Magnetron 4-295 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure Step 4 Replace the modulation unit. Remove all the cables that are connected to the modulation circuit and remove the three screws

(M4) that hold the modulation unit. Remove Remove the three screws (M4) that hold the modulation unit outside of the transmitter-receiver unit and the two bolts inside of the modulation unit. Remove Remove Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-296 Remove the modulation unit together with the plate and replace the modulation unit. After replacing the modulation unit, reassemble the unit following the disassemble procedure in the reverse order. Make sure that there are no omissions of magnetron installation, bolt tightening, and cable connection. Step 5 Operation check After having completed the replacement, check operation by following the procedure below.

(1) Turn On the Display unit. After the countdown is completed, start transmission and check that the radar image appears without error. Transmit the radar wave in long pulse range mode and open the service engineer menu to check that the magnetron current stands between the 5th and 7th calibration markings. This completes modulation unit replacement. 4-297 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4.2.2.4 Power Supply Circuit Board (CBD-1682A) Replacement/NTG-3230

[Required Tools]

The tools shown in the following table are required for replacement work. Table Required Tools Name Size Appearance Flat head screwdriver 6 mm Phillips screwdriver(shielded) Size #2 No 1 2 Exercise care not to lose bolts, screws and other parts removed from the radar antenna, as they will be used again in later steps. Step 1 Remove the cover. Loosen the four screws and remove the cover. The screws are slotted captive screws. Use a flat head screwdriver. Loosen the four screws. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-298 Step 2 Remove the power supply circuit board. After having removed all the cables connected to the power supply circuit board, remove the Remove the four screws. fixing screws (four M4 screws) and remove the power supply circuit board with the attached heat radiation plate. Step 3 Replace the power supply circuit board Remove the fixing screws (nine M4 screws) and remove the power supply circuit board from the heat radiation plate. If the thermal conductive pad on the heat radiation plate is torn, replace it with the sheet that comes with the replacement power supply circuit board. After having replaced the power supply circuit board, reassemble the unit by following the disassembly procedure in the reverse order. Do not forget to tighten the bolts or screws, and make sure that the cables are connected. Thermal conductive pad 4-299 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure Remove the nine screws. Step 4 Operation check After having completed the replacement, turn On the safety switch and check operation by following the procedure below.

(1) Turn On the Display unit. After the countdown is completed, start transmission and check that the radar image is correctly displayed. This completes power supply circuit board replacement. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-300 4.2.2.5 T/R Control Circuit Board (CMC-1205R) Replacement/NTG-3230

[Required Tools]

The tools shown in the following table are required for replacement work. Table Required Tools Name Size Appearance Flat head screwdriver 6 mm Phillips screwdriver(shielded) Size #2 No 1 2 Before conducting replacement work, turn Off the circuit breaker for the power supply of the display unit. Exercise care not to lose bolts, screws and other parts removed from the radar antenna, as they will be used again in later steps. Step 1 Back up the scanner unit data. Before beginning the replacement procedure, open the service engineer menu of the radar display unit and back up the scanner unit data (transmission time and motor rotation time). If you do not back up this data, it will not be possible to maintain continuity in scanner data such as the magnetron usage time Step 2 Remove the cover. Loosen the four screws and remove the cover. The screws are slotted captive screws. Use a flat head screwdriver. 4-301 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure Step 3 Loosen the four screws. Replace the T/R control circuit board. Remove the cables connected to the T/R control circuit board and the screws (seven M4 screws) and replace the T/R control circuit board. Set the DIP switch and jumper pins of the T/R control circuit board to suit the NTG-3230. T/R control circuit board After replacing the T/R control circuit board, assemble the unit in the reverse order of the disassembly procedure. Do not forget to tighten the bolts or screws, and make sure that the cables are connected. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-302 Step 4 Remove the seven screws. M4 M4 M4 M4 Operation check M4 M4 M4 After completing the replacement work, turn On the safety switch and check operation by following the procedure below.

(1) Turn On the radar, open the service engineer menu, restore the scanner unit times, and make sure that the data has been correctly continued before/after the T/R control circuit board replacement (check the transmission time and the motor rotation time).

(2) Begin transmission once the countdown is complete and check that the radar image is correctly displayed. This completes T/R control circuit board replacement. 4-303 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4.2.2.6 Relay Filter Circuit Board (CSC-656) Replacement/NTG-3230

[Required Tools]

The tools shown in the following table are required for replacement work. Table Required Tools Name Size Appearance Flat head screwdriver 6 mm Phillips screwdriver(shielded) Size #2 No 1 2 Before conducting replacement work, turn Off the circuit breaker for the power supply of the display unit. Exercise care not to lose bolts, screws and other parts removed from the radar antenna, as they will be used again in later steps. Step 1 Remove the cover. Loosen the four screws and remove the cover. The screws are slotted captive screws. Use a flat head screwdriver. Loosen the four screws. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-304 Step 2 Remove the relay filter circuit board. After having removed all the cables connected to the relay filter circuit board, remove the fixing screws (four M4 screws) and remove the relay filter circuit board together with the metal fitting. Step 3 Remove the relay filter circuit board. Remove the four screws. Remove the screws holding the relay filter circuit board in place (four M4 screws) and replace the relay filter circuit board on the metal fitting. After having replaced the relay filter circuit board, reassemble the unit following the disassembly procedure in the reverse order. Do not forget to tighten the bolts or screws, and make sure that the cables are connected. Remove the four screws. 4-305 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure Step 4 Operation check After completing the replacement work, turn On the safety switch and check operation by following the procedure below.

(1) Turn On the Display unit. After the countdown is completed, start transmission and check that the radar image appears without error. This completes relay filter circuit board replacement. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-306

 

 

4.2.2.7 Receiver (NRG-229) Replacement/NTG-3230

[Required Tools]

The tools shown in the following table are required for replacement work. Table Required Tools No Name Size Appearance Flat head screwdriver 6 mm Phillips screwdriver Size #2, Size #3 Open-end wrench Width across flats 17 mm (for M10 screws) 1 2 3 Before conducting replacement work, turn Off the circuit breaker for the power supply of the display unit. Exercise care not to lose bolts, screws and other parts removed from the radar antenna, as they will be used again in later steps. Step 1 Remove the cover. Loosen the four screws and remove the cover. The screws are slotted captive screws. Use a flat head screwdriver. Loosen the four screws. 4-307 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure Step 2 Replace the receiving unit. Replace the receiver unit according to the following procedure.

(1) Remove the cables connected to the receiver. (Two cables)

(2) Remove all the screws on the metal fitting. (Four screws)

(3) Remove all the screws from the flange. (Three screws)

(4) Remove the hexagonal flange support. (One support)

(5) After having replaced the receiver, reassemble the unit by following the disassembly procedure in the reverse order. Do not forget to tighten the bolts or screws, and do not forget to reconnect the cables. NRG-229

(4) Remove the hexagonal flange support. (One support)

(3) Remove all the screws from the flange. (Three screws)

(2) Remove all the screws on the metal fitting. (Four screws)

(1) Remove the two cables. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-308 Step 3 Operation check After having completed the replacement, turn On the safety switch and check operation by following the procedure below.

(1) Turn On the Display unit. After the countdown is completed, start transmission and check that the radar image appears without error. Transmit the radar wave in the long range mode and open the service engineer menu to perform tuning adjustment. With the service engineer menu open, also make sure the magnetron current is shown between the 8th and 10th calibration markings. This completes receiving unit replacement. 4-309 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-310 4.3 Replacement Procedures for Display Unit Precautions Replace the parts by strictly following the precautions below. Before conducting parts replacement work, always be sure that the power to all the Display units (in case a multiple number of Display Units are installed) is OFF. Furthermore, turn OFF the circuit breaker of the main power supply to assure safety. While in work, be sure to wear gloves to prevent injury. Conduct work in a less quaking condition as mus as possible, such as at a port. Before conducting inspection and parts replacement, be sure to always turn OFF the main power supply. Not turning OFF the main power supply may lead to electric shock and failure. When replacing the LCD, be sure to do it with at least two persons. If only one person does this work, he/she may drop the LCD, resulting in injury. After the main power supply is turned OFF, high voltage remains temporarily, so never touch the inverter circuit of the LCD with bear hands. Doing so may cause electric shock. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-310 Checking Each Type of Unit JMR-9200 Series/JAN-9201/JAN-9202 Standard equipment Stand alone type NCM-928 Control Unit NDC-1590 CENTRAL CONTROL UNIT

(CCU) NBD-913 POWER SUPPLY UNIT

(PSU) NCE-5605 TRACKBALL OPERATION UNIT

(TOPU) Desktop type NCM-928 Control Unit NDC-1590 CENTRAL CONTROL UNIT

(CCU) NBD-913 POWER SUPPLY UNIT

(PSU) NCE-5605 TRACKBALL OPERATION UNIT

(TOPU) Select equipment NCE-5625 KEYBOARD OPERATION UNIT

(KOPU) or or CWB-1593 LARGE TRAY Option equipment CWA-246 26inch DISPLAY UNIT MOUNT KIT CWB-1595 26inch Desktop Frame CWB-1596 OPU Desktop Frame Desktop type cable CML-901-F DISPLAY UNIT INTERCONNECTION(F) NWZ-208 26inch MONITOR UNIT

(26 inch MNU) NWZ-208-TP 26inch TOUCH PANEL MONITOR UNIT

(26 inch T.P. MNU) NQE-1143 JUNCTION BOX

(JB) NQA-2443 SENSOR LAN SWITCH UNIT QUINT-PS/1AC/24DC/20 QUINT-BAT/24DC/3.4AH QUINT-DC-UPS/24DC/20 ME-MAX-NEF/QUINT20 UPS 4-311 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure JMR-7200 Series/JAN-7201/JAN-7202 Standard equipment Stand alone type NCM-928 Control Unit NDC-1590 CENTRAL CONTROL UNIT

(CCU) NBD-913 POWER SUPPLY UNIT

(PSU) NCE-5605 TRACKBALL OPERATION UNIT

(TOPU) Desktop type NCM-928 Control Unit NDC-1590 CENTRAL CONTROL UNIT

(CCU) NBD-913 POWER SUPPLY UNIT

(PSU) NCE-5605 TRACKBALL OPERATION UNIT

(TOPU) Select equipment NCE-5625 KEYBOARD OPERATION UNIT

(KOPU) or or CWB-1593 LARGE TRAY Option equipment CWA-245 19inch DISPLAY UNIT MOUNT KIT CWB-1594 19inch Desktop Frame CWB-1596 OPU Desktop Frame Desktop type cable CML-901-F DISPLAY UNIT INTERCONNECTION(F) NWZ-207 19inch MONITOR UNIT

(19 inch MNU) NWZ-207-TP 19inch TOUCH PANEL MONITOR UNIT

(19 inch T.P. MNU) NQE-1143 JUNCTION BOX

(JB) NQA-2443 SENSOR LAN SWITCH UNIT QUINT-PS/1AC/24DC/20 QUINT-BAT/24DC/3.4AH QUINT-DC-UPS/24DC/20 ME-MAX-NEF/QUINT20 UPS Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-312 Checking Various Types of Interface Boards The NQE-1143 junction box (JB) consists of interface boards in accordance with its suffix. There are the following types of interface boards. Interface board CMH-2370(PC810) Serial LAN Interface Circuit(SLC) CMJ-560(PC840) Analog Option Circuit(AOC) CMJ-554(PC820) Gyro Interface Circuit(GIF) CQD-2273(PC830) Radar Interface Circuit(RIF) Fig. 1 External Views of Interface Boards Table -1 Definitions of Leg Numbers of the Junction Board Model Names Suffix

-R

-S

-SR

-SS

-GR

-SAR

-SA

-SGR

-SAGR

-SG

-SAG

-SAS Thus, if the model name of the junction box is "NQE-1143-SAGR," it indicates that the junction box consists of a serial LAN interface circuit (SLC), an analog option circuit (AOC), a gyro interface circuit (GIF), and a radar interface (RIF). 4-313 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4.3.1 26 Inch Monitor Unit: MNU NWZ-208 4.3.1.1 Replacing the 26 Inch MNU: NWZ-208

[Required Tools]

The tools shown in the following table are required for replacement work. Table Required Tools Size Appearance No. 1 Name Flat head screwdriver 2 mm, 6 mm 2 Phillips screwdriver Size #2, Size #3 3 Diagonal pliers 4 Cable-tie *1

*1 A number of cable-ties may be required. Before conducting replacement work, turn OFF the circuit breaker for the power supply of the display unit. Do not lose the screws as they will be needed again. To prevent damage to the Unit during the replacement work, cut off cable-ties that fasten the cable of the unit beforehand. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-314 Step 1 Remove the back cover of the monitor. Remove the screws (M5: 2 locations, M3: 4 locations) on the back of the monitor and then remove the back cover. Step 2 Remove all the cables. Remove the DVI cables and the DC power cable on the back of the monitor. Remove the USB cable if the monitor uses one. Before conducting Unit replacement work, always be sure that every cable-tie that fastens the cable has been removed. Replacement work without the above may lead Unit/cable breakage. 4-315 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure Remove the top and bottom screw covers of the monitor. Step 3 Using a 2 mm flat head screwdriver, remove the top and bottom screw covers of the monitor. The top and bottom screw covers are fastened with a total of six stoppers. Insert a flat head screwdriver into the driver insertion mouths at both edges and remove each cover by raising the cover from the edges little by little. If you try to remove the covers by force, it may damage the monitor or break the screw covers, so be careful. Do not damage the screw covers while removing them. Hold down each screw cover near the stoppers, slowly apply force in the vertical direction to eliminate flexure as much as possible, and then remove the cover. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-316 Step 4 Change the monitor. Remove the screws that fasten the monitor and change the monitor. 26 inch: M5 at 10 locations After replacing the monitor, assemble to the original condition by repeating the same procedure in the reverse order. Please make sure to tighten all the screws and connect all the cables back in place. 4-317 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure Step 5 Check operation. After monitor replacement is completed, turn ON the circuit breaker for the power supply of the display unit and check the operation as follows.

(1) Turn ON the power to the display unit and make sure that screen display is normal. Adjust brightness and make sure that brightness changes.

(2) Referring to "7.2.2 Checking the Condition of the Screen [Monitor Test]," check the screen display to make sure that there is no problem. This completes monitor replacement. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-318 4.3.1.2 Replacing the 26 Inch MNU Replacement FAN Kit:

7ZYNA4005

[Required Tools]

The tools shown in the following table are required for replacement work. No. 1 Phillips screwdriver Name Table Required Tools Size Appearance Size #2 Before conducting replacement work, turn OFF the circuit breaker for the power supply of the display unit. Do not lose the screws as they will be needed again. Step 1 Remove the two fan covers on the back of the monitor. Remove the two fan covers on the back of the 26 inch monitor (M3: total of 8 locations). Step 2 Change the fans. Disconnect the connectors of the fans. Remove the screws (M3: 4 locations) that fasten each fan and change the fans. Install the fans so that the air flows to the exhaust direction (coming out of the monitor). 4-319 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure Be careful with the fan mounting direction. Be sure to install the fans so that the air flows out of the the monitor. Have enough clearance to prevent the cables from being caught in the blades of the fans. After replacing the fans, assemble to the original condition by repeating the same procedure in the reverse order. Please make sure to tighten all the screws and connect all the cables back in place. Step 3 Check operation. After monitor fan replacement is completed, turn ON the circuit breaker for the power supply of the display unit and check the operation as follows.

(3) Turn ON the power to the display unit and make sure that screen display is normal. Adjust brightness and make sure that brightness changes.

(4) Check that the fan error " LCD (FAN #n)" does not occur.

(5) Referring to "7.2.2 Checking the Condition of the Screen [Monitor Test]," check the screen display to make sure that there is no problem. This completes monitor fan replacement. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-320 4.3.2 19 Inch Monitor Unit: MNU NWZ-207 4.3.2.1 Replacing the 19 Inch MNU: NWZ-207

[Required Tools]

The tools shown in the following table are required for replacement work. Table Required Tools Name Size Appearance No. 1 Flat head screwdriver 2 mm, 6 mm 2 Phillips screwdriver Size #1, Size #2 3 Diagonal pliers 4 Cable-tie *1

*1 A number of cable-ties may be required. Before conducting replacement work, turn OFF the circuit breaker for the power supply of the display unit. Do not lose the screws as they will be needed again. To prevent damage to the Unit during the replacement work, cut off cable-ties that fasten the cable of the unit beforehand. 4-321 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure Step 1 Remove the back cover of the monitor. Remove the screws (M5: 2 locations, M3: 3 locations) on the back of the monitor and then remove the back cover. Step 2 Remove all the cables. Remove the DVI cables and the DC power cable on the back of the monitor. Remove the USB cable if the monitor uses one. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-322 Before conducting Unit replacement work, always be sure that every cable-tie that fastens the cable has been removed. Replacement work without the above may lead Unit/cable breakage. Step 3 Remove the top and bottom screw covers of the monitor. Using a 4 mm width flat head screwdriver, remove the top and bottom screw covers of the monitor. The top and bottom screw covers are fastened with six stoppers and seven stoppers, respectively. Insert a flat head screwdriver into the driver insertion slots at both edges and remove each cover by raising the cover from the edges little by little. If you try to remove the covers by force, it may damage the monitor or break the screw covers, so be careful. Do not damage the screw covers while removing them. Hold down each screw cover near the stoppers, slowly apply force in the vertical direction to eliminate flexure as much as possible, and then remove the cover Remove 4-323 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure Step 4 Change the monitor. Remove the screws that fasten the monitor and change the monitor. 19 inch: M5 at 6 locations After replacing the monitor, assemble to the original condition by repeating the same procedure in the reverse order. Please make sure to tighten all the screws and connect all the cables back in place. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-324 Step 5 Check operation. After monitor replacement is completed, turn ON the circuit breaker for the power supply of the display unit and check the operation as follows.

(1) Turn ON the power to the display unit and make sure that screen display is normal. Adjust brightness and make sure that brightness changes.

(2) Referring to "7.2.2 Checking the Condition of the Screen [Monitor Test]," check the screen display to make sure that there is no problem. This completes monitor replacement. 4-325 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4.3.2.2 Replacing the 19 Inch MNU Replacement FAN Kit:

7ZYNA4004

[Required Tools]

The tools shown in the following table are required for replacement work. Table Required Tools No. 1 Phillips screwdriver Name Size Size #1, Size #2 Appearance Before conducting replacement work, turn OFF the circuit breaker for the power supply of the display unit. Do not lose the screws as they will be needed again. Step 1 Remove the fan cover on the back of the monitor. Remove the fan cover on the back of the 19 inch monitor (M3: total of 4 locations). Step 2 Change the fan. Disconnect the connector of the fan. Remove the screws (M4: 4 locations) that fasten the fan and change the fan. Install the fan so that the air flows to the exhaust direction (coming out of the monitor). Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-326 Be careful with the fan mounting direction. Be sure to install the fan so that the air flows out of the monitor. Have enough clearance to prevent the cables from being caught in the blades of the fan. Connector Fan After replacing the fans, assemble to the original condition by repeating the same procedure in the reverse order. Please make sure to tighten all the screws and connect all the cables back in place. Step 3 Checking operation After monitor fan replacement is completed, turn ON the circuit breaker for the power supply of the display unit and check the operation as follows.

(1) Turn ON the power to the display unit and make sure that screen display is normal. Adjust brightness and make sure that brightness changes.

(2) Check that the fan error "LCD (FAN #n)" does not occur.

(3) Referring to "7.2.2 Checking the Condition of the Screen [Monitor Test]," check the screen display to make sure that there is no problem. This completes monitor fan replacement. 4-327 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4.3.3 Central Control Unit: CCU NDC-1590 4.3.3.1 Cleaning the Vents of the CCU

[Required Tools]

The tools shown in the following table are required for replacement work. Table Required Tools Name Size Appearance No. 1 Flat head screwdriver 6 mm 2 Phillips screwdriver Size #2 3 Diagonal pliers 4 Cable-tie *1 5 Soft dry cloth

*1 A number of cable-ties may be required. Before conducting replacement work, turn OFF the circuit breaker for the power supply of the display unit. Do not lose the screws as they will be needed again. To prevent damage to the Unit during the replacement work, cut off cable-ties that fasten the cable of the unit beforehand. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-328 Step 1 Remove the front cover of the display unit mount kit. Loosen the screws that fasten the front cover of the display unit mount kit with a flat head screwdriver and then take out the front cover. Step 2 Remove the CCU from the display unit mount kit. Remove all the cables being connected to the front of the CCU. Remove the screws (M5: 2 locations) of the mounting plate that fasten the CCU, pull out the CCU together with the mounting plate, and then remove it from the display unit mount kit. 4-329 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure Step 3 Before conducting Unit replacement work, always be sure that every cable-tie that fastens the cable has been removed. Replacement work without the above may lead Unit/cable breakage. Clean the vents in the upper part of the CCU. Clean the vents in the upper part of the CCU with a soft dry cloth. After cleaning the vents, reinstall the CCU by repeating the same procedure in the reverse order. Please make sure to tighten all the screws and connect all the cables back in place. Step 4 Checking operation After cleaning is completed, turn ON the circuit breaker for the power supply of the display unit and check the operation as follows.

(1) Turn ON the display unit and start the MFD application. Check that there is no problem in its operation and processing. This completes the cleaning of the vents of the CCU. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-330 4.3.3.2 Replacing with the CCU Repair Kit: NZC-1590

[Required Tools]

The tools shown in the following table are required for replacement work. Table Required Tools No. Name Size Appearance 1 Flat head screwdriver 6 mm 2 Phillips screwdriver Size #2 3 Diagonal pliers 4 Cable-tie *1 5 USB flash drive *2 1 GB or more

*1

*2 A number of cable-ties may be required. Do not use Flash drives which are password protected or encrypted. Before conducting replacement work, turn OFF the circuit breaker for the power supply of the display unit. Do not lose the screws as they will be needed again. To prevent damage to the Unit during the replacement work, cut off cable-ties that fasten the cable of the unit beforehand. Since The Initial Setting Tool is an auto-run application, be sure that connect your USB flash drive before turning on the power. For the details that how to obtain the data files for CCU Repair Kit replacement, please contact our head office or a nearby branch or local office beforehand. 4-331 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure

[The flowchart of CCU Repair Kit replacement work]

The flowchart of CCU Repair Kit replacement work is shown below. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-332 Step 1 From nearby JRC sales department, receive the data files for CCU Repair Kit replacement. From JRC head office, or a nearby branch or local office, receive the following four items for replacement. 1. The Initial setteing tool 2. The latest MFD application 3. Corresponding Licence file 4. Ships equipment information These data files must be saved into your USB flash drive, and brought to the ship at the replacement work. Step 2 For the details that how to obtain those data files for CCU replacement, please contact our head office or a nearby branch or local office beforehand. The USB flash drives which are password protected or encrypted are not available in this work. Turn off the Display Unit and remove the front cover of the display unit mount kit. Turn off the Display Unit. Loosen the screws that fasten the front cover of the display unit mount kit with a flat head screwdriver and then take out the front cover. 4-333 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure Step 3 Remove the CCU from the display unit mount kit. Remove all the cables being connected to the front of the CCU. Remove the screws (M5: 2 locations) of the mounting plate that fasten the CCU, pull out the CCU together with the mounting plate, and then remove it from the display unit mount kit. Before conducting Unit replacement work, always be sure that every cable-tie that fastens the cable has been removed. Replacement work without the above may lead Unit/cable breakage. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-334 Step 4 Remove the CCU from the mounting plate. Remove the screws (M4: 4 locations) of the mounting plate and pull out the CCU from the mounting plate. Step 5 Remove the CCU cover. Remove the screws (M4: 6 locations) that fasten the CCU cover and then take it out. 4-335 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure Step 6 Remove the screws that fasten the upper base. Remove the screws (M4: 7 locations) that fasten the upper base. Loosen the screws (M4: 4 locations) of both ends. Step 7 Remove the upper base. Slide the upper base to tilt and disconnect the cables. Then, remove the upper base. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-336 Step 8 Insert HASP and e-Token. Remove the HASP and the e-Token being connected to the upper base of the NDC-1590 and insert them into the corresponding connectors on the upper base of the NZC-1590 CCU Repair Kit. Then, fasten them with cable-ties. The color of the HASP is green. The color of the e-Token is blue with a JEPPESEN company tag which is written the System ID. Insert both the HASP and the e-Token securely all the way to the roots. When fastening them, be sure to fasten securely so that there is no looseness. Be aware not to insert the HASP and the e-Token into wrong connectors. The appearance of e-Token and HASP may change without notice. 4-337 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure Step 9 Replace with the CCU Repair Kit NZC-1590. When the insert of the HASP and the e-Token are completed, insert the NZC-1590 into the bottom base by repeating the same procedure in the reverse order. Then, install the cover also in the reverse order. Be careful not to forget to insert the cable connectors. No. From To Wire Appearance 2 3 4 5 6 CMH-2406 CQD-2286 J4208 J4304 W42 CMH-2406 CQD-2286 J4207 J4305 W44 DVD drive power DVD drive SATA DVD drive FAN W45 CMH-2406 J4217 CDC-1410 J4104 CDC-1410 J4123 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-338 J4208 J4104 J4217 Use the W42

/ Use the W49

(a) Front rail J4304

(a) Front rail J4123 J4207 Use the W44 J4305 FAN Step 10 Return the assembly into the display unit mount kit. Reinstall the NZC-1590 into the display unit mount kit by repeating the same procedure in the reverse order. Be careful not to forget to insert the cable connectors. Check that Display unit is booting up correctly. Step 11 After CCU Repair Kit replacement is completed, turn ON the circuit breaker for the power supply of the display unit to start up the Display unit. Check that the Display unit boots up correctly. And then, turn off it again. 4-339 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure Run the Initial setting tool . Step 12 Connect your USB flash drive that contains the Initial setting tool and then start up the Display Unit. The Initial setting tool will launch automatically. Carry out initial setting for the Display unit by referring 4.3.3.3 Initial Setting. After initial setting is completed, turn OFF the Display unit and disconnect your USB flash drive. Reconfigure the Display unit Step 13 Recover the C Drive Image. In order to apply the e-Token ID information to OS registry, recover the C Drive Image. Perform system recovery by referring Field Service Manual 5.3 Recovering the C Drive Image. Step 14 Reconfigure the Display Unit. Set it up in accordance with the Licence file which the CCU had.

(RADAR / ECDIS / CONNING / AMS / MFD)

- RADAR

- CHART RADAR

- ECDIS

- CONNING

- AMS

- MFD

: Perform step 14-1, 14-2, 14-3, 14-5 and 14-7.

: Perform step 14-1, 14-2, 14-3, 14-5 and 14-7.

: Perform step 14-1, 14-2, 14-4, 14-5 and 14-7.

: Perform step 14-1, 14-2 and 14-5.

: Perform step 14-1, 14-2 and 14-6.

: Perform all corresponding reconfigure steps by referring the Licence installed. For how to check the Licences installed, refer Instruction Manual 21.1.3.2 Checking

-

statuses of the functions that have been installed the enable/disable Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-340 14-1. Update the MFD application. (All Licence) Update the MFD application to the latest version by referring the following:

-

Field Service Manual 5.1 Updating the Software 14-2. Setup Own Task Station, Network, Serial port, Contact output, etc. of the CCU. (All licence) Installation settings consist of Common setting items and Equipment-specific setting items. Common setting items can be synchronized with the system automatically via SLC. Equipment-specific setting items cannot be synchronized with the system, therefore they need to setup manually. 14-2-1. Common setting items Confirm that SLC is already started up and LAN connection is available. Start the display unit, click [Menu] [Code Input] button and input password 0009. When selected [Menu] [Service] [Installation], the common setting items are synchronized with the system automatically. For the details of common setting items, refer to "Installation Manual 4.43 List of Common Setting Items". In order to synchronize common setting items, make sure that SLC is already started up and LAN connection is available, before starting the display unit. 14-2-2. Equipment-specific setting items

- Settings for Own Task Station Own Task Station setting is placed on the upper side of [System Configuration]

- [Subsystem Installation] dialog. Set up Own Task Station number. And make sure that Own Task Station number is same as Device Installation settings as below. Do not set a duplicated Task Station number and a duplicated IP Address. Otherwise, unintended operation is performed, e.g. sensor data cannot be received. 4-341 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure

- Settings for Serial port on CCU Serial port settings on CCU is placed on the upper side of [System Configuration] - [Serial Port] dialog. Select serial sensor connected with CCU.

- Settings for Contact output on CCU Contact output settings on CCU is placed on the upper side of [System Configuration] - [Contact] dialog. Select contact output function assigned to CCU.

- Settings for Data output

[System Configuration] - [Data Output] dialog is Equipment-specific setting item. Select the output data.

- Settings for Alert

[Setting] - [Alert] dialog is Equipment-specific setting item. When the system assigned watch alarm to CCU and/or SLC, the items need to set up.

- Settings for AC Power Failure

[Setting] - [AC Power Failure] dialog is Equipment-specific setting item. Set up to same as other display unit settings.

- Settings for VDR

[Setting] - [VDR] dialog is Equipment-specific setting item. When the systems connected with the JRC VDR, the items need to set up. Set up to Delay Time that delays the timing of output each task station, e.g. 3 sec. For more information, refer as follows.

-

Installation information at the time of commissioning, which is described in the installation check list Installation Manual 4.4 Subsystem Installation Installation Manual 4.6 Setting up a Serial Port Installation Manual 4.7 Setting Contacts (Contact Input/Output) Installation Manual 4.10 Setting Data Output Installation Manual 4.11 Network Setting Installation Manual 4.14 Setting Alert Installation Manual 4.15 Operation Setting at AC Power Failure (Insufficient AC power supply) Installation Manual 4.17 Setting VDR

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-342 14-3. Initial setup for RADAR. (RADAR Licence) Set up the RADAR by reffering the followings:

-

Installation information at the time of commissioning, which is described in the installation check list Installation Manual 4.10 Setting Data Output Installation Manual 4.16 Setting Interswitch Installation Manual 4.21 Tune Adjustment Installation Manual 4.22 Bearing Adjustment Installation Manual 4.23 Range Adjustment Installation Manual 4.24 Master/Slave Radar Operation Mode Installation Manual 4.25 Setting an Antenna Height Installation Manual 4.26 Tune Peak Adjustment Installation Manual 4.27 Setting a Tune Indicator (tuning indicator level) Installation Manual 4.28 Setting Output BP (Radar Antenna Bearing Pulse Output) Installation Manual 4.29 Performance Monitor Adjustment Installation Manual 4.30 Setting Sector Blank (RADAR Screen Only) Installation Manual 4.31 Setting TNI Blank Installation Manual 4.32 Setting Input BP Count Installation Manual 4.33 Setting Output BP Count Installation Manual 4.34 Echo Noise Level Adjustment Installation Manual 4.35 TT (Target Tracking) Function Adjustment (RADAR Screen Only) Installation Manual 4.36 Adjusting MBS Installation Manual 4.39 RADAR Adjustment (RADAR Screen Only)

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

14-4. Re-install electronic charts. (ECDIS Licence) Re-install the electronic charts for ECDIS by referring the followings:

-

Installation information at the time of commissioning, which is described in the installation check list Additional Manual for Chart Installation 2.1 Importing ENC S-57/S-63 Charts, AVCS Charts and AIO Data Additional Manual for Chart Installation 3.2 Importing ARCS Charts Additional Manual for Chart Installation 4.3 Importing C-MAP Ed.3

-

-

-

14-5. Reconfigure the CONNING Display. (CONNING Licence) Set up the Conning Display by referring the followings:

-

Installation information at the time of commissioning, which is described in the installation check list

- Conning Display Instruction Manual 4-343 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 14-6. Reconfigure the BAMS. (AMS Licence) Set up the BAMS by referring the followings:

-

Installation information at the time of commissioning, which is described in the installation check list BAMS Instruction Manual

-

14-7. Setup for optional Licence. To set up TCS optional Licence, refer the followings: (ECDIS)

-

Installation information at the time of commissioning, which is described in the installation check list Installation Manual 4.12 Redundancy Setting Installation Manual 4.18 Setting Autosail (Automatic Sailing System)

-

-

To set up RADAR Overlay optional Licence, refer the followings: (ECDIS)

-

Installation information at the time of commissioning, which is described in the installation check list Installation Manual 4.4 Subsystem Installation

-

To set up Chart optional Licence, refer the followings: (RADAR)

-

Installation information at the time of commissioning, which is described in the installation check list Additional Manual for Chart Installation 2.1 Importing ENC S-57/S-63 Charts, AVCS Charts and AIO Data Additional Manual for Chart Installation 4.3 Importing C-MAP Ed.3

-

-

ARCS charts are not available in CHART RADAR. Step 15 Check operation. After reconfigure is completed, check the operation as follows.

(1) Start the MFD application. Check that there is no problem in its operation and processing.

(2) Conduct the operational inspection as described in "7.2 Operational Inspection" in Chapter 7, Troubleshooting. This completes CCU Repair Kit replacement. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-344 4.3.3.3 Replacing with the CCU: NDC-1590

[Required Tools]

The tools shown in the following table are required for replacement work. Table Required Tools No. Name Size Appearance 1 Flat head screwdriver 6 mm 2 Phillips screwdriver Size #2 3 Diagonal pliers 4 Cable-tie *1 5 USB flash drive *2 1 GB or more

*1

*2 A number of cable-ties may be required. Do not use Flash drives which are password protected or encrypted. Before conducting replacement work, turn OFF the circuit breaker for the power supply of the display unit. Do not lose the screws as they will be needed again. To prevent damage to the Unit during the replacement work, cut off cable-ties that fasten the cable of the unit beforehand. Since The Initial Setting Tool is an auto-run application, be sure that connect your USB flash drive before turning on the power. For the details that how to obtain the data files for CCU replacement, please contact our head office or a nearby branch or local office beforehand. 4-345 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure

[The flowchart of CCU replacement work]

The flowchart of CCU replacement work is shown below. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-346 Step 1 From nearby JRC sales department, receive the data files for CCU replacement. From JRC head office, or a nearby branch or local office, receive the following four items for replacement. 1. The Initial setteing tool 2. The latest MFD application 3. Corresponding Licence file 4. Ships equipment information These data files must be saved into your USB flash drive, and brought to the ship at the replacement work. Step 2 For the details that how to obtain those data files for CCU replacement, please contact our head office or a nearby branch or local office beforehand. The USB flash drives which are password protected or encrypted are not available in this work. Turn off the Display Unit and remove the front cover of the display unit mount kit. Turn off the Display Unit. Loosen the screws that fasten the front cover of the display unit mount kit with a flat head screwdriver and then take out the front cover. 4-347 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure Step 3 Remove the CCU from the display unit mount kit. Remove all the cables being connected to the front of the CCU. Remove the screws (M5: 2 locations) of the mounting plate that fasten the CCU, pull out the CCU together with the mounting plate, and then remove it from the display unit mount kit. Before conducting Unit replacement work, always be sure that every cable-tie that fastens the cable has been removed. Replacement work without the above may lead Unit/cable breakage. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-348 Step 4 Remove the CCU from the mounting plate. Remove the screws (M4: 4 locations) of the mounting plate and pull out the CCU from the mounting plate. Step 5 Remove the CCU cover. Remove the screws (M4: 6 locations) that fasten the CCU cover and then take it out. 4-349 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure Step 6 Remove the screws that fasten the upper base. Remove the screws (M4: 7 locations) that fasten the upper base. Loosen the screws (M4: 4 locations) of both ends. Step 7 Remove the upper base. Slide the upper base to tilt and disconnect the cables. Then, remove the upper base. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-350 Step 8 Change HASP and e-Token. Replacement the HASP and the e-Token being connected to the upper base of Existing CCU and insert them into the corresponding connectors on the upper base of New CCU. Then, fasten them with cable-ties. The color of the HASP is green. The color of the e-Token is blue with a JEPPESEN company tag which is written the System ID. Be careful not mix up Existing one and New one. Insert both the HASP and the e-Token securely all the way to the roots. When fastening them, be sure to fasten securely so that there is no looseness. Be aware not to insert the HASP and the e-Token into wrong connectors. The appearance of e-Token and HASP may change without notice. 4-351 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure Step 9 Assemble the CCU. When the replacement of the HASP and the e-Token are completed, assemble the CCU by repeating the same procedure in the reverse order. Then, install the cover also in the reverse order. The cover of Existing CCU install to New CCU. Serial number and model name is used for inspection of ships class. Also serial number is used for maintenance service in JRC. Therefore, the cover of Existing CCU install to New CCU. Be careful not to forget to insert the cable connectors. No. From To Wire Appearance 2 3 4 5 6 CMH-2406 CQD-2286 J4208 J4304 W42 CMH-2406 CQD-2286 J4207 J4305 W44 DVD drive power DVD drive SATA DVD drive FAN W45 CMH-2406 J4217 CDC-1410 J4104 CDC-1410 J4123 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-352 J4208 J4104 J4217 Use the W42

/ Use the W49

(a) Front rail J4304

(a) Front rail J4123 J4207 Use the W44 J4305 FAN Step 10 Return the assembly into the display unit mount kit. Reinstall the New CCU into the display unit mount kit by repeating the same procedure in the reverse order. Be careful not to forget to insert the cable connectors. Step 11 Check that Display unit is booting up correctly. After CCU replacement is completed, turn ON the circuit breaker for the power supply of the display unit to start up the Display unit. Check that the Display unit boots up correctly. And then, turn off it again. 4-353 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure Run the Initial setting tool . Step 12 Connect your USB flash drive that contains the Initial setting tool and then start up the Display Unit. The Initial setting tool will launch automatically. Carry out initial setting for the Display unit by referring 4.3.3.3 Initial Setting. After initial setting is completed, turn OFF the Display unit and disconnect your USB flash drive. Reconfigure the Display unit Step 13 Recover the C Drive Image. In order to apply the e-Token ID information to OS registry, recover the C Drive Image. Perform system recovery by referring Field Service Manual 5.3 Recovering the C Drive Image. Step 14 Reconfigure the Display Unit. Set it up in accordance with the Licence file which the CCU had.

(RADAR / ECDIS / CONNING / AMS / MFD)

- RADAR

- CHART RADAR

- ECDIS

- CONNING

- AMS

- MFD

: Perform step 14-1, 14-2, 14-3, 14-5 and 14-7.

: Perform step 14-1, 14-2, 14-3, 14-5 and 14-7.

: Perform step 14-1, 14-2, 14-4, 14-5 and 14-7.

: Perform step 14-1, 14-2 and 14-5.

: Perform step 14-1, 14-2 and 14-6.

: Perform all corresponding reconfigure steps by referring the Licence installed. For how to check the Licences installed, refer Instruction Manual 21.1.3.2 Checking

-

statuses of the functions that have been installed the enable/disable Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-354 14-1. Update the MFD application. (All Licence) Update the MFD application to the latest version by referring the following:

-

Field Service Manual 5.1 Updating the Software 14-2. Setup Own Task Station, Network, Serial port, Contact output, etc. of the CCU. (All licence) Installation settings consist of Common setting items and Equipment-specific setting items. Common setting items can be synchronized with the system automatically via SLC. Equipment-specific setting items cannot be synchronized with the system, therefore they need to setup manually. 14-2-1. Common setting items Confirm that SLC is already started up and LAN connection is available. Start the display unit, click [Menu] [Code Input] button and input password 0009. When selected [Menu] [Service] [Installation], the common setting items are synchronized with the system automatically. For the details of common setting items, refer to "Installation Manual 4.43 List of Common Setting Items". In order to synchronize common setting items, make sure that SLC is already started up and LAN connection is available, before starting the display unit. 14-2-2. Equipment-specific setting items

- Settings for Own Task Station Own Task Station setting is placed on the upper side of [System Configuration]

- [Subsystem Installation] dialog. Set up Own Task Station number. And make sure that Own Task Station number is same as Device Installation settings as below. Do not set a duplicated Task Station number and a duplicated IP Address. Otherwise, unintended operation is performed, e.g. sensor data cannot be received. 4-355 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure

- Settings for Serial port on CCU Serial port settings on CCU is placed on the upper side of [System Configuration] - [Serial Port] dialog. Select serial sensor connected with CCU.

- Settings for Contact output on CCU Contact output settings on CCU is placed on the upper side of [System Configuration] - [Contact] dialog. Select contact output function assigned to CCU.

- Settings for Data output

[System Configuration] - [Data Output] dialog is Equipment-specific setting item. Select the output data.

- Settings for Alert

[Setting] - [Alert] dialog is Equipment-specific setting item. When the system assigned watch alarm to CCU and/or SLC, the items need to set up.

- Settings for AC Power Failure

[Setting] - [AC Power Failure] dialog is Equipment-specific setting item. Set up to same as other display unit settings.

- Settings for VDR

[Setting] - [VDR] dialog is Equipment-specific setting item. When the systems connected with the JRC VDR, the items need to set up. Set up to Delay Time that delays the timing of output each task station, e.g. 3 sec. For more information, refer as follows.

-

Installation information at the time of commissioning, which is described in the installation check list Installation Manual 4.4 Subsystem Installation Installation Manual 4.6 Setting up a Serial Port Installation Manual 4.7 Setting Contacts (Contact Input/Output) Installation Manual 4.10 Setting Data Output Installation Manual 4.11 Network Setting Installation Manual 4.14 Setting Alert Installation Manual 4.15 Operation Setting at AC Power Failure (Insufficient AC power supply) Installation Manual 4.17 Setting VDR

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-356 14-3. Initial setup for RADAR. (RADAR Licence) Set up the RADAR by reffering the followings:

-

Installation information at the time of commissioning, which is described in the installation check list Installation Manual 4.10 Setting Data Output Installation Manual 4.16 Setting Interswitch Installation Manual 4.21 Tune Adjustment Installation Manual 4.22 Bearing Adjustment Installation Manual 4.23 Range Adjustment Installation Manual 4.24 Master/Slave Radar Operation Mode Installation Manual 4.25 Setting an Antenna Height Installation Manual 4.26 Tune Peak Adjustment Installation Manual 4.27 Setting a Tune Indicator (tuning indicator level) Installation Manual 4.28 Setting Output BP (Radar Antenna Bearing Pulse Output) Installation Manual 4.29 Performance Monitor Adjustment Installation Manual 4.30 Setting Sector Blank (RADAR Screen Only) Installation Manual 4.31 Setting TNI Blank Installation Manual 4.32 Setting Input BP Count Installation Manual 4.33 Setting Output BP Count Installation Manual 4.34 Echo Noise Level Adjustment Installation Manual 4.35 TT (Target Tracking) Function Adjustment (RADAR Screen Only) Installation Manual 4.36 Adjusting MBS Installation Manual 4.39 RADAR Adjustment (RADAR Screen Only)

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

14-4. Re-install electronic charts. (ECDIS Licence) Re-install the electronic charts for ECDIS by referring the followings:

-

Installation information at the time of commissioning, which is described in the installation check list Additional Manual for Chart Installation 2.1 Importing ENC S-57/S-63 Charts, AVCS Charts and AIO Data Additional Manual for Chart Installation 3.2 Importing ARCS Charts Additional Manual for Chart Installation 4.3 Importing C-MAP Ed.3

-

-

-

14-5. Reconfigure the CONNING Display. (CONNING Licence) Set up the Conning Display by referring the followings:

-

Installation information at the time of commissioning, which is described in the installation check list

- Conning Display Instruction Manual 4-357 Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 14-6. Reconfigure the BAMS. (AMS Licence) Set up the BAMS by referring the followings:

-

Installation information at the time of commissioning, which is described in the installation check list BAMS Instruction Manual

-

14-7. Setup for optional Licence. To set up TCS optional Licence, refer the followings: (ECDIS)

-

Installation information at the time of commissioning, which is described in the installation check list Installation Manual 4.12 Redundancy Setting Installation Manual 4.18 Setting Autosail (Automatic Sailing System)

-

-

To set up RADAR Overlay optional Licence, refer the followings: (ECDIS)

-

Installation information at the time of commissioning, which is described in the installation check list Installation Manual 4.4 Subsystem Installation

-

To set up Chart optional Licence, refer the followings: (RADAR)

-

Installation information at the time of commissioning, which is described in the installation check list Additional Manual for Chart Installation 2.1 Importing ENC S-57/S-63 Charts, AVCS Charts and AIO Data Additional Manual for Chart Installation 4.3 Importing C-MAP Ed.3

-

-

ARCS charts are not available in CHART RADAR. Step 15 Check operation. After reconfigure is completed, check the operation as follows.

(1) Start the MFD application. Check that there is no problem in its operation and processing.

(2) Conduct the operational inspection as described in "7.2 Operational Inspection" in Chapter 7, Troubleshooting. This completes CCU replacement. Chapter 4 Replacement procedure 4-358